Dell Latitude E6530 English Manuels -> Accéder au site Dell -> Accéder aux CODES PROMO et Bons de réduction Dell -> Voir d'autres manuels Dell Revenir à l'accueil

ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->

 

 

 

Latitude E6530
 
 
 
 
 
Dell Latitude E6530 Owner's Manual    
 
 More Languages
 
 
 
Intel Responsiveness Technologies    
 
 
 
 
Latitude E-Family Re-Image Guide    
 
 
 
 
Setup and Features Information Tech Sheet    
 
 More Languages
 
 
 
Statement of Volatility    
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici

 

Autres manuels :

Dell

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T710-..> 10-May-2013 14:23  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 10-May-2013 14:23  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-UPS-500T-Manuel..> 10-May-2013 14:22  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 10-May-2013 14:22  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-UPS-500- Englis..> 10-May-2013 14:21  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-UPS-500T-Españ..> 10-May-2013 14:20  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-330-Ma..> 10-May-2013 14:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-E..> 10-May-2013 14:20  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T605-..> 10-May-2013 13:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-7330dn-Mono-Las..> 10-May-2013 13:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-X51-M..> 10-May-2013 13:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Comment-utilise..> 10-May-2013 13:41  2.7M 

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 10-May-2013 11:17  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-690-M..> 10-May-2013 11:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 11:16  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-360-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 10-May-2013 11:14  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-450-M..> 10-May-2013 11:13  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:13  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:12  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 10-May-2013 11:12  5.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 10-May-2013 11:10  6.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 10-May-2013 11:10  6.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:30  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M 

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 08-May-2013 10:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:54  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42  3.1M

Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage

Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel

Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation

Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1

Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes

Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme

Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213

Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation

Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL

Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn

Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400

Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n

Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up

Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620

Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION

Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel

Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels

Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel

Dell-Client-Management-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue

Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel

Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel

Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Mobile-Jamz

Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels

Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route

DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK

Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580

Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L

Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu

Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais

Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide

Dell-Inspiron-Manuels

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700

Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280

Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Acceder-au-site-Dell

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais

Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX

Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3

AlienwareAurora-R4

lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2

Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair

Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

DellDimension1100Series

Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire

alienwareX51

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Code-Promo-Dell.htm     04-Feb-2013 09:17  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Sony-NV-U83N-Manuels..> 02-Feb-2013 09:00  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12   92K  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm    29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51  3.3M  

[TXT]

 DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06   12M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R3.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R4.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 alienwareX51.htm        18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  906K 

Dell Latitude E6530 Owner's Manual Regulatory Model: P19F Regulatory Type: P19F001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2012 Dell Inc. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™,ExpressCharge™, Latitude™, Latitude ON™, OptiPlex™, Vostro™, and Wi-Fi Catcher™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino®, and Celeron® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD® is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™, and ATI FirePro™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, the Windows Vista start button, and Office Outlook® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Blu-ray Disc™ is a trademark owned by the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) and licensed for use on discs and players. The Bluetooth® word mark is a registered trademark and owned by the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such mark by Dell Inc. is under license. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc. 2012 - 06 Rev. A00Contents Notes, Cautions, and Warnings...................................................................................................2 1 Working on Your Computer.......................................................................................................7 Before Working Inside Your Computer.....................................................................................................................7 Turning Off Your Computer.......................................................................................................................................8 After Working Inside Your Computer........................................................................................................................8 2 Removing and Installing Components...................................................................................11 Recommended Tools..............................................................................................................................................11 Removing the Secure Digital (SD) Card..................................................................................................................11 Installing the Secure Digital (SD) Card...................................................................................................................11 Removing the ExpressCard.....................................................................................................................................12 Installing the ExpressCard......................................................................................................................................12 Removing the Battery.............................................................................................................................................12 Installing the Battery..............................................................................................................................................13 Removing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card...........................................................................................13 Installing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card............................................................................................13 Removing the Base Cover.......................................................................................................................................13 Installing the Base Cover........................................................................................................................................14 Removing the Keyboard Trim..................................................................................................................................14 Installing the Keyboard Trim...................................................................................................................................15 Removing the Keyboard..........................................................................................................................................15 Installing the Keyboard...........................................................................................................................................17 Removing the Hard Drive........................................................................................................................................17 Installing the Hard Drive.........................................................................................................................................18 Removing the Optical Drive....................................................................................................................................19 Installing the Optical Drive.....................................................................................................................................20 Removing the Memory............................................................................................................................................21 Installing the Memory.............................................................................................................................................21 Removing the Processor.........................................................................................................................................22 Installing the Processor..........................................................................................................................................22 Removing the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Card...................................................................................22 Installing the WLAN Card.......................................................................................................................................23 Removing the Heat Sink..........................................................................................................................................23 Installing the Heat Sink...........................................................................................................................................24 Removing the Bluetooth Card.................................................................................................................................25 Installing the Bluetooth Card..................................................................................................................................26Removing the Modem Card....................................................................................................................................26 Installing the Modem Card.....................................................................................................................................27 Removing the Speakers..........................................................................................................................................28 Installing the Speakers...........................................................................................................................................29 Removing the Coin-Cell Battery..............................................................................................................................29 Installing the Coin-Cell Battery...............................................................................................................................30 Removing the ExpressCard Cage............................................................................................................................30 Installing the ExpressCard Cage.............................................................................................................................31 Removing the Power-Connector Port.....................................................................................................................31 Installing the Power-Connector Port......................................................................................................................32 Removing the Power LED Board.............................................................................................................................32 Installing the Power LED Board..............................................................................................................................33 Removing the Input/Output (I/O) Board..................................................................................................................34 Installing the Input Output (I/O) Board....................................................................................................................34 Removing the Hard-Drive Support Plate.................................................................................................................35 Installing the Hard-Drive Support Plate..................................................................................................................36 Removing the Palmrest...........................................................................................................................................36 Installing the Palmrest............................................................................................................................................38 Removing the WiFi-Switch Board...........................................................................................................................38 Installing the WiFi-Switch Board............................................................................................................................39 Removing the System Board...................................................................................................................................39 Installing the System Board....................................................................................................................................43 Removing the Modem Connector...........................................................................................................................43 Installing the Modem Connector............................................................................................................................45 Removing the Display Assembly.............................................................................................................................45 Installing the Display Assembly..............................................................................................................................47 Removing the Display Bezel...................................................................................................................................48 Installing the Display Bezel.....................................................................................................................................49 Removing the Display Panel...................................................................................................................................49 Installing the Display Panel....................................................................................................................................50 Removing the Display Assembly.............................................................................................................................50 Installing the Display Assembly..............................................................................................................................52 Removing the Display-Hinge Caps..........................................................................................................................53 Installing the Display-Hinge Caps...........................................................................................................................54 Removing the Display Hinges.................................................................................................................................54 Installing the Display Hinges..................................................................................................................................55 Removing the Camera.............................................................................................................................................56 Installing the Camera..............................................................................................................................................57 Removing the LVDS and Camera Cable..................................................................................................................57 Installing the LVDS and Camera Cable...................................................................................................................58 3 Additional Information..............................................................................................................59Docking Port Information........................................................................................................................................59 4 System Setup.............................................................................................................................61 Boot Sequence.......................................................................................................................................................61 Navigation Keys......................................................................................................................................................61 System Setup Options.............................................................................................................................................62 Updating the BIOS .................................................................................................................................................69 System and Setup Password..................................................................................................................................70 Assigning a System Password and Setup Password......................................................................................70 Deleting or Changing an Existing System and/or Setup Password..................................................................71 5 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................73 Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment (ePSA) Diagnostics...............................................................................73 6 Troubleshooting Your Computer.............................................................................................75 Device Status Lights...............................................................................................................................................75 Battery Status Lights..............................................................................................................................................76 7 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................77 8 Contacting Dell .........................................................................................................................8361 Working on Your Computer Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help to ensure your personal safety. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure included in this document assumes that the following conditions exist: • You have performed the steps in Working on Your Computer. • You have read the safety information that shipped with your computer. • A component can be replaced or--if purchased separately--installed by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/ regulatory_compliance CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface, such as a connector on the back of the computer. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. CAUTION: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some cables have connectors with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTE: The color of your computer and certain components may appear differently than shown in this document. To avoid damaging your computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. 1. Ensure that your work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2. Turn off your computer (see Turning Off Your Computer). 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked) such as the optional Media Base or Battery Slice, undock it. CAUTION: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug the cable from the network device. 4. Disconnect all network cables from the computer. 5. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets. 76. Close the display and turn the computer upside-down on a flat work surface. NOTE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the main battery before you service the computer. 7. Remove the main battery. 8. Turn the computer top-side up. 9. Open the display. 10. Press the power button to ground the system board. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the display. CAUTION: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate static electricity, which could harm internal components. 11. Remove any installed ExpressCards or Smart Cards from the appropriate slots. Turning Off Your Computer CAUTION: To avoid losing data, save and close all open files and exit all open programs before you turn off your computer. 1. Shut down the operating system: – In Windows 7: Click Start , then click Shut Down. – In Windows Vista : Click Start , then click the arrow in the lower-right corner of the Start menu as shown below, and then click Shut Down. – In Windows XP: Click Start→ Turn Off Computer → Turn Off . The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process is complete. 2. Ensure that the computer and all attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for about 4 seconds to turn them off. After Working Inside Your Computer After you complete any replacement procedure, ensure you connect any external devices, cards, and cables before turning on your computer. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this particular Dell computer. Do not use batteries designed for other Dell computers. 1. Connect any external devices, such as a port replicator, battery slice, or media base, and replace any cards, such as an ExpressCard. 2. Connect any telephone or network cables to your computer. 8CAUTION: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into the computer. 3. Replace the battery. 4. Connect your computer and all attached devices to their electrical outlets. 5. Turn on your computer. 9102 Removing and Installing Components This section provides detailed information on how to remove or install the components from your computer. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: • Small flat-blade screwdriver • Phillips screwdriver • Small plastic scribe Removing the Secure Digital (SD) Card 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Press in on the SD card to release it from the computer. 3. Slide the SD card out of the computer. Installing the Secure Digital (SD) Card 1. Slide the SD card into its slot until it clicks into place. 2. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. 11Removing the ExpressCard 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Press in on the ExpressCard to release it from the computer. 3. Slide the ExpressCard out of the computer. Installing the ExpressCard 1. Slide the ExpressCard into its slot until it clicks into place. 2. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Battery 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Slide the release latches to unlock the battery and flip the battery out of the computer. 12Installing the Battery 1. Slide the battery into its slot until it clicks into place. 2. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the SIM card from the computer. Installing the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card 1. Slide the SIM card into its slot. 2. Install the battery. 3. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Base Cover 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the screws that secure the base cover to the computer. 133. Lift the base cover to remove it from the computer. Installing the Base Cover 1. Place the base cover to align with the screw holes on the computer. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the base cover to the computer. 3. Install the battery. 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Keyboard Trim 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Using a plastic scribe, pry under the keyboard trim to release it from the computer. 4. Pry the keyboard trim along the sides and bottom. 5. Lift up to remove the keyboard trim from the unit. 14Installing the Keyboard Trim 1. Align the keyboard trim to its compartment. 2. Press along the sides of the keyboard trim until it snaps in place. 3. Install the battery. 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Keyboard 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) keyboard trim 3. Remove the screws that secure the keyboard to computer. 4. Remove the screws that secure the keyboard to the palmrest assembly. 5. Lift and turn the keyboard to access the keyboard cable. 156. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the system board. 7. Remove the keyboard from the computer. 8. Peel back the adhesive tape securing the keyboard connector. 9. Remove the keyboard cable from the keyboard. 16Installing the Keyboard 1. Connect the keyboard cable and secure it to the keyboard using the tape. 2. Connect the keyboard cable to the system board. 3. Slide the keyboard into its compartment and ensure that it clicks into place. 4. Tighten the screws to secure the keyboard on the palmrest. 5. Flip the computer and tighten the screws to secure the keyboard. 6. Install: a) keyboard trim b) battery 7. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the screws that secure the hard drive to the computer. 4. Slide the hard drive out of the computer. 175. Remove the screw that secures the hard-drive caddy to the hard drive. 6. Remove the hard-drive caddy from the hard drive. 7. Remove the hard-drive isolation from the hard drive. Installing the Hard Drive 1. Install the hard-drive isolation on the hard drive. 2. Attach the hard-drive caddy to the hard drive. 183. Tighten the screws to secure the hard-drive caddy to the hard drive. 4. Slide the hard drive into the computer. 5. Tighten the screws to secure the hard drive to the computer. 6. Install the battery. 7. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Optical Drive 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Press the optical-drive latch to release the optical drive from the computer. 4. Pull the optical drive from the computer. 5. Remove the screw that secures the optical-drive latch to the optical drive assembly. 6. Push the optical-drive latch forward and remove it from the optical-drive assembly. 197. Remove the screws that secure the optical-drive latch bracket to the optical-drive assembly 8. Remove the latch bracket from the optical drive. 9. Remove the optical-drive door from the optical drive. Installing the Optical Drive 1. Secure the optical-drive door to the optical drive. 2. Install the latch bracket to the optical drive. 203. Tighten the screws to secure the optical-drive latch bracket to the optical drive assembly. 4. Secure the optical-drive latch to the optical drive assembly. 5. Tighten the screw to secure the optical drive latch. 6. Slide the optical drive into its slot. 7. Flip the computer, and push in the eject latch to secure the optical drive. 8. Install the battery. 9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Memory 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover 3. Pry the securing clips away from the memory module until it pops up. 4. Remove the memory module from its connector on the system board. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the second memory module. Installing the Memory 1. Insert the memory module into the memory socket. 2. Press the securing clips to secure the memory module to the system board. 3. Install: a) base cover b) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. 21Removing the Processor 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) heat sink 3. Rotate the processor cam lock in a counter-clockwise direction. 4. Remove the processor from the computer. Installing the Processor 1. Align the notches on the processor and the socket, and insert the processor into the socket. 2. Rotate the processor cam lock in a clockwise direction. 3. Install: a) heat sink b) base cover c) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Card 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover 223. Disconnect the antenna cables from the WLAN card. 4. Remove the screw that secures the WLAN card to the computer. 5. Remove the WLAN card from its slot on the system board. Installing the WLAN Card 1. Insert the WLAN card into its connector at a 45–degree angle into its slot. 2. Connect the antenna cables to their respective connectors marked on the WLAN card. 3. Tighten the screw to secure the WLAN card to the computer. 4. Install: a) base cover b) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Heat Sink 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: 23a) battery b) base cover 3. Disconnect the heat-sink cable. 4. Remove the screws that secure the heat sink to the system board. 5. Remove the heat sink from the computer. Installing the Heat Sink 1. Slide the heat sink into its original position in the system board. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the heat sink to the system board 3. Connect the heat-sink cable to the system board. 4. Install: a) base cover b) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. 24Removing the Bluetooth Card 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the: a) battery b) base cover 3. Remove the screw that secures the bluetooth card to the computer. 4. Disconnect the bluetooth cable from the system board. 5. Remove the bluetooth card from the computer 6. Disconnect the bluetooth cable from the bluetooth card. 25Installing the Bluetooth Card 1. Connect the bluetooth cable to the bluetooth card. 2. Connect the other end of the bluetooth cable to the system board. 3. Place the bluetooth card in its location in the computer. 4. Tighten the screw to secure the bluetooth card to the system board. 5. Install: a) base cover b) battery 6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Modem Card 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the: a) battery b) base cover 3. Remove the screw that secures the modem card to the computer. 4. Lift the modem card to release the tab from the connector on the back of the card. 265. Disconnect the modem cable from the modem card. 6. Grasp the modem card and remove the it from the computer. Installing the Modem Card 1. Insert the modem card in its slot 2. Seat the modem card, to ensure that the tab on the back of the card is engaged. 3. Connect the modem cable to the modem card. 4. Tighten the screw to secure the modem card. 5. Install: a) base cover b) battery 6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. 27Removing the Speakers 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) keyboard trim e) keyboard f) display assembly g) palmrest h) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) i) ExpressCard cage j) bluetooth card k) system board 3. Remove the screws that secure the speakers to the computer. 4. Remove the speaker cable from the routing channel. 5. Remove the speakers from the computer. 28Installing the Speakers 1. Align the speakers in the original position and connect the speaker cables. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the speakers. 3. Install: a) system board b) bluetooth card c) ExpressCard cage d) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) e) palmrest f) display assembly g) keyboard h) keyboard trim i) hard drive j) base cover k) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Coin-Cell Battery 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover 3. Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable. 4. Pry the coin-cell battery upward and remove it from the computer. 29Installing the Coin-Cell Battery 1. Place the coin-cell battery in its slot. 2. Connect the coin-cell battery cable. 3. Install: a) base cover b) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the ExpressCard Cage 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth card e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly h) palmrest 3. Remove the screws that secure the ExpressCard cage to the computer. 4. Remove the ExpressCard cage from the computer. 30Installing the ExpressCard Cage 1. Place the ExpressCard cage into its compartment. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the ExpressCard cage to the computer. 3. Install: a) palmrest b) display assembly c) keyboard d) keyboard trim e) bluetooth card f) hard drive g) base cover h) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Power-Connector Port 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover 3. Disconnect the power-connector cable from the system board. 4. Remove the screw that secures the power-connector bracket to the computer. 5. Remove the power-connector bracket from the computer. 316. Remove the power-connector cable from the computer. Installing the Power-Connector Port 1. Connect the power-connector cable to the computer. 2. Install the power-connector bracket to its position in the computer. 3. Tighten the screw to secure the power-connector bracket to the computer. 4. Connect the power-connector cable to the system board. 5. Install: a) base cover b) battery 6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Power LED Board 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth module e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly h) display bezel i) display panel 3. Disconnect the power LED board cable. 324. Remove the screw securing the power LED board to the display assembly. 5. Remove the power LED board from the display assembly. Installing the Power LED Board 1. Place the power LED board in its compartment in the display assembly. 2. Tighten the screw to secure the LED board to the display assembly. 3. Connect the power LED board cable to the display assembly. 4. Install: a) display panel b) display bezel c) display assembly d) keyboard e) keyboard trim f) bluetooth module g) hard drive h) base cover i) battery 335. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Input/Output (I/O) Board 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) optical drive e) bluetooth card f) keyboard trim g) keyboard h) display assembly i) palmrest j) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) k) ExpressCard cage l) system board 3. Remove the screw that secures the I/O board to the computer. 4. Remove the I/O board from the computer. Installing the Input Output (I/O) Board 1. Place the I/O board in its compartment. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the I/O board. 3. Install: a) system board b) ExpressCard cage 34c) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) d) palmrest e) display assembly f) keyboard g) keyboard trim h) bluetooth card i) hard drive j) optical drive k) base cover l) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Hard-Drive Support Plate 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) optical drive e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly h) palmrest 3. Remove the screw that secures the hard-drive support plate to the computer. 4. Lift the hard-drive support plate from the computer. 35Installing the Hard-Drive Support Plate 1. Place the hard-drive support plate in its compartment. 2. Tighten the screw to secure the hard drive support plate to the computer. 3. Install the: a) palmrest b) display assembly c) keyboard d) keyboard trim e) optical drive f) hard drive g) base cover h) battery 4. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Palmrest 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth card e) keyboard trim f) keyboard 3. Remove the screws that secure the palmrest assembly to the base of the computer. 4. Flip the computer over and remove the screws that secure the palmrest assembly to the computer. 365. Disconnect the media board cable (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only). 6. Disconnect the touchpad cable. 7. Disconnect the fingerprint reader cable. 8. Lift and remove the palmrest from the computer. 37Installing the Palmrest 1. Align the palmrest assembly to its original position in the computer and snap it into place. 2. Connect the following cables: a) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) b) touchpad c) fingerprint reader 3. Tighten the screws to secure the palmrest to the computer. 4. Install: a) keyboard b) keyboard trim c) bluetooth module d) hard drive e) base cover f) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the WiFi-Switch Board 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) optical drive e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) palmrest 3. Disconnect the WiFi-switch board cable from the system board. 4. Remove the screw that secures the WiFi-switch board. 385. Peel of the adhesive tape on the back of the WiFi-switch board and remove the WiFi-switch board. Installing the WiFi-Switch Board 1. Fix the adhesive tape on the back of the WiFi-switch board and place the board in its slot. 2. Tighten the screw to secure the WiFi-switch board. 3. Connect the WiFi-switch board cable to the system board. 4. Install: a) palmrest b) keyboard c) keyboard trim d) optical drive e) hard drive f) base cover g) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the System Board 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) optical drive e) bluetooth card f) keyboard trim g) keyboard 39h) WLAN card i) modem card j) heat sink k) processor l) palmrest m) ExpressCard cage 3. Disconnect the power-connector cable from the bottom side of the system board. 4. Remove the screws that secure the LVDS support bracket. 5. Remove the LVDS support bracket from the computer. 6. Disconnect the LVDS cable from the system board. 407. Remove the antenna cables from the routing channel. 8. Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable. 9. Disconnect the speaker cable from the top side of the system board. 10. Disconnect the WiFi-board cable. 4111. Remove the screws that secure the system board. 12. Lift the edge of the system board to a 45–degree angle. 13. Release the system board from the ports and connectors. 14. Lift the system board from the computer. 42Installing the System Board 1. Place the system board on the chassis. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the system board to the computer. 3. Connect the following cables to the system board: a) WiFi-switch board b) speaker c) coin-cell battery d) LVDS 4. Route the antenna cables through the routing channels. 5. Install the LVDS support bracket in its position in the computer. 6. Tighten the screws to secure the LVDS support bracket to the computer 7. Connect the power connector cable to the system board. 8. Install the: a) ExpressCard cage b) palmrest c) processor d) heat sink e) modem card f) WLAN card g) keyboard h) keyboard trim i) bluetooth card j) optical drive k) hard drive l) base cover m) battery 9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Modem Connector 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth card 43e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly h) palmrest i) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) j) ExpressCard cage k) system board 3. Disconnect the modem-card cable from the modem card. 4. Remove the modem cable from the routing channel. 5. Remove the screw that secures the modem-connector bracket to the computer. 6. Remove the modem-connector bracket from the computer. 447. Remove the modem connector from the computer. Installing the Modem Connector 1. Place the modem connector in its compartment. 2. Place the modem-connector bracket on the connector. 3. Tighten the screw to secure the modem-connector bracket. 4. Route the modem connector cable. 5. Connect the modem-card cable to the modem card. 6. Install: a) system board b) ExpressCard cage c) media board (available in E6430/E6430 ATG only) d) palmrest e) display assembly f) keyboard g) keyboard trim h) bluetooth card i) hard drive j) base cover k) battery 7. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Display Assembly 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working On Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery 45b) base cover 3. Remove the screws that secure the LVDS support bracket to the system board. 4. Remove the LVDS support bracket from the system board. 5. Disconnect the LVDS cable. 6. Disconnect the camera cable from the system board. 7. Remove the LVDS cable from the routing channel. 468. Remove the screws to release the display assembly on both sides. 9. Lift the display assembly and pull the LVDS and the antenna cables through the opening of the computer. 10. Remove the display assembly from the computer. Installing the Display Assembly 1. Place the display assembly onto the computer. 2. Insert the LVDS and wireless antenna cables through the holes on the base chassis and connect them. 473. Tighten the screws on both corners to secure the display assembly. 4. Route the antenna and the LVDS cables through the routing channel. 5. Connect the following cables to the computer: a) LVDS b) camera 6. Connect the LVDS support bracket in its position on the computer. 7. Tighten the screw to secure the support bracket to the computer. 8. Install: a) base cover b) battery 9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Display Bezel 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Pry up the bottom edge of the display bezel. 4. Pry up the left, right and top edges of the display bezel. 5. Remove the display bezel from the display assembly. 48Installing the Display Bezel 1. Place the display bezel onto the display assembly. 2. Starting from the top corner, press on the display bezel and work around the entire bezel until it clicks onto the display assembly. 3. Press on the left and right edges of the display bezel. 4. Install the battery. 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Display Panel 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) display assembly c) display bezel 3. Remove the screws that secure the display panel to the display assembly. 4. Flip the display panel over. 495. Peel off the LVDS cable connector tape and disconnect the LVDS cable from the display panel. 6. Remove the display panel from the display assembly. Installing the Display Panel 1. Connect the LVDS cable and stick the LVDS cable connector tape. 2. Flip the display and place it in the display assembly. 3. Tighten the screws to secure the display panel to the display assembly. 4. Install: a) display bezel b) display assembly c) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Display Assembly 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working On Your Computer. 2. Remove: 50a) battery b) base cover 3. Remove the screws that secure the LVDS support bracket to the system board. 4. Remove the LVDS support bracket from the system board. 5. Disconnect the LVDS cable. 6. Disconnect the camera cable from the system board. 7. Remove the LVDS cable from the routing channel. 518. Remove the screws to release the display assembly on both sides. 9. Lift the display assembly and pull the LVDS and the antenna cables through the opening of the computer. 10. Remove the display assembly from the computer. Installing the Display Assembly 1. Place the display assembly onto the computer. 2. Insert the LVDS and wireless antenna cables through the holes on the base chassis and connect them. 523. Tighten the screws on both corners to secure the display assembly. 4. Route the antenna and the LVDS cables through the routing channel. 5. Connect the following cables to the computer: a) LVDS b) camera 6. Connect the LVDS support bracket in its position on the computer. 7. Tighten the screw to secure the support bracket to the computer. 8. Install: a) base cover b) battery 9. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Display-Hinge Caps 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth card e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly 3. Rotate the left and right hinges upwards to a vertical position. 4. Pry loose the edge of hinge cap from the hinge and remove the hinge caps from the display assembly. 53Installing the Display-Hinge Caps 1. Slide the left hinge cap on the display panel. 2. Rotate the hinge downward to secure the hinge cap to the display panel. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the right hinge cap. 4. Install: a) display assembly b) keyboard c) keyboard trim d) bluetooth card e) hard drive f) base cover g) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Display Hinges 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth card e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly h) display bezel i) display panel 3. Remove the screws that secure the display hinge plates to the display assembly. 4. Remove the display hinge plates. 545. Remove the screws that secures the display hinges to the display assembly. 6. Remove the display hinges from the display assembly. Installing the Display Hinges 1. Place both the display hinges on the panel. 2. Tighten the screws to secure the display hinges to the display assembly. 3. Place the display hinge plates on the hinges. 4. Tighten the screws to secure the display hinge plates to the display assembly. 5. Install: a) display panel b) display bezel c) display assembly d) keyboard e) keyboard trim f) bluetooth card g) hard drive h) base cover 55i) battery 6. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the Camera 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) display assembly c) display bezel d) display panel 3. Disconnect the LVDS and camera cable from the camera. 4. Remove the screw that secures the camera to the display assembly. 5. Remove the camera from the display assembly. 56Installing the Camera 1. Install the camera in its slot on the display panel. 2. Tighten the screw to secure the camera to the display assembly. 3. Connect the LVDS and the camera cable to the camera. 4. Install: a) display panel b) display bezel c) display assembly d) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. Removing the LVDS and Camera Cable 1. Follow the procedures in Before Working Inside Your Computer. 2. Remove: a) battery b) base cover c) hard drive d) bluetooth card e) keyboard trim f) keyboard g) display assembly h) display bezel i) display panel j) display hinges 3. Disconnect the LVDS and camera cable from the camera. 4. Peel back the adhesives securing the LVDS and camera cable to the display assembly. 575. Remove the LVDS and camera cable from the display assembly. Installing the LVDS and Camera Cable 1. Route the LVDS and camera cable on the display assembly. 2. Fix the adhesive the tape to secure the cable. 3. Connect the LVDS and camera cable to the camera. 4. Install: a) display hinges b) display panel c) display bezel d) display assembly e) keyboard f) keyboard trim g) bluetooth card h) hard drive i) base cover j) battery 5. Follow the procedures in After Working Inside Your Computer. 583 Additional Information This section provides information for the additional features that are part of your computer. Docking Port Information The docking port is used for connecting the laptop to a docking station (optional). 1. Docking Port 59604 System Setup System Setup enables you to manage your computer hardware and specify BIOS‐level options. From the System Setup, you can: • Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware • View the system hardware configuration • Enable or disable integrated devices • Set performance and power management thresholds • Manage your computer security Boot Sequence Boot Sequence allows you to bypass the System Setup‐defined boot device order and boot directly to a specific device (for example: optical drive or hard drive). During the Power-on Self Test (POST), when the Dell logo appears, you can: • Access System Setup by pressing key • Bring up the one-time boot menu by pressing key The one-time boot menu displays the devices that you can boot from including the diagnostic option. The boot-menu options are: • Removable Drive (if available) • STXXXX Drive NOTE: XXX denotes the SATA drive number. • Optical Drive • Diagnostics NOTE: Choosing Diagnostics, will display the ePSA diagnostics screen. The boot sequence screen also displays the option to access the System Setup screen. Navigation Keys The following table displays the system setup navigation keys. NOTE: For most of the system setup options, changes that you make are recorded but do not take effect until you restart the system. Table 1. Navigation Keys Keys Navigation Up arrow Moves to the previous field. Down arrow Moves to the next field. 61Keys Navigation Allows you to select a value in the selected field (if applicable) or follow the link in the field. Spacebar Expands or collapses a drop‐down list, if applicable. Moves to the next focus area. NOTE: For the standard graphics browser only. Moves to the previous page till you view the main screen. Pressing in the main screen displays a message that prompts you to save any unsaved changes and restarts the system. Displays the System Setup help file. System Setup Options NOTE: Depending on your computer and its installed devices, the items listed in this section may or may not appear. Table 2. General Option Description System Information This section lists the primary hardware features of your computer. • System Information • Memory Information • Processor Information • Device Information Battery Information Displays the charge status of the battery. Boot Sequence Allows you to change the order in which the computer attempts to find an operating system. All the below options are selected. • Diskette Drive • Internal HDD • USB Storage Device • CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive • Onboard NIC You can also choose the Boot List option. The options are: • Legacy (Default Setting) • UEFI Date/Time Allows you to set the date and time. Table 3. System Configuration Option Description Integrated NIC Allows you to configure the integrated network controller. The options are: 62Option Description • Disabled • Enabled • Enabled w/PXE (Default Setting) Parallel Port Allows you to define and set how the parallel port on the docking station operates. You can set the parallel port to: • Disabled • AT • PS2 • ECP Serial Port Identifies and defines the serial port settings. You can set the serial port to: • Disabled • COM1 (Default Setting) • COM2 • COM3 • COM4 NOTE: The operating system may allocate resources even if the setting is disabled. SATA Operation Allows you to configure the internal SATA hard-drive controller. The options are: • Disabled • ATA • AHCI • RAID On (Default Setting) NOTE: SATA is configured to support RAID mode. Drives Allows you to configure the SATA drives on board. The options are: • SATA-0 • SATA-1 • SATA-4 • SATA-5 Default Setting: All drives are enabled. SMART Reporting This field controls if the hard drive errors for the integrated drives are reported during system startup. This technology is part of the SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) specification. 63Option Description • Enable SMART Reporting - This option is disabled by default. USB Configuration Allows you to define the USB configuration. The options are: • Enable Boot Support • Enable External USB Port Default Setting: both the options are enabled. USB PowerShare Allows you to configure the behavior of the USB PowerShare feature. The option is disabled by default. • Enable USB PowerShare Keyboard Illumination Allows you to choose the operating mode of the keyboard illumination feature. The options are: • Disabled (Default Setting) • Level is 25% • Level is 50% • Level is 75% • Level is 100% Stealth Mode Control Allows you to set the mode that will turn off all light and sound emissions from the system. The option is disabled by default. • Enable Stealth Mode Miscellaneous Devices Allows you enable or disable the various on board devices. The options are: • Enable Internal Modem • Enable Microphone • Enable eSATA Ports • Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection • Enable Module Bay • Enable ExpressCard • Enable Camera • Enable Media Card • Disable Media Card Default Setting: All devices are enabled 64Table 4. Video Option Description LCD Brightness Allows you to set the panel brightness when the ambient sensor is Off. Optimus Allows you to enable or disable the NVIDIA Optimus technology. • Enable Optimus - Default Setting. Table 5. Security Option Description Intel TXT (LT-SX) Configuration This option is disabled by default. Admin Password Allows you to set, change, or delete the administrator (admin) password. NOTE: You must set the admin password before you set the system or hard drive password. NOTE: Successful password changes take effect immediately. NOTE: Deleting the admin password automatically deletes the system password and the hard drive password. NOTE: Successful password changes take effect immediately. Default Setting: Not set System Password Allows you to set, change or delete the system password. NOTE: Successful password changes take effect immediately. Default Setting: Not set Internal HDD-0 Password Allows you to set, change or delete the administrator password. Default Setting: Not set Strong Password Allows you to enforce the option to always set strong passwords. Default Setting: Enable Strong Password is not selected. Password Configuration You can define the length of your password. Min = 4 , Max = 32 Password Bypass Allows you to enable or disable the permission to bypass the System and the Internal HDD password, when they are set. The options are: • Disabled (Default Setting) • Reboot bypass Password Change Allows you to enable the disable permission to the System and Hard Drive passwords when the admin password is set. Default Setting: Allow Non-Admin Password Changes is not selected Non-Admin Setup Changes Allows you to determine whether changes to setup option are permitted when an administrator password is set. The option is disabled. • Allows Wireless Switch Changes TPM Security Allows you to enable the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) during POST. Default Setting: The option is disabled. CPU XD Support Allows you to enable the Execute Disable mode of the processor. 65Option Description Default Setting: Enable CPU XD Support Computrace Allows you to activate or disable the optional Computrace software The options are: • Deactivate (Default Setting) • Disable • Activate NOTE: The Activate and Disable options will permanently activate or disable the feature and no further changes will be allowed CPU XD Support Allows you to enable the Execute Disable mode of the processor. Default Setting: Enable CPU XD Support OROM Keyboard Access Allows you to set access to enter the Option ROM Configuration screens using hotkeys during boot process. The options are: • Enable (Default Setting) • One Time Enable • Disable Admin Setup Lockout Allows you to prevent users from entering Setup when an Administrator password is set. Default Setting: Disabled Table 6. Performance Option Description Multi Core Support This field specifies whether the process will have one or all cores enabled. The performance of some applications will improve with the additional cores. This option is enabled by default. Allows you to enable or disable multi-core support for the processor. The options are: • All (Default Setting) • 1 • 2 Intel SpeedStep Allows you to enable or disable the Intel SpeedStep feature. Default Setting: Enable Intel SpeedStep C States Control Allows you to enable or disable the additional processor sleep states. Default Setting: The options C states, C3, C6, Enhanced C-states, and C7 options are enabled. Intel TurboBoost Allows you to enable or disable the Intel TurboBoost mode of the processor. Default Setting: Enable Intel TurboBoost 66Option Description Hyper-Thread Control Allows you to enable or disable the HyperThreading in the processor. Default Setting: Enabled Table 7. Power Management Option Description AC Behavior Allows the computer to power-uon automatically, when AC adapter is plugged. The option is disabled. • Wake on AC Auto On Time Allows you to set the time at which the computer must turn on automatically. The options are: • Disabled (Default Setting) • Every Day • Weekdays USB Wake Support Allows you to enable the USB devices to wake the computer from standby mode. The option is disabled • Enable USB Wake Support Wireless Radio Control Allows you to control the WLAN and WWAN radio. The options are: • Control WLAN radio • Control WWAN radio Default Setting: both the options are disabled. Wake on LAN/WLAN This option allows the computer to power up from the off state when triggered by a special LAN signal. Wake-up from the Standby state is unaffected by this setting and must be enabled in the operating system. This feature only works when the computer is connected to AC power supply. • Disabled - Does not allow the system to power on by special LAN signals when it receives a wake-up signal from the LAN or wireless LAN. (Default Setting) • LAN Only - Allows the system to be powered on by special LAN signals. • WLAN Only • LAN or WLAN Block Sleep Allows you to block the computer from entering into the sleep state. Option is disabled by default. • Block Sleep (S3) Primary Battery Configuration Allows you to define how to use the battery charge, when AC is plugged in. The options are: • Standard Charge • Express Charge • Predominantly AC use • Auto Charge (Default Setting) 67Option Description • Custom Charge — you can set the percentage to which the battery must charge . Battery Slice Configuration Allows you to define the how to charge the battery. The options are: • Standard Charge • Express Charge (Default Setting) Table 8. POST Behavior Option Description Adapter Warnings Allows you to activate the adapter warning messages when certain power adapters are used. The option is enabled by default. • Enable Adapter Warnings Mouse/Touchpad Allows you to define how the computer handles the mouse and touchpad input. The options are: • Serial Mouse • PS2 Mouse • Touchpad/PS-2 Mouse (Default Setting) Numlock Enable Specifies if the NumLock function can be enabled when the computer boots. This option is enabled by default. • Enable Numlock Fn Key Emulation Allows you to match the key feature of PS-2 keyboard with the key feature in an internal keyboard. The option is enabled by default. • Enable Fn Key Emulation Keyboard Errors Specifies whether keyboard related errors are reported when it boots. This option is enabled by default. • Enable Keyboard Error Detection POST Hotkeys Specifies whether the sign-on screen displays a message, that displays the keystroke sequence required to enter the BIOS Boot Option Menu. • Enable F12 Boot Option menu - This option is enabled by default. Fastboot Allows you to speed up the boot processes. The options are: • Minimal • Thorough (Default Setting) • Auto 68Table 9. Virtualization Support Option Description Virtualization This option specifies whether a Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) can utilize the additional hardware capabilities provided by Intel Virtualization technology. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology - Default Setting. VT for Direct I/O Enables or disables the Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) from utilizing the additional hardware capabilities provided by Intel Virtualization technology for direct I/O. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O - Default Setting. Table 10. Wireless Option Description Wireless Switch Allows you to determine which wireless device can be controlled by the wireless switch. The options are: • WWAN • Bluetooth • WLAN All options are enabled by default. Wireless Device Enable Allows you to enable or disable the wireless devices. The options are: • WWAN • Bluetooth • WLAN All options are enabled by default. Table 11. Maintenance Option Description Service Tag Displays the service tag of your computer. Asset Tag Allows you to create a system asset tag if an asset tag is not already set. This option is not set by default. Table 12. System Logs Option Description BIOS events Displays the system event log and allows you to clear the log. • Clear Log Updating the BIOS It is recommended to update your BIOS (system setup), on replacing the system board or if an update is available. For notebooks, ensure that your computer battery is fully charged and connected to a power outlet 1. Restart the computer. 2. Go to support.dell.com/support/downloads. 693. If you have your computer's Service Tag or Express Service Code: NOTE: For desktops, the service tag label is available on the front of your computer. NOTE: For notebooks, the service tag label is available on the bottom of your computer. a) Enter the Service Tag or Express Service Code and click Submit. b) Click Submit and proceed to step 5. 4. If you do not have your computer's service tag or express service code, select one of the following: a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me b) Choose from My Products and Services List c) Choose from a list of all Dell products 5. On the application and drivers screen, under the Operating System drop-down list, select BIOS. 6. Identify the latest BIOS file and click Download File. 7. Select your preferred download method in the Please select your download method below window; click Download Now. The File Download window appears. 8. Click Save to save the file on your computer. 9. Click Run to install the updated BIOS settings on your computer. Follow the instructions on the screen. System and Setup Password You can create a system password and a setup password to secure your computer. Password Type Description System password Password that you must enter to log on to your system. Setup password Password that you must enter to access and make changes to the BIOS settings of your computer. CAUTION: The password features provide a basic level of security for the data on your computer. CAUTION: Anyone can access the data stored on your computer if is not locked and left unattended. NOTE: Your computer is shipped with the system and setup password feature disabled. Assigning a System Password and Setup Password You can assign a new System Password and/or Setup Password or change an existing System Password and/or Setup Password only when Password Status is Unlocked. If the Password Status is Locked, you cannot change the System Password. NOTE: If the password jumper is disabled, the existing System Password and Setup Password is deleted and you need not provide the system password to log on to the computer. To enter a system setup, press immediately after a power-on or reboot. 1. In the System BIOS or System Setup screen, select System Security and press . The System Security screen appears. 2. In the System Security screen, verify that Password Status is Unlocked. 3. Select System Password , enter your system password, and press or . 70Use the following guidelines to assign the system password: – A password can have up to 32 characters. – The password can contain the numbers 0 through 9. – Only lower case letters are valid, upper case letters are not allowed. – Only the following special characters are allowed: space, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`). Re-enter the system password when prompted. 4. Type the system password that you entered earlier and click OK. 5. Select Setup Password, type your system password and press or . A message prompts you to re-type the setup password. 6. Type the setup password that you entered earlier and click OK. 7. Press and a message prompts you to save the changes. 8. Press to save the changes. The computer reboots. Deleting or Changing an Existing System and/or Setup Password Ensure that the Password Status is Unlocked (in the System Setup) before attempting to delete or change the existing System and/or Setup password. You cannot delete or change an existing System or Setup password, if the Password Status is Locked. To enter the System Setup, press immediately after a power-on or reboot. 1. In the System BIOS or System Setup screen, select System Security and press . The System Security screen is displayed. 2. In the System Security screen, verify that Password Status is Unlocked. 3. Select System Password, alter or delete the existing system password and press or . 4. Select Setup Password, alter or delete the existing setup password and press or . NOTE: If you change the System and/or Setup password, re-enter the new password when promoted. If you delete the System and/or Setup password, confirm the deletion when promoted. 5. Press and a message prompts you to save the changes. 6. Press to save the changes and exit from the System Setup. The computer reboots. 71725 Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, run the ePSA diagnostics before contacting Dell for technical assistance. The purpose of running diagnostics is to test your computer's hardware without requiring additional equipment or risking data loss. If you are unable to fix the problem yourself, service and support personnel can use the diagnostics results to help you solve the problem. Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment (ePSA) Diagnostics The ePSA diagnostics (also known as system diagnostics) performs a complete check of your hardware. The ePSA is embedded with the BIOS and is launched by the BIOS internally. The embedded system diagnostics provides a set of options for particular devices or device groups allowing you to: • Run tests automatically or in an interactive mode • Repeat tests • Display or save test results • Run thorough tests to introduce additional test options to provide extra information about the failed device(s) • View status messages that inform you if tests are completed successfully • View error messages that inform you of problems encountered during testing CAUTION: Use the system diagnostics to test only your computer. Using this program with other computers may cause invalid results or error messages. NOTE: Some tests for specific devices require user interaction. Always ensure that you are present at the computer terminal when the diagnostic tests are performed. 1. Power-on the computer. 2. As the computer boots, press the key as the Dell logo appears. 3. On the boot menu screen, select the Diagnostics option. The Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment window is displayed, listing all devices detected in the computer. The diagnostics starts running the tests on all the detected devices. 4. If you wish to run a diagnostic test on a specific device, press and click Yes to stop the diagnostic test. 5. Select the device from the left pane and click Run Tests. 6. If there are any issues, error codes are displayed. Note the error code and contact Dell. 73746 Troubleshooting Your Computer You can troubleshoot your computer using indicators like Diagnostic Lights, Beep Codes, and Error Messages during the operation of the computer. Device Status Lights Table 13. Device Status Lights Turns on when you turn on the computer and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode. Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. Turns on when wireless networking is enabled. The device status LEDs are usually located either on the top or left side of the keyboard. They are used to display the storage, battery and wireless devices connectivity and activity. Apart from that they can be useful as a diagnostic tool when there's a possible failure to the system. The following table lists how to read the LED codes when possible errors occur. Table 14. LED Lights Storage LED Power LED Wireless LED Fault Description Blinking Solid Solid A possible processor failure has occurred. Solid Blinking Solid The memory modules are detected but has encountered an error. Blinking Blinking Blinking A system board failure has occurred. Blinking Blinking Solid A possible graphics card/video failure has occurred. Blinking Blinking Off System failed on hard drive initialization OR System failed in Option ROM initialization. Blinking Off Blinking The USB controller encountered a problem during initialization. Solid Blinking Blinking No memory modules are installed/detected. Blinking Solid Blinking The display encountered a problem during initialization. Off Blinking Blinking The modem is preventing the system from completing POST Off Blinking Off Memory failed to initialize or memory is unsupported. 75Battery Status Lights If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the battery light operates as follows: Alternately blinking amber light and white light An unauthenticated or unsupported non-Dell AC adapter is attached to your laptop. Alternately blinking amber light with steady white light Temporary battery failure with AC adapter present. Constantly blinking amber light Fatal battery failure with AC adapter present. Light off Battery in full charge mode with AC adapter present. White light on Battery in charge mode with AC adapter present. 767 Technical Specifications NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. The following specifications are only those required by law to ship with your computer. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start → Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. Table 15. System Information Feature Specification Chipset Mobile Intel 7 series chipset (Intel QM77) DRAM bus width 64-bit Flash EPROM SPI 32 MB, 64 MB PCIe Gen1 bus 100 MHz External Bus Frequency DMI (5GT/s) Table 16. Processor Feature Specification Types • Intel Core i3 series • Intel Core i5 series • Intel Core i7 series L3 cache up to 8 MB Table 17. Memory Feature Specification Memory connector two SODIMM slots Memory capacity 1 GB, 2 GB, or 4 GB Memory type DDR3 SDRAM (1600 MHz) Minimum memory 2 GB Maximum memory 16 GB Table 18. Audio Feature Specification Type four-channel high-definition audio Controller IDT92HD93 77Feature Specification Stereo conversion 24-bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog) Interface: Internal high-definition audio External microphone-in/stereo headphones/external speakers connector Speakers two Internal speaker amplifier 1 W (RMS) per channel Volume controls keyboard function keys, program menus Table 19. Video Feature Specification Type integrated on system board Controller • Intel HD Graphics • NVidia Discrete Graphics Table 20. Communications Features Specification Network adapter 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet (RJ-45) Wireless internal wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless wide area network (WWAN) Table 21. Ports and Connectors Features Specification Audio one microphone/stereo headphone/speakers connector Video • one 15-pin VGA connector • 19-pin HDMI connector Network adapter one RJ-45 connector USB 2.0 • one 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connector • one eSATA/USB 2.0-compliant connector USB 3.0 two Memory card reader one 8-in-1 memory card reader Docking port one Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card one 78Table 22. Contactless Smart Card Feature Specification Supported Smart Cards/Technologies ISO14443A — 106 kbps, 212 kbps, 424 kbps, and 848 kbps ISO14443B — 106 kbps, 212 kbps, 424 kbps, and 848 kbps ISO15936 HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire , HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire Table 23. Display Feature Specification Type • HD(1366x768), WLED • HD+(1600 x 900) • FHD (1920 x 1080) Size Latitude E6430 14.0" Latitude E6530 15.6" Latitude E6430 ATG 14.0" Dimensions: Latitude E6430: Height 192.50 mm (7.57 inches) Width 324 mm (12.75 inches) Diagonal 355.60 mm (14.00 inches) Active area (X/Y) 309.40 mm x 173.95 mm Maximum resolution • 1366 x 768 pixels • 1600 x 900 pixels Maximum Brightness 200 nits Latitude E6530: Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) Width 360 mm (14.17 inches) Diagonal 394.24 mm (15.60 inches) Active area (X/Y) 344.23 mm x 193.54 mm Maximum resolution • 1366 x 768 pixels • 1600 x 900 pixels • 1920 x 1080 pixels Maximum Brightness 220 nits Latitude E6430 ATG: 79Feature Specification Height 192.5 mm (7.57 inches) Width 324 mm (12.75 inches) Diagonal 355.60 mm (14.00 inches) Active area (X/Y) 357.30 mm x 246.50 mm Maximum resolution 1366 x 768 pixels Maximum Brightness 730 nits Operating angle 0° (closed) to 180° Refresh rate 60 Hz Minimum Viewing Angles: Latitude E6430 / Latitude E6530: Horizontal +/- 40° Vertical +10°/-30° Latitude E6430 ATG: Horizontal +/- 50° Vertical +/- 40° Pixel pitch: Latitude E6430 0.2265 mm x 0.2265 mm Latitude E6530 0.252 mm x 0.252 mm Table 24. Keyboard Feature Specification Number of keys United States: 86 keys, United Kingdom: 87 keys, Brazil: 87 keys, and Japan: 90 keys NOTE: Numeric keypad is available for Latitude E6530. Layout QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Table 25. Touchpad Feature Specification Active Area: X-axis 80.00 mm Y-axis 45.00 mm 80Table 26. Battery Feature Specification Type • 4-cell (40 WHr) Lithium-ion battery with Express Charge (selected countries only) • 6-cell (60 WHr) Lithium-ion battery with Express Charge • 9-cell (97 WHr) Lithium-ion battery with Express Charge • 9-cell (87 WHr) Lithium-ion battery Dimensions: 4-cell / 6-cell: Depth 48.08 mm (1.90 inches) Height 20.00 mm (0.79 inches) Width 208.00 mm (8.18 inches) 9-cell: Depth 71.79 mm (2.83 inches) Height 20.00 mm (0.79 inches) Width 214.00 mm (8.43 inches) Weight: 4-cell 240.00 g (0.53 lb) 6-cell 344.73 g (0.76 lb) 9-cell 508.02 g (1.12 lb) Voltage: 4-cell 14.80 VDC 6-cell / 9-cell 11.10 VDC Temperature range: Operating 0 °C to 35 °C (32 °F to 95 °F) Non-Operating –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F) Coin-cell battery 3 V CR2032 lithium coin cell Table 27. AC Adapter Feature Specification Type 65 W STD and 65 W BFR/PVC free d90 W adapter Input voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC 100 VAC to 240 VAC Input current (maximum) 1.50 A 1.60 A Input frequency 50 Hz to 60 Hz 50 Hz to 60 Hz 81Feature Specification Output power 65 W 90 W Output current 3.34 A (continuous) 4.62 A (continuous) Rated output voltage 19.5 +/– 1.0 VDC 19.5 +/– 1.0 VDC Temperature range: Operating 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) Non-Operating –40 °C to 70 °C (–40 °F to 158 °F) –40 °C to 70 °C (–40 °F to 158 °F) Table 28. Physical Feature Latitude E6430 Latitude E6530 Latitude E6430 ATG Height 26.90 mm to 32.40 mm (1.06 inches to 1.27 inches) 28.40 mm to 34.20 mm (1.11 inches to 1.35 inches) 29.50 mm to 37.70 mm (1.16 inches to 1.48 inches) Width 352.00 mm (13.86 inches) 384.00 mm (15.12 inches) 359.20 mm (14.14 inches) with port cover Depth 241.00 mm (9.49 inches) 258.00 mm (10.16 inches) 247.40 mm (9.74 inches) with port cover Weight 2.02 kg (4.45 lb) 2.47 kg (5.44 lb) 2.74 kg (6.04 lb) Table 29. Environmental Feature Specification Temperature: Operating 0 °C to 35 °C (32 °F to 95 °F) Storage –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F) Relative humidity (maximum): Operating 10 % to 90 % (non condensing) Storage 5 % to 95 % (non condensing) Altitude (maximum): Operating –15.24 m to 3048 m (–50 ft to 10,000 ft) Non-Operating –15.24 m to 10,668 m (–50 ft to 35,000 ft) Airborne contaminant level G1 as defined by ISA-71.04–1985 828 Contacting Dell To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1. Visit support.dell.com. 2. Verify your country or region in the Choose a Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. 3. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page. 4. Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. 5. Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you. 83 Dell Latitude E6530 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire: P19F Type réglementaire: P19F001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL logo, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™, ExpressCharge™, Latitude™, Latitude ON™, OptiPlex™, Vostro™ et Wi-Fi Catcher™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino® et Celeron® sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™ et ATI FirePro™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, le bouton Démarrer Windows Vista et Office Outlook® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque de la Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) et est sous licence pour une utilisation sur des disques et des lecteurs. La marque Bluetooth® est une marque déposée et appartient à Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. et toute utilisation d'une telle marque par Dell Inc. se fait dans le cadre d'une licence. Wi-Fi® est une marque déposée de Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc. 2012 - 06 Rev. A00Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur........................................................7 Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................................7 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur.............................................................................................................................8 Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.................................................................................................8 Chapitre 2: Retrait et installation des composants.................................................................11 Outils recommandés...............................................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital)...................................................................................................................11 Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital)............................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte ExpressCard..............................................................................................................................12 Installation de la carte ExpressCard.......................................................................................................................12 Dépose de la batterie..............................................................................................................................................12 Pose de la batterie..................................................................................................................................................13 Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)............................................................................................13 Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module).....................................................................................13 Dépose du cache de base......................................................................................................................................13 Pose du cache de base..........................................................................................................................................14 Retrait du cadre du clavier.....................................................................................................................................14 Installation du cadre du clavier..............................................................................................................................15 Dépose du clavier...................................................................................................................................................15 Pose du clavier.......................................................................................................................................................17 Dépose du disque dur.............................................................................................................................................17 Pose du disque dur.................................................................................................................................................18 Dépose du lecteur optique.....................................................................................................................................19 Pose du lecteur optique..........................................................................................................................................20 Dépose de la mémoire............................................................................................................................................21 Pose de la mémoire................................................................................................................................................21 Dépose du processeur............................................................................................................................................22 Pose du processeur................................................................................................................................................22 Dépose de la carte réseau sans fil WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)...........................................................22 Pose de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN.............................................................................................................23 Dépose du dissipateur de chaleur..........................................................................................................................24 Pose du dissipateur de chaleur..............................................................................................................................24 Retrait de la carte Bluetooth...................................................................................................................................25 Installation de la carte Bluetooth...........................................................................................................................26Retrait de la carte modem......................................................................................................................................26 Installation de la carte modem...............................................................................................................................27 Dépose des haut-parleurs......................................................................................................................................28 Pose des haut-parleurs..........................................................................................................................................29 Dépose de la pile bouton........................................................................................................................................29 Pose de la pile bouton............................................................................................................................................30 Retrait du bâti de la carte ExpressCard..................................................................................................................30 Installation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard...........................................................................................................31 Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation.........................................................................................................31 Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation.................................................................................................32 Retrait de la carte LED de l'alimentation................................................................................................................32 Installation de la carte LED de l'alimentation.........................................................................................................33 Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)..............................................................................................................34 Installation de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S).......................................................................................................34 Retrait de la plaque de support du disque dur........................................................................................................35 Installation de la plaque de support du disque dur................................................................................................36 Dépose du repose-mains........................................................................................................................................36 Pose du repose-mains............................................................................................................................................38 Retrait de la carte du commutateur WLAN............................................................................................................38 Installation de la carte de du commutateur WiFi...................................................................................................39 Dépose de la carte système...................................................................................................................................39 Pose de la carte système.......................................................................................................................................43 Retrait du connecteur du modem...........................................................................................................................43 Installation du connecteur du modem....................................................................................................................45 Dépose de l'ensemble écran..................................................................................................................................45 Pose de l'ensemble écran......................................................................................................................................47 Dépose du cadre d'écran.......................................................................................................................................48 Pose du cache de l'écran.......................................................................................................................................49 Dépose du panneau d'écran..................................................................................................................................49 Pose du panneau d'écran.......................................................................................................................................50 Dépose de l'ensemble écran..................................................................................................................................50 Pose de l'ensemble écran......................................................................................................................................52 Retrait des capuchons de charnière d'écran.........................................................................................................53 Installation des capuchons de charnière d'écran..................................................................................................54 Retrait des charnières d'écran...............................................................................................................................54 Installation des charnières d'écran........................................................................................................................55 Dépose de la caméra..............................................................................................................................................56 Pose de la caméra..................................................................................................................................................57 Retrait du câble LVDS et de caméra.......................................................................................................................57 Installation du câble LVDS et de caméra...............................................................................................................58 Chapitre 3: Informations complémentaires..............................................................................59Informations du port d'accueil................................................................................................................................59 Chapitre 4: Configuration du système.......................................................................................61 Séquence de démarrage........................................................................................................................................61 Touches de navigation............................................................................................................................................61 Options du programme de configuration du système............................................................................................62 Mise à jour du BIOS ...............................................................................................................................................71 Mots de passe du système et de configuration.....................................................................................................71 Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration...............................................72 Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration..........................................72 Chapitre 5: Diagnostics...............................................................................................................75 Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)...............................................................................75 Chapitre 6: Dépannage de l'ordinateur....................................................................................77 Voyants d'état de l'appareil....................................................................................................................................77 Voyants d'état de la batterie...................................................................................................................................78 Chapitre 7: Caractéristiques techniques..................................................................................79 Chapitre 8: Contacter Dell ..........................................................................................................8761 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données personnelles de toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Vous avez exécuté les étapes de la section Intervention sur votre ordinateur. • Vous avez pris connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. • Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. D'autres informations sur les meilleures pratiques de sécurité sont disponibles sur la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité réglementaire) accessible à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de montage métallique. Saisissez les composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par les broches. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez d'abord sur le verrou. Lorsque vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés uniformément pour éviter de tordre les broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de l'ordinateur et des composants illustrés dans ce document. Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur). 3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, telle qu'un périphérique d'accueil ou une extension de batterie en option, déconnectez-le. 7PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. 4. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système. 5. Débranchez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 6. Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane. REMARQUE : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant de dépanner l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez la batterie principale. 8. Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit. 9. Ouvrez l'écran. 10. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour raccorder la carte système à la terre. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir l'écran. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l'ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant l'intervention, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour éliminer l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants. 11. Retirez les ExpressCard ou cartes à puce installées des logements appropriés. Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas perdre des données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l'ordinateur. 1. Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : – Dans Windows 7: Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis cliquez sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows Vista : Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur gauche du menu Démarrer, comme indiqué ci-dessous, puis sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows XP: Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Arrêter l'ordinateur → Éteindre . L'ordinateur s'éteint à la fin de la procédure d'arrêt du système d'exploitation. 2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés n'ont pas été mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quatre secondes environ pour les mettre hors tension. Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Une fois les procédures de réinstallation terminées, n'oubliez pas de brancher les périphériques externes, cartes, câbles, etc. avant de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension. 8PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, utilisez uniquement la batterie conçue pour cet ordinateur Dell spécifique. N'employez pas de batteries conçues pour d'autres ordinateurs Dell. 1. Branchez les périphériques externes, par exemple réplicateur de port, extension de batterie ou périphérique d'accueil, et remettez en place les cartes comme l'ExpressCard, le cas échéant. 2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou de réseau sur l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord le périphérique du réseau et sur l'ordinateur. 3. Réinstallez la batterie. 4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques sur leur prise secteur. 5. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 9102 Retrait et installation des composants Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de l'ordinateur. Outils recommandés Les procédures dans ce document peuvent nécessiter les outils suivants : • petit tournevis à tête plate • tournevis cruciforme • petite pointe en plastique Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour l'extraire de l'ordinateur. 3. Sortez la carte SD de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Faites glisser la carte SD dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 11Retrait de la carte ExpressCard 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyer sur la carte ExpressCard pour la dégager de l'ordinateur. 3. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard hors de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte ExpressCard 1. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la batterie 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Faites glisser les loquets pour déverrouiller la batterie et retourner la batterie de l'ordinateur. 12Pose de la batterie 1. Faites glisser la batterie dans son logement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez la carte SIM de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) 1. Faites glisser la carte SIM pour l'insérer dans son logement. 2. Posez la batterie. 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du cache de base 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez les vis de fixation du cache de fond à l'ordinateur. 133. Soulevez le cache de fond pour le retirer de l'ordinateur. Pose du cache de base 1. Placez le cache de fond en alignant les orifices des vis sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du cache de fond à l'ordinateur. 3. Posez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du cadre du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Munissez-vous d'un objet en plastique et sous le cadre du clavier écartez le cadre pour le libérer de l'ordinateur. 4. Ecartez le cadre du clavier des bords et du fond. 5. Soulevez le cadre pour le retirer. 14Installation du cadre du clavier 1. Alignez le cadre du clavier sur son compartiment. 2. Appuyez sur les côtés du cadre du clavier pour l'installer. 3. Posez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) l'habillage du clavier 3. Retirez les vis de fixation du clavier à l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ensemble de repose-mains. 5. Soulevez et faire pivoter le clavier pour accéder au câble du clavier. 156. Débranchez de la carte système le câble du clavier. 7. Retirez le clavier de l'ordinateur. 8. Retirez la bande adhésive fixant le connecteur du clavier. 9. Retirez le câble du clavier de ce dernier. 16Pose du clavier 1. Connectez le câble du clavier et fixez-le au clavier avec la bande. 2. Connectez le câble du clavier à la carte système. 3. Faites glisser le clavier dans son compartiment et veuillez à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 4. Serrez les vis de fixation du clavier au repose-mains. 5. Retournez l'ordinateur et serrez les vis de fixation du clavier. 6. Posez : a) l'habillage du clavier b) la batterie 7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du disque dur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Déposez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 4. Sortez le disque dur de l'ordinateur en le faisant glisser. 175. Retirez la vise de fixation du chariot du disque dur au disque dur. 6. Retirez le chariot du disque dur du disque dur. 7. Retirez l'isolation du disque dur. Pose du disque dur 1. Installez l'isolation du disque dur. 2. Fixez le chariot du disque dur au disque dur. 183. Serrez les vis de fixation du chariot du disque dur au disque dur. 4. Faites glisser le disque dur dans l'ordinateur. 5. Serrez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 6. Posez la batterie. 7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Appuyez sur le loquet du lecteur optique pour libérer le lecteur optique de l'ordinateur. 4. Sortez le lecteur optique de l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez la vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique. 6. Poussez le loquet du lecteur optique vers l'avant puis retirez-le de l'ensemble lecteur optique. 197. Retirez les vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique de l'ensemble lecteur optique. 8. Retirez le support du loquet du lecteur optique. 9. Retirez le cadre du lecteur optique. Pose du lecteur optique 1. Fixez le cadre du lecteur optique au lecteur optique. 2. Installez le support du loquet au lecteur optique. 203. Serrez les vis pour fixer le support de loquet du lecteur optique à l'ensemble lecteur optique. 4. Fixez le loquet du lecteur optique à l'ensemble lecteur optique. 5. Serrez la vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique. 6. Faites glisser le lecteur optique dans son logement. 7. Faites pivoter l'ordinateur et poussez le loquet d'éjection pour fixer le lecteur optique. 8. Posez la batterie. 9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Dégagez les clips de fixation du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce qu'ils s'éjectent. 4. Retirez le module de mémoire de son connecteur situé sur la carte système. 5. Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour retirer le deuxième module. Pose de la mémoire 1. Insérez le module de mémoire dans son connecteur. 2. Appuyez sur les clips de fixation pour fixer le module de mémoire à la carte système. 3. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 21Dépose du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le dissipateur de chaleur 3. Faites pivoter le verrou de la came du processeur dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre. 4. Retirez le processeur de l'ordinateur. Pose du processeur 1. Alignez les encoches du processeur et du support puis insérez le processeur dans le support. 2. Tournez la verrou à came du processeur dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre. 3. Posez : a) le dissipateur de chaleur b) le cache de base c) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la carte réseau sans fil WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie 22b) le cache de base 3. Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte WLAN. 4. Retirer la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez la carte WLAN de son emplacement sur la carte système. Pose de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN 1. Insérez la carte WLAN dans son connecteur à 45 degrés dans son logement. 2. Branchez les câbles d'antenne sur leurs connecteurs respectifs marqués sur la carte WLAN. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur. 4. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 23Dépose du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Débranchez le câble du dissipateur de chaleur. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le dissipateur de chaleur sur la carte système. 5. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur de l'ordinateur. Pose du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Faites glisser le dissipateur de chaleur vers sa position d'origine dans la carte système. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent le dissipateur thermique à la carte système. 3. Connectez le câble du dissipateur de chaleur à la carte système. 4. Posez : 24a) le cache de base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte Bluetooth 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte Bluetooth à l'ordinateur. 4. Débranchez le câble Bluetooth de la carte système. 5. Retirez la carte Bluetooth de l'ordinateur. 6. Débranchez le câble Bluetooth de la carte Bluetooth. 25Installation de la carte Bluetooth 1. Connectez le câble Bluetooth au module Bluetooth. 2. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble Bluetooth à la carte système. 3. Placez la carte Bluetooth dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte Bluetooth à la carte système. 5. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte modem 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte modem à l'ordinateur. 4. Soulevez la carte du modem pour libérer la patte du connecteur à l'arrière de la carte. 265. Déconnectez le câble du modem de la carte du modem. 6. Maintenez la carte du modem puis retirez-la de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte modem 1. Insérez la carte modem dans son logement 2. Installez la carte modem, pour vous assurer que la patte à l'arrière de la carte est enclenchée. 3. Branchez le câble du modem à la carte du modem. 4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte modem. 5. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 27Dépose des haut-parleurs 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) l'habillage du clavier e) le clavier f) l'ensemble écran g) le repose-mains h) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) i) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard j) la carte Bluetooth k) la carte système 3. Retirez les vis de fixation des haut-parleurs à l'ordinateur. 4. Débranchez le câble modem du passage de câbles. 5. Retirez les haut-parleurs de l'ordinateur. 28Pose des haut-parleurs 1. Alignez les haut-parleurs dans leur position d'origine et connectez leurs câbles. 2. Serrez le vis de fixation des haut-parleurs. 3. Posez : a) la carte système b) la carte Bluetooth c) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard d) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) e) le repose-mains f) l'ensemble écran g) le clavier h) l'habillage du clavier i) le disque dur j) le cache de base k) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la pile bouton 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton. 4. Soulevez la pile bouton puis retirez-la de l'ordinateur. 29Pose de la pile bouton 1. Placez la pile bouton dans son logement. 2. Branchez le câble de la pile bouton. 3. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du bâti de la carte ExpressCard 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) la carte Bluetooth e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran h) le repose-mains 3. Retirez les vis de fixation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard à l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez le bâti de la carte ExpressCard de l'ordinateur. 30Installation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard 1. Insérez le bâti de la carte ExpressCard dans son compartiment. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard sur l'ordinateur. 3. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) l'ensemble écran c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) la carte Bluetooth f) le disque dur g) le cache de base h) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Débranchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation de la carte système. 4. Retirez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez le support du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. 316. Retirez du câble du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Connectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur. 2. Installez le support du connecteur d'alimentation dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur. 4. Branchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation sur la carte système. 5. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte LED de l'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) le module Bluetooth e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran h) le cadre d'écran i) le panneau d'écran 3. Débranchez le câble de la carte LED d'alimentation. 324. Retrait de la vis de fixation de la carte LED pour l'ensemble d'écran. 5. Retirez la carte LED d'alimentation de l'ensemble écran. Installation de la carte LED de l'alimentation 1. Placez la plaque de la carte LED dans son compartiment dans l'ensemble écran. 2. Serrez la vis pour fixer la carte LED à l'ensemble écran. 3. Branchez le câble de la carte LED à l'ensemble écran. 4. Posez : a) le panneau d'écran b) le cadre d'écran c) l'ensemble écran d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) le module Bluetooth g) le disque dur h) le cache de base i) la batterie 335. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) la carte Bluetooth f) l'habillage du clavier g) le clavier h) l'ensemble écran i) le repose-mains j) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) k) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard l) la carte système 3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte E/S à l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez la carte d'E/S de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S) 1. Placez la carte d'E/S dans son compartiment. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation de la carte d'E/S. 3. Posez : a) la carte système b) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard 34c) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) d) le repose-mains e) l'ensemble écran f) le clavier g) l'habillage du clavier h) la carte Bluetooth i) le disque dur j) le lecteur optique k) le cache de base l) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la plaque de support du disque dur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran h) le repose-mains 3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la plaque du support du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 4. Soulevez la plaque du support de disque dur de l'ordinateur. 35Installation de la plaque de support du disque dur 1. Mettez en place la plaque du support du disque dur dans son logement. 2. Serrez la vis de fixation de la plaque du support de disque dur à l'ordinateur. 3. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) l'ensemble écran c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le lecteur optique f) le disque dur g) le cache de base h) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du repose-mains 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) la carte Bluetooth e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble du repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur. 4. Retournez l'ordinateur et retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble repose-mains à l'ordinateur. 365. Débranchez le câble de la carte média (uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG). 6. Débranchez le câble du pavé tactile. 7. Débranchez le câble du lecteur d'empreintes digitales. 8. Soulevez et retirez le repose-mains de l'ordinateur. 37Pose du repose-mains 1. Alignez l'ensemble repose-mains dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur et installez-le. 2. Raccorder les câbles suivants : a) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) b) pavé tactile c) lecteur d'empreintes digitales 3. Serrez les vis de fixation du repose-mains sur l'ordinateur. 4. Posez : a) le clavier b) l'habillage du clavier c) le module Bluetooth d) le disque dur e) le cache de base f) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte du commutateur WLAN 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) le repose-mains 3. Débranchez le câble de la carte du commutateur WiFi de la carte système. 4. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte du commutateur WiFi. 385. Retirez la bande adhésive de l'arrière de la carte du commutateur WiFi puis retirez la carte WiFi. Installation de la carte de du commutateur WiFi 1. Collez la bande adhésive sur l'arrière de la carte du commutateur WiFi et placez la carte dans son logement. 2. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte du commutateur WiFi. 3. Branchez le câble de la carte du commutateur WiFi à la carte système. 4. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) le clavier c) l'habillage du clavier d) le lecteur optique e) le disque dur f) le cache de base g) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la carte système 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) la carte Bluetooth f) l'habillage du clavier g) le clavier 39h) la carte réseau sans fil WLAN i) la carte modem j) le dissipateur de chaleur k) le processeur l) le repose-mains m) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard 3. Débranchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation du côté inférieur de la carte système. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support gauche. 5. Retirez le support LVDS de l'ordinateur. 6. Débranchez le câble LVDS de la carte système. 407. Retirez les câbles d'antenne du chemin d'acheminement. 8. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton. 9. Débranchez le câble du haut-parleur du dessus de la carte système. 10. Débranchez le câble de la carte WiFi. 4111. Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte système 12. Soulevez le bord de la carte système de 45 degrés. 13. Libérez la carte système des connecteurs de port. 14. Soulevez la carte système de l'ordinateur. 42Pose de la carte système 1. Mettez en place la carte système sur le châssis. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent la carte système à l'ordinateur. 3. Connecter les câbles suivants à la carte système : a) la carte du commutateur WiFi b) le haut-parleur c) la pile bouton d) LVDS 4. Faites passer les câbles d'antenne dans les rainures d'acheminement. 5. Installez le support LVDS en place dans l'ordinateur. 6. Serrez les vis de fixation du support LVDS sur l'ordinateur. 7. Branchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à la carte système. 8. Posez : a) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard b) le repose-mains c) le processeur d) le dissipateur de chaleur e) la carte modem f) la carte réseau sans fil WLAN g) le clavier h) l'habillage du clavier i) la carte Bluetooth j) le lecteur optique k) le disque dur l) le cache de base m) la batterie 9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du connecteur du modem 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) la carte Bluetooth 43e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran h) le repose-mains i) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) j) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard k) la carte système 3. Débranchez le câble de la carte modem de cette dernière. 4. Retirez le câble du modem du chemin d'acheminement. 5. Retirez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur du modem à l'ordinateur. 6. Retirez le support du connecteur du modem de l'ordinateur. 447. Retirez le connecteur du modem de l'ordinateur. Installation du connecteur du modem 1. Placez le connecteur du modem dans son compartiment. 2. Placez le support du connecteur du modem dans le connecteur. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur du modem. 4. Acheminez le câble du connecteur du modem. 5. Connectez le câble du connecteur du modem à la carte du modem. 6. Posez : a) la carte système b) le bâti de la carte ExpressCard c) la carte média (disponible uniquement pour les modèles E6430/E6430 ATG) d) le repose-mains e) l'ensemble écran f) le clavier g) l'habillage du clavier h) la carte Bluetooth i) le disque dur j) le cache de base k) la batterie 7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de l'ensemble écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie 45b) le cache de base 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support LVDS à la carte système. 4. Retirez le support LVDS de la carte système. 5. Débrancher le câble LVDS. 6. Débranchez le câble de la caméra de la carte système. 7. Retirez le câble LVDS du chemin de routage. 468. Retirez les vis pour libérer l'ensemble écran des deux côtés. 9. Soulevez l'ensemble écran et tirez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne à travers l'ouverture de l'ordinateur. 10. Retirer l'ensemble d'écran de l'ordinateur. Pose de l'ensemble écran 1. Mettez en place l'ensemble écran dans l'ordinateur. 2. Insérez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne sans fil à travers les orifices de la base du châssis et branchez-les. 473. Serrez les vis situées sur les deux coins pour fixer l'ensemble écran. 4. Acheminez les câbles d'antenne et LVDS à travers le chemin d'acheminement. 5. Branchez les câbles suivants à l'ordinateur : a) LVDS b) caméra 6. Connectez le support LVDS en place dans l'ordinateur. 7. Serrez la vis pour fixer le support à l'ordinateur. 8. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du cadre d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Ecartez doucement le bord inférieur du cache d'écran. 4. Ecartez les bords gauche, droit et haut du cadre de l'écran. 5. Retirez le cadre de l'écran de l'ensemble écran. 48Pose du cache de l'écran 1. Placez le cache d'écran sur le bloc écran. 2. En partant de l'angle supérieur, appuyez sur tout le cadre d'écran jusqu’à ce qu'il s'enclenche dans l'ensemble écran. 3. Appuyez sur les bord gauche et droit du cache d'écran. 4. Posez la batterie. 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du panneau d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) l'ensemble écran c) le cadre d'écran 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran. 4. Retournez le panneau d'écran. 495. Retirez l'adhésif du connecteur du câble LVDS et débranchez le câble LVDS de l'écran. 6. Retirez le panneau de l'écran de l'ensemble écran. Pose du panneau d'écran 1. Branchez le câble LVDS et collez la bande adhésive du câble LVDS. 2. Retournez l'écran et placez-le dans l'ensemble de l'écran. 3. Serrez les vis pour fixer le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran. 4. Posez : a) le cadre d'écran b) l'ensemble écran c) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de l'ensemble écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Déposez : 50a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support LVDS à la carte système. 4. Retirez le support LVDS de la carte système. 5. Débrancher le câble LVDS. 6. Débranchez le câble de la caméra de la carte système. 7. Retirez le câble LVDS du chemin de routage. 518. Retirez les vis pour libérer l'ensemble écran des deux côtés. 9. Soulevez l'ensemble écran et tirez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne à travers l'ouverture de l'ordinateur. 10. Retirer l'ensemble d'écran de l'ordinateur. Pose de l'ensemble écran 1. Mettez en place l'ensemble écran dans l'ordinateur. 2. Insérez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne sans fil à travers les orifices de la base du châssis et branchez-les. 523. Serrez les vis situées sur les deux coins pour fixer l'ensemble écran. 4. Acheminez les câbles d'antenne et LVDS à travers le chemin d'acheminement. 5. Branchez les câbles suivants à l'ordinateur : a) LVDS b) caméra 6. Connectez le support LVDS en place dans l'ordinateur. 7. Serrez la vis pour fixer le support à l'ordinateur. 8. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait des capuchons de charnière d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) la carte Bluetooth e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran 3. Faites pivoter les charnières gauche et droite vers le haut, en position verticale. 4. Ecartez le bord du capuchon de la charnière et retirez les capuchons de l'ensemble écran. 53Installation des capuchons de charnière d'écran 1. Faites glisser le capuchon de charnière gauche dans le panneau d'écran. 2. Faites pivoter la charnière vers le bas pour fixer le capuchon de la charnière dans le panneau d'écran. 3. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 pour le capuchon de la charnière droit. 4. Posez : a) l'ensemble écran b) le clavier c) l'habillage du clavier d) la carte Bluetooth e) le disque dur f) le cache de base g) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait des charnières d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) la carte Bluetooth e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran h) le cadre d'écran i) le panneau d'écran 3. Retirez les vis de fixation des plaques de la charnière de l'écran sur l'ensemble écran. 4. Retirez les plaques de charnière d'écran. 545. Retirez les vis qui fixent les charnières de l'écran à l'ensemble d'écran. 6. Retirez les charnières d'écran de l'ensemble écran. Installation des charnières d'écran 1. Placez les deux charnières d'écran sur le panneau. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer les charnières d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran. 3. Placez les plaques de charnière d'écran dans les charnières. 4. Serrez les vis pour fixer les plaques de charnière d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran. 5. Posez : a) le panneau d'écran b) le cadre d'écran c) l'ensemble écran d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) la carte Bluetooth g) le disque dur h) le cache de base 55i) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la caméra 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) l'ensemble écran c) le cadre d'écran d) le panneau d'écran 3. Débranchez le câble LVDS et de caméra de la caméra. 4. Retirez la vis de fixation de la caméra sur l'ensemble écran. 5. Retirez la caméra de l'ensemble de l'écran. 56Pose de la caméra 1. Installez la caméra dans son logement sur le panneau de l'écran. 2. Serrez la vis pour fixer la caméra à l'ensemble d'écran. 3. Connectez le câble LVDS et de caméra à la caméra. 4. Posez : a) le panneau d'écran b) le cadre d'écran c) l'ensemble écran d) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du câble LVDS et de caméra 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base c) le disque dur d) la carte Bluetooth e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) l'ensemble écran h) le cadre d'écran i) le panneau d'écran j) les charnières de l'écran 3. Débranchez le câble LVDS et de caméra de la caméra. 4. Retirez les parties adhésives qui fixent les câbles LVDS et de caméra à l'ensemble écran. 575. Retirez les câbles LVDS et de caméra de l'ensemble écran. Installation du câble LVDS et de caméra 1. Acheminez les câbles LVDS et de caméra à l'ensemble écran. 2. Fixez l'adhésif pour fixer le câble. 3. Connectez le câble LVDS et de caméra à la caméra. 4. Posez : a) les charnières de l'écran b) le panneau d'écran c) le cadre d'écran d) l'ensemble écran e) le clavier f) l'habillage du clavier g) la carte Bluetooth h) le disque dur i) le cache de base j) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 583 Informations complémentaires Cette section fournit des informations sur les fonctions supplémentaires de l'ordinateur. Informations du port d'accueil Le port d'accueil est utilisé pour connecter l'ordinateur portable à une station d'accueil (en option). 1. Port d'accueil 59604 Configuration du système La configuration du système permet de gérer le matériel de l'ordinateur et de définir les options du BIOS. Dans la configuration du système, vous pouvez : • Changer les paramètres NVRAM après avoir ajouté ou supprimé des matériels. • Afficher la configuration matérielle du système • Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • Définir les seuils de performance et de gestion de l'alimentation • Gérer la sécurité de l'ordinateur Séquence de démarrage La séquence de démarrage permet d'ignorer l'ordre des périphériques d'amorçage définis par la configuration du système et de démarrer directement depuis un périphérique donné (lecteur optique ou disque dur, par exemple). Lors du test à la mise sous tension (POST), lorsque le logo Dell s'affiche, vous pouvez : • Accéder à la configuration du système en appuyant sur la touche • Afficher le menu de démarrage à affichage unique en appuyant sur la touche Ce menu contient les périphériques depuis lesquels vous pouvez démarrer, y compris l'option des diagnostics. Les options du menu de démarrage sont les suivantes : • Removable Drive (Unité amovible (si disponible)) • STXXXX Drive (Unité STXXXX) REMARQUE : XXX correspond au numéro d'unité SATA. • Optical Drive (Lecteur optique) • Diagnostics REMARQUE : Si vous choisissez Diagnostics, l'écran ePSA diagnostics (Diagnostics ePSA) s'affiche. L'écran de séquence de démarrage affiche également l'option d'accès à l'écran System Setup (Configuration du système). Touches de navigation Le tableau suivant répertorie les touches de navigation dans la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options de configuration du système, les modifications que vous apportées sont enregistrées, mais elles ne sont appliquées qu'au redémarrage de l'ordinateur. 61Tableau 1. Touches de navigation Touches Navigation Touche Haut Passe au champ précédent. Touche Bas Passe au champ suivant. Permet de sélectionner une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (si applicable) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Développe ou réduit une liste déroulante, si applicable. Passe à la zone suivante active. REMARQUE : Pour la navigateur graphique standard uniquement. Passe à la page précédente tant que vous affichez l'écran principal. Si vous appuyez sur dans l'écran principal, un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications non enregistrées et le système redémarre. Affiche le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. Options du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Selon l'ordinateur et les périphériques installés, les éléments énumérés dans cette section peuvent ne pas apparaître. Tableau 2. Généralités Option Description System Information (Informations sur le système) Cette section énumère les principaux éléments matériels de l'ordinateur. • System Information (Informations sur le système) • Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire) • Processor Information (Informations sur le système) • Device Information (Informations sur les périphériques) Battery Information (Informations sur la batterie) Affiche l'état de charge de la batterie. Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) Vous permet de modifier l'ordre dans lequel l'ordinateur tente de trouver un système d'exploitation. Toutes les options ci-dessous sont sélectionnées. • Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) • Internal HDD (Disque sur interne) • USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB) • CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur CD/DVD/CD-RW) • Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Vous pouvez également choisir l'option de liste d'amorçage. Les options sont : 62Option Description • Legacy (Default Setting) (Mode hérité [Paramètre par défaut]) • UEFI Date/Time (Date/heure) Vous permet de régler la date et l'heure. Tableau 3. System Configuration (Configuration du système) Option Description Integrated NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Permet de configurer le contrôleur réseau intégré. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) • Enabled (Activée) • Enabled w/PXE (Default Setting) (Activé avec PXE [paramètre par défaut]) Port parallèle Vous permet de définir et de régler le port parallèle sur la station d'accueil en fonctionnement. Vous pouvez régler le port parallèle sur : • Disabled (Désactivé) • AT • PS2 • ECP Port série Identifie et définit les paramètres de port série. Vous pouvez définir le port série comme suit : • Disabled (Désactivé) • COM1 (Default Setting) (COM1 (paramètre par défaut)) • COM2 • COM3 • COM4 REMARQUE : Le système d'exploitation peut allouer des ressources, même si le paramètres est désactivé. SATA Operation (Fonctionnement SATA) Permet de configurer le contrôleur de disque dur SATA interne. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) • ATA • AHCI • RAID On (Default Setting) (RAID activé [Paramètre par défaut]) 63Option Description REMARQUE : SATA est configuré pour prendre en charge le mode RAID. Drives (Lecteurs) Permet de configurer les lecteurs SATA intégrés. Les options sont : • SATA-0 • SATA-1 • SATA-4 • SATA-5 Paramètre par défaut : All drives are enabled (Tous les lecteurs sont activés). Smart Reporting (Rapports SMART) Ce champ indique si les erreurs de disques durs intégrés sont signalées lors du démarrage du système. Cette technologie s'intègre dans la spécification SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) • Enable SMART Reporting (Activer les rapports SMART) - Cette option est désactivée par défaut. USB Configuration (Configuration USB) Permet de définir la configuration USB. Les options sont : • Enable Boot Support (Activation support d'amorçage) • Activation port USB externe Default Setting (Paramètre par défaut) : les deux options sont activées. USB PowerShare Vous permet de configurer le comportement de la fonction USB PowerShare. L'option est, par défaut, désactivée. • Enable USB PowerShare (Activer USB PowerShare) Keyboard Illumination (Eclairage du clavier) Vous permet de choisir le mode de fonctionnement de la fonction d'éclairage du clavier. Ces options sont les suivantes : • Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Valeur par défaut)) • Level is 25% (Niveau de 25 %) • Level is 50% (Niveau de 50 %) • Niveau de 75% • Niveau : 100 % Stealth Mode Control (Commande du mode furtif) Vous permet de régler le mode qui éteint les lumières et les sons de votre système. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée. 64Option Description • Enable Stealth Mode (Activer le mode furtif) Miscellaneous Devices (Périphériques divers) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les différents périphériques installés. Les options sont les suivantes : • Enable Internal Modem (Activer le modem interne) • Enable Microphone (Activer le microphone) • Enable eSATA Ports (Activer les ports eSATA) • Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection (Activer la protection contre la chute du disque dur) • Enable Module Bay (Activer la baie du module) • Enable ExpressCard (Activer ExpressCard) • Enable Camera (Activer la caméra) • Enable Media Card (Activer le lecteur de carte) • Disable Media Card (Désactiver le lecteur de carte) Paramètre par défaut : tous les périphériques sont activés Tableau 4. Vidéo Option Description LCD Brightness (Luminosité LCD) Vous permet de régler la luminosité du panneau lorsque le capteur ambiant est réglé sur Off(Arrêt). Optimus Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie NVIDIA Optimus. • Enable Optimus (Activer Optimus)- Paramètre par défaut. Tableau 5. Security (Sécurité) Option Description Intel TXT (LT-SX) Configuration (Configuration Intel TXT (LT-SX)) Cette option est désactivée par défaut. Admin Password (Mot de passe d'administrateur) Permet de définir, changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe administrateur (admin). REMARQUE : Vous devez définir le mot de passe de l'administrateur avant le mot de passe du système ou du disque dur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. 65Option Description REMARQUE : La suppression du mot de passe de l'administrateur supprime automatiquement le mot de passe du système et le mot de passe du disque dur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini) System Password (Mot de passe du système) Permet de définir, changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe administrateur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini) Internal HDD-0 Password (Mot de passe disque dur-0 interne) Vous permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe de l'administrateur Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini) Strong Password (Mot de passe renforcé) Permet d'appliquer l'option de toujours définir les mots de passe. Default Setting: Enable Strong Password (Paramètre par défaut : Activer les mots de passe complexes n'est pas sélectionné). Password Configuration (Configuration de mots de passe) Vous pouvez définir la longueur du mot de passe. Min = 4 , Max = 32 Password Bypass (Ignorer le mot de passe) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'autorisation d'ignorer les mots de passe système et HDD Interne lorsqu'ils sont définis. Les options sont : • Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Paramètre par défaut)) • Reboot bypass (Ignoré redémarrage) Password Change (Changement de mot de passe) Permet d'activer l'autorisation de désactivation des mots de passe Système et Disque dur quand le mot de passe administrateur est défini. Default Setting: Allow Non-Admin Password Changes (Paramètres par défaut : Autoriser les modifications de mot de passe non admin) n'est pas sélectionné Non-Admin Setup Changes (Modifications de configuration non-admin) Vous permet de déterminer si les modifications de réglage des options sont autorisées lorsque le mot de passe administrateur est défini. L'option est désactivée. • Permet les modifications du commutateur sans fil TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) Permet d'activer TPM (Trusted Platform Module) au cours du POST. Default Setting (Paramètre par défaut : L'option est désactivée. CPU XD Support (Prise en charge de CPU XD) Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable du processeur. Défault Setting: Enable CPU XD Support (Paramètre par défaut : Activer le support CPU XD) Computrace Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le logiciel Computrace en option. Les options sont : • Deactivate (Defaut Setting) (Désactiver) (Paramètres par défaut) • Disable (Désactiver) • Activate (Activer) 66Option Description REMARQUE : Les options Activate et Disable activent ou désactivent la fonction de façon permanente et aucune modification ultérieure n'est autorisée CPU XD Support (Prise en charge de CPU XD) Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable du processeur. Défault Setting: Enable CPU XD Support (Paramètre par défaut : Activer le support CPU XD) OROM Keyboard Access (Accès au clavier OROM) Vous permet de définir l'accès pour entrer dans les écrans de configuration de l'option ROM en utilisant des touches rapides lors du démarrage. Les options sont : • Enable (Activé [Paramètre par défaut]) • One Time Enable (Activation unique) • Disable (Désactiver) Admin Setup Lockout (Verrouillage de la configuration admin) Permet d'empêcher les utilisateurs d'entrer dans la configuration lorsqu'un mot de passe Administrateur est défini. Default Setting : Disabled (Paramètre par défaut : désactivé) Tableau 6. Performances Option Description Multi Core Support (Prise en charge multicœur) Ce champ indique si le processus aura un ou plusieurs coeurs activés. Certaines applications seront plus performantes avec des coeurs supplémentaires. Cette option est activée par défaut. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le support multicoeurs pour le processeur. Les options sont : • All (Default Setting) (Tous (paramètre par défaut)) • 1 • 2 Intel SpeedStep Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Intel SpeedStep. Default Setting: Enable Intel SpeedStep (Paramètre par défaut : Activer Intel SpeedStep) C States Control (Contrôle des états C) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les états supplémentaires de veille du processeur. Default Setting: The options C states, C3, C6, Enhanced C-states, and C7 options are enabled (Paramètre par défaut : les options des états C, C3, C6, états C améliorés, et C7 sont activées.) Intel TurboBoost Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode Intel TurboBoost du processeur. 67Option Description Default Setting: Enable Intel TurboBoost (Paramètre par défaut : Activer Intel TurboBoost) Hyper-Thread Control (Contrôle hyperthread) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction HyperThreading dans le processeur. Default Setting : Enabled (Paramètre par défaut : Activé) Tableau 7. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Option Description AC Behavior (Comportement CA) Permet à l'ordinateur de se mettre sous tension automatiquement, lorsque l'adaptateur en CA est branché. L'option est désactivée. • Wake On AC (Réveil sur CA) Auto On Time (Heure de démarrage auto) Permet de définir l'heure de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. Les options sont : • Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Paramètre par défaut)) • Every Day (Tous les jours) • Weekdays (Jours de la semaine) USB Wake Support (Prise en charge d'éveil USB) Vous permet d'activer les périphériques USB pour réveiller l'ordinateur du mode veille. L'option est désactivée • Enable USB Wake Support (Activer le support de réveil USB) Wireless Radio Control (Commande radio sans fil) Vous permet de contrôler la radio WLAN et WWAN. Les options sont les suivantes : • Control WLAN radio (Contrôler la radio WLAN) • Control WWAN radio (Contrôler la radio WWAN) Paramètre par défaut : les deux options sont désactivées. Wake on LAN/WLAN (Eveil réseau) Cette option permet d'activer l'ordinateur hors tension avec un signal LAN spécial. L'activation à partir de la veille n'est pas affectée par ce paramètre et elle doit être activée sur le système. Cette fonction fonctionne uniquement lorsque l'ordinateur est connecté à une alimentation CA. • Disabled (Désactivé) - Empêche le système d'être mis sous tension par des signaux spéciaux LAN lorsqu'il reçoit un signal d'activation du LAN ou d'un LAN sans fil. (Paramètre par défaut) • LAN Only (LAN uniquement) - Permet au système d'être mis sous tension par des signaux LAN spéciaux. • WLAN Only (WLAN uniquement) • LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN) Block Sleep (Bloquer mise en veille) Vous permet d'empêcher à l'ordinateur de passer en veille. L'option est désactivée par défaut. • Block Sleep (S3) (Bloquer la veille [S3]) 68Option Description Primary Battery Configuration (Configuration de la batterie principale) Vous permet de définir comment utiliser la charge de la batterie, lorsque le cordon d'alimentation est branché. Les options sont les suivantes : • Standard Charge (Chargement standard) • Express Charge • Predominantly AC use (Utilisation prédominante du CA) • Auto Charge (Chargement automatique) (Paramètre par défaut) • Custom (Chargement personnalisée) : vous pouvez régler le pourcentage auquel la batterie doit se charger. Battery Slice Configuration (Configuration de tranche de batterie) Vous permet de définir le type de chargement de la batterie. Les options sont les suivantes : • Standard Charge (Chargement standard) • Express Charge (Chargement expresse) (Paramètre par défaut) Tableau 8. POST Behavior (Comportement de l'autotest de démarrage) Option Description Adapter Warnings (Avertissements adaptateur) Vous permet d'activer les messages d'avertissement de l'adaptateur lorsque certains adaptateurs lorsque certains adaptateurs d'alimentation sont utilisés? L'option est activée par défaut. • Enable Adapter Warnings (Activer les avertissements relatifs à l'adaptateur) Mouse/Touchpad (Souris/Pavé tactile) Vous permet de définir la façon dont le système gère la souris et le pavé tactile. Les options sont : • Serial Mouse (Souris série) • PS2 Mouse (Souries PS2) • Touchpad/PS-2 Mouse (Pavé tactile/Souris PS-2) (Paramètre par défaut) Numlock Enable (Activer le verrouillage numérique) Spécifie s'il est possible d'activer la fonctionnalité VerrNum lors de l'amorçage du système. Cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable Numlock (Activer VerrNum) Fn Key Emulation (Emulation touche Fn) Vous permet de faire correspondre la fonction de la touche du clavier PS-2 avec la fonction de la touche d'un clavier interne. L'option est activée par défaut. • Enable Fn Key Emulation (Activer l'émulation de la touche Fn) Keyboard Errors (Erreurs clavier) Indique si les erreurs liées au clavier sont signalées à l'amorçage. Cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable Keyboard Error Detection (Activer la détection des erreurs clavier) POST Hotkeys (Touches d'autotest au démarrage) Indique si l'écran d'ouverture affiche un message indiquant la séquence de touches nécessaire pour entrer dans le menu d'option de démarrage du BIOS. • Enable F12 Boot Option menu (Activer le menu d'options d'amorçage F12) : cette option est activée par défaut. 69Option Description Fastboot Vous permet d'accélérer les processus de démarrage. Les options sont les suivantes : • Minimal • Thorough (Complet) (Paramètre par défaut) • Auto Tableau 9. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation) Option Description Virtualization (Virtualisation) Cette option indique si un moniteur de machine virtuel (VMM) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires offertes par la technologie de virtualisation Intel. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology (Activer la technologie Intel Vrtualization) : Default Setting (paramètre par défaut). VT for Direct I/O (Technologie de virtualisation pour E/S directes) Autorise ou empêche le moniteur VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor) (VMM) d'utiliser les fonctions métérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie de virtualisation Intel pour les E/S directes. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (Activer la technologie Intel Virtualization : paramètres par défaut. Tableau 10. Wireless (Sans fil) Option Description Wireless Switch (Commutateur sans fil) Vous permet de déterminer les périphériques sans fil qui peuvent être commandés par le commutateur sans fil. Les options sont les suivantes : • WWAN • Bluetooth • la carte WLAN Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Wireless Device Enable (Activer les périphériques sans fil) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques sans fil. Les options sont les suivantes : • WWAN • Bluetooth • la carte WLAN Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Tableau 11. Maintenance Option Description Service Tag (Numéro de service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire) Permet de créer un numéro d'inventaire système si aucun numéro de service n'est défini. Cette option n'est pas définie par défaut. 70Tableau 12. System Logs (Journaux du système) Option Description BIOS Events (Evénements du BIOS) Affiche le journal d'événements du système et permet de l'effacer. • Clear Log (Effacer le journal) Mise à jour du BIOS Il est recommandé de mettre à jour le BIOS (configuration du système) lors du remplacement de la carte système ou lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible. Pour les ordinateurs portables, vérifiez que la batterie est complètement chargée et que l'ordinateur est connecté au secteur. 1. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2. Accédez au site support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3. Si vous disposez du numéro de service ou du numéro de service express de l'ordinateur : REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs de bureau, le numéro de service se trouve sur l'étiquette sur la face avant de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs portables, le numéro de service se trouve sur le fond de l'ordinateur. a) Entrez le numéro de service ou le numéro de service express et cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer). b) Cliquez sur Submit et passez à l'étape 5. 4. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces numéros, sélectionnez l'unr des options suivantrs : a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement le numéro de service) b) Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans la liste Mes produits et services) c) Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans la liste de tous les produits Dell) 5. Dans l'écran de l'application et des pilotes, sous la liste déroulante Operating System (Système d'exploiration), sélectionnez BIOS. 6. Identifiez le dernier fichier BIOS et cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier). 7. Sélectionnez le mode de téléchargement préférentiel dans Please select your download method below window (Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement dans la fenêtre ci-dessous) et cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant). La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement de fichier) s'affiche. 8. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) pour enregistrer le fichier sur l'ordinateur. 9. Cliquez sur Run (Exécuter) pour installer les paramètres BIOS actualisés sur l'ordinateur. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Mots de passe du système et de configuration Vous pouvez définir un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration pour protéger l'ordinateur. Type de mot de passe Description Mot de passe système Mot de passe que vous entrer pour ouvrir un session sur le système. Mot de passe de configuration Mot de passe que vous devez entrer pour accéder aux paramètres du BIOS de l'ordinateur et les changer. 71PRÉCAUTION : Les fonctions de mot de passe fournissent un niveau de sécurité de base pour les données de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : N'importe quel utilisateur peut accéder aux données de l'ordinateur s'il n'est pas verrouillé et qu'il est laissé sans surveillance. REMARQUE : L'ordinateur est fourni avec la fonction de mot de passe système et de configuration désactivée. Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration Vous pouvez définir un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration uniquement lorsque l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Si l'état de mot de passe est Verrouillé, vous ne pouvez pas changer le mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Si le cavalier des mots de passe est désactivé, le mot de passe système et le mot de passe de configuration sont supprimés et vous n'avez pas à fournir de mot de passe système pour ouvrir une session. Pour entrer dans une configuration système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système) sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que Password Status est Unlocked. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, entrez le mot de passe du système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Suivez les instructions pour définir le mot de passe système : – Un mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. – Le mot de passe peut contenir des nombres de 0 à 9. – Seules les minuscules sont acceptées. – Seuls les caractères spéciaux suivants sont valides : espace, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`). Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. 4. Tapez le mot de passe système que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 5. Sélectionnez Setup Password, tapez le mot de passe système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Un message demande de retaper le mot de passe de configuration. 6. Tapez le mot de passe de configuration que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 7. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 8. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer. L'ordinateur redémarrage. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration Vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé (dans la configuration du système) avant de supprimer ou de changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration si l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Pour entrer dans la configuration du système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 721. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système), sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe système existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . 4. Sélectionnez Setup Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe de configuration existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . REMARQUE : Si vous changez le mot de passe système et/ou le mot de passe de configuration, entrez de nouveau le nouveau mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. Si vous supprimez l'un ou l'autre des mots de passe ou les deux, confirmez la suppression quand un message le demande. 5. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 6. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer et quitter la configuration du système. L'ordinateur redémarrage. 73745 Diagnostics En cas de problème avec l'ordinateur, exécutez les diagnostics ePSA avant de contacter l'assistance technique de Dell. Les diagnostics visent à tester le matériel de l'ordinateur sans équipement supplémentaire ou risque de perte de données. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème vous-même, le personnel de maintenance et d'assistance peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous aider à le résoudre. Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment) Les diagnostics ePSA (également appelés diagnostics système) vérifient complètement le matériel. ePSA est intégré au BIOS et il est démarré par le BIOS en interne. Les diagnostics système intégrés fournissent des options pour des périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques spécifiques pour : • Exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif • Répéter les tests • Afficher ou enregistrer les résultats des tests • Exécuter des tests rigoureux pour présentent des options de tests supplémentaires pour fournir des informations complémentaires sur un ou des périphériques défaillants • Afficher des messages d'état qui indiquent si les tests ont abouti • Afficher des messages d'erreur qui indiquent les problèmes détectés au cours des tests PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics système pour tester l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de ce programme avec d'autres ordinateurs peut générer des résultats non valides ou des messages d'erreur. REMARQUE : Certains tests de périphériques nécessitent l'interaction de l'utilsateur. Veillez à toujours être à côté de l'ordinateur lorsque vous exécutez les tests de diagnostic. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 2. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre, appuyez sur la touche lorsque le logo Dell apparaît. 3. Dans l'écran du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez l'option Diagnostics. La fenêtre Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment s'affiche avec la liste de tous les périphériques détectés sur l'ordinateur. Le programme de diagnostics lance les tests sur tous les périphériques détectés. 4. Si vous voulez lancer un test de diagnostic sur un périphérique donné, appuyez sur ; cliquez sur Yes (Oui) pour arrêter le test de diagnostic. 5. Sélectionnez le périphérique dans le panneau de gauche et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests). 6. En cas de problèmes, des codes d'erreur s'affichent. Notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. 75766 Dépannage de l'ordinateur Vous pouvez dépanner l'ordinateur en utilisant les indicateurs, tels que les voyants de diagnostic, les bips et les messages d'erreur lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur. Voyants d'état de l'appareil Tableau 13. Voyants d'état de l'appareil S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Les voyants d'état du périphérique se trouvent généralement sur le dessus ou le côté gauche du clavier. Ils sont utilisés pour afficher la connectivité et l'activité du stockage, de la batterie et des périphériques sans fil. En dehors de cette utilité, ils peuvent servir d'outil de diagnostic lorsqu'il existe une panne dans le système. Le tableau suivant explique comment comprendre les codes des voyants lorsqu'une erreur survient. Tableau 14. Lumière des voyants Voyant de stockage Voyant d'alimentation Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur Clignotant Uni Uni Possible défaillance du processeur. Uni Clignotant Uni Les modules de mémoire sont détectés mais ont rencontrés une erreur. Clignotant Clignotant Clignotant Défaillance de la carte système. Clignotant Clignotant Uni Défaillance probable de la carte graphique/vidéo. Clignotant Clignotant Éteint Défaillance système de l'initialisation du disque dur OU défaillance du système lors de l'initialisation ROM en option. Clignotant Éteint Clignotant Le contrôleur USB a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation. Uni Clignotant Clignotant Aucun module de mémoire n'est installé/détecté. Clignotant Uni Clignotant L'écran a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation. Éteint Clignotant Clignotant Le modem empêche le système d'achever l'auto-test de démarrage. 77Voyant de stockage Voyant d'alimentation Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur Éteint Clignotant Éteint L'initialisation de la mémoire a échoué ou la mémoire n'est pas prise en charge. Voyants d'état de la batterie Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière suivante : Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant et un voyant blanc Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell est fixé sur votre portable. Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant avec voyant blanc fixe . Défaillance de batterie temporaire lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant ambre clignotant constamment Défaillance de batterie irrémédiable avec adaptateur CA présent. Voyant éteint La batterie est en mode de chargement complet lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant blanc allumé La batterie est charge avec adaptateur secteur CA. 787 Caractéristiques techniques REMARQUE : Les offres proposées peuvent varier selon les pays. Les caractéristiques suivantes se limitent à celles que la législation impose de fournir avec l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support et sélectionnez l'option qui permet d'afficher les informations relatives à votre ordinateur. Tableau 15. System Information (Informations sur le système) Elément Spécification Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Mobile Intel 7 series (Intel QM77) Largeur de bus DRAM 64 bits Flash EPROM SPI 32 Mo, 64 Mo Bus PCIe Gen1 100 MHz Fréquence du bus externe DMI (5 GT/s) Tableau 16. Processeur Elément Spécification Types • Intel Core i3 series • Intel Core i5 series • Intel Core i7 series Mémoire cache L3 jusqu'à 8 Mo Tableau 17. Mémoire Elément Spécification Connecteur mémoire Deux emplacement SODIMM Capacité de la mémoire 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go Type de mémoire DDR3 SDRAM (1 600 MHz) Mémoire minimale 2 Go Mémoire maximale 16 Go 79Tableau 18. Audio Elément Spécification Type Quatre canaux son haute définition Contrôleur IDT92HD93 Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interface : Interne Son haute définition Externe entrée microphone/casque stéréo/connecteur haut-parleurs externes Haut-parleurs deux Amplificatîeur intégré de haut-parleurs 1 W (RMS) par canal Réglages du volume touches de fonction du clavier et menus de programmes Tableau 19. Vidéo Elément Spécification Type Intégrée sur la carte système Contrôleur • Intel HD Graphics • NVidia Discrete Graphics Tableau 20. Communications Fonctions Spécification Carte réseau 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet (RJ-45) Wireless (Sans fil) réseau local sans fil (WLAN) et réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) Tableau 21. Ports et connecteurs Fonctions Spécification Audio un connecteur de microphone/casque stéréo/haut-parleurs Vidéo • un connecteur VGA 15 pouces • connecteur HDMI à 19 broches Carte réseau un connecteur RJ-45 USB 2.0 • Un connecteur à 4 broches, compatible USB 2.0 • Un connecteur e/SAT, compatible USB 2.0 USB 3.0 deux Lecteur de cartes mémoire un lecteur de carte mémoire 8-en-1 80Fonctions Spécification Port d'accueil une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) une Tableau 22. Carte à puce sans contact Elément Spécification Cartes à puce et technologies prises en charge ISO14443A — 106 kb/s, 212 kb/s, 424 kb/s et 848 kb/s ISO14443B — 106 kb/s, 212 kb/s, 424 kb/s et 848 kb/s ISO15936 HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire, HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire Tableau 23. Écran Elément Spécification Type • HD (1 366x768), WLED • HD+ (1 600 x 900) • FHD (1 920 x 1 080) Taille Latitude E6430 14,0 pouces Latitude E6530 15,6 pouces Latitude E6430 ATG 14,0 pouces Dimensions : Latitude E6430 : Hauteur 192,50 mm (7,57 pouces) Largeur 324 mm (12,75 pouces) Diagonale 355,60 mm (14 pouces) Zone active (X/Y) 309,40 mm x 173,95 mm Résolution maximale • 1 366 x 768 pixels • 1 600 x 900 pixels Luminosité maximale 200 nits Latitude E6530 : Hauteur 210 mm (8,26 pouces) Largeur 360 mm (14,17 pouces) Diagonale 394,24 mm (15,60 pouces) Zone active (X/Y) 344,23 mm x 193,54 mm Résolution maximale • 1 366 x 768 pixels 81Elément Spécification • 1 600 x 900 pixels • 1 920 x 1 080 pixels Luminosité maximale 220 nits Latitude E6430 ATG : Hauteur 192,5 mm (7,57 pouces) Largeur 324 mm (12,75 pouces) Diagonale 355,60 mm (14 pouces) Zone active (X/Y) 357,30 mm x 246,50 mm Résolution maximale 1 366 x 768 pixels Luminosité maximale 730 nits Angle de fonctionnement De 0° (fermé) à 180° Fréquence d'affichage 60 Hz Angles minimum de visualisation : Latitude E6430 / Latitude E6530 Horizontal +/- 40° Vertical +10°/-30° Latitude E6430 ATG : Horizontal +/- 50° Vertical +/- 40° Pas de pixel : Latitude E6430 0,2265 mm x 0,2265 mm Latitude E6530 0,252 mm x 0,252 m Tableau 24. Clavier Elément Spécification Nombre de touches États-Unis : 86 touches ; Royaume-Uni : 87 touches ; Brésil : 87 touches ; Japon : 90 touches REMARQUE : Le pavé numérique est disponible pour Latitude E6530. Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji 82Tableau 25. Pavé tactile Elément Spécification Zone active : axe des X 80,00 mm axe des Y 45,00 mm Tableau 26. Batterie Elément Spécification Type • Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 4 cellules (40 W/h) avec Express Charge (uniquement pour certains pays) • Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 6 cellules (60 W/h) avec Express Charge • Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 9 cellules (97 W/h) avec Express Charge • Bloc batterie au lithium-ion de 9 cellules (87 W/h) Dimensions : 4 et 6 cellules : Profondeur 48,08 mm (1,90 ") Hauteur 20,00 mm (0,79 pouces) Largeur 208,00 mm (8,18 pouces) 9 cellules : Profondeur 71,79 mm (2,83”) Hauteur 20,00 mm (0,79 pouces) Largeur 214,00 mm (8,43 pouces) Poids : 4 éléments 240,00 g (0,53 livres) 6 éléments 344,73 g (0,76 lb) 9 éléments 508,02 g (1,12 livres) Tension : 4 éléments 14,80 VCC 6 et 9 cellules : 11,10 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F) À l'arrêt –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F) 83Elément Spécification Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 lithium Tableau 27. Adaptateur CA Elément Spécification Type 65 W STD et 65 W sans BFR/PVC Adaptateur d90 W Tension d'entrée De 100 VAC à 240 VAC De 100 VAC à 240 VAC Courant d'entrée (maximum) 1,50 A 1,60 A Fréquence d'entrée De 50 Hz à 60 Hz De 50 Hz à 60 Hz Puissance de sortie 65 W 90 W Courant de sortie 3,34 A (continu) 4,62 A (en continu) Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 40 °C (de 32 °F à 104 °F) De 0 °C à 40 °C (de 32 °F à 104 °F) À l'arrêt De –40 °C à 70 °C (de -40 °F à 158 °F) De –40 °C à 70 °C (de -40 °F à 158 °F) Tableau 28. Caractéristiques physiques Elément Latitude E6430 Latitude E6530 Latitude E6430 ATG Hauteur de 26,90 mm à 32,40 mm (de 1,06” à 1,27”) de 28,40 mm à 34,20 mm (de 1,11 pouces à 1,35 pouces) de 29,50 mm à 37,70 mm (de 1,16 pouces à 1,48 pouces) Largeur 352,00 mm (13,86 pouces) 384,00 mm (15,12 pouces) 359,20 mm (14,14 pouces) avec cache-port Profondeur 241,00 mm (9,49 pouces) 258,00 mm (10,16 pouces) 247,40 mm (9,74 pouces) avec cache-port Poids 2,02 kg (4,45 livres) 2,47 kg (5,44 livres) 2,74 kg (6,04 livres) Tableau 29. Conditions environnementales Elément Spécification Température : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F) Stockage –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximum) : En fonctionnement De 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage De 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Altitude (maximale) : 84Elément Spécification En fonctionnement De –15,24 à 3 048 m (de -50 pieds à 10 000 pieds) À l'arrêt De –15,24 m à 10 668 m (de -50 pieds à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de particules polluantes en suspension G1 tel que défini par ISA-71.04–1985 85868 Contacter Dell Pour prendre contact avec Dell pour des questions commerciales, de support technique ou de service clientèle : 1. Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com. 2. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Choisissez un pays ou une région situé au bas de la page. 3. Cliquez sur Contactez-nous dans la partie gauche de la page. 4. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service ou au support technique requis. 5. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous convient. 87 www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ OptiPlex™ 330 Quick Reference Guide Model DCSM and DCNENotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, and Dell OpenManage are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model DCSM and DCNE September 2007 P/N JY235 Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Before Working Inside Your Computer. . . . . . . 10 Adding and Replacing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Installing Your Computer in an Enclosure . . . . . 13 Setting Up a Home and Office Network . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting to a Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . 15 Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Moving Information to a New Computer . . . . . . . . 19 Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting Two Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Power Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Desktop Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Back Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Removing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Inside View of Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Contents System Board Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Replacing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Mini Tower Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Back Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Removing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Inside View of Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System Board Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Replacing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Power Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Diagnostic Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Clearing Forgotten Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Clearing CMOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Flashing the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Quick Reference Guide 5 Finding Information NOTE: Some features or media may be optional and may not ship with your computer. Some features or media may not be available in certain countries. NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • Desktop System Software (DSS) Drivers and Utilities Media NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities media may be optional and may not ship with your computer. Drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the media to reinstall drivers (see the online User’s Guide), to run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 48). Readme files may be included on your media to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can be found at support.dell.com.6 Quick Reference Guide • Basic troubleshooting information • How to run the Dell Diagnostics • Tools and utilities • How to set up a printer Quick Reference Guide NOTE: This document may be optional and may not ship with your computer. NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at support.dell.com. • Warranty information • Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) • Safety instructions • Regulatory information • Ergonomics information • End User License Agreement Dell™ Product Information Guide • How to remove and replace parts • Specifications • How to configure system settings • How to troubleshoot and solve problems Dell OptiPlex™ 330 User’s Guide Microsoft Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button→ Help and Support→ Dell User and System Guides→ System Guides. 2 Click the User’s Guide for your computer. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 7 • Service Tag and Express Service Code • Microsoft Windows License Label Service Tag and Microsoft® Windows® License These labels are located on your computer. • Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact support. • Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting support. NOTE: As an increased security measure, the newly designed Microsoft Windows license label incorporates a missing portion or "hole" to discourage removal of the label. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here8 Quick Reference Guide • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses, frequently asked questions • Community — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, service call and order status, warranty, and repair information • Service and support — Service call status and support history, service contract, online discussions with technical support • Dell Technical Update Service — Proactive e-mail notification of software and hardware updates for your computer • Reference — Computer documentation, details on my computer configuration, product specifications, and white papers • Downloads — Certified drivers, patches, and software updates Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view the appropriate support site. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 9 • Desktop System Software (DSS) — If you reinstall the operating system for your computer, you should also reinstall the DSS utility. DSS provides critical updates for your operating system and support for processors, optical drives, USB devices, and so on. DSS is necessary for correct operation of your Dell computer. The software automatically detects your computer and operating system and installs the updates appropriate for your configuration. To download Desktop System Software: 1 Go to support.dell.com, select your region or business segment, and enter your Service Tag. 2 Select Drivers & Downloads and click Go. 3 Click your operating system and search for the keyword Desktop System Software. NOTE: The support.dell.com user interface may vary depending on your selections. • How to use Windows • How to work with programs and files • How to personalize my desktop Windows Help and Support Center 1To access Windows Help and Support: • In Windows XP, click Start and click Help and Support. • In Windows Vista™, click the Windows Vista start button →Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System Media NOTE: The Operating System media may be optional and may not ship with your computer. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here10 Quick Reference Guide Before You Begin Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help to ensure your own personal safety. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. The operating system is already installed on your computer. To reinstall your operating system, use the Operating System disc, and see the online User’s Guide. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities disc to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. NOTE: The color of your disc varies based on the operating system you ordered. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 11 NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some cables have connectors with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. 1 Turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 12). CAUTION: Never apply power to the computer when the cover has been removed. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug the cable from the network device. 2 Disconnect all telephone or network cables from the computer. 3 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets. 4 Press the power button to ground the system board. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate static electricity, which could harm internal components. Adding and Replacing Parts This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: • You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 12 and "Before Working Inside Your Computer" on page 10. • You have read the safety information in the Dell™ Product Information Guide. • A component can be replaced or—if purchased separately—installed by performing the removal procedure in reverse order.12 Quick Reference Guide Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: • Small flat-blade screwdriver • Small Phillips screwdriver • Small plastic scribe Turning Off Your Computer NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close all open files and exit all open programs before you turn off your computer. 1 Shut down the operating system: a Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. b In the Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system, click Start→ Shut Down→ Shut down. In Microsoft® Windows Vista™, click the Windows Vista Start button , in the lower-left corner of the desktop, click the arrow in the lower-right corner of the Start menu as shown below, and then click Shut Down. The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process is complete. 2 Ensure that the computer and all attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for about 4 seconds to turn them off.Quick Reference Guide 13 Setting Up Your Computer Installing Your Computer in an Enclosure Installing your computer in an enclosure can restrict the airflow and impact your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat. Follow the guidelines below when installing your computer in an enclosure: NOTICE: The operating temperature specifications indicated in this manual reflects the maximum ambient operating temperature. The room ambient temperature needs to be a consideration when installing your computer in an enclosure. For example, if the ambient room temperature is at 25°C (77°F), depending on your computer’s specifications, you only have 5° to 10°C (9° to 18°F) temperature margin before you reach your computer’s maximum operating temperature. For details about your computer’s specifications, see the online User’s Guide. • Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. • If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30 percent airflow through the enclosure (front and back).14 Quick Reference Guide • If your computer is installed in a corner on a desk or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in) clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. NOTICE: Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. Restricting the airflow impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat.Quick Reference Guide 15 Setting Up a Home and Office Network Connecting to a Network Adapter To connect a network cable: NOTE: Plug the network cable into the network adapter connector on the computer. Do not plug the network cable into the modem connector on the computer. Do not plug a network cable into a telephone wall jack. 1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back of your computer. Insert the cable until it clicks into place, and then gently pull it to ensure that it is secure. 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to a network device.16 Quick Reference Guide Network Setup Windows XP The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Network Setup Wizard to guide you through the process of sharing files, printers, or an Internet connection between computers in a home or small office. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ Communications, and then click Network Setup Wizard. 2 On the Network Setup Wizard welcome screen, click Next. 3 Click Checklist for creating a network. NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) or later. 4 Complete the checklist and required preparations. 5 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions on the screen. network device network adapter connector on computer network cable network adapter connectorQuick Reference Guide 17 Windows Vista To make changes to your network setup in Microsoft® Windows Vista™: 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button, , and then click Network→ Network and Sharing Center. 2 Click Set up a connection or network. 3 Select the type of network connection you want to make and follow the instructions on the screen. 4 When finished, close the Network and Sharing Center. Connecting to the Internet NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country. To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an Internet service provider (ISP). Your ISP will offer one or more of the following Internet connection options: • DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your existing telephone line or cellular telephone service. With a DSL connection, you can access the Internet and use your telephone on the same line simultaneously. • Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your local cable TV line. • Satellite modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through a satellite television system. • Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a telephone line. Dial-up connections are considerably slower than DSL and cable (or satellite) modem connections. • Wireless LAN connections that provide Internet access using Bluetooth® wireless technology. If you are using a dial-up connection, connect a telephone line to the modem connector on your computer and to the telephone wall jack before you set up your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL or cable/satellite modem connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup instructions.18 Quick Reference Guide Setting Up Your Internet Connection To set up an Internet connection with a provided ISP desktop shortcut: 1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Double-click the ISP icon on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. If you do not have an ISP icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an Internet connection with a different ISP, perform the steps in the following section that corresponds to the operating system your computer is using. NOTE: If you are having problems connecting to the Internet, see "Setting Up a Home and Office Network" on page 15. If you cannot connect to the Internet but have successfully connected in the past, the ISP might have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later. Windows XP 1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Click Start→ Internet Explorer. The New Connection Wizard appears. 3 Click Connect to the Internet. 4 In the next window, click the appropriate option: • If you do not have an ISP and want to select one, click Choose from a list of Internet service providers (ISPs). • If you have already obtained setup information from your ISP but you did not receive a setup CD, click Set up my connection manually. • If you have a CD, click Use the CD I got from an ISP. 5 Click Next. If you selected Set up my connection manually, continue to step 6. Otherwise, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, contact your ISP. 6 Click the appropriate option under How do you want to connect to the Internet?, and then click Next. 7 Use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup.Quick Reference Guide 19 Windows Vista™ NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to the Internet wizard can help you get one. 1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and click Control Panel. 3 Under Network and Internet, click Connect to the Internet. The Connect to the Internet window appears. 4 Click either Broadband (PPPoE) or Dial-up, depending on how you want to connect: • Choose Broadband if you will use a DSL, satellite modem, cable TV modem, or Bluetooth wireless technology connection. • Chose Dial-up if you will use a dial-up modem or ISDN. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, click Help me choose or contact your ISP. 5 Follow the instructions on the screen and use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup. Moving Information to a New Computer You can use your operating system "wizards" to help you transfer files and other data from one computer to another—for example, from an old computer to a new computer. For instructions, see the following section that corresponds to the operating system that your computer is running. Microsoft® Windows® XP (Optional) The MicrosoftWindows XP operating system provides the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard to move data from a source computer to a new computer. You can transfer data, such as: • E-mail messages • Toolbar settings • Window sizes • Internet bookmarks 20 Quick Reference Guide You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or serial connection, or you can store it on removable media, such as a writable CD, for transfer to the new computer. NOTE: You can transfer information from an old computer to a new computer by directly connecting a serial cable to the input/output (I/O) ports of the two computers. To transfer data over a serial connection, you must access the Network Connections utility from the Control Panel and perform additional configuration steps, such as setting up an advanced connection and designating the host computer and the guest computer. For instructions on setting up a direct cable connection between two computers, see Microsoft Knowledge Base Article #305621, titled How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP. This information may not be available in certain countries. For transferring information to a new computer, you must run the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. You can use the optional Operating System media for this process or you can create a wizard disk with the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. Running the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard With the Operating System Media NOTE: This procedure requires the Operating System media. This media is optional and may not be included with certain computers. To prepare a new computer for the file transfer: 1 Open the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard: click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools→ Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. 2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears, click Next. 3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer→ Next. 4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I will use the wizard from the Windows XP CD→ Next. 5 When the Now go to your old computer screen appears, go to your old or source computer. Do not click Next at this time.Quick Reference Guide 21 To copy data from the old computer: 1 On the old computer, insert the Windows XP Operating System media. 2 On the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP screen, click Perform additional tasks. 3 Under What do you want to do?, click Transfer files and settings→ Next. 4 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer→ Next. 5 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you prefer. 6 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to transfer and click Next. After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection Phase screen appears. 7 Click Finish. To transfer data to the new computer: 1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click Next. 2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your new computer. When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen appears. 3 Click Finished and restart the new computer. Running the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard Without the Operating System Media To run the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard without the Operating System media, you must create a wizard disk that will allow you to create a backup image file to removable media. To create a wizard disk, use your new computer with Windows XP and perform the following steps: 1 Open the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard: click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools→ Files and Settings Transfer Wizard.22 Quick Reference Guide 2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears, click Next. 3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer→ Next. 4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I want to create a Wizard Disk in the following drive→ Next. 5 Insert the removable media, such as a writable CD, and click OK. 6 When the disk creation completes and the Now go to your old computer message appears, do not click Next. 7 Go to the old computer. To copy data from the old computer: 1 On the old computer, insert the wizard disk. 2 Click Start→ Run. 3 In the Open field on the Run window, browse to the path for fastwiz (on the appropriate removable media) and click OK. 4 On the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen, click Next. 5 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer→ Next. 6 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you prefer. 7 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to transfer and click Next. After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection Phase screen appears. 8 Click Finish. To transfer data to the new computer: 1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click Next. 2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. Follow the instructions on the screen. The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your new computer.Quick Reference Guide 23 When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen appears. 3 Click Finished and restart the new computer. NOTE: For more information about this procedure, search support.dell.com for document #154781 (What Are The Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™ Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System?). NOTE: Access to the Dell™ Knowledge Base document may not be available in certain countries. Microsoft Windows Vista™ (Optional) 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and then click Transfer files and settings→ Start Windows Easy Transfer. 2 In the User Account Control dialog box, click Continue. 3 Click Start a new transfer or Continue a transfer in progress. Follow the instructions provided on the screen by the Windows Easy Transfer wizard. Setting Up a Printer NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the computer. See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information, including how to: • Obtain and install updated drivers. • Connect the printer to the computer. • Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge. For technical assistance, refer to the printer owner's manual or contact the printer manufacturer. 24 Quick Reference Guide Printer Cable Your printer connects to your computer with either a USB cable or a parallel cable. Your printer may not come with a printer cable, so if you purchase a cable separately, ensure that it is compatible with your printer and computer. If you purchased a printer cable at the same time you purchased your computer, the cable may arrive in the computer’s shipping box. Connecting Two Monitors CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. If you purchased a graphics card that supports dual monitors, follow these instructions to connect and enable your monitors. The instructions tell you how to connect either two monitors (each with a VGA connector), one monitor with a VGA connector and one monitor with a DVI connector, or a TV. NOTICE: If you are connecting two monitors that have VGA connectors, you must have the optional DVI adapter to connect the cable. If you are connecting two flat-panel monitors, at least one of them must have a VGA connector. If you are connecting a TV, you may connect only one monitor (VGA or DVI) in addition to the TV. Connecting Two Monitors With VGA Connectors 1 Shutdown your system. NOTE: If your computer has integrated video, do not connect either monitor to the integrated video connector. If the integrated video connector is covered by a cap, do not remove the cap to connect the monitor or the monitor will not function. 2 Connect one of the monitors to the VGA (blue) connector on the back of the computer. 3 Connect the other monitor to the optional DVI adapter and connect the DVI adapter to the DVI (white) connector on the back of the computer. 4 Restart your system.Quick Reference Guide 25 Connecting One Monitor With a VGA Connector and One Monitor With a DVI Connector 1 Shutdown your system. 2 Connect the VGA connector on the monitor to the VGA (blue) connector on the back of the computer. 3 Connect the DVI connector on the other monitor to the DVI (white) connector on the back of the computer. 4 Restart your system. 1 optional DVI adapter 2 DVI (white) connector 3 TV-OUT connector 4 VGA (blue) connector 1 4 3 226 Quick Reference Guide Connecting a TV NOTE: You must purchase an S-video cable, available at most consumer electronics stores, to connect a TV to your computer. It is not included with your computer. 1 Shutdown your system. 2 Connect one end of the S-video cable to the optional TV-OUT connector on the back of the computer. 3 Connect the other end of the S-video cable to the S-video input connector on your TV. 4 Connect the VGA or DVI monitor. 5 Restart your system. Changing the Display Settings 1 After you connect the monitor(s) or TV, turn on the computer. The Microsoft® Windows® desktop displays on the primary monitor. 2 Enable extended desktop mode in the display settings. In extended desktop mode, you can drag objects from one screen to the other, effectively doubling the amount of viewable work space. Power Protection Devices Several devices are available to protect against power fluctuations and failures: • Surge protectors • Line conditioners • Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) Surge Protectors Surge protectors and power strips equipped with surge protection help prevent damage to your computer from voltage spikes that can occur during electrical storms or after power interruptions. Some surge protector manufacturers include warranty coverage for certain types of damage. Carefully read the device warranty when choosing a surge protector. A device with a higher joule rating offers more protection. Compare joule ratings to determine the relative effectiveness of different devices.Quick Reference Guide 27 NOTICE: Most surge protectors do not protect against power fluctuations or power interruptions caused by nearby lightning strikes. When lightning occurs in your area, disconnect the telephone line from the telephone wall jack and disconnect your computer from the electrical outlet. Many surge protectors have a telephone jack for modem protection. See the surge protector documentation for modem connection instructions. NOTICE: Not all surge protectors offer network adapter protection. Disconnect the network cable from the network wall jack during electrical storms. Line Conditioners NOTICE: Line conditioners do not protect against power interruptions. Line conditioners are designed to maintain AC voltage at a fairly constant level. Uninterruptible Power Supplies NOTICE: Loss of power while data is being saved to the hard drive may result in data loss or file damage. NOTE: To ensure maximum battery operating time, connect only your computer to a UPS. Connect other devices, such as a printer, to a separate power strip that provides surge protection. A UPS protects against power fluctuations and interruptions. UPS devices contain a battery that provides temporary power to connected devices when AC power is interrupted. The battery charges while AC power is available. See the UPS manufacturer documentation for information on battery operating time and to ensure that the device is approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).28 Quick Reference Guide Desktop Computer Front View 1 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras, or for bootable USB devices (see "System Setup Options in the online User’s Guide for more information on booting to a USB device). It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. 2 drive activity light The drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as an optical drive is operating. 3 power button, power light Press the power button to turn on the computer. The light in the center of this button indicates power state. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown. 9 8 3 5 1 10 6 4 2 11 7Quick Reference Guide 29 4 Dell badge This badge can be rotated to match the orientation of your computer. To rotate the badge, place your fingers around the outside of the badge, press firmly, and turn the badge. You can also rotate the badge using the slot provided near the bottom of the badge. 5 power light The power light illuminates and blinks or remains solid to indicate different operating states: • No light — The computer is turned off. • Steady green — The computer is in a normal operating state. • Blinking green — The computer is in a power-saving mode. • Blinking or solid amber — See "Power Problems" in the online User’s Guide. To exit from a power-saving mode, press the power button or use the keyboard or the mouse if it is configured as a wake device in the Windows Device Manager. For more information about sleep modes and exiting from a power-saving mode, see the online User’s Guide. See"Diagnostic Lights" on page 56" for a description of light codes that can help you troubleshoot problems with your computer. 6 diagnostic lights Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights" on page 56. 7 LAN indicator light This light indicates that a LAN (local area network) connection is established. 8 headphone and microphone connectors Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. Use the headphone connector to attach headphones and most kinds of speakers. 9 floppy drive Can contain an optional floppy drive. 10 optical drive Use the optical drive to play a CD/DVD. 11 Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call Support.30 Quick Reference Guide Back View CAUTION: Ensure that none of the system air vents are blocked. Blocking them would cause serious thermal problems. 1 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards. 2 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector (see "Back Panel Connectors" on page 31 for more information). 3 power connector Insert the power cable. 4 voltage selector switch For selecting voltage rating. 5 padlock rings Padlock rings are for attaching a commercially available antitheft device. The padlock rings allows you to secure the computer cover to the chassis with a padlock to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the computer. To use the padlock rings, insert a commercially available padlock through the rings, and then lock the padlock. 6 cover release latch Use this latch to open the computer cover. 1 2 3 4 5 6Quick Reference Guide 31 Back Panel Connectors 1 parallel connector Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB connector. NOTE: The integrated parallel connector is automatically disabled if the computer detects an installed card containing a parallel connector configured to the same address. For more information, see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s Guide. 2 link integrity light • Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. • Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. • Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1-Gbps (1000-Mbps) network and the computer. • Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 1 3 98 7 5 6 2 432 Quick Reference Guide 3 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector. On computers with a network adapter card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use at least Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. 4 network activity light This light flashes yellow when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state. 5 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 6 microphone/linein connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. Use the pink microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.Quick Reference Guide 33 Removing the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10. NOTE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover. NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting. 2 If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 3 Slide the cover release latch back as you lift the cover. 8 VGA video connector Connect the monitor’s VGA cable to the VGA connector on the computer. On computers with a video card, use the connector on the card. 9 serial connector Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. The default designation is COM1 for serial connector 1. For more information, see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s Guide.34 Quick Reference Guide 4 Pivot the cover up using the hinge tabs as leverage points. 5 Remove the cover from the hinge tabs and set it aside on a soft nonabrasive surface. 1 security cable slot 2 cover release latch 3 padlock ring 2 1 3Quick Reference Guide 35 Inside View of Your Computer CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To avoid electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the computer cover. NOTICE: Be careful when opening the computer cover to ensure that you do not accidentally disconnect cables from the system board. 1 drives bay (CD/DVD, floppy, and hard drive) 2 power supply 3 system board 4 card slots 5 heat sink assembly 6 front I/O panel 1 2 3 4 6 536 Quick Reference Guide System Board Components 1 internal speaker connector (INT_SPKR) 2 processor connector (CPU) 3 processor power connector (12VPOWER) 4 memory module connectors (DIMM_1, DIMM_2) 1 2 13 5 3 15 17 12 4 7 14 11 8 10 9 16 6Quick Reference Guide 37 Replacing the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. 1 Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2 Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3 To replace the cover: a Align the bottom of the cover with the hinge tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer. b Using the hinge tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward to close it. c Snap the cover into place by pulling back on the cover release latch and then releasing the latch when the cover is properly seated. d Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving the computer. 5 SATA drive connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 6 front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 7 power connector (POWER) 8 SATA drive connectors (SATA2, SATA3) 9 RTC reset jumper (RTCRST) 10 password jumper (PSWD) 11 battery socket (BATTERY) 12 PCI Express x16 card connector (SLOT1) 13 PCI card connectors (SLOT2 and SLOT3) 14 internal buzzer (SPKR) 15 serial/ PS/2 connector (PS2/SER2) 16 fan connector (FAN_CPU) 17 floppy drive connector (FLOPPY)38 Quick Reference Guide Mini Tower Computer Front View 1 Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call Support. 2 optical drive Use the optical drive to play a CD/DVD. 4 8 7 3 2 6 5 1 10 9Quick Reference Guide 39 3 floppy drive A floppy drive is optional. 4 drive activity light The drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as an optical drive is operating. 5 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras, or for bootable USB devices (see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s Guide for more information on booting to a USB device). It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. 6 diagnostic lights Use these lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights" on page 56. 7 power button, power light Press the power button to turn on the computer. The light in the center of this button indicates power state. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown. 8 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones and most kinds of speakers. 9 microphone connector Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. 10 LAN indicator light This light indicates that a LAN (local area network) connection is established.40 Quick Reference Guide Back View 1 cover release latch This latch allows you to open the computer cover. 2 padlock rings Padlock rings are for attaching a commercially available antitheft device. The padlock rings allows you to secure the computer cover to the chassis with a padlock to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the computer. To use the padlock rings, insert a commercially available padlock through the rings, and then lock the padlock. 4 3 5 6 2 1Quick Reference Guide 41 CAUTION: Ensure that none of the system air vents are blocked. Blocking them would cause serious thermal problems. Back Panel Connectors 3 power connector Insert the power cable. 4 voltage selector switch For selecting voltage rating. 5 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector (see "Back Panel Connectors" on page 31 for more information. 6 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards. 1 parallel connector Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB connector. NOTE: The integrated parallel connector is automatically disabled if the computer detects an installed card containing a parallel connector configured to the same address. For more information, see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s Guide. 1 3 98 7 5 6 2 442 Quick Reference Guide 2 link integrity light • Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. • Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. • Yellow — A good connection exists between a 1-Gbps (1000-Mbps) network and the computer. • Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 3 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector. On computers with a network adapter card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use at least Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. 4 network activity light This light flashes yellow when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state. 5 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 6 microphone/linein connector Use the blue and pink line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR; or personal computer microphone. 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.Quick Reference Guide 43 Removing the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10. NOTE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover. NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting. 2 Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up. 8 VGA video connector Connect the monitor’s VGA cable to the VGA connector on the computer. On computers with a video card, use the connector on the card. 9 serial connector Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. The default designation is COM1 for serial connector 1. For more information, see "System Setup Options" in the online User’s Guide.44 Quick Reference Guide 3 Release the computer cover by pulling it away from the front of the computer and lifting it up. 4 Set the cover aside in a secure location. 1 security cable slot 2 cover release latch 3 padlock ring 2 1 3Quick Reference Guide 45 Inside View of Your Computer 1 floppy drive 2 optical drive 3 power supply 4 system board 5 heat sink assembly 6 hard drive 1 3 4 6 2 546 Quick Reference Guide System Board Components 1 internal speaker connector (INT_SPKR) 2 processor connector (CPU) 3 processor power connector (12VPOWER) 4 memory module connectors (DIMM_1, DIMM_2) 1 2 6 5 13 3 15 17 12 4 7 14 11 8 10 9 16Quick Reference Guide 47 Replacing the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. 1 Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2 Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3 To replace the cover: a Align the bottom of the cover with the hinge tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer. b Using the hinge tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward to close it. c Snap the cover into place by pulling back on the cover release latch and then releasing the latch when the cover is properly seated. d Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving the computer. 4 Move the computer to the upright position. Solving Problems Dell provides a number of tools to help you if your computer does not perform as expected. For the latest troubleshooting information available for your computer, see the Dell support website at support.dell.com. 5 SATA drive connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 6 front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 7 power connector (POWER) 8 SATA drive connectors (SATA2, SATA3) 9 RTC reset jumper (RTCRST) 10 password jumper (PSWD) 11 battery socket (BATTERY) 12 PCI Express x16 card connector (SLOT1) 13 PCI card connectors (SLOT2 and SLOT3) 14 internal buzzer (SPKR) 15 serial/ PS/2 connector (PS2/SER2) 16 fan connector (FAN_CPU) 17 floppy drive connector (FLOPPY)48 Quick Reference Guide If computer problems occur that require help from Dell, write a detailed description of the error, beep codes, or diagnostic light patterns, record your Express Service Code and Service Tag below, and then contact Dell from the same location as your computer. For an example of the Express Service Code and Service Tag, see "Finding Information" in your computer User’s Guide. Dell Diagnostics CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in Lockups and Software Problems (see the online User’s Guide for details) and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities media is optional and may not ship with your computer. See "System Setup" in the online User’s Guide to review your computer’s configuration information, and ensure that the device that you want to test displays in the system setup program and is active. Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from the Drivers and Utilities media. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell. 1 Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is known to be working properly. Express Service Code: Service Tag:Quick Reference Guide 49 2 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3 When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. Select Diagnostics from the boot menu and press . NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities media. 4 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities media. 2 Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. 3 When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW and press . 4 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears and press . 5 Type 1 to start the CD menu and press to proceed. 6 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 7 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run.50 Quick Reference Guide Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the MainMenu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. NOTE: It is recommended that you select Test System to run a complete test on your computer. 2 After you have selected the Test System option from the main menu, the following menu appears: NOTE: It is recommended that you select Extended Test from the menu below to run a more thorough check of devices in the computer. 3 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and contact Dell. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. 4 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Option Function Test Memory Run the stand-alone memory test Test System Run System Diagnostics Exit Exit the Diagnostics Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices in the system. This typically can take 10 to 20 minutes. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices in the system. This typically can take an hour or more. Custom Test Use to test a specific device or customize the tests to be run. Symptom Tree This option allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having. This option lists the most common symptoms.Quick Reference Guide 51 5 When the tests are complete, close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. 6 Remove the Dell Drivers and Utilities media (if applicable). Power Lights CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. The power button light (bi-color LED) located on the front of the computer illuminates and blinks or remains solid to indicate different states: • If the power light is off, the computer is either turned off or is not receiving power. – Reseat the power cable in the power connector on the back of the computer and the electrical outlet. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.52 Quick Reference Guide – If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power strip is plugged into an electrical outlet and that the power strip is turned on. Also, bypass power protection devices, power strips, and power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on properly. – Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. • If the power light is steady green and the computer is not responding: – Ensure that the display is connected and powered on. – If the display is connected and powered on, see "Beep Codes" on page 53. • If the power light is blinking green, the computer is in standby mode. Press a key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power button to resume normal operation.If the power light is green and the computer is not responding: – Ensure the display is connected and powered on. – If the display is connected and powered on, see "Beep Codes" on page 53. • If the power light is steady amber, the computer is receiving electrical power, but a device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed. – Remove and then reinstall the memory modules. – Remove and then reinstall any cards. – Remove and then reinstall the graphics card, if applicable. • If the power light is blinking amber, there may be a power problem or an internal device malfunction. – Ensure that all power cables are securely connected to the system board (see "System Board Components" on page 36). – Ensure that the main power cable and front panel cable are securely connected to the system board (see "System Board Components" on page 36).Quick Reference Guide 53 Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. For example, beep code 1-3-1 (one possible beep code) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. Reseating the memory modules may correct the following beep code errors. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" in the User’s Guide) for instructions on obtaining technical assistance. If you experience any of the following beep code errors, see "Contacting Dell" in the User’s Guide for instructions on obtaining technical assistance. Code Cause 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure54 Quick Reference Guide System Messages NOTE: If the message you received is not listed in the table, see the documentation for either the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 4-2-1 No timer tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failure ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T CHECKPOINT [NNNN]. FO R HELP IN RESOLVING THIS PROBLEM, PLEASE NOTE THIS CHECKPOINT AND CONTACT DELL TECHNICAL SUPPORT — The computer failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive times for the same error. Code CauseQuick Reference Guide 55 CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR — Possible motherboard failure or RTC battery low. Replace battery. CPU FAN FAILURE — CPU fan failure. Replace the CPU fan. DISKETTE DRIVE 0 SEEK FAILURE — A cable may be loose, or the computer configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Check cable connections. DISKETTE READ FAILURE — The floppy disk may be defective or a cable may be loose. Replace the floppy disk/check for a loose cable connection. HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE — Possible hard disk drive failure during HDD POST. Check cables /swap hard disks. HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE — Possible HDD failure during HDD boot test. KEYBOARD FAILURE — Keyboard failure or keyboard cable loose. NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE — The system cannot detect a bootable device or partition. • If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that the cables are connected and that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. • If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the cables are connected and that the drive is installed properly and partitioned as a boot device. • Enter system setup and ensure that the boot sequence information is correct. NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT — A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning or motherboard failure. NON-SYSTEM DISK O R DISK ERROR — Replace the floppy disk with one that has a bootable operating system or remove the floppy disk from drive A and restart the computer.56 Quick Reference Guide Diagnostic Lights CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four lights labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the front or back panel. The lights can be off or green. When the computer starts normally, the patterns or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. When the computer starts normally, the patterns or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. If the POST portion of system boot completes successfully, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions during the POST process, the pattern displayed on the LEDs may help identify where in the process the computer halted. NOTE: The orientation of the diagnostic lights may vary depending on the system type. The diagnostic lights can appear either vertical or horizontal. NO T A BOOT DISKETTE — Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart your computer. USB OVER CURRENT ERROR — Disconnect the USB device. Use an external power source for the USB device. NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE. DELL RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY. A PARAMETER OUT O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM — S.M.A.R.T error, possible HDD failure. This feature can be enabled or disabled in BIOS setup.Quick Reference Guide 57 Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal "off" condition, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. The diagnostic lights are not lit after the computer successfully boots to the operating system. Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. A possible BIOS failure has occurred; the computer is in the recovery mode. Run the BIOS Recovery utility, wait for recovery completion, and then restart the computer. A possible processor failure has occurred. Reinstall the processor and restart the computer. Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. • If you have one memory module installed, reinstall it and restart the computer. (see the online User’s Guide for instructions on how to remove and install memory modules.) • If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. • If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. • If the problem persists, contact Dell.58 Quick Reference Guide A possible graphics card failure has occurred. • If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, reinstall it, and then restart the computer. • If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart the computer. • If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell. A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested ResolutionQuick Reference Guide 59 No memory modules are detected. • If you have one memory module installed, reinstall it and restart the computer. See the online User’s Guide for instructions on how to remove and install memory modules. • If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. • If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. • If the problem persists, contact Dell. Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. • Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist. • Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer. • If the problem persists, Contact Dell. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution60 Quick Reference Guide Clearing Forgotten Passwords CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10. 2 Remove the computer cover (see "Removing the Computer Cover" on page 43). 3 Locate the 2-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board. By default, Pin1 and Pin2 should be connected. You will need to remove the jumper and boot the system, as follows. 4 Remove the jumper. A failure has occurred. This pattern also displays when you enter system setup and may not indicate a problem. • Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive and the optical drive. • Check the computer message that appears on your monitor screen. • If the problem persists, Contact Dell. After POST is complete, all four diagnostic lights turn green briefly before turning off to indicate normal operating condition. None. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested ResolutionQuick Reference Guide 61 5 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 37). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into the computer. 6 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 7 After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 12). 8 Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet. 9 Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board. 10 Open the computer cover. 11 Locate the 2-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to reenable the password feature. 12 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 37).62 Quick Reference Guide NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 13 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. NOTE: This procedure enables the password feature. When you enter system setup (see "Entering System Setup" in your User’s Guide), both system and administrator password options appear as Not Set—meaning that the password feature is enabled but no password is assigned. 14 Assign a new system and/or administrator password. Clearing CMOS Settings CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 10. NOTE: The computer must be disconnected from the electrical outlet to clear the CMOS setting. 2 Remove the computer cover (see "Removing the Computer Cover" on page 43). 3 Remove the computer cover. 4 Reset the current CMOS settings: a Locate the password (PSWD) and CMOS (RTCRST) jumpers on the system board (see "Clearing Forgotten Passwords" on page 60). b Remove the password jumper plug from its pins. c Place the password jumper plug on the RTCRST pins and wait approximately 5 seconds. d Remove the jumper plug from the RTCRST pins and place it back on the password pins. 5 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 37). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. 6 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.Quick Reference Guide 63 Flashing the BIOS The BIOS may require flashing when an update is available or when replacing the system board. 1 Turn on the computer. 2 Locate the BIOS update file for your computer at the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 3 Click Download Now to download the file. 4 If the Export Compliance Disclaimer window appears, click Yes, I Accept this Agreement. The File Download window appears. 5 Click Save this program to disk, and then click OK. The Save In window appears. 6 Click the down arrow to view the Save In menu, select Desktop, and then click Save. The file downloads to your desktop. 7 Click Close when the Download Complete window appears. The file icon appears on your desktop and is titled the same as the downloaded BIOS update file. 8 Double-click the file icon on the desktop and follow the on-screen instructions.64 Quick Reference GuideIndex 65 Index B beep codes, 53 C CDs operating system, 9 CMOS settings clearing, 62 computer beep codes, 53 components inside, 35, 45 inside view, 35, 45 cover removing, 33, 43 replacing, 37, 47 D Dell Diagnostics, 48 Dell support site, 8 diagnostics beep codes, 53 Dell, 48 documentation End User License Agreement, 6 ergonomics, 6 online, 8 Product Information Guide, 6 Quick Reference, 6 regulatory, 6 safety, 6 User’s Guide, 6 warranty, 6 E End User License Agreement, 6 ergonomics information, 6 error messages beep codes, 53 H hardware beep codes, 53 Dell Diagnostics, 48 Help and Support Center, 9 help file Windows Help and Support Center, 9 I installing parts before you begin, 11 recommended tools, 1266 Index turning off your computer, 12 Internet connection about, 17 options, 17 setting up, 18 L labels Microsoft Windows, 7 Service Tag, 7, 29, 38 lights power, 29 M monitor clone mode, 26 connect DVI, 24-25 connect TV, 24, 26 connect two, 24-25 connect VGA, 24-25 display settings, 26 extended desktop mode, 26 motherboard. See system board N network Network Setup Wizard, 16 Network Setup Wizard, 16 O operating system reinstalling, 9 Operating System CD, 9 P password clearing, 60 jumper, 60 power button, 28, 39 light, 29 line conditioners protection devices surge protectors UPS printer cable, 24 connecting, 15, 23 setting up, 15, 23 problems beep codes, 53 Dell Diagnostics, 48 Product Information Guide, 6 R regulatory information, 6 ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 48Index 67 S S.M.A.R.T, 56 safety instructions, 6 Service Tag, 7, 29, 38 Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities CD, 49 Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive, 48 support website, 8 system board, 36, 46 T troubleshooting Dell Diagnostics, 48 Help and Support Center, 9 TV connect to computer, 24, 26 U uninterruptible power supply. See UPS UPS User’s Guide, 6 W warranty information, 6 Windows XP Help and Support Center, 9 Network Setup Wizard, 16 reinstalling, 9 wizards Network Setup Wizard, 1668 Indexwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ OptiPlex™ 330 Guide de référence rapide Modèles DCSM et DCNERemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, Pentium, et Celeron sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèles DCSM et DCNE Septembre 2007 Réf. JY235 Rév. A00Table des matières 71 Table des matières Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Avant de commencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Ajout et remplacement de pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Connexion à une carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Configuration réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Connexion à Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Configuration d'une imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Raccordement de deux moniteurs . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Ordinateur de bureau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Connecteurs du panneau arrière . . . . . . . . . 10072 Table des matières Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Vue intérieure de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Composants de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . 106 Ordinateur mini-tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Connecteurs du panneau arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Vue intérieure de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Composants de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . 116 Résolution des problèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Voyants d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Voyants de diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Effacement des mots de passe oubliés . . . . . . . . . 129 Effacement des paramètres CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Clignotement du BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Guide de référence rapide 73 Recherche d'informations REMARQUE : Il se peut que certaines fonctionnalités et certains supports soient en option et ne soient pas livrés avec votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ne sont pas nécessairement disponibles dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient fournies avec votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici • Programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • Logiciel DSS (Desktop System Software) Support Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Il se peut que le support Drivers and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec tous les ordinateurs. Les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser ce support pour réinstaller les pilotes (reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne) et pour exécuter Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 117). Des fichiers « Lisez-moi » peuvent être inclus sur votre support ; ces fichiers fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques de dernière minute apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des pilotes et de la documentation se trouvent à l'adresse support.dell.com.74 Guide de référence rapide • Informations de dépannage de base • Comment exécuter Dell Diagnostics • Outils et utilitaires • Comment installer une imprimante Guide de référence rapide REMARQUE : Ce document peut être en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com. • Informations sur les garanties • Termes et Conditions (États-Unis uniquement) • Consignes de sécurité • Informations sur les réglementations • Informations relatives à l'ergonomie • Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™ • Comment retirer et remplacer des pièces • Caractéristiques • Comment configurer les paramètres du système • Comment déterminer et résoudre des problèmes Guide d'utilisation du Dell OptiPlex™ 330 Centre d'aide et de support Microsoft Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista, puis sur Aide et support→ User and system guides (Guides d'utilisation du système)→System Guides (Guides de système). 2 Cliquez sur le Guide d'utilisation de votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide de référence rapide 75 • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft® Windows® Ces étiquettes sont apposées à l'ordinateur. • Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous contactez le service de support. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support. REMARQUE : Par mesure de sécurité, la nouvelle étiquette de licence de Microsoft Windows intègre une partie manquante afin d'éviter qu'elle ne soit enlevée. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici76 Guide de référence rapide • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens, cours en ligne et questions fréquemment posées • Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Coordonnées, appels de service et état des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations • Service et support — État des appels de service et historique du support, contrat de service, discussions en ligne avec le support technique • Service Dell Technical Update — Notification proactive par e-mail des mises à jour logicielles et matérielles de votre ordinateur • Référence — Documentation de l'ordinateur, détails sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques de produit et livres blancs • Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles agréés Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région ou votre secteur d'activité pour afficher le site de support qui vous concerne. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide de référence rapide 77 • DSS (Desktop System Software - Logiciel système de bureau) — Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur, vous devez également réinstaller l'utilitaire DSS. DSS fournit des mises à jour essentielles pour le système d'exploitation et la prise en charge des processeurs, des lecteurs optiques, des périphériques USB, etc. DSS est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell. Ce logiciel détecte automatiquement votre ordinateur et son système d'exploitation, et installe les mises à jour appropriées à votre configuration. Pour télécharger DSS (Desktop System Software) : 1 Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com, sélectionnez votre région ou secteur d'activité, puis saisissez votre numéro de service. 2 Sélectionnez Drivers & Downloads (Pilotes et téléchargements) et cliquez sur OK. 3 Cliquez sur votre système d'exploitation et recherchez le mot-clé Desktop System Software. REMARQUE : L'interface utilisateur support.dell.com peut varier selon vos sélections. • Comment utiliser Windows • Comment utiliser des programmes et des fichiers • Comment personnaliser mon bureau Centre d'aide et de support de Windows 1 Pour accéder à l'aide et au support de Windows : • Sous Windows XP, cliquez sur Démarrer et sur Aide et support. • Sous Windows Vista™, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista et sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation Support Operating System REMARQUE : Il se peut que le support Operating System soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec certains ordinateurs. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici78 Guide de référence rapide Avant de commencer Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur contre les dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité personnelle. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les pièces ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la languette de montage métallique. Tenez les pièces, telles qu'un processeur, par les bords et non par les broches. Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller votre système d'exploitation, utilisez le disque Operating System et reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne. Après la réinstallation de votre système d'exploitation, utilisez le disque Drivers and Utilities pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques fournis avec l'ordinateur. L'étiquette de la Clé de produit du système d'exploitation est apposée sur l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur du disque varie selon le système d'exploitation que vous avez commandé. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide de référence rapide 79 AVIS : Seul un technicien d'entretien qualifié doit effectuer les réparations sur votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non agréée par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la languette de retrait, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis de connecteurs à languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez ce type de câble, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage vers l'intérieur avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de connecteur. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. AVIS : Avant de commencer à travailler sur l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes suivantes pour éviter de l'endommager. 1 Mettez votre ordinateur hors tension (reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 80). PRÉCAUTION : Ne mettez jamais l'ordinateur sous tension si le capot est retiré. AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. 2 Débranchez tous les câbles de téléphone ou réseau de l'ordinateur. 3 Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont reliés de leur prise secteur. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre à la terre la carte système. AVIS : Avant de toucher quoi que ce soit à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, raccordezvous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple la partie métallique à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre intervention, touchez périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes. Ajout et remplacement de pièces Cette section fournit des procédures pour le retrait et l'installation des composants dans votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes doivent exister préalablement à chaque procédure : • Vous avez suivi les étapes décrites dans les sections « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 80 et « Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur » à la page 78.80 Guide de référence rapide • Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit de Dell™. • Pour remplacer un composant ou pour l'installer, s'il a été acheté séparément, effectuez la procédure de retrait en ordre inverse. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document exigent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à lame plate • un petit tournevis cruciforme • une petite pointe en plastique Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, enregistrez tous les fichiers ouverts, fermez-les et quittez toutes les applications avant de procéder à l'arrêt du système. 1 Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : a Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation. b Sous le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Arrêter→ Arrêter. Sous Microsoft® Windows Vista™, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , dans le coin inférieur gauche du bureau, cliquez sur la flèche dans le coin inférieur droit du menu Démarrer comme illustré ci-dessous, puis cliquez sur Arrêter. L'ordinateur s'éteint automatiquement une fois le processus d'arrêt du système d'exploitation terminé. 2 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et les périphériques reliés sont éteints. Si votre ordinateur et les périphériques reliés ne s'éteignent pas automatiquement lorsque vous arrêtez le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant environ 4 secondes pour les éteindre.Guide de référence rapide 81 Configuration de votre ordinateur Installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte L'installation de votre ordinateur dans une enceinte peut restreindre la circulation de l'air et ainsi affecter la performance de votre ordinateur et peut- être même le faire surchauffer. Suivez les consignes ci-dessous lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur dans une enceinte : AVIS : Les spécifications de la température de fonctionnement indiquées dans ce manuel reflètent la température ambiante maximale de fonctionnement. La température ambiante doit être prise en compte lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur dans une enceinte. Par exemple, si la température ambiante est de 25 °C (77 °F), selon les spécifications de votre ordinateur, vous n'avez qu'une marge de température de 5° à 10 °C (de 9° à 18 °F) avant d'atteindre la température maximale de fonctionnement de votre ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus sur les spécifications de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne. • Laissez un dégagement d'au moins 10,2 cm (4 po) au niveau des entrées d'air de l'ordinateur afin de permettre la circulation de l'air nécessaire à une bonne ventilation. • Si l'enceinte est équipée de portes, celles-ci doivent être du type qui permet une circulation d'air de 30 pour cent à l'intérieur de l'enceinte (avant et arrière).82 Guide de référence rapide • Si votre ordinateur est installé dans un coin sur un bureau ou en-dessous d'un bureau, prévoyez une ouverture d'au moins 5,1 cm (2 po.) entre l'arrière de l'ordinateur et le mur afin d'assurer la circulation d'air nécessaire à une ventilation appropriée. AVIS : N'installez pas votre ordinateur dans une enceinte qui ne permet pas un écoulement d'air. Une restriction de circulation d'air affecte les performances de votre ordinateur et peut même le faire surchauffer.Guide de référence rapide 83 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise Connexion à une carte réseau Pour connecter un câble de réseau : REMARQUE : Raccordez le câble de réseau au connecteur réseau de votre ordinateur. Ne le raccordez pas au connecteur modem de votre ordinateur. Ne raccordez pas non plus de câble de réseau à une prise téléphonique murale. 1 Raccordez le câble de réseau au connecteur de carte réseau à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Insérez le câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez dessus doucement pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble de réseau à un périphérique réseau.84 Guide de référence rapide Configuration réseau Windows XP L'Assistant Configuration réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre ordinateurs présents au sein d'un réseau domestique ou d'une petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Configuration réseau. 2 Sur l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Configuration réseau, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion This computer connects directly to the Internet (Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet) entraîne l'activation du pare-feu intégré fourni avec Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1). 4 Terminez la liste de vérifications et les préparations requises. 5 Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. périphérique réseau connecteur de carte réseau de l'ordinateur câble de réseau connecteur de carte réseauGuide de référence rapide 85 Windows Vista Pour modifier votre configuration réseau dans Microsoft® Windows Vista™ : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Réseau→ Centre de réseau et de partage. 2 Cliquez sur Configurer une connexion ou un réseau. 3 Sélectionnez le type de connexion réseau souhaité et suivez les instructions à l'écran. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez le Centre de réseau et de partage. Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Votre fournisseur d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion Internet suivantes : • Connexions ADSL qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de votre ligne téléphonique existante ou un service de téléphone cellulaire. Avec une connexion ADSL, vous pouvez accéder à Internet et utiliser votre téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément. • Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de la ligne TV câblée locale. • Connexions modem par satellite qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'un système de télévision par satellite. • Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup plus lentes que les connexions ADSL et de modem par câble (ou satellite). • Connexions LAN sans fil qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®. Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne téléphonique au connecteur du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion ADSL ou modem par câble/satellite, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) ou votre fournisseur de service de téléphone cellulaire pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration.86 Guide de référence rapide Configuration de votre connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l'aide du raccourci de bureau d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet fourni : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Pour effectuer la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Si vous ne voyez pas l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur votre bureau ou que vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre FAI, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous et appropriée au système d'exploitation que vous utilisez. REMARQUE : Si vous rencontrez des problèmes de connexion à Internet, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise » à la page 83. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet alors que vous l'avez fait auparavant, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet subisse une interruption de services. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Windows XP 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Internet Explorer. L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée : • Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en sélectionner un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet. • Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur de services Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant.Guide de référence rapide 87 Si vous sélectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour terminer la configuration. REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour terminer la configuration. Windows Vista™ REMARQUE : Veillez à avoir à portée de main les informations concernant votre FAI. Si vous n'avez pas de FAI, l'Assistant Connexion à Internet vous aide à en trouver un. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Panneau de configuration. 3 Sous Réseau et Internet, cliquez sur Connexion à Internet. La fenêtre Connexion à Internet s'affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Large bande (PPPoE) ou Accès à distance, selon la façon dont vous souhaitez vous connecter : • Choisissez Large bande si vous comptez utiliser une connexion ADSL, un modem par satellite, un modem par câble ou la technologie sans fil Bluetooth. • Choisissez Accès à distance si vous comptez utiliser un modem d'accès à distance ou le RNIS. REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, cliquez sur Aidez-moi à choisir ou contactez votre FAI. 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran et utilisez les informations de configuration fournies par votre FAI pour terminer la procédure de configuration.88 Guide de référence rapide Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Vous pouvez utiliser les « Assistants » de votre système d'exploitation pour transférer des fichiers et toute autre donnée d'un ordinateur à l'autre, par exemple d'un ancien ordinateur vers un nouvel ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section correspondant au système d'exploitation que vous utilisez. Microsoft® Windows® XP (optionnel) Le système d'exploitation MicrosoftWindows XP fournit l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres pour déplacer les données de l'ordinateur source vers un nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que : • messages e-mail • paramètres de la barre d'outils • tailles de fenêtre • signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données vers un nouvel ordinateur en utilisant une connexion réseau ou série, ou les stocker sur un support amovible, comme un CD inscriptible. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez transférer les informations d'un ancien ordinateur vers un nouveau en connectant directement un câble série aux ports d'entrée/sortie (E/S) des deux ordinateurs. Pour le transfert de données par connexion série, vous devez accéder à l'utilitaire Connexions réseau depuis le Panneau de configuration et passer par des étapes de configuration supplémentaires, comme le paramétrage d'une connexion avancée et la désignation de l'ordinateur hôte et invité. Pour des instructions sur la configuration d'une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances de Microsoft Article nº 305621, intitulé How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP (Comment configurer une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs sous Windows XP). Il se peut que ces informations ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays. Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez utiliser le support Operating System en option ou créer un disque Assistant à l'aide de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres.Guide de référence rapide 89 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le support Operating System REMARQUE : Le support Operating system est requis. Toutefois, ce support est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec certains ordinateurs. Pour préparer un nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers : 1 Ouvrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→ Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP→ Suivant. 5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le support Operating System pour Windows XP. 2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres→ Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur→ Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 6 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 7 Cliquez sur Terminer.90 Guide de référence rapide Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support Operating System Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le support Operating System, il faut créer un disque Assistant qui va permettre la création d'un fichier d'image de sauvegarde pour support amovible. Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de Windows XP et suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1 Ouvrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système→ Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je désire créer un disque Assistant dans le lecteur suivant→ Suivant. 5 Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'un CD inscriptible, puis cliquez sur OK. 6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Now go to your old computer (Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur) apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant. 7 Allez à votre ancien ordinateur.Guide de référence rapide 91 Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Insérez le disque Assistant sur l'ancien ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Exécuter. 3 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz (pour le support amovible approprié) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur→ Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, rendez-vous sur le site Web support.dell.com pour accéder au document nº 154781 (What Are The Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™ Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System? [Quelles sont les différentes méthodes pour transférer des fichiers à partir de mon ancien ordinateur vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP ?]).92 Guide de référence rapide REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base de connaissances Dell™. Microsoft Windows Vista™ (optionnel) 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista , puis sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres→ Start Windows Easy Transfer (Lancer le transfert de fichiers et de paramètres Windows). 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur, cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Cliquez sur Lancer un nouveau transfert ou Continuer un transfert en cours. Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran par l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres Windows. Configuration d'une imprimante AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, notamment : • Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour. • Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur. • Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre. Consultez le Manuel du propriétaire de l'imprimante pour obtenir une assistance technique ou contactez le fabricant de l'imprimante. Câble de l'imprimante L'imprimante se connecte à l'ordinateur avec un câble USB ou un câble parallèle. Il est possible que l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous qu'il est compatible avec votre imprimante et votre ordinateur. Si vous avez acheté un câble d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous soit livré avec ce dernier. Guide de référence rapide 93 Raccordement de deux moniteurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si vous avez acheté une carte graphique prenant en charge deux moniteurs, suivez les instructions ci-dessous pour connecter et activer vos moniteurs. Les instructions vous indiquent la façon de raccorder deux moniteurs (chacun disposant d'un connecteur VGA), l'un disposant d'un connecteur VGA et l'autre disposant d'un connecteur DVI ou un téléviseur. AVIS : Si vous raccordez deux moniteurs ayant des connecteurs VGA, vous devez disposer de l'adaptateur DVI en option pour pouvoir connecter le câble. Si vous raccordez deux moniteurs à écran plat, au moins un des moniteurs doit être équipé d'un connecteur VGA. Si vous connectez un téléviseur, vous ne pouvez raccorder qu'un moniteur (VGA ou DVI) en plus du téléviseur. Raccordement de deux moniteurs ayant des connecteurs VGA 1 Mettez votre système hors tension. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur dispose de la vidéo intégrée, ne connectez aucun moniteur au connecteur vidéo intégré. Si le connecteur vidéo intégré est couvert d'un capot, ne retirez pas le capot pour connecter le moniteur, sinon le moniteur ne fonctionnera pas. 2 Connectez l'un des moniteurs au connecteur VGA (bleu) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 3 Connectez l'autre moniteur à l'adaptateur DVI en option, puis connectez l'adaptateur DVI au connecteur DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 4 Redémarrez votre système.94 Guide de référence rapide Raccordement d'un moniteur disposant d'un connecteur VGA et d'un autre disposant d'un connecteur DVI 1 Mettez votre système hors tension. 2 Connectez le connecteur VGA sur le moniteur au connecteur VGA (bleu) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 3 Connectez le connecteur DVI de l'autre moniteur au connecteur DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 4 Redémarrez votre système. Connexion d'un téléviseur REMARQUE : Pour connecter un téléviseur à votre ordinateur, vous devez acheter un câble S-vidéo, disponible chez la plupart des revendeurs de composants électroniques. Ce câble n'est pas inclus avec votre ordinateur. 1 Mettez votre système hors tension. 2 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie TV en option situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 1 adaptateur DVI en option 2 connecteur DVI (blanc) 3 connecteur sortie TV 4 connecteur VGA (bleu) 1 4 3 2Guide de référence rapide 95 3 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée TV S-vidéo. 4 Connectez le moniteur VGA ou DVI. 5 Redémarrez votre système. Modification des paramètres d'affichage 1 Après avoir connecté le(s) moniteur(s) ou le téléviseur, allumez l'ordinateur. Le bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche sur le moniteur principal. 2 Activez le mode Bureau étendu dans les paramètres d'affichage. En mode Bureau étendu, vous pouvez faire glisser des objets d'un écran à l'autre, ce qui a pour effet de doubler l'espace de travail d'affichage. Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la tension et les pannes d'alimentation : • Parasurtenseurs • Filtres de ligne • Onduleurs Parasurtenseurs Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection contre la surtension réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage électrique ou suite à une coupure de courant. Certains fabricants offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez attentivement la garantie du parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre une meilleure protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs. AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de courant.96 Guide de référence rapide De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour assurer la protection du modem. Consultez la documentation du parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem. AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau. Déconnectez le câble de réseau de la prise réseau murale pendant les orages. Filtres de ligne AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de courant. Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement constant. Onduleurs AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque dur peut provoquer une perte de données ou la corruption du fichier. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez uniquement votre ordinateur à un onduleur. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente équipée d'un parasurtenseur. Les onduleurs protègent contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Ils incluent une batterie qui alimente temporairement les périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de la batterie et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Guide de référence rapide 97 Ordinateur de bureau Vue frontale 1 connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB frontaux pour connecter les périphériques dont vous ne vous servez qu'occasionnellement, tels qu'une manette de jeu ou une caméra, ou des périphériques USB amorçables (reportez-vous à la section « Options de configuration du système » dans le Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour de plus amples informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques qui restent connectés, comme une imprimante ou un clavier. 2 voyant d'activité du lecteur Le voyant d'activité du lecteur s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur l'unité de disque dur. Le voyant peut également être allumé lorsqu'un périphérique, comme un lecteur optique, fonctionne. 3 bouton d'alimentation, voyant d'alimentation Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur. Le voyant qui se trouve au centre de ce bouton indique l'état de l'alimentation. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'utilisez pas le bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. 9 8 3 5 1 10 6 4 2 11 798 Guide de référence rapide 4 badge Dell Vous pouvez faire pivoter ce badge pour l'aligner sur l'orientation de votre ordinateur. Pour le faire pivoter, placez vos doigts sur le pourtour du badge, appuyez fermement dessus, puis tournez-le. Vous pouvez également le faire pivoter à l'aide de l'encoche située vers le bas du badge. 5 voyant d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume et clignote ou reste fixe, selon l'état de fonctionnement : • Éteint — L'ordinateur est éteint. • Vert fixe — L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement. • Vert clignotant — L'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. • Orange clignotant ou fixe — Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes d'alimentation » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne. Pour quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation ou utilisez le clavier ou la souris si ce périphérique est configuré comme un périphérique de réveil dans le Gestionnaire de périphériques Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes de mise en veille et sur la façon de quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne. Reportez-vous à la section « Voyants de diagnostic » à la page 126 pour obtenir la description des codes lumineux qui pourront vous aider à résoudre les problèmes rencontrés avec votre ordinateur. 6 voyants de diagnostic Ces voyants vous aident à résoudre les problèmes informatiques d'après le code de diagnostic. Pour plus d'informations, reportezvous à la section « Voyants de diagnostic » à la page 126. 7 voyant LAN Ce voyant indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau local) est établie. 8 casque et connecteurs microphone Permet de connecter un microphone d'ordinateur personnel. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, le connecteur de microphone est situé sur la carte. Permet de connecter le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs. 9 lecteur de disquette Peut contenir un lecteur de disquette optionnel. 10 lecteur optique Permet de jouer un CD/DVD. 11 numéro de service Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web de support de Dell ou que vous contactez le support technique.Guide de référence rapide 99 Vue arrière PRÉCAUTION : Assurez-vous qu'aucune entrée d'air du système n’est bloquée. Cela peut produire des problèmes thermiques graves. 1 logements de carte Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI et PCI Express installées. 2 connecteurs du panneau arrière Branchez les périphériques USB, audio et autres dans le connecteur approprié (reportez-vous à la section « Connecteurs du panneau arrière » à la page 100 pour obtenir plus d'informations). 3 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez le câble d'alimentation. 4 sélecteur de tension Permet de sélectionner la capacité en tension. 5 anneaux pour cadenas Les anneaux pour cadenas permettent de connecter un dispositif antivol offert sur le marché. Ils permettent également de fixer le capot de l'ordinateur au châssis à l'aide d'un cadenas afin d'empêcher un accès non autorisé à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. Pour utiliser les anneaux pour cadenas, insérez un cadenas offert sur le marché à travers les anneaux, puis verrouillez le cadenas. 6 loquet de fermeture du capot Ce loquet permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur. 1 2 3 4 5 6100 Guide de référence rapide Connecteurs du panneau arrière 1 connecteur parallèle Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à un connecteur USB. REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la même adresse. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Options du programme de configuration » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne. 2 voyant d'intégrité de la liaison • Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. • Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. • Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 1 Gb/s (ou 1000 Mb/s) et l'ordinateur. • Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion physique au réseau. 1 3 98 7 5 6 2 4Guide de référence rapide 101 3 connecteur de carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le câble de réseau a été correctement installé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Sur les ordinateurs disposant d'une carte d'adaptateur réseau, utilisez le connecteur situé sur cette carte. Il est recommandé d'utiliser au moins un câblage et des connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable. 4 voyant d'activité réseau Ce voyant est jaune clignotant lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit des données réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 connecteur ligne de sortie Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs intégrés. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, utilisez le connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. 6 connecteur microphone/ ligne d'entrée Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée bleu pour raccorder un appareil d'enregistrement/de lecture, tel qu'un lecteur de cassette, un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope. Utilisez le connecteur de microphone rose pour raccorder un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, utilisez le connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. 7 connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et le clavier. Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB frontaux pour les périphériques connectés occasionnellement, comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo.102 Guide de référence rapide Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 78. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous qu'il y a assez d'espace pour supporter le capot retiré. AVIS : Assurez-vous de travailler sur une surface de niveau et protégée afin d'éviter des égratignures sur l'ordinateur ou la surface sur laquelle il repose. 2 Si vous avez installé un cadenas dans l'anneau prévu à cet effet sur le panneau arrière, retirez-le. 3 Faites glisser le loquet de fermeture du capot vers l'arrière tout en soulevant le capot. 8 connecteur vidéo VGA Connectez le câble VGA du moniteur au connecteur VGA sur l'ordinateur. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte vidéo, utilisez le connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. 9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port série. La désignation par défaut est COM1 pour le connecteur série 1. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Options du programme de configuration » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne.Guide de référence rapide 103 4 Faites pivoter le capot de l'ordinateur vers le haut en utilisant les languettes des charnières comme leviers. 5 Retirez le capot des languettes de charnière et mettez-le de côté sur une surface douce non abrasive. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 loquet de fermeture du capot 3 anneau pour cadenas 2 1 3104 Guide de référence rapide Vue intérieure de votre ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez toujours la prise secteur de votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur, prenez soin de ne pas déconnecter de câbles de la carte système accidentellement. 1 baie de lecteurs (CD/DVD, disquette et disque dur) 2 bloc d'alimentation 3 carte système 4 logements de carte 5 assemblage du dissipateur de chaleur 6 panneau d'E/S avant 1 2 3 4 6 5Guide de référence rapide 105 Composants de la carte système 1 connecteur de haut-parleur interne (INT_SPKR) 2 connecteur du processeur (UC) 3 connecteur d'alimentation du processeur (12VPOWER) 4 connecteurs de module de mémoire (DIMM_1, DIMM_2) 1 2 13 5 3 15 17 12 4 7 14 11 8 10 9 16 6106 Guide de référence rapide Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés et pliez-les de sorte qu'ils ne gênent pas. 2 Vérifiez que vous n'avez rien oublié à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 3 Pour remettre en place le capot : a Alignez le bas du capot sur les languettes de charnière situées le long du bord inférieur de l'ordinateur. b Faites pivoter le capot vers le bas en utilisant les languettes de charnière comme leviers et fermez-le. c Enclenchez le capot en place en tirant vers l'arrière le loquet de fermeture du capot, puis en le relâchant, une fois le capot correctement installé. d Vérifiez que le capot est correctement installé avant de déplacer l'ordinateur. 5 connecteurs de disque SATA (SATA0, SATA1) 6 connecteur du panneau avant (FRONTPANEL) 7 connecteur d'alimentation (POWER) 8 connecteurs de disque SATA (SATA2, SATA3) 9 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC (RTCRST) 10 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD) 11 support de pile (BATTERY) 12 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 13 connecteurs de carte PCI (SLOT2 et SLOT3) 14 avertisseur interne (SPKR) 15 connecteur série/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 connecteur du ventilateur (FAN_CPU) 17 connecteur pour lecteur de disquette (FLOPPY)Guide de référence rapide 107 Ordinateur mini-tour Vue frontale 1 numéro de service Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web de support de Dell ou que vous contactez le support technique. 2 lecteur optique Permet de jouer un CD/DVD. 4 8 7 3 2 6 5 1 10 9108 Guide de référence rapide 3 lecteur de disquette Un lecteur de disquette est optionnel. 4 voyant d'activité du lecteur Le voyant d'activité du lecteur s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur l'unité de disque dur. Le voyant peut également être allumé lorsqu'un périphérique, comme un lecteur optique, fonctionne. 5 connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB frontaux pour connecter les périphériques dont vous ne vous servez qu'occasionnellement, tels qu'une manette de jeu ou une caméra, ou des périphériques USB amorçables (reportezvous à la section « Options de configuration du système » dans le Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour de plus amples informations sur l'amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB). Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques qui restent connectés, comme une imprimante ou un clavier. 6 voyants de diagnostic Utilisez ces voyants pour vous aider à résoudre les problèmes grâce au code de diagnostic. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Voyants de diagnostic » à la page 126. 7 bouton d'alimentation voyant d'alimentation Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur. Le voyant qui se trouve au centre de ce bouton indique l'état de l'alimentation. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'utilisez pas le bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. 8 connecteur de casque Permet de connecter le casque et la plupart des hautparleurs. 9 connecteur de microphone Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour raccorder un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, le connecteur de microphone est situé sur la carte. 10 voyant LAN Ce voyant indique qu'une connexion LAN (réseau local) est établie.Guide de référence rapide 109 Vue arrière 1 loquet de fermeture du capot Ce loquet permet d'ouvrir le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 anneaux pour cadenas Les anneaux pour cadenas permettent de connecter un dispositif antivol offert sur le marché. Ils permettent également de fixer le capot de l'ordinateur au châssis à l'aide d'un cadenas afin d'empêcher un accès non autorisé à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. Pour utiliser les anneaux pour cadenas, insérez un cadenas offert sur le marché à travers les anneaux, puis verrouillez le cadenas. 4 3 5 6 2 1110 Guide de référence rapide PRÉCAUTION : Assurez-vous qu'aucune entrée d'air de système est bloquée. Cela peut produire des problèmes thermiques graves. Connecteurs du panneau arrière 3 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez le câble d'alimentation. 4 sélecteur de tension Permet de sélectionner la capacité en tension. 5 connecteurs du panneau arrière Branchez les périphériques USB, audio et autres dans le connecteur approprié (reportez-vous à la section « Connecteurs du panneau arrière » à la page 100 pour obtenir plus d'informations). 6 logements de carte Permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs de toutes les cartes PCI et PCI Express installées. 1 connecteur parallèle Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une imprimante. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, raccordez-la à un connecteur USB. REMARQUE : Le connecteur parallèle intégré est automatiquement désactivé si l'ordinateur détecte une carte installée contenant un connecteur parallèle configuré sur la même adresse. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Options de configuration du système » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne. 1 3 98 7 5 6 2 4Guide de référence rapide 111 2 voyant d'intégrité de la liaison • Vert — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 10 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. • Orange — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 100 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. • Jaune — Une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau à 1 Gb/s (ou 1000 Mb/s) et l'ordinateur. • Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion physique au réseau. 3 connecteur de carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large bande, branchez l'une des extrémités d'un câble réseau à une prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le câble réseau a été correctement installé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas un câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Sur les ordinateurs disposant d'une carte d'adaptateur réseau, utilisez le connecteur situé sur cette carte. Il est recommandé d'utiliser au moins un câblage et des connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse réseau à 10 Mb/s pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable. 4 voyant d'activité réseau Ce voyant est jaune clignotant lorsque l'ordinateur transmet ou reçoit des données réseau. Un trafic réseau important peut donner l'impression que ce voyant est fixe. 5 connecteur ligne de sortie Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs intégrés. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte son, utilisez le connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. 6 connecteur microphone/ ligne d'entrée Utilisez le connecteur ligne d'entrée de couleurs bleue et rose pour connecter des périphériques d'enregistrement ou de lecture (magnétophones, lecteurs de CD, magnétoscopes ou microphones d'ordinateur personnel).112 Guide de référence rapide Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de retirer le capot. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 78. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous qu'il y a assez d'espace pour supporter le capot retiré. AVIS : Assurez-vous de travailler sur une surface de niveau et protégée afin d'éviter des égratignures sur l'ordinateur ou la surface sur laquelle il repose. 2 Posez votre ordinateur sur son côté avec le capot de l'ordinateur pointant vers le haut. 7 connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques connectés en permanence, comme l'imprimante et le clavier. Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB frontaux pour les périphériques connectés occasionnellement, comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo. 8 connecteur vidéo VGA Connectez le câble VGA du moniteur au connecteur VGA sur l'ordinateur. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte vidéo, utilisez le connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. 9 connecteur série Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un PDA, au port série. La désignation par défaut est COM1 pour le connecteur série 1. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Options du programme de configuration » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne.Guide de référence rapide 113 3 Relâchez le capot de l'ordinateur en le tirant vers l'extérieur de l'avant de l'ordinateur, puis en levant vers le haut. 4 Mettez le capot de côté dans un endroit sûr. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 loquet de fermeture du capot 3 anneau pour cadenas 2 1 3114 Guide de référence rapide Vue intérieure de l'ordinateur 1 lecteur de disquette 2 lecteur optique 3 bloc d'alimentation 4 carte système 5 assemblage du dissipateur de chaleur 6 disque dur 1 3 4 6 2 5Guide de référence rapide 115 Composants de la carte système 1 connecteur de haut-parleur interne (INT_SPKR) 2 connecteur du processeur (UC) 3 connecteur d'alimentation du processeur (12VPOWER) 4 connecteurs de module de mémoire (DIMM_1, DIMM_2) 1 2 6 5 13 3 15 17 12 4 7 14 11 8 10 9 16116 Guide de référence rapide Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés et pliez-les de sorte qu'ils ne gênent pas. 2 Vérifiez que vous n'avez rien oublié à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 3 Pour remettre en place le capot : a Alignez le bas du capot sur les languettes de charnière situées le long du bord inférieur de l'ordinateur. b Faites pivoter le capot vers le bas en utilisant les languettes de charnière comme leviers et fermez-le. c Enclenchez le capot en place en tirant vers l'arrière le loquet de fermeture du capot, puis en le relâchant, une fois le capot correctement installé. d Vérifiez que le capot est correctement installé avant de déplacer l'ordinateur. 4 Placez l'ordinateur en position verticale. 5 connecteurs de disque SATA (SATA0, SATA1) 6 connecteur du panneau avant (FRONTPANEL) 7 connecteur d'alimentation (POWER) 8 connecteurs de disque SATA (SATA2, SATA3) 9 cavalier de réinitialisation RTC (RTCRST) 10 cavalier du mot de passe (PSWD) 11 support de pile (BATTERY) 12 connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 13 connecteurs de carte PCI (SLOT2 et SLOT3) 14 avertisseur interne (SPKR) 15 connecteur série/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 connecteur du ventilateur (FAN_CPU) 17 connecteur pour lecteur de disquette (FLOPPY)Guide de référence rapide 117 Résolution des problèmes Dell fournit un certain nombre d'outils qui vous aideront si votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas de la manière escomptée. Pour obtenir les dernières informations sur le dépannage disponibles pour votre ordinateur, consultez le site Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Si des problèmes nécessitant l'aide de Dell surviennent, rédigez une description détaillée de l'erreur, des codes sonores ou des voyants de diagnostic, notez votre code de service express et votre numéro de service cidessous, puis contactez Dell depuis l'endroit où se trouve votre ordinateur. Pour obtenir un exemple de code de service express et de numéro de service, reportez-vous à la section « Recherche d'informations » du Guide d'utilisation de votre ordinateur. Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez un problème avec l'ordinateur, effectuez les vérifications indiquées dans la section « Blocages et problèmes logiciels » (reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour en savoir plus) et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Nous vous recommandons d'imprimer ces procédures avant de commencer. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne que sur les ordinateurs Dell™. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec tous les ordinateurs. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration du système » du Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour étudier les informations de configuration de votre ordinateur et vérifiez que le périphérique à tester apparaît dans le programme de configuration du système et qu'il est actif. Lancez Dell Diagnostics à partir de votre disque dur ou à partir du support Drivers and Utilities. Code de service express : Numéro de service :118 Guide de référence rapide Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche, contactez Dell. 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est connecté à une prise électrique qui fonctionne correctement. 2 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Sélectionnez Diagnostics à partir du menu de démarrage et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Si vous avez attendu trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche, puis arrêtez votre ordinateur et essayez à nouveau. REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostic n'a été trouvée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. 4 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de diagnostics du disque dur. Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du support Drivers and Utilities 1 Insérez le disque Drivers and Utilities. 2 Arrêtez, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : Si vous avez attendu trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche, puis arrêtez votre ordinateur et essayez à nouveau. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, mettez en surbrillance CD/DVD/CD-RW et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l'option Boot from CD-ROM (Amorcer à partir du CD-ROM) dans le menu qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur . 5 Tapez 1 pour démarrer le menu du CD, puis appuyez sur pour continuer.Guide de référence rapide 119 6 Sélectionnez Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits dans la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée à votre ordinateur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à effectuer. Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et lorsque l'écran Menu principal s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton de l'option de votre choix. REMARQUE : Il vous est recommandé de sélectionner Test System (Test système) pour exécuter un test complet sur votre ordinateur. 2 Après que vous sélectionnez l'option Test System (Test système) dans le menu principal, le menu suivant s'affiche. REMARQUE : Il vous est recommandé de sélectionner Extended Test (Test approfondi) dans le menu ci-dessous pour exécuter un test plus approfondi des périphériques de l'ordinateur. Option Fonction Test Memory (Test mémoire) Permet d'exécuter le test de mémoire autonome. Test System (Test système) Permet d'exécuter les diagnostics système. Exit (Quitter) Permet de quitter les diagnostics. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques du système. Typiquement, cela peut prendre de 10 à 20 minutes. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques du système. Typiquement, cela peut prendre une heure ou plus. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Permet de tester un périphérique spécifique ou de personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Cette option permet de sélectionner les tests selon un symptôme du problème que vous rencontrez. Elle répertorie les symptômes les plus communs.120 Guide de référence rapide 3 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Prenez note du code d'erreur et de la description du problème, puis contactez Dell. REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est situé en haut de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le support technique de Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. 4 Si vous exécutez un test à partir de l'option Custom Test (Test personnalisé) ou Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes), cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus d'informations. 5 Une fois les tests effectués, fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran Menu principal. 6 Retirez le support Drivers and Utilities de Dell (le cas échéant). Onglet Fonction Results (Résultats) Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Errors (Erreurs) Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Help (Aide) Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration (Configuration) Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient des informations de configuration sur tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes. Ces résultats sont ensuite affichés dans la liste des périphériques située dans la partie gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Parameters (Paramètres) Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.Guide de référence rapide 121 Voyants d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Le voyant de bouton d'alimentation (DEL bicolore) qui se trouve à l'avant de l'ordinateur s'allume et clignote ou bien demeure allumé pour indiquer différents états : • Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint, l'ordinateur n'est pas allumé ou n'est pas branché à une source d'alimentation. – Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation dans le connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et dans la prise secteur. – Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une multiprise, vérifiez qu'elle est branchée à une prise secteur et qu'elle est allumée. Contournez également les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les barrettes d'alimentation et les rallonges d'alimentation pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. – Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. • Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert statique et que l'ordinateur ne répond plus : – Vérifiez si l'écran est connecté et sous tension. – Si l'écran est connecté et sous tension, reportez-vous à la section « Codes sonores » à la page 122. • Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert clignotant, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille. Appuyez sur une touche sur le clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour reprendre l'opération normale. Si le voyant d'alimentation est vert et que l'ordinateur ne répond pas : – Vérifiez si l'écran est connecté et sous tension. – Si l'écran est connecté et sous tension, reportez-vous à la section « Codes sonores » à la page 122. • Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange statique, l'ordinateur reçoit l'alimentation électrique, mais il se peut qu'un périphérique soit défectueux ou incorrectement installé. – Retirez, puis réinstallez les modules de mémoire. – Retirez, puis réinstallez la ou les carte(s). – Retirez, puis réinstallez la carte graphique, le cas échéant.122 Guide de référence rapide • Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange clignotant, il existe peut-être un problème d'alimentation ou une défaillance de périphérique interne. – Vérifiez si tous les câbles d'alimentation sont branchés à la carte système de façon sûre (reportez-vous à la section « Composants de la carte système » à la page 105). – Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation principal et le câble du panneau avant sont bien connectés à la carte système (reportez-vous à la section « Composants de la carte système » à la page 105). Codes sonores Il se peut que votre ordinateur émette une série de bips lors du démarrage si le moniteur ne peut pas afficher des erreurs ou des problèmes. Cette série de signaux, appelés « codes sonores », permet d'identifier les problèmes de fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Par exemple, le code sonore 1-3-1 (un code sonore possible) est composé d'un signal, d'une série de trois signaux, puis d'un autre signal. Ce code sonore vous indique que l'ordinateur a rencontré un problème de mémoire. La réinstallation des modules de mémoire peut permettre de corriger les erreurs signalées par les codes sonores suivants. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide d'utilisation) pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique. Si vous rencontrez les erreurs signalées par les codes sonores suivants, reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » du Guide d'utilisation pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique. Code Cause 1-3-1 à 2-4-4 La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée 4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh Code Cause 1-1-2 Panne de registre du microprocesseur 1-1-3 Erreur de lecture/écriture en NVRAM 1-1-4 Échec du total des vérifications BIOS ROMGuide de référence rapide 123 1-2-1 Erreur du temporisateur d'intervalles programmable 1-2-2 Échec d'initialisation du DMA (accès direct à la mémoire) 1-2-3 Échec de lecture/écriture du registre des pages de DMA 1-3 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo 1-3-1 à 2-4-4 La mémoire n'est pas correctement identifiée ou utilisée 3-1-1 Échec de registre DMA esclave 3-1-2 Échec de registre DMA maître 3-1-3 Échec de registre de masque d'interruption maître 3-1-4 Échec de registre de masque d'interruption esclave 3-2-2 Échec de chargement du vecteur d'interruption 3-2-4 Échec du test de contrôleur de clavier 3-3-1 Perte d'alimentation de NVRAM 3-3-2 Configuration incorrecte de la NVRAM 3-3-4 Échec du test de la mémoire vidéo 3-4-1 Échec d'initialisation de l'écran 3-4-2 Échec de retraçage de l'écran 3-4-3 Échec de recherche de ROM vidéo 4-2-1 Aucune impulsion d'horloge 4-2-2 Échec de l'arrêt 4-2-3 Échec de la porte A20 4-2-4 Interruption inattendue en mode protégé 4-3-1 Échec de mémoire au-dessus de l'adresse 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Panne du compteur 2 de puce de l'horloge 4-3-4 Arrêt de l'horloge machine 4-4-1 Échec du test de port parallèle ou série 4-4-2 Échec de décompression de code dans la mémoire en double 4-4-3 Échec du test de coprocesseur mathématique 4-4-4 Échec du test de mémoire cache Code Cause124 Guide de référence rapide Messages système REMARQUE : Si le message affiché n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme en cours d'utilisation au moment où le message est apparu. ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T CHECKPOINT [NNNN]. FO R HELP IN RESOLVING THIS PROBLEM, PLEASE NOTE THIS CHECKPOINT AND CONTACT DELL TECHNICAL SUPPORT (ALERTE ! LE S TENTATIVES PRÉCÉDENTES D E DÉMARRAGE D E C E SYSTÈME ONT ÉCHOUÉ A U POINT D E CONTRÔLE [NNNN]. POUR RÉSOUDRE C E PROBLÈME, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE NOTE D E C E POINT D E CONTRÔLE E T CONTACTER L E SUPPORT TECHNIQUE D E DELL) — L'ordinateur n'a pas terminé la procédure d'amorçage trois fois consécutives pour la même erreur. CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR (ERREUR D E SOMME D E CONTRÔLE D U CMOS) — Échec possible de la carte mère ou décharge de la batterie RTC. Remplacez la batterie. CPU FAN FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U VENTILATEUR UC) — Échec du ventilateur UC. Remplacez le ventilateur UC. DISKETTE DRIVE 0 SEEK FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E RECHERCHE D U LECTEUR D E DISQUETTE 0) — Il se peut qu'un câble soit desserré ou que les informations de configuration de l'ordinateur ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle. Vérifiez les raccordements de câble. DISKETTE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E DISQUETTE) — Il se peut que la disquette soit défectueuse ou qu'un câble soit desserré. Remplacez la disquette ou vérifiez s'il existe un raccordement de câble desserré. HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — Échec possible de l'unité de disque lors de HDD POST. Vérifiez les câbles ou échangez le disque dur. HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — Échec de lecture possible de l'unité de disque dur lors du test d'amorçage du disque dur. KEYBOARD FAILURE (PANNE D U CLAVIER) — Panne du clavier ou câble de clavier desserré.Guide de référence rapide 125 NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D'AMORÇAGE N'EST DISPONIBLE) — Le système ne peut pas détecter un périphérique ou une partition amorçable. • Si le lecteur de disquette est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles sont bien raccordés et qu'une disquette se trouve dans le lecteur. • Si le disque dur est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles sont bien raccordés, que le lecteur est installé, bien en place et partitionné comme périphérique d'amorçage. • Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et assurez-vous que les informations de la séquence d'amorçage sont correctes. NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D'HORLOGE) — ll se peut qu'une puce sur la carte système soit défectueuse ou qu'il y ait un échec de la carte mère. NON-SYSTEM DISK OR DISK ERROR (ERREUR DISQUE OU DISQUE NON-SYSTÈME) — Remplacez la disquette par une disquette avec un système d'exploitation amorçable ou retirez la disquette du lecteur A et redémarrez l'ordinateur. NO T A BOOT DISKETTE (DISQUETTE NON AMORÇABLE) — Insérez une disquette d'amorçage et redémarrez votre ordinateur. USB OVER CURRENT ERROR (ERREUR D E SURINTENSITÉ USB) — Débranchez le périphérique USB. Utilisez une source d'alimentation électrique externe pour le périphérique USB. NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE. DELL RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY. A PARAMETER OUT O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM — (Avis - Le système d’auto-surveillance du disque dur a déclaré qu'un paramètre a dépassé la plage de fonctionnement normale. Dell vous recommande de sauvegarder vos données périodiquement. Un paramètre hors limites peut ou non indiquer un problème de disque dur éventuel) Erreur S.M.A.R.T, échec possible du disque dur. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver cette fonctionnalité dans la configuration du BIOS.126 Guide de référence rapide Voyants de diagnostic PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Afin de vous aider à résoudre les problèmes, l'ordinateur est équipé de quatre voyants situés sur le panneau avant ou arrière : 1, 2, 3 et 4. Ces voyants peuvent être éteints ou verts. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre normalement, le comportement ou les codes des voyants changent au fur et à mesure de l'avancement du processus de démarrage. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre normalement, le comportement ou les codes des voyants changent au fur et à mesure de l'avancement du processus de démarrage. Si la partie POST (autotest à la mise sous tension) du démarrage du système s'effectue correctement, les quatre voyants sont verts fixes. Si l'ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement lors du processus POST, le comportement des voyants peut vous aider à identifier l'origine du problème. REMARQUE : L'orientation des voyants de diagnostic peut varier selon le type de système. Les voyants de diagnostic peuvent apparaître soit verticalement, soit horizontalement. Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée L'ordinateur est en condition d'arrêt normale ou une panne est survenue avant le BIOS. Les voyants de diagnostic ne sont pas allumés alors que le système d'exploitation de l'ordinateur s'est lancé correctement. Raccordez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur qui fonctionne et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. Échec éventuel du BIOS ; l'ordinateur est en mode Restauration. Exécutez l'utilitaire de sauvegarde du BIOS, attendez que la restauration soit terminée et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Une défaillance du processeur semble s'être produite. Réinstallez le processeur et redémarrez l'ordinateur.Guide de référence rapide 127 Les modules de mémoire sont détectés, mais une panne de mémoire est survenue. • Si un module de mémoire est installé, réinstallez-le et redémarrez l'ordinateur. (Reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour obtenir des instructions sur la façon de retirer et d'installer les modules de mémoire.) • Si au moins deux modules de mémoire sont installés, supprimez-les, réinstallez un module, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur redémarre normalement, réinstallez un autre module. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à identification du module défectueux ou réinstallation de tous les modules sans erreur. • Installez sur votre ordinateur la mémoire du même type fonctionnant correctement, le cas échéant. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Une défaillance de la carte graphique semble s'être produite. • Si l'ordinateur possède une carte graphique, retirez-la, réinstallezla, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste, installez une carte graphique qui fonctionne et redémarrez l'ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste ou que votre ordinateur dispose de fonctions vidéo intégrées, contactez Dell. Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée128 Guide de référence rapide Panne possible de lecteur de disquette ou de disque dur. Réinstallez tous les câbles de données et d'alimentation, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Panne USB possible. Réinstallez tous les périphériques USB, vérifiez la connexion des câbles, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Aucun module de mémoire n'a été détecté. • Si un module de mémoire est installé, réinstallez-le et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne pour obtenir des instructions sur la façon de retirer et d'installer les modules de mémoire. • Si au moins deux modules de mémoire sont installés, supprimez-les, réinstallez un module, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur redémarre normalement, réinstallez un autre module. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à identification du module défectueux ou réinstallation de tous les modules sans erreur. • Installez sur votre ordinateur la mémoire du même type fonctionnant correctement, le cas échéant. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposéeGuide de référence rapide 129 Effacement des mots de passe oubliés PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 78. 2 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 112). Les modules de mémoire sont détectés, mais une erreur de configuration de mémoire ou de compatibilité est survenue. • Vérifiez qu'aucune contrainte particulière ne doit être respectée pour l'installation des modules dans les connecteurs de mémoire. • Vérifiez que les modules de mémoire que vous installez sont compatibles avec votre ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Une erreur est survenue. Cette séquence s'affiche également lorsque vous ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et n'est pas forcément significative d'un problème. • Vérifiez que les câbles sont correctement connectés entre le disque dur, le lecteur optique et la carte mère. • Lisez le message qui s'affiche sur l'écran du moniteur. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Une fois le POST terminé, les quatre voyants de diagnostic deviennent brièvement verts avant de s'éteindre pour indiquer une condition de fonctionnement normale. Aucune. Comportement des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée130 Guide de référence rapide 3 Repérez le cavalier de mot de passe (PSWD, 2 broches) sur la carte système. Par défaut, Pin1 et Pin2 (Broche1 et Broche2) devraient être connectées. Vous devez retirer le cavalier et amorcer le système, comme suit : 4 Retirez le cavalier. 5 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 106). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord au périphérique réseau, puis à l'ordinateur. 6 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 7 Après l'affichage du bureau Microsoft® Windows® sur votre ordinateur, arrêtez celui-ci (reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 80). 8 Éteignez le moniteur et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 9 Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la terre. 10 Ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur. 11 Repérez le cavalier de mot de passe (PSWD, 2 broches) sur la carte système, et remettez-le en place pour réactiver la fonction de mot de passe.Guide de référence rapide 131 12 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 106). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez le câble d'abord sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. 13 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. REMARQUE : Cette opération réactive la fonctionnalité de mot de passe. Lorsque vous ouvrez le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section « Ouverture du programme de configuration du système » du Guide d'utilisation), les deux options de mot de passe (système et administrateur) ont pour valeur Not Set (Non défini) — Cela signifie que la fonctionnalité est activée mais qu'aucun mot de passe n'est attribué. 14 Affectez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou administrateur. Effacement des paramètres CMOS PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 78. REMARQUE : L'ordinateur doit être débranché de la prise secteur pour effacer le paramètre CMOS. 2 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 112). 3 Retirez le capot de l'ordinateur. 4 Réinitialisez les paramètres CMOS : a Repérez les cavaliers de mot de passe (PSWD) et CMOS (RTCRST) sur la carte système (reportez-vous à la section « Effacement des mots de passe oubliés » à la page 129). b Retirez la fiche du cavalier PSWD de ses broches. c Placez la fiche sur les broches du cavalier RTCRST et attendez environ cinq secondes. d Retirez la fiche des broches RTCRST et remettez-la sur les broches du cavalier PWSD.132 Guide de référence rapide 5 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement du capot de l'ordinateur » à la page 106). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord au port réseau ou au périphérique, puis à l'ordinateur. 6 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Clignotement du BIOS Il se peut que le BIOS nécessite le clignotement lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible ou lorsque vous remplacez la carte système. 1 Allumez l'ordinateur. 2 Recherchez le fichier de mise à jour BIOS pour votre ordinateur sur le site Web du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. 3 Cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant) pour télécharger le fichier. 4 Si la fenêtre Export Compliance Disclaimer (Renonciation à la conformité aux normes d’exportation) s'affiche, cliquez sur Yes, I Accept this Agreement (Oui, j'accepte cet accord). La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement du fichier) apparaît. 5 Cliquez sur Save this program to disk (Enregistrer ce programme sur un disque), puis cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre Save In (Enregistrer dans) apparaît. 6 Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour afficher le menu Enregistrer dans, sélectionnez Desktop (Bureau), puis cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer). Le fichier est téléchargé sur votre bureau. 7 Cliquez sur Fermer lorsque la fenêtre Download Complete (Téléchargement terminé) apparaît. L'icône de fichier apparaît sur votre bureau et porte le même nom que le fichier de mise à jour BIOS. 8 Double-cliquez sur l'icône de fichier sur le bureau et suivez les instructions apparaissant à l'écran.Index 133 Index A alimentation bouton, 97, 108 filtres de ligne parasurtenseurs périphériques de protection UPS voyant, 98 alimentation sans interruption. Voir UPS Assistant Configuration réseau, 84 assistants Assistant Configuration réseau, 84 C capot remplacement, 106, 116 retrait, 102, 112 carte mère. Voir carte système carte système, 105, 115 CD système d'exploitation, 77 CD Operating System, 77 CD ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 117 Centre d'aide et de support, 77 codes sonores, 122 codes sonores d'ordinateur codes sonores, 122 composants avant de commencer, 79 connexion Internet à propos de, 85 configuration, 86 options, 85 consignes de sécurité, 74 contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 74 D Dell Diagnostics, 117 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, 118 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur, 118 dépannage Centre d'aide et de support, 77 Dell Diagnostics, 117 diagnostics codes sonores, 122 Dell, 117134 Index documentation contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 74 en ligne, 76 ergonomie, 74 garantie, 74 Guide d'information sur le produit, 74 Guide d'utilisation, 74 Référence rapide, 74 réglementation, 74 sécurité, 74 E étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 75 numéro de service, 75, 98, 107 F fichier d'aide Centre d'aide et de support de Windows, 77 G Guide d'information sur le produit, 74 Guide d'utilisation, 74 I imprimante câble, 92 configuration, 83, 92 connexion, 83, 92 informations relatives à l'ergonomie, 74 informations relatives à la garantie, 74 informations sur les réglementations, 74 installation de pièces mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, 80 installer des composants outils recommandés, 80 M matériel codes sonores, 122 Dell Diagnostics, 117 messages d'erreur codes sonores, 122 moniteur connecter le DVI, 93-94 connecter le VGA, 93-94 connecter un téléviseur, 93-94 connecter VGA, 93 en raccorder deux, 93-94 mode bureau étendu, 95 mode de clonage, 95Index 135 paramètres d'affichage, 95 raccorder deux, 93 mot de passe cavalier, 129 effacement, 129 N numéro de service, 75, 98, 107 O ordinateur codes sonores, 122 composants à l'intérieur, 104, 114 vue intérieure, 104, 114 P paramètres CMOS effacement, 131 problèmes codes sonores, 122 Dell Diagnostics, 117 R réseau Assistant Configuration réseau, 84 S S.M.A.R.T, 125 site de support de Dell, 76 site Web de support, 76 système d'exploitation réinstallation, 77 T téléviseur connecter à l'ordinateur, 93-94 U UPS V voyants alimentation, 98 W Windows XP Assistant Configuration réseau, 84 Centre d'aide et de support, 77 réinstallation, 77136 Indexwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ OptiPlex™ 330 Guía de referencia rápida Modelo DCSM y DCNENotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su ordenador de la mejor manera posible. AVISO: un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo. © 2007 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp y Dell OpenManage son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation. Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo DCSM y DCNE Septiembre 2007 P/N JY235 Rev. A00Contenido 139 Contenido Búsqueda de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Antes de comenzar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Antes de trabajar en el interior de su ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Adición y sustitución de piezas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Configuración del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Instalación del ordenador en un gabinete . . . . . 149 Configuración de una red doméstica y de oficina . . . 151 Conexión a un adaptador de red . . . . . . . . . . 151 Configuración de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Transferencia de información a un ordenador nuevo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Configuración de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Conexión de dos monitores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Dispositivos de protección de alimentación . . . . . . 163 Ordenador de sobremesa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Conectores del panel posterior . . . . . . . . . . 168 Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador . . . . . . . . 170140 Contenido Vista interior del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Componentes de la placa base . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador . . . 174 Ordenador de minitorre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Conectores del panel posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Cómo quitar la cubierta del ordenador . . . . . . . . . 180 Vista interior del ordenador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Componentes de la placa base . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador . . . 184 Solución de problemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Indicadores de alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Códigos de sonido . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Mensajes del sistema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Indicadores de diagnóstico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cómo borrar contraseñas olvidadas . . . . . . . . . . 198 Borrado de la configuración de CMOS . . . . . . . . . 200 Actualización flash del BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Guía de referencia rápida 141 Búsqueda de información NOTA: Algunas funciones o medios son opcionales y pueden no incluirse en su ordenador. Es posible que algunas funciones o medios no estén disponibles en determinados países. NOTA: Su ordenador puede incluir información adicional. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará • Un programa de diagnóstico para mi ordenador • Controladores para mi ordenador • Software del sistema de escritorio (DSS) Soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) NOTA: El soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) es opcional y es posible que no se entregue con el ordenador. Los controladores ya están instalados en el ordenador. Puede utilizar el soporte multimedia para volver a instalar los controladores (consulte la Guía del usuario en línea), para ejecutar los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado “Dell Diagnostics” en la página 185). Los archivos “readme” (léame) pueden estar incluidos en su CD para disponer de actualizaciones de última hora sobre los cambios técnicos del ordenador o material de consulta destinado a los técnicos o usuarios avanzados. NOTA: Los controladores y las actualizaciones de la documentación se pueden encontrar en support.dell.com.142 Guía de referencia rápida • Información básica sobre la solución de problemas • Cómo ejecutar Dell Diagnostics • Herramientas y utilidades • Cómo configurar una impresora Guía de referencia rápida NOTA: Este documento puede ser opcional, por lo que es posible que no se envíe con su ordenador. NOTA: Este documento está disponible en formato PDF en support.dell.com. • Información sobre la garantía • Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.) • Instrucciones de seguridad • Información reglamentaria • Información ergonómica • Contrato de licencia de usuario final Guía de información del producto de Dell™ • Cómo extraer y cambiar piezas • Especificaciones • Cómo configurar los parámetros del sistema • Cómo detectar y solucionar problemas Guía del usuario de Dell OptiPlex™ 330 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Microsoft Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista→Ayuda y soporte técnico→ Guías del usuario y del sistema de Dell→ Guías del sistema. 2 Haga clic en la Guía del usuario de su ordenador. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráGuía de referencia rápida 143 • Etiqueta de servicio y Express Service Code (Código de servicio rápido) • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft® Windows® Estas etiquetas se encuentran en su ordenador. • Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el ordenador cuando visite support.dell.com o se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia. • Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia. NOTA: Como una mayor medida de seguridad, a las etiquetas de licencia de Microsoft Windows diseñadas recientemente parece que les falta un trozo de etiqueta o que tienen un “agujero”, para disuadir a los delincuentes de retirar la etiqueta. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará144 Guía de referencia rápida • Soluciones: consejos y orientación para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos y cursos en línea, preguntas frecuentes. • Comunidad: debates en línea con otros clientes de Dell. • Actualizaciones: información de actualización para componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo. • Atención al cliente: información de contacto, llamada de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e información de reparación. • Servicio y asistencia: historial de asistencia y estado de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio, debates en línea con el personal de asistencia técnica. • El servicio Dell Technical Update: notificación proactiva mediante correo electrónico de actualizaciones de software y hardware para el ordenador. • Referencia: documentación del ordenador, detalles en la configuración de mi ordenador, especificaciones del producto y documentación técnica. • Descargas: controladores certificados, revisiones y actualizaciones de software. Sitio web Dell Support: support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región o segmento de negocios para ver el sitio de asistencia técnica apropiado. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráGuía de referencia rápida 145 • Desktop System Software (DSS): si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo del ordenador, también debe volver a instalar la utilidad DSS. DSS proporciona actualizaciones importantes del sistema operativo y asistencia para procesadores, unidades ópticas, dispositivos USB, etc. La utilidad DSS es necesaria para el correcto funcionamiento de su ordenador Dell. El software detecta automáticamente su ordenador y sistema operativo e instala las actualizaciones apropiadas a su configuración. Para descargar Desktop System Software: 1 Vaya a support.dell.com, seleccione su zona o segmento empresarial e introduzca la etiqueta de servicio. 2 Seleccione Drivers & Downloads (Controladores & Descargas) y haga clic en Go (Ir). 3 Haga clic en el sistema operativo y busque la palabra clave Desktop System Software. NOTA: La interfaz para el usuario support.dell.com puede variar dependiendo de las selecciones que efectúe. • Cómo utilizar Windows • Cómo trabajar con programas y archivos • Cómo personalizar mi escritorio Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Para acceder a Ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows: • En Windows XP, haga clic en Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. • En Windows Vista™, haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista →Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. • Cómo volver a instalar mi sistema operativo Soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo) NOTA: El soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo) es opcional, por lo que es posible que no se envíe con su ordenador. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará146 Guía de referencia rápida Antes de comenzar Antes de trabajar en el interior de su ordenador Use las siguientes instrucciones de seguridad para proteger el equipo contra posibles daños y garantizar su propia seguridad personal. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete un componente, como un procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas. El sistema operativo ya está instalado en el ordenador. Para volver a instalar el sistema operativo, utilice el disco Operating System (Sistema operativo) y consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. Después de volver a instalar el sistema operativo, utilice el disco Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) para volver a instalar los controladores de los dispositivos que se incluían con el ordenador. La clave del producto del sistema operativo se encuentra en el ordenador. NOTA: El color del disco varía según el sistema operativo que haya solicitado. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráGuía de referencia rápida 147 AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el ordenador. La garantía no cubre los daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell. AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire del conector o de la lengüeta de tiro, no tire directamente del cable. Algunos cables tienen conectores con lengüetas de bloqueo; si va a desconectar un cable de este tipo, antes pulse las lengüetas de bloqueo. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas de conexión. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. AVISO: Para evitar daños en el ordenador, realice los pasos siguientes antes de comenzar a trabajar dentro del ordenador. 1 Apague el ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo apagar el ordenador” en la página 148). PRECAUCIÓN: Nunca suministre alimentación eléctrica al ordenador cuando se haya extraído la cubierta. AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del ordenador y, a continuación, del dispositivo de red. 2 Desconecte todos los cables del teléfono o de la red del ordenador. 3 Desconecte el ordenador y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus tomas de alimentación eléctrica. 4 Pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base. AVISO: Antes de tocar algo en el interior del ordenador, conéctese a tierra tocando una superficie metálica sin pintura como, por ejemplo, la parte posterior del ordenador. Mientras trabaja, toque periódicamente una superficie metálica sin pintar para disipar la electricidad estática, que podría dañar los componentes internos. Adición y sustitución de piezas Esta sección le proporciona los procedimientos para quitar e instalar los componentes en su ordenador.A menos que se especifique lo contrario, para cada procedimiento se presupone que se cumplen las condiciones siguientes: • Ha realizado los pasos que se indican en los apartados “Cómo apagar el ordenador” en la página 148 y “Antes de trabajar en el interior de su ordenador” en la página 146. • Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del producto de Dell™.148 Guía de referencia rápida • Un componente se puede volver a colocar o—si se ha adquirido por separado—instalar mediante el proceso de extracción realizado en orden inverso. Herramientas recomendadas Es posible que necesite las herramientas siguientes para los procedimientos descritos en este documento: • Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas • Destornillador Phillips pequeño • Punta trazadora pequeña de plástico Cómo apagar el ordenador AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de apagar el ordenador. 1 Apague el sistema operativo: a Guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas activos. b En el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP, haga clic en Inicio→ Apagar→ Apagar. En Microsoft® Windows Vista™, haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista , situado en la esquina inferior izquierda del escritorio, haga clic en la flecha de la esquina inferior derecha del menú Inicio tal como se muestra a continuación y después haga clic en Apagar. El equipo se apaga una vez finalizado el proceso de cierre del sistema operativo. 2 Asegúrese de que el ordenador y todos los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si el ordenador y los dispositivos conectados no se apagaron automáticamente cuando apagó el sistema operativo, pulse el botón de alimentación durante 4 segundos aproximadamente para apagarlos.Guía de referencia rápida 149 Configuración del ordenador Instalación del ordenador en un gabinete La instalación del ordenador en un gabinete puede restringir el flujo de aire, influir en el rendimiento del ordenador y hacer que posiblemente se caliente en exceso. Siga las siguientes pautas cuando instale el ordenador en un gabinete: AVISO: Las especificaciones de temperatura de funcionamiento que se indican en este manual reflejan la temperatura ambiente de funcionamiento máxima. Se tiene que tener en cuenta la temperatura ambiente de la sala cuando se instala el ordenador en un gabinete. Por ejemplo, si la temperatura ambiente de la sala es de 25° C (77° F), en función de las especificaciones del ordenador, sólo tiene un margen de temperatura de 5° a 10° C (de 9° a 18° F) antes de alcanzar la temperatura de funcionamiento máxima del ordenador. Para obtener más detalles sobre las especificaciones de su ordenador, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. • Deje que haya una distancia de separación de 10,2 cm (4 pulgadas) como mínimo en todos los laterales del ordenador que facilitan la ventilación para permitir que el aire que se necesita ofrezca la ventilación adecuada. • Si el gabinete tiene tapas, tienen que ser de un tipo que permita que haya como mínimo un flujo de aire del 30 por ciento a través del gabinete (delante y detrás).150 Guía de referencia rápida • Si el ordenador está instalado en una esquina sobre un escritorio o debajo de un escritorio, deje como mínimo 5,1 centímetros (2 pulgadas) de distancia de separación entre la parte posterior del ordenador y la pared para permitir que haya el flujo de aire necesario para una ventilación adecuada. AVISO: No instale el ordenador en un gabinete que no permita que haya flujo de aire. Restringir el flujo de aire afecta negativamente al rendimiento del ordenador y hace que posiblemente se caliente.Guía de referencia rápida 151 Configuración de una red doméstica y de oficina Conexión a un adaptador de red Para conectar el cable de red: NOTA: Enchufe el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del ordenador. No enchufe el cable de red al conector del módem del ordenador. No enchufe un cable de red a una toma telefónica de la pared. 1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red, que está situado en la parte posterior del ordenador. Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para asegurarse de que está bien encajado. 2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de red.152 Guía de referencia rápida Configuración de red Windows XP El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP ofrece un Asistente para configuración de redes que le guiará en el proceso de compartir archivos, impresoras o una conexión a Internet entre ordenadores en un entorno doméstico o de pequeña oficina. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente para configuración de redes. 2 En la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para configuración de red, haga clic en Siguiente. 3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red. NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este ordenador se conecta directamente a Internet, se activa el servidor de seguridad integrado que se proporciona con Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) o posterior. 4 Haga las comprobaciones de la lista de verificación y los preparativos necesarios. 5 Vuelva a Asistente para configuración de red y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Dispositivo de red Conector del adaptador de red del ordenador Cable de red Conector del adaptador de redGuía de referencia rápida 153 Windows Vista Para realizar cambios en la configuración de red en Microsoft® Windows Vista™: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista, y, a continuación, haga clic en Red→ Centro de redes y recursos compartidos. 2 Haga clic en Set up a connection or network (Establecer una conexión o red). 3 Seleccione el tipo de conexión de red que desea hacer y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. 4 Cuando haya acabado, cierre el Centro de redes y recursos compartidos. Conexión a Internet NOTA: Los proveedores de servicios de internet y las ofertas de estos proveedores pueden variar según el país. Para conectarse a Internet, necesita una conexión por módem o de red y un proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP). Su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) le ofrecerá una o más de las siguientes opciones de conexión a Internet: • Las conexiones ADSL, que ofrecen acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea de teléfono existente o del servicio de telefonía móvil. Con una conexión ADSL, podrá acceder a Internet y utilizar su teléfono en la misma línea simultáneamente. • Las conexiones de módem por cable, que ofrecen acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de su línea de TV por cable local. • Las conexiones de módem por satélite, que ofrecen acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través del sistema de televisión por satélite. • Las conexiones de acceso telefónico, que ofrecen acceso a Internet a través de la línea telefónica. Las conexiones de acceso telefónico son considerablemente más lentas que las de ADSL y conexiones de módem por cable (o satélite). • Las conexiones LAN (Red de área local) inalámbricas, que ofrecen acceso a Internet utilizando tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth®. Si utiliza una conexión de acceso telefónico, conecte una línea telefónica al conector del módem en el ordenador y a la roseta del teléfono antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión ADSL o de módem por cable/satélite, póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de internet o con su servicio de telefonía móvil para obtener instrucciones de configuración.154 Guía de referencia rápida Configuración de su conexión a Internet Para configurar una conexión a Internet con un acceso directo en el escritorio de su proveedor de servicios de internet: 1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos que estén abiertos y salga de los programas activos. 2 Haga doble clic en el icono de su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) en el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para completar la configuración. Si no tiene un icono de su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) en el escritorio o desea configurar una conexión a Internet con un ISP diferente, realice los pasos de la siguiente sección que se correspondan con el sistema operativo del ordenador que utiliza. NOTA: Si tiene problemas para conectarse a Internet, consulte el apartado “Configuración de una red doméstica y de oficina” en la página 151. Si no puede conectarse a Internet pero consiguió hacerlo anteriormente, puede que el proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) tenga una interrupción del servicio. Póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) para comprobar el estado del servicio, o intente conectarse de nuevo más tarde. Windows XP 1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos que estén abiertos y salga de los programas activos. 2 Haga clic en Inicio→ Internet Explorer. Aparecerá el Asistente para conexión nueva. 3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet. 4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correcta: • Si no tiene un proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) y desea seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de proveedores de servicios Internet (ISP). • Si ha obtenido información de configuración de su ISP pero no ha recibido un CD de configuración, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión manualmente. • Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un proveedor de servicios Internet (ISP).Guía de referencia rápida 155 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, continúe con el paso 6. En caso contrario, siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para completar la configuración. NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su ISP. 6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 7 Utilice la información de configuración ofrecida por su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) para completar la configuración. Windows Vista™ NOTA: Tenga la información de su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) preparada. Si no dispone de ISP, el asistente para Conectarse a Internet podrá ayudarle a obtener uno. 1 Guarde y cierre todos los archivos que estén abiertos y salga de los programas activos. 2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista y en Panel de control. 3 En Red e Internet, haga clic en Conectarse a Internet. Aparece la ventana Conectarse a Internet. 4 Haga clic en Banda ancha (PPPoE) o Conexión telefónica, dependiendo de cómo desee conectarse: • Seleccione Banda ancha si va a utilizar una conexión ADSL, de módem por satélite, de módem por TV de cable, o de tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth. • Seleccione Conexión telefónica si va a utilizar un módem de acceso telefónico o ISDN. NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, haga clic en Ayúdeme a elegir o póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP). 5 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla y utilice la información de configuración suministrada por su proveedor de servicios de internet (ISP) para completar la configuración.156 Guía de referencia rápida Transferencia de información a un ordenador nuevo Puede utilizar los “asistentes” del sistema operativo para ayudarle a transferir archivos y otros datos de un ordenador a otro (por ejemplo, de un ordenador antiguo a uno nuevo. Para obtener instrucciones, consulte en los apartados siguientes el que corresponda al sistema operativo que ejecuta su ordenador. Microsoft® Windows® XP (opcional) El sistema operativo MicrosoftWindows XP proporciona un Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones que sirve para transferir datos del ordenador de origen a uno nuevo. Puede transferir datos, como los siguientes: • Mensajes de correo electrónico • Configuraciones de barras de herramientas • Tamaños de ventana • Marcadores de Internet Puede transferir los datos al ordenador nuevo a través de una conexión de red o de serie o puede guardarlos en medios extraíbles como, por ejemplo, un CD grabable, para transferirlos al ordenador nuevo. NOTA: Puede transferir información de un ordenador viejo a un ordenador nuevo conectando directamente un cable serie a los puertos de entrada/salida (E/S) de los dos ordenadores. Para transferir datos a través de una conexión serie, debe acceder a la utilidad Conexiones de red desde el Panel de control y realizar los pasos de configuración adicionales, como configurar una conexión avanzada y designar el ordenador host y el ordenador invitado. Para obtener instrucciones sobre la configuración de una conexión de cables directa entre dos ordenadores, consulte en Microsoft Knowledge Base el artículo número 305621, titulado How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP. Es posible que esta información no esté disponible en determinados países. Para transferir información a un ordenador nuevo, debe ejecutar el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones. Para este proceso, puede utilizar el soporte multimedia opcional Operating System (Sistema operativo) o bien crear un disco del asistente con el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones.Guía de referencia rápida 157 Ejecución del Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones con el CD Operating System (Sistema operativo) NOTA: Para este procedimiento es necesario el soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo). Este soporte multimedia es opcional, por lo que es posible que no se envíe con todos los ordenadores. Para preparar un ordenador nuevo para la transferencia de archivos: 1 Abra el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones: haga clic en Inicio→ Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema→ Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones. 2 Cuando aparezca la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones, haga clic en Siguiente. 3 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador nuevo→ Siguiente. 4 En la pantalla ¿Tiene un CD de Windows XP?, haga clic en Utilizaré el asistente desde el CD de Windows XP→ Siguiente. 5 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Diríjase al ordenador antiguo, vaya al ordenador antiguo o de origen. No haga clic en Siguiente en esta ocasión. Para copiar datos del ordenador antiguo: 1 En el ordenador antiguo, inserte el soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo) de Windows XP. 2 En la pantalla Microsoft Windows XP, haga clic en Realizar tareas adicionales. 3 En ¿Qué desea hacer?, haga clic en Transferir archivos y configuraciones→ Siguiente. 4 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador antiguo→ Siguiente. 5 En la pantalla Seleccione un método de transferencia, haga clic en el método de transferencia que prefiera. 6 En la pantalla Elija qué desea transferir, seleccione los elementos que desea transferir y haga clic en Siguiente. Una vez copiada la información, se muestra la pantalla Completando la Fase de recopilación. 7 Haga clic en Terminar.158 Guía de referencia rápida Para transferir información al ordenador nuevo: 1 En la pantalla Diríjase al ordenador antiguo del ordenador nuevo, haga clic en Siguiente. 2 En la pantalla Seleccione la ubicación de archivos y configuraciones, seleccione el método que ha elegido para transferir los archivos y las configuraciones y haga clic en Siguiente. El asistente lee las configuraciones y los archivos recopilados y los aplica al nuevo ordenador. Una vez se han aplicado todas las configuraciones y los archivos, aparece la pantalla Completado. 3 Haga clic en Completado y reinicie el ordenador nuevo. Ejecución del Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones sin el soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo) Para ejecutar el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones sin el soporte multimedia Operating System (Sistema operativo), debe crear un disco del asistente que le permitirá crear un archivo imagen a modo de copia de seguridad para los medios extraíbles. Para crear un disco del asistente, utilice el nuevo ordenador con Windows XP y realice los pasos siguientes: 1 Abra el Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones: haga clic en Inicio→ Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema→ Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones. 2 Cuando aparezca la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones, haga clic en Siguiente. 3 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador nuevo→ Siguiente. 4 En la pantalla ¿Tiene un CD de Windows XP?, haga clic en Deseo crear un disco del asistente en la siguiente unidad:→ Siguiente. 5 Inserte los medios extraíbles, como un CD grabable, y haga clic en Aceptar. 6 Cuando la creación del disco haya finalizado y aparezca el mensaje Diríjase al ordenador antiguo, no haga clic en Siguiente. 7 Diríjase al ordenador antiguo.Guía de referencia rápida 159 Para copiar datos del ordenador antiguo: 1 En el ordenador antiguo, inserte el disco del asistente. 2 Haga clic en Inicio→ Ejecutar. 3 En el campo Abrir de la ventana Ejecutar, busque la ruta de acceso de fastwiz (en los medios extraíbles adecuados) y haga clic en Aceptar. 4 En la pantalla de bienvenida Asistente para transferencia de archivos y configuraciones, haga clic en Siguiente. 5 En la pantalla ¿Qué ordenador es éste?, haga clic en Ordenador antiguo→ Siguiente. 6 En la pantalla Seleccione un método de transferencia, haga clic en el método de transferencia que prefiera. 7 En la pantalla Elija qué desea transferir, seleccione los elementos que desea transferir y haga clic en Siguiente. Una vez copiada la información, se muestra la pantalla Completando la Fase de recopilación. 8 Haga clic en Terminar. Para transferir información al ordenador nuevo: 1 En la pantalla Diríjase al ordenador antiguo del ordenador nuevo, haga clic en Siguiente. 2 En la pantalla Seleccione la ubicación de archivos y configuraciones, seleccione el método que ha elegido para transferir los archivos y las configuraciones y haga clic en Siguiente. Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. El asistente lee las configuraciones y los archivos recopilados y los aplica al nuevo ordenador. Una vez se han aplicado todas las configuraciones y los archivos, aparece la pantalla Completado. 3 Haga clic en Completado y reinicie el ordenador nuevo. NOTA: Para obtener más información acerca de este procedimiento, busque en el sitio web support.dell.com el documento n.º 154781 (What Are The Different Methods To Transfer Files From My Old Computer To My New Dell™ Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System?). NOTA: Es posible que no pueda acceder al documento Dell™ Knowledge Base en determinados países.160 Guía de referencia rápida Microsoft Windows Vista™ (opcional) 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows Vista y, a continuación, haga clic en Transferir archivos y configuraciones→ Iniciar Windows Easy Transfer. 2 En el cuadro de diálogo User Account Control (Control de cuenta de usuario), haga clic en Continue (Continuar). 3 Haga clic en Start a new transfer (Iniciar una transferencia nueva) o Continue a transfer in progress (Continuar con una transferencia en curso). Siga las instrucciones del asistente Windows Easy Transfer (Transferencia sencilla de Windows) que aparecen en la pantalla. Configuración de una impresora AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al ordenador. Consulte la documentación incluida con la impresora para obtener información sobre la configuración, entre ella, cómo: • Obtener e instalar unidades actualizadas. • Conectar la impresora al ordenador. • Cargar papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta. Si necesita asistencia técnica, consulte el manual del propietario de la impresora o póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la impresora. Cable de la impresora Su impresora se conecta al ordenador con un cable USB o un cable paralelo. Su impresora puede no incluir un cable de impresora, así que cómprelo por separado, asegurándose de que sea compatible con la impresora y el ordenador. Si ha adquirido un cable de impresora al mismo tiempo que compró el ordenador, puede que el cable venga en la caja de envío del ordenador. Guía de referencia rápida 161 Conexión de dos monitores PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Si ha adquirido una tarjeta gráfica que admita monitores duales, siga estas instrucciones para conectar y activar los monitores. Las instrucciones le dirán cómo conectar los dos monitores (cada uno de ellos con un conector VGA), un monitor con un conector VGA y un monitor con un conector DVI, o una TV. AVISO: Si conecta dos monitores que tengan conectores VGA, deberá disponer del adaptador DVI opcional para conectar el cable. Si conecta dos monitores de panel-plano, al menos uno de ellos deberá tener un conector VGA. Si conecta una TV, podrá conectar sólo un monitor (VGA o DVI) además de la TV. Conexión de dos monitores con conectores VGA 1 Apague el sistema. NOTA: Si el ordenador tiene vídeo integrado, no conecte ningún monitor al conector de vídeo integrado. Si el conector de vídeo integrado está cubierto por una funda, no retire la funda para conectar el monitor o el monitor no funcionará. 2 Conecte uno de los monitores al conector VGA (azul) de la parte trasera del ordenador. 3 Conecte el otro monitor al adaptador DVI opcional y conecte el adaptador DVI al conector DVI (blanco) de la parte trasera del ordenador. 4 Reinicie el sistema.162 Guía de referencia rápida Conexión de un monitor con un conector VGA y un monitor con un conector DVI 1 Apague el sistema. 2 Conecte el conector VGA del monitor al conector VGA (azul) de la parte trasera del ordenador. 3 Conecte el conector DVI del otro monitor al conector DVI (blanco) de la parte trasera del ordenador. 4 Reinicie el sistema. Conexión de una TV NOTA: Debe adquirir un cable de S-vídeo, disponible en la mayoría de los establecimientos de electrónica de consumo, para conectar un televisor al ordenador. No viene incluido con el ordenador. 1 Apague el sistema. 2 Conecte un extremo del cable de S-vídeo al conector de SALIDA de TV opcional situado en la parte trasera del ordenador. 1 Adaptador DVI opcional 2 Conector DVI (blanco) 3 Conector de SALIDA de TV 4 Conector VGA (azul) 1 4 3 2Guía de referencia rápida 163 3 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de S-vídeo al conector de entrada de Svídeo del televisor. 4 Conecte el monitor VGA o DVI. 5 Reinicie el sistema. Cambio de la configuración de pantalla 1 Después de conectar los monitores o el televisor, encienda el ordenador. El escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® aparece en el monitor principal. 2 Active el modo de escritorio ampliado en la configuración de pantalla. En el modo de escritorio ampliado, puede arrastrar objetos de una pantalla a otra, con lo que se dobla de manera eficaz la cantidad de área de trabajo visible. Dispositivos de protección de alimentación Dispone de varios dispositivos para protegerse contra las fluctuaciones y fallos de la alimentación: • Protectores contra sobrevoltajes • Acondicionadores de línea • Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) Protectores contra sobrevoltajes Los protectores contra sobrevoltajes y las cajas de enchufes equipadas con protección contra sobrevoltaje ayudan a evitar daños en el ordenador causados por los picos de voltaje que se puedan producir durante tormentas eléctricas o tras interrupciones eléctricas. Algunos fabricantes de protectores contra sobrevoltajes incluyen cobertura de garantía para determinados tipos de daños. Lea atentamente la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un protector contra sobrevoltajes. Un dispositivo con un rango de julios más alto ofrece mayor protección. Compare los rangos de julios para determinar la eficacia relativa de los distintos dispositivos. AVISO: La mayoría de los protectores contra sobrevoltajes no protegen contra las fluctuaciones de alimentación o los cortes de electricidad causados por descargas de rayos cercanas. Si se produce una descarga en su zona, desconecte la línea telefónica de la roseta del teléfono y desconecte el ordenador de la toma de corriente.164 Guía de referencia rápida Muchos protectores contra sobrevoltaje tienen una roseta para protección del módem. Consulte la documentación del protector contra sobrevoltajes para obtener instrucciones sobre conexiones de módem. AVISO: No todos los protectores contra sobrevoltajes ofrecen protección al adaptador de red. Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante las tormentas eléctricas. Acondicionadores de línea AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones del suministro eléctrico. Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de corriente alterna a un nivel cuasi constante. Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida AVISO: El corte del suministro eléctrico mientras los datos se estén guardando en la unidad de disco duro podría causar la pérdida de los datos o daños en los archivos. NOTA: Para garantizar un tiempo máximo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte sólo un ordenador al SAI. Conecte los demás dispositivos, caso de una impresora, a una caja de enchufes independiente que ofrezca protección contra sobrevoltajes. Una SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la electricidad. Los dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación temporal a los dispositivos a ellos conectados cuando la alimentación de CA se interrumpe. La batería se carga mientras haya alimentación de CA. Consulte la documentación del fabricante de SAI para obtener información acerca del tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y para asegurarse de que el dispositivo esté aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Guía de referencia rápida 165 Ordenador de sobremesa Vista anterior 1 Conectores USB 2.0 (2) Utilice los conectores USB para los dispositivos que conecte ocasionalmente, como palancas de mando o cámaras, o para dispositivos USB de arranque (consulte el apartado “Opciones de la Configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea para obtener más información sobre cómo arrancar desde un dispositivo USB). Se recomienda la utilización de los conectores USB posteriores para los dispositivos que suelen permanecer siempre conectados como, por ejemplo, impresoras y teclados. 2 Indicador de actividad de la unidad El indicador de actividad de la unidad se enciende cuando el ordenador lee o escribe datos en la unidad de disco duro. El indicador también puede encenderse cuando un dispositivo como la unidad óptica está en funcionamiento. 3 Botón de encendido Pulse el botón de encendido para encender el ordenador. El indicador situado en el centro de este botón señala el estado encendido. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos no utilice el botón de alimentación para apagar el ordenador. En su lugar, apague el ordenador mediante el sistema operativo. 9 8 3 5 1 10 6 4 2 11 7166 Guía de referencia rápida 4 Placa de identificación de Dell Esta placa puede girarse de modo que esté orientada igual que su ordenador. Para girar la placa, coloque los dedos alrededor de la placa, presione con fuerza y gírela. También puede girarla utilizando la ranura que hay cerca de la parte inferior de la placa. 5 Indicador de alimentación El indicador de alimentación se ilumina y parpadea o permanece encendido para indicar estados diferentes: • Sin luz: el ordenador está apagado. • Verde sólido: el ordenador se encuentra en un estado de funcionamiento normal. • Verde parpadeante: el ordenador se encuentra en un modo de ahorro de energía. • Ámbar sólido o parpadeante: consulte “Problemas de alimentación” en la Guía del usuario en línea. Para salir de un modo de ahorro de energía, pulse el botón de encendido o utilice el teclado o el ratón si está configurado como un dispositivo de activación en el Administrador de dispositivos de Windows. Para obtener más información acerca de los modos de suspensión y cómo salir del modo de ahorro de energía, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea. Consulte el apartado “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 194 para ver una descripción de los códigos luminosos que pueden ayudarle a solucionar problemas del ordenador. 6 Indicadores de diagnóstico Utilice los indicadores para solucionar problemas del ordenador basados en el código de diagnóstico. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 194. 7 Indicador luminoso de LAN Este indicador señala que se ha establecido una conexión LAN (red de área local). 8 Conectores de micrófono y auricular Utilice el conector del micrófono para conectar un micrófono para PC. En los ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, el conector de micrófono está en la tarjeta. Utilice el conector de los auriculares para conectar los auriculares y la mayoría de los altavoces. 9 Unidad de disco flexible Puede contener una unidad de disco flexible. 10 Unidad óptica Utilice la unidad óptica para reproducir un CD/DVD. 11 Etiqueta de servicio Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el ordenador al acceder al sitio web Dell Support o al llamar a la asistencia.Guía de referencia rápida 167 Vista posterior PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que ninguno de los ventiladores de aire del sistema estén bloqueados. Su bloqueo podría causar serios problemas termales. 1 Ranuras para tarjetas Acceda a los conectores de las tarjetas PCI y PCI Express instaladas. 2 Conectores del panel posterior Conecte el USB, el audio y demás dispositivos en el conector adecuado (consulte el apartado “Conectores del panel posterior” en la página 168 para obtener más información). 3 Conector de alimentación Inserte el cable de alimentación. 4 Interruptor selector de voltaje Para seleccionar el tipo de voltaje. 5 Anillos del candado Los anillos del candado sirven para conectar un dispositivo contra robo comercialmente disponible. Los anillos del candado le permiten asegurar la cubierta del ordenador al chasis con un candado, evitando así el acceso no autorizado al interior del ordenador. Para utilizar anillos del candado, inserte un candado disponible comercialmente a través de los anillos y, a continuación, cierre el candado. 6 Pestillo de liberación de la cubierta Utilice este seguro para abrir la cubierta del ordenador. 1 2 3 4 5 6168 Guía de referencia rápida Conectores del panel posterior 1 Conector paralelo Conecte un dispositivo paralelo, como una impresora, al conector paralelo. Si tiene una impresora USB, enchúfela a un conector USB. NOTA: El conector paralelo integrado se desactiva automáticamente si el ordenador detecta una tarjeta instalada que contiene un conector paralelo configurado en la misma dirección. Si desea más información, consulte el apartado “Opciones de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea. 2 Indicador de integridad de vínculo • Verde: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 10 Mbps y el ordenador. • Naranja: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 100 Mbps y el ordenador. • Amarillo: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 1 Gb (o 1.000 Mbps) y el ordenador. • Apagado: el ordenador no detecta una conexión física con la red. 1 3 98 7 5 6 2 4Guía de referencia rápida 169 3 Conector del adaptador de red Para conectar el ordenador a una red o a un dispositivo de banda ancha, conecte un extremo de un cable de red a un enchufe de red o a su dispositivo de banda ancha. Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red al conector del adaptador de red, situado en el panel posterior del equipo. Cuando el cable de red se haya conectado correctamente, oirá un clic. NOTA: No enchufe un cable de teléfono al conector de red. En los ordenadores con una tarjeta adaptadora de red, utilice el conector de la tarjeta. Se recomienda que utilice al menos cableado y conectores de categoría 5 para su red. Si debe utilizar la categoría 3 para cables, fuerce la velocidad de la red a 10 Mbps para garantizar un funcionamiento fiable. 4 Indicador de actividad de red Este indicador amarillo parpadea cuando el ordenador transmite o recibe datos de la red. Un gran volumen de tráfico en la red puede hacer que este indicador luminoso parezca estar continuamente encendido. 5 Conector de salida de línea Utilice el conector verde de salida de línea para conectar auriculares y la mayoría de altavoces con amplificadores integrados. En ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, use el conector de la tarjeta. 6 Conector del micrófono/línea de entrada Utilice el conector azul de entrada de línea para conectar un dispositivo de grabación/reproducción como un reproductor de casete, de CD o VCR. Utilice el conector rosa de micrófono para conectar un micrófono de PC para la entrada de música o de voz a un programa de sonido o de telefonía. En ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, use el conector de la tarjeta. 7 Conectores USB 2.0 (6) Utilice los conectores USB posteriores para los dispositivos que suelen permanecer siempre conectados como, por ejemplo, impresoras y teclados. Se recomienda la utilización de los conectores USB delanteros para los dispositivos que se conectan ocasionalmente, como, por ejemplo, palancas de mando o cámaras.170 Guía de referencia rápida Extracción de la cubierta del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: Para protegerse de las descargas eléctricas, desconecte el ordenador de la toma de corriente eléctrica antes de retirar la cubierta. 1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar” en la página 146. NOTA: Asegúrese de que existe suficiente espacio para la extracción de la cubierta. AVISO: Asegúrese de trabajar en una superficie protegida y nivelada para evitar arañar el ordenador o la superficie sobre la que descansa. 2 Si ha instalado un candado a través del anillo del candado en el panel posterior, retire el candado. 3 Deslice el seguro de liberación de la cubierta hacia atrás al mismo tiempo que levanta la cubierta. 8 Conector de vídeo VGA Conecte el cable VGA del monitor al conector VGA del ordenador. En ordenadores con tarjeta de vídeo, utilice el conector de la tarjeta. 9 Conector serie Conecte un dispositivo serie, como un dispositivo portátil, al puerto serie. El nombre predeterminado para el conector serie 1 es COM1. Si desea más información, consulte el apartado “Opciones de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea.Guía de referencia rápida 171 4 Levante la cubierta utilizando las lengüetas de la bisagra a modo de palanca. 5 Retire la cubierta de las lengüetas de la bisagra y colóquela sobre una superficie suave y no abrasiva. 1 Ranura para cable de seguridad 2 Pestillo de liberación de la cubierta 3 Anillo del candado 2 1 3172 Guía de referencia rápida Vista interior del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar las descargas eléctricas, desconecte el ordenador de la toma de alimentación eléctrica antes de retirar la cubierta. AVISO: Asegúrese de que al abrir la cubierta del ordenador no haya desconectado inadvertidamente los cables de la placa base. 1 Compartimento de las unidades (CD/DVD, disquete y unidad de disco duro) 2 Fuente de alimentación 3 Tarjeta del sistema 4 Ranuras para tarjetas 5 Ensamblaje de disipador de calor 6 Panel de E/S frontal 1 2 3 4 6 5Guía de referencia rápida 173 Componentes de la placa base 1 Conector del altavoz interno (INT_SPKR) 2 Conector del procesador (CPU) 3 Conector de alimentación del procesador (12VPOWER) 4 Conectores del módulo de memoria (DIMM_1, DIMM_2) 1 2 13 5 3 15 17 12 4 7 14 11 8 10 9 16 6174 Guía de referencia rápida Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Compruebe que todos los cables estén conectados y apártelos de forma que no molesten. 2 Asegúrese de no dejar herramientas ni piezas adicionales dentro del ordenador. 3 Para volver a colocar la cubierta: a Alinee la parte inferior de la cubierta con las lengüetas de la bisagra situadas a lo largo del borde inferior del ordenador. b Haga palanca con las lengüetas de la bisagra para girar la cubierta hacia abajo y cerrarla. c Coloque la cubierta en su sitio tirando del seguro de liberación de la cubierta y, cuando la cubierta esté bien colocada, suelte el seguro. d Compruebe que la cubierta está colocada correctamente antes de mover el ordenador. 5 Conectores de unidad SATA (SATA0, SATA1) 6 Conector del panel anterior (FRONTPANEL) 7 Conector de alimentación (POWER) 8 Conectores de unidad SATA (SATA2, SATA3) 9 Puente de reinicio de RTC (RTCRST) 10 Puente de contraseña (PSWD) 11 Zócalo de la batería (BATTERY) 12 Conector de tarjeta PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 13 Conectores de tarjeta PCI (SLOT2 y SLOT3) 14 Timbre interno (SPKR) 15 Conector serie/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 Conector del ventilador (FAN_CPU) 17 Conector de la unidad de disco flexible (FLOPPY)Guía de referencia rápida 175 Ordenador de minitorre Vista anterior 1 Etiqueta de servicio Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el ordenador al acceder al sitio web Dell Support o al llamar a la asistencia. 2 Unidad óptica Utilice la unidad óptica para reproducir un CD/DVD. 4 8 7 3 2 6 5 1 10 9176 Guía de referencia rápida 3 Unidad de disco flexible Una unidad de disco flexible es opcional. 4 Indicador de actividad de la unidad El indicador de actividad de la unidad se enciende cuando el ordenador lee o escribe datos en la unidad de disco duro. El indicador también puede encenderse cuando un dispositivo como la unidad óptica está en funcionamiento. 5 Conectores USB 2.0 (2) Utilice los conectores USB para los dispositivos que conecte ocasionalmente, como palancas de mando o cámaras, o para dispositivos USB de arranque (consulte el apartado “Opciones de la Configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea para obtener más información sobre cómo arrancar desde un dispositivo USB). Se recomienda la utilización de los conectores USB posteriores para los dispositivos que suelen permanecer siempre conectados como, por ejemplo, impresoras y teclados. 6 Indicadores de diagnóstico Utilice los indicadores para solucionar problemas del ordenador basados en el código de diagnóstico. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado “Indicadores de diagnóstico” en la página 194. 7 Botón de alimentación, Indicador de alimentación Pulse el botón de encendido para encender el ordenador. El indicador situado en el centro de este botón señala el estado encendido. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos no utilice el botón de alimentación para apagar el ordenador. En su lugar, apague el ordenador mediante el sistema operativo. 8 Conector de auriculares Utilice el conector de los auriculares para conectar los auriculares y la mayoría de los altavoces. 9 Conector del micrófono Utilice el conector para micrófono para conectar un micrófono de PC para la entrada de voz o música a un programa de sonido o de telefonía. En los ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, el conector de micrófono está en la tarjeta. 10 Indicador luminoso de LAN Este indicador señala que se ha establecido una conexión LAN (red de área local).Guía de referencia rápida 177 Vista posterior 4 3 5 6 2 1178 Guía de referencia rápida PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que ninguno de los ventiladores de aire del sistema estén bloqueados. Su bloqueo podría causar serios problemas termales. Conectores del panel posterior 1 Pestillo de liberación de la cubierta Este seguro le permite abrir la cubierta de su ordenador. 2 Anillos del candado Los anillos del candado sirven para conectar un dispositivo contra robo comercialmente disponible. Los anillos del candado le permiten asegurar la cubierta del ordenador al chasis con un candado, evitando así el acceso no autorizado al interior del ordenador. Para utilizar anillos del candado, inserte un candado disponible comercialmente a través de los anillos y, a continuación, cierre el candado. 3 Conector de alimentación Inserte el cable de alimentación. 4 Interruptor selector de voltaje Para seleccionar el tipo de voltaje. 5 Conectores del panel posterior Conecte el USB, el audio y demás dispositivos en el conector adecuado (consulte el apartado “Conectores del panel posterior” en la página 168 para obtener más información). 6 Ranuras para tarjetas Acceda a los conectores de las tarjetas PCI y PCI Express instaladas. 1 3 98 7 5 6 2 4Guía de referencia rápida 179 1 Conector paralelo Conecte un dispositivo paralelo, como una impresora, al conector paralelo. Si tiene una impresora USB, enchúfela a un conector USB. NOTA: El conector paralelo integrado se desactiva automáticamente si el ordenador detecta una tarjeta instalada que contiene un conector paralelo configurado en la misma dirección. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado “Opciones de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea. 2 Indicador de integridad de vínculo • Verde: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 10 Mbps y el ordenador. • Naranja: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 100 Mbps y el ordenador. • Amarillo: existe una conexión correcta entre una red a 1 Gb (o 1.000 Mbps) y el ordenador. • Apagado: el ordenador no detecta una conexión física con la red. 3 Conector del adaptador de red Para conectar el ordenador a una red o a un dispositivo de banda ancha, conecte un extremo de un cable de red a un enchufe de red o a su dispositivo de banda ancha. Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red al conector del adaptador de red, situado en el panel posterior del equipo. Cuando el cable de red se haya conectado correctamente, oirá un clic. NOTA: No enchufe un cable de teléfono al conector de red. En los ordenadores con una tarjeta adaptadora de red, utilice el conector de la tarjeta. Se recomienda que utilice al menos cableado y conectores de categoría 5 para su red. Si debe utilizar la categoría 3 para cables, fuerce la velocidad de la red a 10 Mbps para garantizar un funcionamiento fiable. 4 Indicador de actividad de red Este indicador amarillo parpadea cuando el ordenador transmite o recibe datos de la red. Un gran volumen de tráfico en la red puede hacer que este indicador luminoso parezca estar continuamente encendido.180 Guía de referencia rápida Cómo quitar la cubierta del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: Para protegerse de las descargas eléctricas, desconecte el ordenador de la toma de corriente eléctrica antes de retirar la cubierta. 1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar” en la página 146. NOTA: Asegúrese de que existe suficiente espacio para la extracción de la cubierta. AVISO: Asegúrese de trabajar en una superficie protegida y nivelada para evitar arañar el ordenador o la superficie sobre la que descansa. 5 Conector de salida de línea Utilice el conector verde de salida de línea para conectar auriculares y la mayoría de altavoces con amplificadores integrados. En ordenadores con tarjeta de sonido, use el conector de la tarjeta. 6 Conector del micrófono/línea de entrada Utilice el conector de entrada de línea azul y rosa para conectar un dispositivo de grabación/reproducción como un reproductor de casete, de CD o VCR; o un micrófono para PC. 7 Conectores USB 2.0 (6) Utilice los conectores USB posteriores para los dispositivos que suelen permanecer siempre conectados como, por ejemplo, impresoras y teclados. Se recomienda la utilización de los conectores USB delanteros para los dispositivos que se conectan ocasionalmente, como, por ejemplo, palancas de mando o cámaras. 8 Conector de vídeo VGA Conecte el cable VGA del monitor al conector VGA del ordenador. En ordenadores con tarjeta de vídeo, utilice el conector de la tarjeta. 9 Conector serie Conecte un dispositivo serie, como un dispositivo portátil, al puerto serie. El nombre predeterminado para el conector serie 1 es COM1. Si desea más información, consulte el apartado “Opciones de configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea.Guía de referencia rápida 181 2 Deje el ordenador de lado con la cubierta mirando hacia arriba. 3 Saque la cubierta del ordenador tirando de ella de la parte delantera del ordenador y levantándola. 4 Deje la cubierta a un lado en un lugar segura. 1 Ranura para cable de seguridad 2 Pestillo de liberación de la cubierta 3 Anillo del candado 2 1 3182 Guía de referencia rápida Vista interior del ordenador 1 Unidad de disco flexible 2 Unidad óptica 3 Fuente de alimentación 4 Tarjeta del sistema 5 Ensamblaje de disipador de calor 6 Unidad de disco duro 1 3 4 6 2 5Guía de referencia rápida 183 Componentes de la placa base 1 Conector del altavoz interno (INT_SPKR) 2 Conector del procesador (CPU) 3 Conector de alimentación del procesador (12VPOWER) 4 Conectores del módulo de memoria (DIMM_1, DIMM_2) 5 Conectores de unidad SATA (SATA0, SATA1) 6 Conector del panel anterior (FRONTPANEL) 1 2 6 5 13 3 15 17 12 4 7 14 11 8 10 9 16184 Guía de referencia rápida Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Compruebe que todos los cables estén conectados y apártelos de forma que no molesten. 2 Asegúrese de no dejar herramientas ni piezas adicionales dentro del ordenador. 3 Para volver a colocar la cubierta: a Alinee la parte inferior de la cubierta con las lengüetas de la bisagra situadas a lo largo del borde inferior del ordenador. b Haga palanca con las lengüetas de la bisagra para girar la cubierta hacia abajo y cerrarla. c Coloque la cubierta en su sitio tirando del seguro de liberación de la cubierta y, cuando la cubierta esté bien colocada, suelte el seguro. d Compruebe que la cubierta está colocada correctamente antes de mover el ordenador. 4 Mueva el ordenador poniéndolo en posición vertical. Solución de problemas Dell proporciona una serie de herramientas para ayudarle en el caso de que el ordenador no funcione como es de esperar. Para obtener la información más actualizada sobre la solución de problemas de su ordenador, consulte el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com. 7 Conector de alimentación (POWER) 8 Conectores de unidad SATA (SATA2, SATA3) 9 Puente de reinicio de RTC (RTCRST) 10 Puente de contraseña (PSWD) 11 Zócalo de la batería (BATTERY) 12 Conector de tarjeta PCI Express x16 (SLOT1) 13 Conectores de tarjeta PCI (SLOT2 y SLOT3) 14 Timbre interno (SPKR) 15 Conector serie/ PS/2 (PS2/SER2) 16 Conector del ventilador (FAN_CPU) 17 Conector de la unidad de disco flexible (FLOPPY)Guía de referencia rápida 185 Si se produce algún problema en el ordenador para el que necesite la ayuda de Dell, escriba una descripción detallada del error, los códigos de sonido o los patrones de los indicadores de diagnóstico, introduzca el código de servicio rápido y la etiqueta de servicio que aparece a continuación y póngase en contacto con Dell desde la misma ubicación que el ordenador. Para obtener un ejemplo del código de servicio rápido y de la etiqueta de servicio, consulte el apartado “Localización de información” en la Guía del usuario del ordenador. Dell Diagnostics PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) Si tiene algún problema con el ordenador, realice las comprobaciones que se indican en la sección Bloqueos y problemas de software (consulte la Guía del usuario en línea) y ejecute Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para obtener asistencia técnica. Se recomienda imprimir estos procesos antes de empezar. AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) sólo funcionan en los ordenadores Dell™. NOTA: El soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) es opcional y es posible que no se entregue con el ordenador. Consulte la “Configuración del sistema” en la Guía del usuario en línea para revisar la información de configuración del ordenador y asegúrese de que el dispositivo que desea probar se muestra en la Configuración del sistema y que está activo. Inicie los Dell Diagnostics desde la unidad de disco duro o desde el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). Código de servicio urgente: Etiqueta de servicio:186 Guía de referencia rápida Inicio de los Dell Diagnostics desde la unidad de disco duro Los Dell Diagnostics se encuentran en una partición oculta de la utilidad de diagnóstico en la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el ordenador no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell. 1 Asegúrese de que el ordenador esté conectado a una toma de corriente que funcione correctamente. 2 Encienda (o reinicie) el ordenador. 3 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Seleccione Diagnostics (Diagnósticos) desde el menú de inicio y pulse . NOTA: Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, siga esperando hasta que vea el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® y, a continuación, cierre el ordenador e inténtelo de nuevo. NOTA: Si recibe un mensaje que indica que no se ha encontrado ninguna partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico, ejecute los Dell Diagnostics desde el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities. 4 Pulse cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición de la utilidad de diagnósticos en la unidad de disco duro. Inicio de los Dell Diagnostics desde el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities 1 Introduzca el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). 2 Apague y reinicie el ordenador Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, siga esperando hasta que vea el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® y, a continuación, cierre el ordenador e inténtelo de nuevo. NOTA: Los siguientes pasos cambian la secuencia de inicio una sola vez. La próxima vez que inicie el ordenador, éste lo hará según los dispositivos especificados en el programa Configuración del sistema. 3 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte CD/DVD/ CD-RW y pulse . 4 Seleccione la opción Boot from CD-ROM (Iniciar desde CD-ROM) en el menú que aparece y pulse . 5 Escriba 1 para iniciar el menú del CD y presione para continuar.Guía de referencia rápida 187 6 Seleccione Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Ejecutar los Dell Diagnostics de 32 bits) de la lista numerada. Si se muestran varias versiones, seleccione la apropiada para su ordenador. 7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell), seleccione la prueba que desea ejecutar. Menú principal de Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) 1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desee. NOTA: Se recomienda que seleccione Test System (Probar sistema) para ejecutar una prueba completa en el ordenador. 2 Después de seleccionar la opción Test System (Probar sistema) del menú principal, aparecerá el siguiente menú: NOTA: Se recomienda que seleccione Extended Test (Prueba exhaustiva) en el siguiente menú para realizar una comprobación más exhaustiva de los dispositivos del ordenador. Opción Función Test Memory (Probar memoria) Ejecutar la prueba de memoria independiente Test System (Probar sistema) Ejecutar los diagnósticos del sistema Exit (Salir) Salir de los diagnósticos Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos del sistema. Suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una comprobación exhaustiva de los dispositivos del sistema. Suele tardar una hora o más. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Se utiliza para probar un dispositivo específico o para personalizar las pruebas que se van a ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Esta opción le permite seleccionar pruebas basadas en un síntoma del problema que tiene. Esta opción enumera los síntomas más comunes.188 Guía de referencia rápida 3 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema y póngase en contacto con Dell. NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su ordenador está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de servicio. 4 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la ficha correspondiente que se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información. 5 Cuando las pruebas hayan terminado, cierre la pantalla de la prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de Dell Diagnostics y reiniciar el ordenador, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). 6 Retire el soporte multimedia Drivers and Utilities(Controladores y utilidades) de Dell (si corresponde). Ficha Función Results (Resultados) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuration (Configuración) Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el ordenador o de todos los dispositivos conectados al ordenador. Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración.Guía de referencia rápida 189 Indicadores de alimentación PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. El indicador del botón de alimentación (LED bicolor) ubicado en la parte anterior del ordenador se ilumina y parpadea o permanece encendido para indicar diferentes estados: • Si el indicador de alimentación está apagado, el ordenador está apagado o no recibe alimentación. – Coloque de nuevo el cable de alimentación en el conector de alimentación de la parte posterior del ordenador y en la toma de corriente. – Si el ordenador está enchufado a una caja de enchufes, asegúrese de que la caja de enchufes esté enchufada a una toma de corriente y que esté encendida. Además, puentee los dispositivos de protección de la alimentación, las regletas de enchufes y los alargadores de alimentación para comprobar que el ordenador se enciende correctamente. – Asegúrese de que la toma de alimentación eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. • Si el indicador de alimentación se ilumina en verde y el ordenador no responde: – Asegúrese de que la pantalla está conectada y encendida. – Si la pantalla está conectada y encendida, consulte el apartado “Códigos de sonido” en la página 190. • Si el indicador de alimentación se ilumina de color verde y parpadea, el ordenador está en modo de espera. Pulse una tecla del teclado, mueva el ratón o pulse el botón de alimentación para reanudar la operación normal. Si la luz de alimentación es verde y el ordenador no responde: – Asegúrese de que la pantalla está conectada y encendida. – Si la pantalla está conectada y encendida, consulte el apartado “Códigos de sonido” en la página 190.190 Guía de referencia rápida • Si el indicador de alimentación está en ámbar, el ordenador estará recibiendo corriente eléctrica pero puede que un dispositivo no funcione bien o no esté correctamente instalado. – Retire y vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria. – Extraiga las tarjetas y vuelva a instalarlas. – Extraiga la tarjeta gráfica y vuelva a instalarla, si procede. • Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea en ámbar, puede que haya algún problema de alimentación o que falle un dispositivo interno. – Asegúrese de que todos los cables de alimentación estén firmemente conectados a la placa base (consulte el apartado “Componentes de la placa base” en la página 173). – Asegúrese de que el cable de alimentación principal y el cable del panel anterior están firmemente conectados a la placa base (consulte el apartado “Componentes de la placa base” en la página 173). Códigos de sonido Su ordenador puede emitir una serie de sonidos durante el inicio si el monitor no puede mostrar errores o problemas.Esta serie de sonidos, denominada códigos de sonido, identifica un problema. Por ejemplo, el código de sonido 1- 3-1 (un código de sonido posible) consiste en un sonido, una serie de tres sonidos y, a continuación, otro sonido. Este código de sonido indica que el equipo ha detectado un problema de memoria. El hecho de volver a colocar los módulos de memoria puede corregir los errores de código de sonido siguientes. Si el problema continua, póngase en contacto con Dell para obtener asistencia técnica (consulte el apartado “Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell” en la Guía del usuario). Si se le presenta alguno de los siguientes errores de códigos de sonido, consulte el apartado “Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell” en la Guía del usuario para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo obtener asistencia técnica. Código Causa 1-3-1 a 2-4-4 La memoria no se está utilizando o identificando adecuadamente 4-3-1 Fallo de memoria por encima de la dirección 0FFFFhGuía de referencia rápida 191 Código Causa 1-1-2 Fallo en un registro del microprocesador 1-1-3 Fallo de lectura/escritura NVRAM 1-1-4 Fallo en la suma de comprobación del BIOS en ROM 1-2-1 Error del temporizador de intervalos programable 1-2-2 Fallo en la inicialización de DMA 1-2-3 Fallo de lectura /escritura en el registro de páginas del sistema de DMA 1-3 Fallo en la prueba de la memoria de vídeo 1-3-1 a 2-4-4 La memoria no se está utilizando o identificando adecuadamente 3-1-1 Fallo en el registro DMA esclavo 3-1-2 Fallo en el registro del DMA maestro 3-1-3 Fallo en el registro maestro de enmascaramiento de interrupciones. 3-1-4 Fallo en el registro esclavo de enmascaramiento de interrupciones 3-2-2 Fallo en la carga del vector de interrupciones 3-2-4 Fallo de la prueba de la controladora del teclado 3-3-1 Pérdida de alimentación para la NVRAM 3-3-2 Configuración de la NVRAM no válida 3-3-4 Fallo en la prueba de la memoria de vídeo 3-4-1 Fallo de inicio de la pantalla 3-4-2 Fallo en el retrazo de la pantalla 3-4-3 Fallo de búsqueda de ROM de vídeo 4-2-1 No hay impulsos del temporizador 4-2-2 Fallo de suspensión del trabajo 4-2-3 Error Gate A20 4-2-4 Interrupción inesperada en modo protegido 4-3-1 Fallo de memoria por encima de la dirección 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Fallo en el contador del chip del temporizador 2 4-3-4 El reloj de hora se ha parado 4-4-1 Fallo en la prueba de un puerto serie o paralelo 4-4-2 Falló la descompresión de los datos hacia la memoria duplicada 4-4-3 Fallo en la prueba del coprocesador matemático 4-4-4 Fallo de la prueba de la memoria caché192 Guía de referencia rápida Mensajes del sistema NOTA: Si el mensaje que ha recibido no aparece en la lista de la tabla, consulte la documentación para el sistema operativo o programa que se estaba ejecutando cuando apareció el mensaje. ALERT! PREVIOUS ATTEMPTS A T BOOTING THIS SYSTEM HAVE FAILED A T CHECKPOINT [NNNN ] (¡ALERTA! LO S INTENTOS ANTERIORES D E INICIAR ESTE SISTEMA N O HAN SIDO SATISFACTORIOS EN E L PUNTO D E CONTROL [NNNN]). PARA OBTENER AYUDA ACERCA D E L A RESOLUCIÓN D E ESTE PROBLEMA, ANOTE ESTE PUNTO D E CONTROL Y PÓNGASE EN CONTACTO CON E L SOPORTE TÉCNICO D E DELL: The computer failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive times for the same error (el ordenador no ha podido completar la rutina de inicio tres veces consecutivas por el mismo error). CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR (ERROR D E SUMA D E COMPROBACIÓN D E CMOS): Possible motherboard failure or RTC battery low (Posible fallo de la placa base o batería baja de RTC). Cambie la batería CPU FAN FAILURE (FALLO DEL VENTILADOR D E L A UNIDAD CENTRAL D E PROCESAMIENTO): CPU fan failure (Fallo del ventilador de la Unidad central de procesamiento). Cambie el ventilador de la UCP. DISKETTE DRIVE 0 SEEK FAILURE (FALLO D E BÚSQUEDA EN UNIDAD D E DISCO FLEXIBLE 0): A cable may be loose, or the computer configuration information may not match the hardware configuration (Un cable puede estar suelto, o la información de configuración del equipo puede no coincidir con la configuración del hardware). Compruebe las conexiones de cable. DISKETTE READ FAILURE (EL DISQUETE N O S E PUEDE LEER): The floppy disk may be defective or a cable may be loose (El disco flexible puede estar defectuoso o un cable puede estar suelto). Replace the floppy disk/check for a loose cable connection (Sustituya el disco flexible/compruebe si hay una conexión de cable suelta). HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (FALLO D E L A UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO): Possible hard disk drive failure during HDD POST (Posible fallo de la unidad de disco duro durante la autoprueba de encendido de la unidad de disco duro). Compruebe los cables/cambie los discos duros.Guía de referencia rápida 193 HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (FALLO D E LECTURA D E LA UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO): Possible HDD failure during HDD boot test (Posible fallo de la unidad de disco duro durante la prueba de arranque de la unidad de disco duro). KEYBOARD FAILURE (ERROR D E TECLADO): Keyboard failure or keyboard cable loose (Fallo del teclado o cable del teclado suelto). NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (NO HAY NINGÚN DISPOSITIVO D E INICIO DISPONIBLE): The system cannot detect a bootable device or partition (El sistema no puede detectar un dispositivo de inicio o una partición). • If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that the cables are connected and that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive (Si la unidad de disco flexible es el dispositivo de inicio, asegúrese de que los cables estén conectados y que el disquete de inicio esté en la unidad). • Si la unidad de disco duro es el dispositivo de inicio, asegúrese de que los cables estén conectados y que la unidad esté instalada correctamente y dividida en particiones como un dispositivo de inicio. • Ejecute el programa de configuración del sistema y asegúrese de que la información de la secuencia de inicio es correcta. NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (NO HAY INTERRUPCIÓN D E TIC D E TEMPORIZADOR): A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning or motherboard failure (Un chip de la placa base podría estar fallando o fallo de la placa base). NON-SYSTEM DISK O R DISK ERROR (NO E S DISCO DEL SISTEMA O ERROR D E DISCO): Cambie el disco flexible por uno que contenga un sistema operativo ejecutable o retire el disco flexible de la unidad A y reinicie el ordenador. NO T A BOOT DISKETTE (NO E S UN DISQUETE D E INICIALIZACIÓN): Inserte un disquete de inicio y reinicie el ordenador. USB OVER CURRENT ERROR (ERROR D E SOBRECORRIENTE EN USB): Disconnect the USB device (Desconecte el dispositivo USB). Use an external power source for the USB device (Utilice una fuente de energía externa para el dispositivo USB).194 Guía de referencia rápida Indicadores de diagnóstico PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Para ayudarle a solucionar un problema con el ordenador, el ordenador cuenta con cuatro indicadores denominados 1, 2, 3 y 4 situados en el panel anterior o posterior. Estos indicadores pueden estar apagados o ser de color verde. Cuando el equipo se inicia normalmente, los patrones o códigos de los indicadores cambian a medida que avanza el proceso de arranque. Cuando el equipo se inicia normalmente, los patrones o códigos de los indicadores cambian a medida que avanza el proceso de arranque. Si la parte de la POST del arranque del sistema se completa correctamente, los cuatro indicadores luminosos emiten una luz verde fija. En el caso de que se produzcan errores durante el proceso de la POST, el patrón mostrado en los indicadores LED puede ayudarle a identificar la fase del proceso en la que se ha detenido el equipo. NOTA: La orientación de las luces de diagnóstico puede variar en función del tipo de sistema. Los indicadores de diagnóstico pueden estar en posición vertical u horizontal. NOTICE - HARD DRIVE SELF MONITORING SYSTEM HAS REPORTED THAT A PARAMETER HAS EXCEEDED ITS NORMAL OPERATING RANGE (AVISO - UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO EL SISTEMA DE SUPERVISIÓN AUTOMÁTICO H A INFORMADO D E QUE UN PARÁMETRO H A SUPERADO S U RANGO OPERATIVO NORMAL). DELL RECOMMENDS THAT YOU BACK U P YOUR DATA REGULARLY (DELL RECOMIENDA QUE REGULARMENTE HAGA UNA COPIA D E SEGURIDAD D E LOS DATOS). A PARAMETER OUT O F RANGE MAY O R MAY NOT INDICATE A POTENTIAL HARD DRIVE PROBLEM (UN PARÁMETRO FUERA D E RANGO PUEDE O N O INDICAR UN PROBLEMA POTENCIAL EN LA UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO). Error de S.M.A.R.T, posible fallo de la unidad de disco duro. Esta función puede estar activada o desactivada en la configuración de BIOS. Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugerida El ordenador está apagado o se ha producido un error de preBIOS. Los indicadores de diagnóstico no permanecen encendidos después de que el ordenador se inicie correctamente en el sistema operativo. Enchufe el ordenador a una toma de alimentación eléctrica en funcionamiento y pulse el botón de alimentación.Guía de referencia rápida 195 Se ha producido un posible fallo del BIOS; el ordenador se encuentra en modo de recuperación. Ejecute la Utilidad de recuperación de BIOS, espere a que acabe la recuperación y reinicie el ordenador. Se ha producido un posible fallo en el procesador. Vuelva a instalar el procesador y reinicie el ordenador. Se han detectado los módulos de memoria, pero se ha producido un error de memoria. • Si tiene instalado un módulo de memoria, vuelva a instalarlo y, a continuación, reinicie el ordenador. (consulte la Guía del usuario en línea para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo quitar e instalar módulos de memoria). • Si tiene instalados dos o más módulos de memoria, extráigalos, vuelva a instalar uno y reinicie el ordenador. Si el equipo se inicia normalmente, vuelva a instalar otro módulo. Prosiga de este modo hasta que identifique el módulo anómalo o hasta que haya vuelto a instalar todos los módulos sin errores. • Si es posible, instale una memoria del mismo tipo que funcione correctamente en el ordenador. • Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell. Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugerida196 Guía de referencia rápida Se ha producido un posible fallo de la tarjeta de gráficos. • Si el ordenador incluye una tarjeta gráfica, extráigala, vuelta a instalarla y, a continuación, reinicie el ordenador. • Si persiste el problema, instale una tarjeta de gráficos que sepa que funcione y reinicie el ordenador. • Si no se soluciona el problema o el ordenador tiene gráficos integrados, póngase en contacto con Dell. Se ha producido un error de unidad de disco flexible o de disco duro. Vuelva a asentar todos los cables de alimentación y de datos y reinicie el ordenador. Se ha producido un fallo de USB. Vuelva a instalar todos los dispositivos USB, compruebe las conexiones por cable y reinicie el ordenador. Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugeridaGuía de referencia rápida 197 No se detectan módulos de memoria. • Si tiene instalado un módulo de memoria, vuelva a instalarlo y, a continuación, reinicie el ordenador. Consulte la Guía del usuario en línea para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo quitar e instalar módulos de memoria. • Si tiene instalados dos o más módulos de memoria, extráigalos, vuelva a instalar uno y reinicie el ordenador. Si el equipo se inicia normalmente, vuelva a instalar otro módulo. Prosiga de este modo hasta que identifique el módulo anómalo o hasta que haya vuelto a instalar todos los módulos sin errores. • Si es posible, instale una memoria del mismo tipo que funcione correctamente en el ordenador. • Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell. Se han detectado los módulos de memoria, pero existe un error de configuración del sistema o de compatibilidad. • Asegúrese de que no existen requisitos especiales para la colocación del conector o del módulo de memoria. • Asegúrese de que los módulos de memoria que va a instalar son compatibles con el ordenador. • Si el problema no desaparece, póngase en contacto con Dell. Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugerida198 Guía de referencia rápida Cómo borrar contraseñas olvidadas PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar” en la página 146. 2 Quite la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo quitar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 180). 3 Localice el puente de contraseña de 2 patas (PSWD) situado en la placa base. De manera predeterminada, la pata 1 y la pata 2 deberían estar conectadas. Tendrá que retirar el puente e iniciar el sistema como se explica a continuación. 4 Retire el puente. Se ha producido un fallo. Este patrón también se muestra cuando entra en la configuración del sistema y puede que no indique un problema. • Compruebe que los cables de las unidades de disco duro y de la unidad óptica están conectados correctamente a la placa base. • Compruebe el mensaje del ordenador que aparece en la pantalla del monitor. • Si el problema no desaparece, póngase en contacto con Dell. Cuando se ha completado la POST, los cuatro indicadores verdes se encienden unos segundos antes de apagarse para indicar un funcionamiento normal. Ninguna. Patrón de luz Descripción del problema Resolución sugeridaGuía de referencia rápida 199 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 174). AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, conecte primero el cable al dispositivo de red y, a continuación, enchúfelo al ordenador. 6 Conecte el ordenador y los dispositivos a las tomas de corriente y enciéndalos. 7 Después de que aparezca el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® en el ordenador, apague el ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo apagar el ordenador” en la página 148). 8 Apague el monitor y desconéctelo de la toma de alimentación eléctrica. 9 Desconecte el cable de alimentación del ordenador de la toma de alimentación eléctrica y pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base. 10 Abra la cubierta de la PC. 11 Localice el puente de contraseña de 2 patas (PSWD) en la placa base y conecte el puente para volver a activar la función de contraseña. 12 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 174).200 Guía de referencia rápida AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red de la pared y, después, al ordenador. 13 Conecte el ordenador y los dispositivos a las tomas de corriente y enciéndalos. NOTA: Este procedimiento permite activar la función de contraseña. Cuando entre en la configuración del sistema (consulte el apartado “Cómo entrar en la configuración del sistema” de la Guía del usuario), las opciones de contraseña del sistema y de contraseña de administrador aparecen con el valor Not Set (No establecida), lo que significa que la función de contraseña está activada pero no se ha asignado ninguna contraseña. 14 Asigne una nueva contraseña del sistema y/o de administrador. Borrado de la configuración de CMOS PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de este apartado, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. 1 Siga los procedimientos que se indican en el apartado “Antes de comenzar” en la página 146. NOTA: El ordenador debe estar desconectado de la toma de corriente para borrar la configuración de CMOS. 2 Quite la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo quitar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 180). 3 Retire la cubierta del sistema. 4 Restablezca la configuración actual de la memoria CMOS: a Localice los puentes de contraseña (PSWD) y CMOS (RTCRST) en la placa base (consulte el apartado “Cómo borrar contraseñas olvidadas” en la página 198). b Quite el conector del puente de contraseña de sus patillas. c Coloque el conector del puente de contraseña en las patas RTCRST y espere unos cinco segundos. d Quite el conector del puente de las patas de RTCRST y colóquelo de nuevo en las patas de la contraseña. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del ordenador (consulte el apartado “Cómo volver a colocar la cubierta del ordenador” en la página 174).Guía de referencia rápida 201 AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, conecte primero el cable al dispositivo o puerto de red y, a continuación, enchúfelo al ordenador. 6 Conecte el ordenador y los dispositivos a las tomas de corriente y enciéndalos. Actualización flash del BIOS Es posible que sea necesario actualizar el BIOS cuando haya una actualización disponible o cuando se cambie la placa base. 1 Encienda el ordenador. 2 Localice el archivo de actualización del BIOS para el ordenador situado en el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com. 3 Haga clic en Download Now (Descargar) ahora para descargar el archivo. 4 Si aparece la ventana Export Compliance Disclaimer (Renuncia de cumplimiento para exportación), haga clic en Yes, I Accept this Agreement (Sí, acepto este acuerdo). Aparece la ventana File Download (Descarga de archivos). 5 Haga clic en Save this program to disk (Guardar este programa en el disco) y, a continuación, haga clic en OK (Aceptar). Aparece la ventana Save In (Guardar en). 6 Haga clic en la flecha hacia abajo para ver el menú Save In (Guardar en), seleccione Desktop (Escritorio) y, a continuación, haga clic en Save (Guardar). El archivo se descarga en el escritorio. 7 Haga clic en Close (Cerrar) cuando aparezca la ventana Download Complete (Descarga completa). Aparecerá un icono de archivo en el escritorio que se titula igual que el archivo de actualización BIOS que se ha descargado. 8 Haga doble clic en el icono de archivo situado en el escritorio y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla.202 Guía de referencia rápidaÍndice 203 Índice A alimentación acondicionadores de línea botón, 176 dispositivos de protección indicador, 166 protector contra sobrevoltajes UPS archivo de ayuda Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows, 145 Asistente para configuración de red, 152 asistentes Asistente para configuración de red, 152 C CD sistema operativo, 145 CD Operating System (Sistema operativo), 145 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 145 códigos de sonido, 190 conexión a Internet acerca de, 153 configuración, 154 opciones, 153 configuración de CMOS borrar, 200 contraseña borrar, 198 puente, 198 Contrato de licencia del usuario final, 142 cubierta quitar, 170, 180 volver a colocar, 174, 184 D Dell Diagnostics, 185 diagnósticos códigos de sonido, 190 Dell, 185 documentación Contrato de licencia del usuario final, 142 en línea, 144 ergonomía, 142 garantía, 142 Guía de información del producto, 142 Guía del usuario, 142 Referencia rápida, 142 reglamentaria, 142204 Índice seguridad, 142 E equipo componentes del interior, 182 vista interior, 182 etiqueta de servicio, 143, 166, 175 etiquetas etiqueta de servicio, 143, 166, 175 Microsoft Windows, 143 G Guía de información del producto, 142 Guía del usuario, 142 H hardware códigos de sonido, 190 Dell Diagnostics, 185 I impresora cable, 160 conectar, 151 conexión, 160 configurar, 151, 160 indicadores alimentación, 166 información reglamentaria, 142 información sobre ergonomía, 142 información sobre la garantía, 142 Iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde el CD Drivers and Utilities, 186 Iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la unidad de disco duro, 186 instalación de piezas antes de comenzar, 147 instalar piezas apagar el ordenador, 148 herramientas recomendadas, 148 instrucciones de seguridad, 142 M mensajes de error códigos de sonido, 190 monitor conectar dos, 161-162 conectar DVI, 161-162 conectar TV, 161-162 conectar VGA, 161-162 configuración de pantalla, 163 modo de clonación, 163 modo de escritorio ampliado, 163Índice 205 O ordenador códigos de sonido, 190 componentes internos, 172 vista interior, 172 P placa base, 173, 183 placa base. Consulte placa base placa base. Véase placa base problemas códigos de sonido, 190 Dell Diagnostics, 185 R red Asistente para configuración de red, 152 ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 185 S S.M.A.R.T, 194 sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida. Consulte UPS sistema operativo volver a instalar, 145 sitio web de asistencia técnica, 144 sitio web de asistencia técnica de Dell, 144 solución de problemas Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 145 Dell Diagnostics, 185 T TV conectar al equipo, 161 conectar al ordenador, 162 U UPS W Windows XP Asistente para configuración de red, 152 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 145 volver a instalar, 145206 Índice www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Inspiron™ 1520 Owner’s Manual Model PP22LNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Wi-Fi Catcher, and Dell MediaDirect are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel is a registered trademark and Core is a trademark of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Blu-ray Disc is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association; Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell under license. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP22L October 2007 P/N UX862 Rev. A03Contents 3 Contents Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Determining Your Computer’s Configuration . . . . . . 21 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Setting Up Your Internet Connection . . . . . . . . 36 Transferring Information to a New Computer . . . . . 37 Windows Easy Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Connecting a USB Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Contents Power Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Line Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Uninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . 40 3 Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Adjusting Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Using a Projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Making Images and Text Look Bigger or Sharper . . . 41 Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Windows Vista® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Using Both a Monitor and Your Computer Display . . . 43 Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setting Display Resolution and Refresh Rate . . . . . . 44 Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 4 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad . . . . . 47 Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Microsoft® Windows® Logo Key Functions . . . . 49 Dell™ QuickSet Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . 49 Adjusting Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Contents 5 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Customizing the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 5 Using a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Battery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Checking the Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Dell QuickSet Battery Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Microsoft® Windows® Battery Meter . . . . . . . 55 Charge Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Low-Battery Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Conserving Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Power Management Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Standby and Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Hibernate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Configuring Power Management Settings . . . . . . . 58 Accessing Power Options Properties . . . . . . . 58 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Storing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6 Using Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Playing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Playing Media Using Dell Travel Remote (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 Contents Copying CD, DVD, and Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) Media . . . 64 How to Copy a CD, DVD, or BD . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Using Blank CD, DVD, and BD Media . . . . . . . 65 Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Adjusting the Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Using Dell MediaDirect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connecting Your Computer to a TV or Audio Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 S-Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 S-Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . . . . . . 73 Composite Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . . 75 Composite Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . 77 Component Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . 79 Component Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . 81 Enabling the Display Settings for a TV . . . . . . . 84 7 Using ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ExpressCard Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Installing an ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Removing an ExpressCard or Blank . . . . . . . . . . . 89 8 Using the Memory Card Reader . . . . . . . 91 Memory Card Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Installing a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Removing a Memory Card or Blank . . . . . . . . . . . 92Contents 7 9 Setting Up and Using Networks . . . . . . . 93 Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Setting Up a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Wireless Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 What You Need to Establish a WLAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Checking Your Wireless Network Card . . . . . . 95 Setting Up a New WLAN Using a Wireless Router and a Broadband Modem . . . . 96 Connecting to a WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Mobile Broadband (or Wireless Wide Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection . . . . . . . . . 100 Checking Your Dell Mobile Broadband Card . . . . 100 Connecting to a Mobile Broadband Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Enabling/Disabling the Dell Mobile Broadband Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator . . . . . . . . . 102 10 Securing Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Security Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 Contents 11 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Dell Technical Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Dell Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Dell Support 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Dell PC Tune-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dell PC CheckUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dell Network Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 DellConnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Optical drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Hard drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems . . . . . . . . . 117 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ExpressCard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 IEEE 1394 Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 External Keyboard problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Unexpected characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Lockups and Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 The computer does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 The computer stops responding . . . . . . . . . . 127 A program stops responding or crashes repeatedly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 A program is designed for an earlier Microsoft® Windows® operating system . . . . . 127 A solid blue screen appears . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Contents 9 Dell MediaDirect problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Other software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network [WWAN]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 No sound from integrated speakers . . . . . . . . 135 No sound from external speakers . . . . . . . . . 135 No sound from headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Touch Pad or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Video and Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 If the display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 If the display is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . 138 If only part of the display is readable . . . . . . . 139 Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 What Is a Driver? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Identifying Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . 140 Troubleshooting Software and Hardware Problems in the Microsoft® Windows® XP and Microsoft Windows Vista® Operating Systems . . . . 143 Restoring Your Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore . . . . 14510 Contents Starting System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Using Dell™ PC Restore and Dell Factory Image Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Using the Operating System Media . . . . . . . . 150 12 Adding and Replacing Parts . . . . . . . . . 153 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Turning Off Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Before Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . 154 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Removing the Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Replacing the Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Returning a Hard Drive to Dell . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Removing the Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Replacing the Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Removing the Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Replacing the Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Removing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Replacing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Removing the DIMM A Memory Module . . . . . . 163 Replacing the DIMM A Memory Module . . . . . 165 Removing the DIMM B Memory Module . . . . . . 166 Replacing the DIMM B Memory Module . . . . . 167Contents 11 Subscriber Identity Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Wireless Mini Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Removing a WLAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Replacing a WLAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Removing a Mobile Broadband or WWAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Replacing a WWAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Removing a WPAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Replacing a WPAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Flash Cache Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Removing the FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Replacing the FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Internal Card With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Removing the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Replacing the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Removing the Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . 181 Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . 182 13 Dell™ QuickSet Features . . . . . . . . . . . 183 14 Traveling With Your Computer . . . . . . . 185 Identifying Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Packing the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Travel Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Traveling by Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18612 Contents 15 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Obtaining Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Technical Support and Customer Service . . . . . 188 DellConnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 AutoTech Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Automated Order-Status Service . . . . . . . . . 189 Problems With Your Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit . . . . . 190 Before You Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 16 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Viewing the System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . 204 System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Commonly Used Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Cleaning Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Computer, Keyboard, and Display . . . . . . . . . 206 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Contents 13 Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 208 Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals 209 Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals 209 FCC Notice (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 FCC Class B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Macrovision Product Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22914 ContentsFinding Information 15 Finding Information NOTE: Some features may be optional and may not ship with your computer. Some features may not be available in certain countries. NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • Device documentation • Notebook System Software (NSS) Drivers and Utilities Media Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the Drivers and Utilities media to reinstall drivers (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140) or run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). Readme files may be included on your Drivers and Utilities media to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can be found at support.dell.com.16 Finding Information • Warranty information • Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) • Safety instructions • Regulatory information • Ergonomics information • End User License Agreement Dell™ Product Information Guide • How to set up my computer Setup Diagram NOTE: See the setup diagram that came with your computer. • How to remove and replace parts • Specifications • How to configure system settings • How to troubleshoot and solve problems Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista® Help and Support Center 1 Click Start→Help and Support→ Dell User and System Guides→ System Guides. 2 Click the User’s Guide for your computer. • Service Tag and Express Service Code • Microsoft® Windows® Product Key Service Tag and Microsoft Windows Product Key These labels are located on your computer. • Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact support. NOTE: If your operating system is Windows XP, this label might look different. • Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting support. NOTE: As an increased security measure, the newly designed Microsoft Windows license label incorporates a "security portal," which looks like a missing portion of the label, to discourage removal of the label. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereFinding Information 17 • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, online courses, and frequently asked questions • Community — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the memory, hard drive, and operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, service call and order status, and warranty and repair information • Service and support — Service call status, support history, service contract, and online discussions with support • Dell Technical Update Service — Proactive e-mail notification of software and hardware updates for your computer • Reference — Computer documentation, details on my computer configuration, product specifications, and white papers • Downloads — Certified drivers, patches, and software updates • Notebook System Software (NSS) — If you reinstall the operating system on your computer, you should also reinstall the NSS utility. NSS automatically detects your computer and operating system, and installs the updates appropriate for your configuration, providing critical updates for your operating system and support for Dell 3.5-inch USB floppy drives, Intel® processors, optical drives, and USB devices. NSS is necessary for correct operation of your Dell computer. Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view the appropriate support site. To download Notebook System Software: 1 Go to support.dell.com, select your country/region, and then click Drivers & Downloads. 2 Enter your Service Tag or product model, and then click Go. 3 Select your operating system and language, and then click Find Downloads, or under Downloads Search, search for the keywordNotebook System Software. NOTE: The support.dell.com user interface may vary depending on your selections. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here18 Finding Information • Software upgrades and troubleshooting hints — Frequently asked questions, hot topics, and general health of your computing environment Dell Support Utility The Dell Support Utility is an automated upgrade and notification system installed on your computer. This support provides real-time health scans of your computing environment, software updates, and relevant self-support information. Access the Dell Support Utility from the icon on the taskbar. For more information, see "Dell Support Center" on page 111. • How to use Windows XP or Windows Vista • How to work with programs and files • How to personalize my desktop Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista Help and Support Center 1 Click Start→Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. • Information on network activity, the Power Management Wizard, hotkeys, and other items controlled by Dell QuickSet Dell QuickSet Help To view Dell QuickSet Help, right-click the Dell QuickSet icon in the Windows notification area. For more information on Dell QuickSet, see "Dell™ QuickSet Features" on page 183. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereFinding Information 19 • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System Media The operating system is already installed on your computer. To reinstall your operating system, use one of the following methods: • Microsoft Windows System Restore— Microsoft Windows System Restore returns your computer to an earlier operating state without affecting data files. • Dell PC Restore — Dell PC Restore returns your computer to its original operating state. Dell PC Restore may not ship with your computer. • Operating System Installation Media — If you received operating system media with your computer, you can use it to restore your operating system. For more information, see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities media to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. NOTE: The color of your operating system installation media varies according to the operating system you ordered. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here20 Finding InformationAbout Your Computer 21 About Your Computer Determining Your Computer’s Configuration Based on selections that you made when purchasing your computer, your computer has one of several different video controller configurations. To determine your computer’s video controller configuration: 1 Click Start , and then click Help and Support. 2 Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. 3 Under My Computer Information, select Hardware. From the My Computer Information - Hardware screen, you can view the type of video controller installed in your computer, as well as the other hardware components.22 About Your Computer Front View 1 camera indicator (optional) 2 camera (optional) 3 display latch 4 display 5 power button 6 keyboard 7 device status lights 8 touch pad 9 consumer IR 10 media control buttons 11 touch pad buttons 12 Dell MediaDirect™ button 13 keyboard status lights 14 digital array microphones 4 5 13 3 6 12 8 7 14 1 2 11 10 9About Your Computer 23 CAMERA INDICATOR — Indicates that the camera is on. Based on configuration selections you made when ordering your computer, your computer may not include a camera. CAMERA — Built-in camera for video capture, conferencing, and chat. Based on configuration selections you made when ordering your computer, your computer may not include a camera. DISPLAY LATCH — Keeps the display closed. DISPLAY — For more information about your display, see "Using the Display" on page 41. POWER BUTTON — Press the power button to turn on the computer or exit a power management mode (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56). NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft® Windows® operating system shutdown rather than by pressing the power button. If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely (may take several seconds). KEYBOARD — For more information about the keyboard, see "Using the Keyboard and Touchpad" on page 47. 24 About Your Computer DEVICE STATUS LIGHTS The blue lights located to the right of the keyboard indicate the following: Power light – Turns on when you turn on the computer, and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode. Hard drive activity light – Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the light is flashing. Battery status light – Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. WiFi status light – Turns on when wireless networking is enabled. To enable or disable wireless networking, use the wireless switch (see "wireless switch" on page 27).About Your Computer 25 If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows: – Solid blue: The battery is charging. – Flashing blue: The battery is almost fully charged. – Off: The battery is adequately charged. If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows: – Off: The battery is adequately charged (or the computer is turned off). – Flashing amber: The battery charge is low. – Solid amber: The battery charge is critically low. TOUCH PAD — Provides the functionality of a mouse (see "Touch Pad" on page 50). TOUCH PAD BUTTONS — Use these buttons much like the buttons on a mouse when you use the touch pad to move the cursor on the display (see "Touch Pad" on page 50). MEDIA CONTROL BUTTONS — Control CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc™ (BD), and Media Player playback. Bluetooth® status light – Turns on when a card with Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled. NOTE: The card with Bluetooth wireless technology is an optional feature. The light turns on only if you ordered the card with your computer. For more information, see the documentation that came with your card. To turn off only the Bluetooth wireless technology functionality, right-click the icon in the notification area, and then click Disable Bluetooth Radio. To quickly enable or disable all wireless devices, use the wireless switch (see "wireless switch" on page 27). Mute the sound. Play the previous track. Turn the volume down. Play the next track. Turn the volume up. Stop. Play or pause. 26 About Your Computer DELL MEDIADIRECT™ BUTTON — Press the Dell MediaDirect button to launch Dell MediaDirect (see "Using Dell MediaDirect™" on page 68). KEYBOARD STATUS LIGHTS The blue lights located above the keyboard indicate the following: DIGITAL ARRAY MICROPHONES — Built-in microphone for conferencing and chat. Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter (caps lock) function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. 9 AAbout Your Computer 27 Left Side View SECURITY CABLE SLOT — Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer (see "Security Cable Lock" on page 103). WIRELESS SWITCH — When enabled through Dell QuickSet, this switch can scan for a wireless local area network (WLAN) in your vicinity. You can also use it to rapidly turn off or on any wireless devices such as WLAN cards and internal cards with Bluetooth wireless technology (see "Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator" on page 102). 1 security cable slot 2 wireless switch 3 Wi-Fi Catcher light 4 air vents 5 audio connectors 6 ExpressCard slot 1 off Disables wireless devices. 2 on Enables wireless devices. 3 momentary Scans for WLAN networks (see "Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator" on page 102). 4 Wi-Fi Catcher light • Flashing green: Searching for networks • Solid green: Strong network found • Solid yellow: Weak network found • Flashing yellow: Error • Off: No signal found 1 2 56 3 4 1 2 3 428 About Your Computer CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. AIR VENTS — The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. The computer turns the fan on when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. AUDIO CONNECTORS EXPRESSCARD SLOT — Supports one ExpressCard. The computer ships with a plastic blank installed in the slot. For more information, see "Using ExpressCards" on page 87. Attach headphones to the connector. Attach a microphone to the connector.About Your Computer 29 Right Side View OPTICAL DRIVE — For more information about the optical drive, see "Using Multimedia" on page 61. EJECT BUTTON — Press the eject button to open the optical drive. 8-IN-1 MEMORY CARD READER — Provides a fast and convenient way to view and share digital photos, music, and videos stored on a memory card. The computer ships with a plastic blank installed in the slot. The 8-in-1 memory card reader reads the following digital memory cards: • Secure Digital (SD) memory card • SDIO card • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • xD-Picture Card • Hi Speed-SD • Hi Density-SD IEEE 1394 CONNECTOR — Connects devices supporting IEEE 1394 high-speed transfer rates, such as some digital video cameras. 1 battery status light 2 hard drive activity light 3 power light 4 optical drive 5 eject button 6 8-in-1 memory card reader 7 IEEE 1394 connector 8 video connector (VGA) 9 network connector (RJ-45) 10 USB connectors (2) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 330 About Your Computer VIDEO CONNECTOR NETWORK CONNECTOR (RJ-45) USB CONNECTORS Back View Connects video devices, such as a monitor. Connects the computer to a network. The two lights next to the connector indicate status and activity for wired network connections. For information on using the network adapter, see the device user’s guide supplied with your computer. Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 USB connectors (2) 3 AC adapter connector 4 battery 5 modem connector (RJ-11) 1 2 3 4 5About Your Computer 31 S-VIDEO TV-OUT CONNECTOR USB CONNECTORS AC ADAPTER CONNECTOR — Attaches an AC adapter to the computer. The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer turned on or off. CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly, but gently to help prevent damage to the cable. Connects your computer to a TV. Also connects digital audio-capable devices using the TV/digital audio adapter cable. Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. 32 About Your Computer MODEM CONNECTOR (RJ-11) Bottom View Connect the telephone line to the modem connector. For information on using the modem, see the online modem documentation supplied with your computer. 1 left speaker 2 memory module/coin-cell battery compartment 3 consumer IR 4 right speaker 5 wireless mini card compartment 6 battery 7 battery charge/health gauge 8 battery-bay latch releases (2) 9 fan 10 hard drive 2 3 4 10 7 1 6 8 9 5About Your Computer 33 LEFT SPEAKER — To adjust the volume of the integrated speaker, press the volume control buttons or the mute button. MEMORY MODULE/COIN-CELL BATTERY COMPARTMENT — Compartment that contains the DIMM B memory module and the coin-cell battery. For additional information, see "Adding and Replacing Parts" on page 153. CONSUMER IR — Infrared sensor for the Dell Travel Remote. RIGHT SPEAKER — To adjust the volume of the integrated speaker, press the volume control buttons or the mute button. WIRELESS MINI CARD COMPARTMENT — Compartment for WLAN, WWAN, or WPAN Mini Cards (see "Wireless Mini Cards" on page 170). BATTERY — When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet (see "Using a Battery" on page 53). BATTERY CHARGE/HEALTH GAUGE — Provides information on the battery charge (see "Checking the Battery Charge" on page 54). BATTERY-BAY LATCH RELEASES — Releases the battery (see "Replacing the Battery" on page 59 for instructions). FAN — The computer uses a fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. The computer turns the fan on when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. HARD DRIVE — Stores software and data.34 About Your ComputerSetting Up Your Computer 35 Setting Up Your Computer Connecting to the Internet NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country. To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an Internet service provider (ISP). Your ISP will offer one or more of the following Internet connection options: • DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your existing telephone line or cellular telephone service. With a DSL connection, you can access the Internet and use your telephone on the same line simultaneously. • Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your local cable TV line. • Satellite modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through a satellite television system. • Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a telephone line. Dial-up connections are considerably slower than DSL, cable, and satellite modem connections. • Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) or Mobile Broadband technology provides a connection to the Internet using cellular technology at broadband rates. • Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) connections use high-frequency radio waves to communicate. Typically, a wireless router is connected to the broadband cable or DSL modem that broadcasts the Internet signal to your computer. If you are using a dial-up connection, connect a telephone line to the modem connector on your computer and to the telephone wall jack before you set up your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL, cable, or satellite modem connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup instructions.36 Setting Up Your Computer Setting Up Your Internet Connection To set up an Internet connection with a provided ISP desktop shortcut: 1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Double-click the ISP icon on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. NOTE: If you are having problems connecting to the Internet, see "E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems" on page 117. If you cannot connect to the Internet, but have successfully connected in the past, the ISP may have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later. NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to the Internet wizard can help you obtain one. If you do not have an ISP icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an Internet connection with a different ISP: 1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2 Click Start , and then click Control Panel. 3 Under Network and Internet, click Connect to the Internet. The Connect to the Internet window appears. 4 Click either Broadband (PPPoE), Wireless, or Dial-up, depending on how you want to connect: • Choose Broadband if you will use a DSL modem, cable TV modem, or satellite modem. • Choose Wireless if you will use a wireless connection through a WLAN card. • Choose Dial-up if you will use a dial-up modem or ISDN. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, click Help me choose or contact your ISP. 5 Follow the instructions on the screen and use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup.Setting Up Your Computer 37 Transferring Information to a New Computer You can transfer the following types of data from one computer to another: • E-mail messages • Toolbar settings • Window sizes • Internet bookmarks Use one of the following methods for transferring data: • Windows Easy Transfer wizard, an Easy Transfer Cable, and a USB port • Over a network • Removable media, such as a writable CD Windows Easy Transfer 1 Click Start →All Programs→Accessories→System Tools→Windows Easy Transfer. 2 In the User Account Control dialog box, click Continue. 3 Click Next. 4 Click Start a new transfer or Continue a transfer in progress. 5 Follow the instructions in the Windows Easy Transfer wizard. Setting Up a Printer NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the computer. See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information, including how to: • Obtain and install updated drivers. • Connect the printer to the computer. • Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge. For technical assistance, refer to the printer owner's manual or contact the printer manufacturer. 38 Setting Up Your Computer Printer Cable Your printer connects to your computer with a USB cable. Your printer may not come with a printer cable, so if you purchase a cable separately, ensure that it is compatible with your printer and computer. If you purchased a printer cable at the same time you purchased your computer, the cable may arrive in the computer’s shipping box. Connecting a USB Printer NOTE: You can connect USB devices while the computer is turned on. 1 Complete the operating system setup if you have not already done so. 2 Attach the USB printer cable to the USB connectors on the computer and the printer. The USB connectors fit only one way. 1 USB connector on computer 2 USB connector on printer 3 USB printer cable 3 2 1Setting Up Your Computer 39 3 Turn on the printer, and then turn on the computer. If the Add New Hardware Wizard window appears, click Cancel. 4 Click Start , and then click Network. 5 Click Add a printer to start the Add Printer Wizard. NOTE: To install the printer driver, see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140 and the documentation that came with your printer. 6 Click Add a local printer or Add a network, wireless, or Bluetooth printer. 7 Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard. Power Protection Devices Several devices are available to protect against power fluctuations and failures: • Surge protectors • Line conditioners • Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) Surge Protectors Surge protectors and power strips equipped with surge protection help prevent damage to your computer from voltage spikes that can occur during electrical storms or after power interruptions. Some surge protector manufacturers include warranty coverage for certain types of damage. Carefully read the device warranty when choosing a surge protector. A device with a higher joule rating offers more protection. Compare joule ratings to determine the relative effectiveness of different devices. NOTICE: Most surge protectors do not protect against power fluctuations or power interruptions caused by nearby lightning strikes. When lightning occurs in your area, disconnect the telephone line from the telephone wall jack and disconnect your computer from the electrical outlet. Many surge protectors have a telephone jack for modem protection. See the surge protector documentation for modem connection instructions. NOTICE: Not all surge protectors offer network adapter protection. Disconnect the network cable from the network wall jack during electrical storms.40 Setting Up Your Computer Line Conditioners NOTICE: Line conditioners do not protect against power interruptions. Line conditioners are designed to maintain AC voltage at a fairly constant level. Uninterruptible Power Supplies NOTICE: Loss of power while data is being saved to the hard drive may result in data loss or file damage. NOTE: To ensure maximum battery operating time, connect only your computer to a UPS. Connect other devices, such as a printer, to a separate power strip that provides surge protection. A UPS protects against power fluctuations and interruptions. UPS devices contain a battery that provides temporary power to connected devices when AC power is interrupted. The battery charges while AC power is available. See the UPS manufacturer documentation for information on battery operating time and to ensure that the device is approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Using the Display 41 Using the Display Adjusting Brightness When a Dell™ computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power by setting the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level. • Press and the up-arrow key to increase brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). • Press and the down-arrow key to decrease brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). NOTE: Brightness key combinations only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors or projectors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is connected to an external monitor and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter may appear, but the brightness level on the external device does not change. Using a Projector When you start the computer with an external device attached (such as an external monitor or projector) and turned on, the image may appear on either the computer display or the external device. Press to switch the video image between the display only, the external device only, or the display and the external device simultaneously. Making Images and Text Look Bigger or Sharper NOTE: If you change the display resolution from the current settings, the image may appear blurry or text may be hard to read if you change the resolution to one not supported by your computer and display. Before you change any of the display settings, make a note of the current settings so you can change back to the previous settings if you need to. You can enhance the legibility of text and change the appearance of images on the screen by adjusting display resolution. As you increase resolution, items appear smaller on the screen. In contrast, lower resolution causes text 42 Using the Display and images to appear larger and can benefit people with vision impairments. To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video card and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported values. To set the display resolution and refresh rate for your display, perform the steps in the following section that corresponds to the operating system your computer is using. Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Display. 4 In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab. 5 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen. Windows Vista® 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and click Control Panel. 2 Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution. 3 In the Display Settings window, under Resolution, slide the slide bar to the left or right to decrease/increase the screen resolution. 4 Click How do I get the best display? for further instructions. If the video resolution setting is higher than that supported by the display, the computer enters pan mode. In pan mode, the entire video image cannot be displayed at one time, and the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the parts of the video image that are not visible, you can use the touch pad or track stick to move (or pan) the image up, down, left, and right. NOTICE: You can damage an external monitor by using an unsupported refresh rate. Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, see the user’s guide for the monitor.Using the Display 43 Using Both a Monitor and Your Computer Display You can attach an external monitor or projector to your computer and use it as an extension of your display (known as dual independent display or extended desktop mode). This mode allows you to use both screens independently and drag objects from one screen to the other, effectively doubling the amount of viewable work space. To use extended desktop mode, perform the steps in the following section that corresponds to the operating system your computer is using. Microsoft Windows XP 1 Connect the external monitor, TV, or projector to the computer. 2 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel. 3 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 4 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Display. 5 In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab. NOTE: If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported values. For more information, see your operating system documentation. 6 Click the monitor 2 icon, click the Extend my Windows desktop... check box, and then click Apply. 7 Change Screen Area to the appropriate sizes for both displays and click Apply. 8 If prompted to restart the computer, click Apply the new color setting without restarting and click OK. 9 If prompted, click OK to resize your desktop. 10 If prompted, click Yes to keep the settings. 11 Click OK to close the Display Properties window.44 Using the Display To disable dual independent display mode: 1 Click the Settings tab in the Display Properties window. 2 Click the monitor 2 icon, uncheck the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor option, and then click Apply. If necessary, press to bring the screen image back to the computer display. Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and click Control Panel. 2 Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution. 3 In the Display Settings window, click the monitor 2 icon, click the Extend the desktop onto this monitor check box, and then click Apply. 4 Click OK to close the Display Settings window. To disable extended desktop mode: 1 In the Display Settings window, click the Settings tab. 2 Click the monitor 2 icon, uncheck the Extend the desktop onto this monitor option, and then click Apply. Setting Display Resolution and Refresh Rate NOTE: If you change the display resolution from the current settings, the image may appear blurry or text may be hard to read if you change the resolution to one not supported by your computer and display. Before you change any of the display settings, make a note of the current settings so you can change back to the previous settings if needed. You can enhance the legibility of text and change the appearance of images on the screen by adjusting display resolution. As you increase resolution, items appear smaller on the screen. In contrast, lower resolution causes text and images to appear larger and can benefit people with vision impairments. To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video card and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system.Using the Display 45 If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported values. To set the display resolution and refresh rate for your display, perform the steps in the following section that corresponds to the operating system your computer is using. Microsoft Windows XP 1 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3 Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Display. 4 In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab. 5 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen. Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution. 3 In the Display Settings window, under Resolution, move the slide bar to the left or right to decrease or increase the screen resolution. NOTE: For additional instructions, click How do I get the best display?46 Using the DisplayUsing the Keyboard and Touchpad 47 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad functions like the numeric keypad on an external keyboard. Each key on the keypad has multiple functions. The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, hold down and press the desired key. • To enable the keypad, press . The light indicates that the keypad is active. • To disable the keypad, press again. numeric keypad 948 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad Key Combinations System Functions Display Functions Battery Power Management Opens the Task Manager window. Displays icons representing all currently available display options (display only, external monitor or projector only, both display and projector, etc). Highlight the desired icon to switch the display to that option. and up-arrow key Increases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). and down-arrow key Decreases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). Displays the Dell™ QuickSet Battery Meter (see "Dell QuickSet Battery Meter" on page 54). Activates a power management mode. You can reprogram this keyboard shortcut to activate a different power management mode using the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56).Using the Keyboard and Touchpad 49 Microsoft® Windows® Logo Key Functions Dell™ QuickSet Key Combinations If Dell QuickSet is installed, you can use other shortcut keys for functions such as the Battery Meter or activating power management modes. For more information about Dell QuickSet key combinations, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, and then click Help. Adjusting Keyboard Settings To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate: 1 Click Start , and then click Control Panel. 2 Click Hardware and Sound. 3 Click Keyboard. Windows logo key and Minimizes all open windows. Windows logo key and Restores all minimized windows. This key combination functions as a toggle to restore minimized windows following the use of the Windows logo key and combination. Windows logo key and Starts Windows Explorer. Windows logo key and Opens the Run dialog box. Windows logo key and Opens the Search Results dialog box. Windows logo key and Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if the computer is connected to a network). Windows logo key and Opens the System Properties dialog box.50 Using the Keyboard and Touchpad Touch Pad The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. • To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad. • To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch pad button. • To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on the touch pad. On the second tap, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger over the surface. • To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch pad button twice. 1 touch pad 2 silk screen depicting scrolling capabilities 1 2Using the Keyboard and Touchpad 51 Customizing the Touch Pad You can use the Mouse Properties window to disable the touch pad or adjust the touch pad settings. 1 Click Start , and then click Control Panel. 2 Click Hardware and Sound. 3 Click Keyboard. 4 In the Mouse Properties window: • Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad. • Click the Touch Pad tab to adjust touch pad settings. 5 Click OK to save the settings and close the window.52 Using the Keyboard and TouchpadUsing a Battery 53 Using a Battery Battery Performance NOTE: For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the Product Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. For optimal computer performance and to help preserve BIOS settings, operate your Dell™ portable computer with the main battery installed at all times. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. NOTE: Because the battery may not be fully charged, use the AC adapter to connect your new computer to an electrical outlet the first time you use the computer. For best results, operate the computer with the AC adapter until the battery is fully charged. To view battery charge status, place the mouse cursor over the battery icon in the Windows notification area. NOTE: Battery operating time (the time the battery can hold a charge) decreases over time. Depending on how often the battery is used and the conditions under which it is used, you may need to purchase a new battery during the life of your computer. NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to media. Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following: • Using optical drives. • Using wireless communications devices, ExpressCards, memory cards, or USB devices. • Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other powerintensive programs such as complex 3D graphics applications. • Running the computer in maximum performance mode (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56 for information about accessing Windows Power Options Properties or Dell QuickSet, which you can use to configure power management settings).54 Using a Battery You can check the battery charge before you insert the battery into the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery (see "Battery Disposal" in the Product Information Guide). CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge You can check the battery charge on your computer using any one of the following methods: • Dell QuickSet Battery Meter • Microsoft Windows battery meter icon located in the notification area • Battery charge/health gauge located on the battery • Low-battery warning pop-up window Dell QuickSet Battery Meter To view the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter: • Double-click the Dell QuickSet icon in the taskbar, and then click Battery Meter or • Press The Battery Meter displays the status, battery health, charge level, and charge completion time for the battery in your computer. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon, and then click Help.Using a Battery 55 Microsoft® Windows® Battery Meter The battery meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the battery meter, double-click the icon in the notification area. Charge Gauge By either pressing once or pressing and holding the status button on the battery charge gauge, you can check: • Battery charge (check by pressing and releasing the status button) • Battery health (check by pressing and holding the status button) The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacity—or battery health. Therefore, a battery can show a status of charged, but maintain a reduced charge capacity (health). Check the Battery Charge To check the battery charge, press and release the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge indicator lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights are on, the battery has no charge. Check the Battery Health NOTE: You can check battery health in one of two ways: by using the charge gauge on the battery, as described below, and by using the Battery Meter in Dell QuickSet. For information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, and then click Help. To check the battery health using the charge gauge, press and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds to illuminate the health indicator lights. Each light represents incremental degradation. If no lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery (see "Battery" on page 198 for more information about the battery operating time).56 Using a Battery Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning, then connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery runs completely out of power, Sleep state begins automatically. A pop-up window warns you when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer enters Sleep state when the battery charge is at a critically low level. You can change the settings for the battery alarms in Dell QuickSet or the Power Options window (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56). Conserving Battery Power To conserve battery power on your portable computer, do any of the following: • Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible; battery life is largely determined by the number of times the battery is used and recharged. • Configure the power management settings using either Dell QuickSet or Microsoft Windows Power Options to optimize your computer’s power usage (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56). • Use the Sleep power state when you leave the computer unattended for long periods of time (see "Standby and Sleep Mode" on page 56). Power Management Modes Standby and Sleep Mode Standby mode (sleep mode in Microsoft Windows Vista®) conserves power by turning off the display and the hard drive after a predetermined period of inactivity (a time-out). When the computer exits standby or sleep mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering standby or sleep mode. NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in standby or sleep mode, it may lose data. To enter standby mode in Windows XP, click Start→Turn off computer→ Stand by. To enter sleep mode in Windows Vista, click the Windows Vista Start button , and then click Sleep.Using a Battery 57 Depending on how you set the power management options in the Power Options Properties window or the QuickSet Power Management Wizard, you may also use one of the following methods: • Press the power button. • Close the display. • Press . To exit standby or sleep mode, press the power button or open the display, depending on how you set the power management options. You cannot make the computer exit standby or sleep mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. Hibernate Mode Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on the hard drive and then completely turning off the computer. When the computer exits hibernate mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering hibernate mode. NOTICE: You cannot remove devices or undock your computer while your computer is in hibernate mode. Your computer enters hibernate mode if the battery charge level becomes critically low. To enter hibernate mode in Windows XP, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, press and hold , and then click Hibernate. To enter hibernate mode in Windows Vista, click the Windows Vista Start button , and then click Hibernate. Depending on how you set the power management options in the Power Options Properties window or the QuickSet Power Management Wizard, you may also use one of the following methods to enter hibernate mode: • Press the power button. • Close the display. • Press . NOTE: Some ExpressCards may not operate correctly after the computer exits hibernate mode. Remove and reinsert the card (see "Removing an ExpressCard or Blank" on page 89), or simply restart (reboot) your computer.58 Using a Battery To exit hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a short time to exit hibernate mode. You cannot make the computer exit hibernate mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. For more information on hibernate mode, see the documentation that came with your operating system. Configuring Power Management Settings You can use Dell QuickSet or Windows Power Options to configure the power management settings on your computer. • For information on how to use the Dell QuickSet Power Management wizard, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, click Help, and then select Power Management. Accessing Power Options Properties Windows XP Click Start→Control Panel→Performance and Maintenance, and then click Power Options Windows Vista Click the Windows Vista Start button , click Control Panel, click System and Maintenance, and then click Power Options. Charging the Battery NOTE: Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer for as long as you like. The battery’s internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet.Using a Battery 59 The battery is too hot to start charging if the battery light flashes alternately blue and amber. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature, then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information about resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems" on page 132. Replacing the Battery CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet and the computer, disconnect the modem from the wall connector and the computer, and remove any other external cables from the computer. NOTICE: You must remove all external cables from the computer to avoid possible connector damage. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in Sleep state, you have up to 1 minute to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. To remove the battery: 1 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 2 Ensure that the computer is turned off. 3 Turn the computer over. 4 Slide and click the battery release latches to keep them open. 5 Slide the battery out of the bay.60 Using a Battery To replace the battery, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully (see "Charging the Battery" on page 58) before you use it. 1 battery 2 battery release latches (2) 1 2Using Multimedia 61 Using Multimedia Playing Media NOTICE: Do not press down on the optical drive tray when you open or close it. Keep the tray closed when you are not using the drive. NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing media. 1 Press the eject button on the front of the drive. 2 Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray and snap the disc onto the spindle. 3 Push the tray back into the drive. To format media for storing or copying data, see the media software that came with your computer. NOTE: Ensure that you follow all copyright laws when copying media.62 Using Multimedia A CD player includes the following basic buttons: A DVD player includes the following basic buttons: For more information on playing media, click Help on the media player (if available). Play Move backward within the current track Pause Move forward within the current track Stop Go to the previous track Eject Go to the next track Stop Restart the current chapter Play Fast forward Pause Fast reverse Advance a single frame while in pause mode Go to the next title or chapter Continuously play the current title or chapter Go to the previous title or chapter EjectUsing Multimedia 63 Playing Media Using Dell Travel Remote (Optional) The Dell Travel Remote is designed to control Dell Media Direct and Windows Vista Media Center. It can work only with specified computers. For more details, refer to the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. To play media using Dell Travel Remote: 1 Install a coin-cell battery into your remote control. 2 Launch Windows Vista® Media Center from Start →Programs. 3 Use the remote control buttons to play media. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 13 12 11 10 17 15 18 1664 Using Multimedia Copying CD, DVD, and Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) Media This section applies only to computers that have a DVD+/-RW drive or a BD-RE drive. NOTE: Ensure that you observe all copyright laws when copying media. NOTE: The types of optical drives offered by Dell may vary by country. The following instructions explain how to make an exact copy of a CD, DVD, or BD using Roxio Creator. You can also use Roxio Creator for other purposes, such as creating music CDs from audio files stored on your computer or backing up important data. For help, open Roxio Creator, and then press . The DVD drives and BD drives installed in Dell computers do not support HD-DVD media. For a list of supported media formats, see "Using Blank CD, DVD, and BD Media" on page 65. How to Copy a CD, DVD, or BD NOTE: BD media can only be copied to other BD media. NOTE: Copying a BD-R to BD-RE will not produce an exact copy. NOTE: Most commercial DVDs and BDs have copyright protection and cannot be copied using Roxio Creator. 1 Click Start →All Programs→ Roxio Creator→Projects→Copy. 2 Under the Copy tab, click Copy Disc. 1 Infrared Transmitter 2 Arrow Up 3 OK/Enter/Select 4 Arrow Right 5 Arrow Down 6 Play/Pause 7 Forward 8 Skip Forward 9 Stop 10 Skip Back 11 Reverse 12 Back 13 Arrow Left 14 Mute 15 Volume Down 16 Page Down 17 Volume Up 18 Page UpUsing Multimedia 65 3 To copy the CD, DVD, or BD: • If you have one optical drive, insert the source disc into the drive, ensure that the settings are correct, and then click the Copy Disc button to continue. The computer reads your source disc and copies the data to a temporary folder on your computer hard drive. When prompted, insert a blank disc into the drive and click OK. • If you have two optical drives, select the drive into which you have inserted your source disc and click the Copy Disc button to continue. The computer copies the data from the source disc to the blank disc. Once you have finished copying the source disc, the disc that you have created automatically ejects. Using Blank CD, DVD, and BD Media DVD-writable drives can write to both CD and DVD recording media. BD-writable drives can write to CD, DVD and BD recording media. Use blank CD-Rs to record music or permanently store data files. After creating a CD-R, you cannot write to that CD-R again (see the Sonic documentation for more information). Use a blank CD-RW if you plan to erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later. Blank DVD+/-R or BD-R media can be used to permanently store large amounts of information. After you create a DVD+/-R or BD-R, you may not be able to write to that disc again if the disc is finalized or closed during the final stage of the disc creation process. Use blank DVD+/-RW or BD-RE media if you plan to erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later. CD-Writable Drives Media Type Read Write Rewritable CD-R Yes Yes No CD-RW Yes Yes Yes66 Using Multimedia DVD-Writable Drives BD-Writable Drives Helpful Tips • Use Microsoft® Windows® Explorer to drag and drop files to a CD-R or CD-RW only after you start Roxio Creator and open a Creator project. • Do not burn a blank CD-R or CD-RW to its maximum capacity; for example, do not copy a 650-MB file to a blank 650-MB CD. The CD-RW drive needs 1–2 MB of the blank space to finalize the recording. Media Type Read Write Rewritable CD-R Yes Yes No CD-RW Yes Yes Yes DVD+R Yes Yes No DVD-R Yes Yes No DVD+RW Yes Yes Yes DVD-RW Yes Yes Yes DVD+R DL Yes Yes No DVD-R DL Yes No No Media Type Read Write Rewritable CD-R Yes Yes No CD-RW Yes Yes Yes DVD+R Yes Yes No DVD-R Yes Yes No DVD+RW Yes Yes Yes DVD-RW Yes Yes Yes DVD+R DL Yes Yes No DVD-R DL Yes No No BD-R Yes Yes No BD-RE Yes Yes YesUsing Multimedia 67 • Use CD-Rs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos. CD-RWs do not play in most home or car stereos. • Music MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers that have MP3 software installed. • Use a blank CD-RW to practice CD recording until you are familiar with CD recording techniques. If you make a mistake, you can erase the data on the CD-RW and try again. You can also use blank CD-RWs to test music file projects before you record the project permanently to a blank CD-R. • You cannot create audio DVDs with Roxio Creator. • Commercially available DVD players used in home theater systems may not support all available DVD formats. For a list of formats supported by your DVD player, see the documentation provided with your DVD player or contact the manufacturer. • Commercially available BD players used in home theater systems may not support all available BD formats. For a list of formats supported by your BD player, see the documentation provided with your BD player or contact the manufacturer. • See the Roxio website at www.sonic.com or the Blu-ray Disc™ Association website at blu-raydisc.com for additional information. Adjusting the Volume NOTE: When the speakers are muted, you do not hear the media playing. 1 Right-click the volume icon in the notification area. 2 Click Open Volume Mixer. 3 Click and drag the bar to slide it up or down to increase or decrease the volume. For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Mixer window. The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your computer. Either click the QuickSet icon in the notification area and select or deselect Disable On Screen Volume Meter, or press the volume control buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen.68 Using Multimedia Adjusting the Picture If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much memory and preventing media playback, adjust the display properties. Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Appearance and Themes. 2 Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution. 3 Under Screen resolution, click and drag the bar to reduce the resolution setting. 4 In the drop-down menu under Color quality, click Medium (16 bit) and click OK. Windows Vista® 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , click Control Panel, and then click Appearance and Personalization. 2 Under Personalization, click Adjust Screen Resolution. The Display Properties window appears. 3 Under Resolution: click and drag the bar to reduce the resolution setting. 4 In the drop-down menu under Colors:, click Medium (16 bit). 5 Click OK. Using Dell MediaDirect™ Dell MediaDirect is an instant-on multimedia playback mode for digital media. Press the Dell MediaDirect button, located on the hinge cover, to launch Dell MediaDirect. If the computer is turned on or in standby or sleep mode If you press the Dell MediaDirect button while the computer is turned on or in standby (Windows XP) or sleep (Windows Vista) mode, either Windows Media Center Manager or Dell Media Experience launches, depending on your system setup. If both applications are present, Windows Media Center Manager launches.Using Multimedia 69 If the computer is turned off or in hibernate mode When your computer is turned off or in hibernate mode, you can press the Dell MediaDirect button to start the computer and automatically launch the Dell MediaDirect application. NOTE: You cannot reinstall Dell MediaDirect if you voluntarily reformat the hard drive. You need the installation software to reinstall Dell MediaDirect. Contact Dell for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). For more information on using Dell MediaDirect, use the Help menu in the Dell MediaDirect application. Connecting Your Computer to a TV or Audio Device NOTE: Video and audio cables for connecting your computer to a TV or other audio device may not be included with your computer. Cables and TV/digital audio adapter cables are available for purchase from Dell. Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that, together with a standard S-video cable, a composite video adapter cable, or a component video adapter cable (available from Dell), enable you to connect the computer to a TV. 1 Dell MediaDirect button 170 Using Multimedia Your TV has either an S-video input connector, a composite video-input connector, or a component video-input connector. Depending on what type of connector is available on your TV, you can use a commercially available S-video cable, composite video cable, or component video cable to connect your computer to your TV. 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 S-video connector 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter 3 S/PDIF digital audio connector 4 composite video-output connector 5 S-video connector 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter 3 S/PDIF digital audio connector 4 Pr (red) component video-output connector 5 Pb (blue) component videooutput connector 6 Y (green) component video-output connector 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 6Using Multimedia 71 If you want to connect your computer to a TV or audio device, it is recommended that you connect video and audio cables to your computer in one of the following combinations: • S-video and standard audio • Composite video and standard audio • Component-out video and standard audio NOTE: See the diagrams at the beginning of each subsection to help you determine which method of connection you should use. When you finish connecting the video and audio cables between your computer and your TV, you must enable your computer to work with the TV. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Additionally, if you are using S/PDIF digital audio, see "Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio" on page 84. S-Video and Standard Audio 1 audio connector 2 S-video TV-out connector 1 272 Using Multimedia 1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. NOTE: If your TV or audio device supports S-video but not S/PDIF digital audio, you can connect an S-video cable directly to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer (without the TV/digital audio adapter cable). 2 Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video output connector on the computer. 3 Plug the other end of the S-video cable into the S-video input connector on your TV. 4 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on your computer. 5 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your TV or other audio device. 6 Turn on the TV and any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. 7 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. 1 standard S-video cable 2 standard audio cable 1 2Using Multimedia 73 S-Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter 1 composite video adapter 2 S-video cable 3 S/PDIF digital audio cable 1 2 1 2 374 Using Multimedia 1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or the audio device that you want to connect. 2 Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. 3 Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video output connector on the composite video adapter. 4 Plug the other end of the S-video cable into the S-video input connector on the TV. 5 Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the digital audio connector on the composite video adapter cable. 6 Plug the other end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the audio input connector on your TV or audio device. 7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. 8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. 1 composite video adapter 2 S-video cable 1 composite video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable 1 2 1 2Using Multimedia 75 Composite Video and Standard Audio 1 audio input connector 2 S-video TV-out connector 3 composite video adapter 1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable 3 standard audio cable 2 1 3 1 2 376 Using Multimedia 1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. 2 Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. 3 Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite videooutput connector on the composite video adapter. 4 Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite videoinput connector on the TV. 5 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on the computer. 6 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your TV or other audio device. 7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. 8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. 1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable 2 1Using Multimedia 77 Composite Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter 1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable 3 standard audio cable 1 2 1 2 378 Using Multimedia 1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. 2 Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 3 Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite video-input connector on the composite video adapter. 4 Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite videoinput connector on the TV. 5 Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the S/PDIF audio connector on the composite video adapter. 6 Plug the other end of the digital audio cable into the S/PDIF input connector on your TV or other audio device. 7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. 8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. 1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable 1 composite video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable 2 1 1 2Using Multimedia 79 Component Video and Standard Audio 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter 1 component video adapter 2 component video cable 3 standard audio cable 1 2 1 2 380 Using Multimedia 1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. 2 Connect the component video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. 3 Plug all three ends of the component video cable into the component video-output connectors on the component video adapter. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the corresponding adapter ports. 4 Plug all three connectors from the other end of the component video cable into the component video-input connectors on the TV. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the colors of the TV input connectors. 5 Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on the computer. 6 Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your TV or audio device. 7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. 8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. 1 component video adapter 2 component video cable 1 2Using Multimedia 81 Component Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter 1 282 Using Multimedia 1 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. 2 Connect the component video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 3 Plug all three ends of the component video cable into the component video-output connectors on the component video adapter. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the corresponding adapter ports. 1 component video adapter 2 component video cable 3 standard audio cable 1 2 3Using Multimedia 83 4 Plug all three connectors from the other end of the component video cable into the component video-input connectors on the TV. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the colors of the TV input connectors. 5 Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the S/PDIF audio connector on the component video adapter. 6 Plug the other end of the digital audio cable into the S/PDIF input connector on your TV or other audio device. 7 Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. 8 See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 84 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. 1 component video adapter 2 component video-output connectors 3 component video cable 1 component video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable 1 3 2 2 184 Using Multimedia Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 Double-click the speaker icon in the Windows notification area. 2 Click the Options menu and then click Advanced Controls. 3 Click Advanced. 4 Click S/PDIF Interface. 5 Click Close. 6 Click OK. Enabling the Display Settings for a TV NOTE: To ensure that the display options appear correctly, connect the TV to the computer before you enable the display settings. Windows XP 1 Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Double-click Display and click the Settings tab. 3 Click Advanced. 4 Click the tab for your video card. NOTE: To determine the type of video card installed in your computer, see the Windows Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, click Start→Help and Support. Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Then, under My Computer Information, select Hardware. 5 In the display devices section, select the appropriate option for using either a single display or multiple displays, ensuring that the display settings are correct for your selection.Using Multimedia 85 Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , click Control Panel, and then click Appearance and Personalization. 2 Under Personalization, click Adjust Screen Resolution. The Display Properties window appears. 3 Click Advanced. 4 Click the tab for your video card. NOTICE: To determine the type of video card installed in your computer, see the Windows Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center in Windows Vista, click the Windows Vista Start button →Help and Support. Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Then, under My Computer Information, select Hardware. 5 In the display devices section, select the appropriate option for using either a single display or multiple displays, ensuring that the display settings are correct for your selection.86 Using MultimediaUsing ExpressCards 87 Using ExpressCards ExpressCards provide additional memory, wired and wireless communications, multimedia and security features. For example, you can add an ExpressCard to make wireless wide area network (WWAN) connectivity available on your computer. ExpressCards support two form factors: • ExpressCard/34 (34 mm wide) • ExpressCard/54 (54 mm wide in an L-shape with a 34 mm connector) The 34 mm card fits into both the 34 mm and 54 mm card slots. The 54 mm card only fits into a 54 mm card slot. See "Specifications" on page 193 for information on supported ExpressCards. NOTE: An ExpressCard is not a bootable device. ExpressCard Blanks Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the ExpressCard slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for use when no ExpressCard is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers may not fit your computer. 1 ExpressCard/34 2 ExpressCard/54 1 288 Using ExpressCards Remove the blank before installing an ExpressCard. To remove the blank, see "Removing an ExpressCard or Blank" on page 89. Installing an ExpressCard You can install an ExpressCard while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. ExpressCards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. To install an ExpressCard: 1 Hold the card with the top side of the card facing up. 2 Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. 1 slot 2 ExpressCard 1 2Using ExpressCards 89 The computer recognizes the ExpressCard and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the media that came with the ExpressCard. Removing an ExpressCard or Blank CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Press the latch and remove the card or blank. For some latches, you must press the latch twice, once to pop the latch out, and then a second time to pop the card out. Save a blank to use when no ExpressCard is installed in a slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. 1 release button 190 Using ExpressCardsUsing the Memory Card Reader 91 Using the Memory Card Reader The memory card reader provides a fast and convenient way to view and share digital photos, music, and videos stored on a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is not a bootable device. The 8-in-1 memory card reader reads the following memory cards: • Secure Digital (SD) • SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • xD-Picture Card • Hi Speed-SD • Hi Density-SD Memory Card Blanks Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the 8-in-1 memory card reader. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for use when no memory card is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers may not fit your computer. Remove the blank before installing a memory card. To remove the blank, see "Removing a Memory Card or Blank" on page 92. Installing a Memory Card You can install a memory card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. Memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. 92 Using the Memory Card Reader CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. To install a memory card: 1 Hold the card with the top side of the card facing up. 2 Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. The computer recognizes the memory card and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the media that came with the memory card, if applicable. Removing a Memory Card or Blank CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: Use the memory card configuration utility (click the icon in the notification area) to select a card and stop it from functioning before you remove it from the computer. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data. Press the card into the slot to release it from the card reader. When it is partially ejected, remove the card. Setting Up and Using Networks 93 Setting Up and Using Networks A computer network provides connectivity between your computer and the Internet, another computer, or a network. For example, with a network set up in a home or small office you can print to a shared printer, access drives and files on another computer, browse other networks, or access the Internet. You can set up a local area network (LAN) using a network or broadband modem cable or set up a wireless LAN (WLAN). The Microsoft® Windows® XP and Microsoft Windows Vista® operating systems provide wizards to help guide you through the process of networking computers. For more information about Networking, see the Windows Help and Support Center (see "Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista® Help and Support Center" on page 16). Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable Before you connect your computer to a network, the computer must have a network adapter installed and a network cable connected to it. 1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back of your computer. NOTE: Insert the cable connector until it clicks into place, and then gently pull on the cable to ensure that it is securely attached. 2 Connect the other end of the network cable to a network connection device or a network wall connector. NOTE: Do not use a network cable with a telephone wall connector.94 Setting Up and Using Networks Setting Up a Network Windows XP 1 Click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→ Communications→Network Setup Wizard→Next→Checklist for creating a network. NOTE: Selecting the connection method labeled This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2). 2 Complete the checklist. 3 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions in the wizard. Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista Start button , and then click Connect To→ Set up a connection or network. 2 Select an option under Choose a connection option. 3 Click Next, and then follow the instructions in the wizard. Wireless Local Area Network A wireless local area network (WLAN) is a series of interconnected computers that communicate with each other over the air waves rather than through a network cable connected to each computer. In a WLAN, a radio communications device called an access point or wireless router connects network computers and provides Internet, or network access. The access point or wireless router and the wireless network card in the computer communicate by broadcasting data from their antennas over the air waves. What You Need to Establish a WLAN Connection Before you can set up a WLAN, you need: • High-speed (broadband) Internet access (such as cable or DSL) • A broadband modem that is connected and working • A wireless router or access pointSetting Up and Using Networks 95 • A wireless network card for each computer that you want to connect to your WLAN • A network cable with a network (RJ-45) connector Checking Your Wireless Network Card Depending on what you selected when you purchased your computer, the computer has a variety of configurations. To confirm that your computer has a wireless network card and to determine the type of card, use one of the following: • The Start button and the Connect To option • The order confirmation for your computer Start Button and Connect To Option In Microsoft Windows XP, click Start→ Connect To→Show all connections. NOTE: If your computer is set to the Classic Start menu option, click Start→ Settings→Network Connections to view your network connections. In Microsoft Windows Vista, click → Connect To→View network computers and devices. If Wireless Network Connection does not appear under LAN or High-Speed Internet, you may not have a wireless network card. If Wireless Network Connection appears, you have a wireless network card. To view detailed information about the wireless network card: 1 Right-click Wireless Network Connection. 2 Click Properties. The Wireless Network Connection Properties window appears. The wireless network card’s name and model number are listed on the Generaltab. NOTE: If Wireless Network Connection does not appear, you may not have a wireless network card. The Order Confirmation for Your Computer The order confirmation that you received when you ordered your computer lists the hardware and software that shipped with your computer.96 Setting Up and Using Networks Setting Up a New WLAN Using a Wireless Router and a Broadband Modem 1 Contact your Internet service provider (ISP) to obtain specific information about the connection requirements for your broadband modem. 2 Ensure that you have wired Internet access through your broadband modem before you attempt to set up a wireless Internet connection (see "Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable" on page 93). 3 Install any software required for your wireless router. Your wireless router may have been shipped with installation media. Installation media usually contains installation and troubleshooting information. Install the required software according to the instructions provided by the router manufacturer. 4 Shut down your computer and any other wireless-enabled computers in the vicinity through the Windows Vista Start button . 5 Disconnect your broadband modem power cable from the electrical outlet. 6 Disconnect the network cable from the computer and the modem. 7 Disconnect the AC adapter cable from your wireless router to ensure that there is no power connected to the router. NOTE: Wait for a minimum of 5 minutes after disconnecting your broadband modem before continuing with the network setup. 8 Insert a network cable into the network (RJ-45) connector on the unpowered broadband modem. 9 Connect the other end of the network cable into the Internet network (RJ-45) connector on the unpowered wireless router. 10 Ensure that no network or USB cables, other than the network cable connecting the modem and the wireless router, are connected to the broadband modem. NOTE: Restart your wireless equipment in the order described below to prevent a potential connection failure. 11 Turn on only your broadband modem and wait for at least 2 minutes for the broadband modem to stabilize. After 2 minutes, proceed to step 12. 12 Turn on your wireless router and wait for at least 2 minutes for the wireless router to stabilize. After 2 minutes, proceed to the step 13. 13 Start your computer and wait until the boot process completes.Setting Up and Using Networks 97 14 See the documentation that came with your wireless router to do the following in order to set up the wireless router: • Establish communication between your computer and your wireless router. • Configure your wireless router to communicate with your broadband router. • Find out your wireless router’s broadcast name. The technical term for the name of your router’s broadcast name is Service Set Identifier (SSID) or network name. 15 If necessary, configure your wireless network card to connect to the wireless network (see "Connecting to a WLAN" on page 97). Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: Before you connect to a WLAN, ensure that you have followed the instructions in "Wireless Local Area Network" on page 94. NOTE: The following networking instructions do not apply to internal cards with Bluetooth® wireless technology or cellular products. This section provides general procedures for connecting to a network using wireless technology. Specific network names and configuration details vary. See "Wireless Local Area Network" on page 94 for more information about how to prepare for connecting your computer to a WLAN. Your wireless network card requires specific software and drivers for connecting to a network. The software is already installed. NOTE: If the software is removed or corrupted, follow the instructions in the user documentation for your wireless network card. Verify the type of wireless network card installed in your computer and then search for that name on the Dell™ Support website at support.dell.com. For information on the type of wireless network card that is installed in your computer, see "Checking Your Wireless Network Card" on page 95. When you turn on your computer, and a network for which your computer is not configured is detected in the area, a pop-up appears near the network icon in the Windows notification area.98 Setting Up and Using Networks Determining the Wireless Network Device Manager Depending on the software installed on your computer, different wireless configuration utilities may manage your network devices: • Your wireless network card’s client utility • The Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system To determine which wireless configuration utility is managing your wireless network card in Windows XP: 1 Click Start→Settings→Control Panel→Network Connections. 2 Right-click the Wireless Network Connection icon, and then click View Available Wireless Networks. If the Choose a wireless network window states Windows cannot configure this connection, the wireless network card’s client utility is managing the wireless network card. If the Choose a wireless network window states Click an item in the list below to connect to a wireless network in range or to get more information, the Windows XP operating system is managing the wireless network card. To determine which wireless configuration utility is managing your wireless network card in Windows Vista: 1 Click → Connect To→Manage wireless networks. 2 Double-click a profile to open the wireless network properties screen. For specific information about the wireless configuration utility installed on your computer, see your wireless network documentation in the Windows Help and Support Center (see "Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista® Help and Support Center" on page 16). Completing the Connection to the WLAN When you turn on your computer and a network (for which your computer is not configured) is detected in the area, a pop-up appears near the network icon in the notification area (in the lower-right corner of the Windows desktop). Follow the instructions provided in any utility prompts that appear on your screen. Once you have configured your computer for the wireless network that you selected, another pop-up notifies you that your computer is connected to that network. Setting Up and Using Networks 99 Thereafter, whenever you log on to your computer within the range of the wireless network that you selected, the same pop-up notifies you of the wireless network connection. NOTE: If you select a secure network, you must enter a WEP or WPA key when prompted. Network security settings are unique to your network. Dell cannot provide this information. NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. Monitoring the Status of the Wireless Network Card Through Dell QuickSet The wireless activity indicator provides you with an easy way to monitor the status of your computer’s wireless devices. To turn the wireless activity indicator on or off, click the QuickSet icon in the taskbar and select Hotkey Popups. If Wireless Activity Indicator Off is not checked, the indicator is on. If Wireless Activity Indicator Off is checked, the indicator is off. The wireless activity indicator displays whether your computer’s integrated wireless devices are enabled or disabled. When you turn the wireless networking function on or off, the wireless activity indicator changes to display the status. For more information about the Dell QuickSet wireless activity indicator, right-click the QuickSet icon in the taskbar, and then select Help. Mobile Broadband (or Wireless Wide Area Network) A Mobile Broadband network, also known as a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN), is a high-speed digital cellular network that provides Internet access over a much wider geographical area than a WLAN, which typically covers only from 100 to 1000 feet. Your computer can maintain Mobile Broadband network access as long as the computer is within a cellular-data coverage zone. Contact your service provider for coverage of a high-speed digital cellular network. NOTE: Even if you are able to make a call from your cellular phone in a specific geographical location, that location may not necessarily be within a cellular-data coverage zone.100 Setting Up and Using Networks What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection NOTE: Depending on your computer, you can use either a Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or Mini Card, but not both, to establish a Mobile Broadband network connection. To set up a Mobile Broadband network connection, you need: • A Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or Mini Card (depending on your computer’s configuration) NOTE: For instructions on using ExpressCards, see "Using ExpressCards" on page 87. • An activated Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or activated Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) for your service provider • The Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility (already installed on your computer if you purchased the card when you purchased your computer, or on the media that accompanied your card if purchased separately from your computer) If the utility is corrupted or deleted from your computer, see the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility user’s guide in Windows Help and Support (click Start , and then click Help and Support) or on the media that accompanied your card if you purchased it separately from your computer. Checking Your Dell Mobile Broadband Card Depending on what you selected when you purchased your computer, the computer has a variety of configurations. To determine your computer configuration, see one of the following: • Your order confirmation • Microsoft Windows Help and Support To check your Mobile Broadband card in Windows Help and Support: 1 Click Start →Help and Support→Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. 2 Under Tools, click My Computer Information→Find information about the hardware installed on this computer.Setting Up and Using Networks 101 On the My Computer Information - Hardware screen, you can view the type of Mobile Broadband card installed in your computer as well as other hardware components. NOTE: The Mobile Broadband card is listed under Modems. Connecting to a Mobile Broadband Network NOTE: These instructions only apply to Mobile Broadband ExpressCards or MiniCards. They do not apply to internal cards with wireless technology. NOTE: Before you connect to the Internet, you must activate Mobile Broadband service through your cellular service provider. For instructions and for additional information about using the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, see the user's guide available through Windows Help and Support (click Start , and then click Help and Support). The user's guide is also available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com and on the media included with your Mobile Broadband card if you purchased the card separately from your computer. Use the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility to establish and manage a Mobile Broadband network connection to the Internet: 1 Click the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility icon in the Windows notification area to run the utility. 2 Click Connect. NOTE: The Connect button changes to the Disconnect button. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to manage the network connection with the utility. or 1 Click Start →All Programs→Dell Wireless. 2 Click Dell Wireless Broadband and follow the instructions on the screen.102 Setting Up and Using Networks Enabling/Disabling the Dell Mobile Broadband Card NOTE: If you are unable to connect to a Mobile Broadband network, ensure that you have all the components for establishing a Mobile Broadband connection (see "What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection" on page 100), and then verify that your Mobile Broadband card is enabled by verifying the setting of the wireless switch. You can turn your Mobile Broadband card on and off using the wireless switch on your computer. You can turn your computer’s wireless devices on and off with the wireless switch on the left side of the computer (see "Left Side View" on page 27). If the switch is in the on position, move the switch to the off position to disable the switch and the Mobile Broadband card. If the switch is in the off position, move the switch to the on position to enable the switch and the Dell Mobile Broadband card. For information about the wireless switch positions, see "wireless switch" on page 27. To monitor the status of your wireless device, see "Monitoring the Status of the Wireless Network Card Through Dell QuickSet" on page 99. Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator The wireless switch on your Dell computer uses the Dell Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator to scan specifically for wireless networks in your vicinity. To scan for a wireless network, slide and hold the wireless switch (see "wireless switch" on page 27) in the momentary position for a few seconds. The Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator functions regardless of whether your computer is turned on or off, or in Sleep state, as long as the switch is configured through Dell QuickSet or the BIOS (system setup program) to control WiFi network connections. Because the Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator is disabled and not configured for use when your computer is shipped to you, you must first use Dell QuickSet to enable and configure the switch to control WiFi network connections. For more information on the Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator and to enable the feature through Dell QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, and then select Help.Securing Your Computer 103 Securing Your Computer Security Cable Lock NOTE: Your computer does not ship with a security cable lock. A security cable lock is a commercially available antitheft device. To use the lock, attach it to the security cable slot on your Dell computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot on your computer.104 Securing Your Computer Passwords Passwords prevent unauthorized access to your computer. When you first start your computer, you must assign a primary password at the prompt. If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous operating state. When using passwords, observe the following guidelines: • Choose a password that you can remember, but not one that is easy to guess. For example, do not use the names of family members or pets for passwords. • It is recommended that you do not write down your password. If you do write it down, however, ensure that the password is stored in a secure location. • Do not share your password with other people. • Ensure that people are not watching you when you type your password. NOTICE: Passwords provide a high level of security for data in your computer or hard drive. However, they are not foolproof. If you require more security, obtain and use additional forms of protection such as data encryption programs. Use the User Accounts option in the Control Panel in the Microsoft® Windows® operating system to create user accounts or to change passwords. Once you create a user password, you must enter it each time you turn on or unlock your computer. If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous operating state. For more information, see your Windows documentation. If you forget any of your passwords, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). For your protection, Dell technical support staff will ask you for proof of your identity to ensure that only an authorized person can use the computer.Securing Your Computer 105 If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen • Call a law enforcement agency to report the lost or stolen computer. Include the Service Tag in your description of the computer. Ask that a case number be assigned and write down the number, along with the name, address, and phone number of the law enforcement agency. If possible, obtain the name of the investigating officer. NOTE: If you know where the computer was lost or stolen, call a law enforcement agency in that area. If you do not know, call a law enforcement agency where you live. • If the computer belongs to a company, notify the security office of the company. • Contact Dell customer service to report the missing computer. Provide the computer Service Tag, the case number, and the name, address, and phone number of the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer. If possible, give the name of the investigating officer. The Dell customer service representative will log your report under the computer Service Tag and record the computer as missing or stolen. If someone calls Dell for technical assistance and gives your Service Tag, the computer is identified automatically as missing or stolen. The representative will attempt to get the phone number and address of the caller. Dell will then contact the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer.106 Securing Your ComputerTroubleshooting 107 Troubleshooting Dell Technical Update Service The Dell Technical Update service provides proactive e-mail notification of software and hardware updates for your computer. The service is free and can be customized for content, format, and how frequently you receive notifications. To enroll for the Dell Technical Update service, go to support.dell.com/technicalupdate. Dell Diagnostics CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Lockups and Software Problems" on page 127 and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTE: The Dell Diagnostics only operate on Dell computers. Enter system setup, review your computer’s configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203). Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from your Drivers and Utilities media (see "Drivers and Utilities Media" on page 15).108 Troubleshooting Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). NOTE: If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 1 Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is known to be working properly. 2 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3 Start the Dell Diagnostics in one of the following two ways: a When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. Select Diagnostics from the boot menu, and then press . NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: Before attempting option B, the computer must be powered down completely. b Press and hold the key while powering the computer on. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities media. The computer runs the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of initial tests of your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display. • During the assessment, answer any questions that appear. • If a failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and restart the computer, press ; to continue to the next test, press ; to retest the component that failed, press . • If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 4 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive.Troubleshooting 109 Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media 1 Insert your Drivers and Utilities media. 2 Shut down and restart the computer. 3 When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: Keyboard failure may result when a key on the keyboard is held down for extended periods of time. To avoid possible keyboard failure, press and release in even intervals until the boot device menu appears. 4 At the boot device menu, use the up- and down-arrow keys to highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW, and then press . NOTE: The Quickboot feature changes the boot sequence for the current boot only. Upon restart, the computer boots according to the boot sequence specified in system setup. 5 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears, and then press . 6 Type 1 to start the Drivers and Utilities menu, and then press . 7 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 8 At the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu, select the test you want to run. NOTE: Write down any error codes and problem descriptions exactly as they appear and follow the instructions on the screen. 9 After all tests have completed, close the test window to return to the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu. 10 Remove your Drivers and Utilities media, then close the Main Menu window to exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer.110 Troubleshooting Dell Diagnostics Main Menu After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the MainMenu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. NOTE: It is recommended that you select Test System to run a complete test on your computer. After you have selected the Test System option from the main menu, the following menu appears. NOTE: It is recommended that you select Extended Test from the menu below to run a more thorough check of the devices in the computer. For any problem encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description exactly as it appears and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the problem, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. When contacting Dell support, have your Service Tag ready. Option Function Test Memory Run the stand-alone memory test Test System Run System Diagnostics Exit Exit the Diagnostics Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of system devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of system devices. The test typically takes an hour or more and periodically requires your input to answer specific questions. Custom Test Tests a specific device in the system and can be used to customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists a number of common symptoms and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having.Troubleshooting 111 The following tabs provide additional information for tests run from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option: Dell Support Center The Dell Support Center helps you find the service, support and system-specific information you need. For more information about Dell Support Center and available support tools, click the Services tab at support.dell.com. Systems purchased on June 26, 2007 and later are pre-installed with Dell Support Center. Click on the desktop icon and select the area of assistance you require. For computers purchased prior to June 26, 2007, you can download Dell Support Center from the Services page at support.dell.com. Click the Dell Support Center icon on your computer’s desktop to run the application and to access the following features: • Self-help tools such as, Dell Support 3, Dell PC Tune-Up, Dell PC CheckUp, and Network Assistant • DellConnect for remote, real-time, technical support Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and any requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.112 Troubleshooting • Dell support contact information including e-mail and online chat addresses as well as telephone numbers • Resources specific to your computer are available under Drivers & Downloads, Upgrades and System Information The top of the Dell Support Center home page displays your computer’s model number along with its Service Tag, Express Service code, and warranty expiration details. When permissions are given to Dell to use your Service Tag, additional details about your computer, such as available memory, disk space, installed hardware, network addresses, modem specifications, installed security software, and much more are provided. In addition, using your Service Tag, Dell can link you to the most relevant www.dell.com web pages for information about your warranty, ordering accessories and details about installing recommended drivers and downloads. Dell Support 3 The Dell Support 3 is customized for your computing environment. This utility provides self-support information, software updates, and health scans for your computer. Use this utility for the following functions: • Check your computing environment • View the Dell Support 3 settings • Access the Dell Support 3 help file • View frequently asked questions • Learn more about Dell Support 3 • Turn Dell Support 3 off For more information about Dell Support 3, click the question mark (?) at the top of the Dell Support 3 window. To access Dell Support 3: • Click the Dell Support 3 icon in the notification area of your Windows desktop. NOTE: The icon functions vary depending on whether you click, doubleclick, or right-click the icon. orTroubleshooting 113 • Click the Microsoft® Windows Vista® Start button →All Programs→ Dell Support 3→Dell Support Settings. Ensure that the Show icon on the taskbar option is checked. NOTE: If Dell Support 3 is not available from the Start menu, go to support.dell.com and download the software. Dell PC Tune-Up The automated or monthly version of Dell PC Tune-Up allows you to choose the day and time of the month you want your computer "tuned up". A typical tune-up includes hard drive defragmentation, removal of unwanted and temporary files, updated security settings, verification of "good" restore points, and other maintenance activities designed to improve computer performance and security. The monthly version is available as an annual subscription and is a feature of Dell Support 3, a complimentary application that provides real-time health scans and information on how to maintain your computer (see "Dell Support 3" on page 112). Both versions of PC Tune-Up are available to customers in the U.S. and Canada. For the latest updates and to learn how to keep your computer running at peak performance, search for the keyword PC TuneUp on support.dell.com. Dell PC CheckUp Dell PC Checkup is a troubleshooting and diagnostic tool that provides customized scanning and testing of your Dell computer. PC Checkup verifies whether your hardware is working properly and provides automated fixes for common configuration concerns. It is recommended that you run PC Checkup on a regular basis or before contacting Dell for assistance. The application creates a detailed report that Dell technicians can use to resolve your issue quickly. Dell Network Assistant Designed specifically for users of Dell™ computers, the Dell Network Assistant helps simplify the setup, monitoring, troubleshooting, and repair of your network.114 Troubleshooting The Dell Network Assistant provides the following features: • Consolidated setup, alerting, and device status • Simplified tracking of networked devices through a visual display of network status • Proactive troubleshooting and repair of network problems • Tutorials, setup wizards, and frequently asked questions (FAQs) to enhance understanding of networking principles To access Dell Network Assistant: 1 Click the Dell Support Center icon on your computer’s desktop. 2 Click Self Help→Network / Internet→Network Management. DellConnect DellConnect is a simple online access tool that allows a Dell service and support associate to access your computer through an Internet connection, diagnose the problem and repair it. The associate works with your permission under your supervision, and you can work with Dell’s associate during the troubleshooting session. To use this service, you must have an Internet connection and your Dell computer must be under warranty. DellConnect is also available for a fee through "Dell On Call." To begin a live session with a Dell associate: 1 Click the Dell Support Center icon on your computer’s desktop. Click Assistance From Dell→Technical Support→DellConnect→Phone and follow the instructions. Drive Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. ENSURE THAT MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECOGNIZES THE DRIVE — Windows XP Click Start→My Computer.Troubleshooting 115 Windows Vista® Click Start →Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. TEST THE DRIVE — • Insert another floppy disk, CD, or DVD to eliminate the possibility that the original media is defective. • Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart the computer. CLEAN THE DRIVE O R DISK — See "Cleaning Your Computer" on page 206. ENSURE THAT THE CD O R DVD MEDIA I S SNAPPED ONTO THE SPINDLE CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS CHECK FOR HARDWARE INCOMPATIBILITIES — See "Troubleshooting Software and Hardware Problems in the Microsoft® Windows® XP and Microsoft Windows Vista® Operating Systems" on page 143. RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107. Optical drive problems NOTE: High-speed optical drive vibration is normal and may cause noise, which does not indicate a defect in the drive or the media. NOTE: Because of different regions worldwide and different disc formats, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. Problems writing to a CD-RW, DVD+/-RW, or BD-RE drive CLOSE OTHER PROGRAMS — CD-RW, DVD+/-RW, and BD-RE drives must receive a steady stream of data when writing. If the stream is interrupted, an error occurs. Try closing all programs before you write to the drive. TURN OFF SLEEP STATE IN WINDOWS BEFORE WRITING T O A CD/DVD/BD DISC — See "Standby and Sleep Mode" on page 56 for information on Sleep state. CHANGE THE WRITE SPEED T O A SLOWER RATE — See the help files for your CD, DVD, or BD creation software.116 Troubleshooting The drive tray cannot eject 1 Ensure that the computer is shut down. 2 Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive, then push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3 Gently pull out the tray until it stops. The drive makes an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound • Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running. • Ensure that the disc is inserted properly. Hard drive problems ALLOW THE COMPUTER T O COOL BEFORE TURNING I T ON — A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. RUN CHECK DISK — Windows XP 1 Click Start and click My Computer. 2 Right-click Local Disk C:. 3 Click Properties→Tools→Check Now. 4 Click Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors and click Start. Windows Vista 1 Click Start and click Computer. 2 Right-click Local Disk C:. 3 Click Properties→Tools→Check Now. The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen.Troubleshooting 117 E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone jack only. The modem does not operate while it is connected to a digital telephone network. CHECK THE MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS/WINDOWS MAIL SECURITY SETTINGS — If you cannot open your e-mail attachments: 1 In Outlook Express/Windows Mail, click Tools, click Options, and then click Security. 2 Click Do not allow attachments to remove the checkmark. CHECK THE TELEPHONE LINE CONNECTION CHECK THE TELEPHONE JACK CONNECT THE MODEM DIRECTLY T O THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK US E A DIFFERENT TELEPHONE LINE • Verify that the telephone line is connected to the jack on the modem (the jack has either a green label or a connector-shaped icon next to it). • Ensure that you hear a click when you insert the telephone line connector into the modem. • Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone, then listen for a dial tone. • If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. RUN THE MODEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL — Windows XP 1 Click Start→All Programs→Modem Helper. 2 Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem problems. Modem Helper is not available on certain computers.118 Troubleshooting Windows Vista 1 Click Start →All Programs→Modem Diagnostic Tool. 2 Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem problems. Modem diagnostics are not available on all computers. VERIFY THAT THE MODEM I S COMMUNICATING WITH WINDOWS — Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→Phone and Modem Options→Modems. 2 Click the COM port for your modem→Properties→ Diagnostics→Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Phone and Modem Options→Modems. 2 Click the COM port for your modem→Properties→Diagnostics→Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE CONNECTED T O THE INTERNET — Ensure that you have subscribed to an Internet service provider. With the Outlook Express/Windows mail e-mail program open, click File. If Work Offline has a checkmark next to it, click the checkmark to remove it, and then connect to the Internet. For help, contact your Internet service provider. SCAN THE COMPUTER FOR SPYWARE — If you are experiencing slow computer performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection (your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the keyword spyware.Troubleshooting 119 Error Messages Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE — The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203). If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME — Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. CACHE DISABLED DUE T O FAILURE — The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE — The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer (see "Drive Problems" on page 114). DATA ERROR — The hard drive cannot read the data (see "Drive Problems" on page 114). DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY — One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163). DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION — The hard drive failed initialization. Run the hard drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). DRIVE NOT READY — The operation requires a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Install a hard drive in the hard drive bay (see "Hard Drive" on page 156). ERROR READING PCMCIA CARD — The computer cannot identify the ExpressCard. Reinsert the card or try another card (see "Using ExpressCards" on page 87). EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED — The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).120 Troubleshooting TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE — The file that you are trying to copy is too large to fit on the disk, or the disk is full. Try copying the file to a different disk or use a larger capacity disk. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: \ / : * ? “ < > | — Do not use these characters in filenames. GATE A20 FAILURE — A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163). GENERAL FAILURE — The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific information—for example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. HARD-DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATION ERROR — The computer cannot identify the drive type. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0— The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE — The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE — The hard drive may be defective. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA — The operating system is trying to boot to nonbootable media, such as a floppy disk or CD. Insert bootable media.Troubleshooting 121 INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM — The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203). KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE — For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE — For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE — For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE — For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). LICENSED CONTENT I S NOT ACCESSIBLE IN DELL MEDIADIRECT — Dell MediaDirect™ cannot verify the Digital Rights Management (DRM) restrictions on the file, so the file cannot be played (see "Dell MediaDirect problems" on page 128). MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163). MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR — The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Shut down the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163).122 Troubleshooting MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163). MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163). MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE — A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 163). NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE — The computer cannot find the hard drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. NO BOOT SECTOR ON HARD DRIVE — The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT — A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN — You have too many programs open. Close all windows and open the program that you want to use. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND — Reinstall the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 156). If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM — The optional ROM has failed. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND — The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs→Programs and Features. 2 Select the program you want to remove. 3 Click Uninstall. 4 See the program documentation for installation instructions.Troubleshooting 123 Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Programs→Programs and Features. 2 Select the program you want to remove. 3 Click Uninstall. 4 See the program documentation for installation instructions. SECTOR NOT FOUND — The operating system cannot locate a sector on the hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the hard drive. See Windows Help and Support for instructions (click Start → Help and Support). If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the hard drive. SEEK ERROR — The operating system cannot find a specific track on the hard drive. SHUTDOWN FAILURE — A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER — System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program, then immediately exit the program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203). If the message reappears, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK STOPPED — The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM — The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203). TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED — A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).124 Troubleshooting UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE — The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY — Insert a disk into the drive and try again. WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW — The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet; otherwise, activate hibernate mode or shut down the computer. ExpressCard Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CHECK THE EXPRESSCARD — Ensure that the ExpressCard is properly inserted into the connector. CHECK THAT THE CARD I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS — Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Some cards do not support this feature. If the card supports this Windows feature, the card will be listed. IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A DELL-PROVIDED EXPRESSCARD — Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). Also, for Mobile Broadband (WWAN) ExpressCards, see "Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network [WWAN])" on page 131. IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH AN EXPRESSCARD NOT PROVIDED B Y DELL — Contact the ExpressCard manufacturer. IEEE 1394 Device Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. ENSURE THAT THE IEEE 1394 DEVICE I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS — Windows XP Click Start and click Control Panel. 1 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance→System→ System Properties→Hardware→Device Manager.Troubleshooting 125 Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound. 2 Click Device Manager. If your IEEE 1394 device is listed, Windows recognizes the device. IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A DELL-PROVIDED IEEE 1394 DEVICE — Contact Dell or the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH AN IEEE 1394 DEVICE NOT PROVIDED B Y DELL — Contact Dell or the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). Ensure that the IEEE 1394 device is properly inserted into the connector. Keyboard Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. External Keyboard problems NOTE: When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. CHECK THE KEYBOARD CABLE — Shut down the computer, disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, then firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. CHECK THE EXTERNAL KEYBOARD — 1 Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and then turn it on again. 2 Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine.126 Troubleshooting 3 From the Windows desktop, click Start →All Programs→ Accessories→Notepad. 4 Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. TO VERIFY THAT THE PROBLEM I S WITH THE EXTERNAL KEYBOARD, CHECK THE INTEGRATED KEYBOARD — 1 Shut down the computer. 2 Disconnect the external keyboard. 3 Turn on the computer. 4 From the Windows desktop, click Start →All Programs→ Accessories→Notepad. 5 Type some characters on the internal keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now, but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). RUN THE KEYBOARD DIAGNOSTICS TESTS — Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). Unexpected characters DISABLE THE NUMERIC KEYPAD — Press to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit.Troubleshooting 127 Lockups and Software Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. The computer does not start CHECK THE A C ADAPTER — Ensure that the AC adapter is firmly connected to the computer and to the electrical outlet. The computer stops responding NOTICE: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off, then restart your computer. A program stops responding or crashes repeatedly EN D THE PROGRAM — 1 Press simultaneously. 2 Click the Applications tab and select the program that is no longer responding. 3 Click End Task. NOTE: The chkdsk program may run when you restart the computer. Follow the instructions on the screen. CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION — If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. A program is designed for an earlier Microsoft® Windows® operating system RUN THE PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WIZARD Windows XP The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an environment similar to non-XP operating system environments.128 Troubleshooting 1 Click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→Program Compatibility Wizard→Next. 2 Follow the instructions on the screen. Windows Vista The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an environment similar to non-Windows Vista operating system environments. 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Programs→Use an older program with this version of Windows. 2 In the welcome screen, click Next. Follow the instructions on the screen. A solid blue screen appears TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off, then restart your computer. Dell MediaDirect problems CHECK THE DELL MEDIADIRECT HELP FILE FOR INFORMATION — Use the Help menu to access Dell MediaDirect Help. TO PLAY MOVIES WITH DELL MEDIADIRECT, YOU MUST HAVE A DVD DRIVE AND THE DELL DVD PLAYER — If you purchased a DVD drive with your computer, this software should already be installed. VIDEO QUALITY PROBLEMS — Turn off the Use Hardware Acceleration option. This feature takes advantage of the special processing in some graphics cards to reduce processor requirements when playing DVDs and certain types of video files. CANNOT PLAY SOME MEDIA FILES — Because Dell MediaDirect provides access to media files outside the Windows operating system environment, access to licensed content is restricted. Licensed content is digital content that has Digital Rights Management (DRM) applied to it. The Dell MediaDirect environment cannot verify the DRM restrictions, so the licensed files cannot be played. Licensed music and video files have a lock icon next to them. You can access licensed files in the Windows operating system environment. Troubleshooting 129 ADJUSTING THE COLOR SETTINGS FOR MOVIES THAT CONTAIN SCENES THAT ARE TOO DARK O R TOO BRIGHT — Click EagleVision to use a video enhancement technology that detects video content and dynamically adjusts the brightness/contrast/saturation ratios. NOTICE: You cannot reinstall the Dell MediaDirect feature if you voluntarily reformat the hard drive. Contact Dell for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). Other software problems CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION O R CONTACT THE SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER FOR TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION — • Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer. • Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. • Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly. • Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program. • If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. BACK U P YOUR FILES IMMEDIATELY US E A VIRUS-SCANNING PROGRAM T O CHECK THE HARD DRIVE, FLOPPY DISKS, O R CDS SAVE AND CLOSE ANY OPEN FILES O R PROGRAMS AND SHUT DOWN YOUR COMPUTER THROUGH THE START MENU SCAN THE COMPUTER FOR SPYWARE — If you are experiencing slow computer performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection (your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the keyword spyware. RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — If all tests run successfully, the error condition is related to a software problem (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107).130 Troubleshooting Memory Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. IF YOU RECEIVE AN INSUFFICIENT MEMORY MESSAGE — • Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using to see if that resolves the problem. • See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If necessary, install additional memory (see "Memory" on page 163). • Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory (see "Memory" on page 163). • Run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). IF YOU EXPERIENCE OTHER MEMORY PROBLEMS — • Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory (see "Memory" on page 163). • Ensure that you are following the memory installation guidelines (see "Memory" on page 163). • Run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). Troubleshooting 131 Network Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CHECK THE NETWORK CABLE CONNECTOR — Ensure that the network cable is firmly inserted into both the network connector on the back of the computer and the network jack. CHECK THE NETWORK LIGHTS ON THE NETWORK CONNECTOR — No light indicates that no network communication exists. Replace the network cable. RESTART THE COMPUTER AND LOG ON T O THE NETWORK AGAIN CHECK YOUR NETWORK SETTINGS — Contact your network administrator or the person who set up your network to verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network [WWAN]) NOTE: The Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility user’s guide and the Mobile Broadband ExpressCard user’s guide are available through Windows Help and Support (click Start →Help and Support). You can also download the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility user’s guide from support.dell.com. NOTE: The icon appears in the notification area if the computer has a Dell WWAN device installed. Double-click the icon to launch the utility. ACTIVATE THE MOBILE BROADBAND EXPRESSCARD — You must activate the Mobile Broadband ExpressCard before you can connect to the network. Position the mouse over the icon in the notification area to verify the status of the connection. If the card is not activated, follow the card activation instructions located within the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility. To access the utility, double-click the icon located in the taskbar, at the lower-right corner of your screen. If your ExpressCard is not a Dellbranded card, see the manufacturer’s instructions for your card.132 Troubleshooting CHECK NETWORK CONNECTION STATUS IN THE DELL MOBILE BROADBAND CARD UTILITY — Double-click the icon to launch the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility. Check the status in the main window: • No card detected — Restart the computer, and launch the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility again. • Check your WWAN service — Contact your cellular service provider to verify your plan coverage and supported services. Power Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CHECK THE POWER LIGHT — When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in Sleep state—press the power button to exit Sleep state. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. NOTE: For information on Sleep power state, see "Standby and Sleep Mode" on page 56. CHARGE THE BATTERY — The battery charge may be depleted. 1 Reinstall the battery. 2 Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3 Turn on the computer. NOTE: Battery operating time (the time the battery can hold a charge) decreases over time. Depending on how often the battery is used and the conditions under which it is used, you may need to purchase a new battery during the life of your computer. CHECK THE BATTERY STATUS LIGHT — If the battery status light flashes amber or is a steady amber, the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes blue and amber, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes amber, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell(see "Contacting Dell" on page 192).Troubleshooting 133 CHECK THE BATTERY TEMPERATURE — If the battery temperature is below 0°C (32°F), the computer will not start. TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. CHECK THE AC ADAPTER — Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. CONNECT THE COMPUTER DIRECTLY T O AN ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and extension cables to verify that the computer turns on. ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. ADJUST THE POWER PROPERTIES — See "Power Management Modes" on page 56. RESEAT THE MEMORY MODULES — If the computer power light turns on, but the display remains blank, reinstall the memory modules (see "Memory" on page 163). Printer Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your printer, contact the printer’s manufacturer. CHECK THE PRINTER DOCUMENTATION — See the printer documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. ENSURE THAT THE PRINTER I S TURNED ON CHECK THE PRINTER CABLE CONNECTIONS — • See the printer documentation for cable connection information. • Ensure that the printer cables are securely connected to the printer and the computer. TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp.134 Troubleshooting VERIFY THAT THE PRINTER I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS — Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→ View installed printers or fax printers. 2 If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon. 3 Click Properties→Ports. For a parallel printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). For a USB printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is USB. Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printer. 2 If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon. 3 Click Properties and click Ports. 4 Adjust the settings, as needed. REINSTALL THE PRINTER DRIVER — See the printer documentation for instructions. Scanner Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your scanner, contact the scanner’s manufacturer. CHECK THE SCANNER DOCUMENTATION — See the scanner documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. UNLOCK THE SCANNER — Ensure that your scanner is unlocked. RESTART THE COMPUTER AND TRY THE SCANNER AGAIN CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS — • See the scanner documentation for cable connection information. • Ensure that the scanner cables are securely connected to the scanner and the computer.Troubleshooting 135 VERIFY THAT THE SCANNER I S RECOGNIZED B Y MICROSOFT WINDOWS — Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→Scanners and Cameras. 2 If your scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner. Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Scanners and Cameras. 2 If the scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner. REINSTALL THE SCANNER DRIVER — See the scanner documentation for instructions. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. No sound from integrated speakers ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. ADJUST THE VOLUME USING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS — Press to disable (mute) or re-enable the integrated speakers. REINSTALL THE SOUND (AUDIO) DRIVER — See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140. No sound from external speakers ENSURE THAT THE SUBWOOFER AND THE SPEAKERS ARE TURNED ON — See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If your speakers have volume controls, adjust the volume, bass, or treble to eliminate distortion. ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted.136 Troubleshooting DISCONNECT HEADPHONES FROM THE HEADPHONE CONNECTOR — Sound from the speakers is automatically disabled when headphones are connected to the headphone connector. TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. REINSTALL THE AUDIO DRIVER — See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140. RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107. NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, ensure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. No sound from headphones CHECK THE HEADPHONE CABLE CONNECTION — Ensure that the headphone cable is securely inserted into the headphone connector (see "audio connectors" on page 28). ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems CHECK THE TOUCH PAD SETTINGS — Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers and Other Hardware→Mouse. 2 Try adjusting the settings. Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Mouse. 2 Adjust the settings, as needed.Troubleshooting 137 CHECK THE MOUSE CABLE — Shut down the computer, disconnect the mouse cable and check it for damage, then firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. TO VERIFY THAT THE PROBLEM I S WITH THE MOUSE, CHECK THE TOUCH PAD — 1 Shut down the computer. 2 Disconnect the mouse. 3 Turn on the computer. 4 At the Windowsdesktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. CHECK THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM SETTINGS — Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option (the computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments). TEST THE MOUSE CONTROLLER — To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107. REINSTALL THE TOUCH PAD DRIVER — See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140. Video and Display Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer.138 Troubleshooting CHECK THE BATTERY — If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and then turn on the computer. TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. CHECK THE AC ADAPTER — Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. CONNECT THE COMPUTER DIRECTLY T O AN ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and extension cables to verify that the computer turns on. ADJUST THE POWER PROPERTIES — Search for the keyword sleep in Windows Help and Support. SWITCH THE VIDEO IMAGE — If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS — Press and the up- or down-arrow key. MOVE THE EXTERNAL SUBWOOFER AWAY FROM THE COMPUTER O R MONITOR — If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. ROTATE THE COMPUTER T O FACE A DIFFERENT DIRECTION — Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. ADJUST THE WINDOWS DISPLAY SETTINGS — Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Appearance and Themes. 2 Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 3 Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows Vista 1 Click Start →Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→ Personalization→Display Settings. 2 Adjust Resolution and Colors settings, as needed.Troubleshooting 139 RUN THE VIDEO DIAGNOSTICS TESTS — If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107, then contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). SE E "ERROR MESSAGES" — If an error message appears, see "Error Messages" on page 119. If only part of the display is readable CONNECT AN EXTERNAL MONITOR — 1 Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2 Turn on the computer and the monitor, and then adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 192). Drivers What Is a Driver? A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard. All devices require a driver program. A driver acts like a translator between the device and any other programs that use the device. Each device has its own set of specialized commands that only its driver recognizes. Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers already installed—no further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: Your Drivers and Utilities media may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft® Windows® operating system. You may need to install drivers if you: • Upgrade your operating system. • Reinstall your operating system. • Connect or install a new device.140 Troubleshooting Identifying Drivers If you experience a problem with any device, identify whether the driver is the source of your problem and, if necessary, update the driver. Windows XP 1 Click Start→Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance, and click System. 3 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab, and click Device Manager. Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and right-click Computer. 2 Click Properties→Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue. NOTE: Scroll down the list of devices and check for an exclamation point (a circle with a [!]) next to the device name. If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140). Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities NOTICE: The Dell Support website at support.dell.com and your Drivers and Utilities media provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. Using Windows Device Driver Rollback If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use Windows Device Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously installed version. Windows XP 1 Click Start→My Computer→Properties→Hardware→Device Manager. 2 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties. 3 Click the Drivers tab→Roll Back Driver.Troubleshooting 141 Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and right-click Computer. 2 Click Properties→Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to enter the Device Manager. 3 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties. 4 Click the Drivers tab→Roll Back Driver. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, use System Restore (see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144) to return your computer to the operating state that existed before you installed the new driver. Using the Drivers and Utilities Media If using Device Driver Rollback or System Restore (see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144) does not resolve the problem, reinstall the driver from your Drivers and Utilities media. 1 With the Windows desktop displayed, insert your Drivers and Utilities media. If this is your first time to use your Drivers and Utilities media, continue to step 2. If not, proceed to step 5. 2 When the Drivers and Utilitiesinstallation program starts, follow the prompts on the screen. NOTE: In most cases, the Drivers and Utilities program starts running automatically. If it does not, start Windows Explorer, click your media drive directory to display the media contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file. 3 When the InstallShield Wizard Complete window appears, remove the Drivers and Utilities disc and click Finish to restart the computer. 4 When you see the Windows desktop, reinsert the Drivers and Utilities disc.142 Troubleshooting 5 At the Welcome Dell System Owner screen, click Next. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities program displays drivers only for hardware that came installed in your computer. If you installed additional hardware, the drivers for the new hardware might not be displayed. If those drivers are not displayed, exit the Drivers and Utilities program. For drivers information, see the documentation that came with the device. A message stating that the Drivers and Utilities program is detecting hardware in your computer appears. The drivers that are used by your computer are automatically displayed in the My Drivers—The ResourceCD has identified these components in your system window. 6 Click the driver that you want to reinstall and follow the instructions on the screen. If a particular driver is not listed, then that driver is not required by your operating system. Manually Reinstalling Drivers NOTE: If your computer has a Consumer IR port and you are reinstalling a Consumer IR driver, you must first enable the Consumer IR port in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 203) before continuing with the driver installation (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140). For information about components installed on your computer, see "Determining Your Computer’s Configuration" on page 21. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive, as described in the previous section: Windows XP 1 Click Start→ My Computer→Properties→Hardware→Device Manager. 2 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Audio or Video). 3 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 4 Click the Driver tab→Update Driver. 5 Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)→Next.Troubleshooting 143 6 Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously copied the driver files. 7 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 8 Click Finish and restart your computer. Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and right-click Computer. 2 Click Properties→Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to enter the Device Manager. 3 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Audio or Video). 4 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 5 Click the Driver tab→Update Driver→ Browse my computer for driver software. 6 Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously copied the driver files. 7 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click the name of the driver→OK→Next. 8 Click Finish and restart your computer. Troubleshooting Software and Hardware Problems in the Microsoft® Windows® XP and Microsoft Windows Vista® Operating Systems If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured, use Windows Vista Help and Support to resolve the incompatibility: If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured, you can use the Hardware Troubleshooter to resolve the incompatibility.144 Troubleshooting To start the Hardware Troubleshooter: Windows XP 1 Click Start→Help and Support. 2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the search field and press to start the search. 3 In the Fix a Problem section, click Hardware Troubleshooter. 4 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, select the option that best describes the problem and click Next to follow the remaining troubleshooting steps. Windows Vista 1 Click the Windows Vista start button , and click Help and Support. 2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the search field and press to start the search. 3 In the search results, select the option that best describes the problem and follow the remaining troubleshooting steps. Restoring Your Operating System You can restore your operating system in the following ways: • Microsoft Windows Vista System Restore returns your computer to an earlier operating state without affecting data files. Use System Restore as the first solution for restoring your operating system and preserving data files. For instructions, see "Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore" on page 145. • Dell PC Restore by Symantec (available in Windows XP) and Dell Factory Image Restore (available in Windows Vista) returns your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. Both permanently delete all data on the hard drive and remove any programs installed after you received the computer. Use Dell PC Restore or Dell Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. • If you received Operating System media with your computer, you can use it to restore your operating system. However, using the Operating System media also deletes all data on the hard drive. Use the media only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. For instructions, see "Using the Operating System Media" on page 150.Troubleshooting 145 Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore The Windows operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. Any changes that System Restore makes to your computer are completely reversible. NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. NOTE: The procedures in this document were written for the Windows default view, so they may not apply if you set your Dell computer to the Windows Classic view. 1 Click Start →Help and Support. 2 Type System Restore in the search field, then press . NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. 3 Click Next and follow the remaining prompts on the screen. In the event that System Restore did not resolve the issue, you may undo the last system restore. Starting System Restore Windows XP NOTICE: Before you restore the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close any open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click Start→All Programs→Accessories→System Tools→System Restore. 2 Click either Restore my computer to an earlier time or Create a restore point. 3 Click Next and follow the remaining on-screen prompts.146 Troubleshooting Windows Vista 1 Click Start . 2 In the Start Search box, type System Restore and press . NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. 3 Click Next and follow the remaining prompts on the screen. In the event that System Restore did not resolve the issue, you may undo the last system restore. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. Windows XP 1 Click Start→All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools→System Restore. 2 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next. Windows Vista 1 Click Start . 2 In the Start Search box, type System Restore and press . 3 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next. Enabling System Restore NOTE: Windows Vista does not disable System Restore; regardless of low disk space. Therefore, the steps below apply only to Windows XP. If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. To see if System Restore is enabled: 1 Click Start→Control Panel→Performance and Maintenance→System. 2 Click the System Restore tab and ensure that Turn off System Restore is unchecked.Troubleshooting 147 Using Dell™ PC Restore and Dell Factory Image Restore NOTICE: Using Dell PC Restore or Dell Factory Image Restore permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any programs or drivers installed after you received your computer. If possible, back up the data before using these options. Use PC Restore or Dell Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. NOTE: Dell PC Restore by Symantec and Dell Factory Image Restore may not be available in certain countries or on certain computers. Use Dell PC Restore (Windows XP) or Dell Factory Image Restore (Windows Vista) only as the last method to restore your operating system. These options restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. Any programs or files added since you received your computer—including data files—are permanently deleted from the hard drive. Data files include documents, spreadsheets, e-mail messages, digital photos, music files, and so on. If possible, back up all data before using PC Restore or Factory Image Restore. Dell PC Restore Using PC Restore: 1 Turn on the computer. During the boot process, a blue bar with www.dell.com appears at the top of the screen. 2 Immediately upon seeing the blue bar, press . If you do not press in time, let the computer finish starting, and then restart the computer again. NOTICE: If you do not want to proceed with PC Restore, click Reboot. 3 Click Restore and click Confirm. The restore process takes approximately 6 to 10 minutes to complete. 4 When prompted, click Finish to reboot the computer. NOTE: Do not manually shut down the computer. Click Finish and let the computer completely reboot.148 Troubleshooting 5 When prompted, click Yes. The computer restarts. Because the computer is restored to its original operating state, the screens that appear, such as the End User License Agreement, are the same ones that appeared the first time the computer was turned on. 6 Click Next. The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts. 7 After the computer restarts, click OK. Removing PC Restore: NOTICE: Removing Dell PC Restore from the hard drive permanently deletes the PC Restore utility from your computer. After you have removed Dell PC Restore, you will not be able to use it to restore your computer operating system. Dell PC Restore enables you to restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased your computer. It is recommended that you do not remove PC Restore from your computer, even to gain additional hard-drive space. If you remove PC Restore from the hard drive, you cannot ever recall it, and you will never be able to use PC Restore to return your computer operating system to its original state. 1 Log on to the computer as a local administrator. 2 In Microsoft Windows Explorer, go to c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Double-click the filename DSRIRRemv2.exe. NOTE: If you do not log on as a local administrator, a message appears stating that you must log on as administrator. Click Quit, and then log on as a local administrator. NOTE: If the partition for PC Restore does not exist on your computer hard drive, a message appears stating that the partition was not found. Click Quit; there is no partition to delete. 4 Click OK to remove the PC Restore partition on the hard drive. 5 Click Yes when a confirmation message appears. The PC Restore partition is deleted and the newly available disk space is added to the free space allocation on the hard drive. Troubleshooting 149 6 Right-click Local Disk (C) in Windows Explorer, click Properties, and verify that the additional disk space is available as indicated by the increased value for Free Space. 7 Click Finish to close the PC Restore Removal window and restart the computer. Windows Vista: Dell Factory Image Restore 1 Turn on the computer. When the Dell logo appears, press several times to access the Vista Advanced Boot Options Window. 2 Select Repair Your Computer. The System Recovery Options window appears. 3 Select a keyboard layout and click Next. 4 To access the recovery options, log on as a local user. To access the command prompt, type administrator in the User name field, then click OK. 5 Click Dell Factory Image Restore. NOTE: Depending upon your configuration, you may need to select Dell Factory Tools, then Dell Factory Image Restore. The Dell Factory Image Restore welcome screen appears. 6 Click Next. The Confirm Data Deletion screen appears. NOTICE: If you do not want to proceed with Factory Image Restore, click Cancel. 7 Click the checkbox to confirm that you want to continue reformatting the hard drive and restoring the system software to the factory condition, then click Next. The restore process begins and may take five or more minutes to complete. A message appears when the operating system and factory-installed applications have been restored to factory condition. 8 Click Finish to reboot the system.150 Troubleshooting Using the Operating System Media Before You Begin If you are considering reinstalling the Windows operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows Device Driver Rollback (see "Using Windows Device Driver Rollback" on page 140). If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver (see "Using MicrosoftWindows System Restore" on page 145). NOTICE: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the first drive detected by the computer. To reinstall Windows, you need the following items: • Dell Operating System media • Dell Drivers and Utilities media NOTE: Your Drivers and Utilities media contains drivers that were installed during assembly of the computer. Use your Drivers and Utilities media to load any required drivers, including the drivers required if your computer has a RAID controller. Reinstalling Windows XP or Windows Vista The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System media provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs that are installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless a Dell technical support representative instructs you to do so. 1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Operating System disc. 3 Click Exit if the Install Windows message appears.Troubleshooting 151 4 Restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. 5 When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive and press . 6 Press any key to Boot from CD-ROM. 7 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.152 TroubleshootingAdding and Replacing Parts 153 Adding and Replacing Parts Before You Begin This chapter provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: • You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 154 and "Before Working Inside Your Computer" on page 154. • You have read the safety information in your Dell Product Information Guide. • A component can be replaced—or if purchased separately—installed by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: • Small flat-blade screwdriver • Phillips screwdriver • Small plastic scribe • Flash BIOS update (see the Dell Support website at support.dell.com)154 Adding and Replacing Parts Turning Off Your Computer NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer. 1 Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. 2 Shut down the operating system: Windows® XP: Click Start→Shut Down→Shut down. Windows Vista®: Click the Windows Vista Start button , click the arrow in the lower-right corner of the Start menu as shown below, and then click Shut Down. The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process is complete. 3 Ensure that the computer and all attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for about 4 seconds to turn them off. Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty.Adding and Replacing Parts 155 NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2 Turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 154). NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer, and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 3 Disconnect any telephone or network cables from the computer. 4 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets. NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery from the battery bay before you service the computer. NOTE: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this particular Dell computer. Do not use batteries designed for other Dell computers. 5 Turn the computer over. 6 Slide and click the battery release latches. 7 Slide the battery out of the battery bay.156 Adding and Replacing Parts 8 Turn the computer top-side up, open the display, and press the power button to ground the system board. 9 Remove any installed cards from the ExpressCard slot (see "Removing an ExpressCard or Blank" on page 89) and the 8-in-1 memory card reader (see "Removing a Memory Card or Blank" on page 92). Hard Drive CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent data loss, turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 154) before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on or in Sleep state. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile. Exercise care when handling the hard drive. NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. NOTE: If you are installing a hard drive from a source other than Dell, you need to install an operating system, drivers, and utilities on the new hard drive (see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144 and "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140). 1 battery 2 battery release latch (2) 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 157 Removing the Hard Drive 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over and remove the hard drive screws. NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging (see "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in the Product Information Guide). 3 Slide the hard drive out of the computer. 1 hard drive 2 screws (4) 1 2158 Adding and Replacing Parts Replacing the Hard Drive 1 Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for storing or shipping the hard drive. NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you use excessive force, you may damage the connector. 2 Slide the hard drive into the bay until it is fully seated. 3 Replace and tighten the screws. 4 Install the operating system for your computer, as needed (see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 144). 5 Install the drivers and utilities for your computer, as needed (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 140). Returning a Hard Drive to Dell Return your old hard drive to Dell in its original, or comparable, foam packaging. Otherwise, the hard drive may be damaged in transit. 1 foam packaging 2 hard drive 2 1Adding and Replacing Parts 159 Optical Drive CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Removing the Optical Drive 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over. 3 Remove the locking screw from the optical drive. 4 Using a plastic scribe, push the notch to release the optical drive from the bay. 5 Slide the optical drive out of the bay. 1 optical drive 2 notch 3 locking screw 2 1 3160 Adding and Replacing Parts Replacing the Optical Drive 1 Slide the optical drive into the bay. 2 Replace and tighten the locking screw. Hinge Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer. Removing the Hinge Cover 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Open the display as far as it will open. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the hinge cover, do not lift the cover on both sides simultaneously. 3 Insert a plastic scribe into the indent to lift the hinge cover on the right side. 4 Ease the hinge cover up, moving from right to left, and remove it.Adding and Replacing Parts 161 Replacing the Hinge Cover 1 Insert the left edge of the hinge cover. 2 Press from left to right until the cover snaps into place. Keyboard For more information about the keyboard, see "Using the Keyboard and Touchpad" on page 47. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer. 1 hinge cover 2 scribe 1 2162 Adding and Replacing Parts Removing the Keyboard 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Remove the hinge cover (see "Hinge Cover" on page 160). 3 Remove the two screws at the top of the keyboard. NOTICE: The key caps on the keyboard are fragile, easily dislodged, and timeconsuming to replace. Be careful when removing and handling the keyboard. 4 Lift the keyboard and hold it up and slightly forward to access to the keyboard connector. 5 To disconnect the keyboard cable from the keyboard connector on the system board, rotate the keyboard connector latch toward the front of the computer. 6 Slide the keyboard cable out of the keyboard connector on the DIMM A memory module cover. 1 screws (2) 2 keyboard 3 tabs (5) 4 keyboard cable 5 cable release lever 1 2 4 5 3Adding and Replacing Parts 163 Replacing the Keyboard 1 Slide the keyboard cable into the keyboard connector on the DIMM A memory module cover. 2 Rotate the keyboard connector latch to secure the cable. 3 Hook the tabs along the front edge of the keyboard into the palmrest. 4 Press on the right edge near the top to snap the keyboard into place. 5 Replace the two screws on the top of the keyboard. Memory CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See "Specifications" on page 193 for information on the memory supported by your computer. Install only memory modules that are intended for your computer. NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer warranty. Your computer has two user-accessible SODIMM sockets, one accessed from beneath the keyboard (DIMM A), and the other accessed from the bottom of the computer (DIMM B). NOTICE: If your computer has only one memory module, install the memory module in the connector labeled “DIMMA.” NOTICE: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a memory module in the connector labeled “DIMMA” before you install a module in the connector labeled “DIMMB.” Removing the DIMM A Memory Module NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). The DIMM A memory module is located under the keyboard. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Remove the hinge cover (see "Hinge Cover" on page 160).164 Adding and Replacing Parts 3 Remove the keyboard (see "Keyboard" on page 161). NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the keyboard cable from the memory module cover. 4 Lift the memory module cover but do not remove it. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the memory module securing clips. 5 Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. 6 Remove the module from the connector. 1 memory module cover 2 memory module (DIMM A) 3 securing clips (2) 1 2 3Adding and Replacing Parts 165 Replacing the DIMM A Memory Module NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). 1 Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the connector slot. 2 Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot. No error message indicates this failure. 3 Replace the memory module cover. 4 Replace the keyboard and hinge cover. 5 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 6 Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. 1 tab 2 notch 1 2166 Adding and Replacing Parts Confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer: • Windows® XP – Right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, then click Properties→ General. • Windows Vista® – Click the Windows Vista Start button , right-click Computer, and then click Properties. Removing the DIMM B Memory Module The DIMM B memory module is located under the memory module cover on the bottom of the computer. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer upside-down, loosen the captive screw on the memory module cover (see "Bottom View" on page 32), and remove the cover. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the memory module securing clips. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). 1 memory module/coin-cell battery compartment 2 captive screw 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 167 3 Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. 4 Remove the module from the connector. Replacing the DIMM B Memory Module NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). 1 Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the connector slot. 2 Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot. No error message indicates this failure. 1 securing clips (2) 2 memory module 1 2168 Adding and Replacing Parts NOTICE: If the cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. 3 Replace the memory module cover. 4 Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 5 Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. Confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer: • Windows® XP – Right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop, then click Properties→ General. • Windows Vista® – Click the Windows Vista Start button , right-click Computer, and then click Properties. 1 tab 2 notch 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 169 Subscriber Identity Module Subscriber Identity Modules (SIM) identify users uniquely through an International Mobile Subscriber Identity. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: Only Cingular and Vodafone need a SIM. Verizon, Sprint, and Telus do not use SIMs. 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 In the battery bay, slide the SIM into the compartment with the cut-off corner of the card facing away from the compartment. 1 battery bay 2 SIM 1 2170 Adding and Replacing Parts Wireless Mini Cards CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer. If you ordered a wireless Mini Card with your computer, the card is already installed. Your computer supports three types of wireless Mini Cards: • Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) • Mobile Broadband or Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) • Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN) Removing a WLAN Card 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over. 3 Loosen the captive screws on the cover of the Mini Card compartment and remove the cover. 1 captive screws (2) 2 cover 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 171 4 Disconnect the antenna cables from the WLAN card. 5 Release the WLAN card by pushing the metal securing tabs toward the back of the computer until the card pops up slightly. 1 antenna cable connectors (2) 2 WLAN card 1 2172 Adding and Replacing Parts 6 Lift the WLAN card out of its system board connector. Replacing a WLAN Card NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system board, and realign the card. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the WLAN card, never place cables under the card. 1 Insert the WLAN card connector into the system board connector labeled "WLAN" at a 45-degree angle. 2 Press the other end of the WLAN card down into the securing tabs until the card clicks into place. 1 metal securing tabs (2) 2 WLAN card 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 173 3 Connect the appropriate antenna cables to the WLAN card you are installing: If the WLAN card has two triangles on the label (white and black), connect the white antenna cable to the connector labeled "main" (white triangle), and connect the black antenna cable to the connector labeled "aux" (black triangle). If the WLAN card has three triangles on the label (white, black, and gray), connect the white antenna cable to the white triangle, connect the black antenna cable to the black triangle, and connect the gray antenna cable to the gray triangle. NOTE: The gray antenna cable may not be available in all computers. The presence of the gray antenna cable in your Mini Card compartment depends on the type of display. 4 Secure unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve. 5 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screws. Removing a Mobile Broadband or WWAN Card NOTE: WWAN is also available on an ExpressCard (see "Using ExpressCards" on page 87). 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over. 3 Loosen the captive screws on the cover of the Mini Card compartment and remove the cover.174 Adding and Replacing Parts 4 Disconnect the two antenna cables from the WWAN card. 1 captive screws (2) 2 cover 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 175 5 Release the WWAN card by pushing the metal securing tabs toward the back of the computer until the card pops up slightly. 1 antenna cable connectors (2) 2 WWAN card 1 2176 Adding and Replacing Parts 6 Lift the WWAN card out of its system board connector. Replacing a WWAN Card NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system board, and realign the card. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the WWAN card, never place cables under the card. 1 Insert the WWAN card connector into the system board connector labeled "WWAN" at a 45-degree angle. 2 Press the other end of the WWAN card down into the securing tabs until the card clicks into place. 1 metal securing tabs (2) 2 WWAN card 1 2Adding and Replacing Parts 177 3 Connect the black antenna cable with a gray stripe to the connector labeled "aux" (black triangle) and connect the white antenna cable with a gray stripe to the connector labeled "main" (white triangle). 4 Secure unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve. 5 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screws. Removing a WPAN Card 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over. 3 Loosen the captive screws on the cover of the Mini Card compartment and remove the cover. 4 Disconnect the blue antenna cable from the WPAN card. 5 Release the WPAN card by pushing the metal securing tabs toward the back of the computer until the card pops up slightly. 6 Lift the WPAN card out of its system board connector. 1 captive screws (2) 2 cover 1 2178 Adding and Replacing Parts Replacing a WPAN Card NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system board, and realign the card. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the WPAN card, never place cables under the card. 1 Insert the WPAN card connector into the system board connector labeled "WPAN" at a 45-degree angle. 2 Press the other end of the WPAN card down into the securing tabs until the card clicks into place. 3 Connect the blue antenna cable to the WPAN card. 4 Secure unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve. 5 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screws. Flash Cache Module The Flash Cache Module (FCM) is an internal flash drive that helps improve the performance of your computer. If you ordered an FCM with your computer, the card is already installed. NOTE: Windows® XP does not support an FCM. You can have an FCM installed when running Windows XP but it will have no effect on your computer’s performance. Removing the FCM 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over and remove the cover on the Mini Card compartment. 3 Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. NOTE: If you leave the area, ground yourself again when you return to the computer. Adding and Replacing Parts 179 4 Release the FCM by pushing the metal securing brackets away from the card until the card pops up slightly. 5 Remove the FCM. Replacing the FCM NOTICE: Install the FCM in the WWAN or WPAN slot. Do not install an FCM in the WLAN card slot. Doing so may cause damage to your computer. 1 Insert the FCM connector into the system board connector at a 45-degree angle 2 Press the other end of the FCM down into the securing tabs until the card clicks into place. 1 metal securing tabs (2) 2 FCM 1 2180 Adding and Replacing Parts Internal Card With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer. If you ordered a card with Bluetooth wireless technology with your computer, it is already installed. Removing the Card 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Remove the hinge cover (see "Hinge Cover" on page 160). 3 Disconnect the cable on the card. 4 Grasp the connector end of the card and slide it out from under the securing tabs. 1 securing tab 2 card 3 securing tab 4 cable 1 4 2 3Adding and Replacing Parts 181 Replacing the Card 1 Replace the card at an angle to slide it under the securing tabs in the card compartment. 2 Connect the cable to the card. Coin-Cell Battery CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the system board, you must remove the battery from the battery bay before you begin working inside the computer. Removing the Coin-Cell Battery 1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 153. 2 Turn the computer over. 3 Loosen the captive screw on the memory module/coin-cell battery cover (see "Bottom View" on page 32), and remove the cover. 4 Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable from the system board. 5 Slide the battery out of the mylar sleeve. 1 coin-cell battery 2 mylar sleeve 3 battery cable connector 2 1 3182 Adding and Replacing Parts Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery 1 Connect the coin-cell battery cable to the system board. 2 Slide the coin-cell battery into the mylar sleeve. 3 Replace the cover and tighten the captive screw.Dell™ QuickSet Features 183 Dell™ QuickSet Features NOTE: This feature may not be available on your computer. Dell QuickSet provides you with easy access to configure or view the following types of settings: • Network connectivity • Power management • Display • System information Depending on what you want to do in Dell QuickSet, you can start it by either clicking, double-clicking, or right-clicking the QuickSet icon in the Microsoft® Windows® notification area. The notification area is located in the lower-right corner of your screen. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon and select Help.184 Dell™ QuickSet FeaturesTraveling With Your Computer 185 Traveling With Your Computer Identifying Your Computer • Attach a name tag or business card to the computer. • Write down your Service Tag and store it in a safe place away from the computer or carrying case. Use the Service Tag if you need to report a loss or theft to law enforcement officials and to Dell. • Create a file on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop called if_found. Place information such as your name, address, and phone number in this file. • Contact your credit card company and ask if it offers coded identification tags. Packing the Computer • Remove any external devices attached to the computer and store them in a safe place. • Fully charge the main battery and any spare batteries that you plan to carry with you. • Shut down the computer. • Disconnect the AC adapter. NOTICE: When the display is closed, extraneous items on the keyboard or palm rest could damage the display. • Remove any extraneous items, such as paper clips, pens, and paper, from the keyboard and palm rest and close the display. • Use the optional Dell carrying case to pack the computer and its accessories together safely. • Avoid packing the computer with items such as shaving cream, colognes, perfumes, or food. NOTICE: If the computer has been exposed to extreme temperatures, allow it to acclimate to room temperature for 1 hour before turning it on.186 Traveling With Your Computer • Protect the computer, the batteries, and the hard drive from hazards such as extreme temperatures and overexposure to sunlight, dirt, dust, or liquids. • Pack the computer so that it does not slide around in the trunk of your car or in an overhead storage compartment. Travel Tips NOTICE: Do not move the computer while using the optical drive to prevent loss of data. NOTICE: Do not check the computer as baggage. • Consider disabling wireless activity on your computer to maximize battery operating time. To disable wireless activity, use the wireless switch (see "wireless switch" on page 27). • Consider changing your power management options to maximize battery operating time (see "Power Management Modes" on page 56). • If you are traveling internationally, carry proof of ownership—or of your right to use the computer if it is company-owned—to speed your passage through customs. Investigate the customs regulations of the countries you plan to visit, and consider acquiring an international carnet (also known as a merchandise passport) from your government. • Find out what type of electrical outlets are used in the countries you will visit, and have appropriate power adapters. • Check with your credit card company for information about the kinds of emergency travel assistance it offers to users of portable computers. Traveling by Air NOTICE: Do not walk the computer through a metal detector. Send the computer through an X-ray machine or have it hand-inspected. • Ensure that you have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. • Prior to entering the airplane, verify that using a computer is permitted. Some airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during flight. All airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during takeoff and landing.Getting Help 187 Getting Help Obtaining Assistance CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer cover, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. If you experience a problem with your computer, you can complete the following steps to diagnose and troubleshoot the problem: 1 See "Troubleshooting" on page 107 for information and procedures that pertain to the problem your computer is experiencing. 2 See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107 for procedures on how to run Dell Diagnostics. 3 Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191. 4 Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. See "Online Services" on page 188 for a more extensive list of Dell Support online. 5 If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192. NOTE: Call Dell Support from a telephone near or at the computer so that the support staff can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the Dell Support, see "Technical Support and Customer Service" on page 188. NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability.188 Getting Help Technical Support and Customer Service Dell's support service is available to answer your questions about Dell™ hardware. Our support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dell's support service, see "Before You Call" on page 190, and then see "Contacting Dell" on page 192. DellConnect DellConnect is a simple online access tool that allows a Dell service and support associate to access your computer through a broadband connection, diagnose your problem and repair it all under your supervision. For more information, go to support.dell.com and click DellConnect. Online Services You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites: www.dell.com www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only) www.dell.com/jp (Japan only) www.euro.dell.com (Europe only) www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries) www.dell.ca (Canada only) You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses: • Dell Support websites support.dell.com support.jp.dell.com (Japan only) support.euro.dell.com (Europe only) • Dell Support e-mail addresses mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only) apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)Getting Help 189 • Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only) • Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. AutoTech Service Dell's automated support service—AutoTech—provides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192. Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192. Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call for your region or to speak to a sales specialist, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192.190 Getting Help Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows: 1 Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 192. 2 Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. 3 Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist (see "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191), indicating the tests that you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 107). 4 Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5 Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dell’s receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell’s automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. You may also be asked for your Service Tag (located on the back or bottom of your computer). Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist (see "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 191). If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, follow the safety instructions in your Product InformationGuide.Getting Help 191 Diagnostics Checklist Name: Date: Address: Phone number: Service Tag (bar code on the back or bottom of the computer): Express Service Code: Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician): Operating system and version: Devices: Expansion cards: Are you connected to a network? Yes/No Network, version, and network adapter: Programs and versions: See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system’s start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code: Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:192 Getting Help Contacting Dell NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1 Visit support.dell.com. 2 Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. 3 Click Contact Us on the left side of the page. 4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. 5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.Specifications 193 Specifications NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start , click Help and Support, and then select the option to view information about your computer. Processor Processor type Intel® Core™ 2 Duo L1 cache 32 KB per instruction, 32 KB data cache per core L2 cache 2 MB or 4 MB per core depending on model External bus frequency 667 MHz and 800 MHz System Information System chipset Mobile Intel Express (GM 965 or PM 965) Data bus width 64 bits DRAM bus width dual-channel (2) 64-bit buses Processor address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM 1 MB Graphics bus PCI-E X16 PCI bus (PCI-Express used for video controllers) 32 bits x16 ExpressCard NOTE: The ExpressCard slot is designed only for ExpressCards. It does NOT support PC Cards. NOTE: PCMCIA may not be available in some regions. ExpressCard controller Intel ICH8M ExpressCard connector one ExpressCard slot (54 mm)194 Specifications Cards supported ExpressCard/34 (34 mm) ExpressCard/54 (54 mm) 1.5 V and 3.3 V ExpressCard connector size 26 pins 8-in-1 Memory Card Reader 8-in-1 memory card controller Ricoh R5C833 8-in-1 memory card connector 8-in-1 combo card connector Cards supported • Secure Digital (SD) • SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • xD-Picture Card • Hi Speed-SD • Hi Density-SD Memory Memory module connector two user-accessible SODIMM connectors Memory module capacities 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB Memory type 667 MHz SoDIMM DDR2 Minimum memory 512 MB Maximum memory 4 GB NOTE: In order to take advantage of the dual channel bandwidth capability, both memory slots must be populated and must match in size. NOTE: The available memory displayed does not reflect the complete maximum memory installed because some memory is reserved for system files. ExpressCard (continued)Specifications 195 Ports and Connectors Audio microphone connector, stereo headphone/speakers connector IEEE 1394 4-pin serial connector Consumer IR sensor compatible with Philips RC6 (receive only) Mini Card three Type IIIA Mini Card slots Modem RJ-11 port Network adapter RJ-45 port S-video TV-out 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable) USB four 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connector Video 15-hole connector Communications Modem: Type v.92 56K MDC Controller softmodem Interface Intel High-Definition Audio Network adapter 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board Wireless internal WLAN, WWAN, WPAN Mini Cards WWAN ExpressCard Bluetooth® wireless technology196 Specifications Video NOTE: Optional video controller upgrades are available for your computer subject to availability at the time of purchase. To determine the configuration of your computer, see "Determining Your Computer’s Configuration" on page 21. Video type: integrated on system board Video controller Intel 965 GM Video memory dynamic based on system memory capacity LCD interface LVDS TV support NTSC or PAL in S-video, composite, and component modes Video type: discrete video card Data bus PCI Express X16 Video controller nVIDIA GeForce 8400M G or nVIDIA GeForce 8600M GT Video memory 128 MB (GeForce 8400M G) or 256 MB (GeForce 8600M GT) LCD interface LVDS TV support NTSC or PAL in S-video, composite, and component modes Audio Audio type two-channel high-definition stereo Audio controller Intel HDA Azalia Stereo conversion 24-bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog) Interfaces: Internal Intel High Definition Audio External microphone-in connector, stereo headphones/speakers connector Speaker two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2 Watts per channel into 4 ohms Volume controls program menus, media control buttonsSpecifications 197 Display Type (active-matrix TFT) 15.4-inch WXGA 15.4-inch WXGA with TrueLife 15.4-inch WXGA+ with TrueLife 15.4-inch WSXGA+ with TrueLife Dimensions: Height 222.5 mm (8.8 in) Width 344.5 mm (13.6 in) Diagonal 391.2 mm (15.4 in) Maximum resolutions: WXGA 1280 x 800 at 262 K colors WXGA with TrueLife 1280 x 800 at 262 K colors WXGA+ with TrueLife 1440 x 900 at 262 K colors WSXGA+ with TrueLife 1680 x 1050 at 262 K colors Refresh rate 60 Hz Operating angle 0° (closed) to 155° Viewing angles: Horizontal ±40° (WXGA) ±40° (WXGA with TrueLife) ±55° (WXGA+ with TrueLife) ±60° (WSXGA+ with TrueLife) Vertical +15°/–30° (WXGA) +15°/–30° (WXGA with TrueLife) ±45° (WXGA+ with TrueLife) +40°/–50° (WSXGA+ with TrueLife)198 Specifications Pixel pitch: WXGA 0.258 mm WXGA with TrueLife 0.258 mm WXGA+ with TrueLife 0.2304 mm WSXGA+ with TrueLife 0.197 mm Controls brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts (see "Display Functions" on page 48) Keyboard Number of keys 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe); 91 (Japan) Layout QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Touch Pad X/Y position resolution (graphics table mode) 240 cpi Size: Width 71.7-mm (2.8-in) sensor-active area Height 34.0-mm (1.3-in) rectangle Battery Type 9-cell "smart" lithium ion 6-cell "smart" lithium ion Dimensions: Depth 67.6 mm (2.66 in) (9 cell) 47.5 mm (1.87 in) (6 cell) Height 20.4 mm (0.8 in) Width 209.9 mm (8.26 in) Weight 0.48 kg (1.06 lb) (9 cell) 0.33 kg (0.7 lb) (6 cell) Display (continued)Specifications 199 Voltage 11.1 VDC Charge time (approximate): Computer off 4 hours Operating time Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions and can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions (see "Power Problems" on page 132). See "Using a Battery" on page 53 for more information on battery life. Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range: Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Coin-cell battery CR-2032 AC Adapter Input voltage 90–264 VAC Input current (maximum) 1.5 A Input frequency 47–63 Hz Output current (65 W) 4.34 A (maximum at 4-second pulse) 3.34 A (continuous) Output current (90 W) 5.62 A (maximum at 4-second pulse) 4.62 A (continuous) Output power 65 W, 90 W Rated output voltage 19.5 +/– 1.0 VDC Dimensions (65 W): Height 28.2 mm (1.11 in) Width 57.9 mm (2.28 in) Depth 137.2 mm (5.4 in) Battery (continued)200 Specifications Weight (with cables) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) Dimensions (90 W): Height 34.2 mm (1.34 in) Width 60.8 mm (2.39 in) Depth 153.4 mm (6.0 in) Weight (with cables) 0.46 kg (1.01 lb) Temperature range: Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Physical Height 42 mm (1.65 in) Width 358.7 mm (14.12 in) Depth 269 mm (10.59 in) Weight (with 6-cell battery): Configurable to less than 3.0 kg (6.61 lb) Environmental Temperature range: Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity (maximum): Operating 10% to 90% (noncondensing) Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random vibration spectrum that simulates user environment): Operating 0.66 GRMS Storage 1.3 GRMS AC Adapter (continued)Specifications 201 Maximum shock (Measured with hard drive in operating status and a 2-ms half-sine pulse for operating. Also measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms halfsine pulse for storage): Operating 142 G Storage 163 G Altitude (maximum): Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) Environmental (continued)202 SpecificationsAppendix 203 Appendix Using the System Setup Program NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options available in system setup, thus overriding options that you set through system setup. An exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through system setup. For more information on configuring features for your operating system, see Windows Help and Support (see "Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista® Help and Support Center" on page 16). You can use system setup as follows: • To set or change user-selectable features such as your computer password • To verify information about the computer's current configuration such as the amount of system memory After you set up the computer, run system setup to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want to write down the information for future reference. The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer, such as: • System configuration • Boot order • Boot (start-up) configuration • Basic device configuration settings • System security and hard drive password settings NOTE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the system setup settings. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. 204 Appendix Viewing the System Setup Screen 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screen NOTE: For information about a specific item on a system setup screen, highlight the item and see the Help area on the screen. On each screen, the system setup options are listed at the left. To the right of each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence and enable/disable devices using the Boot Order page of the system setup program. NOTE: To change the boot sequence on a one-time-only basis, see "Performing a One-Time Boot" on page 205. The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following: • Diskette Drive • Internal HDDAppendix 205 • USB Storage Device • CD/DVD/CD-RW drive • Modular bay HDD NOTE: Only devices that are preceded by a number are bootable. During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the downarrow or up-arrow key, and then enable or disable the device or change its order in the list. • To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press the space bar. Enabled items are preceded by a number; disabled items are not preceded by a number. • To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and press to move the device up the list or to move a device down the list. Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program (you can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive). 1 Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3 Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. 4 When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press . The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the previous boot order is restored.206 Appendix Cleaning Your Computer CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. Computer, Keyboard, and Display CAUTION: Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and remove any installed batteries. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances. • Use a can of compressed air to remove dust from between the keys on the keyboard and to remove any dirt or lint from the display. NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning displays, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. • Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with either water or a display cleaner. Do not use alcohol or an ammonia-based cleaner. Wipe the display gently working from the center to the edges until it is clean and any fingerprints are removed. Do not use excessive pressure. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the antiglare coating, do not wipe the display with soap or alcohol. • Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water and wipe the computer and keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. • To clean your monitor screen, lightly dampen a soft, clean cloth with water. You can also use a special screen-cleaning tissue or solution suitable for the monitor’s antistatic coating. • Wipe the keyboard, computer, and monitor plastics with a soft cleaning cloth moistened with a solution of three parts water and one part dishwashing detergent. Do not soak the cloth or let water drip inside your computer or keyboard.Appendix 207 Touch Pad 1 Shut down and turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 154). 2 Disconnect any attached devices from the computer and from their electrical outlets. 3 Remove any installed batteries (see "Battery Performance" on page 53). 4 Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and wipe it gently across the surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Mouse NOTICE: Disconnect the mouse from the computer before cleaning the mouse If your screen cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the mouse. Cleaning a Non-Optical Mouse 1 Clean the outside casing of the mouse with a cloth moistened with a mild cleaning solution. 2 Turn the retainer ring on the underside of your mouse counterclockwise, and then remove the ball. 3 Wipe the ball with a clean, lint-free cloth. 4 Blow carefully into the ball cage or use a can of compressed air to dislodge dust and lint. 5 If the rollers inside the ball cage are dirty, clean the rollers with a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl alcohol. 6 Recenter the rollers in their channels if they are misaligned. Ensure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers. 7 Replace the ball and retainer ring, and turn the retainer ring clockwise until it clicks into place. Cleaning an Optical Mouse Clean the outside casing of the mouse with a cloth moistened with a mild cleaning solution.208 Appendix Media NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the optical drive, and follow the instructions that come with the compressed air product. Never touch the lens in the drive. If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your media, try cleaning the discs. 1 Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole. NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc. 2 With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge of the disc. For stubborn dirt, try using water or a diluted solution of water and mild soap. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are also safe to use on DVDs. Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) Technician assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software programs, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the computer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. Dell provides limited technical support for the computer and any "Dellinstalled" software and peripherals1 . Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware, and Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Repair services are provided pursuant to the terms and conditions of your limited warranty and any optional support service contract purchased with the computer. 2 All Dell-standard components included in a Custom Factory Integration (CFI) project are covered by the standard Dell limited warranty for your computer. However, Dell also extends a parts replacement program to cover all nonstandard, third-party hardware components integrated through CFI for the duration of the computer’s service contract.Appendix 209 Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals Dell-installed software includes the operating system and some of the software programs that are installed on the computer during the manufacturing process (Microsoft Office, Norton Antivirus, etc). Dell-installed peripherals include any internal expansion cards, or Dell-branded module bay or ExpressCard accessories. In addition, any Dellbranded monitors, keyboards, mice, speakers, microphones for telephonic modems, docking stations/port replicators, networking products, and all associated cabling are included. Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals Third-party software and peripherals include any peripheral, accessory, or software program sold by Dell not under the Dell brand (printers, scanners, cameras, games, etc). Support for all third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer of the product. FCC Notice (U.S. Only) FCC Class B This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: The FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell Inc. could void your authority to operate this equipment. 210 Appendix These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference with radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient the receiving antenna. • Relocate the system with respect to the receiver. • Move the system away from the receiver. • Plug the system into a different outlet so that the system and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Inc. or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with the FCC regulations: Macrovision Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Product name: Dell™ Inspiron™ 1520 Model number: PP22L Company name: Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400Glossary 211 Glossary Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may or may not describe features included with your particular computer. A AC— alternating current — The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable in to an electrical outlet. ACPI — advanced configuration and power interface — A power management specification that enables Microsoft® Windows® operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP — accelerated graphics port — A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer memory. AHCI — Advanced Host Controller Interface — An interface for a SATA hard drive Host Controller which allows the storage driver to enable technologies such as Native Command Queuing (NCQ) and hot plug. ALS — ambient light sensor — A feature that helps to control display brightness. antivirus software — A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. ASF — alert standards format — A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B battery life span — The length of time (years) during which a portable computer battery is able to be depleted and recharged. battery operating time — The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable computer battery powers the computer. BD — See Blu-ray Disc. 212 Glossary BIOS — basic input/output system — A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you understand what effect these settings have on the computer, do not change them. Also referred to as system setup. bit — The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. Bluetooth® wireless technology — A wireless technology standard for short-range (9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows for enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. Blu-ray Disc — Blu-ray Disc (BD) is an optical disc format jointly developed by the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA). A BD records and plays high-definition video (HD), and stores large amounts of data: five times the storage capacity of a DVD and can hold up to 25GB on a single-layer disc and 50GB on a dual-layer disc. boot sequence — Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. bootable CD — A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities media is a bootable CD. bootable disk — A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. bps — bits per second — The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU — British thermal unit — A measurement of heat output. bus — A communication pathway between the components in your computer. bus speed — The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. byte — The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C — Celsius — A temperature measurement scale where 0° is the freezing point and 100° is the boiling point of water. cache — A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many processor operations. L1 cache — Primary cache stored inside the processor. L2 cache — Secondary cache which can either be external to the processor or incorporated into the processor architecture.Glossary 213 carnet — An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport. CD-R — CD recordable — A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW — CD rewritable — A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a CD-RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). CD-RW drive — A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. CD-RW/DVD drive — A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read CDs and DVDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. clock speed — The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. CMOS — A type of electronic circuit. Computers use a small amount of batterypowered CMOS memory to hold date, time, and system setup options. COA — Certificate of Authenticity — The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. Also referred to as the Product Key or Product ID. Consumer IR — Infrared sensor for the Dell Travel Remote. Control Panel — A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such as display settings. controller — A chip that controls the transfer of data between the processor and memory or between the processor and devices. CRIMM — continuity rambus in-line memory module — A special module that has no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots. cursor — The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow.214 Glossary D DDR SDRAM — double-data-rate SDRAM — A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. DDR2 SDRAM — double-data-rate 2 SDRAM — A type of DDR SDRAM that uses a 4-bit prefetch and other architectural changes to boost memory speed to over 400 MHz. device — Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your computer. device driver — See driver. DIMM — dual in-line memory module — A circuit board with memory chips that connects to a memory module on the system board. DIN connector — A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. disk striping — A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width. DMA — direct memory access — A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the processor. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — A consortium of hardware and software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise, and Internet environments. domain — A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain access to the resources. DRAM — dynamic random-access memory — Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. driver — Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — A technology that provides a constant, high-speed Internet connection through an analog telephone line. dual-core — An Intel® technology in which two physical computational units exist inside a single processor package, thereby increasing computing efficiency and multitasking ability.Glossary 215 dual display mode — A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD-R — DVD recordable — A recordable version of a DVD. Data can be recorded only once onto a DVD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. DVD+RW — DVD rewritable — A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written to a DVD+RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). (DVD+RW technology is different from DVD-RW technology.) DVD+RW drive — drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI — digital video interface — A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display. E ECC — error checking and correction — A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP — extended capabilities port — A parallel connector design that provides improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves performance. EIDE — enhanced integrated device electronics — An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives and CD drives. EMI — electromagnetic interference — Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR® — Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP — enhanced parallel port — A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD — electrostatic discharge — A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. expansion card — A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. expansion slot — A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus. ExpressCard — A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of ExpressCards. ExpressCards support both the PCI Express and USB 2.0 standard.216 Glossary Express Service Code — A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell™ computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in some countries. extended display mode — A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. extended PC Card — A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot when installed. F Fahrenheit — A temperature measurement scale where 32° is the freezing point and 212° is the boiling point of water. FBD — fully-buffered DIMM — A DIMM with DDR2 DRAM chips and an Advanced Memory Buffer (AMB) that speeds communication between the DDR2 SDRAM chips and the system. FCC — Federal Communications Commission — A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-related regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. fingerprint reader — A strip sensor that uses your unique fingerprint to authenticate your user identity to help secure your computer. folder — A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. format — The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB — front side bus — The data path and physical interface between the processor and RAM. FTP — file transfer protocol — A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G — gravity — A measurement of weight and force. GB — gigabyte — A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB (1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes.Glossary 217 GHz — gigahertz — A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer processors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in GHz. graphics mode — A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI — graphical user interface — Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating systems are GUIs. H hard drive — A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. heat sink — A metal plate on some processors that helps dissipate heat. hibernate mode — A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTTP — hypertext transfer protocol — A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. Hyper-Threading — Hyper-Threading is an Intel technology that can enhance overall computer performance by allowing one physical processor to function as two logical processors, capable of performing certain tasks simultaneously. Hz — hertz — A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC — integrated circuit — A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and video equipment. IDE — integrated device electronics — An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — A highperformance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. 218 Glossary infrared sensor — Sensor for the Dell Travel Remote integrated — Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computer’s system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O — input/output — An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices. I/O address — An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the processor to communicate with that device. IrDA — Infrared Data Association — The organization that creates international standards for infrared communications. IRQ — interrupt request — An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the processor. Each device connection must be assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP — Internet service provider — A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K Kb — kilobit — A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. KB — kilobyte — A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. key combination — A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. kHz — kilohertz — A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN — local area network — A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance through telephone lines and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LCD — liquid crystal display — The technology used by portable computer and flatpanel displays.Glossary 219 LED — light-emitting diode — An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. local bus — A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the processor. LPT — line print terminal — The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M Mb — megabit — A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb. Mbps — megabits per second — One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB — megabyte — A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000 bytes. MB/sec — megabytes per second — One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for data transfer ratings. media bay — A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a Dell TravelLite™ module. memory — A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM. memory address — A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. memory mapping — The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the processor can access. memory module — A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to the system board. MHz — megahertz — A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for computer processors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz. Mini PCI — A standard for integrated peripheral devices with an emphasis on communications such as modems and NICs. A Mini PCI card is a small external card that is functionally equivalent to a standard PCI expansion card.220 Glossary Mini-Card — A small card designed for integrated peripherals, such as communication NICs. The Mini-Card is functionally equivalent to a standard PCI expansion card. Mobile Broadband network— (also known as a WWAN) is a series of interconnected computers that communicate with each other through wireless cellular technology and provides Internet access in the same varied locations from which cellular telephone service is available. Your computer can maintain the Mobile Broadband network connection regardless of its physical location, as long as the computer remains in the service area of your cellular service provider. modem — A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange email. module bay — See media bay. MP — megapixel — A measure of image resolution used for digital cameras. ms — millisecond — A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms. N network adapter — A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface controller). NIC — See network adapter. notification area — The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as system tray. ns — nanosecond — A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM — nonvolatile random access memory — A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set.Glossary 221 O optical drive — A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs, DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives, CD-RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives. P parallel connector — An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to as an LPT port. partition — A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PC Card — A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of PC Cards. PCI — peripheral component interconnect — PCI is a local bus that supports 32-and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the processor and devices such as video, drives, and networks. PCI Express — A modification to the PCI interface that boosts the data transfer rate between the processor and the devices attached to it. PCI Express can transfer data at speeds from 250 MB/sec to 4 GB/sec. If the PCI Express chip set and the device are capable of different speeds, they will operate at the slower speed. PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association — The organization that establishes standards for PC Cards. PIO — programmed input/output — A method of transferring data between two devices through the processor as part of the data path. pixel — A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. Plug-and-Play — The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST — power-on self-test — Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up.222 Glossary processor — A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the processor is referred to as the CPU (central processing unit). PS/2 — personal system/2 — A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or keypad. PXE — pre-boot execution environment — A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. R RAID — redundant array of independent disks — A method of providing data redundancy. Some common implementations of RAID include RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, and RAID 50. RAM — random-access memory — The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your computer. readme file — A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. read-only — Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if: • It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD. • It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. refresh rate — The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged (sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye. resolution — The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI — radio frequency interference — Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light. ROM — read-only memory — Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you shut down your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your computer reside in ROM.Glossary 223 RPM — revolutions per minute — The number of rotations that occur per minute. Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm. RTC — real time clock — Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you shut down the computer. RTCRST — real-time clock reset — A jumper on the system board of some computers that can often be used for troubleshooting problems. S SAS — serial attached SCSI — A faster, serial version of the SCSI interface (as opposed to the original SCSI parallel architecture). SATA — serial ATA — A faster, serial version of the ATA (IDE) interface. ScanDisk — A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disk’s surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped responding. SCSI — small computer system interface — A high-speed interface used to connect devices to a computer, such as hard drives, CD drives, printers, and scanners. The SCSI can connect many devices using a single controller. Each device is accessed by an individual identification number on the SCSI controller bus. SDRAM — synchronous dynamic random-access memory — A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the processor. serial connector — An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. Service Tag — A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. setup program — A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup. shortcut — An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and doubleclick the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. SIM — Subscriber Identity Module — A SIM card contains a microchip that encrypts voice and data transmissions. SIM cards can be used in phones or portable computers.224 Glossary smart card — A card that is embedded with a processor and a memory chip. Smart cards can be used to authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards. S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — An audio transfer file format that allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an analog format, which could degrade the quality of the file. standby mode — A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. Strike Zone™ — Reinforced area of the platform base that protects the hard drive by acting as a dampening device when a computer experiences resonating shock or is dropped (whether the computer is on or off). surge protectors — Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge protectors do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line voltage level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from the network connector during electrical storms. SVGA — super-video graphics array — A video standard for video cards and controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768. The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of video memory installed in the computer. S-video TV-out — A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the computer. SXGA — super-extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ — super-extended graphics array plus — A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1400 x 1050. system board — The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. system setup — A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS, such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program.Glossary 225 T TAPI — telephony application programming interface — Enables Windows programs to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video. text editor — A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). TPM — trusted platform module — A hardware-based security feature that when combined with security software enhances network and computer security by enabling features such as file and e-mail protection. travel module — A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable computer to reduce the weight of the computer. U UAC — user account control— Microsoft Windows® Vista® security feature that, when enabled, provides an added layer of security between user accounts and access to operating system settings. UMA — unified memory allocation — System memory dynamically allocated to video. UPS — uninterruptible power supply — A backup power source used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB — universal serial bus — A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer, broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices. Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or in to a multi-port hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP — unshielded twisted pair — Describes a type of cable used in most telephone networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect against electromagnetic interference, rather than relying on a metal sheath around each pair of wires to protect against interference. UXGA — ultra extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1600 x 1200.226 Glossary V video controller — The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilities—in combination with the monitor—for your computer. video memory — Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display. video mode — A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. video resolution — See resolution. virus — A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V — volt — The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W — watt — The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WHr — watt-hour — A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. wallpaper — The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper.Glossary 227 WLAN — wireless local area network. A series of interconnected computers that communicate with each other over the air waves using access points or wireless routers to provide Internet access. write-protected — Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position. WPAN — wireless personal area network. A computer network used for communication among computer devices (including telephones and personal digital assistants) close to one person. WWAN — wireless wide area network. A wireless high-speed data network using cellular technology and covering a much larger geographic area than WLAN. WXGA — wide-aspect extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 800." X XGA — extended graphics array — A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1024 x 768. Z ZIF — zero insertion force — A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. Zip — A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of .exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. Zip drive — A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to 100 MB of data.228 GlossaryIndex 229 Index Numerics 8-in-1 memory card reader, 91 A audio device connecting, 69 enabling, 84 audio. See sound B battery charge gauge, 55 charging, 58 checking the charge, 54 performance, 53 power meter, 55 removing, 59 replacing coin-cell battery, 181 storing, 60 BD. See Blu-ray Disc blank cards ExpressCards, 87 memory card, 91 removing, 89, 92 Bluetooth wireless technology card device status light, 25 installing, 180 Blu-ray Disc, 64-65, 67 boot sequence, 204 brightness adjusting, 41 C camera, 23 carnet, 186 CD about, 64 CD-RW drive problems, 115 drive problems, 115 Check Disk, 116 cleaning display, 206 keyboard, 206 media, 208 mouse, 207 touch pad, 207 coin-cell battery replacing, 181230 Index computer crashes, 127-128 restore to previous operating state, 145 slow performance, 118, 129 specifications, 193 stops responding, 127 conflicts software and hardware incompatibilities, 143 connecting audio device, 69 Mobile Broadband network, 99 TV, 69 contacting Dell, 192 copying CDs general information, 64 helpful tips, 66 how to, 64 copying DVDs general information, 64 helpful tips, 66 how to, 64 D Dell contacting, 192 Dell Diagnostics about, 107 starting from the Drivers and Utilities media, 109 starting from your hard drive, 108 Dell MediaDirect about, 26 problems, 128 Dell support site, 17 DellConnect, 188 device latch release description, 33 device status lights description, 24 diagnostics Dell, 107 digital array microphones, 26 display adjusting brightness, 41 adjusting the size of icons, 183 adjusting the size of toolbars, 183 description, 23 dual display operation, 43 resolution, 44 switching the video image, 41 documentation End User License Agreement, 16 ergonomics, 16 online, 17 Product Information Guide, 16 regulatory, 16 safety, 16 warranty, 16 Dolby headphones, setting up, 84Index 231 drivers about, 139 identifying, 140 reinstalling, 140 Drivers and Utilities media, 15 about, 141 Dell Diagnostics, 107 drives problems, 114 See also hard drive See also optical drive DVD about, 64 drive problems, 115 E End User License Agreement, 16 ergonomics information, 16 error messages, 119 ExpressCard slot description, 28 ExpressCards, 87 blanks, 87, 89 installing, 88 removing, 89 F Factory Image Restore, 147, 149 fan description, 33 FCM. See Flash Cache Module Flash Cache Module, 178 H hard drive description, 33 problems, 116 replacing, 156 returning to Dell, 158 hardware conflicts, 143 Dell Diagnostics, 107 Hardware Troubleshooter, 143 hibernate mode, 57 hinge cover removing, 160 I icons adjusting the size, 183 IEEE 1394 connector description, 29 problems, 124 infrared sensor description, 33 installing, 170232 Index Internet connection about, 35 options, 35 setting up, 36 IRQ conflicts, 143 K keyboard numeric keypad, 47 problems, 125 removing, 161 shortcuts, 48 keyboard status lights description, 26 keypad numeric, 47 L labels Microsoft Windows, 16 Service Tag, 16 lost computer, 105 M media playing, 61 media control buttons Dell MediaDirect button, 68 description, 25 memory DIMM A, 165 DIMM B, 166 installing, 163 removing, 164, 167 memory card, 91 blanks, 91-92 installing, 91 reader, 29 removing, 92 memory card reader, 91 memory module cover description, 33 messages error, 119 Mini Card installing, 170 WLAN, 170 WPAN, 170 WWAN, 170 Mobile Broadband network connections, 99 problems, 131 See also wireless switch modem connector description, 31 monitor. See displayIndex 233 N network installing WLAN Mini Card, 170 Mobile Broadband (WWAN), 131 problems, 131 QuickSet, 183 network connector description, 30 O operating system reinstalling Windows Vista, 145 P PC Restore, 147 phone numbers, 192 power hibernate mode, 57 line conditioners, 39 problems, 132 protection devices, 39 standby mode, 56 surge protectors, 39 UPS, 39 power button description, 23 power light conditions, 132 power management adjusting settings, 183 QuickSet, 183 printer cable, 38 connecting, 37 problems, 133 setting up, 37 USB, 38 problems blue screen, 128 CD drive, 115 CD-RW drive, 115 computer crashes, 127-128 computer does not start up, 127 computer stops responding, 127 conflicts, 143 Dell Diagnostics, 107 Dell MediaDirect, 128 drives, 114 DVD drive, 115 error messages, 119 hard drive, 116 IEEE 1394 connector, 124 keyboard, 125 lockups, 127 network, 131 power, 132 power light conditions, 132 printer, 133 program crashes repeatedly, 127 program stops responding, 127 programs and Windows compatibility, 127234 Index problems (continued) restore computer to previous operating state, 145 restore operating system to previous state, 144 scanner, 134 slow computer performance, 118, 129 software, 127, 129 sound and speakers, 135 speakers, 135 spyware, 118, 129 Product Information Guide, 16 Q QuickSet, 183 QuickSet Help, 18 R RAM. See memory regulatory information, 16 reinstalling Windows Vista, 145 resolution setting, 44 S S/PDIF digital audio enabling, 84 Safely Remove Hardware icon, 124 safety instructions, 16 scanner problems, 134 screen. See display security cable slot description, 27 Service Tag, 16 SIM. See Subscriber Identity Module software conflicts, 143 problems, 127, 129 software and hardware incompatibilities, 143 sound problems, 135 volume, 135 speakers description, 33 problems, 135 volume, 135 specifications, 193 spyware, 118, 129 standby mode about, 56 stolen computer, 105 Subscriber Identity Module, 169 support contacting Dell, 192Index 235 support website, 17 S-video TV-out connector description, 31 System Restore, 144-145 system setup program commonly used options, 204 screens, 204 viewing, 204 T taskbar Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, 131 Dell Support Utility, 18 QuickSet icon, 183 Safely Remove Hardware, 124 wireless activity indicator, 99 telephone numbers, 192 toolbars adjusting the size, 183 touch pad, 50 cleaning, 207 customizing, 51 touch pad buttons description, 25 track stick/touch pad buttons description, 25 transferring information to a new computer, 37 traveling with the computer by air, 186 identification tag, 185 packing, 185 tips, 186 troubleshooting conflicts, 143 Dell Diagnostics, 107 Hardware Troubleshooter, 143 restore computer to previous operating state, 144-145 TV connecting, 69 types, 91 U uninterruptible power supply. See UPS UPS, 39 USB connector description, 31 V video problems, 137 video controller determining configuration, 21 video controller configuration determining what controller is installed, 21236 Index volume adjusting, 135 W warranty information, 16 Windows Easy Transfer wizard, 37 Windows Vista Device Driver Rollback, 140 Factory Image Restore, 147 Program Compatibility wizard, 127 reinstalling, 145 System Restore, 144-145 Windows Easy Transfer wizard, 37 Windows XP Device Driver Rollback, 141 Hardware Troubleshooter, 143 hibernate mode, 57 PC Restore, 147 Program Compatibility wizard, 127 reinstalling, 150 standby mode, 56 wireless turning activity on and off, 183 wizards Program Compatibility wizard, 127 Windows Easy Transfer, 37 WLAN, 170 installing Mini Card, 170 WPAN installing, 177 WWAN installing, 173 See also Mobile Broadband Dellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W Getting Started With Your System Démarrage avec votre système Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System Начало работы c вашей системой Inicio de su sistema 系统使用 入门指南 系統使用 入門指南 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comDellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W Getting Started With Your System Démarrage avec votre système Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System Начало работы c вашей системой Inicio de su sistema 系统使用 入门指南 系統使用 入門指南 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotes and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your software. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage incidents. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or injury. DANGER: A DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. DANGER: Observe the following instruction to help prevent an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury: S This UPS contains LETHAL VOLTAGES. All repairs and service should be performed by AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY. There are NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS inside the UPS. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Phillipsis a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. July 2009System Features | 1 System Features Providing outstanding performance and reliability, the UPS's unique benefits include: S Buck and Boost voltage regulation that ensures regulated voltage to your load by correcting voltage fluctuations. S Start-on-battery capability for powering up the UPS even if utility power is not available. S Extended runtime with an optional External Battery Module (EBM) for 1000–1920W UPS models. S Two standard communication ports (USB and DB-9 serial port). S Optional Dell Network Management Card with enhanced communication capabilities for increased power protection and control. S Network transient protector that guards your network communications equipment from surges. S Advanced power management with the Dell UPS Management Software for graceful shutdowns and power monitoring. S Sequential shutdown and load management through separate receptacle groups called load segments. S Firmware that is easily upgradable without a service call. S Backed by worldwide agency approvals.2 | Finding Information Finding Information CAUTION: The Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document provides important safety and regulatory information. What are You Looking For? Find It Here S The user's guide for my UPS S The user's guide for the Dell Network Management Card S Dell UPS Management Software NOTE:Documentation and software updates can be found at support.dell.com. Dell UPS Disc S Specifications S How to configure UPS settings S How to troubleshoot and solve problems Dell UPS User's Guide The user's guide is available on the Dell UPS disc and on support.dell.com. S Safety instructions S Regulatory information S Recycling information Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information S Warranty information S Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) S End User License Agreement Dell Warranty and Support Information S Support information Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view the appropriate support site.Installation and Startup | 3 Installation and Startup CAUTION: Before performing the procedures in this document, read and follow the safety instructions and important regulatory information in your Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document. CAUTION: The cabinet is heavy [500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)]. Use caution to unpack and move the cabinet. This section describes the steps to set up your system for the first time. Unpacking the System 1 Unpack your system and identify each item. 2 Discard or recycle the packaging in a responsible manner, or store it for future use.4 | Installation and Startup Identifying the UPS This section shows a front and rear panel of the Dell Tower UPS. Refer to the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide for all rear panel details. Cover Latch Cover Latch LCD Panel Scroll Button (Up or Back) Select Button Scroll Button (Down or Forward) Figure 1. The Dell Tower UPS Communication Port Six 5-15 Receptacles (Load Segment 1) Network Transient Protector USB Port UPS Communication Bay On/Off Button IEC-C14 Input Connector Two 5-15 Receptacles (Load Segment 2) EBM Connector Figure 2. UPS Rear Panel (1000W, 120V Rear Panel)Installation and Startup | 5 Removing the UPS Front Cover 3 Remove the UPS front cover. Push the two cover latches to release the front cover and pull up. Removing the Battery Cover 4 Unscrew the thumbscrew on the the metal battery cover and lift up to remove the cover.6 | Installation and Startup Connecting the Internal Battery Connector 5 Connect the internal battery connector. 6 Replace the metal battery cover. Torque the screw to 0.7 Nm (6.2 lb in). 7 Replace the UPS front cover.Installation and Startup | 7 Connecting the Equipment 9 Connect equipment to UPS Connect communication cable from computer to UPS (optional) 8 8 If you plan to use Dell UPS Management Software, connect your computer to the USB port or RS-232 port using the supplied cable. 9 Plug the equipment to be protected into the UPS output receptacles, but do not turn on the protected equipment. NOTE: Verify that the total equipment ratings do not exceed the UPS capacity to prevent an overload alarm.8 | Installation and Startup Connecting the Power Cord 10 Verify that the power input to the UPS has adequate upstream overcurrent protection: Table 1. Minimum Upstream Circuit Breaker Rating UPS Output Power 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (at 100V) 1920W 20A — 15A 11 Plug the UPS power cord into a power outlet. NOTE: For 1920/1500W models. There are two power cords in the box, one with BSMI and PSE certified markings that can be used in Taiwan and Japan, another cord is for regions other than Taiwan and Japan.Installation and Startup | 9 Starting the UPS 12 Press the button on the UPS rear panel. Completing the Startup 13 Verify that the Normal icon appears on the UPS status summary screen, indicating that the UPS is operating normally and any loads are powered. 14 On the UPS status summary screen, press the button to check for active alarms or notices. Resolve any active alarms before continuing. See “Troubleshooting” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide. If there are no active alarms, a “No Active Alarms” message appears. 15 To change other factory-set defaults, see “Operation” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide.10 | Installation and StartupOnduleur Tour Dellt 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W Démarrage avec votre système H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comRemarques et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre logiciel. DANGER : Un DANGER indique une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, provoquera la mort ou une blessure grave. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, pourrait provoquer la mort ou une blessure. ATTENTION : Une ATTENTION indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer une blessure mineure ou légère ou des dommages matériels. DANGER : Respectez les instructions suivantes pour aider à empêcher une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer la mort ou des blessures graves : S Cet onduleur contient desTENSIONS MORTELLES. Toutes les réparations et tous les entretiens devront être effectués UNIQUEMENT PAR UN PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN AGRÉÉ. Aucune pièce à l’intérieur de cet onduleur NE PEUT ÊTRE ENTRETENUE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. Les informations dans ce document sont soumises à modifications sans préavis. E 2009 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de quelque manière que ce soit sans autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce texte : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques commerciales de Dell Inc. ; Phillips est une marque déposée de Phillips Screw Company. D’autres marques commerciales et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour se référer à des entités revendiquant les marques et les noms ou leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques commerciales et les noms commerciaux ne lui appartenant pas. Julliet 2009Caractéristiques du système | 13 Caractéristiques du système Offrant une fiabilité et des performances remarquables, les avantages uniques de l'onduleur comprennent : S La régulation de tension Buck and Boost qui assure une tension régulée à votre charge en corrigeant les fluctuations de tension. S La capacité de démarrage-sur-batterie pour alimenter l'onduleur même si le courant du secteur n'est pas disponible. S Temps d'exécution prolongé avec un Module de batterie externe (EBM) en option pour les modèles d'onduleur 1000–1920 W. S Deux ports de communication standards (port série DB-9 et USB). S Carte de gestion de réseau Dell optionnelle avec capacités de communication améliorées pour une protection et un contrôle accrus de l'alimentation électrique. S Protecteur de réseau contre les phénomènes transitoires qui protège votre équipement de communication réseau contre les surtensions. S Gestion avancée de l'alimentation électrique avec le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell pour des coupures progressives et une surveillance de l'alimentation. S Arrêt séquentiel et gestion de charge par des groupes de prises séparés appelés « segments de charge ». S Micrologiciel qui peut être facilement mis à niveau sans appeler le service technique. S Soutenu par des approbations d'organismes dans le monde entier.14 | Trouver des informations Trouver des informations ATTENTION! Le document Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation fournit des informations importantes sur la sécurité et la réglementation. Que recherchez-vous ? Trouvez-le ici S Le guide d'utilisation de mon onduleur S Le guide d'utilisation de ma Carte de gestion de réseau Dell S Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell REMARQUE : Les mises à jour des documents et des logiciels se trouvent sur support.dell.com. Disque de l'onduleur Dell S Spécifications S Comment configurer les paramètres de l'onduleur S Comment identifier et résoudre les problèmes Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur Dell Le guide d'utilisation est disponible sur le disque de l'onduleur Dell et sursupport.dell.com. S Instructions sur la sécurit S Informations sur la réglementation S Informations sur le recyclage Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation S Informations sur la garantie S Termes et conditions (États-Unis uniquement) S Contrat de licence de l'utilisateur final Informations sur l'assistance et la garantie Dell S Informations sur l'assistance Site Internet d'assistance Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région ou votre segment commercial pour voir le site d'assistance approprié.Installation et démarrage | 15 Installation et démarrage ATTENTION! Avant de réaliser les procédures de ce document, lisez et suivez les instructions de sécurité et les informations importantes sur la réglementation qui figurent dans votre document Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation. ATTENTION! Le module est lourd [500 W : 11,6 kg (25,6 lb) ; 1000 W : 18,3 kg (40,3 lb) ; 1920/1500 W : 30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Prenez toutes les précautions nécessaires pour déballer et déplacer le module. Cette section décrit les étapes de configuration de votre système pour la première fois. Déballage du système 1 Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément. 2 Jetez ou recyclez l'emballage d'une façon responsable, ou conservez-le pour une utilisation ultérieure.16 | Installation et démarrage Identification de l'onduleur Cette section montre un panneau avant et arrière de l'onduleur Tour Dell. Reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W pour tous les détails sur le panneau arrière. Loquet du couvercle Loquet du couvercle Panneau LCD Bouton de défilement (haut ou arrière) Bouton de sélection Bouton de défilement (bas ou avant) Figure 1. Onduleur Tour Dell Port de communication Six prises 5-15 (Segment de charge 1) Protecteur de réseau contre les phénomènes transitoires Port USB Baie de communication de l'onduleur Bouton Marche/Arrêt Connecteur d'entrée CEI-C14 Deux prises 5-15 (Segment de charge 2) Connecteur de l'EBM Figure 2. Panneau arrière de l'onduleur (panneau arrière du 1000 W, 120 V)Installation et démarrage | 17 Retrait du couvercle avant de l'onduleur 3 Retirez le couvercle avant de l'onduleur. Poussez les deux loquets du couvercle pour libérer le couvercle avant et levez. Retrait du couvercle des batteries 4 Dévissez la vis à oreilles sur le couvercle métallique des batteries et levez pour retirer le couvercle.18 | Installation et démarrage Connexion du connecteur interne des batteries 5 Branchez le connecteur interne des batteries. 6 Remettez en place le couvercle métallique des batteries. Serrez la vis à un couple de 0,7 N·m (6,2 lb in). 7 Remettez en place le couvercle avant de l'onduleur.Installation et démarrage | 19 Connexion de l'équipement 9 Connectez l'équipement à l'onduleur Connectez le câble de communication de l'ordinateur à l'onduleur (en option) 8 8 Si vous prévoyez d'utiliser le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell, connectez votre ordinateur au port USB ou RS-232 en utilisant le câble fourni. 9 Branchez l'équipement à protéger sur les prises de sortie de l'onduleur, mais ne mettez pas l'équipement à protéger sous tension. REMARQUE: Pour éviter une alarme de surcharge, vérifiez que les valeurs nominales totales de l'équipement ne dépassent pas la capacité de l'onduleur.20 | Installation et démarrage Connexion du cordon d'alimentation 10 Vérifiez que l'entrée d'alimentation de l'onduleur possède une protection contre les surintensités montantes compatible avec la valeur nominale de l'intensité pouvant être acheminée par le cordon d'alimentation. 11 Vérifiez que l'entrée d'alimentation vers l'onduleur possède une protection adéquate contre des surintensités montantes : Tableau 1. Valeur nominale minimale du disjoncteur amont Puissance de sortie de l'onduleur 120 V 208 V 230 V 500 W 15 A — 15 A 1000 W 15 A — 15 A 1500 W (à 100 V) 1920 W 20 A — 15 A 12 Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de l'onduleur à une prise secteur.Installation et démarrage | 21 Démarrage de l'onduleur 13 Appuyez sur le bouton sur le panneau arrière de l'onduleur. Achèvement du démarrage 14 Vérifiez que l'icône Normal apparaît sur l'écran de résumé d'état de l'onduleur, indiquant que l'onduleur fonctionne normalement et que toutes les charges sont alimentées. 15 Sur l'écran de résumé d'état de l'onduleur, appuyez sur le bouton pour vérifier les avis et les alarmes actives. Résolvez toutes les alarmes actives avant de continuer. Voir « Dépannage » dans le Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W. Si aucune alarme n'est activée, un message « Aucune alarme active » apparaît. 16 Pour changer d'autres valeurs d'usine par défaut, voir « Fonctionnement » dans le Guide d'utilisation de l'onduleur en baie Line-Interactive 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W.22 | Installation et démarrageDellt Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comHinweise und Warnungen HINWEIS: Ein HINWEIS macht auf eine wichtige Information aufmerksam, mit deren Hilfe Sie Ihre Software optimal nutzen können. GEFAHR: GEFAHR macht auf eine unmittelbar gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zum Tod oder schweren Verletzungen führt, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird. WARNUNG: Eine WARNUNG macht auf eine potenziell gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zum Tod oder zu Verletzungen führt, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird. ACHTUNG: ACHTUNG macht auf eine potenziell gefährliche Situation aufmerksam, die zu geringen oder mäßigen Verletzungen oder Sachschäden führen kann, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird. GEFAHR: Beachten Sie den folgenden Hinweis, um eine unmittelbar gefährliche Situation zu vermeiden, die zum Tod oder zu schweren Verletzungen führen könnte: S Diese USV führt LEBENSGEFÄHRLICHE SPANNUNG. Sämtliche Reparatur-- und Wartungsarbeiten dürfen NUR VON AUTORISIERTEM WARTUNGSPERSONAL durchgeführt werden. Im Inneren der USV sind KEINE VOM BENUTZER WARTBAREN TEILEvorhanden. Unangekündigte Änderungen der Angaben in diesem Dokument vorbehalten. E 2009 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Die Vervielfältigung, gleich welcher Art, ist ohne schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. strengstens untersagt. In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell und das DELL--Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc.; Phillipsist eine eingetragene Marke von Phillips Screw Company. In diesem Dokument können weitere Marken und Handelsnamen verwendet werden, die sich entweder auf die Personen beziehen, die diese Marken und Namen für sich beanspruchen , oder auf deren Produkte. Dell Inc. verzichtet auf sämtliche gewerblichen Eigentumsrechte an Marken und Handelsnamen, bei denen es sich nicht um eigene Marken und Handelsnamen handelt. Juli 2009Systemmerkmale | 25 Systemmerkmale Die herausragende Leistung und Zuverlässigkeit sind nur einige der Vorteile der USV-Anlagen. Sie bieten zudem: S Spannungsregulierung durch das „Buck and Boost“-Verfahren. Dies gewährleistet durch die Korrektur von Unregelmäßigkeiten einen gleichbleibenden Spannungswert für Ihre Anlagen. S Starten der Anlage im Batteriebetrieb zum Versorgen der USV mit Strom, selbst wenn kein Netzstrom zur Verfügung steht. S Erweiterte Laufzeit mit optionalem Externes Batteriemodul (EBM) für USV-Modelle für 1000-1920 W. S Serienmäßige Ausstattung mit zwei Kommunikationsschnittstellen (USV-Schnittstelle und serielle DB-9-Schnittstelle). S Optionale Dell Netzwerkmanagementkarte mit erweiterten Kommunikationsmöglichkeiten für verbesserten Leistungsschutz und Kontrolle. S Netzwerkschutzeinrichtungen schützen Ihre Anlage für Netzwerkkommunikation vor Spannungsspitzen. S Fortgeschrittene Stromüberwachung mit der Dell USV Management Software für sicheres Herunterfahren und Stromüberwachung. S Abschaltsequenz und Lastenmanagement durch separate Anschlussgruppen (sogenannte Lastsegmente). S Firmware, die sich einfach und ohne Wartungsdienst aktualisieren lässt. S Entspricht einschlägigen Normen auf der ganzen Welt.26 | Auffinden von Informationen Auffinden von Informationen ACHTUNG: Im Dokument Informationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften finden Sie wichtige Sicherheitshinweise und Informationen zu gesetzlichen Bestimmungen. Was suchen Sie? Hier finden Sie es S Die Benutzeranleitung für meine USV S Die Benutzeranleitung für die Dell Netzwerkmanagementkarte S Dell USV Management Software HINWEIS:Dokumente und Softwareaktualisierungen finden Sie unter support.dell.com. Die Disk für die Dell USV S Spezifikationen S Anleitung zum Konfigurieren der USV-Einstellungen S Behebung von Fehlern und Lösung von Problemen Benutzeranleitung der Dell USV Die Benutzeranleitung finden Sie auf der Disk zu der Dell USV und auch untersupport.dell.com. S Sicherheitshinweise S Informationen über Ordnungsvorschriften S Recycling-Informationen Informationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften S Garantieerklärung S AGB (nur USA) S Lizenzvereinbarung für Endbenutzer Informationen zu Garantie und Support von Dell S Supportinformationen Support-Website von Dell – support.dell.com HINWEIS: Wählen Sie Ihre Region bzw. Ihre Branche aus, um die geeignete Support-Website aufzurufen.Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 27 Installation und Inbetriebnahme ACHTUNG: Vor der Ausführung der Verfahren in diesem Dokument lesen Sie bitte die Sicherheitshinweise und wichtigen Informationen zu Ordnungsvorschriften in Ihrem Dokument überInformationen zu Sicherheit, Umweltschutz und Ordnungsvorschriften und halten Sie diese unbedingt ein. :ACHTUNG: Das Gehäuse ist schwer [500 W: 11,6 kg (25,6 lb); 1000 W: 18,3 kg (40,3 lb); 1920/1500 W: 30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Beim Auspacken und Transportieren des Gehäuses ist Vorsicht geboten. In diesem Abschnitt werden die Schritte für die Erstkonfiguration Ihres Systems beschrieben. Auspacken des Systems 1 Packen Sie das System aus und identifizieren Sie die einzelnen Komponenten. 2 Entsorgen oder recyceln Sie die Verpackung in umweltbewusster Weise, oder bewahren Sie sie für den späteren Gebrauch auf.28 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme Beschreibung der USV In diesem Abschnitt wird die Vorder- und Rückansicht der Dell Tower USV angezeigt. Alle Einzelheiten zur Rückseite finden Sie in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung. Abdeckungslasche Abdeckungslasche LCD-Anzeigen Bildlauftaste (aufwärts oder rückwärts) Auswahltaste Bildlauftaste (abwärts oder vorwärts) Abbildung 1. Die Dell Tower USV Kommunikationsschnittstelle Sechs 5-15-Anschlussdosen (Lastsegment 1) Netzwerk-Transienten Schutz USB-Schnittstelle Kommunikationssteckplatz der USV Ein-/Ausschalttaste IEC-C14-Eingangsanschluss Zwei 5-15-Anschlussdosen (Lastsegment 2) EBM-Anschluss Abbildung 2. Rückseite der USV (1000 W, 120 V)Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 29 Entfernen der vorderen USV-Abdeckung 3 Entfernen Sie die vordere USV-Abdeckung. Drücken Sie auf die beiden Abdeckungslaschen, um die vordere Abdeckung zu lösen, und ziehen Sie diese hoch. Entfernen der Batterieabdeckung 4 Lösen Sie die Rändelschraube auf der metallenen Batterieabdeckung und heben Sie die Abdeckung hoch, um sie zu entfernen.30 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme Anklemmen des Anschlusses im Inneren der Batterie 5 Klemmen Sie den Anschluss im Inneren der Batterie an. 6 Setzen Sie die die Batterieabdeckung aus Metall wieder ein. Drehen Sie die Schraube mit einem Drehmoment von 0,7 Nm (6,2 lb in) wieder ein. 7 Bringen Sie die vordere Abdeckung der USV wieder an.Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 31 Anschließen der Anlage 9 Schließen Sie die Anlage an die USV an Schließen Sie das Kommunikationskabel vom Computer an die USV an (optional) 8 8 Sofern Sie die Benutzung der Dell USV Management Software planen, schließen Sie Ihren Computer mit dem beiliegenden Kabel an die USB-Schnittstelle oder an die RS-232-Schnittstelle an. 9 Stecken Sie Stecker der zu schützenden Geräte in die Ausgangsanschlüsse der USV ein, aber schalten Sie die geschützten Geräte noch nicht ein. HINWEIS: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Gesamtnennleistung aller angeschlossenen Geräte die Kapazität der USV nicht überschreitet, um einen Überlastalarm zu vermeiden.32 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme Anschließen des Netzkabels 10 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stromeingang der USV entsprechend dem Nennstrom des Netzkabels mit einem Schutz gegen Spannungsspitzen ausgestattet ist. 11 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stromeingang der USV mit einem angemessenen Schutz gegen Spannungsspitzen ausgestattet ist: Tabelle 1. Mindestnennstrom der Überstromsicherung USV-Ausgangsleistung 120 V 208 V 230 V 500 W 15 A — 15 A 1000 W 15 A — 15 A 1500 W (bei 100 V) 1920 W 20 A — 15 A 12 Stecken Sie das Netzkabel der USV in eine Netzsteckdose.Installation und Inbetriebnahme | 33 Starten der USV 13 Drücken Sie die Taste auf der Rückseite der USV. Abschluss des Startvorgangs 14 Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Symbol für „Normal“ auf dem Bildschirm der USV-Statusübersicht angezeigt wird. Hierdurch wird angezeigt, dass die USV ordnungsgemäß funktioniert und dass alle angeschlossenen Lasten mit Strom versorgt werden.34 | Installation und Inbetriebnahme 15 Wählen Sie im Bildschirm mit der USV-Statusübersicht die Schaltfläche , um zu prüfen ob eine aktive Warnmeldung oder ein aktiver Hinweis vorliegt. Lösen Sie alle aktiven Warnmeldungen, bevor Sie den Vorgang fortsetzen. Siehe „Fehlerbehebung“ in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung. Falls keine Warnmeldungen aktiv sind, wird die Meldung „Keine aktiven Warnmeldungen“ angezeigt. 16 Für die Änderung anderer werkseitiger Standardeinstellungen siehe „Betrieb“ in der Dell Line-Interactive Tower USV 500 W, 1000 W, und 1920/1500 W Benutzeranleitung.ИБП башенного типа Dellt 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Начало работы c вашей системой www.dell.com | support.dell.comПримечания и предупреждения ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Пометка ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ указывает на важную информацию, которая поможет вам более эффективно использовать свое программное обеспечение. ОПАСНОСТЬ: Пометка ОПАСНОСТЬ указывает на ситуации, в которых существует непосредственная угроза, которая, если ее не избежать, приведет к серьезной травме или летальному исходу. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: Пометка ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ указывает на потенциально опасную ситуацию, которая, если ее не избежать, может привести к травме или летальному исходу. ВНИМАНИЕ: Пометка ВНИМАНИЕ указывает на потенциально опасную ситуацию, которая, если ее не избежать, может привести к травмам легкой и средней степени тяжести или к повреждению имущества. ОПАСНОСТЬ: Следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям, позволяющим предупредить непосредственную угрозу, которая, если ее не избежать, приведет к серьезной травме или летальному исходу: S В устройстве ИБП некоторые узлы находятся под СМЕРТЕЛЬНО ОПАСНЫМ НАПРЯЖЕНИЕМ. Все работы по ремонту и обслуживанию должны выполняться ТОЛЬКО УПОЛНОМОЧЕННЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАЮЩИМ ПЕРСОНАЛОМ. В ИБП НЕТ УЗЛОВ, ОБСЛУЖИВАЕМЫХ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЕМ. Информация в настоящем документе может быть изменена без предварительного уведомления. E 2009 Dell Inc. Все права защищены. Воспроизведение данного документа любым способом безписьменного разрешения компании Dell Inc. категорически запрещено. Торговые знаки, используемые в данном тексте: Логотипы Dell и DELL являются торговыми знаками компании Dell Inc.; Phillips является зарегистрированным торговым знаком компании Phillips Screw Company. Прочие торговые знаки и торговые марки могут использоваться в данном документе для ссылки на организации, предъявляющие права на эти знаки и марки, или на их товары. Dell Inc. отказывается от любого права собственности на какие-либо торговые знаки или торговые марки, кроме своих собственных. Июль 2009 г.Функции системы | 37 Функции системы Вот уникальные преимущества, обеспечивающие исключительную эффективность и надежность ИБП: S Понижающая и повышающая регулировка напряжения обеспечивает подачу стабильного напряжения на нагрузку путем коррекции колебаний напряжения. S Функция запуска от батареи используется для питания ИБП даже при отсутствии питания от электросети. S Увеличенное время работы при помощи дополнительного модуля Модуль внешней батареи (EBM) для моделей ИБП 1000 - 1920 Вт. S Два стандартных коммуникационных порта (USB и последовательный порт DB-9). S Дополнительная Карта сетевого управления Dell с усовершенствованными коммуникационными возможностями улучшает защиту питания и его мониторинг. S Защита от сетевых переходных процессов, которая предохраняет устройства сетевой связи от скачков. S Усовершенствованное управление питанием при помощи Программа управления ИБП Dell обеспечивает корректное выключение нагрузки и мониторинг электропитания. S Последовательное выключение и управление нагрузкой при помощи раздельных групп разъемов, называемых сегментами нагрузки. S Легко обновляемое аппаратно-программное обеспечение; для обновления нет необходимости обращаться в службу технической поддержки. S Утверждены международными организациями.38 | Поиск информации Поиск информации ВНИМАНИЕ: Документ Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация содержит важную информацию о технике безопасности и нормативную информацию. Что вы ищите? Вы найдете это здесь S Руководство пользователя для моего ИБП S Руководство пользователя для карты Карта сетевого управления Dell S Программа управления ИБП Dell ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Документация и обновленные версии ПО можно найти на сайте support.dell.com. Диск ИБП Dell S Спецификации S Как конфигурировать настройки ИБП S Как находить и устранять неисправности и решать проблемы Руководство пользователя ИБП Dell Руководство пользователя доступно на диске ИБП Dell и на сайте support.dell.com. S Инструкции по технике безопасности S Нормативная информация S Информация об утилизации Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация S Информация о гарантии S Сроки и условия (только для США) S Лицензионное соглашение с конечным пользователем Информация о гарантии и поддержке Dell S Информация о поддержке Веб-сайт поддержки Dell — support.dell.com ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Выберите свой регион или сегмент бизнеса, чтобы увидеть соответствующий сайт поддержки.Установка и запуск | 39 Установка и запуск ВНИМАНИЕ: Перед выполнением процедуры, описанной в данной документации, прочтите и выполните инструкции по технике безопасности и ознакомьтесь с важной нормативной информацией, которая содержится в документе Информация о технике безопасности, охране окружающей среды и нормативная информация. ВНИМАНИЕ: ВНИМАНИЕ: Корпустяжелый (500 Вт: 11,6 кг; 1000 Вт: 18,3 кг; 1920/1500 Вт: 30,5 кг]. Проявляйте осторожность при распаковке и перемещении корпуса. В данном разделе описываются этапы настройки системы в первый раз. Распаковка системы 1 Распакуйте систему и проверьте каждый элемент. 2 Выбросьте или утилизируйте упаковку согласно правилам или сохраните ее для будущего использования.40 | Установка и запуск Описание ИБП В данном разделе показаны передняя и задняя панели ИБП «Башня» Dell. См. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Dell, чтобы получить подробную информацию о задней панели. Защелка крышки Защелка крышки Жидкокристаллическая панель Кнопка пролистывания (вверх или назад) Кнопка выбора Кнопка пролистывания (внизили вперед) Рис. 1. ИБП «Башня» Dell Коммуникационный порт Шесть гнезд 5-15 (Сегмент нагрузки 1) Устройство защиты от переходных процессов в коммуникационной сети Порт USB Коммуникационного отсека блока бесперебойного питания Кнопка Вкл./Выкл Входной разъем IEC-C14 Два гнезда 5-15 (Сегмент нагрузки 2) Разъем EBM Рис. 2. Задняя панель ИБП (задняя панель 1000 Вт, 120 В)Установка и запуск | 41 Снятие передней крышки ИБП 3 Снимите переднюю крышку ИБП. Нажмите на две защелки крышки, чтобы освободить переднюю крышку, и потяните вверх. Снятие крышки батарей 4 Отвинтите винты на металлической крышке батарей и поднимите ее, чтобы снять.42 | Установка и запуск Подключение разъема внутренней батареи 5 Подключите разъем внутренней батареи. 6 Установите на место металлическую крышку батарей. Затяните винт с усилием 0,7 Нм (6,2 фунта на дюйм). 7 Установите на место переднюю крышку ИБП.Установка и запуск | 43 Подключение оборудования 9 Присоедините свое оборудование к ИБП Подключите кабель связи от компьютера к ИБП (факультативно) 8 8 Если вы планируете использовать Программа управления ИБП Dell, подключите свой компьютер к USB-порту или порту RS-232 при помощи прилагающегося кабеля. 9 Подключите оборудование, которое необходимо предохранить от скачков напряжения, к выходным гнездам ИБП, но не включайте это оборудование. Примечание: Убедитесь, что общая паспортная мощность потребителей не превышает мощность ИБП во избежание сигнала перегрузки.44 | Установка и запуск Подключение шнура питания 10 Убедитесь, что вход питания на ИБП имеет защиту от верхней перегрузки по току согласно номинальному току шнура питания. 11 Убедитесь, что вход питания ИБП имеет соответствующую защиту от верхней перегрузки по току: Таблица 1. Минимальный номинал вышестоящего выключателя Выходная мощность ИБП 120 В 208 В 230 В 500 Вт 15 A — 15 A 1000 Вт 15 A — 15 A 1500 Вт (на 100 В) 1920 Вт 20 A — 15 A 12 Вставьте шнур питания ИБП в розетку электросети.Установка и запуск | 45 Включение ИБП 13 Нажмите кнопку на задней панели ИБП. Завершение запуска 14 Убедитесь, что на итоговом экране состояния ИБП появилась пиктограмма обычного режима , обозначающая, что ИБП работает нормально и подает электропитание на существующие нагрузки.46 | Установка и запуск 15 На итоговом экране состояния ИБП нажмите кнопку , чтобы проверить, активны ли аварийные сигналы или извещения. Отреагируйте на все активные сигналы, прежде чем продолжить. См. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и 1920/1500 Вт Dell, раздел «Поиск и устранение неисправностей». При отсутствии активных аварийных сигналов появится сообщение «Активные аварийные сигналы отсутствуют». 16 Чтобы изменить прочие заводские настройки по умолчанию см. Руководство пользователя линейно-интерактивного ИБП башенного типа 500 Вт, 1000 Вт и , раздел «Эксплуатация».UPS de la torre de Dellt 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W Inicio de su sistema H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotas y advertencias NOTA: Una NOTA indica información importante que lo ayuda a utilizar mejor el software. PELIGRO: Un PELIGRO indica una situación inminentemente peligrosa que, si no se evita, dará como resultado la muerte o una lesión grave. AVISO: Una ADVERTENCIA indica una situación potencialmente peligrosa que, si no se evita, podría dar como resultado la muerte o una lesión. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica una situación potencialmente peligrosa que, si no se evita, puede dar como resultado una lesión moderada o menor, o en incidentes de daño de la propiedad. PELIGRO: Cumpla con la siguiente instrucción para evitar una situación inminentemente peligrosa que, de no evitarse, dará como resultado la muerte o una lesión grave: S Esta UPS contiene VOLTAJES LETALES. SÓLO EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADO debe realizar las reparaciones y el servicio. SÓLO EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADO dentro de la UPS. La información de este documento se encuentra sujeta a cambios sin previo aviso. E 2009 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida cualquier forma de reproducción sin el previo consentimiento de Dell Inc. por escrito. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell y el logotipo de DELL son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Phillips es una marca comercial registrada de Phillips Screw Company. Es posible que en este documento se utilicen otras marcas y nombres comerciales para hacer referencia a las entidades que responden a dichas marcas y nombres o a sus productos. Dell Inc. niega cualquier interés en la propiedad de las marcas y nombres comerciales de terceros. julio de 2009Características del sistema | 49 Características del sistema Al brindar rendimiento y confiabilidad sobresalientes, los beneficios exclusivos de la UPS incluyen: S Regulación del aumento y la reducción de voltaje que garantiza un voltaje constante para la carga, corrigiendo así las fluctuaciones. S Capacidad de arranque en batería para poner en funcionamiento la UPS aun cuando el suministro eléctrico no esté disponible. S Tiempo de ejecución con un Módulo de batería externa opcional (EBM) para los modelos de UPS 1000-1920 W. S Dos puertos de comunicación estándar (USB y puerto serie). S Tarjetas opcionales Tarjeta de gestión de red de Dell con capacidades de comunicación mejoradas para lograr mayor control y protección del suministro eléctrico. S Protector transitorio de redes que preserva a su equipo de comunicaciones en red de las sobretensiones. S El manejo avanzado del suministro eléctrico con Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell permite el apagado ordenado y la supervisión del suministro eléctrico. S El apagado secuencial y la gestión de carga mediante grupos de receptáculos separados que se denominan segmentos de carga. S Firmware que se actualiza fácilmente sin necesidad de llamar al cliente. S Respaldado por las aprobaciones de agencias a nivel mundial.50 | Búsqueda de información Búsqueda de información PRECAUCIÓN: El documento Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad brinda información regulatoria y sobre seguridad importante. ¿Qué está buscando? Encuéntrelo aqu S La guía del usuario para mi UPS S La guía del usuario para la Tarjeta de gestión de red de Dell S Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell NOTA:La documentación y la actualización de software se pueden encontrar en support.dell.com. Disco de la UPS de Dell S Especificaciones S Cómo configurar los valores de la UPS S Cómo diagnosticar las fallas y resolver problemas Guía del usuario de la UPS de Dell La guía del usuario está disponible en el disco de la UPS de Dell y en support.dell.com. S Instrucciones de seguridad S Información regulatoria S Información sobre reciclado Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad S Información sobre seguridad S Términos y condiciones (sólo EE. UU.) S Acuerdo de licencia del usuario final Información sobre soporte y garantía de Dell S Información sobre soporte Sitio web de soporte de Dell — support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región o segmento de negocio para visualizar el sitio de soporte correspondiente.Instalación y arranque | 51 Instalación y arranque PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar los procedimientos que se describen en este documento, lea y cumpla con las instrucciones de seguridad y la información regulatoria importante en su documento Información Ambiental, Regulatoria y de Seguridad. PRECAUCIÓN: El gabinete es pesado [500 W: 11,6 kg (25,6 lb); 1000 W: 18,3 kg (40,3 lb); 1920/1500 W: 30,5 kg (67,2 lb)]. Tenga precaución al desembalar y trasladar el gabinete. En la presente sección, se describen los pasos para configurar su sistema por primera vez. Cómo desembalar el sistema 1 Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento. 2 Deseche o recicle el embalaje de una manera responsable o guárdelo para un uso futuro.52 | Instalación y arranque Identificación de la UPS En la presente sección, se muestra un panel frontal y posterior de la UPS de la Torre de Dell. Consulte la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W para obtener todos los detalles del panel posterior. Pestillo de la Pestillo de la cubierta cubierta Panel LCD Botón de desplazamiento (hacia arriba o hacia atrás) Botón de selección Botón de desplazamiento (hacia abajo o hacia delante) Figure 1. La UPS de la Torre de Dell Puerto de comunicaciones Seis receptáculos de 5-15 (Segmento de carga 1) Protector de red a transitorios Puerto USB Compartimiento de comunicación de la UPS Botón de Encendido/Apagado Conector de entrada IEC-C14 Dos receptáculos de 5-15 (Segmento de carga 2) Conector EBM Figure 2. Panel posterior de la UPS (panel posterior 1000 W, 120 V)Instalación y arranque | 53 Cómo retirar la cubierta frontal de la UPS 3 Extraiga la cubierta frontal de la UPS. Empuje las dos pestillas de la cubierta para liberar la cubierta frontal y levantarla. Cómo extraer la cubierta de la batería 4 Desatornille el tornillo de apriete manual de la cubierta metálica de la batería y levante para extraer la cubierta.54 | Instalación y arranque Cómo conectar el conector de la batería interna 5 Conecte el conector de la batería interna. 6 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta metálica de la batería. Apriete el tornillo a 0,7 N·m (6,2 lb pulg.). 7 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta frontal de la UPS.Instalación y arranque | 55 Conectar el equipo 9 Conecte el equipamiento a la UPS Conecte el cable de comunicación de la computadora a la UPS (opcional) 8 8 Si planea utilizar el Software de Gestión de UPS de Dell, conecte su equipo al puerto USB o el puerto RS-232 mediante el uso del cable suministrado. 9 Enchufe el equipo para que esté protegido en los receptáculos exteriores de la UPS, pero no encienda el equipo protegido. NOTA: Verifique que los regímenes totales del equipo no excedan la capacidad de la UPS para prevenir una alarma de sobrecarga.56 | Instalación y arranque Conexión del cable de energía 10 Verifique que la entrada de energía a la UPS tenga protección de sobrecarga de corriente ascendente de acuerdo con el régimen de corriente del cable de energía. 11 Verifique que la entrada de energía a la UPS tenga protección de sobrecarga de corriente ascendente adecuada: Table 1. Régimen mínimo del disyuntor ascendente Potencia de salida de la UPS 120 V 208 V 230 V 500 W 15 A — 15 A 1000W 15 A — 15 A 1500 W (a 100 V) 1920 W 20 A — 15 A 12 Conecte el cable de alimentación de la UPS a un tomacorriente.Instalación y arranque | 57 Inicio de la UPS 13 Presione el botón del panel posterior de la UPS. Cómo completar el arranque 14 Verifique que el ícono Normal aparezca en la pantalla de resumen del estado UPS, que indica que la UPS funciona normalmente y todas las cargas están energizadas.58 | Instalación y arranque 15 En la pantalla de resumen de estado de UPS, presione el botón para comprobar las notificaciones y las alarmas activas. Solucione todas las alarmas activas antes de continuar. Consulte el “Diagnóstico de fallas” en la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W. Si no hay ninguna alarma activa, se muestra el mensaje “Ninguna alarma activa”. 16 Para cambiar otros valores predeterminados establecidos de fábrica, consulte “Funcionamiento” en la Guía del usuario de la UPS de la torre de la línea interactiva de Dell 500 W, 1000 W y 1920/1500 W.Dellt 塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 系统使用 入门指南 H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意和警告 注意: “注意”表示可帮助您更好使用本软件的重要信息。 危险:“危险”表示紧急危险情况,如果不加以避免,将导致死亡或严重的伤害。 警告:“警告”表示潜在危险情况,如果不加以避免,将会导致死亡或伤害。 小心:“小心”表示潜在危险情况,如果不加以避免,可能导致轻度或中度伤害,或财产损失事故。 危险: 遵守下列须知有助于防止紧急危险情况,其若不加以避免,将导致死亡或严重的伤害: S 本 UPS 包含危险致命的电压。所有维修和服务都只能由经过授权的维修人员进行。UPS 中没有用户可自行维修的部件。 本文档所含信息如有更改,恕不另行通知。 E 2009 Dell Inc. 保留所有权利。 未经 Dell Inc. 书面允许,严禁以任何形式进行复制。 本文中使用的商标:Dell和DELL 徽标为 Dell Inc.的商标;Phillips 为 Phillips Screw Company 的注册商标。 本文件中可能会使用其它商标或商业名称来指称拥有该商标或名称权利的实体或其产品。Dell Inc. 对不属于自己的商标和商品名称,不拥有任何产权利益。 2009 年 7 月系统性能 | 61 系统性能 该 UPS 可提供杰出的性能与可靠性,其独特优势包括: S 降压与升压调节,通过调节电压波动确保您的负荷电压稳定。 S 即使没有公用电源,电池启动功能也能给 UPS 供电。 S 对 1000–1920W UPS 型号,通过可选的外部电池模块(EBM)延长运行时间。 S 两个标准通信端口(USB 和 DB-9 串行口)。 S 为了加强电源保护和控制,可选择增强通信能力的 Dell 网络管理卡。 S 网络抗瞬变装置可保护您的网络通信设备免受电涌的损害。 S 高级电源管理,用Dell UPS 管理软件进行平滑关机和电力监控。 S 通过称为载入段的单独插座组进行顺序关机和负荷管理。 S 不必拨打服务电话,即可自行对固件进行方便升级。 S 全球代理认证提供支持。62 | 查找信息 查找信息 CAUTION:安全、环保和法规信息文件提供了重要的安全和法规信息。 您正在寻找什么? 在此查找 S 我的 UPS 的用户指南 S Dell 网络管理卡 用户指南 S Dell UPS 管理软件 注意:文件和软件更新可在 support.dell.com 找到。 Dell UPS 光盘 S 规格 S 如何配置 UPS 设置 S 如何排查故障和解决问题 Dell UPS 用户指南 用户指南可从 Dell UPS 光盘和 support.dell.com 上找到。 S 安全操作说明 S 行政法规信息 S 回收信息 安全、环保和法规信息 S 保修信息 S 条款和条件(仅限美国) S 最终用户许可协议 Dell 保修和支持信息 S 支持信息 Dell 支持网站 — support.dell.com 注意:选择您的区域或业务部门,以查看合适的支 持网站。安装和启动 | 63 安装和启动 CAUTION: 在进行本文件中的步骤之前,请先阅读和遵循 安全、环保和法规信息 文件中的安全操作说明和重要法规信息。 CAUTION:小心:机箱较重 [500W: 11.6 千克(25.6 磅);1000W:18.3 千克(40.3 磅);1920/1500W: 30.5 千克 (67.2 磅)]。请在拆开包装和搬动机箱时特别小心。 本节描述首次安装系统的步骤。 打开系统 1 打开系统,查看每个物品项目。 2 以负责任的方式处理包装材料或回收循环利用,或者收起存放以备将来使用。64 | 安装和启动 UPS 识别 本节介绍 Dell 塔式 UPS 的前面板和后面板。后面板详细情况请参见 Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南 。 外盖闩锁 外盖闩锁 LCD 显示面板 滚动按钮(向上或向后) 选择按钮 滚动按钮(向下或向前) 图 1. Dell 塔式 UPS 通信端口 六个 5-15 插座(载入段 1) 网络抗瞬变装置 USB 端口 UPS 通信槽 开/关按钮 IEC-C14 输入连接器 两个 5-15 插座(载入段 2) EBM 接线器 图 2. UPS 后面板(1000W (瓦),120V (伏)后面板)安装和启动 | 65 取下 UPS 前盖 3 取下 UPS 前盖。 推动两个外盖闩锁,以松开前盖,并拉起。 取下电池盖 4 松开电池金属盖上的翼形螺钉,并提起以取下外盖。66 | 安装和启动 连接内部电池连接器 5 连接内部电池接线器。 6 重新放回电池金属盖。 将螺钉拧至 0.7 牛米(N·m) (6.2 磅英寸(lb in))。 7 重新放回 UPS 前盖。安装和启动 | 67 连接设备 9 将设备连接到 UPS 上 将计算机的通信电缆连接到 UPS 上(可选) 8 8 如果您计划使用Dell UPS 管理软件,用提供的电缆将您的电脑连接到 USB 端口或 RS-232 端口。 9 将需要保护的设备插入 UPS 输出插座,但不要启动受保护的设备。 注意:确保全部设备的总额定值不超过 UPS 的负载能力,以防止出现过载警报。68 | 安装和启动 连接电源线 10 根据电源线额定电流验证 UPS 的功率输入具有上游过电流保护。 11 验证 UPS 的功率输入具有足够的上游过电流保护: 图 1. 最小上游断路器额定值 UPS 输出功率 120V(伏) 208V(伏) 230V(伏) 500W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1000W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1500W (瓦) (在100V(伏)时) 1920W(瓦) 20A(安) — 15A(安) 12 将 UPS 电源线插入电源插座。安装和启动 | 69 启动 UPS 13 按下 UPS 后面板上的 按钮。 完成启动 14 确认“正常”(Normal)图标 显示在 UPS 状态概要屏幕上,这表明 UPS 运转正常,任何负荷都有动力供给。 15 在 UPS 状态屏上,按下 按钮,查看现有警报或通知。 解决所有警报问题,然后继续。 参见Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南中的“故障处理”。 如果没有现有警报,会出现“无现有警报”(No Active Alarms)信息。 16 要更改其它出厂设置默认项,请参见Dell 在线互动塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W, 和 1920/1500W 用户指南中的“操作”。70 | 安装和启动Dellt 塔式 UPS 500W、1000W 和 1920/1500W 系統使用 入門指南 H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意和警告 注意: 「注意」表示可幫助您更好地使用本軟體的重要資訊。 危險: 「危險」表示緊急危險情況,如果不加以避免,將導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。 警告: 「警告」表示潛在危險情況,如果不加以避免,將會導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。 小心:「小心」表示潛在危險情況,如果不加以避免,可能導致輕度或中度傷害,或財產損失事故。 危險: 遵守以下須知有助於防止緊急危險情況,其若不加以避免,將導致死亡或嚴重的傷害。 S 本 UPS 包含危險致命的電壓。所有維修和服務都只能由經過授權的維修人員進行。UPS 中沒有可由使用者自行維修的零件。 本文件所含資訊如有變更,恕不另行通知。 E 2009 Dell Inc. 保留所有權利。 未經 Dell Inc. 書面允許,嚴格禁止以任何形式進行複製。 本文中使用的商標:Dell和Dell 標誌為 Dell Inc.的商標;Phillips 為 Phillips Screw Company 的註冊商標。 本文件中可能會使用其他商標或商業名稱來指涉擁有該商標或名稱權利的實體或其產品。Dell Inc. 對不屬於自己的商標和商品名稱,不擁有任何產權利益。 2009 年 7 月系統性能 | 73 系統性能 該 UPS 可提供傑出的性能與可靠性,包括下列獨有優勢: S 降壓與升壓調節,藉由調節電壓波動確保您的負載電壓穩定。 S 電池啟動功能使您能在沒有外部電源時,也能使 UPS 通電。 S 1000–1920W UPS 型號可藉由選配的 外部電池模組(EBM)延長運行時間。 S 兩個標準通信連接埠(USB 和 DB--9 序列埠)。 S 選配的 Dell 網路管理卡 具有增強通訊功能,可增加電源保護和控制。 S 網路瞬態過電保護裝置可保護您的網路通信設備免受電壓突波的損害。 S 使用Dell UPS 管理軟體的先進電源管理,進行平滑關機和電力監控。 S 藉由稱為負載區段的單獨插座組進行順序關機和負載管理。 S 不必撥打服務電話,即可自行輕鬆的升級韌體。 S 提供全球代理商認證支援。74 | 尋找資訊 尋找資訊 CAUTION: 安全、環保和法規資訊文件提供重要的安全和法規資訊。 您正在尋找什麼? 在此尋找 S 我的 UPS 的使用者指南 S Dell 網路管理卡 使用者指南 S Dell UPS 管理軟體 注意:文件和軟體更新可在 support.dell.com 找到。 Dell UPS 光碟 S 規格 S 如何進行 UPS 設定 S 如何排除故障和解決問題 Dell UPS 使用者指南 使用者指南可從 Dell UPS 光碟和 support.dell.com 上取得。 S 安全操作說明 S 行政法規資訊 S 回收資訊 安全、環保和法規資訊 S 保固資訊 S 條款與條件(僅限美國) S 一般使用者授權協議 Dell 保固和支援資訊 S 支援資訊 Dell 支援網站 — support.dell.com 注意:選擇您的區域或業務部門,以查看合適的支援 網站。安裝和啟動 | 75 安裝和啟動 CAUTION: 在進行本文件中的步驟之前,請先閱讀和遵循 安全、環保和法規資訊 文件中的安全操作說明和重要法規資訊。 CAUTION:小心: 機箱較重 [500W; 11.6 公斤 (25.6 磅); 1000W; 18.3 公斤 (40.3 磅); 1920/1500W: 30.5 公斤 (67.2 磅)]。 在拆開包裝和搬動機箱時請特別小心。 本節描述首次安裝系統的步驟。 拆除系統包裝 1 拆除系統包裝,並檢查確定每個項目。 2 以負責任的方式棄置或回收包裝材料,或者將其存放以備將來使用。76 | 安裝和啟動 UPS 的識別 本節介紹 Dell 塔式 UPS 的前面板和後面板。後面板詳細情況請參見 Dell在線互動機架式 UPS 500W、1000W、和 1920/1500W使用者指南。 外蓋閂鎖 外蓋閂鎖 LCD 顯示面板 捲軸按鈕(向上或向後) 選擇按鈕 捲軸按鈕(向下或向前) 圖 1. Dell 塔式UPS 通信連接埠 六個 5-15 插座(負載區段 1) 網路瞬態過電保護裝置 USB 連接埠 UPS 通信槽 開/關按鈕 IEC--C14 輸入連接器 兩個 5-15 插座(負載區段 2) EBM 接線器 圖 2. UPS 後面板(1000W,120V 後面板)安裝和啟動 | 77 取下 UPS 前蓋 3 取下 UPS 前蓋。 推動兩個外蓋閂鎖,以鬆開前蓋並將其拉起。 取下電池蓋 4 鬆開電池金屬蓋上的翼形螺釘,提起以取下外蓋。78 | 安裝和啟動 連接內部電池連接器 5 連接內部電池接線器。 6 重新放囘電池金屬蓋。 將螺釘擰至 0.7 牛米(N·m)(6.2 磅吋(lb in))。 7 重新放囘 UPS 前蓋。安裝和啟動 | 79 連接設備 9 將設備連接到 UPS 上 將電腦的通信電纜連接 到 UPS 上(可選 8 8 如果您計劃使用Dell UPS 管理軟體,請使用提供的電纜將您的電腦連接到 USB連接埠或 RS--232 連接埠。 9 將要保護的設備插入 UPS 輸出插座,但不要開啟受保護設備的電源。 注意: 確保全部設備的縂額定值未超過 UPS 的負載能力,以防止出現過載警報。80 | 安裝和啟動 連接電源線 10 根據電源線額定電流驗證 UPS 的電源輸入具有上游過電保護。 11 驗證 UPS 的電源輸入具有足夠的上游過電保護: 表 1. 最小上游斷路器額定值 UPS 輸出功率 120V(伏) 208V(伏) 230V(伏) 500W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1000W(瓦) 15A(安) — 15A(安) 1500W(瓦) (當100V(伏)時) 1920W(瓦) 20A(安) — 15A(安) 12 將 UPS 電源線插入電源插座。安裝和啟動 | 81 啟動 UPS 13 按下 UPS 後面板上的 按鈕。 完成啟動 14 確認「正常」(Normal)圖示 顯示在 UPS 狀態概要螢幕上,這表明 UPS 運作正常, 任何負載都有電力提供。 15 在 UPS 狀態概要螢幕上,按下 按鈕,查看作用中的警報或通知。解決所有警報問題, 然後繼續。 參見 Dell在線互動機架式 UPS 500W、1000W和 1920/1500W使用者指南 中的「故障處理」。 如果沒有作用中的警報,會出現「無作用中警報」(No Active Alarms)訊息。 16 若要變更其它出廠預設設定,請參見Dell在線互動塔式 UPS 500W, 1000W和 1920/1500W 使用者指南中的「操作」。82 | 安裝和啟動Dellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com참고 및 경고 참고:"참고"는 소프트웨어를 더 잘 활용하는 데 도움이 되는 중요한 정보를 나타냅니다. 위험:"위험"은 피하지 않을 경우, 급박한 위험 상황이 사망이나 중상의 결과를 야기할 수 있음을 나타냅니다. 경고:"경고"는 피하지 않을 경우 죽음이나 상해를 야기할 수 있는 잠재적 위험 상황을 표시합니다. 주의:"주의"는 피하지 않을 경우 경미하거나 보통의 상해 또는 재산 손실 사고를 야기할 수 있는 잠재적 위험 상황을 표시합니다. 위험: 아래의 지시사항을 준수하여, 피하지 않을 경우 사망이나 중상의 결과를 야기할 수 있는 급박한 위험 상황을 방지하십시오. S UPS는 사망에 이를 수 있는 전압을 갖고 있습니다. 모든 수리와 정비는 자격있는 서비스 요원만이 수행해야 합니다. UPS 내부에는 사용자가 정비할 수 없는 부품이 있습니다. 이 문서에 포함된 정보는 고지없이 변경될 수 있습니다. E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Dell Inc.의 서면 허락 없이 어떤 방식으로든 복제를 하는 것은 엄격히 금지됩니다. 이 문서에서 사용된 상표 : Dell및DELL로고는 Dell Inc.의 상표입니다. Phillips는Phillips Screw Company 의 등록상표입니다. 기타 상표와 상호를 관련 상표 및 명칭 또는 관련 제품에 대한 권리를 가지는 당사자를 지칭하기 위해 이 문서에서 사용될 수 있습니다. Dell Inc.는 Dell Inc.가 소유하지 않은 상표 및 상호에 대한 재산적 이해관계를 부인합니다. 2009 년 7월시스템 기능 | 85 시스템 기능 탁월한 성능과 신뢰도를 제공하면서, 본 UPS는 다음과 같은 특유의 장점을 지닙니다. S 전압 변동을 교정하여 사용자의 부하에 대한 조정 전압을 보장하는 승강압형 전압 조정. S 상용 전력을 사용할 수 없는 경우에도 UPS에 전력을 공급하는 스타트온 배터리 (start--on--battery) 기능. S 선택사양인 1000–1920W UPS 모델용 외장 배터리 모듈(EBM)을 갖춘 확장 런타임. S 2개의 표준 통신 포트 (USB 및 DB--9 시리얼 포트). S 전원 보호 및 제어 능력을 제고하기 위한 강화된 통신 기능을 갖춘 선택사양인 Dell Network Management Card. S 네트워크 통신 장비를 서지(surge)로부터 보호하는 네트워크 과도전류(transient) 프로텍터. S 안정적인 종료 및 전원 감시를 위한 Dell UPS Management Software로 수행되는 고급 전원 관리. S 로드 세그먼트라고 하는 별도의 콘센트 그룹을 통한 순차적 종료 및 부하 관리. S 서비스 요청 없이도 쉽게 업그레이드할 수 있는 펌웨어. S 세계적인 인증기관의 각종 인증을 득함.86 | 정보 찾아보기 정보 찾아보기 주의:안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 문서는 중요한 안전 및 규제 정보를 제공합니다. 찾는 정보 항목 정보의 소재 S UPS용 사용자 설명서 S Dell Network Management Card용 사용자 설명서 S Dell UPS Management Software 참고: 문서 및 소프트웨어 업데이트는 support.dell.com에서 조회할 수 있습니다. Dell UPS 디스크 S 사양 S UPS 설정 구성 방법 S 문제점 처리 및 해결 방법 Dell UPS 사용자 설명서 사용자 설명서는 Dell UPS 디스크 및 support.dell.com에서 조회할 수 있습니다. S 안전 지침 S 규제 정보 S 재활용 정보 안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 S 보증 정보 S 약관 (미국만 해당) S 최종사용자 라이센스 계약 Dell 보증 및 지원 정보 S 지원 정보 Dell 지원 웹사이트 — support.dell.com 참고:적절한 지원 사이트를 보려면 해당 지역이나 사업분야를 선택하십시오.설치 및 시동 | 87 설치 및 시동 주의:본 문서의 절차를 수행하기 전에 안전, 환경, 및 규제 관련 정보 문서에 있는 안전 지침 및 중요한 규제정보를 읽고 준수하십시오. 주의:캐비닛은 무겁습니다[500W : 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W : 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W : 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)]. 주의하여 캐비닛의 포장을 풀고 캐비닛을 옮기십시오. 이 절은 귀하의 시스템을 처음 설치하는 절차를 설명합니다. 시스템 포장풀기 1 시스템 포장을 풀고 각 품목을 확인하십시오. 2 포장은 해당 처리방식에 따라 폐기하거나 재활용하십시오. 또는, 추후 사용하려면 보관하십시오.88 | 설치 및 시동 UPS 확인하기 이 절에서는 Dell Tower UPS의 앞면 패널과 뒷면 패널을 보여줍니다. 모든 뒷면 패널의 세부에 대해서는 Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서를 참조하십시오. 덮개 걸쇠 덮개 걸쇠 LCD패널 스크롤 버튼(위로 또는 뒤로) 버튼 선택 스크롤 버튼(아래로 또는 앞으로) 그림 1. Dell Tower UPS 통신 포트 6개의5-15콘센트 (로드 세그먼트1) 네트워크 과도전류 프로텍터 USB포트 UPS통신 베이 ON/OFF버튼 IEC-C14입력 커넥터 2개의5-15콘센트 (로드 세그먼트 2) EBM 커넥터 그림 2. UPS 뒷면 패널 (1000W, 120V 뒷면 패널)설치 및 시동 | 89 UPS 앞면 덮개 제거하기 3 UPS 앞면 덮개를 제거하십시오. 두 개의 덮개 걸쇠를 밀어서 앞면 덮개를 풀고 당겨 올리십시오. 배터리 덮개 제거하기 4 금속 배터리 덮개의 손나사를 풀고 들어올려 덮개를 제거하십시오.90 | 설치 및 시동 내부 배터리 커넥터 연결하기 5 내부 배터리 커넥터를 연결하십시오. 6 금속 배터리 덮개를 교체하십시오. 나사에 0.7 N·m (6.2 lb in)의 토크를 주십시오. 7 UPS 앞면 덮개를 교체하십시오.설치 및 시동 | 91 장비 연결하기 9 장비를UPS로 연결 컴퓨터에서UPS로 통신 케이블을 연결(선택사양) 8 8 Dell UPS Management Software를 사용하실 계획이라면, 제공된 케이블을 이용하여 컴퓨터를 USB 포트나 RS--232 포트로 연결하십시오. 9 보호할 장비를 UPS 출력 콘센트에 꽂되 켜지는 마십시오. 참고: 과부하 경보를 방지하려면 장비의 전체 정격사양이 UPS 용량을 초과하지 않도록 확인하십시오.92 | 설치 및 시동 전원 코드 연결하기 10 UPS로 입력되는 전원이 전원코드 전류 정격에 따라 업스트림 과전류 보호를 받고 있는지 확인하십시오. 11 UPS로 입력되는 전원이 적당한 업스트림 과전류에 대해 보호 받고 있는지 확인하십시오. 표 1. 최소 업스트림 회로차단기 정격 UPS 출력 전원 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (100V) 1920W 20A — 15A 12 UPS 전원코드를 전원 콘센트에 연결하십시오.설치 및 시동 | 93 UPS 시동하기 13 UPS 앞면 패널의 버튼을 누르십시오. 시동 완료하기 14 UPS가 정상적으로 작동하고 있고 모든 부하가 전력을 공급받고 있음을 표시하는, 정상 아이콘 이 UPS 상태 요약 화면에 나타나는지 확인하십시오. 15 UPS 상태 요약 화면에서, 활성 경보나 통지를 확인하려면 버튼을 누르십시오. 후속 작업을 계속하기 전에 활성 경보를 처리하십시오. Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서의 "장애처리"를 참조하십시오. 활성 경보가 없을 경우, "활성 경보 없음" 메시지가 나타납니다. 16 기타 공장설정값을 변경하려면 Dell Line--Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, 1920/1500W 사용자 설명서의 "작동"을 참조하십시오.94 | 설치 및 시동Delltタワー型UPS 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.com注意および警告 注記: 「注記」は、ソフトウェアを有効に利用するための重要な情報を示しています。 危険: 「危険」は、回避しないとほぼ確実に死亡、または重傷を招く危険な状況を示しています。 警告: 「警告」は、回避しないと死亡、または重傷を招く潜在的に危険な状況を示しています。 注意: 「注意」は、回避しないと軽傷、または中程度の傷害を招く恐れがある潜在的に危険な状況を示 しています。 危険: 避しないとほぼ確実に死亡、または重傷を招く危険な状況を防ぐため、以下の説明をよくお読みくだ さい。 S このUPSの中には致死的な電圧が掛かっています。 すべての修理や点検は、公認のサービ ススタッフのみが行わなければいけません。 当資料の情報は、予告なく変更されることがあります。 E 2009 Dell Inc.無断複写・転載を禁じます。 Dell Inc.の書面による許可のない複写は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。. DellおよびDELLのロゴは、Dell Inc.の登録商標です:Phillipsは、Phillips Screw Companyの登録商標です。 本書に使用されているその他の登録商標および商標名は、商標や名称を主張する事業体、あるいは製品のいずれかに言及しま す。Dell Inc.は、Dell自身が所有する登録商標および商標権におけるいかなる所有権を一切放棄します。 2009年7月システムの特徴 | 97 システムの特徴 UPSは優れた性能や信頼性を提供し、以下のような独自の利点がございます: S 電圧変動を修正することで、負荷への一貫した電圧を保証する「昇降圧」電圧調節。 S 外部電力がないときでもUPSの電力を入れることができる始動電池の能力。 S 拡張ランタイムおよびオプションとして1000--1920W UPS型用 の外付けバッテリーモジュール(外付けバッテリーモジュール)付き。 S 2つの標準通信ポート(USBおよびDB--9シリアルポート)。 S オプションとして、増加電力の保護や制御を行う高度通信機能付きDell ネットワークマネージメントカード。 S サージからネットワーク通信装置を保護するネットワーク過度電流プロテクタ。 S スムースなシャットダウンや電力管理を行うDell UPS制御ソフトウェアおよび高度電力 管理。 S 負荷セグメントと呼ばれる個別のレセプタクルグループを通じた逐次シャットダウンおよび 負荷制御。 S カスタマーサービスに問い合わせる必要なく、 簡単にアップグレードができるファームウェア。 S 世界中の代理店の承認による支持。98 | 情報検出 情報検出 注意:: 安全、環境、規則に関する情報資料には、安全および規定に関する重要情報が含まれています。 どんな情報をお探しですか? こちらでご覧いただけます S UPSユーザーガイド S Dellネットワークマネージメントカード用の ユーザーガイド S Dell UPS制御ソフトウェア 注記:説明書およびソフトウェアの更新情報 は、support.dell.comでご確認いただけます。 Dell UPS ディスク S 仕様 S UPSの設定方法 S トラブルシューティングおよび問題の解決方法 Dell UPS ユーザーガイド ユーザーガイドはDell UPSディスクおよび support.dell.comで入手することができます。 S 安全に関する説明書 S 規則に関する情報 S リサイクルに関する情報 安全、環境、規則に関する情報 S 保証情報 S 使用上の条件(アメリカのみ) S エンドユーザー使用許諾契約 Dell 保証およびサポート情報 S サポート情報 Dell サポート用ウェブサイト ‒ support.dell.com 注意:使用する地域や事業区分を選択し、 適切なサポートサイトをご覧ください。インストールおよび設定 | 99 インストールおよび設定 注意:: 当資料の手順を実施する前に、安全、環境、規則に関する情報資料に記載されている安全に関す る説明書および重要な規制情報をご覧いただき、これらの情報に従ってください。 注意:: キャビネットの重量[500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)] 注意して開梱し、キャビネットを移動します。 このセクションは、最初におけるシステムの設定方法について説明しています。 システムの開梱 1 システムを開梱し、各項目を識別します。 2 責任を持ってパッケージを処分、またはリサイクルし、あるいは将来使えるように保管し ます。100 | インストールおよび設定 UPSの識別 このセクションは、Dellタワー型UPSのフロントパネルおよびリヤパネルを示しています。 リヤパネルの詳細に関しましては、Dellラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドをご参照ください。 カバー止め カバー止め LCDパネル スクロールボタン (上方向、または後方) 選択ボタン スクロールボタン (下方向、または前方) 図 1. Dellタワー型UPS 通信ポート 5-15レセプタクル 6個 (負荷セグメント1) ネットワーク過度 電流プロテクタ USBポート カバーを取り外します オン/オフボタン IEC-C14 入力コネクタ 5-15レセプタクル 2個 EMB コネクタ (負荷セグメント2) 図 2. UPSリヤパネル(1000W、120Vリヤパネル)インストールおよび設定 | 101 UPSのフロントカバーの取り外し方法 3 UPSのフロントカバーを取り外します。 2個のカバー止めを押し、フロントカバーを開放し、引き上げます。 バッテリーカバーの取り外し方 4 金属製バッテリーカバーの蝶ネジを外し、カバーを持ち上げて取り外します。102 | インストールおよび設定 内臓バッテリーコネクタの接続方法 5 内臓バッテリーコネクタを接続します。 6 金属製バッテリーカバーを取り外します。 ネジを0.7 N·m (6.2 lb in)のトルクで締めます。 7 UPSフロントカバーを取り外します。インストールおよび設定 | 103 装置の接続方法 9 装置をUPSへ接続 コンピューターからUPSへの通信 ケーブルを接続(オプション) 8 8 Dell UPS制御ソフトウェアを使用する場合は、同梱のケーブルを使って、 コンピューターをUSBポートやRS--232ポートへ接続してください。 9 保護する装置をUPS出力レセプタクルに差し込みます。ただし保護装置の電源は入れない でください。 注記:: 過負荷アラームを防ぐため、装置の定格の合計がUPSの容量を超えていないか確認してください。104 | インストールおよび設定 電源コードの接続方法 10 UPSへの電源入力には、電源コードの定格電流に従い、逆流過電流保護があるか確認して ください。 11 UPSへの電源入力には、十分な逆流過電流保護があるか確認してください。 表 1. 上流遮断機最小定格 UPS出力 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (100V時) 1920W 20A — 15A 12 UPSの電源コードを電源コンセントに差し込みます。インストールおよび設定 | 105 UPSの起動方法 13 UPSのリヤパネルの ボタンを押します。 起動の完了 14 UPSが正常に動作し、負荷電力があることを示す「正常」アイコン がUPSのステータス 要約画面に現れていることをお確かめください。 15 アクティブになっているアラームや通知を確かめるには、UPSステータス要約画面の ボタ ンを押します。 続ける前に、アクティブになっているアラームを解消してください。Dell ラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドの 「トラブルシューティング」をご参照ください。 アクティブになっているアラームがない場合は、「アクティブアラームなし」と表示され たメッセージが現れます。 16 その他の工場出荷時設定の変更は、Dellラインインタラクティブ式ラック 500W、1000W、および1920/1500W ユーザーガイドの「操作方法」をご参照ください。106 | インストールおよび設定*1642018091* 164201809 1 Dell Multi-UPS Management Console and UPS Local Node Manager Software Version 01.06 User Guide Update MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update December 2012 2 Operating Systems supported by MUMC and ULNM MUMC and ULNM v01.06 support the following systems: Operating system MUMC ULNM Service Pack Platform Software version Service Pack Platform Software version x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 Windows Server 2012 Windows Small Business Server 2012 Standard Latest √ √ Latest √ √ Windows Server 2011 Windows Small Business Server 2011 Standard Latest √ √ √ Latest √ √ √ Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter SP1 √ √ √ SP1 √ √ √ Windows Server 2008 R1 Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter SP2 √ √ √ √ SP2 √ √ √ √ Windows Server 2008 Small Business Server R2 Latest √ √ √ √ Latest √ √ √ √ Windows Server 2008 Small Business Server Latest √ √ √ √ Latest √ √ √ √ Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter R2 SP2 √ √ √ √ SP2 √ √ √ √ Windows Server 2003 Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter R1 SP1 √ √ √ √ SP1 √ √ √ √ Windows Small Business Server 2003 Standard, Enterprise, Premium R2 Latest √ √ √ Latest √ √ √ Windows 8 Windows 8 (Enterprise, Premium, Professional, Ultimate, Basic) Latest √ √ Latest √ √ Windows 7 Windows 7 (Enterprise, Premium, Professional, Ultimate, Basic) SP1 √ √ √ √ SP1 √ √ √ √ Windows Vista Windows Vista (Enterprise, Ultimate, Business) SP2 √ √ √ √ SP2 √ √ √ √ Windows XP Windows XP Professional SP3 √ √ √ SP3 √ √ √ RedHat Enterprise Linux Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 √ √ √ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.2 √ √ √ √ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.9 √ √ √ √ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.8 √ √ √ √ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.7 √ √ √ √ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Advanced Platform 5.4 (Latest U7 √ √ √ √MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update December 2012 3 Update) Red Hat Enterprise Linux Base Server 5.4 (Latest Update) U7 √ √ √ √ Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 5 U6 √ √ √ √ Fedora core 15 √ √ √ √ Fedora core 14 √ √ √ √ SUSE/Novel SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 SP2 √ √ √ √ SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 SP1 √ √ √ √ SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP4 √ √ √ √ OpenSuse 11.4 √ √ √ √ OpenSuse 11.2 √ √ √ √ Debian GNU Linux Debian 6 (Squeeze) √ √ √ √ Debian 5 (Lenny) √ √ √ Ubuntu 12.10 √ √ √ √ 12.04 LTS √ √ √ √ 11.04 LTS √ √ √ √ 10.04 LTS √ √ √ √ Virtualization environments supported by MUMC and ULNM MUMC and ULNM v01.06 support the following environments: Virtualization Environment MUMC ULNM Service Pack Platform Software version Service Pack Platform Software version x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 VMware ESXi 5.1 (pay version only) √ √ √ √ ESXi 5.0 (pay version only) U1 √ √ √ U1 √ √ √ ESX 4.0 (pay version only) U4 √ √ √ U4 √ √ √ ESXi 4.1 (pay version only) U4 √ √ √ U4 √ √ √ ESX 4.0 (pay version only) √ √ √ √ √ √ ESXi 4.1 (pay version only) √ √ √ √ √ √ Microsoft HyperV Windows Hyper-V Server 2012 √ √ √ √ Windows Hyper-V Server 2008 R2 √ √ √ √ √ √ Windows Hyper-V Server 2008 √ √ √ √ √ √ Citrix XenServer 6.0 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ XenServer 5.6 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ OpenSource Xen 2.6 on RHEL 5 √ √ √ √ √ √ OpenSource Xen 3.2 on Debian 5 √ √ √ √ √ √ KVM KVM 0.12.1.2 on RHEL 6 and Debian 5 √ √ √ √ √ √MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update December 2012 4 Virtualization consoles and features supported by MUMC and ULNM MUMC and ULNM v01.06 support the following virtual environment consoles and features: Virtualization consoles and features MUMC ULNM Service Pack Platform Software version Service Pack Platform Software version x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 x86 x64 V1.04 V1.06 VMware console vCenter √ √ √ √ VMware feature vMotion √ √ √ √ vSphere √ Microsoft HyperV console SCVMM 2012 √ √ √ √ Microsoft HyperV feature LiveMigration √ √ √ √ Citrix console XenCenter √ √ √ √ Citrix feature XenMotion Live Migration √ √ √ √ Release notes MUMC and ULNM version 01.06 Operating systems updates compatibility:  Windows 8  Add new etoast notification tool for operating system providing Metro interface.  SCVMM 2012  ESXi 5.1  RedHat 6.3 Bug fixes:  Remove vCenter plugin does not remove MUMC tab in vCenter  Fix issue with IE10 (Windows 8) compatibility  Fix bad icon in Windows 8 task bar when notification popup is displayed  Fix a crash when special network interfaces are set. This crash has been reported in Red Hat 5.6 using a tuned interface created via openvpn. MUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update December 2012 5 MUMC and ULNM version 01.04 Usability enhancementsto the graphical userinterface  Systemtraymenu added (Windows) including ability to stop/startservice fromthe tray icon contextual menu  Improved alarmacknowledgement options, and audible alarmadded to notification events  Improved eventsorting options  Display of active powerin watts, not Volt‐Amps  UPS shutdown settingsmenu now available in shutdownmenu location Newfunctionality in the graphical userinterface  Improvedmass configuration ofmultipleDellUPSNetwork Cards andULNM agents  XML v4 implementation forimproved security  Improved reverse name resolution capabilitiesforULNM agents and hardware nodes  Enhanced detection of communication loss, which is now available as a shutdown criteria  Added ability to forceUDP or TCP subscription forNMC  MUMC now can be registered as “powered application” inNMC Web interface.  Database logs optimized to handle largerinstallations Expanded virtualization platform support and integration  XenCenter plugin  Force VM shutdown inHA clusters using Remote Virtual Machine Shutdown (RVMS)  Smoother operation of hostmanagementshutdown  Improved documentation for VMware setup Supportfortwo or moreUPSs powering redundant powersupply unit(PSU) devices  UPS software considersmultipleUPS battery status before reaching “low battery” status and shutting down servers.  Ability to create virtual composite groups ofUPSstomanage redundantinstallations as one device Support ofDell’s unique power metrics  Peak headroom, peak consumption, allmetrics now in Watts(W) and not Volt‐Amps(VA). Virtualization  Subscribe MUMC isshown as a “notified application” in theUPSNMC card when a VM host node has a UPS configured in MUMC. MicrosoftIntegration  Trigger vCenter vMotion™ and SCVMM Live Migration™ applications  Transparentlymove virtualmachinesfroma server affected by a powerinterruption to a non‐affected serverMUMC and ULNM Software v01.06 User Guide Update December 2012 6 Citrix integration  XenServer: Remote shutdown from MUMC,remotemaintenance from MUMC, can Add/Protect a XenServerin MUMC  XenCenter: Create an MUMC XenCenter plug‐in, agent‐less hostmanagementfrom MUMC, agent‐less XenMotion VMware integration  Removed the prerequisite of Pearl SDK installation for MUMC to communicate with VMware vCenter  New power events and alarmslogs created in VMware vCenter console  Added ability to force VM shutdown forHA clusters  Can now Add/Protect a standalone ESX/ESXi in MUMC without vCenter Linux Support  Added supportforlatest Linux distributions(seeUserGuide forfull list) Bug fixes:  Crash when emc2 runs out of resources (memory)  ULNM does not detect UPS connected with USB connectivity  Transfer to high efficiency mode not visible in the events list  MUMC may lose nodes, and generates alarms on non‐UPS SNMP devices  When a proxy client reaches shutdown time, all other proxy clients along with server get shut down  No communication lost after network cable is removed  Make sure Scan and communication behaves correctly when USB module is not present  Proxy: when changing power source, previous endpoint is not removed  MUMC upgrade will disable the "Set as Power Source"  ULNM in connected mode in Notified Applications of NMC  Event Pane in Power Source View is Off by One  Detect Lansafe, Netwatch, Lansafe Web View in the installer  Silent uninstall does not remove the install folder Other bug fixes and improvements:  Outlet management improvements  Scan sometime never stops  Removing devices hangs the server FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGCover.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 – FOR PROOF ONLY Template Last Updated -03/06/2010 Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series System User Guide Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548PNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your system. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, KACE™, FlexAddress™ and Vostro™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™ and Celeron® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD® is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, and AMD Sempron™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, MS-DOS® and Windows Vista® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat Enterprise Linux® and Enterprise Linux® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Novell® is a registered trademark and SUSE ™ is a trademark of Novell Inc. in the United States and other countries. Oracle® is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® and XenMotion® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter®, and vSphere® are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMWare, Inc. in the United States or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Models PC5524, PC5524P, PC5548 and PC5548P March 2013 A07FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 3 Contents 1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Stack Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Power over Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Green Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Head of Line Blocking Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Back Pressure Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Auto-Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 MDI/MDIX Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 MAC Address Supported Features . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Layer 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Broadcast Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 4 Contents VLAN Supported Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Spanning Tree Protocol Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Quality of Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Device Management Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Port Profile (CLI Macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Protected Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 iSCSI Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Proprietary Protocol Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Device Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Device Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 4 Stacking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Stack Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Stack Members and Unit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 5 5 Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Configuration Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting the Switch to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . 59 Booting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuring the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Configuration Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . 61 6 Advanced Switch Configuration . . . . . . . 67 Using the CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Accessing the Device Through the CLI . . . . . . . . . 71 Retrieving an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Security Management and Password Configuration . . 75 Configuring Login Banners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Startup Menu Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7 Using Dell OpenManage Administrator. . 87 Starting the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Understanding the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Using the Switch Administrator Buttons . . . . . . . . 91 Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Common GUI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 6 Contents GUI Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 8 Network Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ACL Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Proprietary Protocol Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Time Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Dot1x Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 9 Configuring System Information . . . . . . 155 General Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 IP Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Management Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 File Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Stack Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 7 sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 10 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Green Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Protected Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Port Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 LAG Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 11 Address Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Static Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Dynamic Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 12 GARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GARP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 GARP Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 8 Contents 13 Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Spanning Tree Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 435 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 STP Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 STP LAG Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Rapid Spanning Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Multiple Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 14 VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Virtual LAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 LAGs Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Protocol Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Protocol Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 GVRP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Private VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Voice VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 15 Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Link Aggregation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 LACP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 9 LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 16 Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Multicast Support Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Global Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Bridge Multicast Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Bridge Multicast Forward All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Unregistered Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Multicast TV VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 17 LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 LLDP Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 LLDP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 LLDP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 LLDP MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Neighbors Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 18 Dynamic ARP Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview. . . . . . . . . . . 561 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 10 Contents Dynamic ARP Inspection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries . . . . . . . . . . . 566 VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Trusted Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 19 DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 DHCP Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 20 iSCSI Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Optimizing iSCSI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 iSCSI Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Configuring iSCSI Using CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 21 Statistics/RMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Table Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 RMON Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm Contents 11 22 Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 QoS Features and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 QoS Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 QoS Advanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 QoS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintTOC.fm 12 ContentsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 13 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 1 Preface PowerConnect 5524/5548 and PowerConnect 5524P/5548P are stackable, advanced multi-layer devices. This guide contains the information needed for installing, configuring, and maintaining the device through the web-based management system, called the OpenManage Switch Administrator. This guide describes how to configure each system through the web-based management system and through CLI commands. The CLI Reference Guide, which is available on the Documentation CD, provides additional information about the CLI commands. 14 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGPrefix.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 15 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Features This section describes the features of the PowerConnect 5524/P and 5548/P switches. For a complete list of all updated device features, see the latest software version Release Notes. This section contains the following topics: • IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support • Stack Support • Power over Ethernet • Green Ethernet • Head of Line Blocking Prevention • Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) • Back Pressure Support • Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) • Auto-Negotiation • MDI/MDIX Support • MAC Address Supported Features • Layer 2 Features • IGMP Snooping • Port Mirroring • Broadcast Storm Control • VLAN Supported Features • Spanning Tree Protocol Features • Link Aggregation • Quality of Service Features • Quality of Service Features • Device Management Features16 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Security Features • DHCP Server • Protected Ports • iSCSI Optimization • Proprietary Protocol Filtering IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support The device functions as an IPv6-compliant host, as well as an IPv4 host (also known as dual stack). This enables device operation in a pure IPv6 network as well as in a combined IPv4/IPv6 network. For more information, see "IP Addressing" on page 209. Stack Support The system supports up to eight units with two fixed HDMI stacking ports. The HDMI ports are 1.3a specification, Category 2 High Speed cables, 340 MHz (10.2 Gbit/s). it is recommended to use HDMI cable version 1.4 The stacking feature supports the following features: • Fast-link failover • Software auto-synch. • Improved response time to events, such as master failover • Auto-numbering algorithm when choosing unit number For more information, see "Stacking Overview" on page 45 Power over Ethernet Power over Ethernet (PoE) provides power to devices over existing LAN cabling, without updating or modifying the network infrastructure. When PoE is used, the network devices do not have to be placed next to a power source. PoE can be used in the following applications: • IP Phones • Wireless Access PointsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 17 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • IP Gateways • PDAs • Audio and video remote monitoring For more information, see "Power over Ethernet" on page 162. Green Ethernet Green Ethernet, also known as Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE), is an effort to make networking equipment environmentally friendly, by reducing the power usage of Ethernet connections. The Short-Reach method, which reduces power over Ethernet cables shorter than 40m, is supported by the device. For more information, see "Green Ethernet Configuration" on page 390. Head of Line Blocking Prevention Head of Line (HOL) blocking results in traffic delays and frame loss caused by traffic competing for the same egress port resources. To prevent HOL blocking, the device queues packets, and packets at the head of the queue are forwarded before packets at the end of the queue. Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) Flow control enables lower-speed devices to communicate with higher-speed devices, by requesting that the higher-speed device refrain from sending packets. Transmissions are temporarily halted to prevent buffer overflows. For more information, see "Flow Control" on page 386. Back Pressure Support On half-duplex links, the receiving port prevents buffer overflows by occupying the link so that it is unavailable for additional traffic. For more information, see "Protected Ports" on page 394.18 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Virtual Cable Testing (VCT) VCTdetects and reports copper link cabling faults, such as open cables and cable shorts. For more information, see "Diagnostics" on page 255. Auto-Negotiation Auto-negotiation enables the device to advertise modes of operation. The auto-negotiation function enables an exchange of information between two devices that share a point-to-point link segment, and automatically configures both devices to take maximum advantage of their transmission capabilities. The PowerConnect 5500 series enhances auto-negotiation by providing port advertisement. Port advertisement enables the system administrator to configure the port speeds that are advertised. For more information, see "Port Configuration" on page 403 or "LAG Configuration" on page 409. MDI/MDIX Support Standard wiring for end stations is known as Media-Dependent Interface (MDI), and standard wiring for hubs and switches is known as MediaDependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX). If auto-negotiation is enabled, the device automatically detects whether the cable connected to an RJ-45 port is MDIX (crossed) or MDI (straight). This enables both types to be used interchangeably. If auto-negotiation is not enabled, only MDI (straight) cables can be used. For more information, see "Port Configuration" on page 403 or "LAG Configuration" on page 409. MAC Address Supported Features MAC Address Capacity Support The device supports up to 16K MAC addresses and it reserves specific MAC addresses for system use.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 19 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Static MAC Entries MAC entries can be manually entered in the Bridging Table, as an alternative to learning them from incoming frames. These user-defined entries are not subject to aging, and are preserved across resets and reboots. For more information, see "Static Addresses" on page 424. Self-Learning MAC Addresses The device enables controlled MAC address learning from incoming packets. The MAC addresses are stored in the Bridging Table. For more information, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427. Automatic Aging for MAC Addresses MAC addresses from which no traffic is received for a given period, are aged out. This prevents the Bridging Table from overflowing. For more information, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427. VLAN-Aware MAC-Based Switching The device always performs VLAN-aware bridging. Classic bridging (IEEE802.1D), in which frames are forwarded based only on their destination MAC address, is not performed. However, a similar functionality can be configured for untagged frames. Frames addressed to a destination MAC address that is not associated with any port are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN. MAC Multicast Support Multicast service is a limited Broadcast service that enables one-to-many and many-to-many connections for information distribution. In Layer 2 Multicast service, a single frame is addressed to a specific Multicast address, from which copies of the frame are transmitted to the relevant ports. When Multicast groups are statically enabled, you can set the destination port of registered groups, as well as define the behavior of unregistered Multicast frames. For more information, see "Multicast" on page 516.20 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Layer 2 Features IGMP Snooping Internet Group Membership Protocol (IGMP) Snooping examines IGMP frame contents, when they are forwarded by the device from work stations to an upstream Multicast router. From the frame, the device identifies work stations configured for Multicast sessions, and which Multicast routers are sending Multicast frames. The IGMP Querier simulates the behavior of a Multicast router. This enables snooping of the Layer 2 Multicast domain even if there is no Multicast router. For more information, see "IGMP Snooping" on page 527. Port Mirroring Port mirroring monitors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from a monitored port to a monitoring port. Users specify which target port receives copies of all traffic passing through a specified source port. For more information, see "Port Mirroring" on page 417. Broadcast Storm Control Storm Control enables limiting the number of Multicast and Broadcast frames accepted by and forwarded by the device. When Layer 2 frames are forwarded, Broadcast and Multicast frames are flooded to all ports on the relevant VLAN. This occupies bandwidth, and loads all nodes connected on all ports. For more information, see "Storm Control" on page 414.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 21 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Supported Features VLAN Support VLANs are collections of switching ports that comprise a single Broadcast domain. Packets are classified as belonging to a VLAN, based on either the VLAN tag or on a combination of the ingress port and packet contents. Packets sharing common attributes can be grouped in the same VLAN. For more information, see "VLANs" on page 466. Port-Based Virtual LANs (VLANs) Port-based VLANs classify incoming packets to VLANs, based on their ingress port. For more information, see "Defining VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands" on page 473. Full 802.1Q VLAN Tagging Compliance IEEE 802.1Q defines an architecture for virtual, bridged LANs, the services provided in VLANs, and the protocols and algorithms involved in the provision of these services. For more information, see "Virtual LAN Overview" on page 467. GVRP Support GARP VLAN Registration Protocol(GVRP) provides IEEE 802.1Qcompliant VLAN pruning and dynamic VLAN creation. When GVRP is enabled, the device registers and propagates VLAN membership on all ports that are part of the active underlying Spanning Tree Protocol topology. For more information, see "GVRP Parameters" on page 490. Voice VLAN Voice VLAN enables network administrators to enhance VoIP service by configuring ports to carry IP voice traffic from IP phones on a specific VLAN. VoIP traffic has a preconfigured OUI prefix in the source MAC address. Network administrators can configure VLANs from which voice IP traffic is 22 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY forwarded. Non-VoIP traffic is dropped from the Voice VLAN in Auto-Voice VLAN Secure mode. Voice VLAN also provides QoS to VoIP, ensuring that the quality of voice does not deteriorate if the IP traffic is received unevenly. For more information, see "Voice VLAN" on page 498. Guest VLAN Guest VLAN provides limited network access to unauthorized ports. If a port is denied network access via port-based authorization, but the Guest VLAN is enabled, the port receives limited network access through the Guest VLAN. For more information, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132. Private VLAN The Private VLAN feature provides Layer 2 isolation between ports that share the same Broadcast domain, or in other words, it creates a point-tomultipoint Broadcast domain. The ports can be located anywhere in the Layer 2 network (compared to the Protected Ports feature, where the ports must be in the same stack). For more information, see "Private VLAN" on page 494. Multicast TV VLAN The Multicast TV VLAN feature provides the ability to supply multicast transmissions to Layer 2-isolated subscribers, without replicating the multicast transmissions for each subscriber VLAN. The subscribers are the only receivers of the multicast transmissions. For more information, see "Multicast TV VLAN" on page 535. Spanning Tree Protocol Features Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802.1d Spanning tree is a standard Layer 2 switch requirement that enables bridges to automatically prevent and resolve Layer 2 forwarding loops. Switches exchange configuration messages using specifically-formatted frames, and selectively enable and disable forwarding on ports. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 23 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Fast Link STP can take 30–60 seconds to converge. During this time, STP detects possible loops, enabling time for status changes to propagate and for relevant devices to respond. This period of 30-60 seconds is considered too long a response time for many applications. The Fast Link option bypasses this delay, and can be used in network topologies, where forwarding loops do not occur. For more information on enabling Fast Link for ports and LAGs, see "STP Port Settings" on page 442 or "Static Addresses" on page 424. IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree takes 30–60 seconds for each host to decide whether its ports are actively forwarding traffic. Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) detects uses of network topologies to enable faster convergence, without creating forwarding loops. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) operation maps VLANs into STP instances. MSTP provides a different load balancing scenario. Packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along different paths within MSTP Regions (MST Regions). Regions are one or more MSTP bridges by which frames can be transmitted. The standard lets administrators assign VLAN traffic to unique paths. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434. STP BPDU Guard BPDU Guard is used as a security mechanism, to protect the network from invalid configurations. BPDU Guard is usually used either when fast link ports (ports connected to clients) are enabled or when the STP feature is disabled. When it is enabled on a port, the port is shut down if a BPDU message is received and an appropriate SNMP trap is generated. For more information, see "Spanning Tree" on page 434.24 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Link Aggregation Up to 32 Aggregated Links may be defined, each with up to eight member ports, to form a single Link Aggregated Group (LAG). This enables: • Fault tolerance protection from physical link disruption • Higher bandwidth connections • Improved bandwidth granularity • High bandwidth server connectivity A LAG is composed of ports with the same speed, set to full-duplex operation. For more information, see "LAG Configuration" on page 409. Link Aggregation and LACP LACP uses peer exchanges across links to determine, on an ongoing basis, the aggregation capability of various links, and continuously provides the maximum level of aggregation capability achievable between a given pair of devices. LACP automatically determines, configures, binds, and monitors the port binding within the system. For more information, see "Link Aggregation" on page 508. BootP and DHCP Clients DHCP enables additional setup parameters to be received from a network server upon system startup. DHCP service is an on-going process. DHCP is an extension of BootP. For more information, see "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. Quality of Service Features Class of Service 802.1p Support The IEEE 802.1p signaling technique is an OSI Layer 2 standard for marking and prioritizing network traffic at the data link/MAC sub-layer. 802.1p traffic is classified and sent to the destination. No bandwidth reservations or limits Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 25 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY are established or enforced. 802.1p is a spin-off of the 802.1Q (VLANs) standard. 802.1p establishes eight levels of priority, similar to the IP Precedence IP Header bit-field. Advanced QoS Frames that match an ACL and were permitted entrance are implicitly labeled with the name of the ACL that permitted their entrance. Advanced mode QoS actions defined in network policies can then be applied to these flows. The switch can set DSCP values and map IPv6 DSCP to egress queues in the same way it does for IPv4. The switch detects IPv6 frames by the IPv6 ethertype. For more information about Advanced QoS, see "QoS Advanced Mode" on page 678. TCP Congestion Avoidance The TCP Congestion Avoidance feature activates an algorithm that breaks up or prevents TCP global synchronization on a congested node, where the congestion is due to multiple sources sending packets with the same byte count. For more information, see "The following is an example of the CLI commands:" on page 666. Device Management Features SNMP Alarms and Trap Logs The system logs events with severity codes and timestamps. Events are sent as SNMP traps to a Trap Recipient List. For more information, see "SNMP" on page 314.26 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP Versions 1, 2, and 3 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) over the UDP/IP protocol controls access to the system. A list of community entries is defined, each consisting of a community string and its access privileges. There are three levels of SNMP security: read-only, read-write, and super. Only a super user can access the Community table. For more information, see "SNMP" on page 314. Web-Based Management Web-based management enables managing the system from any web browser. The system contains an Embedded Web Server (EWS) that serves HTML pages, through which the system can be monitored and configured. The system internally converts web-based input into configuration commands, MIB variable settings, and other management-related settings. Management IP Address Conflict Notification This feature validates the uniqueness of the switch's IP address, whether it is assigned manually or through DHCP. If the IP address is not unique, the switch performs actions according to the address type. If the IP address is static, see more information about this in "IPv4 Interface Parameters" on page 210. If the IP address is dynamic, see more information about this in"DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. Flow Monitoring (sflow) The switch supports statistics collection, using a sampling technology called sFlow that is based on RFC 3176. The sFlow sampling technology is embedded within the switch, and provides the ability to continuously monitor traffic flows on some or all the interfaces simultaneously. For more information, see "sFlow" on page 375. Configuration File Download and Upload The device configuration is stored in a configuration file. The configuration file includes both system-wide and port-specific device configuration. The system can display configuration files as a collection of CLI commands that are stored and manipulated as text files.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 27 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Auto-Update of Configuration/Image File This feature facilitates installation of new devices. When you enable the various auto-update options, the device automatically downloads a new image or configuration file when it receives its IP address from a TFTP server, and automatically reboots, using the image or configuration file it received. For more information, see "Auto-Update/Configuration Feature" on page 338. TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol The device supports boot image, software, and configuration upload/download via TFTP. USB File Transfer Protocol The device supports boot image, software, and configuration upload/download via USB. Remote Monitoring Remote Monitoring (RMON) is an extension to SNMP that provides comprehensive network traffic monitoring capabilities. RMON is a standard MIB that defines MAC-layer statistics and control objects, enabling real-time information to be captured across the entire network. For more information, see "Statistics/RMON" on page 606. Command Line Interface Command Line Interface (CLI) syntax and semantics conform as much as possible to common, industry standards. CLI is composed of mandatory and optional elements. The CLI interpreter provides command and keyword completion to assist users and save typing. Syslog Syslog is a protocol that enables event notifications to be sent to a set of remote servers, where they can be stored, examined, and acted upon. The system sends notifications of significant events in real time, and keeps a record of these events for after-the-fact usage. For more information on Syslog, see "Logs" on page 195.28 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNTP The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) assures accurate network Ethernet Switch clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. Time sources are prioritized by strata. Strata define the distance from the reference clock. The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. For more information, see "Time Synchronization" on page 169. Domain Name System Domain Name System (DNS) converts user-defined domain names into IP addresses. Each time a domain name is assigned, the DNS service translates the name into a numeric IP address. For example, www.ipexample.com is translated into 192.87.56.2. DNS servers maintain domain name databases containing their corresponding IP addresses. For more information, see "Domain Name System" on page 242. 802.1ab (LLDP-MED) The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables network managers to troubleshoot, and enhances network management by discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. LLDP discovers network neighbors by standardizing methods for network devices to advertise themselves to other systems, and to store discovered information. The multiple advertisement sets are sent in the packet Type Length Value (TLV) field. LLDP devices must support chassis and port ID advertisement, as well as system name, system ID, system description, and system capability advertisements. LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) increases network flexibility by enabling various IP systems to co-exist on a single network LLDP. It provides detailed network topology information, emergency call service via IP phone location information, and troubleshooting information. For more information, see "LLDP" on page 540.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 29 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Security Features SSL Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure transactions of data through privacy, authentication, and data integrity. It relies upon certificates and public and private keys. Port-Based Authentication (Dot1x) Port-based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port basis via an external server. Only authenticated and approved system users can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) enables network administrators to automatically assign users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication. For more information, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132. Locked Port Support Locked Port increases network security by limiting access on a specific port to users with specific MAC addresses. These addresses are either manually defined or learned on that port. When a frame is seen on a locked port, and the frame source MAC address is not tied to that port, the protection mechanism is invoked. For more information, see "Port Security" on page 98. RADIUS Client RADIUS is a client/server-based protocol. A RADIUS server maintains a user database that contains per-user authentication information, such as user name, password, and accounting information. RADIUS Accounting This feature enables recording device management sessions (Telnet, serial, and WEB but not SNMP) and/or 802.1x authentication sessions.30 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Due to the complexity of 802.1x setup and configuration, many mistakes can be made that might cause loss of connectivity or incorrect behavior. The 802.1x Monitor mode enables applying 802.1x functionality to the switch, with all necessary RADIUS and/or domain servers active, without actually taking any action that may cause unexpected behavior. In this way, the user can test the 802.1x setup before actually applying it. For more information, see "RADIUS" on page 291. SSH Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to a device. SSH version 2 is currently supported. The SSH server feature enables an SSH client to establish a secure, encrypted connection with a device. This connection provides functionality that is similar to an inbound telnet connection. SSH uses RSA and DSA Public Key cryptography for device connections and authentication. For more information, see "Security Management and Password Configuration" on page 75. TACACS+ TACACS+ provides centralized security for validation of users accessing the device. TACACS+ provides a centralized, user management system, while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes. For more information, see "TACACS+" on page 282. Password Management Password management provides increased network security and improved password control. Passwords for SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, and SNMP access are assigned security features. For more information, see "Password Management" on page 286. The switch provides the ability to demand strong passwords, meaning that they must contain both upper and lower-case letters, numbers, and punctuation marks. For more information, see "Password Management" on page 286.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 31 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Access Control Lists (ACL) Access Control Lists (ACL) enable network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress ports. Packets entering an ingress port with an active ACL, are either admitted or denied entry and the ingress port is disabled. If they are denied entry, the user can disable the port. Dynamic ACL/Dynamic Policy Assignment (DACL/DPA) The network administrator can specify the user's ACL in the RADIUS server. After successful authentication, the user is assigned that ACL. For more information, see "Network Security" on page 97. DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping expands network security by providing firewall security between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. By enabling DHCP Snooping, network administrators can differentiate between trusted interfaces connected to end-users or DHCP servers and untrusted interfaces located beyond the network firewall. For more information, see "DHCP Snooping" on page 573. ARP Inspection Dynamic ARP inspection is a security feature that validates ARP packets in a network. It intercepts, logs, and discards ARP packets with invalid IP-to-MAC address bindings. This capability protects the network from certain man-inthe-middle attacks. Port Profile (CLI Macro) Macros provide a convenient way to save and share a common configuration. A macro is a set of CLI commands with a unique name. When a macro is applied to a port, the CLI commands contained within it are executed and added to the Running Configuration file. For more information, see "Dynamic ARP Inspection" on page 560.32 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Server Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides a means of passing configuration information (including the IP address of a TFTP server and a configuration file name) to hosts on a TCP/IP network. The switch can serve as a DHCP server or client. For more information on the device serving as a DHCP server, see "DHCP Server" on page 297. For more information on the device serving as a DHCP client, see "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. Protected Ports The Protected Ports feature provides Layer 2 isolation between interfaces (Ethernet ports and LAGs) that share the same Broadcast domain (VLAN) with other interfaces. For more information, see "Protected Ports" on page 394. iSCSI Optimization iSCSI optimization provides the iSCSI flows with specific priority over other network traffic. In addition, the feature provides monitoring of iSCSI sessions. For more information, see "iSCSI Optimization" on page 594. Proprietary Protocol Filtering This feature enables user control over the filtering of packets with proprietary protocols such as CDP, VTP, DTP, UDLD, PaGP, and SSTP. The user can select any combination of the protocols to be filtered, for example: CDP and VTP and UDLD. For more information, see "Network Security" on page 97. DHCP Relay and Option 82 A DHCP relay agent detects DHCP Broadcasts from DHCP clients and relays them to DHCP servers that may reside on different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 33 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The relay agent information option (Option 82) in the DHCP protocol enables a DHCP relay agent to send additional client information, upon requesting an IP address. Option 82 specifies the relaying switch's MAC address, the port identifier, and the VLAN that forwarded the packet. For more information, see "DHCP Relay" on page 586. Identifying a Switch via LED The switch provides the ability to turn on a LED (through the GUI interface) on a specific unit or on all units in a stack for a specific length of time. For more information, see Unit Identification (Location).34 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGFeatures.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 35 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Hardware Description This section describes PowerConnect 5500 hardware. It contains the following topics: • Device Models • Device Structure • LED Definitions • Power Supplies36 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Device Models The PowerConnect 5500 switches combine versatility with minimal management requirements. This series includes the following device types: • PowerConnect 5524 — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports • PowerConnect 5524P (with PoE) — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports, along with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) support • PowerConnect 5548 — Provides 48 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports • PowerConnect 5548P (with PoE) — Provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Base-T ports, along with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) support Each of these devices provides, in addition to the above ports, two HDMI ports, two SPF+ ports, an RS-232 console port, and a USB port, as shown in Figure 3-1. NOTE: 10/100/1000Mbps Baset-T ports are also known as Gigabit ports or G ports. Device Structure This section describes the structure of the devices. It contains the following topics: • Front Panel • Buttons and LEDs • Back Panel • Ventilation System • System LEDs • Port LEDsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 37 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Front Panel Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the PowerConnect 5548 device with its various ports labelled. The PowerConnect 5524 device from the PowerConnect 5548 device in that there are 24 G ports and not 48. Figure 3-2 shows the buttons/LEDs on the right side in greater detail. Figure 3-1. PowerConnect 5548 Ports The following ports are found on the devices. • 24/48 G Ports • Two XG Ports (also known as Small Form Factor Plugable (SFP)+ Ports) These are 10 Gigabit ports, designated as 1000Base-X-SFP+. The SFP+ ports are fiber transceivers designated as 10000 Base-SX or LX. They include TWSI (Two-Wire Serial Interface) and internal EPROM. • RS-232 Console Port This port is used for a terminal connection for debugging and software downloads. The default baud rate is 9,600 bps. The baud rate can be configured from 2400 bps up to 115,200 bps. • Two HDMI Ports The HDMI ports are 1.3a specification, category 2 high-speed cables, 340 MHz (10.2 Gbit/s). They are used for stacking purposes. Console SPF+ Ports USB Port HDMI Ports Giga Ports (even numbered) Port Giga Ports (odd numbered)38 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY NOTE: it is recommended to use HDMI cable version 1.4 • Single USB Port This port is used for firmware upgrade from a USB device. Buttons and LEDs LEDs on Front Panel Figure 3-2 shows the extreme, right-hand part of the front panel, which contains buttons and LEDs, in addition to ports. Figure 3-2. Button/LED Panel These LEDs are described in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. Reset Button The PowerConnect 5500 switches have a reset button, located on the front panel that is used for manual reset (reboot) of the device. The single reset circuit of the switch is activated by power-up or low-voltage conditions. Power Status Fan RPS Reset Stacking Unit ID Master Port LEDs Console PortDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 39 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The Reset button does not extend beyond the unit’s front, and it must be activated with a pin. Back Panel The back panel of the non-PoE models, shown in Figure 3-3, contains a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) connector, Location LED, and power connector. The back panel of the PoE models, shown in Figure 3-4, contains a Modular Power Supply (MPS) connector, Location LED, power connector, and two fan outlets. Figure 3-3. PowerConnect 5524/48 Back Panel Figure 3-4. PowerConnect 5524/48/P Back Panel The elements on the back panel are used as follows: • Locator LED — This LED is lit when the Unit Identification feature is selected. See "Unit Identification (Location)" on page 373 for more information about this feature. • RPS/MPS — Connector for auxiliary power supply. See "Power Supplies" on page 44 for more information. RPS A/C Power Supply Locator Locator MPS Fan Fan A/C Power Supply40 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • A/C Power Supply — Connector for AC power supply. See "Power Supplies" on page 44 for more information. • Fans — Fan outlets. See "Ventilation System" on page 40 for more information. Ventilation System The PowerConnect 5500/P switches have two built-in fans. Operation can be verified by observing the LED that indicates if one or more fans are faulty (see Table 3-1). The fan outlets are shown in Figure 3-4. LED Definitions The front panel contains light emitting diodes(LEDs) that indicate the status of links, power supplies, fans, and system diagnostics. These are described below. System LEDs The system LEDs of the PowerConnect 5500 devices provide information about the power supplies, fans, thermal conditions, and diagnostics. Figure 3-2 shows the location of the system LEDS on the device. Table 3-1 describes the meaning of the colors of the system LEDs. Table 3-1. System LED Indicators LED Color Description Power Supply (PWR) Green Static The switch is turned on. Green Flashing The Locator function is enabled. Off The switch is turned off. Status Green Static The switch is operating normally. Green Flashing The switch is booting. Red Static A critical system error has occurred. Red Flashing A non-critical system error has occurred.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 41 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stacking No. Indicates the unit ID of the device in the stack. Modular/Redundan cy Power Supply (MPS/RPS) Green Static The MPS/RPS is currently operating. Red Static The MPS/RPS failed. Off The MPS/RPS is not plugged in. Locator Green Flashing Locator function is enabled. Green Static Locator function is disabled. Master Green Static The device is a master unit. Off The device is not a master unit. Fan (FAN) Green Static All device fans are operating normally. Red Static One or more of the device fans are not operating. Table 3-1. System LED Indicators (Continued) LED Color Description 42 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port LEDs Gigabit Ports Each Giga port has two LEDs associated with it. The speed/link (LNK) LED is located on the left side of the port, while the activity/PoE LED is located on the right side of the port. The activity/PoE LED is labelled ACT in non-PoE devices, and is labelled PoE in PoE-enabled devices, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5. Giga Port LEDs Table 3-2 describes the LED indications for the Gigabit ports: Table 3-2. Giga Port s on non-PoE-enabled Devices LEDs LED Color Description LNK Green Flashing Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving at 1000 Mbs. Yellow Flashing Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps. Solid green Solid amber Link is up high speed. Link is up at lower speeds. OFF The port is currently not operating. ACT Green Flashing There is activity on the port. Off There is no activity on the port. LNK ACT/PoE LNK ACT/PoEDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 43 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Table 3-3 describes the LED indications for Gigabit ports on PoE-enabled devices. HDMI Port LEDs The HDMI ports have a Speed/link (LNK) LED on their left side and an activity (ACT) LED on their right side. Table 3-4 describes the HDMP port LEDs: Table 3-3. Giga Port s on PoE-enabled Devices LEDs LED Color Description LNK Flashing green Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving at 1000 Mbs. Flashing amber Link is up and the port is either transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps. Solid green Solid amber Link is up high speed. Link is up at lower speeds. Off Port is currently not operating. PoE Flashing green There is activity on the port and the PoE is off. Flashing amber There is activity on the port and the PoE is on. Amber solid There is no activity on the port and the PoE power is on. Off There is no activity on the port and the PoE is off. Table 3-4. HDMI (Stacking) Port LEDs LED Color Description Speed/Link Solid green Port is linked to device. Off Port is currently not operating. ACT Flashing green Port is either transmitting or receiving. Off Port is not transmitting or receiving.44 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGHardware.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SFP LEDs The SFP+ ports each have two LEDs, marked as LNK and ACT, associated with them. Figure 3-5 describes these LEDs. Stack ID LED The front panel of the device contains a Stack ID panel used to display the Unit ID for the Stack Master and members, as shown in Figure 3-2. Power Supplies The device has an internal power supply unit (AC unit) and a connector to connect PowerConnect 5500/P devices to a PowerConnect EPS-470 unit, or to a PowerConnect MPS-600 unit. The PowerConnect 5500/P devices have the following internal power supplies: • 24 Port non-PoE devices — 54 Watt. • 48 Port non-PoE devices — 100 Watt. • 24/48 Port PoE devices — 600 Watt. Operation with both power supply units is regulated through load sharing. Power supply LEDs indicate the status of the power supply. The AC power supply unit operates from 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz. The AC power supply unit uses a standard connector. A LED, shown in Figure 3-3, indicates whether the AC unit is connected. When the device is connected to a supplementary power source, the probability of failure in the event of a power outage decreases. Table 3-5. SFP Port LEDs LED Color Description LNK Solid green Link is at highest speed. Solid amber Link is at lowest speed. Off Port is currently not linked. ACT Flashing green Port is either transmitting or receiving.Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 45 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 Stacking Overview This section describes how the Stacking feature of the PowerConnect 5500 series functions. It contains the following topics: • Stack Overview • Stack Members and Unit IDs46 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stack Overview The PowerConnect 5500 Stacking feature provides multiple switch management through a single switch, so that all units in the stack are treated as if they were a single switch. All stack members are accessed through the management IP address, through which the stack is managed. Each switch is a member in a stack, although the stack may consist of only a single switch. Up to eight units can be stacked. This section covers the following topics: • Stack Operation Modes • Stacking Units • Stack Topology Stack Operation Modes All stacks must have a Master unit, and may have a Master Backup unit. All other units are connected to the stack as members (slaves). A unit in the stack can be in one of the following modes: • Stack Master — Runs the fully operational software of a switch. In addition, it runs configures and manages all other units in the stack. All protocols run in the context of the Master unit. It is responsible for updating and synchronizing the Master Backup. The Stack Master detects and reconfigures the ports with minimal operational impact in the event of: Unit failure Inter-unit stacking link failure Unit insertion Unit removal When the Master unit boots, or when inserting or removing a stack member, the Master unit initiates a stacking discovering process. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 47 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Slave Unit — Runs a slave version of the software that enables the applications running on the Master’s CPU to control and manage the resources of the slave unit. • Master Backup — Runs as a slave unit, as described above, and in addition, continuously monitors the existence and operation of the stack master. If the master unit fails, the master-backup unit assumes the Master Backup role. Stacking Units PowerConnect 5500 series switches use two HDMI 10G ports for stacking. To connect the units in the stack: 1 Insert one end of an HDMI cable into the left-hand HDMI port on the unit at the top of the stack and the other end into the right-hand HDMI port of the unit immediately below it (this is called crossover). 2 Repeat this process until all units are connected. 3 (Optional) Connect the left-hand HDMI port of the unit at the bottom of the stack to the right-hand HDMI port of the unit at the top of the stack. This step provides increased bandwidth and redundancy.48 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The results of this process are shown in Figure . Figure 4-1. Stacking Ring Topology HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel Front Panel HDMI PortsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 49 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stack Topology The PowerConnect 5500 series systems operates in a ring or chain topology. Ring Topology In a ring topology all units in the stack are connected to each other, forming a circle. Each unit in the stack accepts data and sends it to the unit to which it is attached. The packet continues through the stack until it reaches its destination. The system discovers the optimal path on which to send traffic. Figure 4-1 shows units of a stack connected in a ring topology. Stacking Failover Topology - Chain Topology Difficulties occur when a unit in the ring becomes non-functional, or a link is severed. In this case, the system automatically switches to a chain topology, without any system downtime. In chain topology, each unit in the stack is connected to neighboring unit except for the last unit, which is not connected to any other unit. In the chain topology, the stack continues to function as long as there is a master- or backup-enabled unit in each segment of the stack. When the ring topology is switched to chain topology, an SNMP message is automatically generated, but no stack management action is required. The unit that failed must be repaired to restore full stacking operation in the ring topology. After the stacking issues are resolved, the units can be reconnected without interruption, and the ring topology is restored. Stack Members and Unit IDs This section describes how to configure the stack. It contains the following topics: • Adding a Unit to the Stack • Assigning Unit IDs • Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units • Switching from the Master to the Master Backup • Replacing Stacking Members50 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Loading Software onto Stack Members • Rebooting the Stack • Managing Configuration Files on the Stack Adding a Unit to the Stack The recommended procedure to add a unit to a stack is as follows: 1 Place the powered-off unit in its physical place in the stack, and insert the stacking link in the unit (but do not connect it to the rest of the stack). 2 Power up the unit, and set the correct Unit ID, as described below. 3 Reboot the unit and connect it to the rest of the stack through the stack link. Assigning Unit IDs Each unit in the stack has a unique ID that defines the unit’s position and function in the stack, as shown in Figure 3-2. The unit that is assigned Unit ID 1 is the Master unit, by default. The unit that is assigned Unit ID 2 is the Master Backup unit. When you power-up the stack, each unit is assigned a unique Unit ID. This is displayed on the front panel of the unit, as shown in Figure 3-2. The Unit ID of each unit can be either automatically assigned or manually assigned, as described in step 1 to step 4 below. To assign IDs to the units in the stack, do the following for each unit in the stack: 1 Connect the unit to the terminal.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 51 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Turn on the unit to begin auto boot and press Return or Esc to abort and enter the Start Up menu. 3 Select Stack Menu to open the Stack Menu. 4 Select Set Unit Stack ID. Enter either a Unit ID for manual assignment or 0 to indicate that the unit ID will be assigned automatically. NOTE: The entire stack should be connected, as shown in Figure 4-1, before powering up the units. Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units A unit is master-enabled if it assigned Unit ID 1 and Unit 2. All other units in the stack (slaves) have unit IDs of 3-8. The stack master assignment is performed during the configuration boot process. One master-enabled stack member is elected as Master, and the other master-enabled stack member is selected as Master Backup, according to the following decision process: • A master is selected from the set of the two Master-enabled units. Priority is given to the lowest unit ID, but also takes into account the amount of time the unit is UP (Up Time) as follows: Startup Menu [1]Download Software [2]Erase Flash File [3]Password Recovery Procedure [4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate [5]Stack Menu [6]Back [1]Show Unit Stack ID [2]Set Unit Stack ID [3]Back52 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – When a master-enabled unit is inserted to a running stack, (or when Master and Backup master both start at the same time), they exchange each other’s UP TIME (the time since they powered up). If the time difference is smaller than 10 minutes, the unit with the lowest unit ID is elected; otherwise, the unit with the longest UP time is elected. – If a Master-enabled unit (with ID 1 or 2) is inserted into an operational stack, it will be elected as a backup master. – If a Master unit and/or a backup Master unit is removed from the stack and the user wishes to configure one of the slave units (numbered 3-8) to be a Master backup, the user must reset the unit’s ID. This can be done as follows: • If there is a Master-enabled unit in the stack: Do -switch n renumber 2 (through CLI or GUI). This makes the nth unit a master-enabled unit. • If there is no Master-enabled unit in the stack: Press the reset button on the unit to be master-enabled, and assign it a unit ID= 1 using the boot menu. • The user can force a master-enabled unit to be the master unit of the stack, even if the master election process did not select it. This is done by switching over to the backup unit. NOTE: Two stacking member are considered the same age if they were inserted within a ten minute interval, for example, if Unit 2 is inserted in the first minute of a ten-minute cycle, and Unit 1 is inserted in fifth minute of the same cycle, the units are considered to be the same age. NOTE: If two stack members are discovered to have the same Unit ID, only the older unit is included in the stack. The stack continues to function and a message is sent notifying that a unit failed to join the stack. The Stack Master and the Master Backup maintain a Warm Standby. The Warm Standby ensures that the Master Backup takes over for the Stack Master if a failover occurs, so that the stack continues to operate normally. During the Warm Standby, the Master and the Master Backup are synchronized with the static configuration. When the Stacking Master is configured, it must synchronize the Master Backup. The dynamic Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 53 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY configuration is not saved, for example, dynamically-learned MAC addresses are not saved, but dynamic information is learned quickly and automatically by network traffic. Switching from the Master to the Master Backup The Master Backup replaces the Stack Master if one or more of the following events occur: • The Stack Master fails or is removed from the stack. • Links from the Stack Master to the stacking members fails. • User performs soft switchover via the Web interface or the CLI. Switching between the Stack Master and the Master Backup results in limited service loss. Dynamic tables are relearned if a failure occurs. The Running Configuration file is synchronized between Stack Master and the Master Backup, and continues running on the Master Backup. Replacing Stacking Members If a unit is removed from the stack, and replaced with a unit with the same unit ID, the stack member is configured with the original unit configuration. Otherwise, if the new unit has either more or fewer ports than the previous unit, the results depend on the device type of the new and original units, as defined in Table 4-1: Table 4-1. Port Configurations when Replacing Units New Unit Original Unit New Port Configuration 5548P or 5548 5548P or 5548 Port configurations remain the same. 5524 or 5524P The first 24 Giga (GE) ports receive the respective 5524/P 24 GE port configurations. The 10 G port configurations remain the same. 54 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Loading Software onto Stack Members Software can be downloaded to all units simultaneously, or to the master unit alone. If software is only loaded to the master unit, when new software is selected, and the Master is rebooted, the Master updates the software on the remaining units. In this way, all units in the stack run the same software version. Rebooting the Stack Whenever a reboot occurs, topology discovery is performed, and the Master learns all units IDs in the stack. Configuration files are changed only through explicit user configuration, and are not automatically modified when units are added, removed or reassigned unit IDs. Each time the system reboots, the Startup Configuration file in the Master unit is used to configure the stack. Managing Configuration Files on the Stack The Startup Configuration and Running Configuration file are stored on the stack master. Each port in the stack is referenced in the configuration files by its port type and unit ID/0/port number, for example "gi1/0/24", which means Giga port 24 on unit 1 (the middle 0 is reserved for future use). Configuration files are managed from the Stack Master, including: • Saving to flash memory 5524P or 5524 5548P or 5548 The PowerConnect 5524/P 24 Gigabit ports receives the first 24 Giga 5548/P port configurations. The 10 Giga port configurations remain the same. The remaining ports receive the default port configuration. 5524P or 5524 Port configurations remain the same. Table 4-1. Port Configurations when Replacing Units (Continued) New Unit Original Unit New Port ConfigurationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 55 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Uploading configuration files to an external TFTP server/HTTP client • Downloading configuration files from an external TFTP server/HTTP client • Download/upload through the USB port NOTE: Stack configuration for all configured ports is saved, even if the stack is reset and/or the ports are no longer present.56 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStacking.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYTemplate Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 57 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 5 Configuring the Switch This section describes the configuration that must be performed after the switch is installed and connected to power supplies. Additional advanced functions are described in "Advanced Switch Configuration" on page 67. NOTE: Before proceeding further, read the release notes for this product. You can download the release notes from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. NOTE: We recommend that you obtain the most recent revision of the user documentation from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. It contains the following topics: • Configuration Work Flow • Connecting the Switch to the Terminal • Booting the Switch • Configuring the Stack • Configuration Using the Setup Wizard58 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuration Work Flow To configure the switches: 1 For each switch in the stack: a Connect it to a terminal, as described in the "Connecting the Switch to the Terminal" on page 59. b Boot the switch, as described in the "Booting the Switch" on page 60. c Assign a unit ID to the switch, as described in "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50. 2 Connect the units in the stack to each other, as described in "Configuring the Stack" on page 61. 3 Connect the Master unit to the terminal, reboot the unit and the Setup Wizard is run automatically, as described in "Configuration Using the Setup Wizard" on page 61. 4 Respond to the Setup Wizard prompts. 5 Continue managing the switch, either through the console or Telnet, using the CLI or the web GUI.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 59 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Connecting the Switch to the Terminal The switch is configured and monitored through a terminal desktop system that runs terminal emulation software. The switch connects to the terminal through the console port. To connect the switch to a terminal: 1 Connect an RS-232 cable to a VT100-compatible terminal or the serial connector of a desktop system running terminal emulation software. 2 Connect the RS-232 cable to the switch console port on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 5-1) using an 8-pin RJ-45 male connector. Figure 5-1. Front-Panel Console Port 3 Set the terminal emulation software as follows: a Select the appropriate serial port to connect to the switch. b Set the data rate to 9600 baud. c Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. d Set Flow Control to none. e Select VT100 for Emulation mode within your communication software. f Select Terminal keys for Function, Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that the setting is for Terminal keys (not Windows keys). NOTE: You can connect a console to the console port on any unit in the stack, but stack management is performed only from the stack master (Unit ID 1 or 2). Console Port60 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Booting the Switch After the local terminal is connected, turn on power. The switch then goes through power-on self-test (POST). POST runs every time the switch is started and checks hardware components, to determine if the switch is operational before completely booting. If the system detects a critical problem, the boot process stops. If POST passes successfully, a valid executable image is loaded into RAM. POST messages are displayed on the terminal and indicate test success or failure. The boot process runs for approximately 40-45seconds. When the boot process completes, the following LEDs are lit, as shown in Figure 5-2: • Power • Status • Fan (should be green) • RPS (if it is being used) Figure 5-2. Initial LEDs Power Status Fan RPSDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 61 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring the Stack The switch is always considered to be a stack of switches even if the stack only contains a single switch. If there is more than one switch in the stack, each switch must be configured individually. See "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50 for instructions on how to configure the stack. Configuration Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration to get the system up and running as quickly as possible. Note that you can skip the Setup Wizard and configure the switch manually through the CLI. The Setup Wizard configures the following fields: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password • Management switch IP address • IP subnet mask • Default gateway IP address NOTE: The Setup Wizard assumes the following: • The PowerConnect switch was never configured before and is in the same state as when you received it. • The PowerConnect switch booted successfully. • The console connection is established and the console prompt is displayed on the screen of a VT100 terminal switch. Connect the Master unit to a terminal. You can identify the Master unit by the illuminated Master LED on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 3-2). To configure the system using the Setup Wizard: 1 Obtain the following information from the network administrator: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password62 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • The IP address to be assigned to the VLAN 1 interface through which the switch is to be managed (by default, every external and internal port is a member of the VLAN 1) • The IP subnet mask for the network • The default gateway (next hop router) IP address for configuring the default route 2 Boot the Master unit. The system automatically prompts you to use the Setup Wizard. The Setup Wizard displays the following information: Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration and gets you up and running easily and quickly. You can skip the Setup Wizard and enter CLI mode to manually configure the switch. The system will prompt you with a default answer; by pressing Enter, you accept the default value. You must respond to the next question to run the Setup Wizard within 60 seconds, otherwise the system will continue with normal operation using the default system configuration. Would you like to enter the Setup Wizard (you must answer this question within 60 seconds)? (Y/N) 3 Enter [Y] to run the wizard. If you enter [N] or if you do not respond within 60 seconds, the Setup Wizard automatically exits and the CLI console prompt appears. If you enter [Y] the wizard provides interactive guidance through the initial switch configuration. The following information is displayed: You can exit the Setup Wizard at any time by entering [ctrl+Z]. The system is not set up for SNMP management by default. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 63 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To manage the switch using SNMP (required for Dell Network Manager) you can: • Setup the initial SNMP version 2 account now. • Return later and set up the SNMP version account. For more information on setting up a SNMP version 2 account, see the user documentation. Would you like to set up the SNMP management interface now? [Y/N] 4 Enter [N] to skip to Step 7 or enter [Y] to continue the Setup Wizard. If you enter [Y] the following information is displayed: To set up the SNMP management account you must specify the management system IP address and the "community string" or password that the particular management system uses to access the switch. The wizard automatically assigns the highest access level [Privilege Level 15] to this account. You can use Dell Network Manager or other management interfaces to change this setting later and to add additional management system later. For more information on adding management systems, see the user documentation. To add a management station: Please enter the SNMP community string to be used: 5 Enter the SNMP community string. You can use the default name "public" Please enter the IP address of the Management System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage from any Management Station:[0.0.0.0]. 6 Enter the SNMP Management System IP. 7 Set up user account privilege level, as follows: The following information is displayed: Now we need to set up your initial privilege (Level 15) user account. This account is used to login to the CLI and Web interface. You may set up 64 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY other accounts and change privilege levels later. For more information on setting up user accounts and changing privilege levels, see the user documentation. To set up a user account: Enter the user name: Please enter the user password: Please reenter the user password: 8 Enter the following: • User name, for example "admin" • Password and password confirmation. 9 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Next, an IP address is setup. The IP address is defined on the default VLAN (VLAN 1). This is the IP address you use to access the Telnet, Web interface, or SNMP interface for the switch. To set up an IP address: Please enter the IP address of the device (A.B.C.D): Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or nn): 10 Enter the management IP address and IP subnet mask, for example 192.168.2.100 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the IP subnet mask. 11 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Finally, set up the default gateway. Please enter the IP address of the gateway from which this network is reachable (e.g. 192.168.2.1).Default gateway (A.B.C.D):[0.0.0.0] Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 65 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 12 Enter the default gateway. 13 Press Enter. The following is displayed (example): This is the configuration information that has been collected: SNMP Interface = "Dell Network Manager"@192.168.2.10 User Account setup = admin Password = ********** Management IP address = 192.168.2.100 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.2.1 The following information is displayed: If the information is correct, please select (Y) to save the configuration and copy to the start-up configuration file. If the information is incorrect, select (N) to discard configuration and restart the wizard: [Y/N] 14 Enter [N] to restart the wizard or enter [Y] to complete the Setup Wizard. If you enter [Y] the following is displayed: Configuring SNMP management interface. Configuring user account....... Configuring IP and subnet...... Thank you for using Dell Easy Setup Wizard. You will now enter CLI mode. The CLI prompt is displayed. You have finished the initial configuration. After the initial configuration is complete, you can manage the switch from the connected console port using the CLI or remotely through the management interface, using Telnet or the Web GUI. See the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide found on the Documentation CD.66 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUG_InitialConfiguration_gsg.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 67 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 6 Advanced Switch Configuration This section describes how to perform various configuration operations through the CLI. It includes the following topics: • Using the CLI • Accessing the Device Through the CLI • Retrieving an IP Address • Security Management and Password Configuration • Configuring Login Banners • Startup Menu Procedures • Software Download68 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Using the CLI This section provides some general information for using the CLI. For a complete description of CLI commands, refer to the Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems CLI Reference Guide. Command Mode Overview The CLI is divided into command modes, each with a specific command set. Entering a question mark at the terminal prompt displays a list of commands available for that particular command mode. In each mode, a specific command is used to navigate from one mode to another. These modes are described below. User EXEC Mode During CLI session initialization, the CLI is in User EXEC mode. Only a limited subset of commands is available in User EXEC mode. This level is reserved for tasks that do not change the terminal configuration and is used to access configuration sub-systems. After logging into the device, User EXEC command mode is enabled. The user-level prompt consists of the host name followed by the angle bracket (>). For example: console> NOTE: The default host name is console unless it has been modified during initial configuration. The User EXEC commands enable connecting to remote devices, changing terminal settings on a temporary basis, performing basic tests, and listing system information. To list the User EXEC commands, enter a question mark at the command prompt. To enter the next level, Privileged EXEC mode, a password is required (if configured). Privileged EXEC Mode Privileged EXEC mode provides access to the device global configuration. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 69 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Privileged access can be protected, to prevent unauthorized access and to secure operating parameters. Passwords are displayed on the screen, and are case-sensitive. NOTE: The enable command is only necessary if you login with privilege level less than 15. To access and list the Privileged EXEC mode commands: 1 At the prompt type enable and press . 2 When a password prompt displays, enter the password and press . The Privileged EXEC mode prompt displays as the device host name followed by #. For example: console# To list the Privileged EXEC commands, type a question mark at the command prompt. To return from Privileged EXEC mode to User EXEC mode, type disable and press . The following example illustrates accessing privileged EXEC mode and then returning to the User EXEC mode: Use the exit command to return to a previous mode. To configure the device, enter the next level, Global Configuration mode. Global Configuration Mode The Global Configuration mode manages device configuration on a global level. Global Configuration commands apply to system features, rather than a specific protocol or interface. console> enable Enter Password: ****** console# console# disable console>70 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To access Global Configuration mode, at the Privileged EXEC Mode prompt, type configure and press . The Global Configuration mode displays as the device host name followed by (config) and the pound sign #. To list the Global Configuration commands, enter a question mark at the command prompt. The following example illustrates how to access Global Configuration mode and return back to the Privileged EXEC mode: Interface Configuration Mode The Interface Configuration mode configures the device at the physical interface level (port, VLAN, or LAG). Interface commands that require subcommands have another level, called the Subinterface Configuration mode. A password is not required to access this level. The following example, places the CLI in Interface Configuration mode on port 1/0/1. The sntp command is then applied to that port. To run a command in a mode, which does not contain it, use do before the command, as in the following example: console# configure console(configure)# console# console# configure console(config)# exit console# console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# sntp client enable console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# sntp client enable console(config-if)# do show sntp configurationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 71 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Accessing the Device Through the CLI You can manage the device using CLI commands, over a direct connection to the terminal console, or via a Telnet connection. Direct Connection Connect the device to the console and enter the CLI commands upon receiving a prompt. Telnet Connection Telnet is a terminal emulation TCP/IP protocol. RS-232 terminals can be virtually connected to the local device through a TCP/IP protocol network. Telnet is an alternative to a local login terminal, where a remote login is required. The device supports up to four simultaneous Telnet sessions. All CLI commands can be used over a Telnet session. If access is via a Telnet connection, ensure that the device has an IP address and that software has been downloaded to the device. To start a Telnet session: 1 Select Start > Run. The Run window opens. 2 Type cmd. The cmd window opens. 3 In the cmd window, type Telnet . The Telnet session begins.72 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Retrieving an IP Address Receiving an IP Address from a DHCP Server When using the DHCP protocol to retrieve an IP address, the device acts as a DHCP client. When the device is reset, the DHCP command is saved in the configuration file, but the IP address is not. To retrieve an IP address from a DHCP server, perform the following steps: 1 Select and connect any port to a DHCP server or to a subnet that has a DHCP server on it. 2 Type the following commands to use the selected port for receiving the IP address. a Assigning dynamic IP Addresses on a port: b Assigning a dynamic IP Addresses on a VLAN: The interface receives the IP address automatically. console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# ip address dhcp console# configure console(config)# interface vlan 1 console(config-if)# ip address dhcpDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 73 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 To verify the IP address, type show ip interface at the system prompt, as shown in the following example. When configuring/receiving IP addresses through DHCP and BOOTP (an older version of DHCP), the configuration received from these servers includes the IP address and may include the subnet mask and default gateway. NOTE: It is not necessary to delete the device configuration to retrieve an IP address from the DHCP server. NOTE: When copying configuration files, avoid using a configuration file that contains an instruction to enable DHCP on an interface that connects to the same DHCP server, or to one with an identical configuration. In this instance, the device retrieves the new configuration file and boots from it. The device then enables DHCP, as instructed in the new configuration file, and the DHCP instructs it to reload the same file. NOTE: If you configure a DHCP IP address, this address is dynamically retrieved, and the ip address dhcp command is saved in the configuration file. In the event of master failure, the backup will again attempt to retrieve a DHCP address. This could result in one of the following: • The same IP address may be assigned. • A different IP address may be assigned, which could result in loss of connectivity to the management station. • The DHCP server may be down, which would result in IP address retrieval failure, and possible loss of connectivity to the management station. Receiving an IP Address From a BOOTP Server The standard BOOTP protocol is supported and enables the device to automatically download its IP host configuration from any standard BOOTP server in the network. In this case, the device acts as a BOOTP client. console# show ip interface IP Address I/F Type Directed Precedence Status Broadcast ----------------- --------- -------- -------- -------- ----- 0.0.0.0/32 gi2/0/1 DHCP disable No Valid 10.5.234.232/24 vlan 1 Static disable No Valid74 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To retrieve an IP address from a BOOTP server: 1 Select and connect any port to a BOOTP server or subnet containing such a server. 2 At the system prompt, enter the delete startup configuration command to delete the Startup Configuration from flash. The device reboots with no configuration and in 60 seconds starts sending BOOTP requests. The device receives the IP address automatically. NOTE: When the device reboot begins, any input at the ASCII terminal or keyboard automatically cancels the BOOTP process before completion and the device does not receive an IP address from the BOOTP server. The following example illustrates the process: To display the IP address, enter the show ip interface command. The device is now configured with an IP address. console> enable console# delete startup-config Startup file was deleted console# reload You haven’t saved your changes. Are you sure you want to continue (Y/N) [N]? This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue (Y/N) [N]? ************************************************ /* the device reboots */Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 75 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Security Management and Password Configuration System security is handled through the Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) mechanism that manages user access rights, privileges, and management methods. AAA uses both local and remote user databases. Data encryption is handled through the SSH mechanism. Passwords can be configured for the following services: • Terminal • Telnet • SSH • HTTP • HTTPS NOTE: When creating a user name, the default priority is 1, which provides access but not configuration rights. A priority of 15 must be set to enable access and configuration rights to the device. Although user names can be assigned privilege level 15 without a password, it is recommended to always assign a password. If there is no specified password, privileged users can access the Web interface with any password. NOTE: Passwords can be secured by using password management commands to force aging out of passwords, or expiration of passwords. For more information, see "Management Security" on page 261. Initial Configuration and Password Recovery The system is delivered without a default password, and all passwords must be defined by the user. If a user-defined password is lost, a password recovery procedure can be invoked from the Startup menu. This procedure is applicable for the local terminal only and enables a single access to the device from the local terminal with no password entered. The full mode of password recovery mechanism can be enabled/disabled through the CLI (service password-recovery command). This affects password recovery in the following way: • Enabled: When the password-recovery mechanism is invoked, one-time access to the device without a password is enabled and all configuration and user files are retained.76 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Disabled: When the password-recovery mechanism is invoked, one-time access to the device without a password is stilled enabled, however all configuration files (startup and backups) are removed and the following log message is generated to the terminal after boot process completed: “All configuration and user files were removed” Configuring an Initial Terminal Password To configure an initial terminal password, enter the following commands: Configuring an Initial Telnet Password To configure an initial Telnet password, enter the following commands: console(config)# aaa authentication login default line console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line console(config)# line console console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# password george console(config)# aaa authentication login default line console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line console(config)# line telnet console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# password bobDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 77 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring an Initial SSH Password To configure an initial SSH password, enter the following commands: Configuring an Initial HTTP Password To configure an initial HTTP password, enter the following commands: Configuring an Initial HTTPS Password To configure an initial HTTPS password, enter the following commands: Enter the following commands once when configuring use of a terminal, a Telnet, or an SSH session, for an HTTPS session. NOTE: In the Web browser, enable SSL 2.0 or greater for the page content to be displayed. NOTE: HTTP and HTTPS services require privilege level 15 access and connect directly to the configuration level access. console(config)# aaa authentication login default line console(config)# aaa authentication enable default line console(config)# line ssh console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# password jones console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication local console(config)# username admin password user1 privilege 15 console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication local console(config)# username admin password user1 privilege 15 console(config)# crypto certificate 1 generate keygenerate console(config)# ip http secure-server78 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Login Banners Banners can be defined for each line, such as console and telnet) or for all lines. They are disabled by default. The following types of banners can be defined: • Message-of-the-Day Banner (motd) — Displayed when the user connects to the device, before login. The following defines a message-of-the-day for the console: console# configure console(config)# line console console(config-line)# motd-banner console(config-line)# exit console (config)# banner motd * Welcome* console# do show banner motd Welcome Would you like to enable this banner to all lines? (Y/N)[Y] Y console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 79 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Login Banner— Displayed after the Message-of-the-Day Banner, and before the user has logged in. The following defines a login banner for the console: • Exec Banner — Displayed after successful login (in all privileged levels and in all authentication methods). The following defines an exec banner for the console: console# configure console(config)# line console console(config-line)# login-banner console(config-line)# exit console (config)# banner login * Please log in* console# do show banner login Would you like to enable this banner to all lines? (Y/N)[Y] Y Please log in console# configure console(config)# line console console(config-line)# exec-banner console(config-line)# exit console (config)# banner exec * Successfully logged in* Would you like to enable this banner to all lines? (Y/N)[Y] Y console# do show banner exec Successfully logged in80 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Startup Menu Procedures The Startup menu enables performing various tasks, such as software download, flash handling and password recovery. You can enter the Startup menu when booting the device. User input must be entered immediately after the POST test. To enter the Startup menu: • Turn the power on. After the auto-boot messages appear, the following menu is displayed: The following sections describe the available Startup menu options. NOTE: When selecting an option from the Startup menu, take time-out into account. If no selection is made within 10 seconds (default), the device times out. This default value can be changed through the CLI. Download Software - Option[1] The software download procedure is used to replace corrupted files or upgrade system software, when the device does not have IP connectivity or when both software images of the device are corrupted and therefore you cannot use the web-based management system. NOTE: it is highly recommended that, before loading via xmodem, the baud rate of the device and terminal be set to 115200. Startup Menu [1]Download Software [2]Erase Flash File [3]Password Recovery Procedure [4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate [5]Stack menu [6]BackDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 81 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To download software through the Startup menu: 1 From the Startup menu, press [1]. The following prompt is displayed: 2 When using the HyperTerminal, click Transfer on the HyperTerminal Menu Bar and select Send File. 3 In the Filename field, enter the file path for the file to be downloaded. 4 Ensure that the Xmodem protocol is selected in the Protocol field. 5 Press Send. The software is downloaded. NOTE: After software download, the device reboots automatically. Erase FLASH File - Option[2] In some cases, the device Startup Configuration file must be erased. If the configuration is erased, all parameters configured via CLI, web-management or SNMP must be reconfigured. To erase the device configuration in the Startup Configuration file: 1 From the Startup menu, select [2]. The following message is displayed: Warning! About to erase a Flash file. Are you sure (Y/N)? 2 Press Y. The following message is displayed. Write Flash file name (Up to 8 characters, Enter for none.): 3 Enter config ("config" is the standard name for the Startup configuration file although you can use any name). The following is displayed: Downloading code using XMODEM !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! File config (if present) will be erased after system initialization ======== Press Enter To Continue ========82 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The configuration is erased when the system is reset. Password Recovery - Option[3] If a password is lost, the Password Recovery procedure can be called from the Startup menu. The procedure enables entry to the device a single time without entering a password. To recover a lost password when entering the local terminal only: 1 From the Startup menu, select [3]. 2 Continue the regular startup by logging in without a password. 3 Enter a new password or press 'ESC' to exit. NOTE: To ensure device security, reconfigure passwords for applicable management methods. Set Terminal Baud-Rate - Option[4] To set the terminal baud-rate: 1 Type [4] and press . 2 Enter the new baud rate. The following is displayed: Note that after this step, your terminal will no longer respond. Adjust your terminal speed to the configured one. Stack Menu - Option[5] To configure the stack, type [5] and press . For more information, see "Assigning Unit IDs" on page 50. Set new device baud-rate: 38,400Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 83 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Software Download This section contains instructions for downloading device software (system and boot images) through a TFTP server or USB port. The TFTP server must be configured before downloading the software. Software Auto Synch in Stack When several units are stacked, they must all run the same software version. When a new slave device is inserted into the stack, it is first checked for compatibility (meaning that the master can run firmware upgrade/downgrade to the slave unit), and if found compatible, its boot and image software versions are automatically updated with the Master’s. If the slave is found not compatible, it is shutdown. A SYSLOG message is sent when a master synchronizes a slave's software. System Image Download When the device boots, it decompresses the system image from the flash memory area and runs it. When a new image is downloaded, it is saved in the other area allocated for the other system image copy. On the next boot, the device decompresses and runs the image from the currently active system image. A system image can be downloaded through a USB port or a TFTP server. To download the system image from a TFTP server, ensure that an IP address is configured on one of the device ports and pings can be sent to the TFTP server. In addition, ensure that the file to be downloaded is saved on the TFTP server. To download a system image through the USB port or TFTP server: 1 Enter the show version command, to verify which software version is currently running on the device. The following is an example of the information that appears: Unit SW version Boot version HW version ------ ------------------- ------------------- -------- 2 1.0.0.24 1.0.0.11 console#84 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the show bootvar command, to verify which system image is currently active. The following is an example of the information that is displayed: 3 Enter the one of the following commands to copy a new system image to the current unit: – copy {tftp://|usb://}{tftp address}/{file name} image (current unit) or To copy a new system image to all units in the stack: – copy tftp://{tftp address}/{file name} unit://*/image 4 When the new image is downloaded, it is saved in the area allocated for the other copy of system image (image-2, as shown in the example). The following is an example of the information that appears: Exclamation symbols indicate that a copying process is in progress. Each symbol (!) corresponds to 512 bytes transferred successfully. A period indicates that the copying process is timed out. Many periods in a row indicate that the copying process failed. console# show bootvar Unit Image Filename Version Date Status ---- ----- --------- --------- --------------------- --------- 2 1 image-1 1.0.0.13 04-Aug-2010 08:27:30 Active* 2 2 image-2 1.0.0.12 29-Jul-2010 17:02:26 Not active console# console# copy tftp://176.215.31.3/file1.ros image Accessing file ‘file1’ on 176.215.31.3Ö Loading file1 from 176.215.31.3: !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Copy took 00:01:11 [hh:mm:ss]Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 85 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 5 Select the image for the next boot by entering the boot system command. After this command, enter the show bootvar command to verify that the copy indicated as a parameter in the boot system command is selected for the next boot. The following is an example of the information that appears: If the image for the next boot is not selected by entering the boot system command, the system boots from the currently active image. 6 Enter the reload command. The following message is displayed: 7 Enter Y. The device reboots. Boot Image Download Loading a new boot image from the TFTP server or USB port, updates the boot image. The boot image is loaded when the device is powered on. A user has no control over the boot image copies. To download a boot image through the TFTP server: console# boot system image-2 console# show bootvar Images currently available on the Flash Image-1 active Image-2 not active (selected for next boot) console# reload This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue (y/n) [n]?86 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdvanced Configuration.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 1 Enter the show version command to verify which software version is currently running on the device. The following is an example of the information that appears: 2 Enter the copy {tftp://|usb://}{tftp address}/{file name} boot command to copy the boot image to the device. The following is an example of the information that appears: 3 Enter the reload command. The following message is displayed: 4 Enter Y. The device reboots. console# show version Unit SW version Boot version HW version ----- -------------- ----------------- ---------- 2 1.0.0.24 1.0.0.11 console# console# copy tftp://50.1.1.7/contax-10014.ros image 01-Oct-2006 11:57:35 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL tftp://50.1.1.7/contax-10014.ros destination URL flash://image !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 01-Sep-2010 11:57:38 %INIT-I-Startup: Cold Startup !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 01-Sep-2010 11:59:05 %COPY-N-: The copy operation was completed successfully! Copy: 5954757 bytes copied in 00:01:30 [hh:mm:ss] console# reload This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue (Y/N) [N]?Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 87 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 7 Using Dell OpenManage Administrator This section provides an introduction to the Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator user interface. It contains the following topics: • Starting the Application • Understanding the Interface • Using the Switch Administrator Buttons • Field Definitions • Common GUI Features • CLI Commands88 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Starting the Application NOTE: Before starting the application the IP address must be defined. For more information, see "Accessing the Device Through the CLI" on page 71. 1 Open a web browser. 2 Enter the device’s IP address in the address bar and press . 3 When the Log In window displays, enter a user name and password. NOTE: Passwords are both case sensitive and alpha-numeric. 4 Click OK. The Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator home page displays. Understanding the Interface The home page contains the following views: • Tree view — Located on the left side of the home page, the tree view provides an expandable view of the features and their components. The branches in the tree view can be expanded to view all the components under a specific feature, or retracted to hide the feature's components. By dragging the vertical bar to the right, the tree area can be expanded to display the full name of a component. • Device View — Located in on the top center of the home page, the device view provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, table information, and feature components. For further information, see "Device Representation" on page 89 • Components List — Located in the bottom center of the home page, contains a list of the feature components. When a feature is expanded, the GUI page for that feature is displayed. • Information Buttons— Located at the top of the home page, provide access to information about the device and access to Dell Support. For more information, see "Information Buttons" on page 91.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 89 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Device Representation The home page contains a graphical representation of the units in the stack’s front panels. Figure 7-1 displays the 5548 model, but the display for the other models are similar. Figure 7-1. PowerConnect Device Port Indicators The graphic display on the home page displays the Unit ID and port indicators that specify whether a specific port is currently active. Table 7-1 describes the port colors that are displayed and their meaning: Table 7-1. Port Colors NOTE: For more information about LEDs, see "LED Definitions" on page 40. To configure a port double-click on its icon. Only ports that are physically present are displayed in the PowerConnect OpenManage Switch Administrator home page, and can be configured through the web management system. Non-present ports can be configured through the CLI or SNMP interfaces. Port Representation Ports are referred to in the notation: [gi/te]x/0/z, where: Component Description Amber The port is currently connected at 100 Mbps. Green The port is currently connected at 1000 Mbps Grey The port is currently disconnected Stacking Unit ID Giga Ports (odd numbered) Giga Ports (even numbered)90 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • gi—Giga port • te —Ten Giga port • x — Unit ID • z — Port numberDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 91 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Using the Switch Administrator Buttons This section describes the buttons found on the OpenManage Switch Administrator interface. Information Buttons Table 7-2 describes the information buttons that provide access to online support and online help, as well as information about the OpenManage Switch Administrator interfaces. These are displayed at the top of each page. Device Management Icons Table 7-3 describes the device management buttons. Table 7-2. Information Buttons Button Description Support Opens the Dell Support page at support.dell.com About Contains the version and build number and Dell copyright information. Logout Opens the Log Out window. Table 7-3. Device Management Icons Button Icon Description Apply&Save Saves changes to the Running and Startup Configuration files. Help Open online help. The online help pages are context-sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing page is open, the help topic for that page is displayed when Help is clicked. Print Prints the Network Management System page and/or table information.92 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Refresh Refreshes device information from the Running Configuration file. Table 7-3. Device Management Icons (Continued)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 93 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Field Definitions Fields that are user-defined can contain between 1–159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the OpenManage Switch Administrator web page. All letters or characters can be used, except the following: "\ / : * ? < >" Common GUI Features Table 7-4 describes the common functions that can be performed on many GUI pages. Table 7-4. Common GUI Elements Button Description Apply Save changes entered in GUI page to the Running Configuration file. Back Go to previous page. Cancel Cancel changes entered in GUI page. Clear All Counters Delete counters. Clear Counters Delete selected counters. Clear Log Delete entries from log. Clear Statistics Delete statistics. Copy parameters from Copy the parameters from a selected row to the selected target rows. Copy parameters from port Copy the parameters from a selected port to the selected target ports. Details Shows further details relevant to the current page. Next Go to next page. Query Run a query after query criteria have been entered. Remove Remove checked elements in the page. If Select All is selected, all elements are removed. Reset All Counters Delete all counters. Restore Defaults Restores parameters entered in page to default values.94 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GUI Terms Each GUI page in the tree view is described in the following sections. A brief introduction is provided along with steps specifying how to enter information in the page. The following terms are used: • Enter — Indicates that information may be entered in the field. It does not imply that the field is mandatory. • Select —Indicates that information may be selected from a drop-down list or from radio buttons. • Displays —Indicates that the field is display only. CLI Commands There are certain command entry conventions that apply to all commands. The following table describes these conventions. Table 7-5. Common GUI Elements Telnet Opens a Telnet window. This only works in the Explorer 6 and Firefox browsers. Button Description [ ] In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional entry.. { } In a command line, curly brackets indicate a selection of compulsory parameters separated by the | character. One option must be selected. For example: flowcontrol {auto|on|off} means that for the flowcontrol command either auto, on, or off must be selected. Italic Font Indicates a parameter value. Bold Italic Font Indicates a parameter key word. Any individual key on the keyboard. For example click . Table 7-4. Common GUI Elements (Continued) Button DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 95 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Ctrl+F4 Any combination of keys clicked simultaneously, for example: Ctrl and F4. Screen Display Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the console. all When a parameter is required to define a range of ports or parameters and all is an option, the default for the command is all when no parameters are defined. For example, the command interface range port-channel has the option of either entering a range of channels, or selecting all. When the command is entered without a parameter, it automatically defaults to all. Button Description96 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGAdmin.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 97 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 8 Network Security This section describes the various mechanisms for providing security on the switch. It contains the following topics: • Port Security • ACLs • ACL Binding • Proprietary Protocol Filtering • Absolute Time Range • Time Range Recurrence • Dot1x Authentication98 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Security Network security can be enhanced by limiting access on a port to users with specific MAC addresses. The MAC addresses can be dynamically learned, or they can be statically configured. Port security has the following modes: • Classic Lock — Locked port security monitors both received and learned packets that are received on specific ports. Access to the locked port is limited to users with specific MAC addresses. These addresses are either manually defined on the port, or learned on that port before it was locked. • Limited Dynamic Lock — When a packet is received on a locked port, and the packet’s source MAC address is not tied to that port (either it was learned on a different port, or it is unknown to the system), a protection mechanism, which provides various options is invoked. Unauthorized packets arriving to a locked port are either: – Forwarded – Discarded with no trap – Discarded with a trap – The port is shutdown Locked port security enables storing a list of MAC addresses in the configuration file. The MAC addresses are restored when the device is reset. Disabled ports can be activated from the Port Configuration page. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 99 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure port security: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Port Security to display the Port Security: Summary page. Figure 8-1. Port Security: Summary Security parameters are displayed for all ports or LAGs, depending on the selected interface type. 2 To modify the security parameters for a port, select it, and click Edit. 3 Enter the following fields: – Interface — Select the interface to be configured. – Current Port Status — Displays the current port status. – Set Port — Select to either lock or unlock the port. – Learning Mode — Set the locked port type. The Learning Mode field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Set Port field. The possible options are: • Classic Lock — Locks the port using the classic lock mechanism. The port is immediately locked, regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned. 100 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Limited Dynamic Lock — Locks the port by deleting the dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled. – Max Entries (0-128) — Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The Max Entries field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Set Port field, and the Limited Dynamic Lock mode is selected in Learning Mode field. – Action on Violation — Select the action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port. The possible options are: • Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source. • Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source, without learning the MAC address. • Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source, and shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are reactivated, or the device is reset. – Trap — Enable/disable traps being sent when a packet is received on a locked port. – Trap Frequency (1-1000000) — Enter the amount of time (in seconds) between traps. Configuring Port Security Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring port security. . Table 8-1. Port Security CLI Commands CLI Command Description set interface active {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] interface|port-channel LAGnumber} Reactivates an interface that is shutdown due to port security reasons.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 101 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY port security max {max-addr} no port security max Specifies the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. Use the no form of this command to restore the default port security mode {lock | maxaddresses } no port security mode Configures the port security learning mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. port security [forward | discard | discard-shutdown] [trap seconds] no port security Enables port security on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable port security on an interface. port security [forward|discard|discard-shutdown] [trap seconds] no port security Configures port security on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable port security. show ports security [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-number ]|port-channel LAG-number] Displays lock status of specified interface or of all interfaces. Table 8-1. Port Security CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description102 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console # show ports security Port Status Learning Action Maximum Trap Frequency ------- -------- -------- -------- ------- ---- --------- gi1/0/1 Disabled Max-Addresses - 10 - - gi1/0/2 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/3 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/4 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/5 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/6 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/7 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/8 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/9 Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/10Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/11Disabled Lock - 1 - - gi1/0/12Disabled Lock - 1 - -Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 103 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ACLs This section describes Access Control Lists (ACLs), which enable defining classification actions and rules for specific ingress or egress ports. It contains the following topics: • ACL Overview • MAC-Based ACLs • MAC-Based ACEs • IPv4-Based ACLs • IPv4-Based ACEs • IPv6-Based ACLs • IPv6-Based ACEs ACL Overview Access Control Lists (ACLs) enable network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress or egress ports. Packets entering an ingress or egress port, with an active ACL, are either admitted or denied entry. If entry is denied, the ingress or egress port may be disabled, for example, a network administrator defines an ACL rule that states that port number 20 can receive TCP packets, however, if a UDP packet is received, the packet is dropped. ACLs are composed of Access Control Entries (ACEs) that are rules that determine traffic classifications. Each ACE is a single rule, and up to 256 rules may be defined on each ACL, and up to 3000 rules globally. Rules are not only used for user configuration purposes, they are also used for features like DHCP Snooping, Protocol Group VLAN and iSCSI, so that not all 3000 rules are available for ACEs. It is expected that there will be at least 2000 rules available. If there are fewer rules available, this may be due to DHCP Snooping or iSCSI optimization. Reduce the number of entries in DHCP Snooping or reduce the max number of TCP connections in the iSCSI configuration in order to free rules for ACEs. The following types of ACLs can be defined: • MAC-based ACL — Examines Layer 2 fields only • IPv4-based ACL —Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv4 frames104 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • IPv6-based ACL —Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv6 frames MAC-Based ACLs To define a MAC-based ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > MAC Based ACL to display the MAC Based ACL: Summary page. Figure 8-2. MAC Based ACL: Summary The currently-defined MAC-based ACLs are displayed. 2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL, and enter the name of the new ACL.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 105 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring MAC-Based ACLs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MAC-based ACLs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-2. MAC Based ACL CLI Commands CLI Command Description mac access-list extended aclname no mac access-list extended aclname Defines an ACL and places the device in MAC-extended ACL configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the ACL. show interfaces access-lists Displays access lists applied on interfaces. console# show access-lists Extended IP access list ACL1 permit 234 172.30.40.1 0.0.0.0 any permit 234 172.30.8.8 0.0.0.0 any106 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MAC-Based ACEs To add rules to an ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > MAC Based ACE to display the MAC Based ACE: Summary page. Figure 8-3. MAC Based ACE: Summary The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed. 2 To add a rule click Add ACE. 3 Select the ACL for which a rule is being created. 4 Enter the fields: – New Rule Priority — Enter the priority of the ACE. ACEs with higher priority are processed first. One is the highest priority – Source MAC Address — Match the source MAC address from which packets have arrived to this source address. In addition to the Source MAC address, you can enter a Wildcard Mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 00:00:00:00:00:00 means the bits must be matched exactly; ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. – Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 107 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Dest. MAC Address — Match the destination MAC address to which packets are addressed to this address. In addition to the Destination MAC address, you can enter a Wildcard Mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 00:00:00:00:00:00 means the bits must be matched exactly; ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. – Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched. – VLAN ID — Match the packet’s VLAN ID to this VLAN ID. The possible VLAN IDs are 1 to 4095. – CoS — Match the packet’s CoS value to this CoS value. – Cos Mask — Match the packet’s CoS value to one of these CoS values. – Ether type — Match the packet’s Ethertype to this one. – Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE. Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page. – Action — Select the action taken upon a match. The following options are available: • Permit — Forward packets that meet the ACL criteria. • Deny — Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria. • Shutdown — Drop packets that meet the ACL criteria, and disable the port to which the packet was addressed. – Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped packets. 108 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring MAC-Based ACEs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MACbased ACEs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-3. MAC Based ACE CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit {any|source-ip-address source-wildcard} {any|destination destinationwildcard} [eth-type 0|aarp|amber|decspanning|decnetiv|diagnostic|dsm|etype-6000] [vlan vlan-id] [cos cos coswildcard] [time-range timerange-name] Sets permit conditions for an MAC access list (in MAC ACL configuration mode). deny {any|source sourcewildcard} {any|destination destination-wildcard} [eth-type 0|aarp|amber|decspanning|decnet-iv | diagnostic |dsm|etype-6000] [vlan vlan-id] [cos cos cos-wildcard] [timerange time-range-name][disableport|log-input] Sets deny conditions for an MAC access list. console(config)# mac access-list extended server1 console(config-mac-al)# permit 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:00:00:00:00:ff anyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 109 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv4-Based ACLs To define an IPv4-based ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv4 Based ACL to display the IPv4 Based ACL: Summary page. Figure 8-4. IPv4 Based ACL: Summary The previously-defined IPv4 ACLs are displayed. 2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL. 3 Enter the name of the new ACL. Names are case-sensitive.110 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring IP-based ACLs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based ACLs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: IPv4-Based ACEs To add a rule to an ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv4 Based ACE to display the IPv4 Based ACE page. Figure 8-5. IPv4 Based ACE: Summary Table 8-4. IP-Based ACL CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip access-list extended aclname no ip access-list extended aclname Defines an IPv4 access list and places the device in IPv4 access list configuration mode Use the no form of this command to remove the access list. console(config)# ip access-list extended server-aclDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 111 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed. 2 To add a rule, click Add ACE. 3 Select a user-defined ACL, and enter the following fields: – New ACE Priority (1-2147483647) —Enter the priority of the ACE. ACEs with higher priority are processed first. One is the highest priority. – Protocol Select From List — Select to create an ACE, based on a specific protocol. The following options are available: • ICMP — Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). The ICMP enables the gateway or destination host to communicate with the source host, for example, to report a processing error. • IGMP — Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). Enables hosts to notify their local switch or router that they want to receive transmissions assigned to a specific multicast group. • IPinIP — IP in IP. Encapsulates IP packets to create tunnels between two routers. This ensures that IPIP tunnel appears as a single interface, rather than several separate interfaces. IPIP enables tunnel intranets occur the internet, and provides an alternative to source routing. • TCP — Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees that packets are transmitted and received in the order they are sent. • EGP — Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP). Permits exchanging routing information between two neighboring gateway hosts in an autonomous systems network. • IGP — Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). Enables for routing information exchange between gateways in an autonomous network. • UDP — User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Communication protocol that transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery.112 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • HMP — Host Mapping Protocol (HMP). Collects network information from various networks hosts. HMP monitors hosts spread over the internet as well as hosts in a single network. • RDP — Reliable Data Protocol (RDP). provide a reliable data transport service for packet-based applications. • IDPR— Matches the packet to the IDPR protocol. • IDRP— Matches the packet to the Inter-Domain Routing Protocol (IDRP). • RVSP — Matches the packet to the ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP). • AH — Authentication Header (AH). Provides source host authentication and data integrity. • EIGRP — Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP). Provides fast convergence, support for variable-length subnet mask, and supports multiple network layer protocols. • OSPF — The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol is a link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing Layer Two (2) Tunneling Protocol, an extension to the PPP protocol that enables ISPs to operate Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). • IPIP — IP over IP (IPinIP). Encapsulates IP packets to create tunnels between two routers. This ensures that IPIP tunnel appears as a single interface, rather than several separate interfaces. IPIP enables tunnel intranets occur the internet, and provides an alternative to source routing. • PIM — Matches the packet to Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM). • L2TP— Matches the packet to Internet Protocol (L2IP). • ISIS — Intermediate System - Intermediate System (ISIS). Distributes IP routing information throughout a single autonomous system in IP networks. – Protocol ID To Match— Enter a protocol number if you did not select a protocol by name. – Any(IP) — Check to use any protocol. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 113 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Source Port (0 - 65535) — Enter the TCP/UDP source port. Enter either Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – Destination Port (0 - 65535) — Enter the TCP/UDP destination port. Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – Source IP Address — Enter the source IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. • Wildcard Mask —In addition to the Source MAC address, you can enter a mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 means the bits must be matched exactly in addition to the IP source address; ff.ff.ff.ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. • Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched. – Dest. IP Address — Enter the destination IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. • Wildcard Mask —In addition to the Destination MAC address, you can enter a mask that specifies which bits in the source address are used for matching and which bits are ignored. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 means the bits must be matched exactly in addition to the IP destination address; ff.ff.ff.ff means the bits are irrelevant. Any combination of 0s and ffs can be used. • Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched. – TCP Flags — To use TCP flags, check the TCP Flag checkbox and then check the desired flag(s). – ICMP — Specifies an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • Select from List — Select an ICMP type from the list. • ICMP Type — Enter the ICMP type. • Any — Check to use all ICMP types.114 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP packets that are filtered by ICMP message type or ICMP message code. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP code. • Any — Check to use all ICMP codes. – IGMP — IGMP packets can be filtered by IGMP message type. This field is available only when IGMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • Select from List — Select an IGMP message type from the list. • IGMP Type — Enter the IGMP message type. • Any — Check to use all IGMP message types. – Classification — Select one of the following matching options: • Match DSCP(0-63) — Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACL. • Match IP Precedence(0-7) — Check to enable matching IP-precedence with the packet IP-precedence value. IPprecedence enables marking frames that exceed the CIR threshold. In a congested network, frames containing a higher DP value are discarded before frames with a lower DP value. If this field is checked, enter a value to be matched. – Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE. Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page. – Action — Select the ACL forwarding action. The following options are available: • Permit — Forward packets which meet the ACL criteria. • Deny — Drop packets which meet the ACL criteria. • Shutdown — Drop packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disable the port to which the packet was addressed. – Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped packets. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 115 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring IP-based ACEs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based ACLs. Table 8-5. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit protocol {any|source-ip-address source-wildcard} {any|destination-ipaddress destination-wildcard} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit icmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard} [any|icmptype][any|icmp-code]] [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit igmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard}[igmp-type] [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit tcp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port/portrange}{any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard} {any|destinationport/port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all list-of-flags] [timerange time-range-name] permit udp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|port-range} {any|destination-ip-address destinationwildcard} {any|destination-port/port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [matchall time-range-name] [time-range timerange-name] Sets conditions to allow a packet to pass a named IP access list ( in access list configuration mode). The list of protocols is found above.116 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: deny protocol {any|source-ip-address source-wildcard} {any|destination-ipaddress destination-wildcard} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny icmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard{any|icmp-type} {any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny igmp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard}[igmp-type] [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny tcp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|portrange}{any|destination-ip-address destination-wildcard} {any|destinationport/port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all list-of-flags] [timerange time-range-name] [disable-port|loginput] deny udp {any|source-ip-address sourcewildcard} {any|source-port|port-range} {any|destination-ip-address destinationwildcard} {any|destination-port|port-range } [dscp number|precedence number] [matchall time-range-name] [time-range timerange-name] [disable-port|log-input] Sets deny conditions for IPv4 access list (in access list configuration mode). console(config)# ip access-list extended server console(config-ip-al)# permit ip 1.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 1.1.2.0 0.0.0.0 Table 8-5. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 117 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6-Based ACLs The IPv6 Based ACL Page displays and enables the creation of IPv6 ACLs, which check pure IPv6-based traffic. IPv6 ACLs do not check IPv6-over-IPv4 or ARP packets. To define IPv6-based ACLs: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv6 Based ACL to display the IPv6 Based ACL: Summary page. Figure 8-6. IPv6 Based ACL: Summary A list of all of the currently defined IPv6-based ACLs is displayed. 2 To add a new ACL, click Add ACL. 3 Enter the name of the new ACL. Names are case-sensitive.118 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring IPv6-based ACLs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IPv6-based ACLs. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: IPv6-Based ACEs To add a rule to an IPv6-based ACL: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > IPv6 Based ACE to display the IPv6 ACE: Summary page. Figure 8-7. IPv6 Based ACE: Summary Table 8-6. IP-Based ACL CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 access-list [access-listname] no ipv6 access-list [accesslist-name] Defines an IPv6 access list and places the device in IPv6 access list configuration mode Use the no form of this command to remove the access list. console(config)# ipv6 access-list server-aclDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 119 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The currently-defined rules for the selected ACL are displayed. 2 To add a rule click Add ACE. 3 Select a user-defined ACL for which a rule is being created. 4 Enter the following fields: – New Rule Priority — Enter the ACE priority that determines which ACE is matched to a packet, based on a first match. – Protocol Select from List — Select to create an ACE, based on a specific protocol. The following options are available: • TCP — Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees packets are transmitted and received in the order the are sent. • UDP — User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Communication protocol that transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery. • ICMP — Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). The ICMP allows the gateway or destination host to communicate with the source host. For example, to report a processing error. • IPV6 — Matches the packet to the IPV6 protocol. – Protocol ID To Match — Enter a protocol. – Any — Check to use any protocol. – Source Port — Enter the TCP/UDP source port. Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – Destination Port — Enter the TCP/UDP destination port. Enter either a Single, Range or select Any to include all ports. – TCP Flags — To use TCP flags, check the TCP Flag checkbox and then check the desired flag(s). – ICMP — Specifies an ICMP message type for filtering ICMP packets. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • Select from List — Select an ICMP type from the list. • ICMP Type — Enter the ICMP type.120 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Any — Check to use all ICMP types. – ICMP Code — Specifies an ICMP message code for filtering ICMP packets that are filtered by ICMP message type or ICMP message code. This field is available only when ICMP is selected in the Protocol field. The following options are available: • ICMP Code — Enter an ICMP code. • Any — Check to use all ICMP codes. – Source IP Address — Enter the source IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. The following options are available: • Prefix Length —The number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix of the subnetwork. • Any — Check to indicate that the source address is not matched. – Dest. IP Address — Enter the destination IP address to which addresses in the packet are compared. The following options are available: • Prefix Length —The number of bits that comprise the destination IP address prefix of the subnetwork. • Any — Check to indicate that the destination address is not matched. – Traffic Class — Select one of the following options: • Match DSCP — Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACL. • Match IP Precedence — Matches the IP-precedence with the packet IP-precedence value. IP-precedence enables marking frames that exceed CIR threshold. In a congested network, frames containing a higher DP value are discarded before frames with a lower DP value. – Time Range Name — Check to associate a time range with the ACE. Select one of the time ranges defined in the Time Range page. – Action — The ACL forwarding action. The following options are available: • Permit — Forwards packets that meet the ACL criteria. • Deny — Drops packets that meet the ACL criteria.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 121 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Shutdown — Drops packet that meet the ACL criteria, and disables the port to which the packet was addressed. – Logging of Dropped Packets — Check to activate logging of dropped packets. Configuring IP-based ACEs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IP-based ACLs. Table 8-7. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit protocol {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination- prefix/length } [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit icmp {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination-prefix/length } {any|icmp-type}{any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] permit tcp {any|{source-prefix/length } {any|source-port/port-range} }{any|destination prefix/length } {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all listof-flags] [time-range time-range-name] permit udp {any|{source-prefix/length }} {any|source-port|port-range} }{any|destination prefix/length } {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] Sets permit conditions for IPv6 access list.122 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: deny protocol {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination-prefix|length} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny icmp {any|{source-prefix/length }{any|destination-prefix/length } {any|icmp-type} {any|icmp-code} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny tcp {any|{source-prefix/length } {any|source-port/port-range} }{any|destination-prefix/length} {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [match-all listof-flags] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] deny udp {any|{source-prefix/length }} {any|source-port/port-range} }{any|destination-prefix|length} {any|destination-port/port-range} [dscp number|precedence number] [time-range time-range-name] [disable-port|log-input] Sets deny conditions for IPv4 access list (in Access List Configuration mode). console(config)# ipv6 access-list server console(config-ipv6-al)# permit tcp 3001::2/64 any any 80 Table 8-7. IP-Based ACE CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 123 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ACL Binding When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that have been defined for the ACL are applied to that interface. Whenever an ACL is assigned on a port or LAG, flows from that ingress or egress interface that do not match the ACL, are matched to the default rule, which is to Drop unmatched packets. To change the default action for unmatched packets to an action other than Drop, do the following: • Add an additional ACE to the ACL with "Any" in all fields • Set its action other than Drop • Set the priority to the lowest in the ACL. To bind ACLs to interfaces: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > ACL Binding to display the ACL Binding: Summary page. Figure 8-8. ACL Binding: Summary The ports on the selected unit are displayed along with their associated ACLs.124 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 To bind an ACL to an interface, select an interface and click Edit. 3 Select an ACL(s). You can select one of each type (MAC-based ACL, IPv4-based ACL or IPv6-based ACL) or one IPv4-based ACL and one IPv6-based ACL. Configuring ACL Bindings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring ACL Bindings. . The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-8. ACL Bindings CLI Commands CLI Command Description service-acl input acl-name1 [acl-name2] no service-acl input Controls access to an interface Use the no form of the command to remove access control. show access-lists [acl-name] Displays access control lists (ACLs) configured on the switch. console(config)# mac access-list extended server console(config-mac-al)# permit 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:00:00:00:00:ff any console(config-mac-al)# exit console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# service-acl input serverDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 125 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Proprietary Protocol Filtering Protocol filters are used to disallow receiving specific proprietary protocol packets through an interface. These can be enabled for specific ports. If a protocol filter is enabled on a port, you cannot enable a QoS ACL on this port. To configure Proprietary Protocol Filtering: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Proprietary Protocol Filtering to display the Proprietary Protocol Filtering: Summary page. Figure 8-9. Proprietary Protocol Filtering: Summary A list of the ports and their filtered protocols is displayed. 2 Click Edit to modify the filtered protocols for a specific port. 3 Select a unit and an interface.126 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 Move the required protocols from the Available Protocols list to the Filtered Protocols list. The following displays the protocols and the addresses that are blocked: Configuring Proprietary Protocol Filtering Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Proprietary Protocol Filtering pages. Only one of the following CLI commands can be active on a port at the same time. To add other protocol filters, the command must be negated and then run again with all the required protocol names. . The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 8-9. Protocol Filtering Protocol Destination Address Protocol Type blockcdp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2000 blockvtp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2003 blockdtp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x2004 blockudld 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x0111 blockpagp 0100.0ccc.cccc 0x0104 blocksstp 0100.0ccc.cccd - blockall 0100.0ccc.ccc0 - 0100.0ccc.cccf - Table 8-10. Proprietary Protocol Filtering CLI Commands CLI Command Description service-acl input protocol1 [protocol2 … protocol6] no service-acl input Discards packets that are classified to specific protocols. Use the no form of those commands to disable discarding of the packets. console (Config-if)# service-acl input blockcdp blockvtpDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 127 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Time Range Time ranges can be defined and associated with an QoS ACL, so that it is applied only during that time range. There are two types of time ranges: • Absolute —This type of time range begins on a specific date or immediately and ends on a specific date or extends infinitely. It is created in the Time Range pages. A recurring element can be added to it. • Recurring — This is a time range element that is added to an absolute range, and begins and ends on a recurring basis. It is defined in the Time Range Recurrence pages. If a time range includes both absolute and recurring ranges, the ACL is activated only if both absolute start time and the recurring time range have been reached. The ACL is deactivated when either of the time ranges is reached. The switch supports a maximum of 10 absolute time ranges. All time specifications are interpreted as local time (Daylight Savings Time does not affect this). To ensure that the time range entries take effect at the desired times, the system time must be set. For more information on setting the system time, see "Time Synchronization" on page 169. A possible use for this feature is to limit access of computers to the network only during business hours, after which they are locked, and access to the rest of the network is blocked.128 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Absolute Time Range To define an absolute time range: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Time Range to display the Time Range: Summary page. Figure 8-10. Time Range: Summary The existing Time Ranges are displayed. 2 To add a new time range, click Add. 3 Enter the name of the time range in the Time Range Name field. 4 Define the Absolute Start time. – To begin the Time Range immediately, click Immediate. – To determine at what time in the future the Time Range will begin, enter values in the Date and Time fields.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 129 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 5 Define the Absolute End time. – To indicate that the Time Range should not end, click Infinite. – To determine the time at which the Time Range ends, enter values in the Date and Time fields. See "Configuring Time Ranges Using CLI Commands" on page 130 for the CLI commands for creating time ranges. Time Range Recurrence To add a recurring time range element to an absolute time range: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Time Range Recurrence to display the Recurring Time Range: Summary page. Figure 8-11. Recurring Time Range: Summary A daily and weekly recurring element of the time range that is selected is displayed if they exist.130 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 To add a recurring time range element to a time range, click Add. 3 Select the Time Range Name to which you want to add the Time Range Recurrence. The Absolute Start and Absolute End fields are displayed. 4 Check if the recurrence is Daily or Weekly in Recurrence type. 5 If the recurrence is Daily, enter: – Start Time — Select the time on which the time range starts. – End Time— Select the time on which the time range ends. – Weekday — Select the day of the week on which the time range occurs. 6 If the recurrence is Weekly, enter: • Start — Select the Day of the Week and Time on which the time range starts. • End —Select the Day of the Week and Time on which the time range ends. Configuring Time Ranges Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring time ranges. Table 8-11. Time Range CLI Commands CLI Command Description time-range time-range-name no time-range time-range-name Enables time-range configuration mode, and defines time ranges for functions (such as access lists). Use the no form of this command to remove the time range configuration. absolute start hh:mm day month year no absolute start absolute end hh:mm day month year no absolute end Adds start and end times to the time range. Use the no form of the commands to remove the start and end times from the time range.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 131 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm to day-of-the-week hh:mm no periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm to day-of-the-week hh:mm periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm day-of-theweek1 [day-of-the-week2… day-ofthe-week7] no periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm day-of-the-week1 [day-of-theweek2… day-of-the-week7] periodic list hh:mm to hh:mm all no periodic list all hh:mm to hh:mm all Adds a recurring time range to the time range. Use the no form of the commands to remove the recurring time range. console (config)# time-range http-allowed console (config-time-range)# absolute start 12:00 1 jan 2005 end 12:00 31 dec 2005 console (config-time-range)# periodic monday 8:00 to friday 20:00 Table 8-11. Time Range CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description132 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dot1x Authentication This section describes Dot1x authentication. It contains the following topics: • Port-Based Authentication Overview • Dot1x Overview • Port-Based Authentication Global • Port-Based Authentication Interface Settings • Monitoring Users • Host Authentication • Port Authentication Users Port-Based Authentication Overview Port-based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per-port basis via an external server. Only authenticated and approved system users can transmit and receive data. Ports are authenticated via the RADIUS server using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Port Authentication includes: • Authenticators — Specifies the device port that is authenticated before permitting system access. • Supplicants — Specifies the host connected to the authenticated port hat is requesting to access the system services. • Authentication Server — Specifies the external server, for example, a RADIUS server, which performs authentication on behalf of the authenticator, and indicates whether the supplicant is authorized to access system services. Port-based authentication creates two access states: • Controlled Access — Permits communication between the supplicant and the system, if the supplicant is authorized. • Uncontrolled Access — Permits uncontrolled communication, regardless of the port authorization state.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 133 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The device supports Port Based Authentication via RADIUS servers. Dot1x Overview Dot1x is an IEEE standard for port-based network access control. The Dot1x framework enables a device (the supplicant) to request port access from a remote device (authenticator) to which it is connected. The supplicant is permitted to send data to the port only after it is authenticated and authorized. If it is not authenticated and authorized, the authenticator discards the supplicant data, unless the data is sent to a Guest VLAN and/or non-authenticated VLANs. Authentication of the supplicant is performed by an external RADIUS server through the authenticator. The authenticator monitors the results of the authentication. In the Dot1x standard, a device can be a supplicant and an authenticator at a port, simultaneously requesting and granting port access. However, this device can only act as an authenticator, and does not take on the role of a supplicant. The following varieties of Dot1x exist: • Single session Dot1x: – A1—Single-session/Single Host — In this mode, the switch, as an authenticator, supports a single Dot1x session, and grants permission to use the port to an authorized supplicant. All other access requests, made by other devices received from the same port, are denied until the authorized supplicant is no longer using the port, or the access request is to an unauthenticated or guest VLAN. – Single-session/Multiple Hosts—This follows the Dot1x standard. In this mode, the switch, as an authenticator, enables any device to use a port, as long as it has been granted permission as a supplicant at the port. • Multi-Session Dot1x—Every device (supplicant) connecting to a port must be authenticated and authorized by the switch (authenticator), separately in a different Dot1x session. This is the only mode that supports Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA).134 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) is also referred to as RADIUS VLAN Assignment in this guide. When a port is in Multiple Session mode and is DVA-enabled, the switch automatically adds the port as an untagged member of the VLAN that is assigned by the RADIUS server during the authentication process. The switch classifies untagged packets to the assigned VLAN if the packets originated from the devices or ports that are authenticated and authorized. For a device to be authenticated and authorized at a DVA-enabled port: • The RADIUS server must authenticate the device and dynamically assign a VLAN to the device. • The assigned VLAN must not be the default VLAN and must have been created on the switch. • The switch must not be configured to use both a DVA and a MAC-based VLAN group. • A RADIUS server must support DVA with RADIUS attributes tunnel-type (64) = VLAN (13), tunnel-media-type (65) = 802 (6), and tunnel-privategroup-id = a VLAN ID. Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment The Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment feature enables specifying a userdefined ACL or policy in the RADIUS server. After a successful authentication, the user is assigned that ACL. Authentication Methods The possible authentication methods are: • Dot1x — The switch supports this authentication mechanism, as described in the standard, to authenticate and authorize Dot1x supplicants. • MAC-based — The switch can be configured to use this method to authenticate and authorize devices that do not support Dot1x. The switch emulates the supplicant role on behalf of the non-Dot1x-capable devices, and uses the MAC address of the devices as the username and password, when communicating with the RADIUS servers. MAC addresses for Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 135 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY username and password must be entered in lower case and with no delimiting characters (for example: aaccbb55ccff). To use MAC-based authentication at a port: – A Guest VLAN must be defined. – The port must be Guest-VLAN-enabled. – The packets from the first supplicant, at the port before it is authorized, must be untagged. You can configure a port to use Dot1x only, MAC-based only, or Dot1x and MAC-based authentication. If a port is configured to use both Dot1x and MAC-based authentication, a Dot1x supplicant has precedence over a non-Dot1x device. The Dot1x supplicant preempts an authorized, but non-Dot1x device, at a port that is configured with a single session. Unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLANs Unauthenticated VLANs and Guest VLANs provide access to services that do not require the subscribing devices or ports to be Dot1x or MAC-Based authenticated and authorized. An unauthenticated VLAN is a VLAN that allows access by authorized and unauthorized devices or ports. You can configure one or more VLAN to be unauthenticated in the VLAN Membership pages in "VLANs" on page 466. An unauthenticated VLAN has the following characteristics: • It must be a static VLAN, and cannot be the Guest VLAN or the default VLAN. • The VLAN’s member ports must be manually configured as tagged members. • The member ports must be trunk and/or general ports. An access port cannot be member of an unauthenticated VLAN. The Guest VLAN, if configured, is a static VLAN with the following characteristics. • It must be manually defined from an existing, static VLAN. • It is automatically available only to unauthorized devices, or to ports of devices that are connected and Guest VLAN enabled. 136 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If a port is Guest-VLAN-enabled, the switch automatically adds the port as an untagged member of the Guest VLAN when the port is not authorized, and removes the port from the Guest VLAN when the first supplicant of the port is authorized. • The Guest VLAN cannot be used as both the Voice VLAN and an unauthenticated VLAN. The switch also uses the Guest VLAN for authentication at ports configured with Multiple Session mode and MAC-based authentication. Therefore, you must configure a Guest VLAN before you can use the MAC-based authentication mode. For authentication to function, it must be activated both globally, in the PortBased Authentication Global page and individually on each port, in the PortBased Authentication Interface Settings pages. Monitoring Mode Monitoring mode enables providing users who fail authentication with limited network access. This enables these users to correct the reason that the authentication failed. The following are the main aspects of this feature: • Enables successful authentications using the returned RADIUS information • Provides a mechanism to report unsuccessful authentications without negative repercussions to the user due to administrator errors • Accurately reports the data received from the successful and nonsuccessful operations so that appropriate changes to problem areas may be made. The Dot1x monitoring activation command includes a special VLAN that is used when there is no access interface configuration present and the client(s) unsuccessfully authenticates. These clients are placed in the special VLAN. For users that unsuccessfully authenticate during re-authentication process, but already have existing VLANs configured, the failure to authenticate does not put them in a disabled state but places them back to the existing configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 137 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port-Based Authentication Global To globally configure authentication: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port Based Authentication Global to display the Port Based Authentication Global page. Figure 8-12. Port Based Authentication Global 2 Enter the following fields: – Port Based Authentication State — Enable/disable port-based authentication. – Authentication Method — Select an authentication method. The possible options are: 138 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • RADIUS, None — Perform port authentication first by using the RADIUS server. If no response is received from RADIUS (for example, if the server is down), then no authentication is performed, and the session is permitted. • RADIUS — Authenticate the user on the RADIUS server. If no authentication is performed, the session is not permitted. • None — Do not authenticate the user. Permit the session. – Guest VLAN — Enable/disable the use of a Guest VLAN for unauthorized ports. If a Guest VLAN is enabled, all unauthorized ports automatically join the VLAN selected in the Guest VLAN ID field. If a port is later authorized, it is removed from the Guest VLAN. – VLAN List — Select the Guest VLAN from the VLAN list. – Monitoring Mode — Enable/disable logging authentication attempts. – Monitoring VLAN — Enter the ID of the VLAN to which traffic being monitored is routed after unsuccessful Dot1x authentication. – Accept Supplicant when Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment Has No Resources — If no resources remain in the TCAM, the system can either reject (disable) or allow (enable) successful authentication. Enabling Port-Based Authentication Globally Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling the port based authentication as displayed in the Port Based Authentication Global page. Table 8-12. Port-Based Authentication Global CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa authentication dot1x default method1 [method2] no aaa authentication dot1x default Specifies one or more AAA methods for use on interfaces running IEEE 802.1X. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x system-auth-control no dot1x system-auth-control Enables 802.1x globally. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 139 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: dot1x system-auth-control monitor [vlan vlan-id] no dot1x system-auth-control monitor Enables 802.1x globally the 802.1x Monitoring mode and define the Monitor VLAN. Use the no format of the command to return to default. dot1x guest-vlan no dot1x guest-vlan Contains a list of VLANs. The guest VLAN is selected from the VLAN List. Use the no form of this command to disable access. show dot1x Displays 802.1X status for the device. console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none console(config)# interface vlan 5 console# show dot1x 802.1x is disabled Admin Oper Reauth Reauth Username Port Mode Mode Control Period -------- ------------------ ------------- -------- ------- -------- gi1/0/1 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a gi1/0/2 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a gi1/0/3 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a gi1/0/4 Force Authorized Authorized* Disabled 3600 n/a Table 8-12. Port-Based Authentication Global CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description140 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port-Based Authentication Interface Settings To configure 802.1x authentication on an interface: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port Based Authentication Interface Settings to display the Port Based Authentication Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 8-13. Port Based Authentication Interface Settings Port parameters for the selected unit are displayed. 2 Click Edit. 3 Select a port for which the authentication parameters apply in the Interface drop-down list. 4 Enter the parameters: – User Name — Displays the username of the port. – Admin Interface Control — Select the port authorization state. The possible options are: • Auto — Enables port-based authentication on the interface. The interface moves between an authorized or unauthorized state, based on the authentication exchange between the device and the client.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 141 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Authorized — Places the interface into an authorized state without being authenticated. The interface resends and receives normal traffic without client port-based authentication. • Unauthorized — Denies the selected interface system access by moving the interface into unauthorized state. The device cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface. – Current Interface Control — Displays the current port authorization state. – Authentication Type — Select the type of authentication on the port. The possible options are: • 802.1x Only — 802.1X authentication is the only authentication method performed on the port. • MAC Only — Port is authenticated, based on the supplicant MAC address. Only eight MAC-based authentications can be used on the port. • 802.1x & MAC — Both 802.1X and MAC-based authentication are performed on the switch. The 802.1X authentication takes precedence. NOTE: For MAC authentication to succeed, the RADIUS server supplicant username and password must be the supplicant MAC address. The MAC address must be in lower case letters and entered without the “:” or “-” separators; for example: 0020aa00bbcc. – Dynamic VLAN Assignment — Enable/disable dynamic VLAN assignment for this port. This feature enables you to automatically assign users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication. When a user is authenticated by the RADIUS server, the user is automatically joined to the VLAN configured on a RADIUS server. • Port Lock and Port Monitor should be disabled when DVA is enabled. • Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) can occur only if a RADIUS server is configured, and port authentication is enabled and set to 802.1x multi-session mode. • If the RADIUS Accept Message does not contain the supplicant’s VLAN, the supplicant is rejected.142 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Authenticated ports are added to the supplicant VLAN as untagged. • Authenticated ports remain unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLAN members. Static VLAN configuration is not applied to the port. • The following list of VLANs cannot participate in DVA: an Unauthenticated VLAN, a Dynamic VLAN that was created by GVRP, a Voice VLAN, a Default VLAN and a Guest VLAN. • Delete the supplicant VLAN while the supplicant is logged in. The supplicant is authorized during the next re-authentication if this supplicant VLAN is re-created, or a new VLAN is configured on the RADIUS server. NOTE: DVA provides the same functionality as the MAC to VLAN Assignment feature, but does so in a standard way. Therefore, when DVA is available, MAC to VLAN Assignment is not available. – Guest VLAN — Enable/disable port access to the Guest VLAN. If enabled, unauthorized users, connected to this interface, can access the Guest VLAN. – Dynamic Policy / ACL Assignment — Enable/disable this feature. – Periodic Reauthentication — Select to enable port re-authentication attempts after the specified Reauthentication Period. – Reauthentication Period (300-4294967295) — Enter the number of seconds after which the selected port is reauthenticated. – Reauthenticate Now — Select to enable immediate port re-authentication. – Authentication Server Timeout (1-65535) — Enter the time interval that lapses before the device resends a request to the authentication server. The field value is specified in seconds. – Resending EAP Identity Request (1-65535) — Enter the amount of time that lapses before EAP request are resent. – Quiet Period (0-65535) — Enter the number of seconds that the device remains in the quiet state, following a failed authentication exchange.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 143 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Supplicant Timeout (1-65535) — Enter the amount of time that lapses before EAP requests are resent to the supplicant. The field value is in seconds. – Max EAP Requests (1-10) — Enter the maximum number of EAP requests that can be sent. If a response is not received after the defined period (supplicant timeout), the authentication process is restarted. Enabling Port-Based Authentication on Interfaces Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling the port based authentication as displayed in the Port Based Authentication Global page. Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | forceunauthorized} no dot1x port-control Enables manual control of the port authorization state. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x mac-authentication {mac-only|mac-and-802.1x} no dot1x mac-authentication Enables authentication based on the station’s MAC address. Use the no form of this command to disable access. dot1x radius-attributes vlan no dot1x radius-attributes vlan Enables user-based VLAN assignment. Use the no form of this command to disable user-based VLAN assignment. dot1x guest-vlan enable no dot1x guest-vlan enable Enables unauthorized users on the interface access to the guest VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable access. dot1x max-req count no dot1x max-req Sets the maximum number of times that the device sends an EAP to the client, before restarting the authentication process. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.144 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY dot1x re-authentication no dot1x re-authentication Enables periodic re-authentication of the client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout supp-timeout Sets the number of seconds between reauthentication attempts. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x re-authenticate [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number] Manually initiates a re-authentication of all 802.1X-enabled ports or the specified 802.1X-enabled port. dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet-period Sets the number of seconds that the device remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout server-timeout seconds no dot1x timeout servertimeout Sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout supp-timeout seconds no dot1x timeout supp-timeout Sets the time for the retransmission of an EAP request frame to the client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. dot1x timeout tx-period seconds no dot1x timeout tx-period Sets the number of seconds that the device waits for a response to an EAP - request/identity frame, from the client, before resending the request. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show dot1x [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number] Displays 802.1X status for the device or for the specified interface. Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 145 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show dot1x advanced Displays 802.1X advanced features for the switch or specified interface. show dot1x users [username username] Displays 802.1X users for the device. dot1x guest-vlan enable no dot1x guest-vlan enable Enables using a guest VLAN for unauthorized ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default none console(config)# interface vlan 5 console(config-if)# dot1x auth-not-req console(config)# vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan 2 console(config-vlan)# exit console(config)# interface vlan 2 console(config-if)# dot1x guest-vlan console# show dot1x Interface Admin Mode Oper Mode Reauth Control Reauth Period Username -------- ------- ---------- -------- ------ -------- gi1/0/1 Auto Authorized Enabled 3600 Bob gi1/0/2 Auto Authorized Enabled 3600 John gi1/0/3 Auto Unauthoriz ed Enabled 3600 Clark gi1/0/4 Forceauth Authorized Disabled 3600 n/a Table 8-13. Port-Based Authentication Interface CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description146 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Monitoring Users Use the Monitoring Users page to view rejected users. 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Monitoring Users to display the Monitoring Users page. Figure 8-14. Monitoring Users 2 Select a supplicant that was authenticated on the port. The supplicant’s information is displayed. – User Name — Name assigned to this port. – Port — Number of port. – VLAN — Port belongs to this VLAN. – MAC Address — Source of traffic. – Reject Reason — Reason that traffic was rejected. See Table 8-14 for a list of the possible reject reasons. – Time — Time that traffic was rejected.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 147 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Table 8-14. Reject Reason Description Abbreviation Description ACL-DEL ACL was deleted by a user. ACL-NOTEXST ACL sent by the RADIUS server does not exist on the device. ACL-OVRFL ACL sent by the RADIUS server cannot be applied because of TCAM overflow. AUTH-ERR Rejected by RADIUS due to wrong user name or password in the RADIUS server. FLTR-ERR RADIUS accept message contains more than two filter IDs. FRS-MTH-DENY First method is deny. IPv6WithMAC RADIUS accept message contains filter with IPv6 DIP and MAC addresses. IPV6WithNotIP RADIUS accept message contains IPv6 and not IP simultaneously. POL-BasicMode Policy is not supported in the QoS basic mode. POL-DEL Policy was deleted by a user. POL-OVRFL Policy sent by radius server can not be applied because of TCAM overflow. RAD-APIERR RADIUS API returned error (e.g. No RADIUS server is configured). RAD_INVLRES RADIUS server returned invalid packet (e.g. EAP attribute is missing). RAD-NORESP RADIUS server is not responding. VLAN-DFLT VLAN sent by a RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is the default VLAN. VLAN-DYNAM VLAN sent by RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is a dynamic VLAN. VLAN-GUEST VLAN sent by RADIUS server cannot be applied because it is the Guest VLAN.148 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Monitoring Users Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for monitoring users: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 8-15. Monitoring Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description show dot1x monitoring result [username username] Displays the captured information of each interface/host on the switch/stack. console# show dot1x monitoring Tom Username: Tom Port g1 Quiet period: 60 Seconds Tx period: 30 Seconds Max req: 2 Supplicant timeout: 30 Seconds Server timeout: 30 Seconds Session Time (HH:MM:SS): 08:19:17 MAC Address: 00:08:78:32:98:78 Authentication Method: Remote Assigned VLAN: 207 Reason for Failure:VLAN was not defined on SwitchDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 149 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Host Authentication Use the Host Authentication page to define the authentication mode on the port, and the action to perform if a violation is detected. To view ports and their authentication information: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Host Authentication to display the Host Authentication: Summary page. Figure 8-15. Host Authentication: Summary A list of the ports and their authentication modes is displayed. The fields are defined on the Edit page with the exception of the following field: – Single Host Status — Displays the host status. The possible options are: • Unauthorized — The port control is Force Unauthorized, the port link is down or the port control is Auto, but a client has not been authenticated via the port.150 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Not in Auto Mode — The port control is Forced Authorized, and clients have full port access. • Single-host Lock — The port control is Auto and a single client has been authenticated via the port. • No Single Host — Multiple Host is enabled. – Number of Violations — Displays the number of packets that arrive on the interface in single-host mode, from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address. 2 Click Edit. 3 In the Port drop-down list, select the port to which you want to apply the authentication mode. 4 Enter the fields: – Host Authentication — Define the host authentication type. The options are: • Single — Only a single authorized host can access the port. (Port Security cannot be enabled on a port in single-host mode.) • Multiple Host — Multiple hosts can be attached to a single 802.1x-enabled port. Only the first host must be authorized, and then the port is wide-open for all who want to access the network. If the host authentication fails, or an EAPOL-logoff message is received, all attached clients are denied access to the network. • Multiple Session — A number of specific authorized hosts may access the port. Each host is treated as if it was the first and only user and must be authenticated. Filtering is based on the source MAC address. – Action on Single Host Violation — Select the action to be applied to packets arriving in Single Session/Single Host mode, from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address. The options are: • Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source. • Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source, however, the MAC address is not learned.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 151 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source and shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are activated, or the switch is reset. Host Authentication pages: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 8-16. Host Authentication CLI Commands CLI Command Description dot1x host-mode {multihost|single-host|multisessions} Allows a single host (client) or multiple hosts on an IEEE 802.1x-authorized port. dot1x traps macauthentication failure no dot1x traps macauthentication failure Enables sending traps when a MAC address is successfully authenticated by the 802.1X mac-authentication access control. Use the no form of this command to disable the traps. dot1x traps macauthentication success no dot1x traps macauthentication success Enables sending traps when MAC address was failed in authentication of the 802.1X MAC authentication access control. Use the no form of this command to disable the traps. dot1x violation-mode {restrict | protect | shutdown} no dot1x violation-mode Configures the action to be taken, when a station whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address, attempts to access the interface. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show dot1x advanced [gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number] Displays 802.1x advanced features for the device or specified interface. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-host console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode single-host console(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-sessions152 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Authentication Users The Port Authentication Users page enables you to view users that attempted to be authenticated. To view ports and their authentication definitions: 1 Click Switching > Network Security > Dot1 Authentication > Port Authentication Users to display the Port Authentication Users page. Figure 8-16. Port Authentication Users The ports and their authentication definitions are displayed. – User Name — Supplicant names that were authenticated on each port. – Port — Number of port. – Session Time — Amount of time (in seconds) that the supplicant was logged on the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 153 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Authentication Method — Method by which the last session was authenticated. The options are: • None—No authentication is applied; it is automatically authorized. • RADIUS—Supplicant was authenticated by a RADIUS server. • MAC Address—Displays the supplicant MAC address. – MAC Address — MAC address of user who attempted to be authenticated. – VLAN — VLAN assigned to the user. – Filter — Filter that was applied to the user by receiving the policy/ACL name from the RADIUS server (Dynamic ACL Assignment). 2 Click Details to view the names of the VLAN filters (Filter #1 and Filter #2) defined on the port, in addition to the above fields.154 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxU_Switching_NetworkSecurity.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Display Port Authentication Users Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for displaying port authentication users: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 8-17. Display Port Authentication Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description show dot1x users Displays active 802.1x authenticated users for the device. console# show dot1x users Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter Name Time Method Address ------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------ gi1/0/1 Bob 1d 03:08:58 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter Name Time Method Address ------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------ gi1/01 Bob 1d 09:07:38 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 OK gi1/01 Tim 03:08:58 Remote 0008.3b79.3232 9 OK gi1/03 Paul 02:12:48 Remote 0008.3b89.8237 8 Warning console# show dot1x users username Bob Port User Session Auth MAC VLAN Filter Name Time Method Address ------ ----- ----------- -------- -------------- ---- ------ gi1/01 Bob 1d 09:07:38 Remote 0008.3b79.8787 3 OKTemplate Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 155 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 9 Configuring System Information This section describes how to set system parameters, such as security features, switch software, system time, logging parameters and more. It contains the following topics: • General Switch Information • Time Synchronization • Logs • IP Addressing • Diagnostics • Management Security • DHCP Server • DHCP Server • File Management • Stack Management • sFlow156 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY General Switch Information This section describes how to view and set general switch parameters. It contains the following topics: • Asset Information • System Health • Power over Ethernet Asset Information Use the Asset page to view and configure general device information, including the system name, location, contact, system MAC Address, System Object ID, date, time, and system up time. To configure general device parameters: 1 Click System > General > Asset in the tree view to display the Asset page. Figure 9-1. AssetDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 157 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter/view the parameters: – System Name (0-159 Characters) — Enter the user-defined device name. – System Contact (0-159 Characters) — Enter the name of the contact person. – System Location (0-159 Characters) — Enter the location where the system is currently running. – MAC Address — Displays the device MAC address. – Sys Object ID — Displays the vendor's authoritative identification of the network management subsystem contained in the entity. – Date — Enter the current date (mandatory). This date can also be entered in the Manual Time Settings page. If SNTP has been defined, but the SNTP server is not available, the switch uses the date and time in this field and the Time field. – Time — Enter the current time (mandatory). This time can also be entered in the Manual Time Settings page. If SNTP has been defined, but the SNTP server is not available, the switch uses the date and time in this field and the Date field. – System Up Time — Displays the amount of time since the last device reset. 3 For each unit in the stack (displayed in Unit No.), the following information is displayed: – Service Tag — Displays the service reference number used when servicing the device. – Asset Tag — Enter the device asset tag. – Serial No. — Displays the device serial number. 4 Enter the Asset Tag (0-16 Characters) for each unit in the stack. This is the user-defined reference for the unit.158 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Entering Asset Information Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for entering fields displayed on the Asset page. The following is an example of the CLI commands Table 9-1. Asset CLI Command CLI Command Description snmp-server contact text no snmp-server contact Configures the system contact (sysContact) name. Use the no form of the command to remove the system contact information. snmp-server location text no snmp-server location Configures the system location string. Use the no form of this command to remove the location string. hostname name no hostname Specifies the device host name. Use the no form of the command to remove the existing host name. clock set hh:mm:ss {month|day} year Sets the system clock to this time. asset-tag [unit unit] tag no asset-tag [unit unit] Assigns the asset tag to the unit. Removes the asset tag from the unit. console (config)# asset-tag 2365491870Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 159 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY System Health To view the device’s power information and set fan administration state: 1 Click System > General > System Health in the tree view to display the System Health page. Figure 9-2. System Health The System Health page displays the following fields: – Unit No. — The unit in the stack for which information is displayed. Power Supply Status —Displays the following columns: – PS — The power status of the internal power unit. The possible options are: • Checked — The power supply is operating normally. • Unchecked — The power supply is not operating normally. • Not Present — The power supply is currently not present.160 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – RPS — The device has one of two auxiliary power supplies: Redundant Power Supply (RPS) for non-PoE devices and Modular Power Supply (MPS) for PoE devices. Only one of these may be present at one time. For each type of power supply, the possible options are: • Checked — The power supply is operating normally. • Unchecked — The power supply is not operating normally. • Not Present — The power supply is currently not present. – Temperature — Displays the temperature on the device. – Fan Status — The device has two fans. The device constantly measures the internal temperature, and powers the fans on/off according to the temperature. The user can set the fans to be constantly on. The possible options are: • Checked — The fans are operating normally. • Unchecked — At least one of the fans is not operating normally. – Fan Admin State — On/Auto status that user configured in the Edit page. – Fan Current Level — Specifies whether the fan is actually on or off. 2 The lower block displays the condition under which a fan will be turned on or off. – Fan Level — The on or off level. – Condition — The temperature at which the fans will be turned on or off. The device temperature is displayed in Celsius. The device temperature threshold is 40 C (104 F).Table 9-2 displays the temperature in Fahrenheit in increments of 5. NOTE: It is recommended to leave Fan User Level at Auto so that the fans operate according to the temperature of the switch. 3 To control the fans on a unit, or set the default value, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Unit ID — Select the unit ID whose fan will be adjusted.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 161 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Fan Admin State — Set one of the options: • Auto — Fans are turned on when the internal temperature of the switch is higher than the threshold displayed on the Summary page in the Condition field. • ON — Turns fan on under all conditions Table 9-2. Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table Viewing System Health Information Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed on the System Health page. Celsius Fahrenheit 0 32 5 41 10 50 15 59 20 68 25 77 30 86 35 95 40 104 Table 9-3. System Health CLI Command CLI Command Description show system [unit unit] Displays system information. system fans always-on [unit unit] no system fans always-on Sets the system fans to On regardless of device temperature. Use the no form of the command to return to default show system fans Displays the fans’ status.162 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Power over Ethernet A Power over Ethernet (PoE) switch is a type of PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment) that delivers electrical power to connected Powered Devices (PDs) over existing copper cables, without interfering with the network traffic, updating the physical network or modifying the network infrastructure. Using PoE eliminates the need to: • Place all network devices next to power sources. • Deploy double-cabling systems, significantly decreasing installation costs. PoE can be used in any network that deploys relatively low-powered devices connected to the Ethernet LAN. PDs are devices that receive power from the PowerConnect power supplies, such as: • IP phones console# show system Unit Type ---- ---------------------- 2 PowerConnect 5548 Unit Main Power Supply Redundant Power Supply ---- ----------------- ---------------------- 2 OK Unit Fans Status ---- ------------- 2 OK Unit Temperature (Celsius) Temperature Sensor Status ---- ------------------------- --------------------- 2 41 OK Unit Up time ---- --------------- 2 02,00:03:32Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 163 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Wireless access points • IP gateways • Audio and video remote monitoring devices PDs are connected to the device via the Gigabit ports. Error Conditions Traps are generated when the following occur: • Status change to port delivering/not delivering power to PD. • Indication that power usage is above the defined threshold. • Indication that power usage is below the threshold.164 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring PoE To configure PoE parameters on devices equipped with PoE: 1 Click System > General > Power over Ethernetin the tree view to display the Power Over Ethernet: Summary page. Figure 9-3. Power Over Ethernet: Summary 2 The PoE global parameters are displayed: – Power Status — The inline power source status. • On — The power supply unit is functioning. • Off — The power supply unit is not functioning. • Faulty — The power supply unit is functioning, but an error has occurred, for example, a power overload or a short circuit. – Nominal Power — The actual amount of power the device can supply, in watts.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 165 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Consumed Power — The amount of the power used by the device, in watts. 3 Enter the following parameters: – Power Limit Mode — Enter one of the following options for the system power limit mode. • Port — The power limit of the port depends on port configuration. • Max Port Power — In this mode, each port can get up to the maximum power, which is 15.4W. – System Usage Threshold (1-99 Percent) — Enter the percentage of power consumed before a trap is generated. – Traps — Enable/disable PoE traps on the device. If enabled, traps are generated if one of the following situations occurs: • Status change to port delivering/not delivering power to PD • Indication that power usage is above the defined threshold • Indication that power usage is below the threshold NOTE: If traps are enabled, you must also enable SNMP, and configure at least one SNMP notification recipient. 4 To view PoE port settings for a unit in the stack, select its Unit ID. The port PoE parameters are displayed for all ports on the unit. The fields displayed in this block are described in the Edit page. 5 To set PoE settings for a port, click Edit. 6 Select a port in the Port field, and enter the following PoE parameters for the PDs connected to this port. – PoE Admin Status — Select the device PoE mode. The possible options are: • Auto — Enables the Device Discovery protocol, and provides power to the device using the PoE unit. The Device Discovery Protocol enables the device to discover Powered Devices attached to the device interfaces, and to learn their classification. • Never — Disables the Device Discovery protocol, and stops the power supply to the device using the PoE module.166 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Power Priority Level— Enter the priority that determines the power that is used if the power supply is from Critical to Low. If, for example, the power supply is running at 99% usage, and port 1 is prioritized as Critical, but port 3 is prioritized as Low, port 1 is will receive power before port 3. – Power Limit (0-15.4) — Enter the maximum amount of power that the PoE unit may deliver to this port. – Powered Device (0-24 characters) — Enter a user-defined description of the PD connected to the port, such as: "Bob Smith’s telephone". The following fields are displayed on this page: – PoE Operational Status — Whether the port is currently providing power. If it is not providing power, the reason is displayed. – Power Consumption — The amount of power being consumed by the powered device. – Overload Counter — Total power overload occurrences. – Short Counter — Total power shortage occurrences. – Denied Counter — Number of times the powered device was denied power. – Absent Counter— Number of times the power supply was stopped to the PD because it was no longer detected. – Invalid Signature Counter — Number of times an invalid signature was received. Signatures are the means by which the powered device identifies itself to the PSE. Signatures are generated during powered device detection, classification, or maintenance.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 167 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Managing PoE Using the CLI Commands The following table describes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed on the Power Over Ethernet pages. Table 9-4. Power Over Ethernet CLI Commands CLI Command Description power inline {auto|never} Configures the administrative status of the inline power on an interface. power inline powered-device pdtype no power inline powered-device Adds a description of the powered device type. Use the no version of the command to remove the description. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. power inline priority {critical|high|low} no power inline priority Configures the priority of the interface from the point of view of inline power management. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. power inline usage-threshold no power inline usage-threshold Configures the threshold for triggering alarms. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. power inline traps enable no power inline traps enable Enables PoE device traps. Use the no form of this command to disable traps. power inline limit-mode {maxport-power|port} no power inline limit-mode Sets the power limit mode of the system. Use the no form of this command to return to default.168 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show power inline [[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet]port-number]|module stackmember-number] Displays PoE configuration information for all interfaces or for a unit in the stack. console# show power inline Unit Power Nominal Power Consumed Power Usage Threshold Traps ---- ------- ------------- ------------------ --------------- ----- 1 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable 2 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable 3 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable 4 Off 1 Watts 0 Watts (0%) 95 Disable Table 9-4. Power Over Ethernet CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 169 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Time Synchronization The system clock runs from the moment the system starts up, and keeps track of the date and time. The date and time may be either set manually, or it may be received from an SNTP server. This section describes how to set system time, and contains the following sections: • Manual Time Settings – Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time – CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time • System Time from an SNTP Server – Global Settings (Clock Source) – SNTP Global Settings – SNTP Authentication – SNTP Servers – SNTP Interfaces – CLI Script for Receiving Time from an SNTP Server Manual Time Settings This section describes how to set the system time manually on the device. It contains the following topics: • Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time • CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time170 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Setting System Time and Daylight Savings Time Use the Manual Time Settings page to set system date/time manually (as opposed to receiving them from an external SNTP server). For more information on SNTP, see "System Time from an SNTP Server" on page 177. If system time is kept using an external SNTP clock, and the external SNTP clock fails, the system time reverts to the time set here or in the Asset page. In addition to setting the local clock, you can use this page to enable Daylight Savings Time (DST) on the device. The following is a list of DST start and end times in various countries: • Albania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Australia — From the end of October until the end of March. • Australia - Tasmania — From beginning of October until the end of March. • Armenia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Austria — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Bahamas — From April to October, in conjunction with U.S. summer hours. • Belarus — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Belgium — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Brazil — From the 3rd Sunday in October until the 3rd Saturday in March. During the period of Daylight Saving Time, Brazilian clocks go forward one hour in most of the Brazilian southeast. • Chile — Easter Island 9th March 12th October. The first Sunday in March or after 9th March. • China — China does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Canada — From the first Sunday in April until the last Sunday of October. Daylight Saving Time is usually regulated by provincial and territorial governments. Exceptions may exist in certain municipalities. • Cuba — From the last Sunday of March to the last Sunday of October. • Cyprus — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Denmark — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Egypt — Last Friday in April until the last Thursday in September. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 171 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Estonia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Finland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • France — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Germany — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Greece — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Hungary — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • India — India does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Iran — From 1st Farvardin until the 1st Mehr. • Iraq — From 1st April until 1st October. • Ireland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Israel — Varies year-to-year. • Italy — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Japan — Japan does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Jordan — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Latvia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Lebanon — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Lithuania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Luxembourg — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Macedonia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Mexico — From the first Sunday in April at 02:00 to the last Sunday in October at 02:00. • Moldova — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Montenegro — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Netherlands — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • New Zealand — From the first Sunday in October until the first Sunday on or after 15th March. • Norway — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Paraguay — From 6th April until 7th September. • Poland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Portugal — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October.172 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Romania — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Russia — From the 29th March until the 25th October. • Serbia — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Slovak Republic — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • South Africa — South Africa does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Spain — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Sweden — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Switzerland — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • Syria — From 31st March until 30th October. • Taiwan — Taiwan does not operate Daylight Saving Time. • Turkey — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • United Kingdom — Last weekend of March until the last weekend of October. • United States of America — From the second Sunday of March at 02:00 to the first Sunday of November at 02:00.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 173 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To manually set the device time: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > Manual Time Settingsin the tree view to display the Manual Time Settings page. Figure 9-4. Manual Time Settings 2 Enter the following local settings: – Date — The system date. – Local Time — The system time. – Time Zone Offset — The difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and local time. For example, the Time Zone Offset for Paris is GMT +1:00, while the local time in New York is GMT –5:00. 3 To set Daylight Savings Time (DST), select the Daylight Savings field and select one of the possible options: – USA — The device switches to DST at 2 a.m. on the second Sunday of March, and reverts to standard time at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of November. 174 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – European — The device switches to DST at 1:00 am on the last Sunday in March, and reverts to standard time at 1:00 am on the last Sunday in October. The European option applies to EU members, and other European countries using the EU standard. – Other — Specifies that you will set DST manually in the fields described below. If you selected USA or European you are finished. If you selected Other, proceed to the next step. There are two types of DST possible when Others is selected. You can set a specific date in a particular year, or you can set a recurring setting, irrespective of the year. For a specific setting in a particular year, complete the Daylight Savings area, and for a recurring setting, complete the Recurring area. If Other is selected, the From and To fields must be defined either in the Non-recurring or Recurring section. 4 To enter non-recurring DST parameters, enter the following fields: – From — The time that DST begins. The possible options are: • DD/MMM/YY — The date, month, and year at which DST begins. • HH/MM — The time (hour and minutes) at which DST begins. – To — The time that DST ends. The possible options are: • DD/MMM/YY — The date, month, and year at which DST ends. • HH/MM — The time (hour and minutes) at which DST ends. 5 To enter recurring DST parameters, select Recurring and enter the following fields: – From — The time that DST begins each year, for example, DST begins locally every second Sunday in April at 5:00 am. The possible options are: • Day — The day of the week from which DST begins every year. • Week — The week within the month from which DST begins every year. • Month — The month of the year in which DST begins every year. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 175 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Time — The time at which DST begins every year. – To — The recurring time that DST ends each year, for example, DST ends locally every fourth Friday in October at 5:00 am. The possible options are: • Day — The day of the week at which DST ends every year. • Week — The week within the month at which DST ends every year. • Month — The month of the year in which DST ends every year. • Time — The time at which DST ends every year. CLI Commands for Setting Manual Time The following steps (in any order) must be completed before setting time manually: • Set system time • Define the time zone in relation to GMT. • Configure Daylight Savings Time. The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Manual Time Setting pages when the clock source is Local. Table 9-5. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands CLI Description clock set hh:mm:ss {[day month]|[month day]} year Set the system clock to this time. clock summer-time zone recurring {usa|eu|{week day month hh:mm week day month hh:mm}}[offset] Configures the system to automatically switch to summer time (according to the USA and European standards) every year on a recurring basis. 176 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY clock summer-time zone date date month year hh:mm date month year hh:mm [offset] clock summer-time zone date month date year hh:mm month date year hh:mm [offset] no clock summer-time Configures the system to automatically switch to summer time (Daylight Savings Time) for a specific period - date/month/year format. Use the no form of the command to configure the system not to switch to summer time (Daylight Savings Time). clock timezone zone hoursoffset [minutes offset] Sets the time zone and names it "zone" for display purposes. show clock Displays the time and date from the system clock. Table 9-5. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands (Continued) CLI DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 177 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY A sample script to set system time manually is shown below System Time from an SNTP Server This section describes how to receive date/time from an SNTP server. It contains the following topics: • SNTP Overview • SNTP Global Settings • SNTP Authentication • SNTP Servers • SNTP Interfaces Table 9-6. CLI Script to Set Manual System Time CLI Description Console# clock set 13:32:00 7 Nov 2010 Set the system time. console# configure console(config)# clock timezone Ohio +2 Set the time zone to GMT plus 2 hours. The name of the zone "Ohio" is purely for documentation purposes. This is not mandatory for manual time, but is recommended. It enables anyone seeing the time to know what that time is in respect to their timezone. console(config)# clock summer-time Ohio_Summer recurring usa Set Daylight Savings Time such that it recurs every year and is based on the summer time schedule of the USA. The name of the zone "Ohio_Summer" is for documentation purposes only. console(config)# exit console# show clock Display the system time.178 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNTP Overview The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), which provides accurate network switch clock time synchronization of up to 100 milliseconds. The implementation of SNTP is based on SNTPv4 (RFC 2030). SNTP is a simple and lighter version of NTP, and can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation, described in RFC-1305, is not required. SNTP operates with NTP, thus an SNTP client can work with both SNTP and NTP servers. The switch operates only as a client, and cannot provide time services to other systems. SNTP Server Types The switch can accept time information from the following server types: • Unicast Polling for Unicast information is used for polling a server whose IP address is known. This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time, as it is most secure. Up to eight SNTP servers can be defined. If this method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined in the SNTP Servers page. Time levels T1 - T4 (see the "Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server" on page 180 section) are used to determine from which server time information is accepted. If Unicast polling is not enabled or if no servers are defined on the device, the device accepts time information from any SNTP server of the type that is enabled, which responds. • Anycast Polling for Anycast information is used when the SNTP server’s IP address is not defined or it cannot be reached. If this method is enabled, time information can be received from any SNTP server on the network. The Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 179 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY device time and date are synchronized when it proactively requests synchronization information. Anycast polling to get time information is preferable to Broadcast polling, because it is more secure. Time levels T3 and T4 are used to determine from which server time information is accepted. • Broadcast Broadcast information is used if receiving Broadcast packets has been enabled, and one of the following situations occurs: – The SNTP server IP address has not been defined. – Several time-information packets are received and the Broadcast time is best according to the algorithm defined in "Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server" on page 180. Broadcast is the least secure method of receiving time, because it is both unsecured and the time information was not specifically requested by the device. Anycast is also unsecured, but time-information packets are only accepted if they were requested. Stratums Each SNTP server is characterized by stratums, which define the accuracy of its clock. The stratum is the distance, in terms of NTP hops, from the most authoritative time server. The lower the stratum (where zero is the lowest), the more accurate the clock. The switch accepts time from stratum 1 and above. The following provides examples of clocks from various stratums: • Stratum 0 — A real time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system. • Stratum 1 — A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. • Stratum 2 — The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path, for example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, via NTP, from a Stratum 1 server.180 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Algorithm for Selecting Designated SNTP Server Messages received from SNTP servers are logged, until there are three responding servers, or the timer expires. In any event, when the third message is received, the timer expires. A server is selected to be the “designated server” according to the following criteria: • The stratum (the distance in terms of NTP hops from the best authoritative time servers) is considered, and the server with the best (lowest) stratum is selected. • If there is a tie in stratums, packets from servers defined on the device are preferred to Anycast packets, which in turn are preferred to Broadcast packets. • If multiple servers pass the above criteria, then the server that sent the first (earliest) time packet is chosen. If a better server is discovered later, it is selected to be the “designated server” at that time. Polling You can configure the system to acquire time information in the following ways: • Enable polling — Time information is requested every polling interval. • Do not enable polling — Time information is received when the system is brought up and every time that a topological change is made to the Running Configuration file, for example when an SNTP Unicast server is added. This is configured by the user in the SNTP Global Settings page. On power up, when the switch sends a request and there is no reply, it issues another request (three retries at most) after 20 seconds of waiting. If no SNTP server is found, the process is invoked every “poll interval” (set in the SNTP Global Settings page), and a management trap is triggered. Authentication You can require that SNTP servers be authenticated, although this is not mandatory (see the SNTP Authentication pages). Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 181 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MD5 (Message Digest 5) Authentication safeguards device synchronization paths to SNTP servers. MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash value. MD5 is a variation of MD4, and increases MD4 security. MD5 both verifies the integrity of the communication and authenticates the origin of the communication. Global Settings (Clock Source) System time can be set manually, or it may be received from an external SNTP server. You if wish to set the system time manually, you do not to use the Global Settings page, because the default is manual (local) system time. To set the clock source: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 9-5. Global Settings182 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Select the Clock Source. The possible options are: – Local—System time is taken from the device’s internal clock. Set this as defined in "Manual Time Settings" on page 169. – SNTP— System time is set via an SNTP server. Set SNTP parameters as defined in "System Time from an SNTP Server" on page 177. Defining the Clock Source Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the clock source. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNTP Global Settings If SNTP was selected as the clock source in the Global Settings page, you must define the mechanism of setting time from an SNTP server. This is done in the SNTP pages, described below. Table 9-7. Clock Source CLI Command CLI Description clock source {sntp} no clock source Configures an external time source for the system clock. Use the no form of this command to disable the external time source. show clock [detail] Displays the time and date from the system clock and its source. console# configure console(config)# clock source sntp console# show clock detail 3:29:03 UTC Sep 7 2010 Time source is sntp Time zone: Offset is UTC+0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 183 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define the types of server from which the device accepts SNTP information and the polling interval: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Global Settings in the tree view to display the SNTP Global Settings page. Figure 9-6. SNTP Global Settings 2 Enter the fields: – Poll Interval (60-86400) — Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the SNTP servers are polled. – Receive Broadcast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time information from Broadcast servers. – Receive Anycast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time information from Anycast SNTP servers. – Receive Unicast Servers Updates — Enable/disable receiving time information from the SNTP servers defined on the switch. – Poll Unicast Requests — Enable/disable sending SNTP Unicast server time information requests to the SNTP server.184 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining SNTP Global Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Global Settings pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNTP Authentication Use the SNTP Authentication page to enable/disable SNTP authentication between the device and an SNTP server, and to set the means by which the SNTP server is authenticated. Table 9-8. SNTP Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp client poll timer seconds no sntp client poll timer Sets the polling time for an SNTP client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. sntp broadcast client enable no sntp broadcast client enable Enables SNTP Broadcast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP Broadcast clients. sntp anycast client enable no sntp anycast client enable Enables SNTP Anycast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP Anycast clients. sntp unicast client enable no sntp unicast client enable Enables SNTP predefined Unicast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP Unicast clients. show sntp configuration Displays SNTP configuration console(config)# sntp anycast client enableDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 185 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure SNTP authentication: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Authentication in the tree view to display the SNTP Authentication: Summary page. Figure 9-7. SNTP Authentication: Summary The previously-defined authentication keys are displayed. 2 Enable/disable SNTP Authentication. This enables/disables authenticating SNTP sessions between the device and an SNTP server. 3 Multiple keys can be defined. To add a new SNTP authentication key, click Add, and enter the fields. – Encryption Key ID (1 - 4294967295) — Enter the number used to identify this SNTP authentication key internally. – Authentication Key (1 - 8 Characters) — Enter the key used for authentication. The SNTP server must send this key for the switch to use its time/date information.186 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Trusted Key — Check to specify that the encryption key is used to authenticate the (Unicast) SNTP server. If this is not checked, the key is not used for authentication (and another key(s) is used). Defining SNTP Authentication Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Authentication pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-9. SNTP Authentication CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp authenticate no sntp authenticate Defines authentication for received SNTP traffic from servers. Use the no form of this command to disable the feature. sntp trusted-key keynumber no sntp trusted-key keynumber Authenticates the identity of a system to which SNTP will synchronize. Use the no form of this command to disable system identity authentication. sntp authentication-key key-number md5 value no sntp authenticationkey key-number Defines an authentication key for SNTP. Use the no form of this command to remove the authentication key for SNTP. console(config)# sntp authenticate console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8 console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkkeyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 187 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNTP Servers To add an SNTP server or display SNTP server information: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Servers in the tree view to display the SNTP Servers: Summary page. Figure 9-8. SNTP Servers: Summary The following is displayed for the previously-defined servers: – SNTP Server — IP address of server. – Polling — Polls the selected SNTP server for system time information, when enabled. – Encryption Key ID — Key Identification used to communicate between the SNTP server and device. 188 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Preference — SNTP server providing SNTP system time information. The system displays on of the following options: • Primary — The server from which time was last accepted. • Secondary — All other servers from which time was received. – Status — The operating SNTP server status. The possible options are: • Up — The SNTP server is currently operating normally. • Down — An SNTP server is currently not available, for example, the SNTP server is currently not connected or is currently down. • In progress — The SNTP server is currently sending or receiving SNTP information. • Unknown — The progress of the SNTP information currently being sent is unknown, for example, the device is currently looking for an interface. – Last Response — The last time a response was received from the SNTP server. – Offset — The estimated offset of the server's clock, relative to the local clock, in milliseconds. The host determines the value of this offset, using the algorithm described in RFC 2030. – Delay — The estimated round-trip delay of the server's clock, relative to the local clock over the network path between them, in milliseconds. The host determines the value of this delay, using the algorithm described in RFC 2030. 2 To add an SNTP Server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is used for the IP address of the SNTP server. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. Select one of the possible options: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 189 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. Select one of the possible options: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – SNTP Server — Enter the SNTP server’s IP address. – Poll Interval — Enable/disable polling the selected SNTP server for system time information, when enabled. – Encryption Key ID — Check to use an encryption key, and select one of the encryption keys that was defined in the SNTP Authentication pages. Defining SNTP Servers Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Server pages. Table 9-10. SNTP Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp server {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|ipv6- address|hostname} [poll] [key key-id] no sntp server {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|ipv6- address|hostname} Configures the device to use SNTP to request and accept SNTP traffic from a server. Use the no form of this command to remove a server from the list of SNTP servers. sntp unicast client poll no sntp unicast client poll Enables polling for the SNTP predefined Unicast clients. Use the no form of this command to disable the polling for the SNTP client. show sntp status Displays the SNTP server statuses.190 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNTP Interfaces If receiving time information from Anycast servers is enabled, you can determine through which interface the Anycast packets are sent and received. If no interface is defined, Anycast requests are not sent. console(config)# sntp server 100.1.1.1 poll key 10 console# show sntp status Clock is unsynchronized Unicast servers: Server Status Last Response Offset Delay [mSec] [mSec] --------------- --------- ------------- -------- ------- Anycast server: Server Interface Status Last Response Offset Delay [mSec] [mSec] --------------- -------- -------------- ------ ------ Broadcast: Interface IP Address Last Response ------------ --------------- ----------------------- gi1/0/1 00:00:00.0 Jan 1 2010Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 191 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To enable receiving Anycast updates on an interface: 1 Click System > Time Synchronization > SNTP Interface Settings to display the SNTP Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-9. SNTP Interface Settings: Summary The following fields are displayed for every interface for which an SNTP interface has been enabled: – Interface — The port, LAG or VLAN on which SNTP is enabled. – Receive Servers Updates — Displays whether the interface is enabled to receive updates from the SNTP server. 2 To add an interface that can receive SNTP server updates, click Add. 3 Select an interface and enable/disable State to indicate that the interface can now receive/not receive SNTP server updates.192 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining SNTP Interface Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the SNTP Interface Settings pages. Table 9-11. SNTP Interface Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description sntp client enable {[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-id|vlan vlan-id|portchannel LAG-number]} no sntp client enable {[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et]port-number|vlan vlan-id|portchannel LAG-number]} Enables the SNTP client on an interface in Global Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the SNTP client. sntp client enable no sntp client enable Enables SNTP client on an interface in Interface Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the SNTP client. show sntp configuration Shows the configuration of the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 193 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: CLI Script for Receiving Time from an SNTP Server The following is a sample script that configures receiving system time from an SNTP server. console# configure console(config)# sntp client enable gi1/0/1 console# exit console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# sntp client enable console# show sntp configuration SNTP port : 123. Polling interval: 1024 seconds. No MD5 authentication keys. Authentication is not required for synchronization. No trusted keys. Unicast Clients: Disabled Unicast Clients Polling: Disabled Server Polling Encryption Key ----------------------------- ---------- ----------- Broadcast Clients: disabled Anycast Clients: disabled Broadcast Interfaces: gi1/0/1 Table 9-12. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands CLI Description console# configure console(config)#clock source sntp Set the source of time as an SNTP server.194 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console(config)#sntp client poll timer 6 Set polling time to 6 seconds. console(config)#sntp unicast client enable Enable accepting time from predefined Unicast clients. console(config)#sntp unicast client poll Enable polling predefined Unicast clients. console(config)#sntp server 10.4.1.3 poll Define the server that will be used as an SNTP server. console(config)#exit console# show sntp configuration Display SNTP settings. console# show sntp status Display SNTP servers. Table 9-12. Manual Time Setting CLI Commands (Continued) CLI DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 195 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Logs The Logs feature enables the switch to keep several, independent logs. Each log is a set of entries that record system events. It contains the following topics: • System Log Overview • Global Parameters • RAM Log • Log File (in Flash) • Login History • Remote Log Server System Log Overview System logs record events and report errors or informational messages. Some aspects of system logging can be configured, as described below. When you configure system logging, the configuration applies to all units in the stack. Some events are automatically logged, such as hardware problems. You may enable/disable logging the following types of events: • Authentication Events in the Global Parameters page • Copy File Events in the Global Parameters page • Management Access Events in the Global Parameters page • Login History in the Login History page Event messages have a unique format, as per the System Logs (SYSLOG) protocol recommended message format for all error reporting, for example, SYSLOG and local device reporting messages are assigned a severity code, and include a message mnemonic that identifies the source application generating the message. Messages may be filtered, based on their urgency or relevancy. Events may be logged to the following destinations: • Console • Logging buffer (RAM)— Messages are stored in a cyclical file buffer. When the maximum number of messages is reached, messages are written starting at the beginning of the buffer (overwriting the old messages). 196 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Logs stored on the Logging buffer are deleted when the device is reset. • Logging file (flash) — Messages are stored in flash memory. When the buffer is full, messages are written starting at the beginning of the memory block (overwriting the old messages). • SYSLOG Server — Messages are sent to a remote server. This is useful for central and remote management and to provide more space for storage of messages. Up-to eight SYSLOG servers can be defined in the Remote Log Server Settings pages. You can select where to send logging messages according to their severity. Each of the severity level can be directed to the console, RAM log, flash log file or SYSLOG server or to any combination of these destinations. Global Parameters Use the Global Parameters page to enable/disable logging for the following logging severity levels. – Emergency — If the device is down or not functioning properly, an emergency log message is saved to the specified logging location. – Alert — An alert log is saved if there is a serious device malfunction, for example, all device features are down. – Critical — A critical log is saved if a critical device malfunction occurs, for example, two device ports are not functioning, while the rest of the device ports remain functional. – Error — A device error has occurred, for example, a single port is offline. – Warning — The lowest level of a device warning. The device is functioning, but an operational problem has occurred. – Notice — Provides device information to which you might have to respond. – Informational — Provides device information to which you do not have to respond. – Debug — Provides debugging messages. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 197 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY If you enable logging, some events are automatically logged, and in addition, you can enable/disable specific types of logging and set their destination. To configure logging: 1 Click System > Logs > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 9-10. Global Parameters 2 Enable/disable logging in the Logging drop-down list. Console logs are enabled by default, and cannot be disabled. 3 If Logging is enabled, select the types of events to be logged in addition to the events that are always logged: – Log Authentication Events — Enable/disable generating logs when users are authenticated. 198 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Log Copy Files Events — Enable/disable generating logs when files are copied. – Log Management Access Events — Enable/disable generating logs when the device is accessed using a management method, for example, each time the device is accessed using SSH, a device log is generated. 4 To select the destination of logging messages, according to their severity levels, check the minimum severity level that will be associated with the console log, RAM log, Log file (Flash memory) and remote SYSLOG servers. When a severity level is selected, all severity levels above the selection are selected automatically. Enabling Logs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Global Parameters page. Table 9-13. Global Log Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description logging on no logging Enables error message logging. Turns off error message logging. logging console level no logging console level Limits messages logged to the console, based on severity. Use the no form of this command to disable logging limiting to the console. logging file level no logging file Limits SYSLOG messages stored in flash memory, based on severity. Use the no form of this command to cancel using the buffer. file-system logging {copy|delete-rename} Enables the logging of file system events.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 199 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: management logging {deny} no management logging {deny} Enables Management Access List (ACL) deny events. Use the no form of this command to disable logging management access list events. aaa logging {login} no aaa logging {login} Enables logging authentication login events. Use the no form of this command to disable logging authentication login events. console# configure console(config)# logging on console(config)# logging console errors console(config)# logging file alerts Table 9-13. Global Log Parameters CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description200 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RAM Log To manage the RAM log buffer: 1 Click System > Logs > RAM Log in the tree view to display the RAM Log page. Figure 9-11. RAM Log The Max RAM Log Entries (20-400) line, which contains the maximum number of RAM log entries permitted, is displayed. When the log buffer is full, the oldest entries are overwritten. The Current Setting contains how many entries are currently permitted, and you can change this number in the New Setting (after reset) field. The following is displayed for the existing logs: – Log Index — The log number in the RAM Log table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 201 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Log Time — The time at which the log was entered into the RAM Log table. – Severity — The log severity. – Description — The log entry text. 2 To remove all entries from the RAM log, click Clear Log. Viewing and Clearing the RAM Log Table Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the size of the RAM log buffer, viewing, and clearing entries in the RAM log. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-14. RAM Log Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description logging buffered size no logging buffered Sets the number of SYSLOG messages stored in the internal buffer (RAM). Use the no form of this command to cancel using the buffer. show logging Displays the RAM logging buffer. clear logging Clears the RAM logging buffer. console(config)# logging buffered 300 04-Oct-2010 09:47:04 %SYSLOG-N-LOGGINGBFRSIZE: the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer will be changed to 300 (after reboot).202 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Log File (in Flash) To view and/or clear the flash memory log file: 1 Click System > Logs > Log File in the tree view to display the Log File page. Figure 9-12. Log File The following is displayed for the existing logs: – Log Index — The log number in the Log file. – Log Time — The time at which the log was entered. – Severity — The log severity. – Description — The log entry text. 2 To remove all entries from the log file, click Clear Log.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 203 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying the Log File Table Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Log File page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Login History Use the Login History page to monitor users, including the time a user logged in, and the protocol used to log on to the device. Table 9-15. Log File Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description show logging file Displays the logging state and the SYSLOG messages stored in the logging file. console# show logging file Logging is enabled. Console Logging: Level info. Console Messages: 0 Dropped. Buffer Logging: Level info. Buffer Messages: 62 Logged, 62 Displayed, 200 Max. File Logging: Level debug. File Messages: 11 Logged, 51 Dropped. SysLog server 1.1.1.1 Logging: info. Messages: 0 Dropped. 01-Jan-2000 01:12:01 :%COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully 01-Oct-2010 01:11:49 :%LINK-I-Up: gi/1/0/11 01-Oct-2010 01:11:46 :%LINK-I-Up: gi/1/0/12204 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To enable user history logging and view user login history: 1 Click System > Logs > Login History in the tree view to display the Login History page. Figure 9-13. Login History The login history for the selected user or all users is displayed. 2 Enable/disable Login History to File to record login history. 3 Select a user or All from the User Name drop-down list. The login history for this user is displayed in the following fields: • Login Time — The time the selected user logged on to the device. • User Name — The user that logged on to the device. • Protocol — The means by which the user logged on to the device. • Location — The IP address of the station from which the device was accessed.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 205 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying the Device Login History Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing and setting fields displayed in the Login History page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-16. Login History CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa login-history file no aaa login-history file Enables writing to the login history file. Use the no form of this command to disable writing to the login history file. show users login-history [username] Displays the user’s login history. console (config)# aaa login-history file console# show users login-history Login Time Username Protocol Location ----------- -------- -------- ---------- 01-Oct-2010 23:58:17 admin HTTP 172.16.1.8 01-Oct-2010 07:59:23 admin Telnet 172.16.0.8206 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Remote Log Server Log messages can be sent to remote log servers, using the SYSLOG protocol. To add a remote log server: 1 Click System > Logs > Remote Server Settings in the tree view to display the Remote Log Server: Summary page. Figure 9-14. Remote Log Server: Summary The previously-defined remote servers are displayed. 2 To add a remote log server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 207 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – New Log Server IP Address — Enter the IP address of the remote SYSLOG server. – UDP Port (1-65535) — Enter the UDP port to which the logs are sent for the selected server. – Facility — Select a user-defined application from which system logs are sent to the remote server. Only a single facility can be assigned to a single server. If a second facility level is assigned, the first facility level is overridden. All applications defined for a device utilize the same facility on a server. – Description (0-64 Characters) — Enter a server description. – Severity to Include — Check the severity levels to be logged to the remote server. The event severity levels are listed on this page in descending order from the highest severity to the lowest. When a severity level is selected to appear in a log, all higher severity events are automatically selected to appear in the log. When a security level is not selected, no lower severity events appear in the log. 208 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Working with Remote Server Logs Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for working with remote log servers. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-17. Remote Log Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description logging host {ipv4-address|ipv6- address|hostname} [port port-id] [severity level] [facility facility] [description text] no logging host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} Logs messages to a remote server with this IP address. Use the no form of this command to delete the SYSLOG server with the specified address from the list of SYSLOGs. show syslog-servers Displays list of SYSLOG servers. console (configure) # logging host 1.1.1.1 console# show syslog-servers Device Configuration --------------------------------------------------------- IP Address Port Facility Severity Description ----------- ----- -------- ----------- ----------- 1.1.1.1 514 local7 info 1.1.1.2 514 local7 info 1.1.1.3 514 local7 info 1.1.1.4 514 local7 infoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 209 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IP Addressing This section describes how to configure IP addresses on the switch, and contains the following topics: • IP Addressing Overview • IPv4 Interface Parameters • DHCP IPv4 Interface • IPv4 Static Routing • IPv6 Interfaces • IPv6 Default Gateway • ISATAP Tunnel • IPv6 Neighbors • IPv6 Routes Table • Domain Name System • Default Domain Names • Host Name Mapping • ARP • UDP Relay IP Addressing Overview The device functions as an IPv6-compliant host, as well as an IPv4-host (also known as dual stack). This enables device operation in a pure-IPv6 network, as well as in a combined IPv4/IPv6 network. Difference Between IPv4 and IPv6 Addressing The primary difference between IPv4 to IPv6 is the length of network addresses. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits, whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits. Thus, IPv6 addresses enable the use of many more unique addresses. The 128-bit IPv6 address format is divided into eight groups of four hexadecimal digits. Abbreviation of this format by replacing a group of zeros with double colons (::) is acceptable. IPv6 address representation can be further simplified by suppressing the leading zeros.210 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY All IPv6 address formats are acceptable, yet for display purposes, the system displays the most abbreviated form, which replaces groups of zeros with double colons and removes the leading zeros. IPv6 Prefixes While Unicast IPv6 addresses written with their prefix lengths are permitted, in practice their prefix lengths are always 64 bits, and therefore are not required to be expressed. Any prefix that is less than 64 bits is a route or address range that summarizes a portion of the IPv6 address space. For every assignment of an IP address to an interface, the system runs the Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) algorithm to ensure uniqueness. An intermediary transition mechanism is required for IPv6-only nodes to communicate with IPv6 nodes over an IPv4 infrastructure. The tunneling mechanism implemented is the Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP). This protocol treats the IPv4 network as a virtual IPv6 local-link, with each IPv4 address mapped to a Link Local IPv6 address. IPv4 Interface Parameters You can assign IP addresses to the interface in the following ways: • Manual Assignment — Described below • DHCP Server Assignment — Described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214 Multiple IP addresses can be configured in the IPv4 Interface Parameters pages. These IP addresses can be assigned to a port, LAG, or VLAN interface. When an IP address is assigned, it is checked for uniqueness in the following way: • A gratuitous ARP request is sent three times every three seconds. • If after (3+1)*3 = 12 seconds the switch has not received the ARP response, the IP address is considered to be unique. • During the procedure the switch has to reply to gratuitous ARP and probe ARP requests with the validated IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 211 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The IP address is assigned even if the above validation procedure concludes that the IP address in question is not unique, but a SYSLOG message is generated. In addition to the above validation procedure every time a switch receives an ARP request with a sender IP address that is equal to its IP address defined on the input interface it sends a SYSLOG message informing of IP duplication, containing the sender IP and MAC addresses, from the received ARP message. To assign an IP address to an interface, and to define subnets to which traffic can be routed: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv4 Interface Parameters in the tree view to display the IP Interface Parameters: Summary page. Figure 9-15. IPv4 Interface Parameters: Summary212 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The previously-assigned IP addresses are displayed. 2 To add an IP address to an interface, click Add, and enter the fields: – IP Address — Enter the IP address assigned to the interface. – Network Mask — Select the subnetwork mask to which traffic can be routed. – Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the IP address prefix of the subnetwork. – Interface — Select the interface for which the IP address is defined. Select an interface type Port, LAG, or VLAN and the specific interface number. Defining IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv4 Interfaces Parameters page. Table 9-18. IPv4 Interface Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip address ip-address {mask|prefix-length} no ip address [ip-address] Sets an IP address. Use the no form of the command to remove an IP address. show ip interface [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet]port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IP.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 213 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following are sample procedures to configure a static IPv4 address on an interface using CLI and then to remove it: Table 9-19. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Statically on a VLAN CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter Interface mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ip address 10.5.225.40 /27 Set the routing interface with prefix length of 27. console(config-if)# ip defaultgateway 10.5.225.33 Set the address of the default gateway console(config-if)# no ip address Remove the address (if required). Table 9-20. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Statically on a Port CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode for port 1 on unit 1. console(config)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an IP interface (Layer 3 mode). console(config-if)# ip address 10.5.225.40 /27 Configure an IP address with prefix length of 27. console(config-if)# ip defaultgateway 10.5.225.33 Set the address of the default gateway console(config-if)# no ip address Remove the address (if required).214 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP IPv4 Interface The switch can operate in the following ways: • It can function as a DHCP client that obtains its own IP from a DHCP server, as described in this section • It can function as a DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to other devices, as described in "DHCP Server" on page 297 When the interface is configured as a DHCP client, it keeps requesting an IP address from the DHCP server, until it receives one. It then sends Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets to confirm the uniqueness of the IP address. If the ARP response shows that the IP address is in use, the switch sends a DHCPDECLINE message to the DHCP server, and sends another DHCPDISCOVER packet that restarts the process. IP address collisions occur when the same IP address is used in the same IP subnet by more than one device. Address collisions require administrative actions on the DHCP server and/or the devices that collide. Up to 32 interfaces (ports, LAGs, and/or VLAN) on the switch can be configured with a static or dynamic IP address. The IP subnets to which these IP addresses belong are known as directly connected/attached IP subnets. The IP address assignment rules for the switch are as follows: • If the IP address on the switch is changed, the switch issues gratuitous ARP packets to the corresponding VLAN, to check IP address collisions. • When a client must renew its lease, prior to its expiration date, a DHCPREQUEST message is sent. • A specific interface can have either a static IP address or a dynamic IP address, but not both.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 215 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define the switch as a DHCP client: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > DHCP IPv4 Interface in the tree view to display the DHCP IPv4 Interface: Summary page. Figure 9-16. DHCP IPv4 Interface: Summary216 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The previously-configured DHCP IPv4 interfaces are displayed. 2 To add an interface that can receive an IP address, click Add and select the whether the interface is a port, LAG or VLAN in the Interface field. Defining DHCP IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the DHCP IPv4 Interface pages. Table 9-21. DHCP IPv4 Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip address dhcp no ip address dhcp Acquires an IP address on an Ethernet interface from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Use the no form of this command to release an acquired IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 217 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DHCP IPv4 Interfaces Using CLI The following is a sample CLI script to configure a dynamic IPv4 address on an interface and then to remove it: IPv4 Static Routing IPv4 static routes can be configured for IP addresses that are not on directly connected networks. These are defined in the IPv4 Static Routing pages. Table 9-22. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Dynamically on a VLAN CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN 1. console(config)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an IP interface (Layer 3 mode). console(config-if)# ip address dhcp Use the DHCP protocol to acquire the IP address. console(config-if)# no ip address dhcp Remove the address (if required). Table 9-23. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv4 Dynamically on a Port CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ip address dhcp Use the DHCP protocol to acquire the IP address. console(config-if)# no switchport Enable the port to work as an IP interface (Layer 3 mode). console(config-if)# no ip address dhcp Remove the address (if required).218 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY When routing traffic, the next hop is determined according to the longest prefix match (LPM algorithm). A destination IPv4 address may match multiple routes in the IPv4 Static Route table. The switch uses the matched route with the longest prefix match. To add an IPv4 static route: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv4 Static Routing in the tree view to display the IPv4 Static Routing: Summary page. Figure 9-17. IPv4 Static Routing: Summary 2 Click Add to add a destination, and enter the fields: – Destination IP Prefix — Enter the destination IPv4 prefix. If all zeros are entered, this represents a default route. – Network Mask — Select the destination IPv4 mask. – Prefix Length — Select the length of the destination IPv4 address prefix. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 219 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Next Hop — Enter the IP address to which the packet is forwarded on the route to the destination address. This is typically the address of a neighboring switch. – Route Type — Select the route type. The possible options are: • Reject — Rejects the route and stops routing to the destination network via all gateways. This ensures that if a frame arrives with the destination IP of this route, it is dropped. • Remote — The route is a remote path. – Metric (1-255) — Enter the administrative distance (cost) to the destination. Defining IPv4 Static Routing Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IPv4 static routing. The following is an example of the CLI command: Table 9-24. IPv4 Static Routing CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip routing no ip routing Enables IPv4 Routing. Use the no format of the command to disable IPv4 Routing. ip route prefix {mask|prefixlength} ip-address-next-hop [metric distance] [reject-route] no ip route prefix {mask|prefixlength} [ip-address-next-hop] Configures static routes. Use the no form of this command to remove static routes. show ip route Displays the current routing table state. console(config)# ip route prefix 192.168.1.1 /8 10.5.234.255 metric 3 reject-route220 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Two IP Networks on Two Different VLANS Using CLI The following shows how to configure two IP networks on two different VLANS using CLI: To test this setup described in Figure 9-18: 1 Connect a host whose address is 1.1.1.2 to interface 1/0/1 (default route 1.1.1.1) 2 Connect a host whose address 2.1.1.2 to port 1/0/2 (default route 2.1.1.1) 3 Ping from 1.1.1.2 to 2.1.1.2 to verify the configuration Table 9-25. Sample CLI Script to Configure Two IP Networks on Two Different VLANSs CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# vlan database Enter VLAN mode. console(config-vlan)# vlan 100-150 Create VLANs number 100 to 150. console(config-vlan)# exit Exit VLAN mode. console(config)#interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode for port 1 on unit 1. console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 100 Make port a member of VLAN 100. console(config-if)# ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Set the IP address with mask. console(config-vlan)# exit Exit Interface mode for port. console(config)#interface gi1/0/2 Enter Interface mode for port 2 on unit 1. console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 150 Make port a member of VLAN 150. console(config-if)# ip address 2.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Set the IP address with mask. console(config-vlan)# exit Exit Interface mode for port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 221 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Figure 9-18. IP Routing Setup IPv6 Interfaces The system supports IPv6-addressable hosts. To define IPv6 interfaces: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Interface in the tree view to open the IPv6 Interface: Summary page. Figure 9-19. IPv6 Interface: Summary PC 1.1.1.1 Switch PC 2.1.1.1 VLAN 100 VLAN 150222 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Select an interface. The IPv6 addresses defined on the interface are displayed. In addition to the fields described in the Add pages, the following fields are displayed: – ICMP Error Rate Limit Interval (0-2147483647) — Enter the rate-limit interval for ICMPv6 error messages in milliseconds. The value of this parameter together with the Bucket Size parameter (below) determines how many ICMP error messages may be sent per time interval, for example, a rate-limit interval of 100 ms and a bucket size of 10 messages translates to 100 ICMP error messages per second. – ICMP Error Rate Limit Bucket Size (1-200) — Enter the bucket size for ICMPv6 error messages. The value of this parameter together with the ICMP Error Rate Limit Interval parameter determines how many ICMP error messages may be sent per time interval, for example, a rate-limit interval of 100 ms and a bucket size of 10 messages translates to 100 ICMP error messages per second. 3 To add a new IPv6 interface, click Add IPv6 Interface, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select an IPv6 interface to be configured. – Number of DAD Attempts — Enter the number of consecutive neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on an interface while Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is performed on Unicast IPv6 addresses on this interface. New addresses remain in a tentative state while duplicate address detection is performed. A field value of 0, disables duplicate address detection processing on the specified interface. A field value of 1, indicates a single transmission without follow up transmissions. – Autoconfiguration — Enable/disable stateless auto configuration of IPv6 address assignment. When enabled, the router solicitation ND procedure is initiated. This discovers a router in order to assign an IP address to the interface, based on prefixes received with RA messages. When auto configuration is disabled, no automatic assignment of IPv6 global Unicast addresses is performed, and existing, automatically-assigned IPv6 global Unicast addresses are removed from the interface. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 223 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Send ICMP Unreachable — Enable/disable transmission of ICMPv6 address Unreachable messages. When enabled, unreachable messages are generated for any packet arriving on the interface with unassigned TCP/UDP port. 4 To add an address to an IPv6 interface, click Add IPv6 Address, and enter the fields for the selected interface: – IPv6 Address Type — Check the means by which the IP address was added to the interface. The possible options are: • Link Local — The IP address is link local; non-routable and can be used for communication on the same network only. A Link Local address has a prefix of 'FE80'. • Global Unicast — The IP address is a globally unique IPv6 Unicast address; visible and reachable from different subnets. • Global Anycast — The IP address is a globally unique IPv6 Anycast address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – IPv6 Address — Enter the IPv6 address assigned to the interface. The address must be a valid IPv6 address, specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons. An example of an IPv6 address is 2031:0:130F:0:0:9C0:876A:130D and the compressed version is represented as 2031:0:130F::9C0:876A:130D. Up to five IPv6 addresses (not including Link Local addresses) can be set per interface, with the limitation of up to128 addresses per system. – Prefix Length — For global Unicast or Anycast, enter the length of the IPv6 prefix. The length is a decimal value that indicates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address). The Prefix field is applicable only on a static IPv6 address defined as a Global IPv6 address. – EUI-64 — For global Unicast or Anycast, check to use the EUI-64 option.224 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining IPv6 Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Interface pages. Table 9-26. IPv6 Interfaces CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 enable [no-autoconfig] no ipv6 enable Enables the IPv6 addressing mode on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable the IPv6 addressing mode on an interface ipv6 address autoconfig no ipv6 address autoconfig Enables automatic configuration of IPv6 addresses, using stateless auto configuration on an interface. Addresses are configured depending on the prefixes received in Router Advertisement messages. Use the no form of this command to disable address auto configuration on the interface. ipv6 icmp error-interval milliseconds [bucketsize] no ipv6 icmp error-interval Configures the rate limit interval and bucket size parameters for IPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) error messages. Use the no form of this command to return the interval to its default setting. ipv6 address ipv6- address/prefix-length [eui-64] [anycast] no ipv6 address [ipv6- address/prefix-length] [eui- 64] Configures an IPv6 address for an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the address from the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 225 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ipv6 address ipv6- address/prefix-length linklocal no ipv6 address link-local Configures an IPv6 link-local address for an interface. Use the no form of this command to return to the default link local address on the interface. ipv6 unreachables no ipv6 unreachables Enables the generation of ICMP for IPv6 (ICMPv6) unreachable messages for packets arriving on a specified interface. Use the no form of this command to prevent the generation of unreachable messages. ipv6 nd dad attempts attempt Configures the number of consecutive neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on an interface while Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is performed on the unicast IPv6 addresses of the interface. show ipv6 interface [[gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAGnumber] Displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IPv6. show ipv6 icmp error-interval Displays the IPv6 ICMP error interval. Table 9-26. IPv6 Interfaces CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description226 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is a sample script to configure IPv6 using CLI: IPv6 Default Gateway Use the IPv6 Default Gateway pages to configure and view the default IPv6 router addresses. This list contains routers that are candidates to become the switch default router for non-local traffic. The switch randomly selects a router from the list. The switch supports one static IPv6 default router. Dynamic default routers are routers that have sent router advertisements to the switch IPv6 interface. When adding or deleting IP addresses, the following events occur: • When removing an IP interface, all of its default gateway IP addresses are removed. • Dynamic IP addresses cannot be removed. • An alert message is displayed after a user attempts to insert more than one IP address. • An alert message is displayed when attempting to insert a non-Link Local type address. Table 9-27. Sample CLI Script to Configure IPv6 on a Port CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter VLAN mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ipv6 enable Enable IPv6 (dynamic). console(config-if)# ipv6 address 5::1/64 Set the IPv6 address (static)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 227 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure a router: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Default Gateway in the tree view to display the IPv6 Default Gateway: Summary page. Figure 9-20. IPv6 Default Gateway: Summary The previously-defined routers are displayed with the following fields: – IPv6 Default IPv6 Address — The router’s address. – Interface — The interface on which the router is accessed. – Type — The means by which the default gateway was configured. The possible options are: • Static — The default gateway is user-defined. • Dynamic — The default gateway is dynamically configured through router advertisement.228 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – State — The router’s status. The possible options are: • Incomplete — Address resolution is in progress and the link-layer address of the default gateway has not yet been determined. • Reachable — The default gateway is known to have been reachable recently (within tens of seconds ago). • Stale — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable but until traffic is sent to the default gateway, no attempt is made to verify its reachability. • Delay — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has recently been sent to the default gateway. Rather than probe the default gateway immediately, however, there is a delay sending probes for a short while in order to give upper-layer protocols a chance to provide reachability confirmation. • Probe — The default gateway is no longer known to be reachable, and Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify reachability. • Unreachable — No reachability confirmation was received. 2 To add an IPv6 default gateway, click Add, and enter the fields: – IPv6 Address Type — Displays that the IP address was added to the interface through a link local address. – Link Local Interface — Displays the outgoing interface through which the default gateway can be reached. – Default Gateway IPv6 Address — Enter the Link Local IPv6 address of the default gateway. Defining IPv6 Default Gateway Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Default Gateway pages . Table 9-28. IPv6 Default Gateway CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 default-gateway ipv6- address Defines an IPv6 default gateway.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 229 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following are examples of these CLI command: ISATAP Tunnel To deliver IPv6 addresses in an IPv4 network, a tunneling process must be defined that encapsulates IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets. The Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP) is an IPv6 transition mechanism that is used to transmit IPv6 packets between dual-stack nodes (nodes that can accept both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses) on top of an IPv4 network. When enabling ISATAP on a tunnel interface, an explicit IPv4 address is configured as the tunnel source, or an automatic mode exists, where the lowest IPv4 address is assigned to an IP interface. This source IPv4 address is used for setting the tunnel interface identifier according to ISATAP addressing conventions. When a tunnel interface is enabled for ISATAP, the tunnel source must be set for the interface in order for the interface to become active. An ISATAP address is represented using the [64-bit prefix]:0:5EFE:w.x.y.z, where 5EFE is the ISATAP identifier and w.x.y.z is a public or private IPv4 address. Thus, a Link Local address will be represented as FE80::5EFE:w.x.y.z show ipv6 route Displays the current state of the IPv6 routing table. console(config)# ipv6 default-gateway fe80::abcd console(config-if)# do show ipv6 route Codes: L - Local, S - Static, I - ICMP, ND - Router Advertisement The number in the brackets is the metric. L 3000::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite L 4003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite L 5003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite L 6003::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 20 Lifetime Infinite Table 9-28. IPv6 Default Gateway CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description230 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY After the last IPv4 address is removed from the interface, the ISATAP IP interface state becomes inactive and is represented as Down, however the Admin state remains Enabled. When defining tunneling, note the following: • An IPv6 Link Local address is assigned to the ISATAP interface. The initial IP address is assigned to the interface, and the interface state becomes Active. • If an ISATAP interface is active, the ISATAP router IPv4 address is resolved via DNS by using ISATAP-to-IPv4 mapping. If the ISATAP DNS record is not resolved, the ISATAP host name-to-address mapping is searched in the host name cache. • When an ISATAP router IPv4 address is not resolved via the DNS process, the status of the ISATAP IP interface remains Active. The system does not have a default gateway for ISATAP traffic until the DNS procedure is resolved. • In order for an ISATAP Tunnel to work properly over an IPv4 network, an ISATAP router is must be set up.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 231 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 ISATAP Tunnel in the tree view to display the ISATAP Tunnel page. Figure 9-21. IPv6 ISATAP Tunnel 2 Enter the fields: – ISATAP Status —Enable/disable the status of ISATAP on the device. – IPv4 Address Type — Enter the source of the IPv4 address used by the tunnel. The options are: • Auto —Use the dynamic address. • None —Disable the ISATAP tunnel • Manual —Use the manual address assigned. – IPv4 Address — Enter the local (source) IPv4 address of a tunnel interface. 232 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Tunnel Router's Domain Name — Enter a specific automatic tunnel router domain name. – Domain Name Query Interval(10 - 3600) — Enter the interval between DNS queries (before the IP address of the ISATAP router is known) for the automatic tunnel router domain name. – ISATAP Router Solicitation Interval(10 - 3600) — Enter the interval between router solicitations messages when there is no active router. – ISATAP Robustness (1 - 20) — Enter the number of DNS Query/Router Solicitation refresh messages that the device sends per second. Select the Use Default option to use the default setting of a field. Defining ISATAP Tunnel Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the ISATAP Tunnel pages. Table 9-29. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Commands CLI Command Description interface tunnel number Enters tunnel interface configuration mode. tunnel mode ipv6ip {isatap} no tunnel mode ipv6ip Configures an IPv6 transition mechanism global support mode. Use the no form of this command to remove an IPv6 transition mechanism. tunnel isatap router router_name no tunnel isatap router Configures a global string that represents a specific automatic tunnel router domain name. Use the no form of this command to remove the string associated with the router domain name and restore the default configuration. tunnel source {auto|ip-address ipv4-address} no tunnel source Sets the local (source) IPv4 address of a tunnel interface. Use the no form of the command to delete the tunnel local address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 233 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of a CLI script to create a tunnel: tunnel isatap query-interval seconds no tunnel isatap query-interval Configures the interval between DNS Queries (before the IP address of the ISATAP router is known) for the automatic tunnel router domain name. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. tunnel isatap solicitationinterval seconds no tunnel isatap solicitationinterval Configures the interval between ISATAP router solicitations messages (when there is no active ISATAP router). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. tunnel isatap robustness number no tunnel isatap robustness Configures the number of DNS Query/Router Solicitation refresh messages that the device sends. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show ipv6 tunnel Displays information on the ISATAP tunnel. Table 9-30. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Script CLI Command Description console#config Enter Global Configuration mode. console(config)# interface vlan 1 Enter Interface mode for VLAN 1. console(config-if)# ip address 10.5.225.40 /27 Configure an IP address with prefix length of 27. console(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.5.225.33 console(config-if)#exit Set the address of the default gateway and exit Interface mode. Table 9-29. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description234 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console (config)# ip domain lookup Enable DNS lookup console(config)# ip name-server 176.16.1.18 Define DNS server console(config)# interface tunnel 1 Enter tunnel mode console(config-tunnel)#tunnel mode ipv6ip isatap Enable tunnel. console(config-tunnel)#tunnel source auto The system minimum IPv4 address will be used as the source address for packets sent on the tunnel interface. console(config-tunnel)# do show ipv6 tunnel Display tunnel configuration Table 9-30. ISATAP Tunnel CLI Script CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 235 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6 Neighbors The Neighbors feature is similar in functionality to the IPv4 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) feature. It enables detecting Link Local addresses within the same subnet, and includes a database for maintaining reachability information about active neighbors. The device supports a total of up to 64 neighbors, obtained statically or dynamically. When removing an IPv6 interface, all neighbors entered statically or learned dynamically, are removed. To add an IPv6 neighbor: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Neighbors in the tree view to display the IPv6 Neighbors: Summary page. Figure 9-22. IPv6 Neighbors: Summary236 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The previously-defined neighbors are displayed along with their states. The possible states are: – Incomplete — An address resolution is in progress, and the link-layer address of the neighbor has not yet been determined. – Reachable — The neighbor is known to have been reachable recently (within tens of seconds). – Stale — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, but until traffic is sent to the neighbor, no attempt is made to verify its reachability. – Delay — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has recently been sent to the neighbor. Rather than probe the neighbor immediately, however, there is a delay sending probes for a short while, in order to give upper-layer protocols a chance to provide reachability confirmation. – Probe — The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify reachability. 2 To clear the Neighbors table, select one of the following options: – None — Does not clear any entries. – Static Only — Clears the static entries. – Dynamic Only — Clears the dynamic entries. – All Dynamic and Static — Clears the static and dynamic address entries. 3 To add a new IPv6 neighbor, click Add, and enter the fields: – IPv6 Interface — Displays the interface on which IPv6 Interface is defined. – IPv6 Address — Enter the neighbor IPv6 address. – MAC Address — Enter the MAC address assigned to the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 237 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 To modify or remove an IPv6 neighbor, click Edit, and enter the fields described on the Add page. 5 If an entry for the specified IPv6 address already exists in the neighbor discovery cache, as learned through the IPv6 neighbor discovery process, you can convert the entry to a static entry. To do this, select Static in the Type field. Defining IPv6 Neighbors Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Neighbors pages. Table 9-31. IPv6 Neighbors CLI Commands CLI Command Description ipv6 neighbor ipv6_addr {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]} mac_addr no ipv6 neighbor ipv6_addr {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]} Configures a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache. Use the no form of this command to remove a static IPv6 entry from the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache. show ipv6 neighbors {static|dynamic}[ipv6-address ipv6- address] [mac-address mac-address] [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number]] Displays IPv6 neighbor discovery cache information. clear ipv6 neighbors Deletes all entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache.238 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# config console(config)# ipv6 neighbor 3000::a31b vlan 1 001b.3f9c.84ea console# show ipv6 neighbors dynamic Interface IPv6 Address HW Address State Router --------- ------------ ---------- ----- ----- VLAN 1 3000::a31b 0001b.3f9c.84ea Reachable YesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 239 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6 Routes Table The IPv6 Routes Table describes how to reach IPv6 destinations. The routing table is used to determine the next-hop address and the interface used for forwarding. Each dynamic entry also has an associated invalidation timer value (extracted from Router Advertisements). This timer is used to delete entries that are no longer advertised. To view IPv6 destinations and how they are reached: • Click System > IP Addressing > IPv6 Routes Table in the tree view to display the IPv6 Routes Table page. Figure 9-23. IPv6 Routes Table The following is displayed for each IP address: – IPv6 Address — The destination IPv6 address.240 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Prefix Length — The length of the IPv6 prefix. This field is applicable only when the destination address is defined as a global IPv6 address. – Interface — The interface that is used to forward the packet. Interface refers to any Port, LAG or VLAN. – Next Hop — The address to which the packet is forwarded on the route to the Destination address (typically the address of a neighboring router). This can be either a Link Local or Global IPv6 address. – Metric — The value used for comparing this route to other routes with the same destination in the IPv6 route table. This is an administrative distance with the range of 0-255. – Life-Time — The timeout interval of the route if no activity takes place. Infinite means the address is never deleted. – RouteType — Specifies whether the destination is directly-attached and the means by which the entry was learned. The possible options are: • Local — A directly-connected route entry. • Static — Manually configured route, supported only for default gateway, learned through the Neighbor Discover (ND) process. • ICMP — The route was learned through ICMP Redirect messages, sent by the router. • ND — Route was learned by the ND protocol from Router Advertisement messages. Viewing IPv6 Routes Table Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the IPv6 Routes Table page. Table 9-32. IPv6 Routes Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description show ipv6 route Displays the current state of the ipv6 routing table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 241 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console> show ipv6 route Codes: L - Local, S - Static, I - ICMP, ND - Router Advertisement The number in the brackets is the metric. S::/0 via fe80::77 [0] VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite ND::/0 via fe80::200:cff:fe4a:dfa8 [0] VLAN 1 Lifetime 1784 sec L 2001::/64 is directly connected, g2 Lifetime Infinite L 2002:1:1:1::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime 2147467 sec L 3001::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite L 4004::/64 is directly connected, VLAN 1 Lifetime Infinite L 6001::/64 is directly connected, g2 Lifetime Infinite242 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Domain Name System The Domain Name System (DNS) converts user-defined domain names into IP addresses. Each time a domain name is assigned, the DNS service translates the name into a numeric IP address, for example, www.ipexample.com is translated into 192.87.56.2. DNS servers maintain domain name databases and their corresponding IP addresses. To add a DNS server and specify the active DNS server: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > Domain Name System in the tree view to display the Domain Name System: Summary page. Figure 9-24. Domain Name System: Summary The list of previously-defined DNS servers is displayed. 2 To enable mapping of host names into IP addresses through a DNS server, select DNS Status. 3 To activate one of the currently-defined DNS servers, enable Active Server.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 243 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 To add a DNS server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – DNS Server — Enter the IP address of the DNS server being added. – DNS Server Currently Active — Displays the DNS server that is currently active. – Set DNS Server Active — Check to activate the selected DNS server. Configuring DNS Servers Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Domain Name System pages. Table 9-33. DNS CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip domain lookup Enables DNS system for translating host names to IP addresses. ip name-server {server1- ipv4-address|server1-ipv6- address} [server-address2 …server-address8] no ip name-server [serveraddress … server-address8] Sets the available name servers. Up to eight name servers can be set. The no form of the command removes a name server.244 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: clear host Deletes entries from the host name-toaddress cache. clear host dhcp {name|*} Deletes entries from the host name-toaddress mapping received from DHCP. show hosts Displays the default domain name, the list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses console (config)# ip domain lookup console(config)# ip name-server 176.16.1.18 Table 9-33. DNS CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 245 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Default Domain Names A default domain name is used when an IP address cannot be mapped to a known domain name. This domain name is applied to all unqualified host names. To define the default domain name: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > Default Domain Name to display the Default Domain Name page. Figure 9-25. Default Domain Name If there is a currently-defined default domain name, it is displayed. 2 Enter the Default Domain Name (1 - 160 Characters). Its Type is displayed, and has one of the following options: – Dynamic — The IP address was created dynamically. – Static — The IP address is a static IP address.246 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Default Domain Names Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the default domain name: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-34. Default Domain Name CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip domain-name name no ip domain-name Defines a default domain name that the software uses to complete unqualified host names. The no form of the command disables the use of the Domain Name System (DNS). console(config)# ip domain-name dell.com Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 247 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Host Name Mapping Host names can be dynamically mapped to IP addresses through the Domain Name System pages, or statically through the Host Name Mapping page. To assign IP addresses to static host names. 1 Click System > IP Addressing > Host Name Mapping in the tree view to display the Host Name Mapping: Summary page. Figure 9-26. Host Name Mapping: Summary The currently-defined host names are displayed. 2 Click Add to add a new host name. Up to four IP addresses can be added. 3 For each IP address, enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. 248 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. • Host Name (1-160 Characters) — Enter the host name to be associated with the IP address entered below. • IP Address — Enter the IP address of the domain. Four addresses can be entered. 4 Click Remove to delete a host name. All addresses for this host name are deleted at the same time. Mapping IP Addresses to Domain Host Names Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for mapping domain host names to IP addresses. Table 9-35. Domain Host Name CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip host name address [address2 address3 address4] Defines the static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache no ip host name Removes the name-to-address mapping. clear host {name|*} Deletes entries from the host name-to-address cache. show hosts [name] Displays the default domain name, list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 249 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: ARP The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) converts IP addresses into physical MAC addresses. ARP enables a host to communicate with other hosts when their IP addresses are known. To add an IP/MAC address mapping: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > ARP in the tree view to display the ARP: Summary page. Figure 9-27. ARP: Summary console(config)# ip host accounting.abc.com 176.10.23.1250 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The entries in the table are displayed. 2 Enter the parameters: • ARP Entry Age Out (1 - 40000000) — Enter the amount of time in seconds that can pass between ARP requests for this address. After this period, the entry is deleted from the table. • Clear ARP Table Entries — Select the type of ARP entries that are cleared on all devices. The possible options are: • None — ARP entries are not cleared. • All — All ARP entries are cleared. • Dynamic — Only learned ARP entries are cleared. • Static — Only static ARP entries are cleared. 3 To add a mapping, click Add, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select an interface to be associated with the addresses. – IP Address — Enter the station IP address, which is associated with the MAC address filled in below. – MAC Address — Enter the station MAC address, which is associated in the ARP table with the IP address. 4 To change the status of a mapping from static to dynamic or vice versa, click Edit and enter the field: – Status — Select the entry’s status. The possible options are: • Static — The entry was statically entered. • Dynamic — The entry was dynamically learned. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 251 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring ARP Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the ARP pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-36. ARP CLI Commands CLI Command Description arp ip_addr mac_addr {[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAGnumber} Adds a permanent entry in the ARP cache. no arp ip-address Removes an ARP entry from the ARP Table. arp timeout seconds Configures how long an entry remains in the ARP cache. This command can be used in Global Configuration mode for all interfaces, or in Interface Configuration mode for a specific interface. clear arp-cache Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache show arp Displays entries in the ARP Table. show arp configuration Displays the global and interface configuration of the ARP protocol console(config)# arp 198.133.219.232 00-00-0c-40-0f-bc console(config)# arp timeout 12000 console(config)# exit console# show arp ARP timeout: 12000 Seconds Interface IP Address HW Address Status --------- ---------- ---------- ------ gi1/0/11 10.7.1.102 00:10:B5:04:DB:4B dynamic gi1/0/12 10.7.1.135 00:50:22:00:2A:A4 static252 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY UDP Relay Switches do not typically route IP Broadcast packets between IP subnets. However, if configured, the switch can relay specific UDP Broadcast packets received from its IPv4 interfaces to specific destination IP addresses. To configure the relaying of UDP packets received from a specific IPv4 interface with a destination UDP port: 1 Click System > IP Addressing > UDP Relay in the tree view to display the UDP Relay: Summary page. Figure 9-28. UDP Relay: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 253 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The UDP relays are displayed. 2 To add a UDP relay, click Add, and enter the fields: – Source IP Address — Select the source IP address to where the switch is to relay UDP Broadcast packets, based on a configured UDP destination port. The interface must be one of the IPv4 interfaces configured on the switch. Select All for all addresses. – UDP Port (1 - 65535) — Check Default Services to select all of the following default ports: • IEN-116 Name Service (port 42) • DNS (port 53) • NetBIOS Name Server (port 137) • NetBIOS Datagram Server (port 138) • TACACS Server (port 49) • Time Service (port 37) If Default Services are not selected, check the text box and enter a UDP port. – Destination IP Address — Enter the IP address that receives the UDP packet relays. If this field is 0.0.0.0, UDP packets are discarded. If this field is 255.255.255.255, UDP packets are flooded to all IP interfaces. Configuring UDP Relay Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the UDP Relay pages. Table 9-37. UDP Relay CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip helper-address {ipinterface|all} address [udpport-list] no ip helper-address {ipinterface|all} address Enables the forwarding of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcast packets received on an interface to a specific (helper) address. Use the no form of this command to disable the forwarding of broadcast packets to a specific (helper) address.254 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console (config)# ip helper-address all 172.16.9.9 49 53 console (config)# do show ip helper-address Interface Helper Address UDP Ports ----------- --------------- -------------------------- All 172.16.9.9 49,53Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 255 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Diagnostics This section describes how to perform cable tests on copper and fiber optic cables. It contains the following sections: • Integrated Cable Test • Optical Transceiver Diagnostics256 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Integrated Cable Test Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology is used to test the quality and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port. Cables up to 120 meters long can be tested. Cables can only be tested when the ports are in the down state, with the exception of Approximated Cable Length test. This test can only be performed when the port is up and operating at 1 Gbps. To perform a cable test and view the results: 1 Click System > Diagnostics > Integrated Cable Test: Summary in the tree view to display the Integrated Cable Test: Summary page. Figure 9-29. Integrated Cable Test: Summary 2 Select a unit in the stack in the Unit ID field. Results from previously-run tests on that unit are displayed. 3 Ensure that both ends of the copper cable are connected to a device. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 257 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 Ensure that the cable is connected to tested port. Go to the Test tab. 5 Click Test Now. The copper cable and Approximate Cable Length tests are performed, and the following test results are displayed: – Test Result — Displays the cable test results. The possible options are: • No Cable — There is no cable connected to the port. • Open Cable — The cable is connected on only one side. • Short Cable — A short has occurred in the cable. • OK — The cable passed the test. – Cable Fault Distance — Displays the distance from the port where the cable error occurred. – Last Update — Displays the last time the port was tested. – Approximate Cable Length — Displays the approximate cable length. Performing Integrated Cable Tests Using CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for performing integrated cable tests. Table 9-38. Integrated Cable Test CLI Commands CLI Command Description test cable-diagnostics tdr interface[gigabitethernet|tengigab itethernet] port-number Performs VCT tests. show cable-diagnostics tdr interface[gigabitethernet|tengigab itethernet] port-number Shows results of last VCT tests on ports. show cable-diagnostics cablelength interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number Displays the estimated copper cable length attached to a port.258 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Optical Transceiver Diagnostics The Optical Transceiver Diagnostics page displays the operating conditions reported by the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) transceiver. Some information might not be available for SFPs that do not support the digital diagnostic monitoring standard SFF-8472. The following is the list of the compatible SFPs: • SFP: – X3366 — 1000Base-SX, Finisar FTLF8519P2BNL – U3650 — 1000Base-LX, Finisar FTRJ1319P1BTL • SFP+: – N743D — SR, Finisar FTLX8571D3BCL – T307D — LR, Finisar FTLX1471D3BCL – C043H — LRM, Avago AFBR-707SDZ-D1 – N198M — LRM, Finisar FTLX1371D3BCL console> enable console# test cable-diagnostics tdr gi1/0/3 Cable is open at 100 meters. console# show cable-diagnostics cable-length interface gi2/0/5 Port Length [meters] ------- ---------------- gi2/0/5 < 50Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 259 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To view the results of optical fiber tests: • Click System > Diagnostics > Optical Transceiver Diagnostics in the tree view to display the Optical Transceiver Diagnostics page. Figure 9-30. Optical Transceiver Diagnostics The following fields are displayed for the selected unit: – Port — The port number on which the cable was tested. – Temperature — The temperature (C) at which the cable is operating. – Voltage — The voltage at which the cable is operating. – Current — The current at which the cable is operating. – Output Power — The rate at which output power is transmitted. – Input Power — The rate at which input power is transmitted. – Transmitter Fault — A fault occurred during transmission. – Loss of Signal — A signal loss occurred in the cable. – Data Ready — The transceiver has achieved power up, and data is ready.260 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Performing Fiber Optic Cable Tests Using CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI command for performing fiber optic cable tests. The following is an example of the CLI command: Table 9-39. Fiber Optic Cable Test CLI Commands CLI Command Description show fiber-ports opticaltransceiver [interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number] [detailed] Displays the optical transceiver diagnostics. console# show fiber-ports optical-transceiver detailed Port Temp [C] Voltage Current [aM] Output [mWat] Input [mWa] POWER [mWa] LOS ------- ---- ------- ---- ---- ---- ---- --- gi1/0/1 48 5.15 50 1.789 1.789 No No gi1/0/2 43 5.15 10 1.789 1.789 No NoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 261 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Management Security This section describes the pages used to manage device security. It contains the following topics: • Access Profiles • Profile Rules • Authentication Profiles • Select Authentication • Active Users • Local User Database • Line Passwords • Enable Password • TACACS+ • Password Management • RADIUS Access Profiles Access to management functions may be limited to users identified by: • Ingress interface (Port, LAG, or VLAN) • Source IP address • Source IP subnet Management access may be separately defined for the following types of management access methods: • Telnet (CLI over Telnet sessions) • Secure Telnet • Web (HTTP) • Secure Web (HTTPS, Using SSL) • SNMP 262 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY This means, for example, that the set of managers allowed via Telnet may be different than the set of Web-based managers which is, in turn, may be different than the set of secure-web based managers, and so on. A specific management access method may be completely disabled by denying all user access to it (e.g. denying all users access to CLI/Telnet management effectively disables CLI/Telnet as an available management interface to the system). By default, management access to the system, through all methods, is enabled over all interfaces. NOTE: If you enable management access through a physical port, all VLANs and IP interfaces on that port will be acceptable management traffic sources. If you enable management access through a VLAN, all ports and IP interfaces on that VLAN will be acceptable. If specific IP address(es) are specified, only traffic from the specified IP addresses on the appropriate ports will be accepted. Access Profiles Rules Each management access profile is composed of at least one rule, which acts as a filter, and defines the device management method, interface type, source IP address, network mask, and the device management access action. Users can be blocked or permitted management access. Rule priority sets the order in which the rules are implemented. Assigning an access profile to an interface denies access via other interfaces. If an access profile is not assigned to any interface, the device can be accessed by all interfaces. A total of 256 rules can be defined for all Management Access profiles. To add rules to existing access profiles, see "Profile Rules" on page 266.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 263 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Creating an Access Profile To define an access profile with a single rule: 1 Click System > Management Security > Access Profiles in the tree view to display the Access Profiles: Summary page. Figure 9-31. Access Profiles: Summary The currently-defined access profiles are displayed. 2 To activate an access profile, select it in the Active Access Profile field. If you select Console Only, active management of the device can only be performed using the console connection. This profile cannot be removed. 3 To add a new profile, click Add, and enter the fields: – Access Profile Name (1-32 Characters) — Enter a name for the access profile. 264 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Rule Priority (1-65535) — Enter the rule priority. Rules are applied to packets according to their priority. These can be viewed in the Profile Rules: Summary page. – Management Method — Select the management method to which the access profile is applied. Users using this management method are authenticated using this access profile. The possible options are: • All — The access profile is applied to all management methods. • Telnet — The access profile is applied to Telnet users. • Secure Telnet (SSH) — The access profile is applied to SSH users. • HTTP — The access profile is applied to HTTP users. • Secure HTTP (HTTPS) — The access profile is applied to HTTPS users. • SNMP — The access profile is applied to SNMP users. – Interface — Check the fields and select the interface type to which the rule applies. – Enable Source IP Address — Check this parameter to restrict access, based on the source IP address. When this field is not selected, the source IP address cannot be entered into a configured rule. – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported for the source IP addresses. – Source IP Address — Enter the interface source IP address for which the rule applies. This is an optional field and indicates that the rule is valid for a subnetwork. – Network Mask — Enter the IP subnetwork mask if Supported IP Format is IPv4. – Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix, or the network mask of the source IP address. – Action — Select whether to permit or deny management access to the defined interface. The possible options are: • Permit — Permits access to the device. • Deny — Denies access to the device. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 265 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Access Profiles Using CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI command for defining an access profile, without its rules. The CLI commands for defining the rules are described in "Defining Access Profile Rules Using CLI Commands" on page 267. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-40. Access Profile CLI Commands CLI Command Description management access-list name no management access-list name Defines an access-list for management. Use the no form of this command to delete an access list. console(config)# management access-list mlist console(config-macl)#266 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Profile Rules If an access profile already exists, meaning that a single rule has been defined on it, use the Profile Rules pages to add additional rules to it. To add a rule to a management access profiles: 1 Click System > Management Security > Profile Rules in the tree view to display the Profile Rules: Summary page. Figure 9-32. Profile Rules: Summary 2 Select an access profile name. Its rules are displayed in the order that they will be implemented. 3 To add a rule to the selected management access profile, click Add. 4 Select a management access profile. 5 Complete the fields that are defined in Access Profiles pages.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 267 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Access Profile Rules Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for adding rules to access profiles. Table 9-41. Access Profiles CLI Commands CLI Command Description permit[[gigabitethernet|tengigab itethernet port-number]|vlan vlan-id|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port permit conditions for the management access list. permit ip-source {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|prefixlength} [mask mask|prefixlength] [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet][port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port permitting conditions for the management access list, and the selected management method. deny [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port denying conditions for the management access list, and the selected management method. deny ip-source {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|prefixlength} [mask mask|prefixlength] [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] [service service] Sets port denying conditions for the management access list, and the selected management method. management access-class {console-only|name} no management access-class Defines which access-list is used as the active management connections. Use the no form of this command to disable management connection restrictions.268 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show management access-list [name] Displays the active management access-lists. show management access-class Displays information about management access-class. console(config)# management access-list mlist console(config-macl)# permit gi1/0/1 console(config-macl)# permit gi1/0/2 console(config-macl)# deny gi1/0/3 console(config-macl)# deny gi1/0/4 console(config-macl)# exit console(config)# management access-class mlist console(config)# exit console# show management access-list mlist ----- permit gi1/0/1 permit gi1/0/2 deny gi1/0/3 deny gi1/0/4 ! (Note: all other access implicitly denied) console# show management access-class Management access-class is enabled, using access list mlist Table 9-41. Access Profiles CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 269 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Authentication Profiles In addition to access profiles, you can configure authentication for management access methods, such as SSH, console, Telnet, HTTP, and HTTPS. User authentication can occur: • Locally • Via an external server, such as a TACACS+ or a RADIUS server User authentication occurs in the order that the methods are selected, for example, if both the Local and RADIUS options are selected, the user is authenticated first locally. If the local user database is empty, the user is authenticated via the RADIUS server. If an error occurs during the authentication, the next selected method is used. If an authentication method fails, or the user has an insufficient privilege level, the user is denied access to the switch. The switch then stops, does not continue, and does not attempt to use the next authentication method. If a privilege level is redefined, the user must also be re-defined. User authentication can also be set to None, in which case no authentication is performed. The process of configuring authentication for management access methods is divided into the following stages: • Create an authentication profile, as described below • Assign an authentication profile to a management method, as described in "Select Authentication" on page 272270 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To create an authentication profile: 1 Click System > Management Security > Authentication Profiles in the tree view to display the Authentication Profiles: Summary page. Figure 9-33. Authentication Profiles: Summary All currently-defined authentication profiles are displayed. 2 Click Add to add a new authentication profile, and enter the fields: – Profile Name (1-12 Characters) — Enter the name of the new authentication profile. Profile names cannot include blank spaces. – Authentication Method: Optional Methods — Select a user authentication methods that can be assigned to this authentication profile. The possible options are: • Line — The line password is used for user authentication (defined in "Line Passwords" on page 279).Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 271 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Enable — The enable (encrypted) password is used for authentication (defined in "Enable Password" on page 281). • Local — The user authentication is performed by the device, which checks the user name and password for authentication. • RADIUS — The user authentication is performed by the RADIUS server. For more information, see "RADIUS" on page 291. • TACACS+ — The user authentication is performed by the TACACS+ server. For more information, see "TACACS+" on page 282. • None — No user authentication occurs. Select a method by highlighting it in the Optional Methods list, and clicking on the right arrow to move it to the Selected Methods list. Configuring an Authentication Profile Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Authentication Profiles pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-42. Authentication Profile CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa authentication login {default|list-name} method1 [method2] no aaa authentication login {default|list-name} Configures login authentication. Use the no form of the command to remove a login authentication profile. console(config)# aaa authentication login default radius local enable none272 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Select Authentication After Authentication Profiles are defined, the Authentication Profiles can be assigned to Management Access methods, for example, console users can be authenticated by Authentication Profile 1, while Telnet users can be authenticated by Authentication Profile 2. To assign an authentication profile to a management access method: 1 Click System > Management Security > Select Authentication in the tree view to display the Select Authentication page. Figure 9-34. Select Authentication 2 For the Console, Telnet and Secure Telnet (SSH) types of users, select either the default authentication profile or one of the previously-defined authentication profiles.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 273 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 For Secure HTTP and HTTP types of users, select one or all of the Optional Methods and click the right-arrow to move them to the Selected Methods. The options are: – Local — Authentication occurs locally. – None — No authentication method is used for access. – RADIUS — Authentication occurs at the RADIUS server. – TACACS+ — Authentication occurs at the TACACS+ server. Assigning Access Authentication Profiles Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Select Authentication page. Table 9-43. Select Authentication CLI Commands CLI Command Description aaa authentication enable {default|listname} method [method2 ...] no aaa authentication enable {default|listname} Indicates the authentication method list when accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet, Console or SSH. enable authentication [default|list-name] no enable authentication Specifies the authentication method for accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet or console. Use the no form of this command to restore the default authentication method login authentication [default|list-name] Indicates the login authentication method list for a remote Telnet, Console or SSH. ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication method1 [method2] no ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication Indicates authentication methods for HTTP or HTTPS servers. show authentication methods Displays information about the authentication methods.274 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands that sets authentication for the console using the default method list that was previously-defined: The following is an example of the CLI commands that creates an authentication method list for http server access (RADIUS and local): console(config)#line console console(config-line)# enable authentication default console(config-line)# login authentication default console(config-line)# exit console(config)# ip http authentication aaa loginauthentication radius local console(config)# exitDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 275 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Active Users To view active users on the device: • Click System > Management Security > Active Users in the tree view to display the Active Users page. Figure 9-35. Active Users The following fields are displayed for all active users: – Name — Active users logged into the device. – Protocol — The management method by which the user is connected to the device. – Location — The user’s IP address.276 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying Active Users Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing active users connected to the device. The following example shows an example of the CLI command: Table 9-44. Active Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description show users Displays information about active users. console> show users Username Protocol Location -------- -------- --------- Bob Serial John SSH 172.16.0.1 Robert HTTP 172.16.0.8 Betty Telnet 172.16.1.7Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 277 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Local User Database Use the Local User Database pages to define users, passwords and access levels. To add a new user: 1 Click System > Management Security > Local User Database in the tree view to display the Local User Database: Summary page. Figure 9-36. Local User Database: Summary All users are displayed even if they have been suspended. If a user has been suspended, it can be restored here by selecting the Reactivate Suspended User field. 2 To add a user, click Add, and enter the fields: – User Name (1-20 characters) — Enter the username of the user.278 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Access Level — Select a user access level. The lowest user access level is 1 and 15 is the highest user access level. Users with access level 15 are Privileged Users, and only they can access and use the switch administrator. – Password (8-64 characters) — Enter the password of the user. – Confirm Password — Confirm the password of the user. The following fields are displayed: • Expiry Date — The expiration date of the user-defined password. • Lockout Status — Specifies whether the user currently has access (status Usable), or whether the user is locked out due to too many failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in successfully (status Locked). • Reactivate Suspended User — Check to reactivate the specified user’s access rights. Access rights can be suspended after unsuccessfully attempting to login. Configuring Local Users Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring local users. Table 9-45. Local User CLI Commands CLI Command Description username name {nopassword|password password|password encrypted encrypted-password} username name [privilege-level] no username name Establishes a username-based authentication system. Use the no form to remove a user name. set username name active Reactivates a suspended user’s access rights. show user accounts Displays users information.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 279 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Line Passwords To add a line password for Console, Telnet, and Secure-Telnet users: 1 Click System > Management Security > Line Passwords in the tree view to display the Line Password page. Figure 9-37. Line Password 2 Enter the fields for each type of user, separately: – Password (0 - 159 Characters) — Enter the line password for accessing the device. – Confirm Password — Confirm the line password. console(config)# username bob password lee privilege 15 console# set username bob active280 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Console/Telnet/Secure Telnet Line Aging (1-365) — Check to set the amount of time in days that elapses before a line password is aged out. Enter the number of days after which the password expires. – Expiry Date — Displays the expiration date of the line password. – Lockout Status — Displays whether the user currently has access (status Usable), or whether the user is locked out due to too many failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in successfully (status Locked). – Reactivate Locked Line — Check to reactivate the line password for a Console/Telnet/Secure Telnet session. Access rights can be suspended after a number of unsuccessful attempts to log in. Assigning Line Passwords Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Line Password page . The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-46. Line Password CLI Commands CLI Command Description line {console|telnet|ssh} Identifies a specific line for configuration and enters the Line Configuration command mode. password password [encrypted] no password Sets a password on a line. Use the no form of this command to remove the password. console(config)# line console console(config-line)# password dellDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 281 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Enable Password To set a local password to control access to Normal and Privilege levels activities. 1 Click System > Management Security > Enable Passwords in the tree view to display the Enable Password page. Figure 9-38. Enable Password 2 Enter the fields: – Select Enable Access Level — Select the access level to associate with the enable password. The lowest user access level is 1 and 15 is the highest user access level. Users with access level 15 are Privileged Users, and only they can access and use the OpenManage Switch Administrator. – Password (0-159 characters) — Enter the enable password. – Confirm Password — Confirm the password.282 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Expiry Date — If Aging is selected, displays the expiration date of the enable password. – Lockout Status — Displays the number of failed authentication attempts since the user last logged in successfully (if the Enable Login Attempts checkbox is selected in the Password Management page.) Specifies LOCKOUT, when the user account is locked. – Reactivate Suspended User — Check to reactivate the specified user’s access rights. Access rights can be suspended after unsuccessfully attempting to login. Assigning Enable Passwords Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Enable Password page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: TACACS+ The device can act as a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) client. TACACS+ provides centralized validation of users accessing the device, while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services: • Authentication — Provides authentication during login and via user names and user-defined passwords. • Authorization — Performed at login after authentication. The TACACS+ server checks the privileges of the authenticated user. Table 9-47. Enable Password CLI Commands CLI Command Description enable password [level level] d [encrypted] no enable password [level level] Sets a local password to control access to user and privilege levels. Use the no form of this command to remove the password requirement. console(config)# enable password level 15 secretDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 283 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The TACACS+ protocol ensures network integrity through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS+ server. To configure TACACS+ servers: 1 Click System > Management Security > TACACS+ in the tree view to display the TACACS+: Summary page. Figure 9-39. TACACS+: Summary The list of currently-defined TACACS+ servers is displayed. The parameters for each server is displayed, along with its connection status. 2 Enter the default parameters for TACACS+ servers. These values are used unless values are added in the TACACS+ Add or Edit pages. – Source IP Address — The device IP address used for the TACACS+ session between the device and the TACACS+ server. The default is 0.0.0.0., which means that any IP address of the device can be used to communicate with the TACACS+ server.284 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Key String (1-128 Characters) — The authentication and encryption key for TACACS+ communications between the device and the TACACS+ server. This key must match the encryption key sent by the TACACS+ server. This key is encrypted. – Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times out. 3 To add a TACACS+ server, click Add, and enter the fields on the page. The fields below are those that were not described on the TACACS+: Summary page. – Host IP Address — Enter the TACACS+ server IP address. – Priority (0-65535) — Enter the order in which the TACACS+ servers are used if several are defined. – Source IP Address — Enter either specific device IP address for the TACACS+ server. – Authentication Port (0-65535) — Enter the port number through which the TACACS+ session occurs. – Timeout for Reply (1-30) — Enter the amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times out. – Single Connection — Check to maintain a single open connection between the device and the TACACS+ server.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 285 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Wherever available, check Use Default to use a value that was entered in the TACACS+: Summary page. Defining TACACS+ Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the TACACS+ Settings pages. Table 9-48. TACACS+ CLI Commands CLI Command Description tacacs-server host {ip address|hostname}[singleconnection] [port port-number] [timeout timeout][key keystring][source source] [priority priority] no tacacs-server host {ipaddress|hostname} Configures a TACACS+ host. Use the no form of this command to delete the specified TACACS+ host. tacacs-server key key-string no tacacs-server key Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS+ communications between the device and the TACACS+ server. Use the no form of this command to disable the key. tacacs-server timeout timeout no tacacs-server timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds. tacacs-server source-ip source no tacacs-server source-ip source Specifies the source IP address. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show tacacs [ip-address] Displays configuration and statistics for a TACACS+ server.286 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Password Management Password management provides increased network security and improved password control. This feature is optional and must be enabled in the Password Management page. Passwords for SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, and SNMP access can be assigned security features that include: • Minimum password lengths • Password expiration dates (password aging) • Prevention of frequent password reuse • Lockout of users after failed login attempts • Number of repeated characters allowed • Number of different character classes required in the password. Numeric, alphabetic, and special characters are all character classes. console(config)# tacacs-server source-ip 172.16.8.1 console# show tacacs Device Configuration ----------------------------- IP Address Status Port Single TimeOut Source IP Priority Connection ---------- ------ ------ ---------- -------- ---------- -------- 1.1.1.11 Not 49 No Global Global 10 Connected 1.1.1.21 Not 49 No Global Global 19 Connected 1.1.1.31 Not 49 No Global Global 18 Connected 1.1.1.41 Not 49 No Global Global 17 Connected Global values -------------- TimeOut : 5 ----------------------------- Source IP : 0.0.0.0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 287 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Password aging starts immediately after password management is enabled. However it is only effective if system time on the device is taken from an SNTP server. Passwords expire according to the user-defined expiration date/time. Ten days prior to password expiration, the device displays a password expiration warning message. After the password has expired, users can log in a few additional times. During the remaining logins, an additional warning message displays informing the user that the password must be changed. If the password is not changed, users are locked out of the system, and can only log in using the console. Password warnings are logged in the SYSLOG file. NOTE: Password aging is enabled only after setting the switch to use SNTP for setting time.288 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define password management parameters: 1 Click System > Management Security > Password Management in the tree view to display the Password Management page. Figure 9-40. Password Management 2 Check the required fields and enter their values: – Enable Strong Passwords — Check to enable this feature. – Number of Classes — Select a number of character classes. The character classes are: upper case characters, lower case characters, digits and punctuation. The number of character classes selected indicates how many different types of characters must be in the password. – Repeated Characters — Select the number of permissible repeated characters in the password.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 289 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Password Minimum Length (8-64 characters) — When checked, specifies the minimum password length. Enter the minimum password length. – Enable Login Attempts — When checked, enables locking a user out of the device when a faulty password is used more than the number of times entered. Select the maximum number of login attempts. – Global Password Aging (1-365) — When checked, specifies that the password will expire in the number of days entered. Enter the number of days. This is only enabled after setting the switch to use SNTP for setting time – Consecutive Passwords Before Reuse (1-10) — When checked, indicates the number of times a password must be changed, before the password can be reused. Select the number of times. – Password History Hold Time (1-365) — When checked, the password history will be deleted after the number of days entered. Enter the number of days. Password Management Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Password Management page. Table 9-49. Password Management CLI Commands CLI Command Description passwords strength-check enable no passwords strength-check Enforces password strength checks. Use the no form of this command to disable enforcing password strength checks. passwords strength [max-limit repeated characters | minimum character-classes] no passwords strength Enforces limits of repeated characters and character classes. Use the no form of this command to disable enforcing limits of repeated characters and character classes.290 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is a sample script that sets password strength rules and creates a user with a valid password. password min-length length no password min-length Defines the minimum password length. Use the no form of this command to remove the restriction. passwords aging days no passwords aging Enforces password aging. Use the no form of this command to return to default. password history number no password history Defines the amount of times a password is changed, before the password can be reused. password history hold-time days no password history hold-time Configures the duration that a password is relevant for tracking passwords history. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. password lockout number no password lockout Defines the number of times a faulty password is entered before the user is locked out of the device. Use the no form of this command to disable the lockout feature. show password configuration Displays password management information. Table 9-50. CLI Script to Configure Strong Password CLI Command Description console#configure console(conf)# passwords strengthcheck enable Enable strong passwords. Table 9-49. Password Management CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 291 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers provide additional security for networks. Up to four RADIUS servers can be defined. RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for: • Telnet Access • Secure Shell Access • Web Access • Console Access console(config)# passwords strength minimum character-classes 3 Enable that passwords must contain at least three character classes. password min-length 8 Enable that passwords must contain at least eight characters. console(config)# username admin privilege 15 password FGH123!@# Create a user named "admin" with privilege level 15 and password that fits the strength rules. Table 9-50. CLI Script to Configure Strong Password CLI Command Description292 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To add a RADIUS server: 1 Click System > Management Security > RADIUS in the tree view to display the RADIUS: Summary page. Figure 9-41. RADIUS: Summary The RADIUS default parameters and previously-defined RADIUS servers are displayed. 2 Enter the default parameters to be used when these parameters are not entered for a specific server. – Default Retries (1-10) — The default number of transmitted requests sent to RADIUS server before a failure occurs. – Default Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The default amount of the time (in seconds) that the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before timing out. – Default Dead time (0-2000) — The default amount of time (in minutes) that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests. – Default Key String (0-128 Characters) — The Default Key string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server. This key is used for encryption. – Source IPv4 Address — The source IP v4 address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 293 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Source IPv6 Address — The source IP v6 address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers. 3 To add a RADIUS server, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IP Address — Enter the RADIUS server IP address. – Priority (0-65535) — Enter the priority of the authentication server being added. 0 is the highest value. This is used to configure the order in which servers are queried. – Authentication Port (0-65535) — Enter the authentication port used to verify the RADIUS server authentication. Enter 0 if you do not want this server to be used for authentication purposes. – Accounting Port (0-65535) — Enter the accounting port, which is the UDP port number of the RADUS server used for accounting requests. Enter 0 if you do not want this server to be used for accounting purposes. – Usage Type — Enter the RADIUS server usage. The possible options are: • Login — Used for login authentication and/or accounting. • 802.1x — Used for 802.1x authentication and/or accounting. • All — Used for all types of authentication and/or accounting. 4 Enter the following fields if you do not want to use the default values entered in the RADIUS: Summary page. If you do want to use the default values, check Use Default for these fields. – Number of Retries (1-10) — Enter the number of requests sent to the RADIUS server before a failure occurs. – Timeout for Reply (1-30) — The amount of the time in seconds that the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retrying the query, or switching to the next server. – Dead Time (0-2000) — The amount of time (in minutes) that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests. – Key String (0-128 Characters) — The key string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server. 294 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Source IP Address — The device IP address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers. Defining RADIUS Servers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed on the RADIUS pages. Table 9-51. RADIUS Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description radius-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|ipv6zaddress|hostname} [auth-port auth-port-number] [acct-port acct-port-number][timeout timeout] [retransmit retries] [deadtime deadtime] [key keystring] [source {ipv4- address|ipv6-address}] [priority priority] [usage {login|802.1x|all}] no radius-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} Specifies a RADIUS server host. Use the no form of the command to delete the specified RADIUS server host. radius-server timeout timeout no radius-server timeout Sets the interval for which a device waits for a server host to reply. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server source-ip sourceip-address no radius-server source-ip source-ip-address Specifies the source IPv4 address that will be used for the IPv4 communication with RADIUS servers. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 295 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY radius-server source-ipv6 source-ipv6-address no radius-server source-ipv6 source-ipv6-address Specifies the source IPv6 address that will be used for the IPv6 communication with RADIUS servers. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server retransmit retries no radius-server retransmit Specifies the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server deadtime deadtime no radius-server deadtime Configures unavailable servers to be skipped. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. radius-server key key-string no radius-server key Sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS server. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show radius-servers Displays the RADIUS server settings. Table 9-51. RADIUS Server CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description296 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of CLI commands: console(config)# radius-server host 192.168.10.1 authport 20 timeout 20 console(config)# radius-server key enterprise-server console# show radius-servers IP address Port Port Time- Ret- Dead- Source IP Prio. Usage Auth Acct Out rans Time --------------- ----- ----- ------ ------ ------ --------------- ----- --- 1.1.1.11 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 10 all 1.1.1.21 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 19 all 1.1.1.31 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 18 all 1.1.1.41 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 17 all 1.1.1.51 1812 1813 Global Global Global Global 16 all Global values -------------- TimeOut : 3 Retransmit : 3 Deadtime : 0 Source IP : 0.0.0.0 Source IPv6 : ::Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 297 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Server The switch can operate as either: • DHCP client that obtains its own IP from a DHCP server, as described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214 • DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to other devices, as described in this section This section contains the following topics: • DHCP Server Overview • DHCP Server Properties • Network Pool • Excluded Addresses • Static Hosts • Address Binding DHCP Server Overview A DHCP server uses a defined pool of IP addresses (user-defined) from which it allocates IP addresses to DHCP clients. The DHCP server can allocate IP addresses in the following modes: • Static Allocation — The hardware address of a host is manually mapped to an IP address. • Permanent Allocation — An IP address sent to the client through a standard request-reply mechanism, is owned by that client permanently (unless changes in the network environment/connections take place, for any reason). • Dynamic Allocation — A client obtains a leased IP address for a specified period of time. The IP address is revoked at the end of this period, and the client must request another IP address. 298 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Server Properties If the device is configured to act as a DHCP server, pinging capability can be enabled. The DHCP server pings an IP address in the address pool before assigning that IP address to a requesting client. If the ping is unanswered, the DHCP server assumes that the address is not in use and assigns the address to the client. To configure the device as a DHCP server: 1 Click System > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Properties in the tree view to display the DHCP Server Properties page. Figure 9-42. DHCP Server PropertiesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 299 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the fields: – DHCP Server Status — Enable/disable the ability of the device to function as a DHCP server. – DHCP Ping — Enable/disable the DHCP server to ping the offered IP address before responding to a client request. – DHCP Ping Retries — Enter the number of pings that are sent before discarding an IP address. Use Default reverts to the default Ping Retries setting. – DHCP Ping Timeout — Enter the maximum time interval (in milliseconds) that the DHCP server waits for a ping reply. Use Default reverts to the default Ping Timeout. Defining DHCP Server Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining the switch as a DHCP server. Table 9-52. DHCP Server CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp server no ip dhcp server Enables the DHCP server feature on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable the DHCP server feature. ip dhcp ping enable no ip dhcp ping enable Enables the DHCP server to send ping packets before assigning the address to a requesting client. Use the no form of this command to prevent the server from pinging pool addresses. ip dhcp ping count number no ip dhcp ping count Specifies the number of packets a DHCP server sends to a pool address as part of a ping operation. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.300 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: ip dhcp ping timeout milliseconds no ip dhcp ping timeout Specifies the time interval during which a DHCP server waits for a ping reply from an address pool. Use the no form of this command to restore default values. console(config)# ip dhcp ping enable console(config)# ip dhcp ping count 5 Table 9-52. DHCP Server CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 301 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Network Pool When the device is serving as a DHCP server, a pool of IP addresses must be defined, from which the switch will allocate IP addresses to clients. Each IP pool has a lease duration. To create a pool of IP addresses, and define their lease durations: 1 Click System > DHCP Server > Network Pool in the tree view to display the Network Pool: Summary page. Figure 9-43. Network Pool: Summary The previously-defined network pools are displayed. 2 Click Add to define a new network pool, and enter the fields: – Pool Name — Enter the pool name. – Subnet IP Address — Enter the subnet in which the network pool resides.302 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Network Mask — Check and enter the pool’s network mask. • Prefix Length — Check and enter the number of bits that comprise the address prefix. – Address Pool Start — Enter the first IP address in the range of the network pool. – Address Pool End — Enter the last IP address in the range of the network pool. – Lease Duration — Enter the amount of time a DHCP client can use an IP address from this pool. The total lease duration is 4294967295 seconds, i.e. 49710.2696 days. Thus a lease of 49710 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds is a legal value, while a lease of 49710 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds results in an Out of Range alert. • Days — The duration of the lease in number of days. The range is 0 to 49710 days. • Hours — The number of hours in the lease. A days value must be supplied before an hours value can be added. • Minutes — The number of minutes in the lease. A days value and an hours value must be added before a minutes value can be added. • Infinite — The duration of the lease is unlimited. – Default Router — Enter the default router for the DHCP client. – Domain Name Server — Enter the DNS server available to the DHCP client. – Domain Name — Enter the domain name for a DHCP client. The domain name may contain up to 32 characters. – NetBIOS WINS Server — Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server available to a DHCP client. – NetBIOS Node Type — Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name. Valid node types are: • Empty— Default value. • Broadcast — IP Broadcast messages are used to register and resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 303 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Peer-to-Peer — Point-to-point communications with a NetBIOS name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP addresses. • Mixed — A combination of b-node and p-node communications is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names. M-node first uses b-node; then, if necessary, p-node. M-node is typically not the best choice for larger networks because its preference for b-node Broadcasts increases network traffic. • Hybrid — A hybrid combination of b-node and p-node is used. When configured to use h-node, a computer always tries p-node first and uses b-node only if p-node fails. This is the default. – SNTP Server — Enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP client. – Next Server — Enter the IP address of the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. If the next server in the boot process is not configured, the DHCP server uses inbound interface helper addresses as boot servers. – Next Server Name — Enter the name of the next server in the boot process. – Image File Name — Enter the name of the file that is used as a boot image. Configuring Network Pool Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining a pool of addresses on the DHCP server. Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp pool network name no ip dhcp pool network name Configures a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server and enters DHCP Pool Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the address pool.304 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY address {network-number|low low-address high highaddress} {mask|prefixlength} no address Configures the subnet number, mask and start and end addresses for a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server. Use the no form of this command to remove the subnet number and mask. lease {days [{hours} [minutes]]|infinite} no lease Configures the time duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP server to a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to restore the default value default-router ip-address [ip-address2 ... ipaddress8] no default-router Configures the default router list for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the default router list. dns-server ip-address [ipaddress2 ... ip-address8] no dns-server Configures the DNS IP servers available to a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the DNS server list. domain-name domain no domain-name Specifies the domain name for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the domain name. netbios-name-server ipaddress [ip-address2 ... ipaddress8] no netbios-name-server Configures the NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) servers that are available to Microsoft DHCP clients. Use the no form of this command to remove the NetBIOS name server list. netbios-node-type {b-node|pnode|m-node|h-node} no netbios-node-type Configures the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients. Use the no form of this command to remove the NetBIOS node type. Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 305 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: time-server ip-address [ipaddress2 ... ip-address8] no time-server Specifies the time servers list for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the time servers list. next-server ip-address no next-server Configures the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the boot server. next-server-name name no next-server-name Configures the next server name in the boot process of a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to remove the boot server name. bootfile filename no bootfile Specifies the default boot image file name for a DHCP client. Use the no form of this command to delete the boot image file name. show ip dhcp pool network [name] Displays the DHCP network pool configuration. console(config)# ip dhcp pool network pool1 console(config-dhcp)# address 10.12.1.99 255.255.255.0 01b7.0813.8811.66 console(config-dhcp)# lease 1 Table 9-53. Network Pool CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description306 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Excluded Addresses By default, the DHCP server assumes that all pool addresses in a pool may be assigned to clients. A single IP address or a range of IP addresses can be excluded. To define an excluded address range: 1 Click System > DHCP Server > Excluded Addresses in the tree view to display the Excluded Addresses: Summary page. Figure 9-44. Excluded Addresses: Summary The previously-defined excluded IP addresses are displayed. 2 To add a range of IP addresses to be excluded, click Add, and enter the fields: – Start IP Address — First IP address in the range of excluded IP addresses.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 307 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – End IP Address — Last IP address in the range of excluded IP addresses. Excluding Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for excluding addresses. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-54. Excluding Addresses Using CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp excluded-address lowaddress [high-address] no ip dhcp excluded-address low-address [high-address] Configures a DHCP address pool on a DHCP Server and enter DHCP Pool Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the address pool. show ip dhcp excluded-addresses Displays the excluded addresses. console(config)# ip dhcp excluded-address 172.16.1.100 172.16.1.199 console> show ip dhcp excluded-addresses The number of excluded addresses ranges is 2 Excluded addresses: 10.1.1.212- 10.1.1.219, 10.1.2.212- 10.1.2.219308 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Static Hosts To manually allocate permanent IP addresses to clients (known as static hosts): 1 Click System > DHCP Server > Static Hosts in the tree view to display the Static Hosts: Summary page. Figure 9-45. Static Hosts: Summary The static hosts are displayed. 2 To add a static host, click Add, and enter the fields: – Host Name — Enter the host pool name, which can be a string of symbols and an integer. – IP Address — Enter the IP address that was statically assigned to the host. • Network Mask — Enter the pool’s network mask. • Prefix Length — Enter the number of bits that comprise the address prefix.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 309 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Client Identifier — Enter a unique identification of the client specified in dotted hexadecimal notation, such as: 01b6.0819.6811.72. or: – MAC Address — Enter the MAC address of DHCP static host. – Client Name — The name of the client, using a standard set of ASCII characters. The client name must not include the domain name. – Default Router — Enter the default router for the DHCP client. – Domain Name Server — Enter the DNS server available to the DHCP client. – Domain Name — Enter the domain name for a DHCP client. The domain name may contain up to 32 characters. – NetBIOS WINS Server — Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server available to a DHCP client. – NetBIOS Node Type — Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name. Valid node types are: • Empty — Default value. • Broadcast — IP Broadcast messages are used to register and resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses. • Peer-to-Peer — Point-to-point communications with a NetBIOS name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP addresses. • Mixed — A combination of b-node and p-node communications is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names. M-node first uses b-node; then, if necessary, p-node. M-node is typically not the best choice for larger networks because its preference for b-node Broadcasts increases network traffic. • Hybrid — A hybrid combination of b-node and p-node is used. When configured to use h-node, a computer always tries p-node first and uses b-node only if p-node fails. This is the default. – SNTP Server — Enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP client.310 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Next Server — Enter the IP address of the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client. If the next server in the boot process is not configured, the DHCP server uses inbound interface helper addresses as boot servers. – Next Server Name — Enter the name of the next server in the boot process. – Image File Name — Enter the name of the file that is used as a boot image. Defining Static Hosts Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining static hosts. See Table 9-53 for the remaining CLI commands that are common to the Network Pool pages, but are used in the context DHCP Pool Host context. Table 9-55. Defining Static Hosts Using CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp pool host no ip dhcp pool host Configures a DHCP static address on a DHCP Server and enters the DHCP Pool Host Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the address pool. ip host name address [address2 address3 address4] no ip host name Defines the static host name-toaddress mapping in the host cache. Use the no form of this command to remove the static hostname-toaddress mapping. show hosts Displays the default domain name, the list of name server hosts, the static and the cached list of host names and addresses. clear host Deletes entries from the host nameto-address cache.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 311 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# ip dhcp pool host station console(config-dhcp)#ip host accounting.website.com 176.10.23.1 console# show hosts System Name: Default domain: Domain name is not configured Name/address lookup is enable Name servers (Preference order): 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.3 1.1.1.4 1.1.1.5 Configured host name-to-address mapping: Host IP Address --------------------------------- ----------------------- accounting.website.com 176.10.23.1312 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Address Binding Use the Address Binding page to view and remove the IP addresses allocated by the switch and their corresponding MAC addresses. To view and/or remove address bindings: • Click System > DHCP Server > Address Binding in the tree view to display the Address Binding page. Figure 9-46. Address Binding The following fields for the address bindings are displayed: – IP Address — The IP addresses of the client. – Client Identifier/MAC Address — A unique identification of the client specified as a MAC Address or in dotted hexadecimal notation, e.g., 01b6.0819.6811.72. – Lease Expiration — The lease expiration date and time of the host’s IP address. – Type — The manner in which the IP address was assigned to the client. The possible options are: • Static — The hardware address of the host was mapped to an IP address.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 313 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Permanent — The IP address, obtained dynamically from the switch, is owned by the client permanently (unless changes in the network environment/connections take place, for any reason). • Dynamic — The IP address, obtained dynamically from the switch, is owned by the client for a specified period of time. The IP address is revoked at the end of this period, at which time the client must request another IP address. 314 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP This section describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) for managing network devices. It contains the following topics: • SNMP Overview • SNMP Global Settings • SNMP Views • SNMP Access Control (Groups) • SNMP User Security Model (Users) • SNMP Communities • SNMP Notification Filters • SNMP Notification Recipients SNMP Overview The switch supports the SNMPv1, SNMPv2 and SNMPv3. SNMP v1 and v2 The SNMP agent maintains a list of variables that are used to manage the switch. These variables are stored in the Management Information Base (MIB) from which they may be presented. The SNMP agent defines the MIB specification format, as well as the format used to access the information over the network. Access rights to the SNMP agents are controlled by access strings. SNMPv1 and v2 are enabled by default. SNMP v3 In addition to the features provided by SNMPv1 and SNMPv2, SNMPv3 applies access control and a new trap mechanism to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 PDUs. In addition, a User Security Model (USM) can be defined, which includes: • Authentication — Provides data integrity and data origin authentication. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 315 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Privacy — Protects against disclosure of message content. Cipher BlockChaining (CBC) is used for encryption. Either authentication alone can be enabled on an SNMP message, or both authentication and privacy can be enabled on an SNMP message. However privacy cannot be enabled without authentication. • Timeliness — Protects against message delay or message redundancy. The SNMP agent compares incoming message to the message time information. • Key Management — Defines key generation, updates, and use. The switch supports SNMP notification filters, based on Object IDs (OIDs), which are used by the system to manage switch features. Authentication or Privacy Keys are modified in the User Security Model (USM). SNMPv3 can only be enabled if the Local Engine ID is enabled. SNMP Access Rights Access rights in SNMP are managed in the following ways: • SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 — Communities The community name is a password sent by the SNMP management station to the device for authentication purposes. A community string is transmitted along with the SNMPv1,v2 frames, but neither the frames nor the community string are encrypted. Since SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are not encrypted, they are not secure. Communities can be associated with views or groups, and they are defined in the Community pages. • SNMPv3 — Users and Groups SNMP v3 works with users instead of communities. The users belong to groups that have access rights assigned to them. Users are defined in the User Security Model pages SNMPv3 provides two security mechanisms: – Authentication — The switch checks that the SNMP user is an authorized system administrator. This is done for each and every frame. 316 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Privacy — SNMP frames can carry encrypted data. These mechanisms can be combined to provide three levels of security: – No security – Authentication – Authentication and Privacy. Note that for both authentication and privacy to be enabled, two groups with the same name, one with authentication and one with privacy, must be created. A group is a label for a combination of attributes that determines whether members have read, write, and/or notify privileges. Users can be associated with a group. A group is operational only when it is associated with an SNMP user. Model OIDs The following are the switch model Object IDs (OIDs): SNMP Global Settings The Engine ID is used by SNMPv3 entities to uniquely identify themselves. An SNMP agent is considered an authoritative SNMP engine. This means that the agent responds to incoming messages (Get, GetNext, GetBulk, Set), and sends Trap messages to a manager. The agent's local information is encapsulated in fields in the message. Each SNMP agent maintains local information that is used in SNMPv3 message exchanges (not relevant for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2). The default SNMP Engine ID is comprised of the enterprise number and the default MAC address. The SNMP engine ID must be unique for the administrative domain, so that no two devices in a network have the same engine ID. Model Name Object ID PC5524 10895.3030 PC5524P 10895.3032 PC5548 10895.3031 PC5548P 10895.3033Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 317 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The local information is stored in four read-only MIB variables: snmpEngineId, snmpEngineBoots, snmpEngineTime, and snmpEngineMaxMessageSize. To configure SNMP: 1 Click System > SNMP > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 9-47. Global Parameters The global parameters are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Local Engine ID (10-64 Hex Characters) — Check and enter the local device engine ID. The field value is a hexadecimal string. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon. The Engine ID must be defined before SNMPv3 is enabled. For stacked devices, verify that the Engine ID is unique for the administrative domain. This prevents two devices in a network from having the same Engine ID. 318 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Use Default — Check to use the device-generated Engine ID. The default Engine ID is based on the device MAC address, and is defined per standard as: • First 4 octets — First bit = 1, the rest is IANA Enterprise number = 674. • Fifth octet — Set to 3 to indicate the MAC address that follows. • Last 6 octets — MAC address of the device. – SNMP Notifications — Enable/disable the switch sending SNMP notifications. – Authentication Notifications — Enable/disable the switch sending SNMP traps when authentication fails. Setting SNMP Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Global Parameters page. Table 9-56. SNMP Global Parameters Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server engine ID local {engine-id-string|default} no snmp-server engine ID local Specifies the local device engine ID. The field values is a hexadecimal string. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or colon. The Engine ID must be defined before SNMPv3 is enabled. Use the no form of this command to remove the configured engine ID. snmp-server enable traps no snmp-server enable traps Enables the router to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps. Use the no form of the command to disable SNMP traps.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 319 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP Views An SNMP view, which is a collection of MIB subtrees, provides or blocks access to device features. Each subtree is defined by the Object ID (OID) of the root of its subtrees. In extreme cases this subtree can be a leaf. Well-known names can be used to specify the root of the desired subtree, or an OID can be entered (see "Model OIDs" on page 316). Each subtree is either included in or excluded from the view being defined. snmp-server trap authentication no snmp-server trap authentication Enables the router to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps when authentication fails. Use the no form of this command to disable SNMP failed authentication traps. show snmp Checks the status of SNMP communications. console(config)# snmp-server enable traps console(config)# snmp-server trap authentication console(config)# snmp-server engineid local default The engine-id must be unique within your administrative domain. Do you wish to continue? [Y/N]y The SNMPv3 database will be erased. Do you wish to continue? [Y/N]y Table 9-56. SNMP Global Parameters Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description320 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Views can be attached to groups in the Access Control pages. To create an SNMP view: 1 Click System > SNMP > View Settings in the tree view to display the View Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-48. View Setting: Summary 2 Select a view name. Its subtrees are displayed. 3 To remove a subtree from an SNMP view, click Remove. The subtrees of the default views (Default, DefaultSuper) cannot be changed. 4 To add a new view, click Add, and enter a new View Name (1-30 Characters). 5 To complete the definition of the view, click Edit, and select a View Name to modify. Enter the fields: – New Object ID Subtree — Check to specify the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 321 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Selected from List — Select the device feature OID by using the Up and Down buttons to scroll through a list of all device OIDs. Or: • Insert — Specify the device feature OID. – View Type — Specify if the defined OID branch will be included or excluded in the selected SNMP view. Defining SNMP Views Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the View Settings pages. The following is an example of CLI commands: Table 9-57. SNMP View CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included|excluded} no snmp-server view view-name [oid-tree] Creates or updates a SNMP server view entry. Use the no form of this command to remove an SNMP server view entry. show snmp views [viewname] Displays the configuration of a view or all views. console(config)# snmp-server view user1 1 included console(config)# end console# show snmp views Name OID Tree Type ------------ --------------- -------- user1 system included Default iso included Default snmpVacmMIB excluded Default usmUser excluded Default rndCommunityTable excluded DefaultSuper iso included322 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP Access Control (Groups) For ease of use, users may be assigned to groups. In this way, it is possible to assign feature access rights to an entire group, instead of assigning them individually to users. Users are created in the User Security Model pages. Groups can be defined in any version of SNMP, but only SNMPv3 groups can be assigned authentication methods. To add an SNMP group, and assign it access control privileges: 1 Click System > SNMP > Access Control in the tree view to display the Access Control: Summary page. Figure 9-49. Access Control: Summary Previously-defined groups are displayed. 2 To add a new group, click Add, and enter the fields: – Group Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter a group name. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 323 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Security Model — Select the SNMP version of the group. – Security Level — Select the security level attached to the group. Security levels apply to SNMPv3 only. The possible options are: • No Authentication — Neither authentication nor the privacy security levels are assigned to the group. • Authentication — Authenticates SNMP messages, and ensures that the origin of the SNMP message is authenticated. • Privacy — Encrypts SNMP message. – Operation — Select the group access rights. The possible options are: • Read — The management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from the drop-down list. • Write — The management access is read-write and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from the drop-down list. • Notify — Sends traps for the assigned SNMP view. If desired, select a view from the drop-down list. Defining SNMP Access Control Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Access Control pages. Table 9-58. SNMP Access Control CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server group groupname {v1|v2|v3 {noauth|auth|priv}} [read readview] [write writeview] [notify notifyview] no snmp-server group groupname {v1|v2|v3 [noauth|auth|priv]} [context-name] Configure a new Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) group, or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views. Use the no form of this command to remove a specified SNMP group. show snmp groups [groupname] Displays the configuration of groups 324 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP User Security Model (Users) An SNMP user is defined by the following: • Login credentials (username, password, and authentication method) • Context and scope in which the user operates • Association with a group • Engine ID SNMP user login credentials are verified using a local database. After a user is authenticated, it takes on the attributes of its group, and can then access the views permitted to this group. A user can only be a member of a single group. Before you create an SNMPv3 user, create an SNMPv3 group in the Access Control pages. When the configuration file is saved, SNMP communities/users are not saved. This means that if you configure another device with this configuration file, you must define the SNMP communities/users on that device. console (config)# snmp-server group user-group v3 priv read user-view console# show snmp groups Name Security Views Model Level Read Write Notify ----- ----- ------- ------- ------- ---------- 1 V1 noauth - - - 2 V1 noauth - - - 3 V1 noauth - - - 4 V1 noauth - - - 5 V1 noauth - - -Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 325 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To create an SNMP V3 user, and assign it to a group and view: 1 Click System > SNMP > User Security Model in the tree view to display the User Security Model: Summary page. Figure 9-50. User Security Model: Summary The currently-defined users and their groups are displayed. 2 To add a user, click Add, and enter the fields: – User Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter a new user name. – Engine ID — Specifies the local or remote SNMP entity, to which the user is connected. Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID deletes the SNMPv3 User Database. Select either Local or Remote. If Remote is selected, enter the remote engine ID. – Group Name — Select from a list of user-defined SNMP groups. SNMP groups are defined in the Access Control Group pages.326 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Authentication Method — Select an authentication method used to authenticate users. The possible options are: • None — No user authentication is used. • MD5 Password — HMAC-MD5-96 password is used for authentication. • SHA Password — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-SHA- 96 authentication level. • MD5 Key — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-MD5 algorithm. • SHA Key — Users are authenticated using the HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level. – Password (0-32 Characters) — If the MD5 Password or SHA Password authentication method was selected, enter the user-defined password for a group. – Authentication Key (MD5-16; SHA-20 Hex Characters) — If the MD5 Key or SHA Key authentication method was selected, enter the HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96 keys. The authentication and privacy keys are entered to define the authentication key. If only authentication is required, 16 bytes are defined for MD5. If both privacy and authentication are required, 32 bytes are defined for MD5. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon. – Privacy Key (16 Hex Characters) — If the MD5 Key or SHA Key authentication method was selected, enter the privacy key. If only authentication is required, 20 bytes are defined. If both privacy and authentication are required, 16 bytes are defined. Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits. Each byte can be separated by a period or colon. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 327 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining SNMPv3 Users Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the User Security Model pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP Communities When using SNMP v1,2, communities strings (passwords) are used to provide access rights in the following ways: • Basic Table — The access rights of a community can be read-only, readwrite, or SNMP Admin. In addition, you can restrict access to the community to only certain MIB objects using a view. Views are defined in the Views Setting pages. • Advanced Table — Access rights to a community are assigned to a group that consists of users. A group can have Read, Write, and Notify access to views. Groups are defined in the Access Control pages. Table 9-59. SNMP Users CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server user username groupname {v1|v2c|[remote-host] v3 [encrypted] [auth {md5|sha} auth-password]} no snmp-server user username [remotehost] Configures a new SNMP V3 user. Use the no form of the command to remove a user. show snmp users [username] Displays the configuration of users. console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v1 console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v2c console(config)# snmp-server user tom acbd v3328 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define an SNMP community: 1 Click System > SNMP > Communities in the tree view to display the Communities: Summary page. Figure 9-51. SNMP Community The Basic and Advanced tables are displayed. 2 To add a new community, click Add. 3 Define the SNMP management station by entering its IP address information: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is being used. – IPv6 Address Type — When the community supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 329 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – SNMP Management Station — Enter the management station IP address for which the SNMP community is defined, or choose All to be able to receive SNMP messages from anywhere. – Community String (1-20 Characters) — Enter the community string, which functions as a password, and is used to authenticate the management station to the device. 4 To associate access mode and views directly with the community, enter the fields: – Basic — Check to enable SNMP Basic mode for a selected community. – Access Mode — If Basic is selected, specify the access rights of the community. The possible options are: • Read-Only — Management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the community. • Read-Write — Management access is read-write and changes can be made to the device configuration, but not to the community. • SNMP Admin — User has access to all device configuration options, as well as permissions to modify the community. – View Name — Select a view from a list of user-defined SNMP views. The view determines other characteristics associated with the community. 5 To use Advanced mode, enter the fields: – Advanced — When SNMP Advanced mode is selected, you can select an SNMP group to specify the SNMP access control rules for the selected community. The SNMP Advanced mode is defined only with SNMPv3. 330 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Group Name — Select the group to be associated with the community. Configuring Communities Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Community pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: SNMP Notification Filters Notification filters determine the type of SNMP notifications that are sent to the management station, based on the OID of the notification to be sent. Each OID is linked to a device feature or a feature aspect. SNMP notification filters provide the following services: • Identification of management trap targets • Trap filtering Table 9-60. SNMP Community CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server community community [view view-name] [ro|rw|su] {ipv4-address|ipv6-address} [mask mask-value|prefix-length prefix-value] [type router|oob] Sets up the community access string to permit access to the SNMP protocol. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified community string snmp-server community-group community group-name [ipv4- address|ipv6- address][mask|prefix-length] [type router|oob] no snmp-server community string [ipv4-address|ipv6-address] Sets up community access string to permit limited access to the SNMP protocol, based on group access rights. show snmp Displays the current SNMP device configuration. console (config)# snmp-server community dell ro 10.1.1.1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 331 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Selection of trap generation parameters • Access control checks After creating a notification filter, attach it to a notification recipient in the SNMPv1,2 Notification Recipients pages. To add a notification filter: 1 Click System > SNMP > Notification Filters in the tree view to display the Notification Filter: Summary page. Figure 9-52. Notification Filter: Summary 2 The OIDs of the selected filter are displayed. 3 If required, the notification filter type can be changed by selecting one of the following options: – Excluded — OID traps or informs will not be sent. – Included — OID traps or informs will be sent.332 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 4 To add a new notification filter, click Add. 5 In addition to the fields described in the Summary page, enter the fields: – Filter Name (1-30 Characters) — Enter the notification filter name. – New Object Identifier Tree — Check to specify the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view. • Selected from List — Select the device feature OID by using the Up and Down buttons to scroll through a list of all device OIDs. or: • Object ID — Specify the device feature OID. – Filter Type — Select whether the defined OID branch will be Included or Excluded in the selected SNMP view. Configuring Notification Filters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Notification Filter pages. Table 9-61. SNMP Notification Filter CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server filter filter-name oidtree {included|excluded} no snmp-server filter filter-name [oid-tree] Creates or updates an SNMP notification filter. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified SNMP server filter entry. show snmp filters [filter-name] Displays the configuration of SNMP notification filtersDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 333 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of CLI commands: SNMP Notification Recipients An SNMP notification is a trap message, sent from the switch to the SNMP management station, indicating that a certain event has occurred, such as a link up or down. Trap receivers, also known as notification recipients, are network nodes to which trap messages are sent by the switch. A trap receiver entry contains the IP address of the node and the SNMP credentials corresponding to the version that will be included in the trap message. When an event arises that requires a trap message to be sent, it is sent to every node listed in the trap receiver list. Some messages are of an informational nature and are called "informs" instead of traps. console (config)# snmp-server filter user1 iso included console(config)# end console # show snmp filters Name OID Tree Type ----------- ------------- -------- user1 iso Included334 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To add notification recipients, and attach them to notification filters: 1 Click System > SNMP > Notification Recipient in the tree view to display the Notification Recipients: Summary page. Figure 9-53. Notification Recipients: Summary The previously-defined notification recipients are displayed. 2 To add a new notification recipient, click Add, and enter the fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether the IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the recipient supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 335 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The IPv6 interface is configured on this VLAN. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – Recipient IP — The IP address to whom the traps are sent. – Notification Type — The notification sent. The possible options are: • Trap — Traps are sent. • Inform — Informs are sent. If SNMP versions 1 and 2 are enabled for the selected recipient, enter the fields: – Community String — The community string of the trap manager. – Notification Version — The message trap SNMP version (v1 or v2). If SNMPv3 is used to send and receive traps, enter the fields: – User Name — The user to whom SNMP notifications are sent. – Security Level — The means by which the packet is authenticated. The possible options are: • No Authentication — The packet is neither authenticated nor encrypted. • Authentication — The packet is authenticated. • Privacy — The packet is both authenticated and encrypted. 3 Enter the fields for all versions of SNMP: – UDP Port (1-65535) — The UDP port used to send notifications. The default is 162. – Filter Name — Select an SNMP filter from a list of previously-defined SNMP filters. – Timeout (1-300) — The amount of time (seconds) the device waits before resending informs. – Retries (1-255) — The amount of times the device resends an inform request. 336 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring SNMP Notification Recipients Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields in the Notification Recipients pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-62. SNMP Notification CLI Commands CLI Command Description snmp-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} [traps|informs] [version {1|2c|3 [auth|noauth|priv]}] communitystring [udp-port port] [filter filtername] [timeout seconds] [retries retries] no snmp-server host {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} [traps|informs] [version {1|2c|3}] Creates or updates a notification recipient receiving notifications in SNMP version 1, 2 or 3. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified host. show snmp Shows the current SNMP configuration. console(config)# snmp-server host 172.16.1.1 private console(config)# end console# show snmp CommunityString CommunityAccess View Name IP Address ------------- ------------ --------- ---------- public read only user-view All private read write default 172.16.1.1 private su DefaultSup er 172.17.1.1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 337 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY File Management This section describes how to manage device firmware (image files) and configuration files. It contains the following topics: • File Management Overview • Auto-Update/Configuration Feature • File Download • File Upload • Active Images • Copy Files • File System File Management Overview This section describes the system files found in the system and how they can be updated (downloaded) and backed up (uploaded). System Files The following system files are maintained on the system: • Startup Configuration File — Files with extension .text. These files contain the commands required to configure the device at startup or after reboot. The Startup Configuration file is created from the Running Configuration file, or can be created from another file. • Running Configuration File — Files with extension .text. These files contain all Startup Configuration file commands, as well as all commands entered during the current session. After the device is powered down or rebooted, all commands stored in the Running Configuration file are lost. During the startup process, all commands in the Startup Configuration file are copied to the Running Configuration file, and applied to the device. During the session, new configuration commands are added to the Running Configuration file. To update the Startup Configuration file with these configuration commands, the Running Configuration file must first be copied to the Startup Configuration file before powering down the 338 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY device. This can be done manually in the Copy Files page or see "AutoUpdate/Configuration Feature" on page 338 for more information about how to perform this automatically. • Image Files—Files with extension .ros. System file images are saved in two flash files called Image 1 and Image 2. The active image contains the active copy, while the other image contains a backup copy. The device boots and runs from the active image. If the active image is corrupted, the system automatically boots from the non-active image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the software upgrade process. Downloading/Uploading System Files System files can be manually loaded from (downloaded) or copied to (uploaded) a TFTP server or a USB drive. This can be done in one of the following ways: • Manually—System files can be downloaded using the File Download page and uploaded using the File Upload page. • Automatically (Auto Update/Configuration)—System files can be downloaded automatically, as follows: – Auto-Configuration—If the Auto-Configure feature is enabled (in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page), the Startup Configuration file (in various conditions described below) might be automatically updated after reboot. – Auto-Update—If the Firmware Auto-Update feature is enabled in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page, the image file is might be automatically updated (in various conditions described below). Auto-Update/Configuration Feature The Auto-Update/Configuration feature enables initial configuration of the device and upgrading of the firmware through an automatic process, which enables the administrator to ensure that the configuration/firmware of all the devices in the network is up-to-date. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 339 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The required configuration files/images are stored on a USB key or TFTP server, and these are downloaded to all the devices in the network when the device boots up instead of booting from a local startup configuration file. Auto-Update/Configuration also enables quick installation of new devices on the network, since an out-of-box device can be configured to retrieve its configuration file from the network/USB, allowing instant access to it from the administrator's management station and up-to-date configuration on the device. NOTE: If Auto-Update is performed through the USB port, in addition to upgrading the Startup Configuration and image file, a new IP address can also be assigned to the device. See "Setup Files" on page 339 below. Setup Files In addition to placing configuration and image files on the USB key, the USB key might also contain a setup file, which is a file with a .setup extension. Setup File Contents A setup file contains one or more lines. Each line contains some or all of the following fields: • MAC Address—This indicates to which device the line applies. In this way, a single setup file can be used for multiple devices. • New IP Address—The new IP address to be assigned to the device. • New IP Address Mask—The IP address mask to be applied to the new IP address assigned to the device. • Configuration File Name—Name of the configuration file to be used as the Startup Configuration. • Image File Name—Name of the image file to be loaded on device. • Flag—Indicates the status of the line. The following values can be used in this field: – In-Use—This line has already been applied. It is no longer a candidate for future use. – Invalid—The line is invalid, do not use. – Blank—There is no value for the flag field. This line is a candidate to be applied to the device.340 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Setup File Format A line in a setup file contains all or some of the above fields separated by spaces (in the following order): If the field is omitted, it is considered to be blank. A line can be in one of the following formats: • Format A—Contains all possible fields: Examples: – 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500- 4018.ros This means that the line applies to the device with MAC address: 0080.c200.0010; a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file. – 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500- 4018.ros in-use This line will not be used because the flag is in-use indicating that it has already been used for some device, and it would be incorrect to use if for another device. – 0080.c200.0010 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch-X.text pc5500- 4018.ros invalid This line will not be used because the flag is invalid indicating that it is failed in the past.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 341 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Format B—Contains the following 4 fields: Example: 0080.c200.0010 switch-X.text pc5500-4018.ros This means that the line applies to the device with MAC address: 0080.c200.0010. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file. • Format C—Contains the following 5 fields: Example: 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 switch.text pc5500-4018.ros This means that the line applies to any device (no MAC address is supplied); a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0. The switch-x.text is the Startup Configuration file and pc5500-4018.ros is the new image file. • Format D—Contains the following 3 fields: Example: 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 This means that the line applies to any device (no MAC address is supplied); a new IP address of 192.168.0.10 is to be assigned to the device, with mask: 255.255.255.0.342 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Triggering the Auto-Update/Configuration Process When the Auto-Update/Configuration feature is enabled (in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page), the device automatically attempts to download a new image or configuration file (under certain circumstances) using one of the following processes: • The Auto-Update process is triggered from the USB drive if a USB key in the USB drive is found. • The Auto-Configuration process is triggered from the USB drive after the Auto-Update process completed and the device was rebooted (if a new image file was loaded), and if the following conditions are fulfilled: – There is a USB key in the USB drive. – Force Configuration Download at Next Startup has been enabled by the boot host dhcp command, or the Startup Configuration file is empty. See "Performing Auto-Update from a USB Drive" on page 343. • The Auto-Update from a TFTP server is triggered if the following conditions are fulfilled: – The conditions for a USB Auto-Update are not fulfilled. – An IP address of a TFTP server is received from a DHCP server. – A file name is received from DHCP server. • The Auto-Configuration from a TFTP server is triggered if the following conditions are fulfilled: – The conditions for USB Auto-Configuration are not fulfilled. – The switch as DHCP client received a configuration file name or a TFTP URL. – Force Configuration Download at Next Startup enabled by the boot host dhcp command, or, the Startup Configuration file is empty. See "Preparations for Using Auto Configuration from a TFTP Server" on page 345. NOTES: • DHCP client never triggers the Auto-Update process from a TFTP server after attempting (whether successfully or not) to auto-update/configure configuration/image file from the USB drive. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 343 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If the auto process involved setting the IP address of the device from the setup file, the auto process from the TFTP server can be triggered. • If the USB drive contains a setup file, but that setup file does not include a line that can be used for the current device, the DHCP client is able to trigger the Auto-Update process from TFTP (because the USB process never started at all). Automatic DHCP IP Interface Assignment The user can manually define a DHCP interface in the DHCP IPv4 page. If the user does not do this, the switch automatically creates a DHCP interface on the VLAN with the lowest VLAN ID that does not have an IP address defined on it after boot if both of the following conditions are fulfilled: • There is no DHCP IP interface. • There is a VLAN without an IP address. Preparations for Using Auto Update/Configuration from a USB Drive Before Auto-Update/Configuration from a USB drive can be performed, the following steps must be performed: 1. Enable Auto-Update/Configuration in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page. 2. (Optional) Create a line in the setup file for this device containing the required options and load it on the USB key. 3. Load configuration/image files on the USB key as required. 4. Insert the USB key in the USB drive and reboot the device. Performing Auto-Update from a USB Drive When Auto-Update is initiated from a USB drive, the following steps are performed: 1. Locate the correct setup file—The USB drive is searched for a setup file. One of the following can occur: – Setup file is not found—The root folder of the USB is searched for an image files (with .ros extension). • The image file with the most recent version is loaded into the image file if the versions are different.344 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If a new image file was loaded, the device is rebooted. • The USB drive is searched for a configuration file (.text extension). If there is more than one configuration file, the file named powerconnect.text is loaded (if it is not found the process is stopped). – One or more setup files are found—If a single setup file is found, it is used; if several files are found, the file powerconnect.setup is used. If no setup file with this name is found, the process is stopped. 2. Find the line in the setup file relevant to the device—When the correct setup file is found, it is searched for a line relevant to the device, as follows: – The setup file is searched for a line with format A or B in which there is a match to the device's MAC address. If such line is found, and its format is valid (the field is empty), the line is applied. – If no line for the specific device was found, the setup file is searched for valid lines with formats C or D. The first line found is applied. 3. Apply the correct line—When the correct line in the setup file is found, it is applied, as follows: – If the line contains an IP address and IP mask, the IP address is configured on the default VLAN. – If the line contains an image file and its version differs from the current image file version, the USB image file is loaded and the switch is rebooted. – If a new image file was loaded, it is loaded onto all units in the stack. – If the line contains a configuration file, the configuration file is appended to running configuration file. 4. Mark the flag in the applied line—When the line is applied (successfully or not), its flag is set, as follows: – If the line contains an IP address and IP mask (format C or D), the IP address is configured on the default VLAN and the line is marked as "in-use". This ensures that the line is not used for another device. – If the line was not applied successfully, for one of the following reasons, the line is marked as "invalid" and a SYSLOG message is sent.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 345 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • The configuration file specified by the line does not exist on the USB key or is corrupted. • The image file specified by the line does not exist on the USB key or is corrupted. – If parsing of the line failed for some other reason, the line is ignored and a SYSLOG message is sent. NOTE: When both Auto-Update and Auto-Configuration are performed, the image file is loaded first, the device is booted and then the configuration file is loaded. Preparations for Using Auto Configuration from a TFTP Server The Auto-Update/Configuration feature enables configuring the device from a configuration file found on the TFTP server. Two methods may be used: • One-file Read, described in "Auto Configuration (One File Read Method)" on page 345. This method is used if a configuration file is found on the TFTP server. • Multi-file Read, described in "Auto Configuration (Multi File Read Method)" on page 346. This method is used if a configuration file name is not found on the DHCP server, or the configuration file is not found on the TFTP server. Auto Configuration (One File Read Method) This method requires the following preparations on the DHCP and TFTP servers: • TFTP Server Place a configuration file, for example config.txt in the main directory. This file can be created by copying a configuration file from a device. When the device is booted this becomes the Running configuration file. • DHCP Server – Configure the DHCP server with option 67 and the name of the configuration file on the TFTP server (for example, config.txt). – Configure the DHCP server with option -20 or 66. This is the IP address of the TFTP server.346 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Device - On the device, one of the following cases may exist: – If Configuration Auto-Config is selected, the device is configured with the configuration file on the TFTP server only if the Startup configuration file is empty. – If Force Configuration Download at Next Startup is selected, the device is configured with the configuration file on the TFTP server whether the Startup configuration file is not empty or not. Auto Configuration (Multi File Read Method) If the one-file method has failed and the TFTP Server IP address has been provided by the DHCP Server, the switch applies the multi-file method to download the configuration file. The following steps are performed by the switch: • The switch gets the hostname, as described below. – If the hostname was provided by the DHCP server, this hostname is used. – If the hostname has not been provided by a DHCP server, and if the user has configured the sysName variable, its value is used as a hostname. – If neither of the above occurred, the switch uses the fp-net.cfg Filename List on the TFTP server. Each file in this list is a text file containing commands, each of which: • Occupies one line. • Has the following format: ip host hostname ip-addr. Each line maps an IP address to a hostname. When the switch identifies its own IP address in this list, the hostname associated with it is used. • The switch tries to download a configuration file with the following names: – hostname-config – hostname.cfg if the previous file does not exist – host.cfg if the previous files do not existDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 347 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Preparations for Firmware Image Download from TFTP The image file download consists of the following steps: • The switch downloads the Indirect Image File and extracts from it the name of the image file. Note: If the size of the image name bigger than 160 octets only the first 160 octets will be used • If the image file version differs from the current image file version, then the image file is loaded and the switch is rebooted. The preparations on the DHCP and TFTP servers require the following: • TFTP Server – Create a sub directory in the main directory. Place a software image file in it. – Create an indirect file that contains a path and the name of the software version (for example indirect-contax.txt that contains contax\contax-version.ros). – Copy this file to the TFTP server’s main directory • DHCP Server – Configure the DHCP server with option -20 or 66. This is the IP address of the TFTP server. – Configure the DHCP server with option 125. Enter the following information: • A2-02-00-00 — Enterprise Number 674 (Dell PowerConnet 55xx value). It should be written from right to left. 674=02 a2 • 15 — Data Length • 01 — Sub option code 1 (Dell PowerConnet 55xx value) • 13 — Sub option length • Conversion of the file name (in the above example: conversion of indirect-contax.txt from ASCII to HEX - 69-6E-64-69-72-65-63- 74-2D-63-6F-6E-74-61-78-2E-74-78-74348 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Auto Update Configuration through the GUI To set the auto update and configuration parameters: . NOTE: For the automatic options in this page to work the following must be implemented: • Since Auto-Config depends on retrieving information from a DHCP server, the startup configuration needs to include a DHCP IP interface. The device is defined as a DHCP client, as described in "DHCP IPv4 Interface" on page 214. After reboot, this command is not saved in the Startup configuration. • Preparations described above must be completed on the DHCP server and TFTP servers. 1 Click System > File Management > Auto Update of Configuration/Image File in the tree view to display the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page. Figure 9-54. Auto Update of Configuration/Image File The auto-update-configuration options are displayed. 2 Modify the auto-update configuration parameters as required: – Configuration Auto-Config (boot host auto-config)— Enable/disable automatic download of the configuration parameters to the Running Configuration file. By default, this occurs only if the Startup Configuration file is empty. – Firmware Auto-Update (boot host auto-update)— Enable/disable automatic download of the image file. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 349 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Force Configuration Download at Next Startup (boot host dhcp) — Enable/disable the Configuration Auto Update option to work even if the Startup Configuration file is not empty. – Auto-Copy Running Configuration to Startup Configuration After Download (boot host auto-save)— Enable/disable the Running Configuration file to be automatically copied to the Startup Configuration file after downloading the Running Configuration file. Auto Update Configuration Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Auto Update of Configuration/Image File page. Table 9-63. Auto Update of Configuration/Image File CLI Commands CLI Command Description boot host auto-config no boot host auto-config Enables the support of autoconfiguration via DHCP. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP auto configuration. boot host auto-update no boot host auto-update Enables the support of auto-update via DHCP. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP auto configuration boot host dhcp no boot host dhcp Forces the mechanism used to download a configuration file at the next system startup. Use the no form of this command to restore the host configuration file to the default. boot host auto-save no boot host auto-save Enables automatic saving of Running configuration in Startup configuration after download. Use the no form of this command restore default behavior show boot Shows the status of the IP DHCP Auto Config process.350 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI command to view the Auto-Update status: The following is an example of the CLI command to configure auto-update on the switch: console# show boot Auto Config ----------- Config Download via DHCP: enabled Next Boot Config Download via DHCP: force Auto Update ----------- Image Download via DHCP: enabled console# configure console(config)# boot host auto-save console(config)# interface vlan 1 console(config-if)# ip address dhcp console(config-if)# 01-Oct-2006 15:19:51 %BOOTP_DHCP_CL-WDHCPIPCANDIDATE: The device is waiting for IP address verification on interface Vlan 1 , IP 10.5.225.47, mask 255.255.255.224, DHCP server 10.5.224.25 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %BOOTP_DHCP_CL-I-DHCPCONFIGURED: The device has been configured on interface Vlan 1 , IP 10.5.225.47, mask 255.255.255.224, DHCP server 10.5.224.25 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL tftp://10.5.224.4/33.txt destination URL runningconfig 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully 01-Oct-2006 15:20:03 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL running-config destination URL flash://startup-config 01-Oct-2006 15:20:10 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfullyDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 351 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY File Download Software and configuration files can be downloaded from an external device to the switch: • To download from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP • To download files using TFTP To download from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Download in the tree view to display the File Download page. Figure 9-55. File Download 2 For HTTP, enter the IP Format fields for the HTTP server IP address. – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.352 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. 3 Select a Firmware/Configuration option. The possible options are: – Firmware Download — A firmware file is downloaded. – Configuration Download — A configuration file is downloaded. 4 Select to download firmware or a configuration file via a USB port or HTTP in Download Protocol. 5 If the Firmware Download option was selected, enter the following: – Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The file to be downloaded. – Destination File Type — The destination file type to which the file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Software Image — Downloads the Image file. The image file overwrites the non-active image. It is recommended to designate that the non-active image becomes the active image after reset, and then to reset the device following the download. During the Image file download a dialog box opens that displays the download progress, and browsing is disabled. • Boot Code — Downloads the Boot file. 6 If the Configuration Download option was selected, enter the following: – Server IP Address — Enter the IP address of the server. – Source File Name (1-64 Characters) — Enter the source file name. – Destination File Name — Select the destination file to which the configuration file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Check to download commands into the Running Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • Startup Configuration — Check to download commands into the Startup Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • New File Name (1-64 Characters) — Check to copy commands into a file in flash memory. Enter the filename.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 353 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 7 Click Activate to start the download process. To download files using TFTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Download in the tree view to display the File Download page. Figure 9-56. File Download 2 Enter the IP Format fields for the TFTP server IP address. – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only.354 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. 3 Select a Firmware/Configuration option. The possible options are: – Firmware Download — A firmware file is downloaded. – Configuration Download — A configuration file is downloaded. 4 Select to download firmware or a configuration file via a TFTP server in Download Protocol. 5 If the Firmware Download option was selected, enter the following: – Server IP Address — The IP address of the server from which the firmware file is downloaded. – Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The file to be downloaded. – Destination File Type — The destination file type to which the file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Software Image — Downloads the Image file. The image file overwrites the non-active image. It is recommended to designate that the non-active image becomes the active image after reset, and then to reset the device following the download. During the Image file download a dialog box opens that displays the download progress. The window closes automatically when the download is complete. • Boot Code — Downloads the Boot file. 6 If the Configuration Download option was selected, enter the following: – Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address from which the configuration files are downloaded. – Source File Name (1-64 characters) — The configuration file to be downloaded. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 355 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Destination File Name — The destination file to which the configuration file is downloaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Check to download commands into the Running Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • Startup Configuration — Check to download commands into the Startup Configuration file. The current file is overwritten. • New File Name (1-64 characters) — Check to download commands into a configuration backup file. Enter the filename. 7 Click Activate to start the download process. Downloading Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the File Download page. The following is an example of the CLI command: NOTE: Each exclamation mark (!) indicates that ten packets were successfully transferred. File Upload Software and configuration files can be uploaded to an external device. • To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP • To upload a file or image using TFTP Table 9-64. File Download CLI Commands CLI Command Description copy source-url destinationurl Copies files from a source to a destination. console# copy tftp://10.6.6.64/pp.txt startup-config ....! Copy: 575 bytes copied in 00:00:06 [hh:mm:ss] 01-Jan-2000 06:41:55 %COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully 356 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following methods can be used: • To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP • To upload a file or image using TFTP To upload from a USB port or when management computer uses HTTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Upload in the tree view to display the File Upload page. Figure 9-57. File Upload 2 Configuration Upload is selected automatically. 3 Select to upload a configuration file when the management computer is using HTTP or from a USB port in Download Protocol. 4 Enter the fields: – Transfer File Name — The configuration file to which the configuration is uploaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Uploads the Running Configuration file. • Startup Configuration — Uploads the Startup Configuration file. 5 Click Activate to start the upload process. A message will be displayed asking where for the path of the destination file.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 357 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To upload a file or image using TFTP 1 Click System > File Management > File Upload in the tree view to display the File Upload page. Figure 9-58. File Upload 2 Enter the IP Format fields for the TFTP server IP address. – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets.358 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • VLAN — The VLAN on which the IPv6 interface is configured. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. 3 Select one of the options: – Firmware Upload — A firmware file is uploaded. – Configuration Upload — A configuration file is uploaded. 4 Select to upload firmware or a configuration file via a TFTP server in Download Protocol. 5 If Firmware Upload was selected, enter: – TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address to which the software image is uploaded. – Destination File Name (1-64 Characters) — The file name to which the file is uploaded. 6 If Configuration Upload was selected, enter: – TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP server IP address to which the configuration file is uploaded. – Destination File Name (1-64 Characters) — The configuration file name/path to which the file is uploaded. – Transfer File Name — The configuration file that is uploaded. The possible options are: • Running Configuration — Uploads the Running Configuration file. • Startup Configuration — Uploads the Startup Configuration file. • User-defined Files —Uploads the selected file. A user-defined file is only displayed in this list if one was previously created by a user, for example, if the user copied the running configuration file to a user-defined configuration file called BACKUP-SITE-1, the BACKUP-SITE-1 configuration file is displayed in the list and can be selected. 7 Click Activate to start the upload process.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 359 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Uploading Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the File Upload page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-65. File Upload CLI Commands CLI Command Description copy source-url destination-url Copies any file from a source to a destination. console# copy image tftp://10.6.6.64/uploaded.ros !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Copy: 4234656 bytes copied in 00:00:33 [hh:mm:ss] 01-Jan-2000 07:30:42 %COPY-W-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully360 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Active Images There are two firmware images, Image1 and Image2, stored on the switch. One of these images is identified as the active image, and the other is identified as the inactive image. The switch boots from the active image. You can switch the inactive image to the active image, and then reboot the switch. The active image file for each unit in the stack can be individually selected. To select the image file to be used after reset: 1 Click System > File Management > Active Images in the tree view to display the Active Images page. Figure 9-59. Active Images The following fields are displayed: – Unit ID — ID of the unit.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 361 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Active Image — The name of the image file that is currently active on the unit in the stack. – After Reset — The image file that will be active on the unit in the stack after the device is reset. The possible options are: • Image 1 — Activates Image file 1 after the device is reset. • Image 2 — Activates Image file 2 after the device is reset. 2 Click Apply to select the image file to be used after reset in After Reset. Working with the Active Image File Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed in the Active Images. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Copy Files Firmware and configuration files can be copied between units in the stack. Use the Copy Files page to perform the following: • Copy the firmware on the Master unit to another unit in the stack. • Copy the master Running Configuration file to the master sTartup Configuration file, or copy the configuration to a user-defined configuration file. • Copy the master Startup Configuration file to a backup file on the Flash file system or to a USB if available. Table 9-66. Active Image CLI Commands CLI Command Description boot system {image- 1|image-2} [switch number|all] Sets the system image that the device loads at startup. show version [unit unit] Displays version information for the system console# boot system image-1 all362 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Copy a configuration file to the Running Configuration file. It is important to be aware that copying a file to the Running Configuration file actually executes these commands, so some of the configuration commands might fail (for example when trying to create a VLAN that is already defined on the system). • Restore configuration factory defaults. To copy files: 1 Click System > File Management > Copy Files in the tree view to display the Copy Files page. Figure 9-60. Copy Files 2 To copy the firmware from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit or to all other units, select Copy Master Firmware and select the options: – Source— Select either the current Master unit’s software image file or boot code file.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 363 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Destination Unit — Check to copy the firmware to either the Backup Master unit or all units in the stack. 3 To copy the Running Configuration file of the Master unit to the Startup Configuration file of the Master unit or vice versa, select Copy Configuration Firmware and enter the options: – Source — Select either the Running Configuration or the Startup Configuration file. – Destination — Select either the Running Configuration, Startup Configuration file or user-created flash files, depending on the source configuration file. or – New File Name (1-64 characters) — To copy the source file to a user-named file, enter the name of a file. If this option is selected, check where the file is stored: Flash or USB. 4 Select Restore Configuration Factory Defaults to replace the current configuration settings by the factory configuration default settings. 5 Click Activate to initiate the selected process. Copying Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for performing actions provided by the Copy Files page. Table 9-67. Copy Files CLI Commands CLI Command Description copy source-url destination-url Copies any file from a source to a destination. delete startup-config Deletes the startup-config file. delete url Deletes a file from the FLASH memory device.364 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# delete startup-config Delete startup-config [y/n]? y console# 01-Oct-2006 16:10:51 %FILE-I-DELETE: File Delete - file URL flash://startup-config console# copy running-config startup-config Overwrite file [startup-config] ?[Yes/press any key for no]....01-Oct-2006 16:11 :47 %COPY-I-FILECPY: Files Copy - source URL running-config destination URL flash://startup-config 01-Oct-2006 16:12:01 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed successfully Copy succeededDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 365 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY File System Use the File System page to view information about files currently stored on the system, including file names, file sizes, files modifications, and file permissions. The files system permits managing up to two user-defined backup configuration files. To view information about files: 1 Click System > File Management > File System in the tree view to display the File System page. Figure 9-61. File System 2 Select the File Location. The possible options are: – Flash — Files in flash memory are displayed. – USB — Files on the USB device are displayed. 366 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following information is displayed for all files in the system: – File Name — The name of the file currently stored in the file management system. – Size — The file size. – Modified — The date the file was last modified. – Permission — The permission type assigned to the file. 3 The following system-wide information is displayed if Flash was selected: – Total Bytes — The total amount of the space currently being used. – Free Bytes — The remaining amount of space currently free. Total bytes and free bytes are not available when selecting USB. 4 To rename a file, click its Rename button. Change the File Name. Managing Files Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for viewing system files. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-68. File Management CLI Command CLI Command Description dir [flash://|usb://] Display list of files on a flash file system rename url new-url Renames a file delete url Deletes a file console# dir flash:// Directory of flash: File Name Permission Flash Size Data Size Modified -------------- ---------- ---------- --------- ----------------------- 1.cfg rw 524160 14065 05-Oct-2006 21:20:36 2.cfg rw 524160 14065 7-Oct-2006 09:11:07 aaafile.prv -- 65520 -- 03-Oct-2006 15:45:41 dhcpdb.sys r- 65520 -- 01-Oct-2006 19:22:49 Total size of flash: 16121856 bytes Free size of flash: 524768 bytesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 367 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Stack Management This section describes how to manage the stack. It consists of the following topics: • Stack Management Overview • Stack Unit ID • Versions • Reset • Unit Identification (Location) Stack Management Overview A stack consists of up to eight units, with support for up to 400 network ports. Unit 1 usually acts as the stack master and Unit 2 is the backup master. All other units act as slaves. The entire stack, without regard to the stack topology or the number of units in the stack, can be managed as a single switch. For more information about stacking, see "Stacking Overview" on page 45. The stacking pages described in this section enable the following actions: • Switching from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit • Changing unit IDs • Viewing hardware and software versions on each unit • Resetting either a unit or all the units in the stack • Setting the Location LED on a unit(s) Stack Unit ID Use the Stack Unit ID pages to: • Switch stack control from the Master unit to the Backup Master unit • Change unit IDs, or enable them to be automatically numbered by the system368 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To switch from the Backup Master unit to the Master Unit or set unit IDs: 1 Click System > Stack Management > Stack Unit ID in the tree view to display the Stack Unit ID page. Figure 9-62. Stack Unit ID 2 Enter the fields: – Switch Stack Control from Unit 1 to Unit 2 — Check this field to make unit 2 the Master unit. – Unit ID After Reset — Select Auto if you want the system to assign the unit ID after reset. Select a number to assign the unit an ID manually.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 369 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Managing Stacks Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting fields displayed in the Stack Unit ID page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-69. Stack Unit ID CLI Commands CLI Command Description stack master unit no stack master Makes the unit specified be the Master unit. Use the no version to restore the default Master unit. switch current-unit-number renumber new-unit-number Changes the unit ID of a specific unit. console(config)# stack master unit 2 console(config)# switch 3 renumber 6370 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Versions To view the hardware and software versions currently running on the switch: • Click System > Stack Management > Versions in the tree view to display the Versions page. Figure 9-63. Versions The following fields are displayed: – Unit ID — The unit number for which the device versions are displayed. – Software Version — The current software version running on the device. – Boot Version — The current Boot version running on the device. – Hardware Version — The current device hardware version.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 371 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Displaying Device Versions Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing fields displayed in the Versions page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Reset Use the Reset page to reset the device from a remote location. To reset a unit in the stack: 1 If changes were made to the Running Configuration file, save them to the Startup Configuration file before resetting the device. This prevents the current device configuration from being lost. For more information about saving Configuration files, see "Copy Files" on page 361. Table 9-70. Versions CLI Commands CLI Command Description show version [unit-id] Displays system version information for a unit or for the whole stack. console> show version 2 Unit SW Version Boot Version HW Version ---- ------------- ------------- ------------ 2 1.0.0.8 1.0.0.02 00.00.01372 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Click System > Stack Management > Reset in the tree view to display the Reset page. Figure 9-64. Reset 3 In the Reset Unit ID field, select either the unit ID to be reset or Stack to reset all the units in the stack. Resetting the Device Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for performing a reset of the device via the CLI: Table 9-71. Reset CLI Command CLI Command Description reload [slot unit] Reloads the operating system of a single unit or of all the units.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 373 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI command: Unit Identification (Location) The Location LED on a unit helps you to discover a specific unit, or indeed, all the units in a stack. To light up the Location LED: 1 Click System > Stack Management > Unit Identification in the tree view to display the Unit Identification page. Figure 9-65. Unit Identification console# reload You haven't saved your changes. Are you sure you want to continue? (Y/N)[N] Y This command will reset the whole system and disconnect your current session. Do you want to continue? (Y/N)[N]374 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the fields: – Identify Unit ID —Select a unit. This unit’s Location and Power LED start blinking. Select All to cause the Location LEDs in all the units in the stack to light up. – Identification Duration (2-60) —Enter a time interval. The Location and Power LED light up for this period of time. Setting the Location LED Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the Location LED: The following is an example of the CLI command: Table 9-72. Location LED CLI Commands CLI Command Description system light [unit unitnumber] [duration seconds] system light stop Lights the location LED on a specific unit. Use the no form of this command to turn off the light. console# system light unit 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 375 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow This section describes sFlow monitoring of traffic. It contains the following sections: • sFlow Overview • Workflow • sFlow Receiver Settings • sFlow Interface Settings • sFlow Statistics sFlow Overview The sFlow feature enables collecting statistics using the sFlow sampling technology, based on sFlow V5. This sampling technology is embedded within switches and routers. It provides the ability to continuously monitor traffic flows on some or all the interfaces, simultaneously. The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow agent (embedded in a switch or router or in a stand alone probe) and a central data collector, known as the sFlow receiver. The sFlow agent uses sampling technology to capture traffic and statistics from the device it is monitoring. sFlow datagrams are used to forward the sampled traffic and statistics to an sFlow receiver for analysis. sFlow V5 defines: • How traffic is monitored. • The sFlow MIB that controls the sFlow agent. • The format of the sample data used by the sFlow agent when forwarding data to a central data collector. The device provides support for two types of sFlow sampling: flow sampling and counters sampling. The following counters sampling is performed according to sFlow V5 (if supported by the interface): – Generic interface counters (RFC 2233) – Ethernet interface counters (RFC 2358)376 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Workflow By default, flow and counter sampling are disabled. To enable sFlow sampling: 1 Set the IP address of a receiver (also known as a collector) for sFlow statistics. Use the sFlow Receivers Settings page for this. 2 Enable flow and/or counter sampling, direct the samples to a receiving interface, and configure the average sampling rate. Use the sFlow Interface Settings pages for this. 3 View and clear the sFlow statistics counters. Use the sFlow Statistics page for this.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 377 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow Receiver Settings To set the sFlow receiver parameters: 1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Receivers Settings in the tree view to display the sFlow Receivers Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-66. sFlow Receivers Settings: Summary The sflow parameters are displayed. 2 To add a receiver (sflow analyzer), click Add and select one of the pre-defined sampling definition indices in Index. 3 Enter the receiver’s address fields: – Supported IP Format — Select whether IPv4 or IPv6 format is supported. 378 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – IPv6 Address Type — When the server supports IPv6, this specifies the type of static address supported. The possible options are: • Link Local — A Link Local address that is non-routable and used for communication on the same network only. • Global — A globally unique IPv6 address; visible and reachable from different subnets. – Link Local Interface — When the server supports an IPv6 Link Local address, this specifies the Link Local interface. The possible options are: • None — Disable the ISATAP tunnel. • ISATAP — The IPv6 interface is configured on an ISATAP tunnel. – IP Address — Enter the receiver’s IP address. 4 Enter the fields: – Syslog Port Number — Port to which SYSLOG message are sent. – Maximum Header Size (Bytes) — Maximum number of bytes that can be sent to the receiver in a single sample datagram (frame). Adding an sFlow Receiver Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for adding an sFlow receiver. Table 9-73. sflow Receiver CLI Commands CLI Command Description sflow receiver index {ipv4- address|ipv6-address|hostname} [port port] [max-datagram-size bytes] no sflow receiver index Defines an sFlow receiver. Use the no form of this command to remove the definition of the receiver. show sflow configuration [port_id] Displays the sFlow configuration for ports that are enabled for Flow sampling or Counters sampling.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 379 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# sflow receiver 2 1.1.1.1 port 6343 console# show sflow configuration Receivers Index IP Address Port Max Datagram Size ----- -------------------- -------- ---------------- 1 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 2 172.16.1.2 6343 1400 3 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 4 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 5 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 6 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 7 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 8 0.0.0.0 6343 1400 Interfaces Interface Flow Counters Max Header Collector Index Sampling Sampling Interval Size Sampling Counters --------- --------- ----------------- ------------ ----------- --------- gi1/0/1 1/2048 60 sec 128 1 1 gi1/0/2 1/4096 Disabled 128 0 2380 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow Interface Settings To sample datagrams or counters from a port, the port must be associated with a receiver. sFlow port settings can be configured only after a receiver has been defined in the sFlow Receiver Settings pages. To enable sampling and configure the port from which to collect the sFlow information: 1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Interface Settings in the tree view to display the sFlow Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 9-67. sFlow Interface Settings: Summary The sflow interface settings are displayed. 2 To associate an sFlow receiver with a port, click Add, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select the unit/port from which information is collected. – Flow Sampling — Enable/disable flow sampling. Flow sampling cannot be disabled if Counters Sampling is disabled.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 381 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Flow Sampling Average Sampling Rate(1024–1073741823) — If x is entered, a flow sample will be taken for each x frames. – Flow Sampling Receiver Index — Select one of the indices that was defined in the sFlow Receivers Settings pages. – Flow Sampling Maximum Header Size (20–256) — Maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet. – Counters Sampling — Enable/disable counters sampling. Flow sampling cannot be disabled if Flow Sampling is disabled – Counters Sampling Interval (15–86400) — If x is entered, this specifies that a counter sample will be taken for each x seconds. – Counters Sampling Receiver Index — Select one of the indices that was defined in the sFlow Receivers Settings pages. Configuring sFlow Interfaces Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring sFlow interfaces. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-74. sflow Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description sflow flow-sampling rate receiver-index [max-header-size bytes] no sflow flow-sampling Enables sFlow Flow sampling and configure the average sampling rate of a specific port. Use the no form of this command to disable Flow sampling. sflow counters-sampling interval receiver-index no sflow counters-sampling Enable sFlow counters sampling and to configure the maximum interval of a specific port. Use the no form of this command to disable sFlow Counters sampling. console(config)# interface gi2/0/3 console(config-if)#sflow flow-sampling 1024 1 382 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY sFlow Statistics To view sFlow statistics: 1 Click System > sFlow > sFlow Statistics in the tree view to display the sFlow Statistics page. Figure 9-68. sFlow Statistics The following sflow statistics per interface are displayed: – Interface — Port for which sample was collected. – Packets Sampled — Number of packets sampled. – Datagrams Sent to Receiver — Number of sFlow sampling packets sent. 2 Click Clear Statistics to clear the counters.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 383 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSystemConfig.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing sFlow Statistics Using the CLI The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing sFlow statistics: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 9-75. sFlow Statistics CLI Command CLI Command Description show sflow statistics [port-id] Displays sFlow statistics for ports that are enabled for Flow sampling or Counters sampling. clear sflow statistics [port-id] Clears sFlow statistics for ports that are enabled for Flow sampling or Counters sampling. console # show sflow statistics Total sFlow datagrams sent to collectors: 100 Interface Packets Sampled Datagrams Sent to Collector --------- ------- ------------------------------------ gi1/0/1 30 50 gi1/0/2 10 10 gi2/0/1 0 10 gi2/0/2 0 0384 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 10 Ports This section describes how to configure port functionality. It contains the following topics: • Overview • Jumbo Frames • Green Ethernet Configuration • Protected Ports • Port Profile • Port Configuration • LAG Configuration • Storm Control • Port MirroringDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 385 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Overview This section includes a description of port features and describes the following: • Auto-Negotiation • MDI/MDIX • Flow Control • Back Pressure • Port Default Settings Auto-Negotiation Auto-negotiation enables automatic detection of speed, duplex mode and flow control on all switching 10/100/1000BaseT ports. Auto-negotiation is enabled on all ports by default. Auto-negotiation is a mechanism established between two link partners to enable a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode and flow control abilities to its partner. Both ports then operate at the highest common denominator. If connecting a Network Interface Card (NIC) that does not support autonegotiation or is not set to auto-negotiation, both the device switching port and the NIC must be manually set to the same speed and duplex mode. If the station, on the other side of the link, attempts to auto-negotiate with a device 100BaseT port that is configured to full duplex, the auto-negotiation results in the station attempting to operate in half duplex. MDI/MDIX The device supports auto-detection of straight-through and crossed cables on all 10/100/1000BaseT ports. This feature is part of auto-negotiation and is enabled when Auto-negotiation is enabled. When the MDI/MDIX (Media Dependent Interface with Crossover) is enabled, the automatic correction of errors in cable selection is possible, thus making the distinction between a straight-through cable and a crossover cable 386 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY irrelevant. The standard wiring for end stations is known as MDI (Media Dependent Interface), and the standard wiring for hubs and switches is known as MDIX. Flow Control The device supports 802.3x flow control for ports configured to Full Duplex mode. By default, this feature is enabled on all ports, and it can be disabled per port. Flow control creates a lossless link with no packet loss. The flow control mechanism enables the receiving side to signal to the transmitting side that transmission must temporarily be halted to prevent buffer overflow. This signaling is done by sending PAUSE frames. The ports that receives pause frames stops transmitting traffic. Flow control on the device works in Receive-Only mode, meaning that the interfaces with enabled flow control receive PAUSE frames, but do not send them. When flow control is enabled, the system buffers are allocated per port so that if the buffers of one port are consumed, other ports will still have their free buffers. Back Pressure The device supports back pressure for ports configured to Half Duplex mode. By default, this feature is disabled, and it can be enabled per port. The back-pressure mechanism prevents the sender from transmitting additional traffic temporarily. The receiver may occupy a link so it becomes unavailable for additional traffic. Port Default Settings Table 10-1 describes the port default settings. Table 10-1. Port Default Settings Function Default Setting Port speed and mode 10/100/1000 BaseT copper: auto-negotiation SFP+1000/10G Mbps full duplex, auto discovery Port forwarding state EnabledDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 387 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port tagging No tagging Flow Control On Back Pressure Off Table 10-1. Port Default Settings (Continued) Function Default Setting388 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Jumbo Frames Jumbo frames are frames of up to 10 Kb in size. If Jumbo frames are not enabled, the system supports a packet size of up to 1,632 bytes. To enable jumbo frames: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Jumbo Frames in the tree view to display the Jumbo Frames page. Figure 10-1. Jumbo Frames The current jumbo frames setting is displayed 2 Enable/disable jumbo frames in the New Setting (after reset) field. NOTE: You must save the configuration and reboot the device in order to make jumbo frames operational.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 389 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Jumbo Frames Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Jumbo frames. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 10-2. Jumbo Frames CLI Commands CLI Command Description port jumbo-frame no port jumbo-frame Enables jumbo frames on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable jumbo frames. console(config)# port jumbo-frame390 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Green Ethernet Configuration Green Ethernet is a name of a set of features that are designed to reduce the power consumption of a device, and so make it environmentally friendly. The Green Ethernet feature reduces overall power usage in the following ways: • Energy Efficient Ethernet — When using EEE, systems on both sides of the link can disable portions of their functionality and save power during periods of low link utilization. EEE is a hardware feature that is enabled by default, and is transparent to users. This feature is defined per port, regardless of their LAG membership. • Short-Reach Mode — Power usage is adjusted to the actual cable length. In this mode, the VCT (Virtual Cable Tester) length test is performed to measure cable length. If the cable is shorter than a predetermined length, the switch reduces the power used to send frames over the cable, thus saving energy. This mode is only supported on RJ45 ports. Power savings and current power consumption in Short Reach mode can be monitored. The total amount of saved energy can be viewed as a percentage of the power that would have been consumed by the physical interfaces had they not been running in Green Ethernet mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 391 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The above two energy saving modes must be enabled globally and then configured per port. Green Ethernet Configuration To configure Green Ethernet settings: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Green Ethernet Configuration in the tree view to display the Green Ethernet Configuration: Summary page. Figure 10-2. Green Ethernet Configuration: Summary 2 The amount of energy saved from the last switch reboot is displayed in the Cumulative Energy Saved field. This value is updated each time there is an event that affects power saving. Click Reset to reset its value. 3 Enter the fields: • Energy Efficient Ethernet — Globally enable/disable the Energy Efficient Ethernet feature. • Link Short-Reach Energy Saving Mode — Globally enable/disable Short Reach mode.392 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Current Power Consumption — Displays the current power consumption. • Power Savings — Displays the percentage of power saved by running in Green Ethernet mode. 4 Select a unit in the stack to display its power consumption parameters. Its ports are displayed along with the following settings. – Energy Efficient Ethernet • Oper — Enabled or not on the port • Remote Peer —Enabled or not on the remote peer – Short-Reach • Oper — Enabled or not on the port • Fault Reason —Reason that short reach is not enabled – Cable Length (Meter) — Length of cable. 5 Click LLDP Interface Details. 6 Select a unit in the stack. The following is displayed for each port on the unit: – Port — Port number. – Oper — Displays the operational status of Green Ethernet. – Resolved Tx Timer(μsec) — Integer that indicates the current Tw_sys_tx is supported by the local system. – Local Tx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the time (in micro seconds) that the transmitting link partner waits before it starts transmitting data after leaving Low Power Idle (LPI mode). – Resolved Rx Timer(μsec) — Integer that indicates the current Tw_sys_tx supported by the remote system. – Local Rx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the time (in micro seconds) that the receiving link partner requests that the transmitting link partner waits before transmission of data following Low Power Idle (LPI mode). – Remote Tx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the local link partner’s reflection of the remote link partner’s Tx value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 393 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Remote Rx Timer(μsec) — Indicates the local link partner’s reflection of the remote link partner’s Rx value. Configuring Green Ethernet Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Green Ethernet. Table 10-3. Green Ethernet CLI Commands CLI Command Description green-ethernet short-reach no green-ethernet short-reach Enables/disables Green Ethernet short reach mode. green-ethernet short-reach force no green-ethernet short-reach force Forces short-reach mode on an interface. Use the no form of this command to return to the default. green-ethernet short-reach threshold cable-length no green-ethernet short-reach threshold Set the maximum cable length for applying short-reach mode. Use the no form of this command to return to the default. green-ethernet power-meter reset Resets the power save meter. eee enable no eee enable Enables the EEE mode globally. Can be used globally or per interface. Use the no format of the command to disable the mode. eee lldp enable no eee lldp enable Enables EEE support by LLDP on an Ethernet port. Use the no format of the command to disable the support. show eee Displays EEE information.394 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protected Ports Protected Port Overview Protected ports provide Layer 2 isolation between interfaces (Ethernet ports and LAGs) that share the same Broadcast domain (VLAN) with other interfaces. This can be used to set up a group of ports that receive similar services. A protected port does not forward traffic (Unicast, Multicast, or Broadcast) to any other protected port on the same switch. A community is a group of protected ports. Protected ports within the same community can forward traffic to each other. The following types of ports can be defined: • Protected Port — Can send traffic only to uplink ports. • Community Port — A protected port that is associated with a community. It can send traffic to other protected ports in the same community and to uplink ports. • Uplink Port — An uplink port is an unprotected port that can send traffic to any port. • Isolated Port — A protected port that does not belong to a community. Port Protection is independent of all other features and configuration settings. Two protected ports in a common VLAN cannot communicate with each other. Protected Port Restrictions The following restrictions apply to protected ports: • When a protected port is placed in a LAG, it loses its protected port attribute and takes upon itself the LAG's protection attributes. When the port is removed from the LAG, its attributes are re-applied. • Mirrored traffic is not subject to protected ports rules. • Routing is not affected by the protected port forwarding rule, so that if a packet enters a protected port, it can be routed by the device to another protected port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 395 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protected Port Configuration To configure protected ports and establish their communities: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Protected Ports in the tree view to display the Protected Ports: Summary page. Figure 10-3. Protected Ports: Summary A summary of all the ports and their statuses is displayed. 2 Click Edit. 3 Select the unit and interface. 4 Enter values for the following fields: • State — Select Protected/Unprotected to enable/disable port protection. • Community — Select the community to which to add the port, or define the port as Isolated.396 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Protected Ports Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring protected ports. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 10-4. Protected Ports CLI Commands CLI Command Description switchport protected-port no switchport protected-port Isolates Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast traffic on a port at Layer 2 from other protected ports on the same switch. Use the no form of this command to disable protection on the port. switchport community community no switchport community Associates a protected port with a community Use the no form of this command to return to default. show interfaces protectedports[gigabitethernet|tengiga bitethernet] port-number Displays protected ports configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/3 console(config-if)# switchport protected-port console(config-if)# switchport community 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 397 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Profile Port profiles provide a convenient way to save and share a port configuration. When a port profile, which is a set of CLI commands having a unique name, is applied to a port, the CLI commands contained within the profile (macro) are executed and added to the Running Configuration file. Port profiles can be applied to a specific interface, a range of interfaces, or globally. There are two types of port profiles: • User Defined — Enables the user to bundle configurations, as a port profile, and then apply it to one or more interfaces at a time. Up to 20 user-defined macros can be supported. These can only be defined through CLI commands. • Built-In — Pre-defined macros that cannot be changed or deleted. The device includes the following built-in macros: – Global – Desktop – Phone – Switch – Router – Wireless Configuration Before a built-in profile can be applied to an interface, the global profile must be applied. The global profile enables QoS Advanced mode, sets Advanced mode parameters, CoS to queue mapping, and DSCP to queue mapping and defines certain standard ACLs. Use the CLI command show parser macro name profile-global to display the Global profile contents.398 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To assign a profile to a port: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Profile in the tree view to display the Port Profiles: Summary page. Figure 10-4. Port Profile: Summary A summary of all the interfaces and their profiles is displayed. 2 To assign the Global profile to the system, check Run Global Profile. Apply the global profile before applying a built-in interface profile. 3 To assign a profile to an interface, click Edit. 4 Select a unit/interface and a Assigned Profile. The Profile Description is displayed. 5 Each profile requires entering various elements of VLAN information. Enter the fields according to the profile: – VLAN Port Mode — Displays the port mode applied to ports in the profile. – VLAN ID-Untagged (1-4094) — Enter the VLAN for untagged traffic. – VLAN ID-Tagged (1-4095) — Enter the VLAN for tagged traffic.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 399 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Native VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter the VLAN ID used for untagged traffic to trunk ports, or check None. The remaining fields on this page are display-only, and describe the port configuration of the profile. The following fields are described: Port Security fields: – Mode — Learning mode. The possible options are: • Classic Lock — Locks the port using the classic lock mechanism. The port is immediately locked, regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned. • Limited Dynamic Lock — Locks the port by deleting the dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port. The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled. – Max Entries — Displays the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. – Action on Violation — Action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port. The possible options are: • Discard — Discard the packets from any unlearned source. • Forward — Forward the packets from an unknown source, without learning the MAC address. • Shutdown — Discard the packet from any unlearned source, and shut down the port. Ports remain shutdown until they are reactivated, or the device is reset. Spanning Tree fields: – Point-to-Point Admin Status — Displays whether a point-to-point links is established. The possible options are: • Enable — Enables the device to establish a point-to-point link, or specifies for the device to automatically establish a point-to-point link. To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the originating PPP first sends Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols (NCP) packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols. 400 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been configured, packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link. The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link, or until some external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It may differ from the administrative state. • Disable — Disables point-to-point link. • Auto — The device automatically establishes a point-to-point link. – Fast Link — Displays whether Fast Link mode is enabled for the port. If this is enabled, the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding statewhen the port is up. – BPDU Guard — Displays whether BPDU Guard is enabled on the port. Miscellaneous fields: – Policy Name — Displays the name of a policy if one is defined on the port. – Auto Negotiation — Displays whether auto-negotiation is enabled on the port. Auto-Negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode, and Flow Control abilities to other devices. 6 Click Apply Profile to apply the profile to the specified interface. Configuring Port Profile Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring port profiles. Table 10-5. Port Profiles CLI Commands CLI Command Description macro {apply|trace} macro-name [parameter {value}] [parameter {value}] [parameter {value}] Applies a macro to an interface or traces a macro configuration on an interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 401 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Sample CLI Scripts This section provides sample scripts of CLI commands. These particular actions cannot be performed through the GUI, which only allows applying built-in macros. These scripts describe how to create macros, display them and apply them. The following is a script that creates a global macro. show parser macro [{brief|description [interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number|name macro-name}] Displays the parameters for all configured macros or for one macro on the switch. Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/2 Switch(config-if) # macro trace dup Applying command… ‘duplex full’ Applying command… ‘speed auto’ Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/2 Switch(config-if) # macro apply duplex $DUPLEX full $SPEED auto Switch(config-if) # exit Switch(config) # interface gi1/0/3 Switch(config-if) # macro apply dup Switch(config-if) # exit Table 10-6. Create a Global Macro Script CLI Command Description console#config console(config)# macro name interswitch Enter macro commands one per line. End with the character '@'. Create a macro called interswitch. Table 10-5. Port Profiles CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description402 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is a script that creates an interface macro. vlan database vlan 40-50 @ Enter the commands in the macro, which create VLANs 40 through 50. console(config)# do show parser macro name interswitch Display the macro. console(config)# macro global apply interswitch Apply the macro. Table 10-7. Create an Interface Macro Script CLI Command Description console#config console(config)# interface range gi1/0/1- 24 Enter Interface mode for ports 1-24 on unit 1. console(config-if-range)# macro name access_port Enter macro commands one per line. End with the character '@'. Create a macro called access_port. disable spanning-tree @ Enter the commands in the macro, disables spanning tree on the interfaces. console(config)# do show parser macro name access_port Display the macro. console(config)# macro global apply access_port Apply the macro to ports 1-24 on unit 1. Table 10-6. Create a Global Macro Script (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 403 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Configuration If port configuration is modified while the port is a LAG member, the configuration change is only effective after the port is removed from the LAG. To configure a port: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Configuration in the tree view to display the Port Configuration: Summary page. Figure 10-5. Port Configuration: Summary All ports on the selected unit and their configuration settings are displayed. 2 To modify the port settings, click Edit and select a port. 3 Enter the following fields: – Description (1 - 64 Characters) — Enter a user identification attached to the port. – Port Type — Displays the type of port. – Admin Status — Enable/disable traffic forwarding through the port. • Up— Traffic is enabled through the port.404 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Down— Traffic is disabled through the port. – Current Port Status — Displays whether the port is currently operational or non-operational. – Re-Activate Suspended Port — Check to reactivate a port if the port has been disabled through the locked port security option. – Operational Status — Displays the port operational status. The possible options are: • Suspended — Port is currently active, and is not receiving or transmitting traffic. • Active — Port is currently active, and is receiving and transmitting traffic. • Disable — Port is currently disabled, and is not receiving or transmitting traffic. – Admin Speed — Select the configured rate for the port. The port type determines the available speed setting options. You can designate Administrative Speed only when port auto-negotiation is disabled. – Current Port Speed — Displays the actual synchronized port speed (bps). – Admin Duplex — Select the port duplex mode (this is only possible if Auto Negotiation is not enabled). The options are: • Full — The interface supports transmission between the device and the client in both directions simultaneously. • Half — The interface supports transmission between the device and the client in only one direction at a time. – Current Duplex Mode — Displays the synchronized port duplex mode. – Auto Negotiation — Select to enable auto-negotiation on the port. Auto-Negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode, and Flow Control abilities to other devices. • Energy Efficient Ethernet — Globally enable/disable Energy Efficient Ethernet and the EEE LLDP advertisement feature. – Current Auto Negotiation — Displays the current auto-negotiation setting. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 405 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Admin Advertisement — Check the auto-negotiation setting the port advertises. The possible options are: • Max Capability — The port advertises all the options that it can support. • 10 Half — The port advertises for a 10 mbps speed port and half duplex mode setting. • 10 Full — The port advertises for a 10 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. • 100 Half — The port advertises for a 100 mbps speed port and half duplex mode setting. • 100 Full — The port advertises for a 100 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. • 1000 Full — The port advertises for a 1000 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. • 10000 Full — The port advertises for a 10000 mbps speed port and full duplex mode setting. – Current Advertisement — Displays the port advertises its speed to its neighbor port to start the negotiation process. The possible field values are those specified in the Admin Advertisement field. – Neighbor Advertisement — Displays the neighboring port’s advertisement settings. The field values are identical to the Admin Advertisement field values. – Back Pressure — Enable/disable Back Pressure mode that is used with Half Duplex mode to disable ports from receiving messages. – Current Back Pressure — Displays the current Back Pressure setting. – Flow Control — Set flow control on the port. The following options are available: • Enable/Disable — Enable/disable flow control on the port (Enabled is the default). • Auto Negotiation — Enables auto-negotiation of flow control on the port. – Current Flow Control — Displays the current Flow Control setting.406 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – MDI/MDIX — Select one of the options that enables the device to decipher between crossed and uncrossed cables. Hubs and switches are deliberately wired opposite to the way end stations are wired, so that when a hub or switch is connected to an end station, a straight through Ethernet cable can be used, and the pairs are match up properly. When two hubs/switches are connected to each other, or two end stations are connected to each other, a crossover cable is used ensure that the correct pairs are connected. The possible options are: • Auto — Use to automatically detect the cable type. • MDIX — Use for hubs and switches. • MDI — Use for end stations. – Current MDI/MDIX — Displays the current device MDIX settings. – LAG — Displays whether the port is part of a LAG. Configuring Ports Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring ports as displayed in the Port Configuration pages. Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands CLI Command Description eee enable no eee enable Enables the EEE mode globally. Use the no format of the command to disable the mode. eee lldp enable no eee lldp enable Enables EEE support by LLDP on an Ethernet port. Use the no format of the command to disable the support. description string no description Adds a description to an interface configuration. Use the no form of this command to remove the description. shutdown no shutdown Disables an interfaces. Use the no form of this command to restart a disabled interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 407 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY set interface active {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] interface|port-channel LAGnumber} Reactivates an interface that is shutdown. speed {10|100|1000|10000} no speed Configures the speed of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. duplex {half|full} no duplex Configures the full/half duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation. negotiation [capability1 [capability2…capability5] no negotiation Enables auto negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a given interface. Use the no form of this command to disable auto-negotiation. back-pressure no back-pressure Enables Back Pressure on a given interface. Use the no form of this command to disable back pressure. flowcontrol {auto|on|off} no flowcontrol Configures the flow control on a given interface. Use the no form of this command to disable flow control. mdix {on|auto} no mdix Enables automatic crossover on a given interface or Port-channel. Use the no form of this command to disable cable crossover. show interfaces configuration [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the configuration for all configured interfaces. Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description408 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show interfaces advertise Displays the interface’s negotiation advertisement settings. show interfaces status [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the status for all configured interfaces. show interfaces description [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the description for all configured interfaces. console(config)# interface gi2/0/1 console(config-if)# description "RD SW#3" console(config-if)# shutdown console(config-if)# no shutdown console(config-if)# speed 100 console(config-if)# duplex full console(config-if)# negotiation console(config-if)# back-pressure console(config-if)# flowcontrol on console(config-if)# mdix auto console(config-if)# end console# show interfaces configuration gi2/0/1 Flow Admin Back Mdix Port Type Duplex Speed Neg control State Pressure Mode -------- ------------ ------ ----- -------- ------- ----- -------- ---- gi2/0/1 1G-Copper Full 1000 Enabled Off Up Disabled Auto console# show interfaces status gi2/0/1 Flow Link Back Mdix Port Type Duplex Speed Neg ctrl State Pressure Mode -------- ------------ ------ ----- -------- ---- ----------- -------- ---- gi2/0/1 1G-Copper -- -- -- -- Down -- -- Table 10-8. Port Configuration CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 409 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LAG Configuration Use the LAG Configuration pages to configure LAGs. The device supports up to 32 LAGs per system, meaning for all units in the stack. For information about Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs) and assigning ports to LAGs, see "Link Aggregation" on page 508. To configure LAGs: 1 Click Switching > Ports > LAG Configuration in the tree view to display the LAG Configuration: Summary page. Figure 10-6. LAG Configuration: Summary The LAG parameters are displayed. 2 To configure a LAG, click Edit. 3 Select the LAG and enter the fields: – LAG Mode — Select the LAG mode. The possible options are:410 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Static — The ports comprise a single logical port for high-speed connections between networking devices. • LACP — Link Aggregate Control Protocol. LACP-enabled LAGs can exchange information with other links in order to update and maintain LAG configurations automatically. – Description (0 - 64 Characters) — Enter a user-defined description of the configured LAG. – LAG Type — Displays the port types that comprise the LAG. – Admin Status — Enable/disable the selected LAG. – Current Status — Displays the LAG is currently operating. – Admin Speed — Select the configured speed at which the LAG is operating. The possible options are: • 10M— The LAG is currently operating at 10 Mbps. • 100M — The LAG is currently operating at 100 Mbps. • 1000M — The LAG is currently operating at 1000 Mbps. • 10000 Full— The LAG is currently operating at 1000 Mbps. – Current Speed — Displays the speed at which the LAG is currently operating. – Admin Auto Negotiation — Enable/disable auto-negotiation, which is a protocol between two link partners that enables a LAG to advertise its transmission rate, duplex mode and flow control abilities to its partner. – Current Auto Negotiation — Displays the current auto-negotiation setting. – Admin Advertisement — If auto-negotiation is enabled, select the auto-negotiation setting the LAG advertises. The possible options are: • Max Capability — All LAG speeds and Duplex mode settings are accepted. • 10 Full — The LAG advertises for a 10 mbps speed LAG and full duplex mode setting. • 100 Full — The LAG advertises for a 100 mbps speed LAG and full duplex mode setting.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 411 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • 1000 Full — The LAG advertises for a 1000 mbps speed LAG and full duplex mode setting. – Current Advertisement — Displays the speed that the LAG advertises to its neighbor LAG to start the negotiation process. The possible field values are those specified in the Admin Advertisement field. – Neighbor Advertisement — Displays the neighboring LAG advertisement settings. The field values are identical to the Admin Advertisement field values. – Admin Flow Control — Enable/disable flow control on the LAG. Flow Control mode is effective on the ports operating in Full Duplex in the LAG. The possible options are: • Enable — Enables flow control on the LAG (default). • Disable — Disables flow control on the LAG. • Auto Negotiation — Enables the auto-negotiation of flow control on the LAG. – Current Flow Control — Displays the current Flow Control setting. Configuring LAGs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring LAGs as displayed in the LAG Configuration pages. Table 10-9. LAG Configuration CLI Commands CLI Command Description interface port-channel LAGnumber Enters the interface configuration mode of a specific LAG. channel-group port-channel mode {on|auto} no channel-group Sets a mode for a LAG. Use the no form of this command restore the default configuration. description string no description Adds a description to a LAG. Use the no form of this command to remove the description.412 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY shutdown no shutdown Disables the LAG. Use the no form of this command to restart the LAG. speed {10|100|1000|10000} no speed Configures the speed of the LAG when not using auto negotiation. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. negotiation [capability1 [capability2…capability5] no negotiation Enables auto negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a LAG. Use the no form of this command to disable auto-negotiation. flowcontrol {auto|on|off} no flowcontrol Configures the flow control on a given LAG. Use the no form of this command to disable flow control. show interfaces configuration [port-channel LAG-number] Displays the configuration for the LAGs. show interface advertise Displays the LAG’s negotiation advertisement settings. show interfaces status [portchannel LAG-number] Displays the status for all configured LAGs. show interfaces description [port-channel LAG-number] Displays the description for all configured LAGs. show interfaces port-channel [LAG-number] Displays LAG information. Table 10-9. LAG Configuration CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 413 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface port-channel 1 console(config-if)# no negotiation console(config-if)# speed 100 console(config-if)# flowcontrol on console(config-if)# exit console(config)# interface port-channel 2 console(config-if)# shutdown console(config-if)# exit console(config-if)# end console# show interfaces port-channel Channel Ports --------- --------- ch1 Inactive: gi/1/0/(11-13) ch2 Active: gi/1/0/14414 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Storm Control When Broadcast, Multicast, or Unknown Unicast frames are received, they are duplicated, and a copy is sent to all possible egress ports. This means that in practice, they are sent to all ports belonging to the relevant VLAN. In this way, one ingress frame is turned into many, creating the potential for a storm. Storm protection provides the ability to limit the number of frames entering the switch, and to define the types of frames that are counted towards this limit. When a threshold (limit) is configured on the device, the port discards traffic when that threshold is reached. The port remains blocked until the traffic rate drops below this threshold. It then resumes normal forwarding. To configure Storm Control: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Storm Control in the tree view to display the Storm Control: Summary page. Figure 10-7. Storm ControlDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 415 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Storm control parameters are displayed for all ports on the selected unit. 2 To configure Storm Control on a port, click Edit. 3 Select a port from the Port drop-down list and enter the following fields: – Broadcast Control — Enable/disable forwarding Broadcast packets on the specific interface. – Broadcast Mode — Select the counting mode. The possible options are: • Multicast & Broadcast — Counts Broadcast and Multicast traffic together towards the bandwidth threshold. • Broadcast Only — Counts only Broadcast traffic towards the bandwidth threshold. – Broadcast Rate Threshold (3500-1000000) — Enter the maximum rate (Kbits/sec) at which unknown packets are forwarded. Configuring Storm Control Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Storm Control as displayed on the Storm Control pages. Table 10-10. Storm Control CLI Commands CLI Command Description storm-control includemulticast [unknown-unicast] no storm-control includemulticast Counts Multicast packets in the Broadcast storm control. Use the no form of this command to disable counting of multicast packets in the Broadcast storm control. storm-control broadcast enable no storm-control broadcast enable Enables Broadcast storm control. Use the no form of this command to disable Broadcast storm control. storm-control broadcast level kbps no storm-control broadcast level Configures the maximum Broadcast rate. Use the no form of this command to return the Broadcast level to the default value.416 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show ports storm-control port Displays the storm control configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# storm-control broadcast enable console(config-if)# storm-control include-multicast unknown-unicast console# show ports storm-control gi1/0/1 Port State Rate [Kbits/Sec] Included -------- -------- ---------------- --------------------- gi1/0/1 Disabled 8500 Broadcast Table 10-10. Storm Control CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 417 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Mirroring Switches usually only forward frames to relevant ports. To monitor traffic, either for information gathering, such as statistical analysis, or for troubleshooting higher-layer protocol operation, the Mirroring feature forwards frames to a monitoring port. Mirroring provides the ability to specify that a desired destination (target) port will receive a copy of all traffic passing through designated source ports. The frames arriving at the destination port are copies of the frames passing through the source port at ingress, prior to any switch action. It is possible to specify several source ports to be monitored by a single target port. However, in this case, the traffic sent to the target port is placed in the target port's queues on a first come, first served basis, and any excess traffic is silently discarded. This may mean that the traffic actually seen by any device attached to the target port is an arbitrarily selected subset of the actual traffic going through the source ports. Port mirroring is only relevant to physical ports. Therefore, if you want a LAG to function as the source of a port mirroring session, the member ports must be individually specified as sources. Up to four sources can be mirrored. This can be any combination of four individual ports. Before configuring Port Mirroring, note the following: • Monitored ports cannot operate faster than the monitoring port. • All Rx/Tx packets should be monitored to the same port. Destination Port Restrictions The following restrictions apply to destination ports: • Destination ports cannot be configured as source ports. • Destination ports cannot be a member of a LAG. • IP interfaces cannot be configured on the destination port. • GVRP cannot be enabled on the destination port. • The destination port cannot be a member of a VLAN. • Only one destination port can be defined.418 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • All QoS/CoS rules that apply to the destination port, as an egress, such as traffic shaping, are suspended for the duration of the mirroring session. Any such settings, configured on the port during the mirroring session, take effect only after the port is no longer a destination port for a mirroring session. • Ingress mirrored packets may arrive at the ingress port either with an 802.1q tag or without. When the packets are mirrored to a port analyzer, they should be transmitted as they are received on the ingress port. However, in the device, the packet is transmitted out of the port analyzer as always tagged or always untagged (user configurable), regardless of the input encapsulation. Source Port Restrictions The following restrictions apply to ports specified as source ports: • Source ports cannot be a member of a LAG. • Source ports cannot be configured as a destination port. • Up to four source ports can be mirrored. NOTE: When a port is set to be a target port for a port-mirroring session, all normal operations on it are suspended. This includes Spanning Tree and LACP. All currently active protocols and services on that port are suspended.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 419 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Mirroring To specify source and destination ports for port mirroring: 1 Click Switching > Ports > Port Mirroring in the tree view to display the Port Mirroring: Summary page. Figure 10-8. Port Mirroring: Summary The previously-defined source ports for the selected Destination Port are displayed, along with the fields defined in the Add page and their status. – Status — Indicates if the port is currently being monitored (Active) or not being monitored (notReady), because of some problem. 2 To add a port to be mirrored, click Add, and enter the fields: – Source Port — The port number from which port traffic is copied. – Type — Type of traffic (Tx or Rx or both) to be copied.420 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Port Mirroring Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Port Mirroring. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 10-11. Port Mirroring CLI Commands CLI Command Description port monitor srcinterface-id [rx|tx] no port monitor srcinterface-id Starts a port monitoring session. This must be performed in Interface Configuration mode, which is the destination interface. Use the no form of this command to stop a port monitoring session. show ports monitor Displays the port monitoring status. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# port monitor gi1/0/8 console# show ports monitor Source port Destination Port Type Status ----------- ---------------- ---- ----------- gi1/0/1 gi1/0/8 RX,TX ActiveDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 421 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Ports.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY422 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 11 Address Tables This section describes how MAC addresses are handled on the device. It contains the following topics: • Overview • Static Addresses • Dynamic AddressesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 423 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Overview MAC addresses, associated with ports, are stored in the Static Address or the Dynamic Address tables. Packets, addressed to a destination stored in one of these tables, are forwarded to the associated port. MAC addresses are dynamically learned when packets arrive at the device. Addresses are associated with ports by learning the source address of the frame. Frames, addressed to a destination MAC address that is not associated with any port, are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN. In order to prevent the bridging table from overflowing, dynamic MAC addresses, from which no traffic is seen for a certain period, are erased. Static addresses are manually entered into the table.424 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Static Addresses Static addresses are manually assigned to a specific interface and VLAN on the switch. If a static address is seen on another interface, the address is ignored and it is not written to the address table. To define a static address: 1 Click Switch > Address Tables > Static Address Table in the tree view to display the Static Address Table: Summary page. Figure 11-1. Static Address Table A list of the currently-defined static addresses is displayed. 2 To add a static address, click Add. 3 Enter the following fields: • Interface — Select a port or LAG for the entry. • MAC Address — Enter the interface MAC address. • VLAN ID — Check and select the VLAN ID for the port. or • VLAN Name — Check and enter the VLAN name. • Status — Select how the entry in the table will be treated. The possible options are:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 425 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Permanent — The MAC address is never aged out of the table and, if it is saved to the Startup Configuration, it is retained after rebooting. • Delete on Reset — The MAC address is deleted when the device is reset. • Delete on Timeout — The MAC address is deleted when a timeout occurs. • Secure — The MAC address is secure when the interface is in classic locked mode. To prevent Static MAC addresses from being deleted when the Ethernet device is reset, ensure that the port attached to the MAC address is locked. Configuring Static Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring static address parameters as displayed in the Static Address Table pages. Table 11-1. Static Address CLI Commands CLI Command Description mac address-table static macaddress vlan vlan-id interface {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber} [permanent|delete-onreset|delete-on-timeout|secure] no mac address-table static [macaddress] vlan vlan-id Adds a MAC-layer station source address to the MAC address table. Use the no form of this command to delete the MAC address. show mac address-table [dynamic|static|secure] [vlan vlan] [[[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber]] [address mac-address] Displays entries in the MAC address table.426 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config-if)#bridge address 00:60:70:4C:73:FF permanent gi1/0/8 console# show mac address-table static Aging time is 300 sec VLAN MAC Address Port Type ---- ------------------ -------- -------- 1 00:60:70:4C:73:FF gi1/0/8 static 1 00:60:70:8C:73:FF gi1/0/8 static 200 00:10:0D:48:37:FF gi1/0/9 staticDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 427 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic Addresses The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses acquired by monitoring the source addresses of traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports in the VLAN of the frame. To prevent the table from overflowing and to make room for new addresses, an address is deleted from the table if no traffic is received from a dynamic MAC address for a certain period. This period of time is called the aging interval. To configure dynamic addresses: 1 Click Switch > Address Tables > Dynamic MAC Address in the tree view to display the Dynamic Address page. Figure 11-2. Dynamic Address Table The current address table is displayed along with other parameters. 2 Enter Address Aging (10-630). The aging time is a value between the userconfigured value and twice that value minus 1. For example, if you entered 300 seconds, the aging time is between 300 and 599 seconds.428 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 To clear the table, check Clear Table. 4 To display a subset of the addresses in a particular order, enter the query criteria and sort key under Query By, and click Query. The following fields are displayed for entries matching the query criteria: – VLAN ID — VLAN ID in the entry. – MAC Address — Interface MAC address. – Interface — Port or LAG associated with the MAC address. Configuring Dynamic Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring static address parameters as displayed in the Dynamic Address Table pages. Table 11-2. Dynamic Address CLI Commands CLI Command Description mac address-table aging-time seconds no mac address-table aging-time Sets the aging time of the address table. Use the no form of this command to restore the default. clear mac address-table dynamic [interface [{[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber}} [permanent|delete-onreset|delete-on-timeout|secure]] clear mac address-table secure interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber Removes learned or secure entries from the forwarding database. show mac address-table [dynamic|static|secure] [vlan vlan] [interface [gigabitethernet|tengigabitetherne t] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber] [address mac-address] Displays entries in the MAC address table.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 429 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_AddressTables.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# mac address-table aging-time 600 console# show mac address-table dynamic Aging time is 300 sec VLAN MAC Address Port Type ---- ------------------ -------- -------- 1 00:60:70:4C:73:FF gi1/0/8 dynamic 1 00:60:70:8C:73:FF gi1/0/8 dynamic430 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 12 GARP This section describes how to configure Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) on the device. It contains the following topics: • GARP Overview • GARP TimersDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 431 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GARP Overview Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is a general-purpose protocol that registers network connectivity or membership-style information. GARP defines a set of devices interested in a given network attribute, such as VLAN or Multicast address. The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN, such as end stations and switches, can register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN Identifiers, with each other. In doing so, these attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN, and these devices form a reachability tree that is a subset of an active topology. GARP defines the architecture, rules of operation, state machines and variables for the registration and deregistration of attribute values. When configuring GARP, ensure the following: • The leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time. • The leave-all time must be greater than the leave time. • Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2-connected devices. If the GARP timers are set differently on the Layer 2-connected devices, GARP application does not operate successfully.432 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GARP Timers To enable a GARP timer on an interface: 1 Click Switching > GARP > GARP Timers in the tree view to open the GARP Timers: Summary page. Figure 12-1. GARP Timers: Summary The GARP timers are displayed. 2 Click Edit. 3 Select an interface, and enter the fields: – GARP Join Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter the time, in milliseconds, during which Protocol Data Units (PDU) are transmitted. – GARP Leave Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter the time interval, in milliseconds, which the device waits before leaving its GARP state. Leave time is activated by a Leave All Time message sent/received, and cancelled by the Join message received. Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time. – GARP Leave All Timer (10 - 2147483640) — Enter time interval, in milliseconds, which all devices wait before leaving the GARP state. The leave all time must be greater than the leave time. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 433 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_GARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining GARP Timers Using CLI Commands This table summarizes the CLI commands for defining GARP timers as displayed in the GARP Timers pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 12-1. GARP Timer CLI Commands CLI Command Description garp timer {join|leave|leaveall} timer_value Adjusts the GARP application join, leave, and leaveall GARP timer values. show gvrp configuration [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net]port-number|vlan vlanid|port-channel LAG-number] Displays GVRP configuration information, including timer values, whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation are enabled, and which ports are running GVRP. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# garp timer leave 900 console(config-if)# end console# show gvrp configuration gi1/0/11 GVRP Feature is currently Disabled on the device. Maximum VLANs: 223 Port(s) GVRP Registration Dynamic VLAN Timers (milliseconds) Status Creation Join Leave Leave All -------- ------- ------------ ----------- ------ ----- --------- gi1/0/11 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 900 10000434 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 13 Spanning Tree This chapter describes the Spanning Tree Protocol. It contains the following topics: • Spanning Tree Protocol Overview • Global Settings • STP Port Settings • STP LAG Settings • Rapid Spanning Tree • Multiple Spanning TreeDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 435 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Spanning Tree Protocol Overview Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides tree topography for any bridge arrangement. STP eliminates loops by providing a unique path between end stations on a network. Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts. Loops, in an extended network, can cause bridges to forward traffic indefinitely, resulting in packets not arriving at their destination, increased traffic, and reduced network efficiency. The device supports the following Spanning Tree versions: • Classic STP — Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For more information on configuring Classic STP, see "Global Settings" on page 437. • Rapid STP (RSTP) — Provides faster convergence of the spanning tree than Classic STP. RSTP is most effective when the network topology is naturally tree-structured, and therefore faster convergence might be possible. RSTP is enabled by default. Although Classic STP is guaranteed to prevent Layer 2 forwarding loops, in a general network topology, there might be an unacceptable delay before convergence. This means that before convergence, each bridge or switch in the network must decide if it should actively forward traffic or not, on each of its ports. For more information on configuring Rapid STP, see "Rapid Spanning Tree" on page 450. • Multiple STP (MSTP) — MSTP is based on RSTP. It detects Layer 2 loops, and attempts to mitigate them by preventing the involved port from transmitting traffic. Since loops exist on a per-Layer 2-domain basis, a situation can occur where there is a loop in VLAN A and no loop in VLAN B. If both VLANs are on Port X, and STP wants to mitigate the loop, it stops traffic on the entire port, including VLAN B traffic, where there is no need to stop traffic. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) solves this problem by enabling several STP instances, so that it is possible to detect and mitigate loops separately in each instance. By associating instances to VLANs, each 436 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY instance is associated with the Layer 2 domain on which it performs loop detection and mitigation. This enables a port to be stopped in one instance, such as traffic from VLAN A that is causing a loop, while traffic can remain active in another domain where no loop was seen, such as on VLAN B. MSTP provides full connectivity for packets allocated to any VLAN, and transmits packets assigned to various VLANs, through different multiple spanning tree (MST) regions. MST regions act as a single bridge. For more information on configuring Multiple STP, see "Multiple Spanning Tree" on page 454.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 437 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Settings To enable STP and select the STP mode on the device: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 13-1. Global Settings The currently-defined settings are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Spanning Tree State — Enable Spanning Tree on the device. – STP Operation Mode — Select the STP mode enabled on the device. The possible options are: • Classic STP — Enables Classic STP on the device. • Rapid STP — Enables Rapid STP on the device. This is the default value. • Multiple STP — Enables Multiple STP on the device.438 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – BPDU Handling — Select how Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port/device. BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information. The possible options are: • Filtering — Filter BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface. • Flooding — Flood BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface. – Path Cost Default Values — Select the method used to assign default path costs to STP ports. The possible options are: • Short — Specifies 1 through 65,535 range for port path costs. • Long — Specifies 1 through 200,000,000 range for port path costs. The default path costs assigned to an interface vary according to the selected method: Bridge Settings – Priority (0-61440 in steps of 4096) — Enter the bridge priority value. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the device with the lowest priority value becomes the Root Bridge. The default value is 32768. The port priority value is provided in increments of 4096. For example, 4096, 8192, 12288, etc. – Hello Time (1-10) — Check to use the device Hello Time, which is the interval of time in seconds that a root bridge waits between configuration messages. Enter a value. – Max Age (6-40) — Check to use device Maximum Age Time, which is the time interval in seconds that a bridge waits before sending configuration messages. Enter a value. Interface Long Cost Short Cost LAG 20,000 4 1000 Mbps 20,000 4 100 Mbps 200,000 19 10 Mbps 2,000,000 100Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 439 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Forward Delay (4-30) — Check to use device forward delay time, which is the interval of time in seconds that a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets. Enter a value. Designated Root — Displays the following: – Bridge ID — The bridge priority and MAC address. – Root Bridge ID — The root bridge priority and MAC address. – Root Port — The port number that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the Root Bridge. This is significant when the Bridge is not the Root. – Root Path Cost — The cost of the path from this bridge to the root. – Topology Changes Counts — The total amount of STP state changes that have occurred. – Last Topology Change — The amount of time that has elapsed since the bridge was initialized or reset, and the last topographic change occurred. Defining STP Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining STP global parameters as displayed in the Global Settings pages. Table 13-1. STP Global Parameter CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree no spanning-tree Enables spanning tree functionality. Use the no form of this command to disable the spanning-tree functionality. spanning-tree mode {stp|rstp|mstp} no spanning-tree mode Configures the mode of the spanning tree protocol. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree bpdu {filtering|flooding|bridging} no spanning-tree bpdu Defines BPDU handling when the spanning tree is disabled globally or on a single interface. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.440 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY spanning-tree pathcost method {long|short} no spanning-tree pathcost method Sets the default path cost method. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. spanning-tree priority priority no spanning-tree priority Configures the spanning tree priority. Use the no form of this command to restore the default device spanning-tree priority. spanning-tree hello-time seconds no spanning-tree hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge Hello Time, which is how often the device Broadcasts Hello messages to other devices. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree max-age seconds no spanning-tree max-age seconds Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration spanning-tree forward-time seconds no spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time, which is the amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before entering the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree [[gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] [instance instance-id] Displays spanning tree configuration. show spanning-tree [detail] [active|blockedports] [instance instance-id] Displays detailed spanning tree information on active or blocked ports. show spanning-tree mstconfiguration Displays spanning tree MST configuration identifier. Table 13-1. STP Global Parameter CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 441 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# spanning-tree console(config)# spanning-tree mode rstp console(config)# spanning-tree priority 12288 console(config)# spanning-tree hello-time 5 console(config)# spanning-tree max-age 12 console(config)# spanning-tree forward-time 25 console(config)# exit442 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY STP Port Settings To assign STP properties to individual ports: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > STP Port Settings in the tree view to display the STP Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 13-2. STP Port Settings: Summary The ports and their STP settings are displayed. 2 To modify STP settings on a port, click Edit. 3 Select the port, and enter the fields: – STP — Enable/disable STP on the port. – Fast Link — Check to enable Fast Link mode for the port. If this is enabled, the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding state when the port is up. Fast Link mode optimizes the time it takes for the STP protocol to converge. STP convergence can take 30-60 seconds in large networks. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 443 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – BPDU Guard — Check to enable BPDU Guard on the port. – Root Guard — Check to prevent devices outside the network core from being assigned the spanning tree root. – Port State — Displays the current STP state of a port. If the port state is not disabled, it determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. The possible port states are: • Disabled — STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses. • Blocking — The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. Blocking is displayed when Classic STP is enabled. • Listening — The port is currently in the listening mode. The port cannot forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses. • Learning — The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot forward traffic, however it can learn new MAC addresses. • Forwarding — The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses. – Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm that provides STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree.444 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Speed — Displays the speed at which the port is operating. – Path Cost (1-200000000) — Enter the port contribution to the root path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value, and is used to forward traffic when a path being rerouted. – Default Path Cost — Check to use the default path cost. – Priority — Select the priority value that influences the port choice when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop. The priority value is provided in increments of 16. – Designated Bridge ID — Displays the bridge priority and the MAC address of the designated bridge. – Designated Port ID — Displays the designated port’s priority and interface. – Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops. – Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the port has changed from the Forwarding state to Blocking. – LAG — Displays the LAG to which the port is attached. Defining STP Port Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining STP port parameters as displayed in the STP Port Settings page. Table 13-2. STP Port Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree disable no spanning-tree disable Disables spanning tree on a specific port. Use the no form of this command to enable the spanning tree on a port. spanning-tree cost cost no spanning-tree cost Configures the spanning tree cost contribution of a port Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 445 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY spanning-tree port-priority priority no spanning-tree port-priority Configures port priority. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number][instance instanceid] Displays spanning tree configuration. spanning-tree portfast no spanning-tree portfast Enables Fast Link mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the PortFast mode. spanning-tree bpduguard {enable|disable} no spanning-tree bpduguard Shuts down an interface when it receives a bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree guard root Enables root guard on all spanning tree instances on the interface. show spanning-tree [detail] [active|blockedports] [instance instance-id] Displays detailed spanning tree information on active or blocked ports. Table 13-2. STP Port Settings CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description446 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console> enable console# configure console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# spanning-tree enable console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000 console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96 console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast console(config-if)# exit console(config)# exit console# show spanning-tree gi1/0/15 instance 12 Port gi1/0/15 enabled State: discarding Role: alternate Port ID: 128.15 Port cost: 19 Type: P2p (configured: Auto) Internal Port Fast: No (configured: No) Designated bridge Priority : 32768 Address: 00:00:b0:07:07:49 Designated port ID: 128.11 Designated path cost: 0 Guard root: Disabled Number of transitions to forwarding state: 3 BPDU: sent 482, received 1035Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 447 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY STP LAG Settings To assign STP parameters to LAGs: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > LAG Settings in the tree view to display the STP LAG Settings: Summary page. Figure 13-3. STP LAG Settings: Summary The LAGs and their STP settings are displayed. 2 To modify STP settings on a LAG, click Edit. 3 Select a LAG from the Select a LAG drop-down menu. 4 Enter the fields. – STP — Enable/disable STP on the LAG. – Fast Link — Check to enable Fast Link mode for the LAG. If Fast Link mode is enabled for a LAG, the LAG State is automatically placed in Forwarding when the LAG is up. Fast Link mode optimizes the time it takes for the STP protocol to converge. STP convergence can take from 30-60 seconds in large networks. – BPDU Guard — Check to enable BPDU Guard on the LAG. – Root Guard — Check to prevent devices outside the network core from being assigned the spanning tree root. 448 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – LAG State — Displays the current STP state of the LAG. If enabled, the LAG state determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. If the bridge discovers a malfunctioning LAG, the LAG is placed in the Broken state. Possible LAG states are: • Disabled — STP is currently disabled on the LAG. The LAG forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses. • Blocking — The LAG is blocked and cannot be used to forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. • RSTP Discarding State — The LAG does not learn MAC addresses and does not forward frames. This state is union of Blocking and Listening state introduced in STP (802.1.D). • Listening — The LAG is in the listening mode, and cannot forward traffic or learn MAC addresses. • Learning — The LAG is in the learning mode, and cannot forward traffic, but it can learn new MAC addresses. • Forwarding — The LAG is currently in the forwarding mode, and it can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses. • Broken — The LAG is currently malfunctioning, and cannot be used for forwarding traffic. – Role — Displays the LAG role assigned by the STP algorithm that provides STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This LAG provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This LAG is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This LAG provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This LAG provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This LAG is not participating in the Spanning Tree.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 449 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Path Cost (1-200000000) — Enter the amount the LAG contributes to the root path cost. The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value, and is used to forward traffic when a path is being rerouted. The path cost has a value of 1 to 200000000. – Default Path Cost — Check for the device to use the default path cost. – Priority — Select the priority value of the LAG. The priority value influences the LAG choice when a bridge has looped ports. The priority value is given in steps of 16. – Designated Bridge ID — Displays the priority and the MAC address of the designated bridge. – Designated Port ID — Displays the ID of the selected interface. – Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops. – Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the LAG State has changed from the Forwarding state to a Blocking state. Defining STP LAG Settings Using CLI Commands For information about CLI commands for defining STP LAG settings, see Table 13-2. The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface port-channel 1 console(config-if)# spanning-tree disable console(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 35000 console(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 96 console(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast450 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Rapid Spanning Tree While classic spanning tree prevents Layer 2 forwarding loops on a general network topology, convergence can take from 30 to 60 seconds. This delay provides time to detect possible loops, and propagate status changes. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) detects and uses network topologies that enable a faster convergence of the spanning tree, without creating forwarding loops. To configure RSTP: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > Rapid Spanning Tree in the tree view to display the Rapid Spanning Tree: Summary page. Figure 13-4. Rapid Spanning Tree: Summary 2 To modify RSTP settings on an interface, click Edit and enter the fields: – Interface — Select a port or LAG. – State — Displays the RSTP state of the selected interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 451 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree. – Mode — Displays if RSTP is enabled. – Fast Link Operational Status — Displays if Fast Link is enabled or disabled for the port or LAG. If Fast Link is enabled for an interface, the interface is automatically placed in the forwarding state. The possible options are: • Enable — Fast Link is enabled. • Disable — Fast Link is disabled. • Auto — Fast Link mode is enabled a few seconds after the interface becomes active. – Point-to-Point Admin Status — Select if a point-to-point links is established, or permits the device to establish a point-to-point link. The possible options are: • Enable — Enables the device to establish a point-to-point link, or specifies for the device to automatically establish a point-to-point link. To establish communications over a point-to-point link, the originating PPP first sends Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets to configure and test the data link. After a link is established and optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP, the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols (NCP) packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols. When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been 452 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY configured, packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link. The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link, or until some external event occurs. This is the actual switch port link type. It may differ from the administrative state. • Disable — Disables point-to-point link. • Auto — The device automatically establishes a point-to-point link. – Point-to-Point Operational Status — Displays the Point-to-Point operating state. – Active Protocol Migration Test — Check to run a Protocol Migration test. This discovers whether the link partner using STP still exists, and if so whether it has migrated to RSTP or MSTP. If it still exists as an STP link, the device continues to communicate with it by using STP. Otherwise, if it has been migrated to RSTP or MSTP, the device communicates with it using RSTP or MSTP, respectively. Defining Rapid STP Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining Rapid STP parameters as displayed in the Rapid Spanning Tree pages. Table 13-3. Rapid STP Parameters CLI Command CLI Command Description spanning-tree link-type {pointto-point|shared} no spanning-tree spanning-tree link-type Overrides the default link-type setting determined by the port duplex mode, and enables RSTP transitions to the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. clear spanning-tree detectedprotocols interface [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Restarts the protocol migration process.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 453 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show spanning-tree [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays spanning tree configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/5 console(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type shared Table 13-3. Rapid STP Parameters CLI Command (Continued) CLI Command Description454 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multiple Spanning Tree This section describes Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). It contains the following topics: • MSTP Overview • MSTP Properties • VLAN to MSTP Instance • MSTP Instance Settings • MSTP Interface SettingsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 455 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MSTP Overview MSTP maps VLANs into STP instances, using various load balancing scenarios. As a result of this partitioning into instances, if port A is blocked in one STP instance, the same port can be placed in the Forwarding State in another STP instance. In addition, packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along different paths within Multiple Spanning Trees Regions (MST Regions). Regions are one or more Multiple Spanning Tree bridges by which frames can be transmitted. MSTP Properties To set an MSTP region: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Settings in the tree view to display the MSTP Properties: Summary page. Figure 13-5. MSTP Properties: Summary456 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the following fields: – Region Name (1-32 Characters) — Enter the user-defined MSTP region name. – Revision (0-65535) — Enter the unsigned 16-bit number that identifies the current MST configuration revision. The revision number is required as part of the MST configuration. – Max Hops (1-40) — Enter the total number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. Once the BPDU is discarded, the port information is aged out. – IST Master — Displays the Internal Spanning Tree Master ID. The IST Master is the instance 0 root. Configuring MST Properties Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring MST properties in the MSTP Properties pages. Table 13-4. MSTP Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst configuration Enters MST Configuration mode. spanning-tree mst max-hops hop-count no spanning-tree mst maxhops Configures the number of hops in an MST region before the BDPU is discarded and the port information is aged out (in Global Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. name string no name Sets the MSTP region name. Use the no form of this command to restore the default setting. revision value no revision Defines the MST configuration revision number. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. exit Exits the MST region configuration mode after applying configuration changes.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 457 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: show {current|pending} Displays the current or pending MST region configuration. show spanning tree mstconfiguration Displays the MSTP configuration. console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# instance 1 add vlan 10-20 console(config-mst)# name region1 console(config-mst)# revision 1 console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 144 console(config)# spanning-tree mst max-hops 10 console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# instance 2 add vlan 21-30 console(config-mst)# name region1 console(config-mst)# revision 1 console(config-mst)# show pending Pending MST configuration Name: Region1 Revision: 1 Instance VLANs Mapped -------- ------------ 0 1-9,31-4094 1 10-20 2 21-30 Table 13-4. MSTP Properties CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description458 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN to MSTP Instance To map VLANs to MSTP instances: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > VLAN to MSTP Instance in the tree view to display the VLAN to MSTP Instance: Summary page. Figure 13-6. VLAN to MSTP Instance: Summary The MSTP instances and their associated VLANs are displayed. 2 To associate a VLAN with an MSTP instance, click Edit. 3 Select the MSTP instance, the VLAN and whether to add or remove the VLAN from the MSTP instance association. 4 Enter the fields: – Select MST Instance ID — Select an MST instance. – VLANs — Enter the VLANs being mapped to this instance. – Action — Select the mapping action. The possible options are: Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 459 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Add —Add these VLANS to the MST instance. • Remove —Remove these VLANS from the MST instance. Mapping VLAN to MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for mapping VLANs to MSTP instances. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 13-5. Mapping VLAN to MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst configuration Enters MST Configuration mode. instance instance-id vlan vlan-range no instance instance-id vlan vlan-range Maps VLANs to an MST instance. Use the no form of this command to restore default mapping. show spanning-tree detail Displays the spanning-tree configuration console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 10-20460 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MSTP Instance Settings To configure MSTP instances: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Instance Settings in the tree view to display the MSTP Instance Settings page. Figure 13-7. MSTP Instance Settings The MSTP instances and their associated VLANs are displayed. 2 Select an Instance ID. 3 Enter the Bridge Priority (0-61440) of this bridge for the selected MSTP instance. 4 The following fields are displayed: – Included VLANs — Displays VLANs included in this instance. – Designated Root Bridge ID — Priority and MAC address of the Root Bridge for the MST instance.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 461 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Root Port — Root port of the selected instance. – Root Path Cost — Root path cost of the selected instance. – Bridge ID — Bridge priority and the MAC address of this switch for the selected instance. – Remaining Hops — Number of hops remaining to the next destination. Configuring MSTP Instances Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the MSTP Instance pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 13-6. Configuring MSTP Instances CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst configuration Enters MST Configuration mode. spanning-tree mst instance-id priority priority no spanning-tree mst instance-id priority Configures the device priority for the specified spanning-tree instance. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree detail Displays the spanning-tree configuration console(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)# spanning-tree mst 1 priority 4096462 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MSTP Interface Settings To assign interfaces to MSTP instances: 1 Click Switching > Spanning Tree > MSTP Interface Settings in the tree view to display the MSTP Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 13-8. MSTP Interface Settings: Summary MSTP interface settings for the selected instance is displayed. 2 To set MSTP settings for an interface, click Edit. 3 Select an instance, and enter the fields: – Interface ID — Assign either ports or LAGs to the selected MSTP instance. – Port State — Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled in the specific instance. – Type — Displays whether MSTP treats the port as a point-to-point port, or a port connected to a hub, and whether the port is internal to the MST region or a boundary port. A Master port provides connectivity from a MSTP region to the outlying CIST root. A Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 463 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Boundary port attaches MST bridges to LAN in an outlying region. If the port is a boundary port, it also indicates whether the device on the other side of the link is working in RSTP or STP mode. – Role — Displays the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP paths. The possible options are: • Root — This port provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch. • Designated — This port is the interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN, which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge. • Alternate — This port provides an alternate LAG to the root switch from the root interface. • Backup — This port provides a backup path to the designated port. Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point-to-point link. Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment. • Disabled — This port is not participating in the Spanning Tree. – Interface Priority— Enter the interface priority for specified instance. – Path Cost (1-200,000,000) — Enter the port contribution to the Spanning Tree instance. If a loop occurs, the spanning tree considers path cost when selecting an interface to put in the Forwarding state. – Default Path Cost — Check to use the default path cost. – Designated Bridge ID — Displays the bridge ID number that connects the link or shared LAN to the root. – Designated Port ID — Displays the Port ID number on the designated bridge that connects the link or the shared LAN to the root. – Designated Cost — Displays the cost of the path from the link or the shared LAN to the root. – Forward Transitions — Displays the number of times the port changed to the forwarding state. – Remain Hops — Displays the number of hops remaining to the next destination.464 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining MSTP Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining MSTP interfaces as displayed in the MSTP Interfaces pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 13-7. MSTP Interface CLI Commands CLI Command Description spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost no spanning-tree mst instance-id cost Sets the path cost of the port for MST calculations (in Interface Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. spanning-tree mst instance-id portpriority priority Configures the device priority for the specified spanning-tree instance (in Interface Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show spanning-tree mstconfiguration Displays the MST configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/9 console(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 1 cost 4Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 465 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_STP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY466 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 14 VLANs This chapter describes how VLANs are configured on the device. It contains the following topics: • Virtual LAN Overview • VLAN Membership • Port Settings • LAGs Settings • Protocol Groups • Protocol Port • GVRP Parameters • Private VLAN • Voice VLANDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 467 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Virtual LAN Overview A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented on an organizational basis, by functions, project teams, or applications rather than on a physical or geographical basis. For example, all workstations and servers used by a particular workgroup team can be connected to the same VLAN, regardless of their physical connections to the network, or the fact that they might be intermingled with other teams. Reconfiguration of the network can be done through software rather than by physically unplugging and moving devices or wires. A VLAN can be thought of as a Broadcast domain that exists within a defined set of switches. A VLAN consists of a number of end systems, either hosts or network equipment (such as bridges and routers), connected by a single bridging domain. The bridging domain is supported on various pieces of network equipment; for example, LAN switches that operate bridging protocols between them with a separate bridge group for each VLAN. VLANs are created to provide the segmentation services traditionally provided by routers in LAN configurations. VLANs address scalability, security, and network management. Routers in VLAN topologies provide broadcast filtering, security, address summarization, and traffic flow management. None of the switches, within a defined group, will bridge any frames, not even broadcast frames, between two VLANs. 468 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Frame Flow Figure 14-1 describes the flow of VLAN frames from the Ingress port to the Egress port: Figure 14-1. Frame Flow Through a VLAN When a frame is received, it must be assigned a VLAN. VLAN assignment is accomplished by the following steps: 1 If the frame contains a VLAN tag, that tag is used, otherwise the frame is classified by the port's default VLAN (PVID), if it is defined. 2 After classification, the frame may pass (if enabled) through ingress filtering, where the frame is dropped if the frame's VLAN ID is not one of the VLANs to which the ingress port belongs. 3 A forwarding decision is made, as a function of the VLAN ID and the destination MAC address. 4 The egress rules define whether the frame is to be sent as tagged or untagged. Special-case VLANs VLAN#1 and VLAN#4095 are special-case VLANs: • VLAN1 — Defined as the default VLAN, and may only be used as a Ports Default VLAN ID (PVID). This means that if the VLAN, whose VID is the current port's PVID, is deleted from the port (or from the system), that port's PVID is set to 1. VLAN#1 cannot be deleted from the system. • VLAN #4095 — Defined (according to standard and industry practice) as the "discard" VLAN. A frame classified to this VLAN is silently dropped. Ingress Egress VLAN C lassification Ingress Filtering Egress Filtering Progress Forwarding Decision Filtering Database Received Frame T ransmitted Frame Ingress Egress VLAN C lassification Ingress Filtering Egress Filtering Progress Forwarding Decision Filtering Database Received Frame T ransmitted FrameDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 469 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QinQ Tagging QinQ tagging enables you to add an additional tag to previously-tagged packets. The added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, which ensures private and segregated network traffic. The VLAN ID tag is assigned to a customer port in the service provider network. The designated port then provides additional services to the packets with the double-tags. This enables administrators to expand service to VLAN users. Port Modes Ports participating in Layer 2 switching may be classified as: • Access Ports Ports set to Access mode belong to a single VLAN, whose VID is the currently set PVID (default =1). These ports accept all untagged frames, and all frames tagged with the VID, currently set as the port's PVID. All traffic is sent untagged. If the VLAN, whose VID is set as the current PVID of the port, is deleted from the system, or deleted from the port, the port's PVID will be set to 1, meaning that the port will be made a member of VLAN#1, the default VLAN. Ingress filtering is always enabled for ports in Access mode. Setting an Access port’s PVID to 4095 effectively shuts it down, as no frames will be transferred in either direction. Access mode ports are intended to connect end-stations to the system, especially when the end-stations are incapable of generating VLAN tags. • Trunk Ports Ports set to Trunk mode may belong to multiple VLANs. The default VLAN membership of a trunk port is all VLANs (1-4094). A PVID must be set on the port (it can be a non-existing VLAN). Trunk ports accept tagged and untagged frames. Untagged frames will be classified to the VLAN whose VLAN ID (VID) is configured as the port’s PVID. Frames, sent from the port in the VLAN, whose VID is the current PVID, are sent untagged. Frames sent in all other VLANs active on the port are sent tagged.470 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Ingress filtering is always enabled on Trunk-mode ports. Incoming frames will undergo ingress filtering, and if correctly tagged, (tagged with a VID of one of the VLANs to which the port currently belongs) are admitted. The default PVID is 1 (the default VLAN). If another VID is configured as the port’s PVID, and the corresponding VLAN is deleted from the port or from the system, the port’s PVID reverts to 1, meaning that the port is made a member of the default VLAN. Setting a trunk-port’s PVID to 4095 limits traffic to tagged frames. Incoming untagged frames are silently discarded, and no frames are sent untagged. Trunk-mode ports are intended for switch-to-switch links, where traffic is usually tagged. • General Ports Ports set to General mode may be members of multiple VLANs. Each of these VLANs may be configured to be tagged or untagged. This setting applies to transmitted frames. Incoming untagged frames are classified into the VLAN whose VID is the currently configured PVID. Ingress filtering may be disabled on General ports. Ingress filtering is enabled by default. • Promiscuous Ports A promiscuous port can communicate with all ports of the same Private VLAN (PVLAN), including the isolated ports of the same PVLAN. • Isolated An isolated port has complete Layer 2 isolation from the other ports within the same PVLAN, but not from the promiscuous ports. Isolated ports can communicate with promiscuous ports. In the factory default configuration, all ports are designated as Access ports, and are associated with the default VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 471 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Acceptable Frame Type The acceptable frame type can be set on a port to accept all frames (tagged and untagged), tagged only, or untagged only. This setting takes precedence over all other settings, so that if the acceptable frame type is tagged only, incoming untagged frames are silently discarded, even if the port has a valid PVID.472 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Membership The device supports up to 2-4094 VLANs. Ports are assigned to a VLAN in the Port Settings pages. To view the ports in a VLAN, and assign various parameters: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > VLAN Membership in the tree view to display the VLAN Membership: Summary page. Figure 14-2. VLAN Membership: Summary The ports in the selected unit/VLAN are displayed along with their statuses. Each port/LAG is labeled with one of the following codes, regarding its membership in the VLAN:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 473 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – T — Tagged. The interface is a member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the interface are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information. – U — Untagged. The interface is a member of a VLAN. Packets forwarded by the interface are untagged. – F — Forbidden. The interface is denied membership to a VLAN. – Blank — The interface is not a VLAN member. Packets associated with the interface are not forwarded. 2 Enter the fields: – Show VLAN — Check one of the possible options: • VLAN ID — Check VLAN ID, and select a VLAN ID to view. • VLAN Name — Check VLAN Name, and select a VLAN ID to view. – VLAN Name (0-32 Characters) — Enter a new VLAN name. – Status — The VLAN type. Possible values are: • Dynamic — The VLAN was dynamically created through GVRP. • Static — The VLAN is user-defined. – Authentication Not Required — Enable/disable authentication on the VLAN. 3 To define a new VLAN, click ADD, and enter the fields. The fields in this page are described above. Defining VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining VLAN membership as displayed in the VLAN Membership pages. Table 14-1. VLAN Membership CLI Commands CLI Command Description vlan database Enters the VLAN configuration mode.474 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: vlan {vlan-range}[name vlanname] no vlan vlan-range Creates a VLAN. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration or delete a VLAN. name string Adds a name to a VLAN. dot1x auth-not-req no dot1x auth-not-req Enables unauthorized devices access to the VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable access to the VLAN. console(config)# vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan 1972 console(config-vlan)# end console(config)# interface vlan 1972 console(config-if)# name Marketing console(config-vlan)# dot1x auth-not-req console(config-if)# end Table 14-1. VLAN Membership CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 475 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Settings After a VLAN has been defined, assign ports to it. To assign a VLAN to untagged packets, arriving on the device, enter the port default VLAN ID (PVID). All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID. All ports must have a defined PVID. If no other value is configured, the default VLAN PVID is used. VLAN ID #1 is the default VLAN, and cannot be deleted from the system. To configure ports on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Port Settings in the tree view to display the Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 14-3. Port Settings: Summary All interfaces on the selected unit and their settings are displayed. 2 To modify the port settings, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Enter the unit/port number to be modified. – Switchport Mode — Select whether the port is in Layer 2 or Layer 3. If the port is in Layer 2, enter the parameters described below, otherwise the fields are not relevant.476 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Port VLAN Mode — Enter the port VLAN mode. The possible options are: • General — The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is user-defined as tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode). • Access — The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a port is in Access mode, the packet types that are accepted on the port cannot be designated. Ingress filtering cannot be enabled/disabled on an access port. • Trunk — The port belongs to VLANs on which all ports are tagged (except for one port that can be untagged). • Customer — When a port is in Customer mode, an added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, ensuring private and segregated network traffic for that customer. • Private VLAN Promiscuous — The port is a promiscuous port. • Private VLAN Host — The port is an isolated port – Current Reserved VLAN — Displays the VLAN currently designated by the system as the reserved VLAN. – Reserve VLAN for Internal Use (1-4094) — Check to enter a reserved VLAN, and enter its ID. If none is required, check None. – PVID (1-4095) — Enter a VLAN ID to be added to untagged packets. The possible values are 1-4095. VLAN 4095 is defined according to standard and industry practice as the discard VLAN. Packets classified to the discard VLAN are dropped. – VLAN List (I - Inactive Configuration) — Enter the VLAN(s) to which this port belongs, and indicate its type. The possible options are: • T — Tagged. The port is a member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the LAG are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information. • U — Untagged. The port is a member of a VLAN. Packets forwarded by the LAG are untagged. • F — Forbidden. The port is denied membership to a VLAN. Click Add to move the port to the VLAN list together with its type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 477 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Frame Type — Select the packet type accepted on the port. The possible options are: • Admit All — Both tagged and untagged packets are accepted on the port. • Admit Tagged Only — Only tagged packets are accepted on the port. • Admit Untagged Only — Only untagged packets are accepted on the port. – Ingress Filtering — Enable/disable ingress filtering, which discards packets that are destined to VLANs of which the specific port is not a member. – Native VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for untagged traffic to trunk ports. – Multicast VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for Multicast TV VLAN traffic on access ports. – Customer VLAN ID(1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for customer ports. Assigning Ports to VLAN Groups Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for assigning ports to VLAN groups. Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands CLI Command Description switchport general acceptableframe-type {tagged-only|untaggedonly|all} no switchport general acceptableframe-type Configures ingress filtering based on packet type tagged/untagged. Use the no form of this command to return to default. switchport mode {access|trunk|general} Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.478 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY switchport access vlan {vlanid|none} no switchport access vlan Configures the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. switchport trunk allowed vlan {all|none|add vlan-list|remove vlan-list|except vlan-list} no switchport trunk allowed vlan Sets the trunk characteristics when the interface is in Trunking mode. Use the no form of this command to reset a trunking characteristic to the default. switchport trunk native vlan {vlanid|none} no switchport trunk native vlan Defines the native VLAN when the interface is in trunk mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. switchport general allowed vlan {add|remove} vlan-list [tagged|untagged] no switchport general allowed vlan Sets the general characteristics when the interface is in general mode. Use the no form of this command to reset a general characteristic to the default. switchport general pvid vlan-id no switchport general pvid Configures the PVID when the interface is in general mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. switchport customer vlan vlan-id no switchport customer vlan Sets the port's VLAN when the interface is in customer mode. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 479 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY switchport mode {access|trunk|general|private-vlan {promiscuous|host}|customer} no switchport mode Configure the VLAN membership mode of a port. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. Table 14-2. Port-to-VLAN Group Assignments CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description480 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan 23-25 console(config-vlan)# end console(config)# interface vlan 23 console(config-if)# name Marketing console(config-if)# end console(config)# interface gi1/0/8 console(config-if)# switchport mode access console(config-if)# switchport access vlan 23 console(config-if)# end console(config)# interface gi1/0/9 console(config-if)# switchport mode trunk console(config-if)# switchport mode trunk allowed vlan add 23-25 console(config-if)# end console(config)# interface gi1/0/11 console(config-if)# switchport mode general console(config-if)# switchport general allowed vlan add 23,25 tagged console(config-if)# switchport general pvid 25Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 481 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LAGs Settings VLANs can either be composed of individual ports or of LAGs. Untagged packets entering the device are tagged with the LAGs ID specified by the PVID. To configure LAGS on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > LAG Settings in the tree view to display the VLAN LAG Settings page. Figure 14-4. VLAN LAG Settings All LAGs and their settings are displayed. 2 To modify the LAG settings, click Edit, and enter the fields: – LAG — Select the LAG to be modified. – Switchport Mode — Select whether the LAG is in Layer 2 or Layer 3. If the LAG is in Layer 2, enter the parameters described below, otherwise the fields are not relevant.482 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Port VLAN Mode — Enter the port VLAN mode. The possible options are: • General — The port belongs to VLANs, and each VLAN is user-defined as tagged or untagged (full 802.1Q mode). • Access — The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN. When a port is in Access mode, the packet types that are accepted on the port cannot be designated. Ingress filtering cannot be enabled/disabled on an access port. • Trunk — The port belongs to VLANs on which all ports are tagged (except for one port that can be untagged). • Customer — When a port is in Customer mode, an added tag provides a VLAN ID to each customer, ensuring private and segregated network traffic for that customer. • Private VLAN Promiscuous — The port is a promiscuous port. • Private VLAN Host — The port is an isolated port – Current Reserved VLAN — Displays the VLAN currently designated as the reserved VLAN. – Reserve VLAN for Internal Use (1-4094) — Enter the VLAN that is designated as the reserved VLAN after the device is reset, or select None. – PVID (1-4095)— Assigns a VLAN ID to untagged packets. The possible VLAN IDs are 1-4095. VLAN 4095 is defined as per standard and industry practice, as the discard VLAN. Packets classified to this VLAN are dropped. – VLAN List (I - Inactive Configuration) — Enter the VLAN(s) to which this LAG belongs, and indicate its type. The possible options are: • T — Tagged. The LAG is a member of a VLAN. All packets forwarded by the LAG are tagged. The packets contain VLAN information. • U — Untagged. The LAG is a member of a VLAN. Packets forwarded by the LAG are untagged. • F — Forbidden. The LAG is denied membership to a VLAN. Click Add to move the LAG to the VLAN list together with its type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 483 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Frame Type — Packet type accepted by the LAG. The possible options are: • Admit All — Tagged and untagged packets are both accepted by the LAG. • Admit Tag Only — Only tagged packets are accepted by the LAG. • Admit Untagged Only — Only untagged packets are accepted on the LAG. – Ingress Filtering — Enable/disable Ingress filtering by the LAG. Ingress filtering discards packets that are destined to VLANs of which the specific LAG is not a member. – Native VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for untagged traffic to trunk ports, or select None. – Multicast VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for Multicast TV VLAN traffic on access ports, or select None. – Customer VLAN ID (1-4094) — Enter VLAN used for customer ports, or select None. Assigning LAGs to VLAN Groups Using CLI Commands Refer to Table 14-2 for a list of the LAG to VLAN CLI commands.484 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol Groups Protocol groups are based on protocol-based VLANs. Protocol-based VLANs Untagged frames received on a VLAN-aware switch can be classified by methods others than source port, such as data-link-layer protocol identification. This classification method is referred to as protocol-based VLANs. Protocol-based VLANs are useful for isolating Layer 2 traffic of various Layer 3 protocols. If, for example, a switch serves IP stations and IPX stations that communicate with a single VLAN-unaware server, without using protocol-based VLANs, all the Layer 2 Broadcast traffic would reach all the stations. With protocol-based VLANs, the switch can forward incoming traffic from the server to stations in a specific VLAN only. Protocol-based VLANs are only available on General ports. Classification rules are set on a per-port basis, and may be sensitive to the frame's encapsulation. The default encapsulation assumed is Ethernet. On each port, a user can define associations between groups of data-link layer protocols and ports. For each group/port combination, the user may set the VLAN to which frames incoming on that port will be classified if they belong to any of the protocols in the group. Several protocol-groups may be associated to a single port, and a protocol group may be assigned to multiple ports, if so desired. It is not guaranteed that the VLAN to which the frame is classified exists in the system, or is active on that port. Restrictions The following frames (packet) types are supported: Ethernet, RFC 1042, and LLC Other. There may be dependencies between protocols and encapsulations, and specifying one protocol may automatically add additional protocols to the protocol-group, such as specifying IP implies ARP and vice-versa. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 485 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Similarly, there may be implied dependencies between encapsulations, so that specifying an encapsulation implies defining the protocol group for related encapsulations. An example of this is specifying the Ethernet encapsulation, even by default, implies IEEE802 encapsulation, as per RFC 1042. The following standards are relevant: • IEEE802.1V defines VLAN assignment by protocol type. • IETF RFC 10-2 defines a standard for the transmission of IP datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks Defining Protocol Groups Define protocol groups in two steps: 1 Define a protocol group by assigning one or more protocols to the group and giving it a protocol-group ID (any integer), using the Protocol Group pages. 2 Associate the group with a desired VLAN classification, per port, using the Protocol Port pages.486 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define a protocol group: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Protocol Group in the tree view to display the Protocol Group: Summary page. Figure 14-5. Protocol Group: Summary The currently-defined protocol groups are displayed. 2 To add a new protocol group, click Add, and enter the fields: – Frame Type — Select a frame type to be accepted in the protocol group. – Protocol Value — Select a protocol name. or – Ethernet-Based Protocol Value (0600 - FFFF) — Enter the Ethernet protocol group type. – Protocol Group ID — Assign a protocol group ID number.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 487 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining VLAN Protocol Groups Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining VLAN Protocol groups. The following is a sample of the CLI commands: Table 14-3. VLAN Protocol Groups CLI Commands CLI Command Description map protocol protocol [encapsulation] protocolsgroup group no map protocol protocol [encapsulation] Maps a protocol to a protocol group. Protocol groups are used for protocolbased VLAN assignment. Use the no form of this command to delete a protocol from a group. console (config)# vlan database console (config-vlan)# map protocol ip protocols-group 213488 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol Port A protocol port is a port assigned to a particular protocol group. Traffic from particular types of frames may be assigned to a protocol group, which has a port and VLAN associated with it. To add an interface to a protocol group: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Protocol Port in the tree view to display the Protocol Port: Summary page. Figure 14-6. Protocol Port: Summary A list of previously-defined protocol groups is displayed. 2 To assign an interface to a protocol group, click Add, and enter the fields: – Interface — Port or LAG number to be added to a protocol group. – Group ID — Select a protocol group ID to which the interface is added. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 489 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol ports can either be attached to aVLAN ID or a VLAN name. – VLAN ID (1- 4094) —Check and enter a VLAN ID. or – VLAN Name — Check and enter a VLAN name. Defining Protocol Ports Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining protocol ports. The following is a sample of the CLI commands: Table 14-4. Protocol Port CLI Commands CLI Command Description switchport general map protocols-group group vlan vlan-id no switchport general map protocols-group group Sets a protocol-based classification rule. Use the no form of this command to delete a classification. console (config-if)# switchport general map protocolsgroup 1 vlan 8490 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GVRP Parameters GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) is provided for automatic distribution of VLAN membership information among VLAN-aware bridges. GVRP enables VLAN-aware bridges to automatically learn VLANs-to-bridgeports mapping, without having to individually configure each bridge and register VLAN membership. To ensure the correct operation of the GVRP protocol, it is advised to set the maximum number of GVRP VLANs equal to a value which significantly exceeds: – The number of all static VLANs both currently configured and expected to be configured. – The number of all dynamic VLANs participating in GVRP, both currently configured (initial number of dynamic GVRP VLANs is 128) and expected to be configured. To set GVRP parameters: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > GVRP Parameters in the tree view to display the GVRP Parameters: Summary page. Figure 14-7. GVRP Global Parameters 2 Enable/disable GVRP on the device in the GVRP Global Status field.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 491 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Check Unit ID and select a unit ID to view ports on the unit, or select LAGs to view the LAGs in the system. 4 To set GVRP for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Specifies port or LAG for editing GVRP settings. – GVRP State — Enable/disable GVRP on the interface. – Dynamic VLAN Creation — Enable/disable Dynamic VLAN creation on the interface. – GVRP Registration — Enable/disable VLAN registration through GVRP on the interface. NOTE: GVRP functions only on ports in switchport general mode. If you enable it on another type of port, GVRP does not function. Configuring GVRP Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring GVRP as displayed in the GVRP Global Parameters page. Table 14-5. GVRP Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description gvrp enable no gvrp enable In Global Configuration mode, this command enables GVRP globally. In Interface Configuration mode, it enables GVRP on the interface. Use the no form of this command to disable GVRP on the device. gvrp vlan-creation-forbid no gvrp vlan-creation-forbid Enables or disables dynamic VLAN creation. Use the no form of this command to enable dynamic VLAN creation or modification. gvrp registration-forbid no gvrp registration-forbid De-registers all dynamic VLANs, and prevents dynamic VLAN registration on the port. Use the no form of this command to allow dynamic registration of VLANs on a port.492 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY show gvrp configuration [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays GVRP configuration information, including timer values, whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation is enabled, and which ports are running GVRP. show gvrp error-statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays GVRP error statistics. show gvrp statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays GVRP statistics. clear gvrp statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Clears all the GVRP statistics information. Table 14-5. GVRP Global Parameters CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command DescriptionDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 493 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console(config)# gvrp enable console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# gvrp enable console(config-if)# gvrp vlan-creation-forbid console(config-if)# gvrp registration-forbid console(config-if)# end console# show gvrp configuration GVRP Feature is currently Disabled on the device. Maximum VLANs: 4094 Port(s) GVRP-Status Registration Dynamic VLAN Timers(milliseconds) Creation Join Leave Leave All -------- ----------- ------------ ------------ ---- ----- -------- gi1/0/1 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/2 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/3 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/4 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/5 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/6 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/7 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/8 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 gi1/0/9 Disabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000494 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Private VLAN Private VLANs (PVLANs) provide Layer 2 isolation between ports that share the same Broadcast domain, or in other words, they create a point-to-multipoint Broadcast domain. The ports can be located anywhere in the Layer 2 network, as opposed to protected ports which must be in the same stack. The switch ports can be members of a Private VLAN (PVLAN) in the following membership types: • Promiscuous ports that can communicate with all ports of the same PVLAN, including the isolated ports of the same PVLAN. • Isolated ports that have complete Layer 2-isolation from the other ports within the same PVLAN, but not from the promiscuous ports. Isolated ports can communicate with promiscuous ports. The PVLAN entity is implemented by allocating the following VLANs per PVLAN: • Primary VLAN: Carries traffic from promiscuous ports. • Isolated VLAN: Carries traffic from isolated ports.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 495 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure PVLANs: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Private VLAN in the tree view to display the Private VLAN: Summary page. Figure 14-8. Private VLAN: Summary The previously-defined private VLANs are displayed. 2 To query by Associated Primary VLAN ID, check that field, enter a VLAN ID, and click Query. The associated VLANs are displayed. 3 To define a private VLAN, click Assign, and enter the fields: – Private VLAN ID — Select a VLAN to be assigned. – Private VLAN Type — Select one of the possible options: • Primary — Traffic from promiscuous ports flow through this type of VLAN. This is for the internet or shared servers. • Isolated —Traffic from isolated ports flow through this type of VLAN.496 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Associate Primary VLAN — If the Private VLAN type is Isolated, check to associate the isolated VLAN with a primary VLAN, thus allowing traffic between isolated and promiscuous ports. – Primary VLAN ID — Select a VLAN to be associated with the isolated VLAN. 4 To assign ports to the private VLAN, click Membership. 5 Select a Primary VLAN ID. 6 Select a Isolated VLAN ID. 7 Select the ports to be assigned to each VLAN, and assign each port/LAG a port type in the Admin row of ports/LAGs. The possible options are: – H - Host (Isolated) — Port is isolated. – P - Promiscuous — Port is promiscuous. – C - Conditional (operational state depends on Port VLAN Mode) — Port receives the Port VLAN type set in the VLAN Port Settings page. See "Port Modes" on page 469 for a description of the various port modes. Configuring Private VLAN Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring private VLANs. Table 14-6. Private VLAN CLI Commands CLI Command Description private-vlan {primary|isolated} no private-vlan Configures a private VLAN. Use the no form of this command to return the VLAN to normal VLAN configuration. private-vlan association [add|remove] secondary-vlanlist no private-vlan association Configures the association between the primary VLAN and the secondary VLANs. Use the no form of this command to remove the association.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 497 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id [add|remove] secondary-vlanlist no switchport private-vlan mapping Configures the VLANs of the privatevlan promiscuous port. Use the no form of this command to reset to default switchport private-vlan hostassociation primary-vlan-id secondary-vlan-id no switchport private-vlan host-association Configures the VLANs of the privatevlan host port. Use the no form of this command to reset to default. show vlan private-vlan [tag vlan-id] Displays private VLAN information. console# show vlan private-vlan Primary Secondary Type Ports -------- --------- ---------- --------------------- 20 Primary gi1/0/1-2 20 201 Isolated gi1/0/1-8 20 202 Isolated gi1/0/1-2 gi1/09-18 20 203 Isolated gi1/0/1-2 gi1/0/19-21 30 Primary gi1/0/22 30 301 Isolated gi1/0/22-28 30 302 Isolated gi1/0/22, gi1/0/29-38 30 303 Isolated gi1/0/22, gi1/0/39-41 Table 14-6. Private VLAN CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description498 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Voice VLAN The Voice VLAN feature enables you to enhance VoIP service by configuring ports to carry IP-voice traffic from IP phones on a specific VLAN. This VLAN is configured with a QoS profile that ensures high voice quality. Equipment, such as VOIP phones, transmits IP traffic with a pre-configured Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) prefix in the source MAC address. This enables the switch to dynamically identify ports connected to the VoIP equipment and automatically add these ports to the Voice VLAN. IP phones use one of the following modes, both of which are supported by the device: • Use only tagged packets for all communications. • Initially use untagged packets while retrieving the initial IP address through DHCP. Then the phone uses the Voice VLAN and starts sending tagged VoIP packets. Non-VoIP traffic is dropped from the Voice VLAN when the device is in Auto Voice VLAN secured mode. The Voice VLAN feature also provides QoS actions to VoIP, ensuring that the quality of voice does not deteriorate if the IP traffic is received unevenly. To summarize, when Voice VLAN is enabled and configured, and VoIP equipment is connected to one of the switch ports, the VoIP traffic triggers the switch’s Voice VLAN feature to add this port to the Voice VLAN (a VLAN that usually carries only voice traffic), and to assign traffic from this port a specific QoS profile, ensuring high voice quality. The device supports a single voice VLAN. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 499 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Properties To set voice VLAN parameters that apply to the voice VLAN on the device: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Properties in the tree view to display the Properties page. Figure 14-9. Properties 2 Enter the fields: – Voice VLAN State — Select Enable to use the Voice VLAN feature on the device. – Voice VLAN ID — Select the VLAN that is to be the voice VLAN. – Class of Service — Select to add a CoS level to untagged packets, received on the voice VLAN. The possible values are 0 to 7, where 7 is the highest priority. 0 is used as a best-effort, and is invoked automatically when no other value has been set. – Remark CoS — Displays whether the Remark CoS is enabled.500 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Voice VLAN Aging Time — Enter the interval of time after which the port exits the voice VLAN, if no voice packets are received. The aging time starts after the MAC address is aged out from the Dynamic MAC Address table. The default time is 300 sec. For more information on defining MAC address age out time, see "Dynamic Addresses" on page 427. Defining Voice VLAN Properties Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining voice VLAN properties. Table 14-7. Voice VLAN Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description voice vlan enable no voice vlan enable Enables automatic voice VLAN configuration for a port. Use the no form of this command to disable automatic voice VLAN configuration. voice vlan id vlan-id no voice vlan id Enables the voice VLAN and configures the voice VLAN ID in Global Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable voice VLAN. voice vlan cos cos-queue [remark] no voice vlan cos Sets the voice VLAN Class of Service (CoS) queue. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. voice vlan aging-timeout minutes no voice aging-timeout Sets the voice VLAN aging timeout in Global Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show voice vlan [[gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Use the show voice vlan EXEC command to display the voice VLAN status.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 501 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: console# show voice vlan Aging timeout: OUI table 1440 minutes MAC Address - Prefix Description 00:E0:BB 3COM 00:03:6B Cisco 00:E0:75 Veritel 00:D0:1E Pingtel 00:01:E3 Siemens 00:60:B9 NEC/Philips 00:0F:E2 Huawei-3COM 00:09:6E Avaya Voice VLAN VLAN ID: 8 CoS: 6 Remark: Yes Interface Enabled Secure Activated --------- -------- ------ --------- gi1/0/1 Yes Yes Yes gi1/0/2 Yes Yes Yes gi1/0/3 Yes Yes Yes gi1/0/4 Yes Yes Yes502 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port Setting To configure voice VLAN ports properties: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > Port Setting in the tree view to display the Port Setting: Summary page. Figure 14-10. Voice VLAN Port Setting A list of the ports and their voice VLAN settings is displayed. 2 To modify the voice VLAN settings for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Enter the specific port or LAG to which the Voice VLAN settings are applied. – Voice VLAN Mode — Select the Voice VLAN mode. The possible options are: Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 503 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • None— Disables the selected port/LAG on the Voice VLAN. This is the default. • Static — Statically adds the port to the Voice VLAN. This is usually done for VoIP uplink ports that connect the device to VoIP PBX, for example. • Auto — Indicates that if traffic with an IP phone MAC address is transmitted on the port/LAG, the port/LAG joins the Voice VLAN. The port/LAG is aged out of the voice VLAN if the IP phone’s MAC address (with an OUI prefix) is aged out. If the MAC address of the IP phones OUI was added manually to a port/LAG in the voice VLAN, the user cannot add it to the Voice VLAN in Auto mode, only in Static mode. – Voice VLAN Security — Enable/disable security on the interface. Security ensures that packets arriving with an unrecognized OUI are dropped (for example data packets). Defining Voice VLAN Port Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining Voice VLAN port settings. Table 14-8. Voice VLAN Port Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description voice vlan enable no voice vlan enable Enables automatic voice VLAN configuration on a port. Use the no form of this command to disable automatic voice VLAN configuration on a port. voice vlan secure no voice vlan secure Configures secure mode for the voice VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable secure mode.504 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: OUI Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUIs) are a 24-bit numbers assigned by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Incorporated (IEEE) Registration Authority to equipment manufacturers. Up to 16 OUIs can be stored on the switch. Nine specific OUIs of popular VoIP phones manufacturers are stored by default. Traffic from each type of IP phone contains the OUI for the phone manufacturer. When frames are received, in which the source MAC address’s first three octets match one of the OUIs in the OUI list, the port on which they are received is automatically assigned to the Voice VLAN. console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# voice vlan enable console(config-if)# voice vlan secure console(config-if)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 505 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To view existing OUIs, and add new OUIs: 1 Click Switching > VLAN > Voice VLAN > OUI in the tree view to display the OUI Summary. Figure 14-11. OUI: Summary The previously-defined OUIs are displayed. 2 To add a new OUI, click Add, and enter the fields: – Telephony OUI — Enter a new OUI. – Description — Enter an OUI description up to 32 characters. 506 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Voice VLAN OUIs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for defining Voice VLAN OUIs. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 14-9. Voice VLAN OUIs CLI Commands CLI Command Description voice vlan oui-table {add mac-address-prefix|remove mac-address-prefix} [text] no voice vlan oui-table Configures the voice OUI table. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# voice vlan oui-table add 00:E0:BB console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 507 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_VLAN.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY508 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 15 Link Aggregation This section describes link aggregation of ports. It contains the following topics: • Link Aggregation Overview • LACP Parameters • LAG MembershipDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 509 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Link Aggregation Overview Link Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single LAG (aggregated group). Aggregating ports multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy. The device supports the following types of LAGs: • Static LAGs — Manually-configured LAGs. • Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs — LACP LAGs negotiate aggregating a port’s links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establishes a LAG between them. When you aggregate ports, the ports and LAG must fulfill the following conditions: • All ports within a LAG must be the same media type. • A VLAN is not configured on the port. • The port is not assigned to another LAG. • Auto-negotiation mode is not configured on the port. • The port is in full-duplex mode. • All ports in the LAG have the same ingress filtering and tagged modes. • All ports in the LAG have the same back pressure and flow control modes. • All ports in the LAG have the same priority. • All ports in the LAG have the same transceiver type. • The device supports up to 32 LAGs, and eight ports in each LAG. • Ports can be configured as LACP ports only if the ports are not part of a previously configured LAG.510 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Ports added to a LAG lose their individual port configuration. When ports are removed from the LAG, the original port configuration is applied to the ports. The device uses a hash function to assign packets to a LAG member. The hash function statistically load-balances the aggregated link members. The device considers an Aggregated Link to be a single logical port. Aggregate ports can be linked into link-aggregation port-groups. Each group comprises ports with the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG can contain different media types if the ports are operating at the same speed. Aggregated links can be manually or automatically configured by enabling LACP on the relevant links.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 511 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LACP Parameters To define LACP LAGs, configure LACP global and port parameters, such as LACP system priority, timeout, and port priority. With all factors equal, when the LAG is configured with more candidate ports than the maximum number of active ports allowed, the switch activates the highest priority candidate ports from the dynamic LAG. To set LACP parameters: 1 Click Switching > Link Aggregation > LACP Parameters in the tree view to display the LACP Parameters page. Figure 15-1. LACP Parameters The LACP parameters for all ports are displayed. 2 Enter the global LACP System Priority (1-65535) value that determines which candidate ports will become members of the LAG. The page displays the LACP settings of the ports on the selected unit. 3 To modify LACP parameters for a particular port, click Edit, and enter the following fields: – Port — Select the port for which timeout and priority values are assigned.512 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – LACP Port Priority (1-65535) — Enter the LACP priority value for the port. – LACP Timeout — Select the rate of periodic transmissions of LACP PDUs. The possible options are: • Long — Slow transmission rate • Short — Fast transmission rate Configuring LACP Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring LACP parameters as displayed in the LACP Parameters page. Table 15-1. LACP Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description lacp system-priority value Configures the system priority. lacp port-priority value Configures the priority value for physical ports. lacp timeout{long|short} Assigns an administrative LACP timeout. show lacp [gigabitethernet|tengigabitether net] port-number [parameters|statistics|protocolstate] Displays LACP information for ethernet ports.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 513 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console (config)# lacp system-priority 120 console (config)# interface gi1/0/11 console (config-if)# lacp port-priority 247 console (config-if)# lacp timeout long console (config-if)# end console# show lacp gi1/0/11 statistics Port gi1/0/11 LACP Statistics: LACP PDUs sent:2 LACP PDUs received:2514 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LAG Membership Each device supports up to 32 LAGs per system, and eight ports per LAG. When you add a port to a LAG, the port acquires the LAG’s properties. If the port cannot be configured with the LAG’s properties, it is not added to the LAG and an error message is generated. If the first port joining the LAG cannot be configured with the LAG settings, the port is added to the LAG, using the port default settings, and an error message is generated. Since this is the only port in the LAG, the entire LAG operates with the port’s settings, instead of the LAG’s defined settings. To assign ports to LAGs: 1 Click Switching Link Aggregation LAG Membership in the tree view to display the LAG Membership: Summary page. Figure 15-2. LAG Membership: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 515 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LAG.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The LACP and static LAGs on each unit are displayed along with their member ports. This page displays the following fields: – LACP — Aggregates the port to a LAG, using LACP. – LAG — Adds a port to a LAG, and indicates the specific LAG to which the port belongs. 2 Click Edit to change the status of a port in a LAG. 3 Select the LAG. 4 In the LACP row (the first row), toggle the button under the port number to assign either the LACP or the static LAG. 5 In the LAG row (the second row), toggle the button to a specific number to aggregate or remove the port to that LAG number. Adding Ports to LAGs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for assigning ports to LAGs as displayed in the LAG Membership pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 15-2. LAG Membership CLI Commands CLI Command Description channel-group LAG-number mode {on|auto} no channel-group Associates a port with a port-channel with or without a LACP operation. Use the no form of this command to remove the channel-group configuration from the interface. show interfaces portchannel [LAG-number] Displays port-channel information for all port channels or for a specific port channel. console(config)# interface gi1/0/11 console(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode on516 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 16 Multicast This chapter describes Multicast support on the device. It contains the following topics: • Multicast Support Overview • Global Parameters • Bridge Multicast Groups • Bridge Multicast Forward All • IGMP Snooping • Unregistered Multicast • Multicast TV VLAN • Multicast TV VLAN MappingDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 517 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast Support Overview Multicast forwarding enables a single packet to be forwarded to multiple destinations. Layer 2 Multicast service is based on a Layer 2 device receiving a single packet addressed to a specific Multicast address. Multicast forwarding creates copies of the packet, and transmits the packets to the relevant ports. There are two types of Multicast groups: • Registered Multicast Group — When traffic addressed to a registered Multicast group is received, it is handled according to its entry in the Multicast Filtering Database and forwarded only to the registered ports. • Unregistered Multicast Group — If traffic addressed to an unregistered Multicast group is received, it is handled by a special entry in the Multicast Filtering Database. The default setting of this is to flood all such traffic (traffic in unregistered Multicast groups). The device supports: • Forwarding L2 Multicast Packets — Forwards Layer 2 Multicast packets. Layer 2 Multicast filtering is enabled by default, and is not user-configurable. • Filtering L2 Multicast Packets — Forwards Layer 2 packets to interfaces. If Multicast filtering is disabled, Multicast packets are flooded to all relevant ports. NOTE: The system supports Multicast filtering for 256 Multicast groups. Layer 2 Switching Layer 2 switching forwards Multicast packets to all relevant VLAN ports by default, managing the packet as a single Multicast transmission. While Multicast traffic forwarding is effective, it is not optimal, as irrelevant ports also receive the Multicast packets. The excess packets cause increased network traffic. Multicast forwarding filters enable forwarding of Layer 2 packets to a subset of ports instead of to all ports.518 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) adds IGMP packets to Multicast traffic. When IGMP Snooping is enabled globally, all IGMP packets are forwarded to the CPU. The CPU analyzes the incoming packets and determines: • Which ports want to join which Multicast groups. • Which ports have Multicast routers generating IGMP queries. • What routing protocols are forwarding packets and Multicast traffic. Ports requesting to join a specific Multicast group issue an IGMP report, specifying that the Multicast group is accepting members. This results in the creation of an entry in the Multicast filtering database. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 519 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Parameters To enable Multicast filtering and IGMP Snooping: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 16-1. Global Parameters 2 Enter the fields: – Bridge Multicast Filtering — Enable/disable Multicast filtering. Disabled is the default value. – IGMP Snooping Status — Enable/disable IGMP Snooping on the device. Disabled is the default value. 520 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Enabling Multicast Filtering and IGMP Snooping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for enabling Multicast Filtering and IGMP snooping as displayed on the Global Parameters page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-1. Multicast Filtering and Snooping CLI Commands CLI Command Description bridge multicast filtering no bridge multicast filtering Enables filtering of Multicast addresses. Use the no form of this command to disable multicast address filtering. ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Enables Internet Group Membership Protocol (IGMP) snooping. Use the no form of this command to disable IGMP snooping. console(config)# bridge multicast filtering console(config)# ip igmp snoopingDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 521 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Bridge Multicast Groups The Bridge Multicast Group: Summary page displays the ports and LAGs attached to a Multicast service group and the manner in which the port or LAG joined it. To add and configure a Multicast group: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Bridge Multicast Group in the tree view to display the Bridge Multicast Group: Summary page. Figure 16-2. Bridge Multicast Group: Summary The ports and LAGs in the selected Multicast Group are displayed.522 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Select a VLAN and enter the Multicast group IP address in Bridge Multicast Address. Two rows of ports and LAGs are displayed: for each unit – Static — Displays available static ports/LAGs. These port/LAGs can be included or excluded from the Multicast groups, as described below. – Current — Displays status of ports/LAGs in the Multicast group, as actually applied. 3 For each port in the VLAN, toggle to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this group. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN. 4 To add a new Multicast group, click Add, and enter the fields: – VLAN ID — Select the VLAN ID to set its forwarding method. – New Bridge IP Multicast — Enter a Multicast group IP address. – New Bridge MAC Multicast — Enter a Multicast group MAC address. – Ports — Select the ports to be added to a Multicast service. Toggle a port to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this service. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN. – LAGs — Select the LAGs to be added to a Multicast service. Toggle a LAG to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static LAG. Toggle a port to F to indicate that it is Forbidden to this service. Leave the field empty if it is not involved in the VLAN. The following table describes the codes used for the interface in this page: Table 16-2. IGMP Port/LAG Members Table Control Settings Port Control Definition S Attaches the port to the Multicast group as static member in the static row. The port/LAG has joined the Multicast group statically in the current row. F Forbidden. The port cannot belong to the Multicast group. Blank The port is not attached to a Multicast group, but it is also not forbidden.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 523 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Managing Bridge Multicast Groups Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for managing Multicast service members as displayed in the Bridge Multicast Group pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-3. Bridge Multicast Group CLI Commands CLI Command Description bridge multicast address {macmulticast-address|ip-multicastaddress} no bridge multicast filtering Registers MAC-layer Multicast addresses to the bridge table, and adds static ports to the group. Use the no form of this command to disable Multicast address filtering. bridge multicast forbidden address {mac-multicastaddress|ip-multicastaddress}[add|remove] {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] interface-list|portchannel LAG-number-list} no bridge multicast forbidden address {mac-multicast-address} Forbids adding a specific Multicast address to specific ports. Use the no form of this command to return to default Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show bridge multicast addresstable [vlan vlan-id] [address {mac-multicast-address|ipmulticast-address}] [format ip|mac] Displays Multicast MAC address table information. console(config-if)# bridge multicast address 0100.5e02.0203 add gi1/0/11,gi1/0/12 console(config-if)# end console # show bridge multicast address-table VLAN MAC Address Type Ports ---- ----------- ----- ---------- 1 0100.5e02.0203 static gi1/0/11, gigi1/0/12 Forbidden ports for multicast addresses:524 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN MAC Address Ports ---- ----------- ---------- 1 0100.5e02.0203 gi1/0/8 19 0100.5e02.0208 gi1/0/8 console # show bridge multicast address-table format ip VLAN IP Address Type Ports ---- ----------- ----- ---------- 1 224-239.130|2.2.3 static gi1/0/11, gi1/0/12 Forbidden ports for multicast addresses: VLAN IP Address Ports ---- ----------- ---------- 1 224-239.130|2.2.3 gi1/0/8Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 525 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Bridge Multicast Forward All Use the BridgeMulticast Forward All page to attach ports or LAGs to a device that is attached to a neighboring Multicast router/switch. After IGMP Snooping is enabled, Multicast packets are forwarded to the appropriate port or VLAN. To attach interfaces to a Multicast service: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Bridge Multicast Forward All in the tree view to display the Bridge Multicast Forward All page. Figure 16-3. Bridge Multicast Forward All 2 Select a unit/VLAN and click on the ports and LAGs to be attached to the Multicast service. Toggle a port to S to join the port to the selected Multicast group as a static port. Toggle a port to F to add it as a Forbidden port. Two rows of ports and LAGs are displayed:526 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Static — Displays available static ports/LAGs. These port/LAGs can be included or excluded from the Multicast groups, as described below. – Current — Displays status of ports/LAGs, as actually applied, in the Multicast group. Managing LAGs and Ports Attached to Multicast Routers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for managing LAGs and ports attached to Multicast routers as displayed on the Bridge Multicast Forward All page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-4. Managing LAGs and Ports Attached to Multicast Routers CLI Commands CLI Command Description show bridge multicast filtering vlan-id Displays the Multicast filtering configuration. bridge multicast forward-all {add|remove} {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet] interface-list|portchannel LAG-number-list} Enables forwarding of all Multicast packets on a port. Use the no form of this command to return to default. console(config)# interface vlan 1 console(config-if)# bridge multicast forward-all add gi1/0/3 console(config-if)# end console# show bridge multicast filtering 1 Filtering: Enabled VLAN: Forward-All Port Static Status ------- ----------------- ----------- gi1/0/11 Forbidden Filter gi1/0/12 Forward Forward(s) gi1/0/13 - Forward(d)Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 527 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping can be enabled globally, as described in the Global Parameters page. It can also be enabled per VLAN to support selective IPv4 Multicast forwarding. In this case, Bridge Multicast filtering must also be enabled. By default, a Layer 2 switch forwards Multicast frames to all ports of the relevant VLAN, essentially treating the frame as if it were a Broadcast. When IGMP Snooping is enabled per VLAN, the switch forwards Multicast frames to ports that have registered as Multicast clients in the VLAN. NOTE: The switch supports IGMP Snooping only on static VLANs. It does not support IGMP Snooping on dynamic VLANs.528 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The IGMP Snooping Querier is used to support a Layer 2 Multicast domain of snooping switches in the absence of a Multicast router, for example, where Multicast content is provided by a local server, but the router (if one exists) on that network does not support Multicast. There should only be a single IGMP Querier in a Layer 2 Multicast domain. The switch supports standards-based IGMP Querier election when more than one IGMP Querier is present in the domain. The speed of IGMP Querier activity should be aligned with the IGMPsnooping-enabled switches. Queries should be sent at a rate that is aligned to the snooping table aging time. If queries are sent at a rate lower than the aging time, the subscriber cannot receive the Multicast packets. To enable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching Multicast Support IGMP Snooping in the tree view to display the IGMP Snooping page. Figure 16-4. IGMP Snooping The IGMP snooping information for the VLANs on the switch is displayed. 2 To enable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN, click Edit and select the VLAN from the VLAN ID drop down menu.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 529 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Enter the fields: • IGMP Snooping Status — Enable/disable the monitoring of network traffic to determine which hosts have asked to be sent Multicast traffic. The switch performs IGMP snooping only if IGMP snooping and Bridge Multicast filtering are both globally enabled. • Operational IGMP Snooping Status — Displays whether IGMP Snooping is enabled. • MRouter Ports Auto Learn — Enables or disables auto learning of the ports to which the Mrouter is connected. • Query Robustness (1-7) — Enter the Robustness variable value to be used. The Robustness value enables tuning for the expected packet loss on a link. If a link is expected to have losses, the Robustness Value may be increased. • Operational Query Robustness — Displays the robustness variable sent by the elected querier. • Query Interval (30-18000) — Enter the interval between general queries sent by the querier . • Operational Query Interval — The time interval in seconds between general queries sent by the elected querier • Query Max Response Interval (5-20) — Enter the amount of time in which a host should respond to a query. • Operational Query Max Response Interval — Displays the actual delay. • Last Member Query Counter (1-7) — Enter the number of IGMP group-specific queries sent before the switch assumes there are no local members. To use the default, check Use Default. • Operational Last Member Query Counter — Displays the operational value of the Last Member Query counter. • Last Member Query Interval (100-25500)— Enter the time between two consecutive group-specific queries that are sent by the querier. • Operational Last Member Query Interval— Displays the Last Member Query Interval sent by the elected querier. • Intermediate Leave — Enable/disable an immediate timeout period. The default timeout is 10 seconds.530 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • IGMP Querier Status — Enables or disables the IGMP Querier. The IGMP Querier simulates the behavior of a Multicast router, enabling snooping of the Layer 2 Multicast domain even though there is no Multicast router. • Querier Source IP Address — Select the IP address of the IGMP Querier. Use either the VLAN’s IP address or define a unique IP address that will be used as a source address of the querier. • Operational Source Querier IP Address — Operational Querier IP address. Configuring IGMP Snooping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring IGMP snooping on a VLAN: Table 16-5. IGMP Snooping CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid Enables IGMP snooping on a specific VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface. ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter learn pim-dvmrp no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid mrouter learn pim-dvmrp Enables automatic learning of Multicast router ports in the context of a specific VLAN. Use the no form of this command to remove the configuration. ip igmp robustness count no ip igmp robustness Changes the value of the IGMP robustness variable. Use the no format of the command to return to default. ip igmp query-interval seconds no ip igmp query-interval Configures the Query interval. Use the no format of the command to return to default.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 531 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY ip igmp query-max-responsetime seconds no ip igmp query-max-responsetime Configures the Query Maximum Response time. Use the no format of the command to return to default. ip igmp last-member-querycount count no ip igmp last-member-querycount Configures the Last Member Query Counter. Use the no format of the command to return to default. ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid immediate-leave Enables the IGMP Snooping Immediate-Leave processing on a VLAN. Use the no format of the command to disable IGMP Snooping ImmediateLeave processing. ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id querier no ip igmp snooping vlan vlanid querier Enables the IGMP querier on a specific VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable the IGMP querier on a VLAN interface. ip igmp snooping querier address source-ip-address no ip igmp snooping querier address Defines the source IP address that the IGMP Snooping querier would use. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show ip igmp snooping groups [vlan vlan-id] [address ipmulticast-address] Displays the Multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping. show ip igmp snooping interface vlan-id Displays IGMP snooping configuration. show ip igmp snooping mrouter [interface vlan-id] Displays information about dynamically learned Multicast router interfaces. Table 16-5. IGMP Snooping CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description532 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console (config)# ip igmp snooping console (config)# interface vlan 1 console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping mrouter learn-pim-dvmrp console (config)# interface vlan 1 console (config-if)# ip igmp snooping leave-time-out 60 console # do show ip igmp snooping groups VLAN IP Address Querier Ports ---- ---------- ------ ---------------------- 1 224-239.130 |2.2.3 Yes gi1/0/1, gi1/0/2 console # show ip igmp snooping interface 1 IGMP Snooping is globaly disabled IGMP Snooping admin: Enabled IGMP Snooping oper mode: Disabled Routers IGMP version: 3 IGMP snooping querier admin: disabled IGMP snooping querier oper: disabled IGMP snooping querier address admin: IGMP snooping querier address oper: 10.5.234.232 IGMP snooping robustness: admin 2 oper 2 IGMP snooping query interval: admin 125 sec oper 125 sec IGMP snooping query maximum response: admin 10 sec oper 10 sec IGMP snooping last member query counter: admin 2 oper 2 IGMP snooping last member query interval: admin 1000 msec oper 1000 msec IGMP snooping last immediate leave: disable Automatic learning of Multicast router ports is enabledDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 533 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Unregistered Multicast Multicast frames are generally forwarded to all ports in the VLAN. If IGMP Snooping is enabled, the device learns about the existence of Multicast groups and tracks which ports have joined what Multicast group. Multicast groups can also be statically enabled. This enables the device to forward the Multicast frames (from a registered Multicast group) only to ports that are registered to that Multicast group. Traffic from unregistered Multicast groups, which are the groups that are not known to the device, can either be filtered or forwarded. After a port has been set to Forwarding/Filtering, its configuration is valid for any VLAN of which it is a member (or will be a member of). To set the action for unregistered Multicast groups on a port: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Unregistered Multicast in the tree view to display the Unregistered Multicast: Summary page. Figure 16-5. Unregistered Multicast: Summary534 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The action for each port is displayed. 2 To modify the forwarding action for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields. • Interface — Select a port or LAG. • Unregistered Multicast — Select the forwarding status of the selected interface. The possible options are: • Forwarding — Enables forwarding of unregistered Multicast frames on the selected port or port-channel. • Filtering — Enables filtering of unregistered Multicast frames on the selected VLAN interface. Configuring Unregistered Multicast Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring Unregistered Multicast on the device: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-6. Unregistered Multicast CLI Commands CLI Command Description bridge multicast unregistered Configures the forwarding state of unregistered multicast addresses. show bridge multicast unregistered Displays the unregistered multicast filtering configuration. console # show bridge multicast unregistered Port Unregistered ------- -------- gi1/0/1 Forward gi1/0/2 Filter gi1/0/3 FilterDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 535 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast TV VLAN This section describes the Multicast TV VLAN feature. It contains the following sections: • Multicast TV VLAN Overview • Multicast TV VLAN Membership • Multicast TV VLAN Mapping Multicast TV VLAN Overview The Multicast TV VLAN feature provides the ability to supply Multicast transmissions to Layer 2-isolated subscribers, without replicating the Multicast transmissions for all subscriber VLANs. The subscribers are the only receivers of the Multicast transmissions. • A Multicast TV VLAN can be defined for an Access port (a port that is in Access mode for VLAN membership). • All static VLANs are permitted to be a Multicast-TV VLAN. • The configuration is performed per port. One or more IP Multicast address groups can be associated with a Multicast VLAN. The source port must belong to the Multicast VLAN. Source and receiver ports do not have to be members of the same VLAN. An end port is defined as a receiver port for the Multicast VLAN. Receiving ports can belong to a single user VLAN and additionally to one Multicast VLAN. The receiver port can be an access member in any VLAN, but not in the defined Multicast VLAN. In Multicast VLAN, the receiver port can only receive traffic and not send traffic on it. Receivers of same Multicast VLAN are isolated in different User (Access port) VLANs and therefore isolated from each other. If a Multicast-TV VLAN is defined on an access port, then: • The access port joins the Multicast-TV VLAN. • The Multicast-TV VLAN on the receiver port is always untagged. • The acceptable frame type of the port is set to Admit Untagged Only.536 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast TV VLAN Membership To view Multicast TV VLANs: • Click Switching > Multicast Support > Multicast TV VLAN Membership in the tree view to display the Multicast TV VLAN Membership page. Figure 16-6. Multicast TV VLAN Membership The receiver and transceiver ports in the selected TV VLAN are displayed. Displaying Multicast TV VLAN Membership Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for displaying Multicast TV VLAN membership: Table 16-7. Multicast TV VLAN Membership CLI Commands CLI Command Description show vlan multicast-tv vlan vlan-id Displays information on the source ports and receiver ports of multicast-TV VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 537 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: Multicast TV VLAN Mapping To set the Multicast Group IP address for a TV VLAN: 1 Click Switching > Multicast Support > Multicast TV VLAN Mapping in the tree view to display the Multicast TV VLAN Mapping: Summary page. Figure 16-7. Multicast TV VLAN Mapping: Summary The Multicast Group IP addresses for the selected TV VLAN are displayed. 2 To add the Multicast Group IP address for a VLAN, click Add, and enter the fields: • VLAN ID — Enter a VLAN ID. console # show vlan multicast-tv vlan 1 Source Ports ------------------------------------- gi1/0/8, gi1/0/9 Receiver Ports ------------------------------------- gi2/0/1-18, gi3/0/1-18, gi4/0/1-18538 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Multicast Group IP Address — Enter the Multicast group IP address for which the IGMP Snooping is enabled. Mapping Multicast TV VLANs to IP Addresses Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI command for mapping Multicast TV VLANs to Multicast IP addresses: The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 16-8. Unregistered Multicast CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id multicast-tv ip-multicast-address [count number] no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id multicast-tv ip-multicast-address [count number] Defines the Multicast IP addresses that are associated with a Multicast-TV VLAN. Use the no form of this command to remove all associations. show ip igmp snooping multicast-tv [vlan vlan-id] Displays the IP addresses associated with Multicast TV VLANs. console# show ip igmp snooping multicast-tv VLAN IP Address ---- ----------- 1000 239.255.0.0 1000 239.255.0.1 1000 239.255.0.2 1000 239.255.0.3 1000 239.255.0.4 1000 239.255.0.5Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 539 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_Multicast.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY540 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 17 LLDP The section describes the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). It contains the following topics: • LLDP Overview • LLDP Properties • LLDP Port Settings • MED Network Policy • LLDP MED Port Settings • Neighbors InformationDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 541 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP Overview The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables network managers to troubleshoot and enhance network management by discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. LLDP discovers network neighbors by standardizing methods for network devices to advertise themselves to other systems, and to store discovered information. Discovery information includes: • Device identification • Device capabilities • Device configuration The advertising device transmits multiple advertisement message sets in a single LAN packet. The multiple advertisement message sets are sent in the packet’s Type Length Value (TLV) field. LLDP devices must support chassis and port ID advertisements, as well as system name, system ID, system description, and system capability advertisements. LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) increases network flexibility by enabling various IP systems to co-exist on a single network, and provides the following features: • Detailed network topology information, including information on which devices are located on the network and where the devices are located, for example, which IP phone is connect to which port, which software is running on which switch, and which port is connected to which device. • Automatic deployment of policies over networks for: – QoS Policies – Voice VLANs • Emergency Call Service (E-911) via IP phone location information. • Troubleshooting information. LLDP MED sends network managers alerts for: – Port speed and duplex mode conflicts – QoS policy misconfigurations542 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP Properties To enable and configure LLDP: 1 Click System > LLDP > LLDP Properties in the tree view to display the LLDP Properties page. Figure 17-1. LLDP Properties The current LLDP properties are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Enable LLDP — Enable/disable LLDP on the device. – Updates Interval (5-32768) — Enter the rate at which LLDP advertisement updates are sent. – Hold Multiplier (2-10) — Enter the hold time to be sent in the LLDP update packets, as a multiple of the timer value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 543 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Reinitializing Delay (1-10) — Enter the minimum time, in seconds, that an LLDP port waits before reinitializing LLDP transmission. – Transmit Delay (1-8192) — Enter the amount of time that passes between successive LLDP frame transmissions, due to changes in the LLDP local systems MIB. To use the default values for any field, select Use Default.544 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring LLDP Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to set the fields in the LLDP Properties page. Table 17-1. LLDP Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp run no lldp run Enables enable LLDP. Use the no form of this command to disable LLDP. lldp timer seconds no lldp timer Specifies how often the software sends LLDP updates. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. lldp hold-multiplier number no lldp hold-multiplier Specifies the time that the receiving device should hold a Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) packet before discarding it. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. lldp reinit seconds no lldp reinit Specifies the minimum time an LLDP port will wait before reinitializing. Use the no form of this command to revert to the default setting. lldp tx-delay seconds no lldp tx-delay Specifies the delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 545 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# lldp run console(config)# lldp timer 30 console(config)# lldp hold-multiplier 3 console(config)# lldp reinit 4546 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP Port Settings LLDP configuration of a port includes activating LLDP notification on it, and selecting the optional TLVs that will be sent in the LLDP PDU, in addition to the mandatory ones. By setting these properties, it is possible to provide additional types of information to those network devices that support the LLDP. To configure LLDP per port: 1 Click System > LLDP > LLDP Port Settings in the tree view to display the LLDP Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 17-2. LLDP Port Settings: Summary LLDP settings for all ports are displayed. 2 To modify the LLDP settings for a port, click Edit and select the port to be configured. 3 Select the transmission type on which LLDP is to be configured in the State field. The possible options are: • Tx Only — Enables LLDP on transmitting LLDP packets only. • Rx Only — Enables LLDP on receiving LLDP packets only. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 547 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Tx & Rx — Enables LLDP on transmitting and receiving LLDP packets. • Disable — LLDP is disabled on the port. 4 Move the optional TLVs that the switch should advertise from the Available TLV list to the Optional TLV list. The TLVs advertise the following: – Port Description — Information about the port, including manufacturer, product name, and hardware/software version. – System Name — System's assigned name (in alpha-numeric format). This value equals the sysName object. – System Description — Description of the network entity (in alphanumeric format). This includes the system's name and versions of the hardware, operating system, and networking software supported by the switch. This value equals the sysDescr object. – System Capabilities — Primary functions of the switch, and whether or not these functions are enabled in the switch. The capabilities are indicated by two octets. Bits 0 through 7 indicate Other, Repeater, Bridge, WLAN AP, Router, Telephone, DOCSIS cable device, and station respectively. Bits 8 through 15 are reserved. – 802.3 MAC-PHY — Duplex and bit rate capability and the current duplex and bit rate settings of the sending device. It also advertises whether the current settings are due to auto-negotiation or manual configuration. An alternative way to select the TLVs is to select the Use Default field, in which case only mandatory TLVs are used. These are: Chassis subtype (MAC address), Port subtype (port number), and TTL (time-to-leave). 5 Enter the Management IP Address that is advertised from the interface. Check Use Default to use the default Management IP address.548 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring LLDP Port Settings Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to configure LLDP on ports. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 17-2. LLDP Port Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp transmit no lldp transmit Enables transmitting LLDP on an interface. Use the no form of this command to stop transmitting LLDP on an interface. lldp receive no lldp receive Enables receiving LLDP on an interface. Use the no form of this command to stop receiving LLDP on an interface. lldp optional-tlv tlv1 [tlv2 … tlv5] Specifies which optional TLVs from the basic set should be transmitted console(config)# interface gi1/0/1 console(config-if)# lldp transmit console(config-if)# lldp receive console(config-if)# lldp optional-tlv port-descDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 549 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY MED Network Policy An LLDP-MED network policy is a set of configuration settings that is identified by a network policy number. Policies are loaded into LLDP-MED TLVs, and sent to devices connected to the switch. A network policy instructs the connected device as to how to send traffic, for example, a policy can be created for VoIP phones that instructs them to: • Send voice traffic on VLAN 10 • Tag voice traffic with DSCP=63 • Transmit data-traffic to the switch (from the PC connected to the switch through the VoIP phone) without modification to traffic sent by the PC (typically, Untagged). For network policies to be implemented, they must be created and then associated with ports. Before policies are defined, the administrator must create the VLANs, and configure memberships in the VLANs, based on the specification in the LLDP-MED network policies. 550 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To add a MED network policy: 1 Click System > LLDP > MED Network Policy in the tree view to display the MED Network Policy: Summary page. Figure 17-3. MED Network Policy: Summary Previously-defined network policies are displayed. 2 To add a network policy, click Add, and enter the fields: – Network Policy Number — Select an available network policy number. – Application — Select the application (type of traffic) for which the network policy is defined. – VLAN ID — Enter the VLAN ID to which the traffic should be sent. – VLAN Type —Select whether the traffic is Tagged or Untagged.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 551 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – User Priority — Select the traffic priority assigned to the network application. – DSCP Value — Select the value to be used by neighbors to mark the traffic sent to the switch. Configuring MED Network Policies Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to configure MED network policies. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 17-3. LLDP MED Network Policies CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp med network-policy number application [vlan id] [vlan-type {tagged|untagged}] [up priority][dscp value] no lldp med network-policy number Defines an LLDP MED network policy. Use the no form of this command to remove an LLDP MED network policy. console(config)# lldp med network-policy 1 voice-signaling vlan 1552 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY LLDP MED Port Settings To assign MED network policies to ports: 1 Click System > LLDP > MED Port Settings in the tree view to display the MED Port Settings: Summary page. Figure 17-4. MED Port Settings: Summary 2 Select the unit in the stack. All ports on that unit are displayed along with the following fields: – LLDP MED Status — Specifies if LLDP-MED is enabled on the selected port. – Network Policy — Specifies whether a network policy is assigned to the port. – Location — Specifies whether the location is advertised. – PoE — Specifies whether PoE is enabled on the port. 3 To modify network policies on a port, click Edit. 4 Select the port to be configured, and enter the fields for the port: – Enable LLDP-MED — Enable/disable LLDP-MED on the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 553 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Available TLVs — Contains a list of available TLVs that can be advertised by the port. The possible options are: • Network Policy — Advertises the network policy attached to the port. • Location — Advertises the port’s location. • PoE-PSE — Indicates if the connected media is a PoE or PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment) device. Move the TLVs to be published to the Tx Optional TLVs list. – Available Network Policy — Contains a list of network policies that can be assigned to a port. Move the network policies to be assigned to the port to the Network Policy list. – Location Coordinate (16 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s location map coordinates. – Location Civic Address (6-160 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s civic or street address location, for example 414 23rd Ave E. – Location ECS ELIN (10-25 Bytes in Hex) — Displays the device’s ECS ELIN location. 5 To view MED details for a port, click Details and select a port. The following fields are displayed for the port: – Auto-Negotiation Status — Enabled specifies that auto-negotiation is enabled on the port; Disabled indicates that it is not. – Advertised Capabilities — The list of port capabilities advertised for the port. – MAU Type — The Media Attachment Unit type. The MAU performs physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interfaces' collision detection and bit injection into the network, for example, 100BASE-TX full duplex mode. – System Name — The system's assigned name (in alpha-numeric format). This value equals the sysName object. – System Description — A description of the network entity (in alphanumeric format). This includes the system's name and versions of the hardware, operating system, and networking software supported by the switch. This value equals the sysDescr object. 554 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Device ID — The device ID advertised, for example, the device MAC address. – Device Type — The type of device. – LLDP MED Capabilities — The TLVs that are advertised by the port. – LLDP MED Device Type — Specifies whether a sender is a network connectivity device or an endpoint device. – Application — The following fields are displayed for each possible application type: • Application Type — The application type. • Flags — The VLAN tagging status for the application type: Tagged or Untagged. • VLAN ID — The VLAN number for the application type. • User Priority — The user priority for the application type. • DSCP — The DSCP value assigned to the network policy. – Location Type — Displays the port’s LLDP location type: • Coordinates— Device’s location map coordinates. • Civic Address — Device’s civic or street address location, for example 414 23rd Ave E. • ECS ELIN — Device’s ECS ELIN location. – Location Address — Displays the port’s LLDP location, according to the Location Type.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 555 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring MED on Ports Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to set the fields in the MED Port Settings pages. Table 17-4. LLDP Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description lldp med enable [tlv … tlv4] no lldp med enable Enables LLDP MED on an interface. Use the no form of this command to disable LLDP MED on an interface. lldp med network-policy {add|remove} number no lldp med network-policy number Attaches or removes an LLDP MED network policy on an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove all the LLDP MED network policies from the interface lldp med location {{coordinate data}|{civicaddress data}|{ecs-elin data}} no lldp med location {coordinate|civicaddress|ecs-elin} configure the LLDP MED for an interface. Use the no form of this command to delete location information for an interface. show lldp med configuration [gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number Displays the LLDP MED configuration for all interfaces or for a specific interface. show lldp local [gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number Displays the LLDP information that is advertised from a specific port.556 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# interface gi1/0/3 console(config)# lldp med location civic-address 6162636465 console# show lldp med configuration Fast Start Repeat Count: 4. Network policy 1 ------------------- Application type: voiceSignaling VLAN ID: 1 untagged Layer 2 priority: 0 DSCP: 0 Port Capabilities Network Location PoE Notif Inventory Policy ications --------- -------------- ---------------- ---------- ------ gi1/0/1 Yes Yes Yes No Enabled No gi1/0/2 Yes Yes No No Enabled NoDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 557 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Neighbors Information Use the Neighbors Information page to view information that was received in LLDP advertisements from neighboring devices. The neighbor’s information is deleted after timeout. Timeout is the maximum interval that can pass without receiving an LLDP PDU from a neighbor. The timeout value is computed from the neighbor’s Time to Live TLV. To view neighbors information: 1 Click System > LLDP > Neighbors Information in the tree view to display the Neighbors Information page. Figure 17-5. Neighbors Information The following fields are displayed for each port on the device that has a discovered neighbor: – Port — Port number for which neighboring information is displayed 558 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Device ID — Neighboring device ID – System Name — Name of the neighboring system – Port ID — Neighboring port ID – Capabilities — Neighboring device capabilities 2 Click Clear Neighbors Table to delete all the entries or select Remove to delete a specific port entry. 3 Click the Details button of a port to display the Neighbors Information: Details page for that port. In addition to the fields displayed in the MED Port Settings: Details Advertise Information page and the Green Ethernet Configuration pages, the following fields are displayed for the neighbors of the selected port: – Power Type — Port’s power type – Power Source — Port’s power source – Power Priority — Port’s power priority – Power Value — Port’s power value, in Watts – Hardware revision — Hardware revision – Firmware revision — Firmware revision – Software revision — Software revision – Serial number — Device serial number – Manufacturer name — Device manufacturer name – Model name — Device model name – Asset ID — Asset ID Configuring LLDP Neighbors Using CLI Commands The following commands are used to configure LLDP neighbors. Table 17-5. LLDP Neighbors Information CLI Commands CLI Command Description show lldp neighbors [gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number Displays information about neighboring devices discovered using LLDPDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 559 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_LLDP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show lldp neighbors Port Device ID Port ID System Capabili TTL Name ties --------- ----------------- -------- ------- ------- ---- gi2/0/17 00:75:73:71:72:55 1/e21 0 91 gi2/0/33 00:12:cf:7c:63:a0 1/e1 0 92 gi2/0/33 00:11:22:11:22:33 1/g39 0 107 gi2/0/33 00:aa:aa:aa:aa:aa 1/e37 0 106 gi2/0/41 a4:ba:db:57:7c:8d g13 O 97560 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 18 Dynamic ARP Inspection This section describes dynamic ARP inspection. It contains the following topics: • Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview • Global Settings • Dynamic ARP Inspection List • Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries • VLAN Settings • Trusted InterfacesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 561 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview ARP Inspection eliminates man-in-the-middle attacks, where false ARP packets are inserted into the subnet. ARP requests and responses are inspected, and their MAC-address-to-IP-address binding is checked according to the ARP Inspection List defined by the user (in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List and Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries pages). If the packet’s IP address was not found in the ARP Inspection List, and DHCP Snooping is enabled for a VLAN, a search of the DHCP Snooping database is performed. See "How DHCP Snooping Works" on page 573 for an explanation of the DHCP Snooping database. If the IP address is found the packet is valid, and is forwarded. Packets with invalid ARP Inspection bindings are logged and dropped. Ports are classified as follows: • Trusted — Packets are not inspected. • Untrusted —Packets are inspected as described above. The following additional validation checks may be configured by the user: • Source MAC — Compares the packet’s source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender’s MAC address in the ARP request. This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses. • Destination MAC — Compares the packet’s destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the destination interface’s MAC address. This check is performed for ARP responses. • IP Addresses — Compares the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses. Addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP Multicast addresses. 562 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Settings To enable ARP inspection on the device: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 18-1. Global Settings 2 Enter the fields: • Enable ARP Inspection — Enable/disable ARP inspection. • ARP Inspection Validate — Enable/disable the following checking source MAC address, destination MAC address and IP addresses against the respective addresses in the ARP body. • Minimal Syslog Interval (0 – 86400) — Enter the minimum time interval between successive ARP SYSLOG messages. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 563 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Setting Dynamic ARP Inspection Global Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Global Settings pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-1. ARP Inspection Global Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection no ip arp inspection Enables ARP inspection. Use the no form of this command to disable ARP inspection. ip arp inspection validate no ip arp inspection validate Performs specific checks for dynamic ARP inspection. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. ip arp inspection logging interval {seconds | infinite} no ip arp inspection logging interval Sets the minimum time interval between successive ARP SYSLOG messages. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# ip arp inspection console(config)# ip arp inspection validate564 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic ARP Inspection List An ARP inspection list consists of entries where each entry is a pair of MAC/IP addresses. To create a new ARP inspection list and add the first entry to it: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection > Dynamic ARP Inspection List in the tree view to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection List: Summary page. Figure 18-2. Dynamic ARP Inspection List: Summary The dynamic ARP lists are displayed. 2 To create a new list and enter the first address pair in it, click Add, and enter the fields: • List Name — Create and enter a list name. • IP Address — Enter the IP address that will be mapped to the MAC address entered below. • MAC Address — Enter the MAC address that will be mapped to the IP address entered above.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 565 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Creating a Dynamic ARP Inspection List Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-2. Dynamic ARP Inspection List CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection list create name no ip arp inspection list create name Creates a static ARP binding list and enters the ARP list configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete the list. console(config)# ip arp inspection list create servers console(config-ARP-list)#566 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries To add additional addresses to the lists defined in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List page: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries in the tree view to display the Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries: Summary page. Figure 18-3. Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries: Summary The dynamic ARP entries for the selected list are displayed. 2 To add a new address pair to a list, click Add and select the list. 3 Enter the fields: • IP Address — Enter the IP address that will be mapped to the MAC address entered below. • MAC Address — Enter the MAC address that will be mapped to the IP address entered above.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 567 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Adding Entries to a Dynamic ARP Inspection List Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-3. Dynamic ARP Inspection List Entries CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip ip-address mac-address mac-address no ip ip-address mac-address mac-address Creates a static ARP binding. Use the no form of this command to delete a static ARP binding.. show ip arp inspection list Displays the static ARP binding list. console(config)# ip arp inspection list create servers console(config-arp-list)# ip 172.16.1.1 mac-address 0060.704c.7321 console(config-arp-list)# ip 172.16.1.2 mac-address 0060.704c.7322 console(config-arp-list)# do show ip arp inspection list List name: servers Assigned to VLANs: IP MAC --------------- ------------------ 172.16.1.1 00:60:70:4c:73:21 172.16.1.2 00:60:70:4c:73:22 console(config-arp-list)#568 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Settings To assign a list of IP/MAC address pairs, defined in the Dynamic ARP Inspection List pages, to a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > Dynamic ARP Inspection Entries > VLAN Settings in the tree view to display the VLAN Settings: Summary page. Figure 18-4. VLAN Settings: Summary The VLANs and their associated lists of IP/MAC address pairs are displayed. 2 To designate a VLAN to be associated with an ARP inspection list, click Add VLAN and enter the VLAN ID. 3 Click Assign and select the List Name to be associated with the VLAN.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 569 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Assigning IP/MAC Address Pairs to VLANs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the VLAN Settings pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-4. Assigning IP/MAC Address Pairs to VLANs CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection vlan vlanid Enables ARP inspection on a VLAN, based on the DHCP Snooping database. Use the no form of this command to disable ARP inspection on a VLAN. ip arp inspection list assign vlan-id name no ip arp inspection list assign vlan Assigns a static ARP binding list to a VLAN. Use the no form of this command to delete the assignment. console(config)# ip arp inspection list assign 37 servers570 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Trusted Interfaces Interfaces are untrusted if the packet is received from an interface outside the network or from an interface beyond the network firewall. Trusted interfaces receive packets only from within the network or the network firewall. To configure an interface to be trusted: 1 Click Switching Dynamic ARP Inspection Trusted Interface in the tree view to display the Trusted Interface: Summary page. Figure 18-5. Trusted Interface: Summary The ports on the selected unit and their trusted status are displayed. 2 To modify the status of an interface, click Edit. 3 Select the interface and enable/disable its Trust Status, which is the DHCP Snooping Trust mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 571 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_ARP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Trusted Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the fields in the Trusted Interface pages. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 18-5. Configuring Trusted Interface Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip arp inspection trust no ip arp inspection trust Configures an interface trust state that determines if incoming ARP packets are inspected. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. show ip arp inspection [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays the ARP inspection configuration for all interfaces or a specific interface. console(config)# interface gi1/0/3 console(config-if)# ip arp inspection trust572 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 19 DHCP Snooping This section describes DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay features. It contains the following topics: • DHCP Snooping • DHCP RelayDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 573 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Snooping This section describes DHCP snooping. It contains the following topics: • DHCP Snooping Overview • Global Parameters • VLAN Settings • Trusted Interfaces • Snooping Binding Database DHCP Snooping Overview DHCP snooping expands network security by providing layer security between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. By enabling DHCP snooping, network administrators can differentiate between trusted interfaces connected to end-users or DHCP Servers, and untrusted interfaces located beyond the network firewall. How DHCP Snooping Works DHCP snooping filters untrusted messages, and stores these messages in a database. Interfaces are untrusted if the packet is received from an interface outside the network, or from an interface beyond the network firewall. Trusted interfaces receive packets only from within the network or the network firewall. The DHCP Snooping Binding database contains the untrusted interfaces’ MAC address, IP address, Lease Time, VLAN ID, and interface information. Table 19-1 describes how DHCP packets are handled when DHCP snooping is enabled on an interface. Table 19-1. DHCP Packet Handling when DHCP Snooping is Enabled Packet Type Arriving from Untrusted Ingress Interface Arriving from Trusted Ingress Interface DHCPDISCOVER Forward to trusted interfaces only. Forwarded to trusted interfaces only.574 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCPOFFER Filter. Forward the packet according to DHCP information. If the destination address is unknown the packet is filtered. DHCPREQUEST Forward to trusted interfaces only. Forward to trusted interfaces only. DHCPACK Filter. Same as DHCPOFFER and an entry is added to the Binding database. DHCPNAK Filter. Same as DHCPOFFER. Remove entry if exists. DHCPDECLINE Check if there is information in the database. If the information exists and does not match the interface on which the message was received, the packet is filtered. Otherwise the packet is forwarded to trusted interfaces only, and the entry is removed from database. Forward to trusted interfaces only DHCPRELEASE Same as DHCPDECLINE. Same as DHCPDECLINE. DHCPINFORM Forward to trusted interfaces only. Forward to trusted interfaces only. DHCPLEASEQUERY Filtered. Forward. Table 19-1. DHCP Packet Handling when DHCP Snooping is Enabled (Continued) Packet Type Arriving from Untrusted Ingress Interface Arriving from Trusted Ingress InterfaceDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 575 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY As shown in Table 19-1, the DHCP Snooping Binding database is updated by interception of DHCPACK, DHCPDECLINE and DHCPRELEASE packets, and is stored in non-volatile memory. Even if a port is down, its entries are not deleted. NOTE: Only DHCP requests on untrusted ports are maintained in the Binding database. Limitations The following limitations apply: • Enabling DHCP snooping uses TCAM resources. • The switch writes changes to the binding database only when the switch system clock is synchronized with SNTP. • The switch does not update the Binding database when a station moves to another interface. Global Parameters Use the Global Parameters page to: • Enable/disable DHCP snooping globally. • Determine whether to forward or filter DHCP packets received from untrusted interfaces, whose source MAC address and the DHCP client MAC address do not match. • Determine whether to forward or filter DHCP packets, received from untrusted interfaces, with option-82 information. • Set Binding database update interval.576 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure DHCP snooping on the device: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 19-1. Global Parameters 2 Enable/disable DHCP snooping on the device in the DHCP Snooping Status field. 3 If DHCP snooping is enabled, enter the fields: – Option 82 Passthrough — Enable/disable whether to forward (enable) or filter (disable) DHCP packets, received from untrusted interfaces, with option-82 information. – Verify MAC Address — Enable/disable MAC addresses verification. This determines whether to forward (enable) or filter (disable) DHCP packets received from untrusted interfaces, whose source MAC address and the DHCP client MAC address do not match. – Save Binding Database to File — Enable/disable saving the DHCP snooping database to flash memory. – Save Binding Database Internal(600-86400) — Enter how often, in seconds, the Binding database is updated. Configuring DHCP Snooping Global Parameters Using CLI CommandsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 577 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP snooping global parameters. Table 19-2. DHCP Snooping Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping no ip dhcp snooping Globally enables DHCP snooping. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted no ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted Allows a device to accept DHCP packets with option-82 information from an untrusted port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. ip dhcp snooping verify no ip dhcp snooping verify Configures the switch to verify on an untrusted port that the source MAC address in a DHCP packet matches the client hardware address. Use the no form of this command to configure the switch to not verify the MAC addresses. ip dhcp snooping database no ip dhcp snooping database Configures the DHCP snooping binding file. Use the no form of this command to delete the binding file. ip dhcp snooping database update-freq seconds no ip dhcp snooping database update-freq Configures the update frequency of the DHCP snooping binding file. Use the no form of this command to return to default. show ip dhcp snooping [[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number] Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.578 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: console(config)# ip dhcp snooping console(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option allowed-untrusted console(config)# ip dhcp snooping verify console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database frequency 1200 console# show ip dhcp snooping DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP snooping database: enabled Option 82 on untrusted port is allowed Verification of hwaddr field is enabled DHCP snooping file update frequency is configured to: 1200 seconds Interface Trusted --------- ---------- gi2/0/1 yes gi2/0/2 yesDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 579 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY VLAN Settings To separate ports in a VLAN, enable DHCP snooping on it. Before you enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN, you must globally enable DHCP snooping on the device. When DHCP snooping is disabled for a VLAN, the Binding entries that were collected for that VLAN are removed from the Binding database. To enable/disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > VLAN Settings in the tree view to display the VLAN Settings page. Figure 19-2. VLAN Settings The list of existing VLANs are displayed in the VLAN ID list. 2 Click Add to move the VLANs, for which you want to enable DHCP snooping, from the VLAN ID list to the Enabled VLANs list. To remove a VLAN, click Remove to move it from the Enabled VLANs list to the VLAN ID list.580 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DHCP Snooping on VLANs Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP snooping on VLANs . The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Table 19-3. DHCP Snooping on VLANs CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id no ip dhcp snooping vlan-id Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. console(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 581 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Trusted Interfaces To define a trusted interface: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Trusted Interface in the tree view to display the Trusted Interface: Summary page. Figure 19-3. Trusted Interfaces: Summary A list of the interfaces is displayed. 2 To change the trust status of an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select a unit and port or LAG. – Trust Status — Enable/disable DHCP Snooping Trust mode on the selected port or LAG. 582 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring DHCP snooping trusted interfaces. The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: Snooping Binding Database Entries in the DHCP Snooping Binding database consist of pairs of MAC/IP addresses. In addition to the entries added by DHCP snooping, entries to the Snooping Binding database can be manually added or deleted. These entries are added to the Snooping Binding database and Snooping Binding file, if it exists, but they are not added to the configuration files. A manually-added entry can be either dynamic or a static. When configuring a dynamic entry, an expiration date must be assigned. The refresh time (in seconds) of the binding table is added in the Global Parameters pages. Table 19-4. DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping trust no ip dhcp snooping trust Configures an interface as trusted for DHCP snooping purposes. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting. console(config)# interface gi1/0/5 console(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trustDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 583 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To query and add IP addresses to the Binding database: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Snooping > Binding Database in the tree view to display the Binding Database: Summary page. Figure 19-4. Binding Database A list of the database entries is displayed. 2 To query the database, enter query criteria and click Query. Database entries matching the query are displayed. 3 To add a entry, click Add, and enter the fields: – Type — Select the entry type. The possible options are: • Static —IP address was statically configured. • Dynamic —IP address was dynamically configured. – MAC Address — Enter the MAC address to be recorded in the entry. 584 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – VLAN ID — Select the VLAN ID to which the IP address is associated in the entry. – IP Address — Enter the IP address to be recorded in the entry. – Interface — Select the unit and port or LAG to be recorded in the entry. – Lease Time — If the entry is dynamic, enter the amount of time that the entry will be active in the DHCP Database. If there is no Lease Time, check Infinite. Configuring DHCP Snooping Binding Database Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring the DHCP Snooping Binding database. Table 19-5. DHCP Snooping Binding Database CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp snooping database no ip dhcp snooping database Enables the DHCP Snooping binding database file. Use the no form of this command to delete the DHCP Snooping binding database file. ip dhcp snooping database updatefreq seconds no ip dhcp snooping database update-freq Enables the DHCP Snooping binding database file. Use the no form of this command to delete the DHCP Snooping binding database file. ip dhcp snooping binding macaddress vlan-id ip-address [gigabitethernet|tengigabitethern et] port-number|port-channel LAGnumber] expiry {seconds|infinite} no ip dhcp snooping binding macaddress vlan-id Configures the DHCP snooping binding database and adds binding entries to the database. Use the no form of this command to delete entries from the binding database. clear ip dhcp snooping database Clears the DHCP binding database.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 585 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of some of the CLI commands: show ip dhcp snooping binding [mac-address mac-address] [ipaddress ip-address] [vlan vlanid][[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] port-number|port-channel LAG-number]] Displays the DHCP snooping binding database and configuration information for all interfaces or some interfaces on a switch. console(config)# ip dhcp snooping database console(config)# ip dhcp snooping update-freq 3600 console# show ip dhcp snooping binding Update frequency: 3600 Total number of binding: 2 MAC Address IP Address Lease (sec) Type VLAN Interface ----------- ---------- ------ -------- ----- ---------- 0060.704C.73FF 10.1.8.1 7983 snooping 3 gi1/0/21 0060.704C.7BC1 10.1.8.2 92332 snooping (s)3 gi1/0/22 Table 19-5. DHCP Snooping Binding Database CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description586 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DHCP Relay This section describes DHCP relay. It contains the following topics: • DHCP Relay Overview • Option 82 • Global Settings • Interface Settings DHCP Relay Overview The device can act as a DHCP Relay agent that listens for DHCP messages, and relays them between DHCP servers and clients, which reside in different VLANs or IP subnets. This functionality is intended to be used when the client ingress VLAN is different than the VLAN on which DHCP servers are connected. The switch can relay DHCP messages received from its IPv4 interfaces to one or more configured DHCP servers. The switch puts the IPv4 address into the message giaddr before relaying it to the servers. It uses the switch’s IPv4 address of the interface where the message is received. The switch uses the giaddr from the response to determine how to forward the response back to the DHCP client. DHCP Relay must be enabled globally and per VLAN. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 587 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Option 82 Overview The relay agent information option (Option 82) in the DHCP protocol enables a DHCP relay agent to send additional client information when requesting an IP address. Option 82 specifies the relaying switch's MAC address, the port identifier, and the VLAN that forwarded the packet. Both DHCP snooping and DHCP relay can insert option 82 into traversing packets. DHCP snooping with option 82 insertion provides transparent Layer 2 relay agent functionality when the DHCP server is on the same VLAN as the clients. Limitations The following limitations exist for DHCP Relay: • It is not supported on IPv6. • It is not relayed to servers on the client’s VLAN. • Packets that have option-82 information, added by other devices, are discarded. • It does not support Option 82 on non-VLAN interfaces. • It can be enabled only on a VLAN/Port/LAG that has an IP address defined on it.588 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Option 82 To enable Option82 insertion: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Option 82 in the tree view to display the Option 82 page. Figure 19-5. Option 82 2 Enable/disable Option 82 insertion.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 589 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring Option 82 Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Option 82 page. The following is an example of the CLI command: Global Settings To set the DHCP Relay global settings: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings: Summary page. Figure 19-6. Global Settings: Summary The currently-define DHCP servers are displayed. 2 Enable/disable DHCP relay. Table 19-6. CLI Option 82 Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp information option no ip dhcp information option Enables DHCP option-82 data insertion. Use the no form of this command to disable DHCP option-82 data insertion. console(config)# ip dhcp information option590 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 To add a DHCP server, click Add. 4 Enter the IP address of the DHCP server in the DHCP Server IP Address field. Defining Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Global Settings pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 19-7. Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp relay enable no ip dhcp relay enable Enables DHCP relay features on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable the DHCP relay agent. ip dhcp relay address ipaddress no ip dhcp relay address [ipaddress] Defines the DHCP servers available for the DHCP relay. Use the no form of this command to remove servers from the list. show ip dhcp relay Displays the server addresses on the DHCP relay. console(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable console(config)# ip dhcp relay address 176.16.1.1 console(config)# do show ip dhcp relay DHCP relay is Enabled Option 82 is Disabled Maximum number of supported VLANs without IP Address is 0 DHCP relay is not configured on any port. DHCP relay is not configured on any VLAN. Servers: 176.16.1.1 console(config)#Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 591 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Interface Settings . NOTE: For DHCP Relay to function on an interface, it also must be activated globally in the Global Settings page. To enable DHCP relay on a port, LAG, or VLAN: 1 Click Switching > DHCP Relay > Interface Settings in the tree view to display the Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 19-7. Interface Settings: Summary The currently-define DHCP interfaces are displayed. 2 To enable DHCP relay on an interface, click Add. 3 Select the interface.592 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Interface Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the Interface Settings pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands that enable DHCP Relay on VLAN 2, assign it an IP address and show the DHCP Relay status: Interface Settings Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description ip dhcp relay enable no ip dhcp relay enable Enables the DHCP relay features on the interface (in Interface Configuration mode). Use the no form of this command to disable the DHCP relay agent feature on the interface. ip dhcp relay address ipaddress no ip dhcp relay address Defines a DHCP servers available for DHCP relay. Use the no form of this command to remove servers from the list. console(config)# interface vlan 2 console(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable console(config)# ip dhcp relay address 176.16.1.1 console> show ip dhcp relay DHCP relay is Enabled Option 82 is Disabled Maximum number of supported VLANs without IP Address is 0 DHCP relay is not configured on any port. DHCP relay is not configured on any vlan. No servers configuredDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 593 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_DHCP.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY594 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 20 iSCSI Optimization This section describes iSCSI optimization. It contains the following topics: • Optimizing iSCSI Overview • Global Parameters • iSCSI Targets • iSCSI Sessions • Configuring iSCSI Using CLIDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 595 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Optimizing iSCSI Overview The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is an IP-based storage networking standard for linking data storage facilities. By carrying SCSI commands over IP networks, iSCSI is used to facilitate data transfers over intranets, and to manage storage over long distances. iSCSI can be used to transmit data over local area networks (LANs), wide area networks (WANs), or the Internet, and can enable location-independent data storage and retrieval. Unlike traditional Fiber channels, which requires special-purpose cabling, iSCSI can be run over long distances, using existing network infrastructure. The protocol enables clients (called initiators) to send SCSI commands (CDBs) to SCSI storage devices (targets) on remote servers. This enables organizations to consolidate storage into data center storage arrays, while providing hosts (such as database and web servers) with the illusion of locally-attached disks. The targets listen on a well-known TCP port (or any other TCP port that has been explicitly specified) for incoming connections. The login process is started when the initiator establishes a TCP connection to the desired target, through the TCP port that was explicitly specified. The group of iSCSI TCP connections that link an initiator with a target is called an iSCSI session. When you connect an EqualLogic device to the switch, and iSCSI optimization is enabled, the switch automatically recognizes the port to which the EqualLogic equipment is connected to, and configures the STP Mode to RSTP to support fast network convergence. Optimizing iSCSI iSCSI optimization provides the following features: • Ability to assign a specific QoS profile to the iSCSI flows • Display of iSCSI session details (connections, initiator, target, and so on) • Identification of (self-discovered) iSCSI sessions • Identification of iSCSI session termination • Identification of non-active iSCSI sessions596 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Limitations The following limitations exist: • All iSCSI connections receive the relevant QoS, regardless of whether they are being monitored or not. If, for example, a feature was disabled for some period and was enabled again, it is possible that there are iSCSI TCP connections that were established during this period of time. These cannot be monitored, because all relevant information was already passed at the beginning of the session. But these unidentified sessions will still be assigned to iSCSI QoS. • The maximum number of iSCSI TCP connections, which is also the default setting, is 1K. This can be changed after reset. • The number of iSCSI connections affects other system features. iSCSI-aware, DHCP Snooping, and ACL rules all use the TCAM system resource. If the number of iSCSI connections has been increased, the other application rules (DHCP Snooping or ACL) can be removed after reset. • If the target uses redirect messages upon the initiator request, and, as a result, the initiator opens a connection to a different target, the new target must be configured as part of the general configuration. • Only iSCSI flows to targets that use the iSCSI well-known port or other explicit user-defined configuration are assigned QoS. • The aging configuration works for each connection. The mechanism checks connection activities in a group of 28 TCP iSCSI connections, within the aging time. In the worst case, when the maximum number of 1K TCP connections are monitored and are not terminated gracefully, the mechanism causes inaccuracy, namely, the last 28 TCP iSCSI connections are aged out after (1K/28)*aging-time. • In general, the greater the number of ungracefully terminated iSCSI TCP connections, the greater the inaccuracy is. Not all iSCSI TCP connections are monitored for aging at the same time. Sessions, whose associated TCP connections are not being currently monitored, will show unchanged aging time. • Encryption (Ipsec) must not be applied on iSCSI traffic, otherwise a QoS profile will not be assigned to iSCSI. • iSCSI optimization does not work with IP fragmented frames.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 597 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Each session supports at most four TCP connections. If a new TCP connection of an already opened iSCSI session arrives, and there are already four TCP connections, the new connection replaces the oldest one, within this specific iSCSI session. • A short flow interruption, caused by STP topology change or administrative port-down action, might cause the TCP connection to reinitiate without closing the iSCSI session. If the actual iSCSI session used only one TCP connection, the reinitiated one will be added to the monitoring table, for an aging-time period. After that, it is removed from the list.598 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Parameters Use the Global Parameters page to enable iSCSI and to set iSCSI QoS frame priority. You may also enable Remark to change the DSCP or CoS user priority field in the packet. In the QoS Properties pages, you can then set the queuing to strict priority or WRR, and map the CoS or DSCP to the desired queue in the CoS to Queue or DSCP to Queue pages. To enable iSCSI and set its QoS parameters: 1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > Global Parameters in the tree view to display the Global Parameters page. Figure 20-1. Global Parameters 2 Enter the fields: – iSCSI Status — Enable/disable iSCSI optimization. – iSCSI COS Status — Enable/disable the Class of Service profile to apply to iSCSI flows. – Classification — Select whether the priority of iSCSI packets is determined by CoS or DSCP. Check the classification, and select the desired value. – Remark — Enable/disable whether iSCSI frames will be remarked with the CoS or DSCP value.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 599 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – iSCSI Aging Time — Enter how long the device will wait, after the last received frame of an iSCSI session, before deleting the session from the list. Enabling iSCSI automatically enables Jumbo frames and enables Flow Control on all interfaces. Jumbo frames are only enabled after copying the Running configuration to the Startup configuration and resetting the device (the Flow Control changes are effective immediately). Defining iSCSI Global Parameters Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the iSCSI Global Parameters pages. Table 20-1. iSCSI Global Parameters CLI Commands CLI Command Description iscsi enable no iscsi enable Enables iSCSI awareness. Use the no form of the command to disable iSCSI awareness. iscsi cos {vpt vpt|dscp dscp} [remark] no iscsi cos Sets the quality of service profile that will be applied to iSCSI flows. Use the no form of the command to return to default. iscsi aging time minutes no iscsi aging time Sets the aging time for iSCSI sessions. Use the no form of the command to cancel aging. show iscsi Displays iSCSI settings.600 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# iscsi enable console(config)# iscsi cos dscp 31 console(config)# iscsi aging time 10 console# show iscsi Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 -------------------------------------------------------- Session 1: --------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12. storage:sys1.xyz Time started: 23-Jul-2002 10:04:50 Time for aging out: 10 min ISID: 11 Initiator Initiator Target Target IP Address TCP Port IP Address IP port ---------- --------- ---------- ------- 172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 30001 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 601 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY iSCSI Targets To add an iSCSI target: 1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > iSCSI Targets in the tree view to display the iSCSI Targets: Summary page. Figure 20-2. iSCSI Targets: Summary The currently-defined targets are displayed. 2 To add a new target, click Add. 3 Enter the fields: – TCP Port — TCP port used by the target for iSCSI communications. – IP Address — IP address of the target. The IP address 0.0.0.0 is any IP address. – Target Name (0-223 characters) — Name of the target.602 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining iSCSI Targets Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for defining fields displayed in the iSCSI Targets Table. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 20-2. iSCSI Targets Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2… tcp-port-8] [address ip-address] [name target-name] no iscsi target port tcpport-1 [tcp-port-2… tcp-port- 8] [address ip-address] Configures iSCSI port/s, target address and name. Use the no form of this command to delete an iSCSI target. show iscsi sessions Show the current iSCSI targets and sessions. console(config)# iscsi target port 30001 address 176.16.1.1 name iqn.1993-11.com.disk vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678.tape:sys1.xyzDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 603 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY iSCSI Sessions To display information about iSCSI communications to various targets: 1 Click System > iSCSI Optimization > iSCSI Sessions in the tree view to display the iSCSI Sessions page. Figure 20-3. iSCSI Sessions 2 Select a target and click Details. The following is displayed: – Target Name — The name of the target. – Initiator Name — The name of the initiator. – ISID — The iSCSI session ID. – Session Life Time — The amount of time that has passed since the first frame of the session. – Aging Time — The time left until the session ages out and is removed.604 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Initiators/Targets — The IP address and TCP port used by each initiator and target in the session is displayed. Displaying iSCSI Sessions Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for displaying iSCSI sessions. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 20-3. iSCSI CLI Commands CLI Command Description show iscsi sessions [detailed] Displays iSCSI sessions console(config)# show iscsi sessions Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 ------------------------------------------------------------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12 ISID: 11 Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 ISID: 222 -------------------------------------------------------------- Target: iqn.103-1.com.storage-vendor:sn.43338.storage.tape:sys1.xyz -------------------------------------------------------------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12 ISID: 44 Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 ISID: 65 -------------------------------------------------------------- console# show iscsi sessions detailed Target: iqn.1993-11.com.disk-vendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 -------------------------------------------------------------- Session 1: --------- Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12.storage:sys1.xyz UP Time: 02:10:45 (DD:HH:MM) Time for aging out: 10 min ISID: 11 Initiator IP Address Initiator TCP Port Target IP Address Target IP Port -------------------- ----------------- ---------------- ------------- 172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001 172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001 1172.16.1.3 49154 172.16.1.20 3001 30001Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 Status: Active UP Time: 00:04:50 (DD:HH:MM) Time for aging out: 2 min ISID: 22Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 605 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGSwitching_iscsi.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring iSCSI Using CLI The following is a sample procedure to configure the iSCSI feature using CLI: Table 20-4. Sample CLI Script to Configure iSCSI CLI Command Description iscsi enable Enable iSCSI. iscsi cos vpt 2 remark Set iSCSI flow to use VPT 2 (Layer 2 CoS). This VPT value replaces the original VPT in the packet. show iscsi sessions Verify that iSCSI is enabled and that the iSCSI flows are displayed. Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 606 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 21 Statistics/RMON This section describes many of the statistics available on the device. The only exception is the QoS statistics described in "Quality of Service" on page 650. It contains the following topics: • Table Views • RMON Components • ChartsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 607 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Table Views This section displays statistics in table form. It contains the following topics: • Denied ACEs Counters • Utilization Summary • Counter Summary • Interface Statistics • Etherlike Statistics • GVRP Statistics • EAP Statistics608 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Denied ACEs Counters The Denied ACEs counters contain the number of packets that were dropped (denied) because they did not meet ACL criteria expressed in some ACE. To display the denied ACE counters: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Denied ACEs Counters in the tree view to display the Denied ACEs Counters page. Figure 21-1. Denied ACEs Counters The global number of dropped packets is displayed along with the number of dropped packets on each interface. 2 To clear the counters, select either a stack unit and port or LAG. All ports/LAGs in the unit are displayed. 3 Mark the counters to be cleared and click Clear Counters. 4 To clear all counters, click Clear All Counters. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 609 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing Denied ACE Counters Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing denied ACE counters statistics. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-1. Denied ACE Counters CLI Commands CLI Command Description show interfaces access-lists counters [gigabitethernet|tengigabite thernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays Access List counters. console# show interfaces access-lists counters Interface Denied ACE hits --------- ------------- gi1/0/1 55 gi1/0/2 33 gi1/0/3 32610 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Utilization Summary Use the Utilization Summary page to display interface utilization. This page is refreshed periodically to minimize impact on performance. Display may be disrupted during this period. To display interface utilization statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Utilization Summary in the tree view to display the Utilization Summary page. Figure 21-2. Utilization Summary 2 Select a unit and port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Port/LAG — The port/LAG number. – Interface Status — The status of the interface: Up, Down or Not Present when no port is attached to the LAG. – % Interface Utilization — Network interface utilization percentage, based on the duplex mode of the interface. The range of this reading is from 0 to 200%. The maximum reading of 200% for a full duplex connection indicates that 100% of bandwidth of incoming and outgoing connections is used by the traffic travelling through the interface. The maximum reading for a half duplex connection is 100%.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 611 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – % Unicast Received — Percentage of Unicast packets received on the interface. – % Non Unicast Packets Received — Percentage of non-Unicast packets received on the interface. – % Error Packets Received — Percentage of packets with errors received on the interface. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. The CPU utilization chart is displayed.612 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Counter Summary To display the number of received and transmitted packets on ports, as numeric figures and not percentages: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Counter Summary in the tree view to display the Counter Summary page. Figure 21-3. Counter Summary Counters for the selected units or LAG are displayed. 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Port/LAG — The interface number. – Interface Status — Status of the interface: Up or Down. – Received Unicast Packets — Number of received Unicast packets on the interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 613 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Transmitted Unicast Packets — Number of transmitted Unicast packets from the interface. – Received Non Unicast Packets — Number of received non-Unicast packets on the interface. – Transmitted Non Unicast Packets — Number of transmitted nonUnicast packets from the interface. – Received Errors — Number of received packets with errors on the interface. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the counters should be refreshed.614 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Interface Statistics To display the number of received and transmitted packets on an interface: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Interface Statistics in the tree view to display the Interface Statistics page. Figure 21-4. Interface Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the counters should be refreshed. The following fields are displayed: Receive Statistics – Total Bytes (Octets) — Amount of octets received on the selected interface.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 615 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Unicast Packets — Number of Unicast packets received on the selected interface. – Multicast Packets — Number of Multicast packets received on the selected interface. – Broadcast Packets — Number of Broadcast packets received on the selected interface. – Packets with Errors — Number of errors packets received on the selected interface. Transmit Statistics – Total Bytes (Octets) — Number of octets transmitted from the selected interface. – Unicast Packets — Number of Unicast packets transmitted from the selected interface. – Multicast Packets — Number of Multicast packets transmitted from the selected interface. – Broadcast Packets — Number of Broadcast packets transmitted from the selected interface. 4 Click Reset All Counters to clear these counters.616 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Etherlike Statistics To display interface error statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > Etherlike Statistics in the tree view to display the Etherlike Statistics page. Figure 21-5. Etherlike Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Frame Check Sequence (FCS) Errors — Number of frames received that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. – Single Collision Frames — Number of frames that are involved in a single collision, and are subsequently transmitted successfully. – Late Collisions — Number of collisions detected after the first 512 bits of data.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 617 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Excessive Collisions — Number of frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions. – Internal MAC Transmit Errors — Number of frames for which reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. – Oversize Packets — Number of frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. – Received Pause Frames — Number of MAC Control frames received with a PAUSE operation code. – Transmitted Pause Frames — Number of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with a PAUSE operation code. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to clears the statistics for the selected interface. Viewing Interface Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing utilization, counters and interface statistics. Table 21-2. Interface Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description show interfaces counters [[gigabitethernet|tengigabit ethernet] port-number|portchannel LAG-number] Displays traffic seen by the physical interface.618 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI command for all ports: The following is an example of the CLI command for a single port: console# show interfaces counters Port InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts InOctets ------- ------------ ----------- ----------- -------- gi2/0/1 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/2 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/3 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/4 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/5 0 0 0 0 Port OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts OutOctets --------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ gi2/0/1 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/2 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/3 0 0 0 0 gi2/0/4 0 0 0 0 console# show interfaces counters gi1/0/1 Port InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts InOctets -------- ------------- ------------ ------------ ------------ gi1/0/1 0 0 0 0 Port OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts OutOctets -------- ----------- ------------ ------------ ------------ gi1/0/1 0 0 0 0 Alignment Errors: 0 FCS Errors: 0 Single Collision Frames: 0 Multiple Collision Frames: 0 SQE Test Errors: 0 Deferred Transmissions: 0 Late Collisions: 0 Excessive Collisions: 0 Carrier Sense Errors: 0 Oversize Packets: 0 Internal MAC Rx Errors: 0 Symbol Errors: 0 Received Pause Frames: 0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 619 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY GVRP Statistics To display device GVRP statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > GVRP Statistics in the tree view to display the GVRP Statistics page. Figure 21-6. GVRP Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The number of received and transmitted packets in the following counters is displayed: GVRP Statistics Table – Join Empty — The number of GVRP Join Empty packets. – Empty — The number of GVRP empty packets. – Leave Empty — The number of GVRP Leave Empty packets. – Join In — The number of GVRP Join In packets.620 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Leave In — The number of GVRP Leave In packets. – Leave All — The number of GVRP Leave All packets. GVRP Error Statistics – Invalid Protocol ID — The number of GVRP Invalid Protocol ID errors. – Invalid Attribute Type — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute ID errors. – Invalid Attribute Value — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute Value errors. – Invalid Attribute Length — The number of GVRP Invalid Attribute Length errors. – Invalid Event — The number of GVRP Invalid Events errors. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. Viewing GVRP Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing GVRP statistics. Table 21-3. GVRP Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description show gvrp statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet ] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays GVRP statistics. show gvrp error-statistics [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethernet ] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays GVRP error statistics.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 621 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show gvrp statistics GVRP Statistics: ---------------- Legend: rJE : Join Empty Received rJIn: Join In Received rEmp : Empty Received rLIn: Leave In Received rLE : Leave Empty Received rLA : Leave All Received sJE : Join Empty Sent sJIn: Join In Sent sEmp : Empty Sent sLIn: Leave In Sent sLE : Leave Empty Sent sLA : Leave All Sent Port rJE rJIn rEmp rLIn rLE rLA sJE sJIn sEmp sLIn sLE sLA ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- ---- --- ---- ---622 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY EAP Statistics For information about EAP, see "Dot1x Authentication" on page 132. To display EAP statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Table Views > EAP Statistics in the tree view to display the EAP Statistics page. Figure 21-7. EAP Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Frames Received — The number of valid EAPOL frames received on the port. – Frames Transmitted — The number of EAPOL frames transmitted via the port.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 623 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Start Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL Start frames received on the port. – Log off Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL Logoff frames received on the port. – Respond ID Frames Receive — The number of EAP Resp/ID frames received on the port. – Respond Frames Receive — The number of valid EAP Response frames received on the port. – Request ID Frames Transmit — The number of EAP Req/ID frames transmitted via the port. – Request Frames Transmitted — The number of EAP Request frames transmitted via the port. – Invalid Frames Receive — The number of unrecognized EAPOL frames received on this port. – Length Error Frames Receive — The number of EAPOL frames with an invalid Packet Body Length received on this port. – Last Frame Version — The protocol version number attached to the most recently received EAPOL frame. – Last Frame Source — The source MAC address attached to the most recently received EAPOL frame. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. Viewing EAP Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing EAP statistics. Table 21-4. EAP Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description show dot1x statistics Displays 802.1X statistics for the specified interface.624 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show dot1x statistics gi1/0/1 EapolFramesRx: 11 EapolFramesTx: 12 EapolStartFramesRx: 1 EapolLogoffFramesRx: 1 EapolRespIdFramesRx: 3 EapolRespFramesRx: 6 EapolReqIdFramesTx: 3 EapolReqFramesTx: 6 InvalidEapolFramesRx: 0 EapLengthErrorFramesRx: 0 LastEapolFrameVersion: 1 LastEapolFrameSource: 0008.3b79.8787Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 625 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RMON Components This section describes Remote Monitoring (RMON), which enables network managers to display network information from a remote location. It contains the following topics: • Statistics • History Control • History Table • Events Control • Events Log • Alarms626 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Statistics To display device utilization statistics and errors that occurred on the device: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Statistics in the tree view to display the Statistics page. Figure 21-8. Statistics 2 Select a port/LAG. The following fields are displayed: – Received Bytes (Octets) — Number of bytes received on the selected interface. – Received Packets — Number of packets received on the selected interface. – Broadcast Packets Received — Number of good Broadcast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed. This number does not include Multicast packets. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 627 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Multicast Packets Received — Number of good Multicast packets received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – CRC&Align Errors — Number of packets received with a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). – Undersize Packets — Number of packets received, less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and otherwise well formed. – Oversize Packets — Number of packets received, longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and otherwise well formed. – Fragments — Number of packets received, less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), which has either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). – Jabbers — Number of packets received, longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and having either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error), or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). – Collisions — Number of collisions received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 64 Bytes — Number of 64-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 65 to 127 Bytes — Number of 65-127-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 128 to 255 Bytes — Number of 128-255-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 256 to 511 Bytes — Number of 256-511-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. – Frames of 512 to 1023 Bytes — Number of 512-1023-byte frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed.628 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Frames of 1024 to Max Octets — Number of 1024-Max Octet frames received on the interface, since the device was last refreshed. 3 Select one of the Refresh Rate options to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. Configuring RMON Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing and enabling RMON statistics. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-5. Configuring RMON Statistics Using CLI Command CLI Command Description show rmon statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabiteth ernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays RMON Ethernet statistics. console# show rmon statistics gi1/0/1 Port te1/0/1 Dropped: 0 Octets: 0 Packets: 0 Broadcast: 0 Multicast: 0 CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0 Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0 Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0 64 Octets: 0 65 to 127 Octets: 1 128 to 255 Octets: 1 256 to 511 Octets: 1 512 to 1023 Octets: 0 1024 to max Octets: 0Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 629 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY History Control To display the requested RMON history group statistics or request a new sample of interface statistics: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > History Control in the tree view to display the History Control: Summary page. Figure 21-9. History Control: Summary Previously-defined samples are displayed. 2 To add a new entry, click Add. The New History Entry number, which uniquely identifies the sample, is displayed. 3 Enter the fields for the entry: – Source Interface — Sampled Ethernet interface. – Owner (0-20 characters) — RMON station or user that configured the entry.630 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Max No. of Samples to Keep (1-50) — Number of samples to be saved. – Sampling Interval (1-3600) — The time interval in seconds between samples. Configuring RMON History Control Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for configuring RMON history control. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-6. RMON History Control CLI Commands CLI Command Description rmon collection stats index [owner ownername|bucket bucket-number] [interval seconds] no rmon collection stats index Enables and configures RMON on an interface. Use the no form of this command to remove a specified RMON history group of statistics. show rmon collection history [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays RMON collection history statistics. console(config)# interface gi1/0/8 console(config-if)# rmon collection stats 1 interval 2400Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 631 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY History Table The History Table page displays interface-specific statistical network samplings. Each table entry represents the counter values compiled during a single sample. To display RMON statistics for a specified sample: 1 Click Statistics/RMONRMONHistory Table in the tree view to display the History Table page. Figure 21-10. History Table 2 Select a History Entry No. The following fields are displayed: – Owner — RMON station or user that requested the RMON information. – Sample No. — Number of the specific sample the information in the table reflects.632 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Drop Events — Number of dropped packets due to lack of network resources during the sampling interval. This may not represent the exact number of dropped packets, but rather the number of times dropped packets were detected. – Received Bytes (Octets) — Number of data octets, including bad packets, received on the network. – Received Packets — Number of packets received during the sampling interval. – Broadcast Packets — Number of good Broadcast packets received during the sampling interval. – Multicast Packets — Number of good Multicast packets received during the sampling interval. – CRC Align Errors — Number of packets received during the sampling session, with a length of between 64-1632 octets, who had a bad Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets, or a bad FCS with a non-integral number. – Undersize Packets — Number of packets, having less than 64 octets, received during the sampling session. – Oversize Packets — Number of packets having more than 1632 octets, received during the sampling session. – Fragments — Number of packets, having less than 64 octets and having a FCS, received during the sampling session. – Jabbers — Number of packets, having more than 1632 octets and who had an FCS, received during the sampling session. – Collisions — Estimated number of packet collision that occurred during the sampling session. Collisions are detected when repeater port detects two or more stations transmitting simultaneously. – Utilization — Estimated main physical layer network usage on an interface during the session sampling. The value is stated in hundredths of a percent.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 633 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing the RMON History Table Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing the RMON history table. The following is an example of a CLI command: Table 21-7. RMON History Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description show rmon history index {throughput|errors|other } [period seconds] Displays RMON Ethernet statistics history. console# show rmon history 1 throughput Sample Set: 1 Interface: 1/0/1 Requested samples: 50 Owner: CLI Interval: 1800 Granted samples: 50 Maximum table size: 500 Time -------------------- Jan 18 2005 21:57:00 Octets --------- 303595962 Packets -------- 357568 Broadcast --------- 3289 Multicast ---------- 7287 Util -------- 19%634 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Events Control Events are actions that are performed when an alarm is generated (alarms are defined in the Alarms page). An event can be any combination of logs/traps. If the action includes logging, then the events are logged in the Events Log page. To define an RMON event: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Events Control in the tree view to display the Events Control: Summary page. Figure 21-11. Events Control: Summary The currently-defined events are displayed. Along with the fields described in the Events Control: Add page, the following field is displayed for the events: – Time — The time that the event occurred. 2 To define a new event, click Add.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 635 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Enter the fields: – Event Entry — Displays a new event number. – Community — Enter the community to which the event belongs or keep the default community. – Description — Enter the event description. – Type — Select the event action. The possible options are: • None — No action is taken. • Log — When an alarm occurs, a log entry is recorded. • Trap — When an alarm occurs, a trap is generated. • Log and Trap — When an alarm occurs, a log entry is recorded and a trap is generated. – Owner — Enter the event owner. Defining RMON Events Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for defining RMON events. Table 21-8. RMON Event Definition CLI Commands CLI Command Description rmon event index {none|log|trap|log-trap} [community text] [description text] [owner name] no rmon event index Configures an event. Use the no form of this command to remove an event. show rmon events Displays RMON event table.636 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# rmon event 1 log console(config)# exit console# show rmon events Index Description Type Community Owner Last Time Sent ----- ----------- ------ --------- ----- ----------- 1 Errors Log Default Community CLI Jan 18 2002 23:58:17 2 High Broadcast LogTrap Router Manager Jan 18 2002 23:59:48Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 637 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Events Log The Events log displays the log of events that occurred. An event is logged when the type of the event is Log or Log and Trap. The action in the event is performed when the event is bound to an alarm (see the Alarms page) and the conditions of the alarm have occurred. To display the events log: • Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Events Log in the tree view to display the Events Control page. Figure 21-12. Events Control The following fields are displayed: – Event — The event identifier. – Log No. — The log number. – Log Time — Time when the log entry was entered. 638 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Description — Description of the log entry. Viewing Device Events Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing device events. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Alarms RMON alarms provide a mechanism for setting thresholds and sampling intervals to generate exception events on a counter or any other SNMP object counter maintained by the agent. Both the rising and falling thresholds must be configured in the alarm. After a rising threshold is crossed, another rising event is not generated until the companion falling threshold is crossed. After a falling alarm is issued, the next Table 21-9. Device Event Viewing CLI Commands CLI Command Description show rmon log [event] Displays the RMON logging table. console(config)# rmon event 1 log console> show rmon log Maximum table size: 500 Event Description Time ----- --------------- -------------- 1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23:58:17 2 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23:59:48Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 639 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY alarm is issued when a rising threshold is crossed. One or more alarms are bound to an event. The event indicates the action to be taken when the alarm occurs. To add an RMON alarm: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > RMON > Alarms in the tree view to display the Alarms: Summary page. Figure 21-13. Alarms: Summary The currently-defined alarms are displayed. 2 To add a new alarm, click Add and enter the fields: – Alarm Entry — Displays a new alarm entry. – Interface — Select the interface for which RMON statistics are displayed. – Counter Name — Select the selected MIB variable. 640 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Sample Type — Select the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. The possible options are: • Delta — Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value. The difference in the values is compared to the threshold. • Absolute — Compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. – Rising Threshold (0–2147483647) — Enter the rising counter value that triggers the rising event alarm. – Rising Event — Select one of the previously-defined events. – Falling Threshold (0–2147483647) — Enter the falling counter value that triggers the falling event alarm. – Falling Event — Select one of the previously-defined events. – Startup Alarm — Select the trigger that activates the alarm. The possible options are: • Rising Alarm — A rising counter value triggers the alarm • Falling Alarm — A falling counter value triggers the alarm. • Rising and Falling — Both rising and falling counter values trigger the alarm. – Interval (1–2147483647) — Enter the alarm interval time in seconds. This is the interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. – Owner — Enter the name of the user or network management system that receives the alarm.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 641 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Device Alarms Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for defining device alarms. Table 21-10. Device Alarm CLI Commands CLI Command Description rmon alarm index MIB_Object_ID interval rthreshold fthreshold revent fevent [type type] [startup direction] [owner name] no rmon alarm index Configures RMON alarm conditions. Use the no form of this command to remove an alarm. show rmon alarm-table Displays summary of the alarm table. show rmon alarm number Displays the RMON alarm configuration.642 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console(config)# rmon alarm 1000 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 360000 1000000 1000000 10 20 console# show rmon alarm-table Index ----- 123 OID ---------------------- 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.9 Owner ------- CLI Manager CLIDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 643 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Charts This section describes how to display statistics as charts. It contains the following topics: • Ports • LAGs • CPU Utilization Ports To display port statistics in chart format: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > Ports in the tree view to display the Ports page. Figure 21-14. Ports 2 Select the unit ID of a unit in the stack for which you want to display statistics.644 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Check the type of statistics to be displayed: – Interface Statistics — Select the interface statistics to display. – Etherlike Statistics — Select the frame error statistics to display. – RMON Statistics — Select the RMON statistics to display. – GVRP Statistics — Select the GVRP statistics type to display. – Refresh Rate — Select the amount of time that passes before the statistics are refreshed. 4 To draw a chart for the selected statistics, click Draw. The chart for the selected statistic is displayed on the page.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 645 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing Port Statistics Using the CLI Commands The CLI commands for viewing port statistics are the same CLI commands described above. The Ports page simply shows the same statistics in chart form. LAGs To display LAG statistics in chart format: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > LAGs in the tree view to display the LAGs page. Figure 21-15. LAGs 2 Check the type of statistics to be displayed: – Interface Statistics — Select the interface statistics to display. – Etherlike Statistics — Select the frame error statistics to display. – RMON Statistics — Select the RMON statistics to display.646 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – GVRP Statistics — Select the GVRP statistics type to display. – Refresh Rate — Select the amount of time that passes before the statistics are refreshed. 3 To draw a chart for the selected statistics, click Draw. The chart for the selected statistic is displayed on the page. Viewing LAG Statistics Using the CLI Commands The following table contains the CLI commands for viewing LAG statistics. Table 21-11. LAG Statistic CLI Commands CLI Command Description show interfaces counters [[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number] Displays traffic seen by the physical interface. show rmon statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number} Displays RMON Ethernet statistics. show gvrp statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number} Displays GVRP statistics. show gvrp-error statistics {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitet hernet] interface|port-channel LAG-number} Displays GVRP error statistics.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 647 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: console# show rmon statistics gi1/0/1 Port gi1/0/1 Dropped: 0 Octets: 0 Packets: 0 Broadcast: 0 Multicast: 0 CRC Align Errors: 0 Collisions: 0 Undersize Pkts: 0 Oversize Pkts: 0 Fragments: 0 Jabbers: 0 64 Octets: 0 65 to 127 Octets: 1 128 to 255 Octets: 1 256 to 511 Octets: 1 512 to 1023 Octets: 0 1024 to max Octets: 0648 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY CPU Utilization Use the CPU Utilization page to display the system’s CPU utilization and percentage of CPU resources consumed by each unit in the stack. Each unit in the stack is assigned a color on the graph. To display CPU utilization in chart format: 1 Click Statistics/RMON > Charts > CPU Utilization in the tree view to display the CPU Utilization page. Figure 21-16. CPU Utilization 2 Select the Refresh Rate to specify how frequently the statistics should be refreshed. 3 The CPU utilization chart is displayed. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 649 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGStatistics.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Viewing CPU Utilization Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for viewing CPU utilization. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 21-12. CPU Utilization CLI Commands CLI Command Description show cpu utilization Displays CPU utilization. console# show cpu utilization CPU utilization service is on. CPU utilization -------------------------- five seconds: 5%; one minute: 3%; five minutes: 3%Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 650 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 22 Quality of Service This section provides information for configuring Quality of Service (QoS). It contains the following topics: • QoS Features and Components • General • QoS Basic Mode • QoS Advanced Mode • QoS StatisticsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 651 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Features and Components The QoS feature is used to optimize network performance. It provides classification of incoming traffic into traffic classes, based on one or more attributes, including: – Device configuration – Ingress interface – Packet contents QoS includes the following features: • Traffic Classification — Classifies each incoming packet, as belonging to a specific traffic flow, based on the packet contents and/or interface. The classification is done by an ACL (Access Control List), and only traffic that meets the ACL criteria is subject to classification. • Assignment to Hardware Queues — Assigns incoming packets to forwarding queues. Packets are sent to a particular queue for handling as a function of the traffic class to which they belong. • Other Traffic Class-Handling Attribute — Applies QoS mechanisms to various classes, including bandwidth management. QoS Modes A single QoS mode is selected and applies to all interfaces in the system. The modes are: • Basic Mode — Class of Service (CoS). – Traffic is divided into classes that determine how it is treated. All traffic in a class is treated with the same QoS action. The QoS action for the class of traffic determines the egress queue on the egress port, based on the indicated QoS value in the incoming frame. The QoS value in the incoming frame is: • Layer 2 Packets — VLAN Priority Tag (VPT) 802.1p value • Layer 3 IPv4 Frames — Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value • Layer 3 IPv6 Frames —Traffic Class (TC) value When operating in Basic mode, the switch trusts this externally-assigned QoS value. 652 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY This is the default QoS mode. • Advanced Mode — Per-flow Quality of Service (QoS). In Advanced mode, a per-flow QoS consists of a class map and a policer: – A class map defines the kind of traffic in a flow, and contains one or more ACLs. Packets that match the ACLs belong to the flow. – A policer applies the configured QoS to a flow. The QoS configuration of a flow may consist of the egress queue, the DSCP or CoS value, and actions on out-of-profile (excess) traffic. • Disable Mode (QoS is not enabled) In this mode, all traffic is mapped to a single best-effort queue, so that no type of traffic is prioritized over another. Only a single mode can be active at a time. When the system is configured to work in QoS Advanced mode, settings for QoS Basic mode are not active and vice versa. When the QoS mode is changed, the following occurs: • When changing from Advanced mode to any other mode, policy profile definitions and class maps are deleted. ACLs, which are bonded directly to interfaces, remain bonded. • When changing from Basic mode to Advanced mode, the QoS Trust mode configuration in Basic mode is not retained. • When disabling QoS, the shaper and queue setting (WRR/SP bandwidth settings) are reset to default values. All other user configurations remain intact.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 653 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY General This section contains the following topics: • QoS Mode • QoS Properties • Queue • Mapping to Queue • Bandwidth • TCP Congestion Avoidance QoS Mode To enable/disable the QoS mode: 1 Click Quality of Service > General >QoS Mode in the tree view to display the QoS Mode page. Figure 22-1. QoS Mode 2 Select the QoS Mode. The possible options are: – Basic — QoS is enabled in Basic mode on the switch654 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Advanced — QoS is enabled in Advanced mode on the switch. – Disable — QoS is not enabled on the switch. Setting QoS Mode Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the QoS mode. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-1. QoS Mode CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos [basic|advanced] no qos Enables QoS on the device. Use the no form of this command to disable QoS on the device show qos Displays the QoS mode. console(config)# qos basicDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 655 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Properties To set the default CoS value on incoming, untagged packets: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > QoS Properties in the tree view to display the QoS Properties: Summary page. Figure 22-2. QoS Properties: Summary The default CoS values for all interfaces on the selected unit are displayed. 2 To modify the CoS value for an interface, click Edit, and enter the fields: – Interface — Select a port or LAG if required. – Set Default CoS — Enter the default CoS tag value for untagged packets.656 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring QoS Properties Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the QoS Properties: Summary page. The following is an example of the CLI command: Queue The switch supports eight queues for each interface. Queue number eight is the highest priority queue. Queue number one is the lowest priority queue. Traffic Limitation Methods There are two ways of determining how traffic in queues is handled, Strict Priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR): • Strict Priority — Egress traffic from the highest-priority queue is transmitted first. Traffic from the lower queues is processed only after the highest queue has been transmitted, thus providing the highest level of priority of traffic to the lowest-numbered queue. • Weighted Round Robin (WRR) — In WRR mode, the number of packets sent from the queue is proportional to the weight of the queue (the higher the weight, the more frames are sent). For example, if all eight queues are WRR and the default weights are used, queue 1 receives 1/15 of the bandwidth (assuming all queues are saturated and there is congestion), queue 2 receives 2/15, queue 3 receives 4/15, and queue 8 receives 8/15 of the bandwidth. The type of WRR algorithm used in the device is not the standard Deficit WRR (DWRR), but rather Shaped Deficit WRR (SDWRR). Table 22-2. QoS Properties CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos cos default-cos no qos cos Defines the default CoS value of a port. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# interface gi1/0/15 console(config-if)# qos cos 3Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 657 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Combination of WRR and Strict Priority The priority for handling traffic can be selected for each queue. When the queuing mode is Weighted Round Robin for all queues, queues are serviced according to their weights. If all queues are assigned strict priority, queues are serviced according to that order. The following is true if some queues are assigned strict priority and others are assigned WRR: • If one queue is assigned strict priority, all higher queues are also assigned strict priority. Conversely, if a queue is assigned a WRR weight, all lower queues must also have a WRR weight assigned to them. • In the above case, traffic for the strict priority queues is always sent before traffic from the WRR queues. Traffic from the WRR queues is forwarded only after the strict priority queues have been emptied. The relative portion from each WRR queue depends on its weight.658 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To select the priority method and enter WRR weights: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > Queue in the tree view to display the Queue page. Figure 22-3. Queue The queues are displayed. 2 Enter the parameters for the queues: – Strict Priority — Check to indicate that traffic scheduling for the selected queue, and all higher queues, is based strictly on the queue priority. – WRR — Check to indicate that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based on WRR. The time period is divided between the WRR queues that are not empty, meaning they have descriptors to egress. This happens only if strict priority queues are empty. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 659 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Scheduling WRR Weight — If WRR is selected, enter the WRR weight assigned to the queue. – % of WRR Bandwidth — Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned to the queue. These values represent the percent of the WRR weight. Configuring Queue Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Queue page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Mapping to Queue This section provides information for mapping DSCP and CoS values to service queues, and contains the following topics: • CoS to Queue • DSCP to Queue Table 22-3. Queue Setting CLI Commands CLI Command Description priority-queue out num-ofqueues number-of-queues no priority-queue out numof-queues Configures the number of expedite queues. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. wrr-queue bandwidth weight1 weight2 ... weight_n no wrr-queue bandwidth Assigns WRR weights to egress queues. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# priority-queue out num-of-queues 2 console(config-if)# wrr-queue bandwidth 6 6 6 6 6 6660 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY CoS to Queue The CoS to Queue page maps CoS priorities to an egress queue, meaning that the egress queues of the incoming packets is based on the CoS priority in their VLAN Tags. For incoming, untagged packets, the CoS priority is the default CoS priority assigned to ingress ports. By changing CoS to Queue mapping, Queue schedule method, and bandwidth allocation, it is possible to achieve the desired quality of services in a network. The CoS to Queue mapping is applicable only if one of the following exists: • The switch is in QoS Basic mode, and CoS is the trusted mode. • The switch is in QoS Advanced mode, and the packets belong to flows that are CoS trusted.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 661 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To map CoS values to egress queues: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > CoS to Queue in the tree view to display the CoS to Queue page. Figure 22-4. CoS to Queue The CoS/queue mappings are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – Class of Service — The CoS priority tag values, where zero is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority. – Queue — The queue to which the CoS priority is mapped. 662 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Mapping CoS Priorities to Queues Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the CoS to Queue page . The following is an example of the CLI commands: DSCP to Queue The DSCP to Queue mapping determines the egress queues of the incoming IP packets, based on their DSCP values. The original VPT (VLAN Priority Tag) of the packet is unchanged. By changing the DSCP to Queue mapping, the Queue schedule method, and bandwidth allocation, it is possible to achieve improved quality of service in a network. The DSCP to Queue mapping is applicable to IP packets when: • The switch is in Basic mode and DSCP is the trusted mode • The switch is in Advanced mode and the packets belongs to flows that are DSCP trusted Non-IP packets are always classified to the best-effort queue. Table 22-4. CoS to Queue CLI Commands CLI Command Description wrr-queue cos-map queue-id cos1 ... cos8 no wrr-queue cos-map [queueid] Maps CoS values to the egress queues. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# wrr-queue cos-map 4 7Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 663 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To map DSCP to queues: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > DSCP to Queue in the tree view to display the DSCP to Queue page. Figure 22-5. DSCP to Queue The DSCP values in the incoming packet and its associated queues are displayed. 2 Enter the fields: – DSCP In — The values of the DSCP field in the incoming packet. – Queue — The queue to which packets with the specific DSCP value is assigned. The values are 1-8, where 1 is the lowest value, and 8 is the highest.664 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Mapping DSCP Values to Queues Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the DSCP to Queue page. The following is an example of the CLI command: Bandwidth The amount of traffic that can be received and transmitted on an interface can be limited by the following: • Ingress Rate Limit — Number of bits per second that can be received from the ingress interface. Excess bandwidth above this limit is discarded. • Egress Shaping Rates is defined by the following: – Committed Information Rate (CIR) sets the average maximum amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interface, measured in bits per second – Committed Burst Shape (CBS) sets the maximum burst of data that is allowed to be sent, even though it is above the CIR. This is defined in number of bytes of data. Table 22-5. DSCP to Queue CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos map dscp-queue dscp-list to queue-id no qos map dscp-queue [dscplist] Modifies the DSCP to queue mapping. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# qos map dscp-queue 33 40 41 to 1Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 665 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To configure bandwidth limitation: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > Bandwidth in the tree view to display the Bandwidth: Summary page. Figure 22-6. Bandwidth: Summary The ingress and egress rates are displayed for all ports on the selected unit. 2 To set interface parameters, click Edit. 3 Select an interface, and enter the fields: – Enable Ingress Rate Limit — Enable/disable ingress traffic limit for the interface. If this field is selected, enter the Ingress Rate Limit. – Ingress Rate Limit — Enter the ingress traffic limit for the interface.666 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Egress Shaping Rate — Enable/disable egress traffic limitation. If this field is selected, enter the following fields. – Committed Information Rate (CIR) — Enter the average maximum amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interface, measured in bits per second. – Committed Burst Size (CBS) — Enter the maximum burst of data that is allowed to be sent on the egress interface, even though it is above the CIR. This is defined in number of bytes of data. Configuring Bandwidth Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Bandwidth pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-6. Bandwidth CLI Commands CLI Command Description traffic-shape committed-rate [committed-burst] no traffic-shape Sets shaper on egress port. Use no form in order to disable the shaper. rate-limit committed-rate-kbps [burst committed-burst-byte] no rate-limit Limits the rate of the incoming traffic. Use the no form to disable rate limit. console(config)# interface gi1/0/5 console(config-if)# traffic-shape 124000 9600 console(config-if)# rate-limit 150000Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 667 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY TCP Congestion Avoidance Use the TCP Congestion Avoidance page to activate a congestion avoidance algorithm. The algorithm breaks up or prevents TCP global synchronization in a congested node, where the congestion is due to various sources sending packets with the same byte count. To configure TCP congestion avoidance: 1 Click Quality of Service > General > TCP Congestion Avoidance in the tree view to display the TCP Congestion Avoidance page. NOTE: TCP Congestion Avoidance increases network reliability, but it also increases network traffic. Continue only if you are sure it will improve overall network performance. For this change to be effective you must save the configuration and reboot the device. Figure 22-7. TCP Congestion Avoidance 2 Check TCP Congestion Avoidance to enable the algorithm.668 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring TCP Congestion Avoidance Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the TCP Congestion Avoidance page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-7. TCP Congestion Avoidance CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos wrr-queue wrtd no qos wrr-queue wrtd Enables Weighted Random Tail Drop (WRTD). Use the no form of this command to disable WRTD. console(config)# qos wrr-queue wrtd This setting will take effect only after copying running configuration to startup configuration and resetting the device.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 669 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Basic Mode This section describes QoS Basic mode. It contains the following topics: • Basic Mode Overview • Workflow to Configure Basic Mode • Global Settings • DSCP Rewrite • Interface Settings Basic Mode Overview In QoS Basic mode, a specific domain in the network can be defined as trusted. Within that domain, packets are marked with CoS priority and/or DSCP values, to signal the type of service they require. Nodes within the domain use these fields to assign the packet to a specific output queue. The initial packet classification and marking of these fields is done in the ingress of the trusted domain. Workflow to Configure Basic Mode To configure Basic QoS mode, perform the following: 1 Select Basic mode for the system in the QoS Mode page. 2 Select the trust-behavior in the Global Settings page. 3 If there is any port that, as an exception, should not trust the incoming CoS mark, disable the QoS state on that port in the Interface Settings pages. If a port is disabled without trusted mode, all its ingress packets are forwarded in best effort. It is recommended that you disable the trusted mode at the ports where the CoS and/or DSCP values in the incoming packets are not trustworthy. Otherwise, performance in the network might be negatively affected. 4 If you selected DSCP Rewrite in the Global Settings page, set the DSCP in/out values in the DSCP Rewrite page.670 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Global Settings Use the Global Settings page to enable Trust on all interfaces on the switch. This configuration is only active when the QoS mode is Basic. Packets entering a QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain. For more information on setting Trust mode on an interface, see "Interface Settings" on page 674. To define Trust configuration: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > Global Settings in the tree view to display the Global Settings page. Figure 22-8. Global SettingsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 671 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 Enter the fields: – Trust Mode — Enable/disable Trust mode. • CoS — Traffic is mapped to queues, based on the VPT field in the VLAN tag, or based on the per-port default CoS value (if there is no VLAN tag on the incoming packet). The mapping of the VPT to queue can be configured in the CoS to Queue page. • DSCP — All IP traffic is mapped to queues, based on the DSCP field in the IP header. The mapping of the DSCP to queue is configured in the DSCP to Queue page. – Always Rewrite DSCP — Check to always rewrite the DSCP values in the incoming packets with the new values set in the DSCP to Queue page. When this field is enabled, the switch uses the new DSCP values to select the egress queue. Assigning Global Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Global Settings page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-8. Global Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos trust {cos|dscp} no qos trust Configures the system to either the CoS or DSCP trust state. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. qos dscp-mutation no qos dscp-mutation Applies the DSCP Mutation map to system DSCP trusted ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the trusted port with no DSCP mutation. console(config)# qos trust dscp console(config)# qos dscp-mutation672 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY DSCP Rewrite Use the DSCP Rewrite page to rewrite the DSCP tags for incoming traffic, when different DSCP values are used in the incoming and outgoing domains. Changing the DSCP value used in one domain to the DSCP value used in the other domain preserves the priority of traffic used in the first domain. As an example, assume that there are three levels of service: Silver, Gold, and Platinum. The DSCP incoming values used to mark these levels are 10, 20, and 30 respectively. If this traffic is forwarded to another service provider that has the same three levels of service, but uses DSCP values 16, 24, and 48, the values set in the DSCP Rewrite page are used to change the incoming values to the outgoing values. These settings are active globally when the system is in QoS Basic mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 673 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To map DSCP In values to DSCP Out values: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > DSCP Rewrite in the tree view to display the DSCP Rewrite page. Figure 22-9. DSCP Rewrite674 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 For each DSCP In value (DSCP value of the incoming packet) that needs to be rewritten to an alternative value, set a DSCP Out value. Assigning DSCP Rewrite Values Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the DSCP Rewrite page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Interface Settings QoS Trust mode can be configured on each port of the switch, as follows: • QoS Trust State Disabled on an Interface — All inbound traffic on the port is mapped to the best effort queue and no classification/prioritization takes place. • QoS Trust State Enabled on an Interface — Port prioritized traffic on ingress is based on the system- wide configured trusted mode, which is either CoS Trusted mode or DSCP Trusted mode. Table 22-9. DSCP Rewrite CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos map dscp-mutation indscp to out-dscp no qos map dscp-mutation [in-dscp] Configures the DSCP to DSCP Mutation table. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# qos map dscp-mutation 1 2 4 5 6 to 63Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 675 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define QoS Trust for an interface: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Basic Mode > Interface Settings in the tree view to display the Interface Settings: Summary page. Figure 22-10. Interface Settings: Summary Trust mode is displayed for each interface on the selected unit. 2 To change the QoS trust state for an interface, click Edit, and select an interface on a unit. 3 Enable/disable the QoS Trust State.676 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Assigning Interface Settings Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for configuring fields in the Interface Settings page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Configuring QoS Basic Mode Using CLI Commands The following is a sample script configuring QoS Basic mode. Table 22-10. Interface Settings CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos trust no qos trust Enables each port trust state while the system is in the basic QoS mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the trust state on each port. show qos interface[buffers | queueing | policers | shapers | rate-limit] [interface-id]] Displays QoS information on the interface. console(config)# interface gi1/0/15 console(config-if)# qos trust Table 22-11. Sample CLI Script to Configure QoS Basic Mode CLI Command Description console#configure console(config)# qos basic Enable QoS in Basic mode. console(config)#mac access-list extended MAC1 Define an ACL named "MAC1" console(config-mac-a1)#deny 00:00:00:00:00:11 00:00:00:00:00:ff any MAC1 discards all traffic with source MAC 00:00:00:00:00:XX addresses. console(config-mac-a1)# permit any any MAC1 permits all other traffic. console(config-mac-a1)#exit Exit ACL mode.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 677 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY console(config)#interface gi1/0/1 Enter Interface mode on port gi1/0/1. console(config-if)#service-acl input mac1 Bind MAC1 to port gi1/0/1. Table 22-11. Sample CLI Script to Configure QoS Basic Mode (Continued) CLI Command Description678 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Advanced Mode This section describes QoS Advanced mode. It contains the following topics: • Advanced Mode Overview • Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode • DSCP Mapping • Class Mapping • QoS Policers • Policy Binding Advanced Mode Overview In Advanced mode, the switch uses policies to support per-flow QoS. A policy and its components have the following characteristics and relationships: • A policy contains one or more class maps. • A class map defines a flow with one or more associated ACLs. Packets that match the ACL rules (ACEs) in a class map with Permit (forward) action, belong to the same flow, and are subject to the same quality of service action. A policy can contain one or more flows, each with a user-defined QoS action. • The QoS of a class map (flow) may be enforced by the associated policer. There are two type of policers, as described in "Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands" on page 684. • Per-flow QoS actions are applied to flows by binding the policy maps to the desired ports. A policy map and its class maps can be bound to one or more ports, but each port is bound with, at the most, one policy map. The following points should be considered: • An ACL can be configured to one or more class maps, regardless of policies. • A class map can belong to only one policy map. • When a class map, using a single policer, is bound to multiple ports, each port has its own instance of the policer. Each instance applies the QoS actions on the class map (flow) at a port independent of each other.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 679 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • If you bind a policy map to more than one port and one of its classes contains a single policer, all policy map rules will be multiplied per port (using up more TCAM resources). • An aggregate policer applies the QoS to all of its flows in aggregation, regardless of policies and ports. Advanced QoS settings consist of the following elements: • Rules — All frames matching a single group of rules are considered to be a flow. • Actions — To be applied to frames in each flow that match the rules. – Policers — See "Single Policers" on page 689 – Aggregate Policers — "Aggregate Policers" on page 687 – Trust —"Interface Settings" on page 674, "Policy Class Maps" on page 692 – Set DSCP/CoS — "Policy Class Maps" on page 692 – Set Queue — "DSCP Mapping" on page 680 • Binding — Combination of rules and actions that are bound to one or more interfaces. Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode To configure Advanced QoS mode, perform the following: 1 Select Advanced mode for the system in the QoS Mode page. 2 If external DSCP values are different from those used on incoming packets, map the external values to internal values in the DSCP Rewrite page. 3 Create ACLs, as described in "Network Security" on page 97. 4 When ACLs are defined, create class maps and associate the ACLs with them in the Class Mapping pages. 5 Create a policy map in the Policy Class Maps pages, and associate the policy map with one or more class maps. Specify the QoS action, if needed, for example by assigning a policer to a class map, when you associate the class map to the policy.680 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY a Single Policer — Create a policy that associates a class map with a single policer in the Policy Table pages and the Class Mapping pages. Within the policy, define the single policer. b Aggregate Policer — Create a QoS action for each flow. This action sends all matching frames to the same policer (aggregate policer), defined in the Aggregate Policer pages. Create a policy that associates a class map with the aggregate policer in the Policy Table pages. 6 Bind the policy to an interface in the Policy Binding pages. DSCP Mapping When a policer is assigned to a class map (flow), you can specify the action to take when the amount of traffic in the flow(s) exceeds the QoS-specified limits. The portion of the traffic that causes the flow to exceed its QoS limit is referred to as out-of-profile packets. If the exceed action is Remark DSCP (as opposed to Drop), the switch rewrites the original DSCP value of the out-of-profile IP packets to a new value, based on the values entered in the DSCP Mapping page. The switch uses the new values to assign resources and egress queues to these packets. The switch physically replaces the original DSCP value in the out-of-profile packets with the new DSCP value. To use the Remark DSCP exceed action, set the DSCP Out value in the DSCP Mapping page. Otherwise the action is null, because the DSCP value in the packet is rewritten to the original DSCP value, set by factory default.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 681 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To set new DSCP values: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > DSCP Mapping to display the DSCP Mapping page. Figure 22-11. DSCP Mapping 2 If the Exceed Action is Out-of-Profile (in the Policy Class Maps page) or Remark DSCP (in the Aggregate Policy page), the DSCP In values are rewritten with the DSCP Out values. Set the DSCP Out values as required.682 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Configuring DSCP Mapping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the DSCP Mapping page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Class Mapping A Class Map defines a traffic flow associated with ACL(s). A MAC-based ACL, IP-based ACL, and an IPv6-based ACL can be combined into a class map. Class maps are configured to match packet criteria on a match-all or match-any basis. They are matched to packets on a first-fit basis, meaning that the action associated with the first-matched class map is the action performed by the system. Packets that match the same class map belong to the same flow. There are two possible types of matching: • match-all — Traffic matches class map if it matches IP/IPV6 and MAC ACLs • match-any — Traffic matches class map if it matches at least one of the ACLs If a more complex set of rules is needed, several class maps can be grouped into a super-group called a policy (see "Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands" on page 684). Table 22-12. DSCP Mapping CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos map policed-dscp dscp-list to dscp-mark-down no qos map policed-dscp [dscplist] Configures the policed-DSCP map for remarking purposes. Use the no form of this command to restore the default configuration. console(config)# qos map policed-dscp 3 to 43Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 683 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To define a class map: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Class Mapping to display the Class Mapping: Summary page. Figure 22-12. Class Mapping: Summary The previously-defined class maps are displayed. 2 To add a class map, click Add. A new class map is added by selecting one or two ACLs and assigning them a class map name. If a class map has two ACLs, specify that a frame must match both ACLs, or that it must match either one or both of the ACLs selected. 3 Enter the parameters. – Class Map Name — Enter the name of a new class map.684 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Match ACL Type — Enter the criteria that a packet must match in order to belong to the flow defined by the class map. The possible options are: • IP — A packet must match either of the IP-based ACLs in the class map. • MAC — A packet must match the MAC-based ACL in the class map. • IP and MAC — A packet must match the IP-based ACL and the MAC-based ACL in the class map (match-all). • IP or MAC — A packet must match either the IP-based ACL or the MAC-based ACL in the class map (match-any). – IPACL — Select the IPv4-based ACL or the IPv6-based ACL for the class map. – MAC ACL — Select the MAC-based ACL for the class map. – Preferred ACL — Select whether packets are first matched to an IP-based ACL or a MAC-based ACL. Defining Class Mapping Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Class Mapping pages. Table 22-13. Class Mapping CLI Commands CLI Command Description class class-map-name [accessgroup acl-name] no class class-map-name Defines a traffic classification and enters the Policy-map Class Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to detach a class map from the policy map. class-map class-map-name [match-all|match-any] no class-map class-map-name Creates or modifies a class map and enters the Class-map Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete a class map.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 685 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: QoS Policers This section describes QoS policers. It contains the following topics: • QoS Policers Overview • Aggregate Policers • Single Policers match access-group acl-name no match access-group acl-name Defines the match criteria for classifying traffic. Use the no form of this command to delete the match criteria. show class-map [class-map-name] Displays information about the class map. console(config)# qos advanced console(config)# class-map class1 match-all console(config-cmap)# match access-group enterprise console(config-cmap)# do show class-map class1 Class Map matchAll class1 Match access-group enterprise Table 22-13. Class Mapping CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description686 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Policers Overview The rate of traffic that matches a pre-defined set of rules can be measured, and limits, such as limiting the rate of file-transfer traffic that is allowed on a port, can be enforced. This is done by using the ACLs in the class map(s) to match the desired pattern of traffic, and by using a policer to apply QoS on the matching traffic. A policer is configured with a QoS specification. There are two kinds of policers: • Single Policer — A single policer applies the QoS to a single class map, and to a single flow, based on the policer's QoS specification. When a class map, using a single policer, is bound to multiple ports, each port has its own instance of the single policer; each applying the QoS on the class map (flow) at ports that are otherwise independent of each other. A single policer is created in the Policy Table and Policy Class Maps pages. • Aggregate Policer — An aggregate policer applies QoS to one or more class maps, and to one or more flows. An aggregation policer can support class maps from various policies. An aggregate policer applies QoS to all its flow(s) in aggregation, regardless of policies and ports. An aggregate policer is created in the Aggregate Policer pages. An aggregate policer is defined if the policer is to be shared with more than one class. Each policer is defined with its own QoS specification, and is composed of a combination of the following parameters: • Committed Information Rate (CIR) — A maximum allowed rate of traffic, measured in Kbps. • Committed Burst Size (CBS) — An amount of traffic, measured in bytes, which is allowed to pass as a temporary burst, even if it is above the defined maximum rate. • Exceed Action — An action to be applied to frames that are over the limits (called out-of-profile traffic). These frames can be forwarded as is, dropped, or forwarded, after rewriting their DSCP value with a value that marks them as lower-priority frames for all subsequent handling within the device. A policer is assigned to a class map when a class map is added to a policy.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 687 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Aggregate Policers To define an aggregate policer: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Aggregate Policer to display the Aggregate Policer: Summary page. Figure 22-13. Aggregate Policer: Summary The existing aggregate policers are displayed. 2 To add an aggregate policer, click Add, and enter the fields. – Aggregate Policer Name — Enter the name of the Aggregate Policer. – Committed Information Rate (CIR) — Enter the maximum bandwidth allowed in bits per second. See the description of this field in "Bandwidth" on page 664. – Committed Burst Size (CBS) — Enter the maximum burst size (even if it goes beyond the CIR) in bytes. See the description of this in the "Bandwidth" on page 664.688 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Exceed Action — Select the action to be performed on incoming packets that exceed the CIR. The possible options are: • None — No action is performed on packets exceeding the defined CIR value. • Drop — Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped. • Remark DSCP — The DSCP values of packets exceeding the defined CIR value are rewritten to a value entered in the DSCP Mapping pages. Defining Aggregate Policers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Aggregate Policer pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-14. Aggregate Policer CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte[exceed-action {drop|policed-dscp-transmit}] no qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name Defines the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic classes within the same policy map. Use the no form of this command to remove an existing aggregate policer. console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000 9600 exceed-action dropDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 689 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Single Policers Defining Aggregate Policers Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Aggregate Policer pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Single policers are created by: 1 Create a policy in the Police Table pages 2 Configure the policy in the Policy Class Maps pages. Here the policy class can be designated as containing a single policer, or it can be designated as containing Aggregate policers. Policy Table A policy can consist of one of the following: • One or more class maps of ACLs that define the traffic flows in the policy. • One or more aggregate policers that apply the QoS to the traffic flows in the policy. Table 22-15. Aggregate Policer CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte[exceed-action {drop|policed-dscp-transmit}] no qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name Defines the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic classes within the same policy map. Use the no form of this command to remove an existing aggregate policer. console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000 9600 exceed-action drop690 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Only those policies that are bound to an interface are active (see the Policy Binding pages). After a policy has been added, class maps can be added in the Policy Table pages. To create a QoS policy: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Table to display the Policy Table: Summary page. Figure 22-14. Policy Table: Summary The previously-defined policies are displayed. 2 To create a policy, click Add. 3 Enter the name of the new policy in the Policy Name field. 4 Add class maps to the new policy in the Policy Class Maps page.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 691 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Defining Policies Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policy Table page. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-16. Policy Table CLI Commands CLI Command Description policy-map policy-map-name no policy-map policy-mapname Creates a policy map and enters the Policymap Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete a policy map. console(config)# policy-map policy1692 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Policy Class Maps One or more class maps can be added to a policy. A class map defines the type of packets that are considered to belong to the same traffic flow. To add a class map to a policy: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Class Maps to display the Policy Class Maps: Summary page. Figure 22-15. Policy Class Maps: Summary 2 Select a policy in the Policy Name field. The class maps in that policy are displayed. 3 To add a class map, click Add. 4 Enter the parameters. – Policy Name — Select the policy to which the class map is being added.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 693 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Class Map Name — Select an existing class map to be associated with the policy. Class maps are created in the Class Mapping pages. – Action Type — Select the action regarding the ingress CoS and/or DSCP value of all the matching packets. • None — Ignore the ingress CoS and/or DSCP value. The matching packets are sent as best effort. • Trust CoS, DSCP — If this option is selected, the switch will trust the CoS or DSCP value of the matching packet. If a packet is an IP packet, the switch will put the packet in the egress queue, based on its DSCP value and the DSCP to Queue mapping. Otherwise, the egress queue of the packet is based on the packet's CoS value and the CoS to Queue mapping. • Set — See the description of this field below. – Set — If this option is selected, enter a New Value, which determines the egress queue of the matching packets: • DSCP — If DSCP is selected, the new DSCP value and the DSCP to Queue mapping determines the egress queue of the matching packets. • Queue — If Queue is selected, the new value is the egress queue number for all matching packets. • CoS — If CoS is selected, the CoS priority value and the CoS to Queue mapping determines the egress queue of the matching packets. – Police Type — Available in Layer 2 Mode only. Select the policer type for the policy. The possible options are: • None — No policy is used. • Single — The policer for the policy is a single policer. • Aggregate — The policer for the policy is an aggregate policer. – Aggregate Policer — Available in Layer 2 Mode only. If Police Type is Aggregate, select a previously-defined aggregate policer. If Police Type is Single, enter the following QoS parameters: – Ingress Committed Information Rate (CIR) (Range: 100 - 1000000) — Enter the CIR in Kbps. See its description in the Bandwidth pages.694 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Ingress Committed Burst Size (CBS) (Range: 3000 - 16769020) — Enter the CBS in bytes. See its description in the Bandwidth pages. – Exceed Action — Select the action assigned to incoming packets exceeding the CIR. The possible options are: • None — No action. • Drop — Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped. • Out-of-Profile DSCP — Packets, exceeding the defined CIR, are forwarded with a new DSCP, derived from the DSCP Mapping pages. Defining Policy Class Maps Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policy Class Maps pages. Table 22-17. Policy Class Maps CLI Commands CLI Command Description class class-map-name [accessgroup acl-name] no class class-map-name Defines a traffic classification and enters the Policy-map Class Configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to detach a class map from the policy map. trust [cos-dscp] no trust Configures the trust state, which selects the value that QoS uses as the source of the internal DSCP value. Use the no form of this command to return to the default trust state. set {dscp new-dscp|queue queueid|cos new-cos} no set Sets new values in the IP packet. Use the no form of this command to return to the default values. police committed-rate-kbps committed-burst-byte [exceedaction {drop|policed-dscptransmit}] no police Defines the policer for classified traffic. Use the no form of this command to remove a policer.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 695 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY The following is an example of the CLI commands: qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name committed-rate-kbps excessburst-byte [exceed-action {drop|policed-dscp-transmit}] no qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name Defines the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic classes. Use the no form of this command to remove an existing aggregate policer. show policy-map [policy-mapname] Displays all policy maps or a specific policy map. console(config)# policy-map policy1 console(config-pmap)# class class1 access-group enterprise console(config-pmap)# trust cos-dscp console(config-pmap)# set dscp 56 console(config-pmap)# class class1 console(config-pmap-c)# police 124000 9600 exceed-action drop console(config)# qos aggregate-policer policer1 124000 9600 exceed-action drop Table 22-17. Policy Class Maps CLI Commands (Continued) CLI Command Description696 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Policy Binding After policies are created, they must be bound to interfaces (ports or LAGs).When a policy is bound to a specific interface, it becomes active on it (subject to time range restrictions). Only one policy can be active on a single interface, but a single policy can be bound to more than one interface. When a policy is bound to an interface, it filters and applies QoS to ingress traffic that belongs to the flows defined in the policy. The policy does not apply to traffic egress to the same port. To edit a policy, it must first be removed (unbound) from all those ports to which it is bound. To define policy binding: 1 Click Quality of Service > QoS Advanced Mode > Policy Binding to display the Policy Binding: Summary page. Figure 22-16. Policy Binding: SummaryDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 697 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Previously-defined policy bindings are displayed. 2 To bind a policy to an interface, click Add. 3 Select the interface assigned to the policy. 4 Select the Policy Name to be activated on the interface. Defining Policy Binding Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policy Binding pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-18. Policy Binding CLI Commands CLI Command Description service-policy input policy-map-name no service-policy input Applies a policy map to the input of a particular interface. Use the no form of this command to detach a policy map from an interface. console(config-if)# service-policy input policy1698 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY QoS Statistics This section describes how to view and manage QoS statistics. It contains the following topics: • Policer Statistics • Aggregated Policer • Queues StatisticsDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 699 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Policer Statistics A Single Policer is bound to a class map from a single policy. An Aggregate Policer is bound to one or more class maps from one or more policies. Use the Policer Statistics pages to view the number of in-profile and out-ofprofile packets received from an interface that meet the conditions defined in the class map of a policy. To view policer statistics: 1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Policer Statistics to display the Policer Statistics: Summary page. Figure 22-17. Policer Statistics: Summary The following statistics for the previously-defined counters are displayed: – Interface — Statistics are displayed for this interface. – Policy— Statistics are displayed for this policy.700 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY – Class Map — Statistics are displayed for this class map. – In-Profile Bytes — Number of in-profile bytes received. – Out-of-Profile Bytes — Number of out-of-profile bytes received. 2 Click Add to add a new counter that applies to another policy-class map. 3 Enter the fields: – Interface — Select the interface for which the counter is defined. – Policy - Class Map Name — Select a policy class map pair. Defining Policer Statistics Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Policer Statistics pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-19. Policer Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos statistics policer policymap-name class-map-name no qos statistics policer policy-map-name class-map-name Enables counting in-profile and out-ofprofile bytes vis-a-vis a policer. Use the no form of this command to disable counting. clear qos statistics Clears the statistics show qos statistics Displays the statistics console(config-if)# qos statistics policer policy1 class1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 701 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Aggregated Policer To view aggregated policer statistics: 1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Aggregate Policer to display the Aggregate Policer: Summary page. Figure 22-18. Aggregate Policer: Summary The following statistics for the previously-defined counters are displayed: – Aggregate Policer Name — Policer on which statistics are based. – In-Profile Bytes — Number of in-profile packets that were received. – Out-of-Profile Bytes — Number of out-of-profile packets that were received. 2 To add a new counter that applies to another aggregate policer, click Add. 702 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 3 Select an aggregate policer in the Aggregate Policer Name field. Defining Aggregate Policer Statistics Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the Aggregate Policer Statistics pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Queues Statistics Queue statistics include statistics of forwarded and dropped packets, based on interface, queue, and drop precedence. Lowest drop precedence has the lowest probability of being dropped. Table 22-20. Aggregate Policer Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos statistics aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name no qos statistics aggregatepolicer aggregate-policer-name Enables counting in-profile and out-of-profile bytes vis-a-vis an aggregate policer. Use the no form of this command to disable counting. clear qos statistics Clears the statistics show qos statistics Displays the statistics console (config)# qos statistics aggregate-policer policer1 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 703 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY To view Queue Statistics: 1 Click Quality of Service QoS Statistics Queues Statistics to display the Queues Statistics: Summary. Figure 22-19. Queues Statistics: Summary The statistics for previously-defined counters are displayed. – Counter Set —Number of counter. – Port —Number of port. – Queue —Number of queue. – Total Packets —Number of packets forwarded or tail dropped. – Tail Drop Packets —Percentage of packets that were tail dropped.704 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGQoS.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 2 To add a new counter, click Add, and enter the fields: – Counter Set—Select the counter set. The possible options are: • Set 1 — Displays the statistics that contains all interfaces and queues with a high DP (Drop Precedence). • Set 2 — Displays the statistics that contains all interfaces and queues with a low DP. – Interface — Select the unit/interface for which Queue statistics are displayed. – Queue — Select the queue on which packets were forwarded or tail dropped. Defining QoS Statistics Using CLI Commands The following table summarizes the CLI commands for setting the fields in the QoS Statistics pages. The following is an example of the CLI commands: Table 22-21. QoS Statistics CLI Commands CLI Command Description qos statistics queues set-number {queue|all} {dp|all} {[gigabitethernet|tengigabitethe rnet]port-number|all} no qos statistics queues setnumber Enables QoS statistics for output queues. Use the no form of this command to disable QoS statistics for output queues. clear qos statistics Clears the statistics show qos statistics Displays the statistics console(config)# qos statistics queues 1 all all allDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 705 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Glossary Figure 23-20. This glossary contains key technical words of interest. A Access Mode Specifies the method by which user access is granted to the system. Access Profiles Allows network managers to define profiles and rules for accessing the switch module. Access to management functions can be limited to user groups, which are defined by the following criteria: • Ingress interfaces • Source IP address or Source IP subnets ACL Access Control List. Allow network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress ports. Aggregated VLAN Groups several VLANs into a single aggregated VLAN. Aggregating VLANs enables routers to respond to ARP requests for nodes located on different subVLANs belonging to the same Super VLAN. Routers respond with their MAC address. ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses. ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit. A custom chip designed for a specific application. Asset Tag Specifies the user-defined switch module reference. A BCDE F GHI L MNOP Q RSTUVW706 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Authentication Profiles Sets of rules which that enables login to and authentication of users and applications. Auto-negotiation Allows 10/100 Mpbs or 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to establish for the following features: • Duplex/Half Duplex mode • Flow Control • Speed B Back Pressure A mechanism used with Half Duplex mode that enables a port not to receive a message. Backplane The main BUS that carries information in the switch module. Backup Configuration Files Contains a backup copy of the switch module configuration. The Backup file changes when the Running Configuration file or the Startup Configuration file is copied to the Backup file. Bandwidth Bandwidth specifies the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time. For digital switch modules, bandwidth is defined in Bits per Second (bps) or Bytes per Second. Bandwidth Assignments The amount of bandwidth assigned to a specific application, user, or interface. Baud The number of signaling elements transmitted each second. Best Effort Traffic is assigned to the lowest priority queue, and packet delivery is not guaranteed.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 707 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Boot Version The boot version. BootP Bootstrap Protocol. Enables a workstation to discover its IP address, an IP address of a BootP server on a network, or a configuration file loaded into the boot of a switch module. BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit. Provide bridging information in a message format. BPDUs are sent across switch module information with in Spanning Tree configuration. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities, and forwarding costs. Bridge A device that connect two networks. Bridges are hardware specific, however they are protocol independent. Bridges operate at Layer 1 and Layer 2 levels. Broadcast Domain device sets that receive Broadcast frames originating from any device within a designated set. Routers bind Broadcast domains, because routers do not forward Broadcast frames. Broadcasting A method of transmitting packets to all ports on a network. Broadcast Storm An excessive amount of Broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port. Forwarded message responses are heaped onto the network, overloading network resources or causing the network to time out. For more information about Broadcast storms, see "LACP Parameters" on page 511. C CDB Configuration Data Base. A file containing a device’s configuration information.708 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Class of Service Class of Service (CoS). Class of Service is the 802.1p priority scheme. CoS provides a method for tagging packets with priority information. A CoS value between 0-7 is added to the Layer II header of packets, where zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest. A overlapping transmission of two or more packets that collide. The data transmitted cannot be used, and the session is restarted. CLI Command Line Interface. A set of line commands used to configure the system. For more information on using the CLI, see Using the CLI. Communities Specifies a group of users which retains the same system access rights. CPU Central Processing Unit. The part of a computer that processes information. CPUs are composed of a control unit and an ALU. D DHCP Client A device using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters, such as a network address. DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping expands network security by providing firewall security between untrusted interfaces and DHCP servers. DSCP DiffServe Code Point (DSCP). DSCP provides a method of tagging IP packets with QoS priority information. Domain A group of computers and devices on a network that are grouped with common rules and procedures. Duplex Mode Permits simultaneous transmissions and reception of data. There are two different types of duplex mode:Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 709 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY • Full Duplex Mode — Permits for bisynchronous communication, for example, a telephone. Two parties can transmit information at the same time. • Half Duplex Mode — Permits asynchronous communication, for example, a walkie-talkie. Only one party can transmit information at a time. Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) • Allows automatic assignment of users to VLANs during the RADIUS server authentication. When a user is authenticated by the RADIUS server, the user is automatically joined to the VLAN configured on the RADIUS server. E Egress Ports Ports from which network traffic is transmitted. End System An end user device on a network. Ethernet Ethernet is standardized as per IEEE 802.3. Ethernet is the most common implemented LAN standard. Supports data transfer rates of Mpbs, where 10, 100 or 1000 Mbps is supported. EWS Embedded Web Server. Provides device management via a standard web browser. Embedded Web Servers are used in addition to or in place of a CLI or NMS. F FFT Fast Forward Table. Provides information about forwarding routes. If a packet arrives to a device with a known route, the packet is forwarded via a route listed in the FFT. If there is not a known route, the CPU forwards the packet and updates the FFT.710 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY FIFO First In First Out. A queuing process where the first packet in the queue is the first packet out of the queue. Flapping Flapping occurs when an interfaces state is constantly changing. For example, an STP port constantly changes from listening to learning to forwarding. This may cause traffic loss. Flow Control Enables lower speed devices to communicate with higher speed devices, that is, that the higher speed device refrains from sending packets. Fragment Ethernet packets smaller than 576 bits. Frame Packets containing the header and trailer information required by the physical medium. G GARP General Attributes Registration Protocol. Registers client stations into a Multicast domain. Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet transmits at 1000 Mbps, and is compatible with existing 10/100 Mbps Ethernet standards. GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol. Registers client stations into a VLANs. H HOL Head of Line. Packets are queued. Packets at the head of the queue are forwarded before packets at the end of the line.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 711 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Host A computer that acts as a source of information or services to other computers. HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol. Transmits HTML documents between servers and clients on the internet. I IC Integrated Circuit. Integrated Circuits are small electronic devices composed from semiconductor material. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. Allows gateway or destination host to communicate with a source host, for example, to report a processing error. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. An Engineering organization that develops communications and networking standards. IEEE 802.1d Used in the Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE 802.1d supports MAC bridging to avoid network loops. IEEE 802.1p Prioritizes network traffic at the data-link/MAC sublayer. IEEE 802.1Q Defines the operation of VLAN Bridges that permit the definition, operation, and administration of VLANs within Bridged LAN infrastructures. IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping examines IGMP frame contents, when they are forwarded by the device from work stations to an upstream Multicast router. From the frame, the device identifies work stations configured for Multicast sessions, and which Multicast routers are sending Multicast frames.712 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Image File System images are saved in two Flash sectors called images (Image 1 and Image 2). The active image stores the active copy; while the other image stores a second copy. Ingress Port Ports on which network traffic is received. IP Internet Protocol. Specifies the format of packets and there addressing method. IP addresses packets and forwards the packets to the correct port. IP Address Internet Protocol Address. A unique address assigned to a network device with two or more interconnected LANs or WANs. IP Version 6 (IPv6) A version of IP addressing with longer addresses than the traditional IPv4. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long, whereas IPv4 addresses are 32 bits; allowing a much larger address space. ISATAP Intra-Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol . ISATAP is an automatic overlay tunneling mechanism that uses the underlying IPv4 network as a non-Broadcast/multicast access link layer for IPv6. ISATAP is designed for transporting IPv6 packets within a site where a native IPv6 infrastructure is not yet available. L LAG Link Aggregated Group. Aggregates ports or VLANs into a single virtual port or VLAN. For more information on LAGs, see Defining LAG Membership. LAN Local Area Networks. A network contained within a single room, building, campus or other limited geographical area.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 713 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Layer 2 Data Link Layer or MAC Layer. Contains the physical address of a client or server station. Layer 2 processing is faster than Layer 3 processing because there is less information to process. Layer 3 Establishes a connections and ensures that all data arrives to their destination. Packets inspected at the Layer 3 level are analyzed and forwarding decisions, based on their applications. LLDP-MED Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery. LLDP allows network managers to troubleshoot and enhance network management by discovering and maintaining network topologies over multi-vendor environments. MED increases network flexibility by allowing different IP systems to co-exist on a single network LLDP. Load Balancing Enables the even distribution of data or processing packets across available network resources. For example, load balancing may distribute the incoming packets evenly to all servers, or redirect the packets to the next available server. M MAC Address Media Access Control Address. The MAC Address is a hardware specific address that identifies each network node. MAC Address Learning MAC Address Learning characterizes a learning bridge, in which the packet’s source MAC address is recorded. Packets destined for that address are forwarded only to the bridge interface on which that address is located. Packets addressed to unknown addresses are forwarded to every bridge interface. MAC Address Learning minimizes traffic on the attached LANs. MAC Layer A sub-layer of the Data Link Control (DTL) layer.714 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Mask A filter that includes or excludes certain values, for example parts of an IP address. For example, Unit 2 is inserted in the first minute of a ten-minute cycle, and Unit 1 is inserted in fifth minute of the same cycle, the units are considered the same age. MD5 Message Digest 5. An algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash. MD5 is a variation of MD4, and increases MD4 security. MD5 verifies the integrity of the communication, authenticates the origin of the communication. MDI Media Dependent Interface. A cable used for end stations. MDIX Media Dependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX). A cable used for hubs and switches. MIB Management Information Base. MIBs contain information describing specific aspects of network components. Multicast Transmits copies of a single packet to multiple ports. N NA Neighbor Advertisement. ND Neighbor Discovery. NS Neighbor Solicitation. NMS Network Management System. An interface that provides a method of managing a system.Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 715 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Node A network connection endpoint or a common junction for multiple network lines. Nodes include: • Processors • Controllers • Workstations O OID Organizationally Unique Identifiers. Identifiers associated with a Voice VLAN. OUI Object Identifier. Used by SNMP to identify managed objects. In the SNMP Manager/Agent network management paradigm, each managed object must have an OID to identify it. P Packets Blocks of information for transmission in packet switched systems. PDU Protocol Data Unit. A data unit specified in a layer protocol consisting of protocol control information and layer user data. PING Packet Internet Groper. Verifies if a specific IP address is available. A packet is sent to another IP address and waits for a reply. Port Physical ports provide connecting components that allow microprocessors to communicate with peripheral equipment. Port Mirroring Monitors and mirrors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from one port to a monitoring port. For more information on port mirroring, see Defining Port Mirroring Sessions.716 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Protocol A set of rules that governs how devices exchange information across networks. PVE Protocol VLAN Edge. A port can be defined as a Private VLAN Edge (PVE) port of an uplink port, so that it will be isolated from other ports within the same VLAN. Q QoS Quality of Service. QoS allows network managers to decide how and what network traffic is forwarded according to priorities, application types, and source and destination addresses. Query Extracts information from a database and presents the information for use. R RA RADIUS Advertisement. RD RADIUS Discovery. RS Router Solicitation. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. A method for authenticating system users, and tracking connection time. RMON Remote Monitoring. Provides network information to be collected from a single workstation. RouterDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 717 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY A device that connects to separate networks. Routers forward packets between two or more networks. Routers operate at a Layer 3 level. RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. Detects and uses network topologies that allow a faster convergence of the spanning tree, without creating forwarding loops. Running Configuration File Contains all startup configuration file commands, as well as all commands entered during the current session. After the switch module is powered down or rebooted, all commands stored in the Running Configuration file are lost. S Segmentation Divides LANs into separate LAN segments for bridging. Segmentation eliminates LAN bandwidth limitations. Server A central computer that provides services to other computers on a network. Services may include file storage and access to applications. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. Manages LANs. SNMP based software communicates with network devices with embedded SNMP agents. SNMP agents gather network activity and device status information, and send the information back to a workstation. SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol. SNTP assures accurate network switch clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. SoC System on a Chip. An ASIC that contains an entire system. For example, a telecom SoC application can contain a microprocessor, digital signal processor, RAM, and ROM.718 Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Spanning Tree Protocol Prevents loops in network traffic. The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides tree topography for any arrangement of bridges. STP provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. SSH Secure Shell. Permits logging to another computer over a network, execute commands on a remote machine, and move files from one machine to another. Secure Shell provides strong authentication and secure communications methods over insecure channels. Startup Configuration Retains the exact switch module configuration when the switch module is powered down or rebooted. Subnet Sub-network. Subnets are portions of a network that share a common address component. On TCP/IP networks, devices that share a prefix are part of the same subnet. For example, all devices with a prefix of 157.100.100.100 are part of the same subnet. Subnet Mask Used to mask all or part of an IP address used in a subnet address. Switch Filters and forwards packets between LAN segments. Switches support any packet protocol type. T TCP/IP Transmissions Control Protocol. Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams. TCP guarantees packet delivery, and guarantees packets are transmitted and received in the order their sent. Telnet Terminal Emulation Protocol. Enables system users to log in and use resources on remote networks. Dell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 719 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\CxUGGlossary.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Uses User Data Protocol (UDP) without security features to transfer files. Trap A message sent by the SNMP that indicates that system event has occurred. Trunking Link Aggregation. Optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single trunk (aggregated groups). U UDP User Data Protocol. Transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery. Unicast A form of routing that transmits one packet to one user. V VLAN Virtual Local Area Networks. Logical subgroups with a Local Area Network (LAN) created via software rather than defining a hardware solution. VoIP Voice over IP. W WAN Wide Area Networks. Networks that cover a large geographical area. Wildcard Mask Specifies which IP address bits are used, and which bits are ignored. A wild switch module mask of 255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that all the bits are important. 720 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Index Numerics 24/48 G Ports 37 802.1ab (LLDP-MED) 28 802.1d 22 802.1Q 476, 482 A AC unit 44 Acceptable Frame Type 471 Access Control Lists 31 Access mode 329 Access ports 469 Access Profile Rules (ACEs) 262 Access profiles 261, 272 Accessing the device through the CLI 71 ACE, IPv4 110 ACL binding 123 ACL, IPv4 109 ACL, IPv6 118 ACLs 31, 103 Active users 275 Address pool 301 Address Resolution Protocol 249, 706 Address Tables 422 Administrator Buttons 91 Advanced QoS 25 Advanced Switch Configuration 67 Aggregate Policer 686, 701 Aggregated VLAN 706 Alarms 638 Anycast 178, 183 Apply&Save 91 ARP 249, 251, 706 ARP inspection 31 ARP, dynamic inspection 560 ARP, dynamic inspection list 564 ARP, dynamic inspection list entries 566 ARP, global settings 562 ARP, trusted interfaces 570 ARP, VLAN settings 568 Asset 156 Assignment to hardware queues 651 Authentication methods 134 Authentication profiles 269721 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Auto update, configuration/image file 338 Automatic aging for MAC addresses 19 Auto-Negotiation 18 B Back panel 39, 44 Back Pressure 17, 386 Bandwidth 664 Boot Image Download 85 Booting the Switch 60 BootP 24, 708 BootP and DHCP Clients 24 BPDU 438, 456, 708 BPDU Guard 23 BPDU Handling 438 Bridge Multicast Forward All 525 Bridge Multicast Groups 521 Bridge Protocol Data Unit 708 Broadcast 179, 183 Broadcast Storm Control 20 Buttons 38 C Cables testing 256 CBC 315 Cipher Block-Chaining 315 Class Mapping 682 Class of Service 709 Classic lock 98 Classic STP 435 CLI 27, 68, 71, 261 CLI macro 31 Clock Source 181 Command Line Interface 27 Command Mode Overview 68 Configuration file 354 Configuration file download 352 Configuration using the Setup Wizard 61 Configuration Work Flow 58 Configuring Login Banners 78 Configuring the Stack 61 Configuring the Switch 57 Connecting the Switch to the Terminal 59 Console 269, 272 Console access 291 Copying files 361 CoS 709 CoS 802.1p support 24 CoS to Queue 660 Counter Summary 612 CPU Utilization 648722 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY D Daylight Savings Times 170 Default domain names 245 Default Gateway, IPv6 226 Defining device information 156 Denied ACEs Counters 608 Device representation 89 Device structure 36 DHCP 572 DHCP client 24, 297 DHCP limitations 575 DHCP Relay 586 DHCP Relay, global settings 589 DHCP Relay, limitations 587 DHCP Relay, Option 82 Overview 587 DHCP server 32, 297, 299 DHCP server properties 298 DHCP server, retreiving an IP address 72 DHCP Snooping 31, 573 DHCP, global parameters 575 DHCP, trusted interfaces 581 DHCP, VLAN settings 579 DiffServe Code Point 709 DNS 28, 242 Domain 709 Domain Name System 28, 242 Dot1x 29 Dot1x Authentication 132 Download, boot image 85 Download, system image 83 Download, TFTP 353 Download, USB/HTTP 351 Downloading software 80, 337 DSCP 709 DSCP Mapping 680 DSCP Rewrite 671 DST Times 170 Duplex mode 709 DVA 134, 710 Dynamic ACL Assignment/Dynamic Policy Assignment (DACL/DPA) 31 Dynamic Addresses 427 Dynamic addresses 428 Dynamic Policy/ACL Assignment 134 Dynamic VLAN Assignment 141 Dynamic VLAN Assignment (DVA) 134, 710 E E-911 541 EAP 29, 132 EAP Statistics 622723 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Egress ports 710 Egress Shaping Rates 664 Emergency Call Service 541 Enable 282 Enable passwords 281 End System 710 Erase FLASH File 81 Etherlike Statistics 616 Ethernet 710 Events 634 Events log 637 EWS 710 Excluded addresses 306 Excluding addresses 307 Extensible Authentication Protocol 29, 132 F Fans 160 Fast Forward Table 710 Fast link 23, 442, 447 FFT 710 FIFO 711 File information 365 Filtering 477, 483, 517 Filtering L2 Multicast Packets 517 Firmware download 352 First In First Out 711 Flapping 711 Flow Control 386, 711 Flow Control Support (IEEE 802.3X) 17 Flow Monitoring (sflow) 26 Forwarding L2 Multicast Packets 517 Fragment 711 Frame 711 Frame Flow 468 Front Panel 37 Full 802.1Q VLAN Tagging Compliance 21 G GARP 430, 433, 711 GARP timers 432 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 21, 711 General Ports 470 General Switch Information 156 Generic Attributes Registration Protocol 711 Giga Port LEDs 42 Gigabit Ethernet 711 Global Configuration Mode 69 Green Ethernet 17724 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Green Ethernet Configuration 390 Guest VLAN 22 GVRP 620, 711 GVRP parameters 490 GVRP statistics 619 GVRP Support 21 H Hardware description 35 Hardware version 370 Hash 181 HDMI port LEDs 43 HDMI ports 37 Head of Line Blocking Prevention 17 Help 91 HMAC-SHA-96 326 HOL 17, 711 Host 712 Host name mapping 247 HTTP 261, 269, 286, 712 HTTP password, configuring 77 HTTPS 261, 264, 269, 286 HyperText Transport Protocol 712 I IC 712 ICMP 712 Icons 91 Identifying a switch via LED 33 IEEE 712 IEEE 802.1d 712 IEEE 802.1p 712 IEEE 802.1Q 21, 712 IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree 23 IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree 23 IGMP 518 IGMP Snooping 20, 527, 712 Image file 713 Image files, active 360 Information Buttons 91 Ingress port 713 Ingress Rate Limit 664 Interface Configuration Mode 70 Interface Statistics 614 IP 713 IP address from a BOOTP Server 73 IP Addressing 209 IP Version 6 (IPv6) Support 16 IPv4 Interfaces 210 IPv6 Default Gateway 226 IPv6 Interfaces 221725 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY IPv6 Neighbors 235 IPv6 Routes Table 239 IPv6-based ACL 117 ISATAP 229 iSCSI 595 iSCSI Sessions 603, 605 iSCSI Targets 601 iSCSI, global parameters 598 iSCSI, limitations 596 iSCSI, optimization 32, 594 J Jumbo Frames 388 L LACP parameters 511 LAG configuration 409 LAG membership 514 LAG statistics 645 LAGs 24, 508, 525, 713 LAGs Settings 481 LAN 713 Layer 2 714 Layer 2 Features 20 Layer 2 Switching 517 Layer 3 714 LED Definitions 40 LEDs 38, 42 LEDs on Front Panel 38 Light Emitting Diodes 40 Limited dynamic lock 98 Line passwords 279 Link Aggregated Group 713 Link aggregation 24, 508, 510 Link Aggregation and LACP 24 Link Control Protocol (LCP) packets 399, 451 Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery 714 Link/Duplex/Activity LEDs 42 LLDP 540 LLDP MED Port Settings 552 LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery 541 LLDP Port Settings 546 LLDP properties 542 LLDP-MED 28, 541, 714 Load Balancing 714 Loading Software into Stack Members 54 Local User Database 277 Location LED 373 Locked ports 29, 100, 105, 108, 110, 115, 118, 121, 124, 126, 130, 580, 582, 584726 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Log file in Flash 202 Logging Global Parameters 196 Logging Severity Level - Alert 196 Logging Severity Level - Critical 196 Logging Severity Level - Debug 196 Logging Severity Level - Emergency 196 Logging Severity Level - Error 196 Logging Severity Level - Informational 196 Logging Severity Level - Notice 196 Logging Severity Level - Warning 196 Login Banners 78 Login History 203 Logs 195 Loops 435 M MAC Address Capacity Support 18 MAC address learning 714 MAC addresses 98, 714 MAC addresses, supported features 18 MAC Layer 714 MAC Multicast Support 19 Mac-based ACE 106 Mac-based ACL 104 Management Access Lists 262 Management Access Methods 272 Management Information Base 314, 715 Management IP Address Conflict Notification 26 Management methods 264 Management security 261 Managing configuration files on the stack 54 Manual Time Setting 169 Mask 715 MD5 181, 715 MDI 406, 715 MDI/MDIX 18, 385 MDIX 406, 715 MED Network Policy 549 Media Endpoint Discovery 549 Message Digest 5 181, 715 MIB 314, 715 Monitoring users 146 MPS 44 MST Properties 456 MSTP 23, 455 MSTP Instance Settings 460 MSTP Interface Settings 462727 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Multicast 516, 525 Multicast TV VLAN 22 Multicast TV VLAN Mapping 537 Multicast TV VLAN Membership 535 Multiple STP (MSTP) 435 N ND 715 Neighbor Advertisement 715 Neighbor Discovery. 715 Neighbor Solicitation 715 Neighbors 557 Neighbors, IPv6 235 Network Control Protocols 399, 451 Network Management System 715 Network pool 303 NMS 715 NS 715 O Object ID 315 OID 315 Optical transciever diagnostics 258 Option 82 587 OUI 504 P Packets 716 Password configuration 75 Password management 30, 286 Password recovery 82 Passwords 88, 282 Path Cost 438 PDU 716 PING 716 PoE 16, 162 Policer Statistics 699 Policers 685 Policy Binding 696 Policy Table 689 Port 716 Port Configuration 403 Port default settings 386 Port LEDs 40, 42 Port mirroring 20, 417, 716 Port modes 469 Port profile 31 Port representation 89 Port security 98 Port settings 475 Port-based Authentication 132 Port-based Authentication (Dot1x) 29728 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Port-based Virtual LANs (VLANs) 21 Ports 37, 89, 384, 645 Ports, statistics 643 Power over Ethernet 16 Power supplies 44 Print 91 Private VLAN 22, 494 Privileged EXEC Mode 68 Proprietary Protocol Filtering 32, 125 Protected Port Configuration 395 Protected ports 32, 394 Protected ports, restrictions 394 Protocol 717 Protocol Group 484, 485 Protocol Ports 488 Protocol VLAN Edge 717 PVE 717 PVID 475, 482 Q QinQ 469 QoS 24, 656, 717 QoS Advanced mode 676 QoS Basic mode 670 QoS Modes 653 QoS Properties 655 QoS, Advanced Mode, Workflow 679 QoS, Aggregate Policer 686 QoS, assignment to hardware queues 651 QoS, Bandwidth 664 QoS, Basic mode 669 QoS, Basic Mode, Workflow 669 QoS, Class Mapping 682 QoS, DSCP Mapping 680 QoS, DSCP Rewrite 671 QoS, DSCP to Queue 662 QoS, Mapping to Queue 659 QoS, Policer Statistics 699 QoS, Policers 684 QoS, Policy Binding 696 QoS, Policy Class Maps 692 QoS, Policy Table 689 QoS, Queues 656 QoS, Single Policer 686 QoS, Statistics 697 QoS, Traffic Classification 651 QoS, Trust Mode 674 Quality of Service 650, 653, 717 R RA 717 RADIUS 271, 291, 717729 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY RADIUS Advertisement 717 RADIUS client 29 RADIUS discovery 717 RADIUS server 291 RAM Log 200 Rapid Spanning Tree 450 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 450, 718 Rapid STP 435, 452, 464 RD 717 Rebooting the Stack 54 Refresh 92 Registered Multicast Group 517 Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service 29, 717 Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service 291 Remote Log Server 206 Remote Monitoring 27, 717 Reset button 38 Retrieving an IP Address 72 RMON 625, 628, 629, 717 RMON Statistics 625, 626 Router Solicitation 717 Routes Table, IPv6 239 RS 717 RS-232 Console Port 37 RSTP 23, 450, 718 Rules 262 Running Configuration File 337, 718 S Secure Shell 291 Secure Telnet (SSH) 261, 272 Security Features 29 Security Management 75 Segmentation 718 Selecting the Master and Master Backup Units 51 Self-Learning MAC Addresses 19 Server 718 Set Terminal Baud-Rate 82 Setup Wizard 61 sFlow 375 sFlow interface 380 sFlow receiver 377 sFlow statistics 382 SFP 44 SFP LEDs 44 Simple Network Management Protocol 718 Simple Network Time Protocol 28, 178 Single Policer 686 SMMP groups 322730 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY SNMP 261, 264, 286, 314, 718 SNMP access rights 315 SNMP communities 327 SNMP global parameters 316 SNMP logs 25 SNMP Model OIDs 316 SNMP notification filters 330 SNMP notification recipients 333 SNMP users 324 SNMP Versions 1, 2, and 3 26 SNMP views 319 SNTP 28, 178 SNTP Authentication 184 SNTP Global Settings 183 SNTP Servers 187 Software Download 83 Software version 370 Spanning Tree Protocol 22, 435, 719 SPF LEDs 40, 42 SSH 30, 264, 269, 286, 719 SSH password, configuring 77 SSL 29 Stack ID LED 44 Stack management 46, 367 Stack Menu 82 Stack Support 16 Stacking 46 Stacking failover topology 49 Stacking, adding a unit to the stack 50 Stacking, assigning unit IDs 50 Stacking, automatic assignment of unit IDs 50 Starting the Application 88 Startup Configuration 337, 719 Startup file 337 Startup Menu 80 Static addresses 424, 425 Static hosts 308, 310 Statistics 606 Statistics, alarms 638 Statistics, Counter Summary 612 Statistics, CPU Utilization 648 Statistics, Denied ACEs Counters 608 Statistics, EAP 622 Statistics, Etherlike 616 Statistics, events control 634 Statistics, events log 637 Statistics, GVRP 619 Statistics, history control 629 Statistics, history table 631 Statistics, Interface Statistics 614 Statistics, LAGs 645 Statistics, ports 643731 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY Statistics, QoS 698 Statistics, Utilization Summary 610 Storm control 414 STP 22, 444 STP BPDU Guard 23 STP mode 437 STP port settings 442 STP, bridge settings 438 STP, classic 437 STP, designated roots 439 STP, LAG settings 447 Subnet 719 Subnet Mask 719 Switch 719 Switching from the Master to the Backup Master 53 SYSLOG 195 System Image Download 83 System LEDs 40 T Table Views 607 TACACS+ 30, 271, 282 TCP Congestion Avoidance 25, 666 TCP/IP 719 TDR technology 256 Telnet 261, 264, 269, 272, 280, 286, 291, 719 Telnet Connection 71 Telnet password, configuring 76 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System 282 Terminal Connection 72 TFTP 27, 720 Time Domain Reflectometry 256 Time range 127 Time range, absolute 128 Time range, recurring 129 Time synchronization 169 Traffic Classification 651 Traffic limitation methods 656 Traffic limitation, combination of WRR and Strict Priority 657 Traffic limitation, Strict Priority 656 Traffic limitation, Weighted Round Robin (WRR) 656 Trap 720 Tree view 88 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 720 Trunk Ports 469 Trunking 720 Tunnel, ISATAP 229732 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY U UDP 720 UDP relay 253 Unauthenticated VLAN and Guest VLANs 135 Understanding the interface 88 Unicast 178, 183 Unit ID 367 Unit identification 373 Unregistered Multicast Group 517 Uploading files 355 Uploading files, TFTP 357 Uploading files, USB/HTTP 356 USB File Transfer Protocol 27 USB port 38 User Data Protocol 720 User Security Model 314 Using Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator 87 Using the CLI 68 USM 314 Utilization Summary 610 V Ventilation System 40 Versions, hardware/software 370 Virtual Local Area Networks 720 VLAN 21, 466, 472, 473, 525, 720 VLAN frame flow 468 VLAN membership 472 VLAN settings, DHCP 579 VLAN Support 21 VLAN to MSTP Instance 458 VLAN, ARP settings 568 VLAN, LAG settings 481 VLAN, port settings 475 VLAN, private 494 VLAN, special cases 468 VLAN, voice 498 VLAN-aware MAC-based Switching 19 Voice VLAN 21, 498 Voice VLAN OUI 504 VoIP 720 W Warm standby 52 Web access 291 Web management system icons 91 Web-Based Management 26 Weighted Round Robin (WRR) 656733 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY X XG Ports 37734 FILE LOCATION: C:\Users\gina\Desktop\Checkout_new\Maintenance Projects\Dell Contax\sources\Dell_ContaxUG_PrintIX.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLYDell PowerConnect 55xx Systems User Guide 735 DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/11/13 - FOR PROOF ONLY 25 Revision History Rev Date Description A7 Mar. 11, 2013 Made the following corrections: • Added comment that GVRP is only operational on ports in general mode. A6 Sept. 3, 2012 Made the following corrections: • Added Power Limit field in "Power over Ethernet" on page 162 • Corrected number of ports that can be mirrored to 4 • Corrected number of OUIs from 128 to 16. • Corrected parameters to show power inline command. • Added description of when traps are generated in "Power over Ethernet" on page 162. A5 May 1, 2012 Added "Auto-Update/Configuration Feature" on page 338 A4 April 4, 2012 Made the following corrections: • Put a the note (of the recommendation of using HDMI cable version to 1.4 for stacking) more clearly. • Fixed RDP description A4 April 2, 2012 Following corrections made: • Add description regarding the Egress ACL feature • Enter comments regarding the PVLAN feature. • Fixed RDP abbreviation to Reliable Data Protocol in ACL section. • Add the recommendation of using HDMI cable version to 1.4 for stacking A3 Jan 31, 2012 Corrected command in private VLAN CLI command. A2 Sept 21, 2011 Entered comment that enabling iSCSI also enables flow control on all interfaces.www.dell.com|support.dell.com Printed in the U.S.A. Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series Getting Started Guide Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548P ContaxGS.book Page 1 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your system. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell OpenManage and the YOURS IS HERE logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, MS-DOS and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Models: PowerConnect 5524, 5524P, 5548, 5548P September 2010 P/N JN2W1 A01 ContaxGS.book Page 2 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMContents 3 Contents 1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Unpacking the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Installing the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Installing in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Installing on a Flat Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Connecting the Switch to Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 8 2 Stacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Stacking Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Unit ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Automatic Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Manual Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ContaxGS.book Page 3 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM4 Contents 3 Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Configuration Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connecting the Switch to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . 14 Booting the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Configuring the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Configuration Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . 16 ContaxGS.book Page 4 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 5 Installation Overview This guide describes how to install and run the PowerConnect 5500 series switches. For more information, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide, available on your Documentation CD, or check the Dell Support website at support.dell.com/manuals for the latest updates on documentation and software. In this document, the word "switch" refers to either a single switch or a group of stacked switches. For a complete description of the PowerConnect 5500 series switch, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide, available on your Documentation CD. NOTE: Even though the graphics in this guide show the Dell PowerConnect 5524P device, the instructions are the same for all models. Site Preparation PowerConnect 5500 series switches can be mounted in a standard 48.26-cm (19-inch) equipment rack or placed on a tabletop. Before installing the unit, verify that the chosen location for installation meets the following site requirements: • Power — – The unit is installed near an easily accessible 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz outlet. – If a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) or a Modular Power Supply (MPS) is being used, check that it is easily accessible. • Clearance — There is adequate frontal clearance for operator access. Allow clearance for cabling, power connections, and ventilation. ContaxGS.book Page 5 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM6 Installation • Cabling — The cabling is routed to avoid sources of electrical noise, such as radio transmitters, broadcast amplifiers, power lines, and fluorescent lighting fixtures. • Ambient Requirements — The ambient unit operating temperature range is 0 to 45ºC (32 to 113ºF) at a relative humidity of 10% to 90%, noncondensing. Unpacking Package Contents While unpacking the switch, ensure that the following items are included: • Switch • AC power cable • RS-232 cable with a male 8-pin RJ-45 connector • Self-adhesive rubber pads • Rack-mount kit for rack installation • Documentation CD Unpacking the Switch NOTE: Before unpacking the switch, inspect the package and immediately report any evidence of damage. To unpack the switch: 1 Place the box on a clean flat surface. 2 Open the box or remove the box top. 3 Carefully remove the switch from the box and place it on a secure and clean surface. 4 Remove all packing material. 5 Inspect the switch and accessories for damage. Report any damage immediately to the dealer. ContaxGS.book Page 6 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMInstallation 7 Installing the Switch The PowerConnect 5500 Series switches can be: • Installed on a rack • Placed on a flat surface Installing in a Rack CAUTION: Disconnect all cables from the unit before mounting the switch in a rack or cabinet. CAUTION: When mounting multiple switches into a rack, mount the switches from the bottom up. To install the switch in a rack: 1 Place the supplied rack-mounting bracket on one side of the switch, ensuring that the mounting holes on the switch line up to the mounting holes on the rack-mounting bracket. Figure 1-1 illustrates where to mount the brackets. Figure 1-1. Bracket Installation for Rack Mounting 2 Insert the supplied screws into the rack-mounting holes and tighten with a screwdriver. ContaxGS.book Page 7 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM8 Installation 3 Repeat the process for the rack-mounting bracket on the other side of the switch. 4 Insert the unit into the 48.26-cm (19-inch) rack, ensuring that the rack-mounting holes on the switch line up to the mounting holes on the rack. 5 Secure the unit to the rack with the rack screws (not provided). Fasten the lower pair of screws before the upper pair of screws. Ensure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed. Installing on a Flat Surface Install the switch on a flat surface if it is not installed on a rack. The surface must be able to support the weight of the switch and the switch cables. To install the switch on a flat surface: 1 Attach the self-adhesive rubber pads on each marked location on the bottom of the chassis. 2 Set the switch on a flat surface, leaving 5.08 cm (2 inches) on each side and 12.7 cm (5 inches) at the back. 3 Ensure that the switch has proper ventilation. Connecting the Switch to Power Supplies Each switch in the stack must be connected to an AC power supply. The power connectors are positioned on the back panel. Connecting a Redundant Power Supply (RPS) or Modular Power Supply (MPS) is optional, but recommended. The RPS or MPS connector is on the back panel of the switch. The RPS is used for non-PoE switches and MPS is used for PoE switches. Figure 1-2. Back-Panel Power Connector RPS or MPS A/C Power Supply ContaxGS.book Page 8 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 9 Stacking Overview Each switch is a member in a stack, although the stack may consist of only a single switch. Up to eight switches are supported per stack. All stacks must have a Master unit, and may have a Master Backup unit. All other switches are connected to the stack as members (slaves). Stacking Switches PowerConnect 5500 series switches use two HDMI 10G ports for stacking. To connect the switches in the stack: 1 Insert one end of an HDMI cable into the left-hand HDMI port on the switch at the top of the stack and the other end into the right-hand HDMI port of the switch immediately below it. 2 Repeat this process until all switches are connected. 3 (Optional) Connect the left-hand HDMI port of the switch at the bottom of the stack to the right-hand HDMI port of the switch at the top of the stack. This step provides increased bandwidth and redundancy. ContaxGS.book Page 9 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM10 Stacking Figure 2-1 shows this process. Figure 2-1. Stacking Cable Diagram HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel HDMI Ports Front Panel Front Panel HDMI Ports ContaxGS.book Page 10 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMStacking 11 Unit ID Assignment Each switch in the stack has a unique unit ID that defines the unit’s position and function in the stack. Figure 2-2 describes the stacking LEDs on the front panel of the switch. Figure 2-2. Stacking LEDs on Front Panel The Unit ID of each switch can be either automatically assigned or manually assigned, as described below. Automatic Assignment When you power-up the stack, each switch is assigned a unique Unit ID. This is displayed on the front panel of the switch, as shown in Figure 2-2. The switch that is assigned Unit ID 1 is the Master unit, by default. The switch that is assigned Unit ID 2 is the Master Backup unit. Unit ID Master ContaxGS.book Page 11 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM12 Stacking Manual Assignment To assign unit IDs to the switches in the stack, do the following for each switch in the stack: 1 Connect the switch to the terminal, as described in "Connecting the Switch to the Terminal". 2 Turn on the switch to begin auto boot and press Return or Esc to abort and enter the Start Up menu. 3 Select Stack menu to open the Stack Menu. 4 Select Set unit stack id. Enter either a Unit ID or 0. 0 indicates that the unit ID will be assigned automatically. NOTE: The entire stack should be installed, as shown in Figure 2-1, before powering up the switches. For more information on stacking, see the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide on the Documentation CD. Startup Menu [1]Download Software [2]Erase Flash File [3]Password Recovery Procedure [4]Set Terminal Baud-Rate [5]Stack menu [6]Back [1]Show unit stack id [2]Set unit stack id [3]Back ContaxGS.book Page 12 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMGetting Started Guide 13 Configuring the Switch This section describes the configuration that must be performed after the switch is installed and connected to power supplies. Additional advanced functions are described in the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide on the Documentation CD. NOTE: Before proceeding further, read the release notes for this product. You can download the release notes from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. NOTE: We recommend that you obtain the most recent revision of the user documentation from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Configuration Work Flow To configure the switches: 1 For each switch in the stack: a Connect it to a terminal, as described in the "Connecting the Switch to the Terminal". b Boot the switch, as described in the "Booting the Switch". c Assign a unit ID to the switch, as described in "Unit ID Assignment". 2 Connect the units in the stack to each other, as described in "Configuring the Stack". 3 Connect the Master unit to the terminal, reboot the unit and the Setup Wizard is run automatically, as described in "Configuration Using the Setup Wizard". 4 Respond to the Setup Wizard prompts. 5 Continue managing the switch, either through the console or Telnet, using the CLI or the web GUI, as described in the Dell PowerConnect 5500 Series User Guide. ContaxGS.book Page 13 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM14 Configuring the Switch Connecting the Switch to the Terminal The switch is configured and monitored through a terminal desktop system that runs terminal emulation software. The switch connects to the terminal through the console port. To connect the switch to a terminal: 1 Connect an RS-232 cable to a VT100-compatible terminal or the serial connector of a desktop system running terminal emulation software. 2 Connect the RS-232 cable to the switch console port on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 3-1) using an 8-pin RJ-45 male connector. Figure 3-1. Front-Panel Console Port 3 Set the terminal emulation software as follows: a Select the appropriate serial port to connect to the switch. b Set the data rate to 9600 baud. c Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. d Set Flow Control to none. e Select VT100 for Emulation mode within your communication software. f Select Terminal keys for Function, Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that the setting is for Terminal keys (not Windows keys). NOTE: You can connect a console to the console port on any unit in the stack, but stack management is performed only from the stack master (Unit ID 1 or 2). Console Port ContaxGS.book Page 14 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 15 Booting the Switch After the local terminal is connected, turn on power. The switch then goes through power-on self-test (POST). POST runs every time the switch is started and checks hardware components, to determine if the switch is operational before completely booting. If the system detects a critical problem, the boot process stops. If POST passes successfully, a valid executable image is loaded into RAM. POST messages are displayed on the terminal and indicate test success or failure. The boot process runs for approximately 40-45seconds. When the boot process completes, the following LEDs are lit, as shown in Figure 3-2: • Power • Status • Fan (should be green) • RPS (if it is being used) Figure 3-2. Initial LEDs Power Status Fan RPS ContaxGS.book Page 15 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM16 Configuring the Switch Configuring the Stack The switch is always considered to be a stack of switches even if the stack only contains a single switch. If there is more than one switch in the stack, each switch must be configured individually. See "Unit ID Assignment" for instructions on how to configure the stack. Configuration Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration to get the system up and running as quickly as possible. Note that you can skip the Setup Wizard and configure the switch manually through the CLI. The Setup Wizard configures the following fields: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password • Management switch IP address • IP subnet mask • Default gateway IP address NOTE: The Setup Wizard assumes the following: • The PowerConnect switch was never configured before and is in the same state as when you received it. • The PowerConnect switch booted successfully. • The console connection is established and the console prompt is displayed on the screen of a VT100 terminal switch. Connect the Master unit to a terminal. You can identify the Master unit by the illuminated Master LED on the front panel of the switch (see Figure 2-2). To configure the system using the Setup Wizard: 1 Obtain the following information from the network administrator: • SNMP Community String and SNMP Management System IP address (optional) • Username and password ContaxGS.book Page 16 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 17 • The IP address to be assigned to the VLAN 1 interface through which the switch is to be managed (by default, every external and internal port is a member of the VLAN 1) • The IP subnet mask for the network • The default gateway (next hop router) IP address for configuring the default route 2 Boot the Master unit. The system automatically prompts you to use the Setup Wizard. The Setup Wizard displays the following information: Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration and gets you up and running easily and quickly. You can skip the Setup Wizard and enter CLI mode to manually configure the switch. The system will prompt you with a default answer; by pressing Enter, you accept the default value. You must respond to the next question to run the Setup Wizard within 60 seconds, otherwise the system will continue with normal operation using the default system configuration. Would you like to enter the Setup Wizard (you must answer this question within 60 seconds)? (Y/N) 3 Enter [Y] to run the wizard. If you enter [N] or if you do not respond within 60 seconds, the Setup Wizard automatically exits and the CLI console prompt appears. If you enter [Y] the wizard provides interactive guidance through the initial switch configuration. The following information is displayed: You can exit the Setup Wizard at any time by entering [ctrl+Z]. The system is not set up for SNMP management by default. ContaxGS.book Page 17 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM18 Configuring the Switch To manage the switch using SNMP (required for Dell Network Manager) you can: • Setup the initial SNMP version 2 account now. • Return later and set up the SNMP version account. For more information on setting up a SNMP version 2 account, see the user documentation. Would you like to set up the SNMP management interface now? [Y/N] 4 Enter [N] to skip to Step 7 or enter [Y] to continue the Setup Wizard. If you enter [Y] the following information is displayed: To set up the SNMP management account you must specify the management system IP address and the "community string" or password that the particular management system uses to access the switch. The wizard automatically assigns the highest access level [Privilege Level 15] to this account. You can use Dell Network Manager or other management interfaces to change this setting later and to add additional management system later. For more information on adding management systems, see the user documentation. To add a management station: Please enter the SNMP community string to be used: 5 Enter the SNMP community string. You can use the default name "public" Please enter the IP address of the Management System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage from any Management Station:[0.0.0.0]. 6 Enter the SNMP Management System IP. ContaxGS.book Page 18 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PMConfiguring the Switch 19 7 Set up user account privilege level, as follows: The following information is displayed: Now we need to set up your initial privilege (Level 15) user account. This account is used to login to the CLI and Web interface. You may set up other accounts and change privilege levels later. For more information on setting up user accounts and changing privilege levels, see the user documentation. To set up a user account: Enter the user name: Please enter the user password: Please reenter the user password: 8 Enter the following: • User name, for example "admin" • Password and password confirmation. 9 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Next, an IP address is setup. The IP address is defined on the default VLAN (VLAN #1). This is the IP address you use to access the Telnet, Web interface, or SNMP interface for the switch. To set up an IP address: Please enter the IP address of the device (A.B.C.D): Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or nn): 10 Enter the management IP address and IP subnet mask, for example 192.168.2.100 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the IP subnet mask. ContaxGS.book Page 19 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM20 Configuring the Switch 11 Press Enter. The following information is displayed: Finally, set up the default gateway. Please enter the IP address of the gateway from which this network is reachable (e.g. 192.168.2.1).Default gateway (A.B.C.D):[0.0.0.0] 12 Enter the default gateway. 13 Press Enter. The following is displayed (example): This is the configuration information that has been collected: SNMP Interface = "Dell Network Manager"@192.168.2.10 User Account setup = admin Password = ********** Management IP address = 192.168.2.100 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.2.1 The following information is displayed: If the information is correct, please select (Y) to save the configuration and copy to the start-up configuration file. If the information is incorrect, select (N) to discard configuration and restart the wizard: [Y/N] ContaxGS.book Page 20 Friday, August 20, 2010 1:53 PM www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Inspiron™ 640M/ E1405 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle PP19LRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Abréviations et sigles Pour la liste complète des abréviations et des sigles, reportez-vous à la section « Glossaire » à la page 171. Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'application Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. ____________________ Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2006–2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell TravelLite, ExpressCharge, Dell Media Experience et Strike Zone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel et Pentium sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft, Outlook et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque déposée appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et est utilisée par Dell sous licence ; IBM est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation ; EMC est une marque déposée d'EMC Corporation ; ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP19L Mars 2007 Réf. XF808 Rév. A02Table des matières 3 Table des matières Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 Présentation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vue du côté droit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vue de dessous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2 Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connexion à Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Configuration de votre connexion Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Configuration d'une imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Câble de l'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Connexion d'une imprimante USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques. . . . . . . . 30 Parasurtenseurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Filtres de ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Onduleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3 Utilisation de l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Réglage de la luminosité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Basculement de l'image vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Réglage de la résolution d'affichage et du taux de rafraîchissement . . . . . 314 Table des matières 4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile. . . . . . . . . . . 33 Pavé numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Combinaisons de touches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fonctions système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fonctions d'affichage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Radios (notamment le réseau sans fil et une carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Fonctions des haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . . . 35 Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Personnalisation de la tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5 Utilisation d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Performances de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Vérification de la charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Microsoft® Windows® Jauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Indicateur de charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Alerte de batterie faible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Préservation de l'alimentation par batterie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Modes d'économie d'énergie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . 41 Chargement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Remplacement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Stockage de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Lecture CD ou DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Table des matières 5 Réglage du volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Réglage de l'image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™. . . . . . . 46 Si l'ordinateur est allumé ou en mode Veille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Si l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée . . . . . . 46 Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience. . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Utilisation du CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) de Dell MediaDirect™ ou du CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) de Dell MediaDirect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Réparation de Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Connexion de votre ordinateur à un périphérique téléviseur ou audio . . . . 50 S-vidéo et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Vidéo composite et audio standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Vidéo composante et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuration de la lecture de DVD via le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Types de carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Caches pour carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Installation d'une carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Types de carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Caches de carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia ou d'un cache . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Table des matières 8 Configuration d'un réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande . . . . . . . . . 71 Assistant Configuration réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Surveillance de l'état des connexions réseau sans fil via Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Réseau étendu large bande mobile ou sans fil (WWAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Éléments requis pour établir une connexion avec un réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Réseau Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuration de votre connexion Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connexion à un réseau Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Verrou du câble de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Mots de passe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Logiciel de suivi informatique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 10 Dépannage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Service Dell Technical Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . 81 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities . . . . 82 Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Table des matières 7 Utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Problèmes de lecteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel . . . . . . 86 Problèmes liés au disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet . . . . 86 Messages d'erreur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Problèmes liés à la carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au clavier externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Caractères imprévus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Blocages et problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 L'ordinateur ne démarre pas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 L'ordinateur ne répond plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement. . . . . . . . 94 Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® antérieur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Un écran bleu uni apparaît . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Problèmes Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Autres problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Problèmes liés à la mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Problèmes liés au réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Problèmes d'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Problèmes liés au scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Aucun son émis par le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Table des matières Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Problèmes vidéo et d'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Si l'écran est vide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Si l'écran est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles. . . . . . . . . . 104 Restauration du système d'exploitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Utilisation du CD Operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 11 Ajout et remplacement de pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Retour de votre disque dur à Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Lecteurs optiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 À propos de la vis de fixation de périphérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Retrait et installation des lecteurs optiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B . . . 118 Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM A . . . 120 Modem (en option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Carte Mini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Retrait du cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Remise en place du cache de la charnière. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Table des matières 9 Clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Retrait du clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Remise en place du clavier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . 130 Pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Retrait de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Remise en place de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 12 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 13 Voyager avec votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Identification de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Emballage de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Conseils de voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Transport aérien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 14 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 15 Caractéristiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 16 Annexe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Affichage de l'écran de configuration du système. . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Options fréquemment utilisées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Nettoyage de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Ordinateur, clavier et écran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Lecteur de disquette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 CD et DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16810 Table des matières Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . 168 Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell . . . . . 169 Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Classe B de la FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Caractéristiques Macrovision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Glossaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Recherche d'informations 11 Recherche d'informations REMARQUE : Il se peut que certaines fonctionnalités et certains supports soient en option et ne soient pas livrés avec votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ne sont pas nécessairement disponibles dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient fournies avec votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici • Programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • La documentation concernant mon appareil • NSS (Notebook System Software) CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé ResourceCD) REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec tous les ordinateurs. La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser le CD pour réinstaller les pilotes (reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102) ou pour exécuter Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). Des fichiers « Lisez-moi » peuvent être inclus sur votre CD ; ces fichiers fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques de dernière minute apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des pilotes et de la documentation se trouvent à l'adresse support.dell.com. • Informations sur les garanties • Termes et Conditions (États-Unis uniquement) • Consignes de sécurité • Informations sur les réglementations • Informations relatives à l'ergonomie • Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™12 Recherche d'informations • Comment configurer mon ordinateur Schéma de configuration • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft® Windows® Ces étiquettes sont situées sur la base de votre ordinateur. • Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service de support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support technique. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciRecherche d'informations 13 • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens, cours en ligne et questions fréquemment posées • Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Coordonnées, appels de service et état des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations • Service et support — État des appels de service et historique du support, contrat de service, discussions en ligne avec le support technique • Référence — Documentation de l'ordinateur, détails sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques de produit et livres blancs • Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles agréés • Notebook Logiciel système (NSS)— Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation de l'ordinateur, vous devez également réinstaller l'utilitaire NSS. NSS fournit des mises à jour essentielles pour le système d'exploitation et la prise en charge des lecteurs de disquette USB Dell™ de 3,5 pouces, des processeurs Intel® Pentium® M, des lecteurs optiques et des périphériques USB. NSS est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell. Ce logiciel détecte automatiquement votre ordinateur et son système d'exploitation, et installe les mises à jour appropriées à votre configuration. Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région pour afficher le site de support approprié. REMARQUE : Les représentants des grandes entreprises, du gouvernement et du domaine de l'éducation peuvent également utiliser le site Web de support personnalisé Premier de Dell à l'adresse premier.support.dell.com. Pour télécharger NSS (Notebook System Software) : 1 Allez à l'adresse support.dell.com et cliquez sur Téléchargements. 2 Saisissez votre numéro de service ou le modèle de l'appareil. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Télécharger une catégorie, cliquez sur All (Toutes). 4 Sélectionnez le système d'exploitation et la langue du système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur, puis cliquez sur Soumettre. 5 Sous Select a Device (Sélectionner un périphérique), rendez-vous à System and Configuration Utilities (Utilitaires de système et de configuration), puis cliquez sur Dell NSS(Notebook System Software). • Mises à niveau logicielles et astuces de dépannage — Questions fréquemment posées, sujets d'actualité et état général de votre environnement informatique Utilitaire de support de Dell L'utilitaire de support de Dell est un système de mise à niveau et de notification automatique installé sur votre ordinateur. Il permet de réaliser des balayages en temps réel de l'état de votre environnement informatique et des mises à jour logicielles et fournit des informations de support automatique appropriées. Accédez à l'utilitaire de support de Dell à l'aide de l'icône située dans la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilitaire de support de Dell » à la page 84. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici14 Recherche d'informations • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Comment utiliser des programmes et des fichiers • Comment personnaliser mon bureau Centre d'aide et de support de Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. • Informations sur l'activité réseau, l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation, les touches de raccourci et les éléments contrôlés par Dell QuickSet Aide Dell QuickSet Pour afficher l'aide Dell QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône , dans la barre des tâches de Microsoft® Windows®. Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD Operating System REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Operating System soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec certains ordinateurs. Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Operating System. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du CD Operating system » à la page 108. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities (ResourceCD) pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques accompagnant votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre CD dépend du système d'exploitation que vous avez commandé. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciPrésentation de votre ordinateur 15 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue frontale 1 loquet de fermeture de l'écran 2 écran 3 bouton d'alimentation 4 voyants d'état de l'appareil 5 tablette tactile 6 boutons de commande multimédia 7 haut-parleurs 8 boutons de la tablette tactile 9 clavier 10 voyants d'état du clavier et du sans fil 11 loquets de l'écran (2) 1 9 2 5 8 3 7 10 4 6 1116 Présentation de votre ordinateur LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L'ÉCRAN — Faites glisser et maintenez ce loquet pour déverrouiller les dispositifs de fermeture et ouvrir l'écran. ÉCRAN — Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de l'écran » à la page 31. BOUTON D'ALIMENTATION — Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou quitter le mode d'économie d'énergie. AVIS : Afin d'éviter de perdre des données, éteignez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer plutôt qu'en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation. VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D E L'APPAREIL Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : • Vert fixe : la batterie est en cours de charge. • Vert clignotant : la batterie est presque complètement chargée. Si l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : • Éteint : la batterie est suffisamment chargée (ou l'ordinateur est éteint). • Orange clignotant : le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. • Orange fixe : le niveau de charge de la batterie est critique. S'allume lorsque vous mettez l'ordinateur sous tension et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant clignote. Reste allumé ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie.Présentation de votre ordinateur 17 TABLETTE TACTILE — Assure les mêmes fonctions que la souris. BOUTONS D E COMMANDE MULTIMÉDIA — Contrôlent la lecture des CD, DVD et lecteurs multimédia. HAUT-PARLEURS — Pour régler le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés, appuyez sur les boutons de commande multimédia ou les raccourcis clavier du volume des haut-parleurs. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions des haut-parleurs » à la page 35. BOUTONS D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — La tablette tactile et ses boutons offrent les mêmes fonctionnalités que la souris. CLAVIER — Le clavier comporte un pavé numérique et la touche du logo Microsoft Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les raccourcis clavier pris en charge, reportez-vous à la section « Combinaisons de touches » à la page 34. Met le son en sourdine. Diminue le son. Augmente le son. Lecture ou pause. Revient à la plage précédente. Passe à la plage suivante. Arrêt. Lancement de Dell MediaDirect ou Microsoft® Windows® Media Center Edition. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™ » à la page 46.18 Présentation de votre ordinateur VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D U CLAVIER E T D U SANS FIL Les voyants verts situés au-dessus du clavier indiquent ce qui suit : LOQUETS D E L'ÉCRAN — Permettent de maintenir l'écran fermé. S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allume lorsque la fonction Majuscules est activée. S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Pour activer ou désactiver le réseau sans fil, appuyez sur . S'allume lorsqu'une carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® est activée. REMARQUE : La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth est une fonctionnalité optionnelle, le voyant ne s'allume donc que lorsque vous avez commandé la carte avec votre ordinateur. Pour des informations supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec votre carte. Pour désactiver uniquement la fonctionnalité de technologie sans fil Bluetooth, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la zone de notification et sélectionnez Désactiver radio Bluetooth. Pour activer ou désactiver rapidement tous les périphériques sans fil, appuyez sur . 9 APrésentation de votre ordinateur 19 Vue du côté gauche PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, assurez-vous qu'il correspond au type d'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. EMPLACEMENT POUR CÂBLE D E SÉCURITÉ — Permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec l'appareil. ENTRÉE D'AIR — L'ordinateur utilise des ventilateurs pour garantir la circulation de l'air à travers les entrées d'air et éviter tout risque de surchauffe. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 2 entrée d'air 3 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 4 connecteur IEEE 1394 5 connecteur microphone 6 connecteur de casque 7 lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 8 logement de carte ExpressCard 1 2 6 3 45 7 820 Présentation de votre ordinateur CONNECTEUR D E SORTIE TV S-VIDÉO CONNECTEUR IEEE 1394 — Permet de relier des périphériques qui prennent en charge des vitesses de transfert ultra rapides IEEE 1394, par exemple des caméras vidéo numériques. CONNECTEURS AUDIO LECTEUR D E CARTE MÉMOIRE MULTIMÉDIA 5 EN 1— Moyen pratique et rapide de visualiser et de partager des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire. Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia numériques suivantes : • Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Carte xD-Picture LOGEMENT D E CARTE EXPRESSCARD — Prend en charge une carte ExpressCard. Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique dans le logement. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Permet également de relier des périphériques audio numériques à l'aide d'un câble d'adaptateur audio numérique/TV. Raccordez un microphone au connecteur . Raccordez un casque ou des haut-parleurs au connecteur .Présentation de votre ordinateur 21 Vue du côté droit BAIE D E LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Vous pouvez installer des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur de DVD ou un autre lecteur optique dans la baie de lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. BOUTON D'ÉJECTION D U PLATEAU D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour éjecter un CD ou un DVD du lecteur optique. CONNECTEURS USB CONNECTEUR MODEM (RJ-11) AVIS : Le connecteur réseau est légèrement plus grand que le connecteur modem. Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, ne connectez pas de ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. 1 baie de lecteur optique 2 bouton d'éjection du plateau du lecteur optique 3 connecteurs USB (2) 4 connecteur modem (RJ-11) 5 connecteur réseau (RJ-45) 6 connecteur vidéo Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette optionnel. Pour utiliser le modem interne, connectez la ligne téléphonique au connecteur modem. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du modem, reportez-vous à la documentation en ligne correspondante fournie avec votre ordinateur. 1 2 6 3 4522 Présentation de votre ordinateur CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU (RJ-45) CONNECTEUR VIDÉO Vue arrière CONNECTEURS USB CONNECTEUR D'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Sert à relier l'adaptateur secteur à l'ordinateur. Cet adaptateur convertit l'alimentation CA en alimentation CC qui est celle requise par l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint. Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un réseau. Les voyants vert et jaune situés près du connecteur indiquent l'activité de communication filaire. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la carte réseau, consultez la documentation en ligne de la carte réseau fournie avec votre ordinateur. Permet de relier un moniteur externe compatible VGA. 1 connecteurs USB (2) 2 connecteur d'adaptateur secteur Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette optionnel. 1 2Présentation de votre ordinateur 23 PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur fonctionne avec les tensions secteur disponibles dans le monde entier. Cependant, les connecteurs et les rampes d'alimentation varient selon les pays. L'utilisation d'un câble non compatible ou le branchement incorrect du câble sur la rampe d'alimentation ou la prise secteur peut provoquer un incendie ou endommager l'équipement. AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur, tenez le connecteur du câble de l'adaptateur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d'éviter de l'endommager. Vue de dessous BATTERIE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le brancher au secteur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37. CACHE D U MODULE D E MÉMOIRE — Recouvre le compartiment des modules de mémoire. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la page 117. LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L A BAIE D E BATTERIE — Permet de retirer la batterie de la baie de batterie. Reportezvous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41. 1 batterie 2 cache du module de mémoire 3 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 4 aération du ventilateur 5 cache du processeur et du module thermique 6 cache du modem/de la carte/ du dispositif sans fil 7 vis de verrouillage du lecteur optique 8 unité de disque dur 9 indicateur de charge de la batterie 6 5 7 1 3 2 4 8 924 Présentation de votre ordinateur VENTILATEUR — L'ordinateur utilise un ventilateur pour garantir la circulation de l'air à travers les entrées d'air et éviter tout risque de surchauffe. CACHE D U PROCESSEUR E T D U MODULE THERMIQUE — Masque le processeur et le module thermique. CACHE D U MODEM/D E LA CARTE MINI/D U DISPOSITIF SANS FIL — Recouvre le compartiment qui contient le modem, la carte Mini et la carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la page 123. VIS D E VERROUILLAGE D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Sert à fixer le lecteur optique dans la baie du lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. DISQUE DUR — Stocke les logiciels et les données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections « Disque dur » à la page 113 et « Problèmes liés au disque dur » à la page 86. La taille de votre disque dur affichée dans l'Explorateur Windows est la capacité du lecteur avant l'installation de tout système d'exploitation ou tous programmes. INDICATEUR D E CHARGE D E L A BATTERIE — Donne des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de la charge de la batterie » à la page 38.Configuration de votre ordinateur 25 Configuration de votre ordinateur Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Votre fournisseur d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion Internet suivantes : • Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup plus lentes que les connexions DSL ou modem par câble. • Connexions DSL qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique existante. Avec une connexion DSL, vous pouvez accéder à Internet et utiliser votre téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément. • Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de la ligne TV câblée locale. Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne téléphonique au connecteur du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion DSL ou modem par câble, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour obtenir les instructions de configuration. Configuration de votre connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l'aide du raccourci de bureau d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet fourni : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Pour effectuer la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Si aucune icône de fournisseur d'accès Internet n'apparaît sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre fournisseur d'accès Internet : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Internet Explorer. L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée : • Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en sélectionner un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet.26 Configuration de votre ordinateur • Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur de services Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous sélectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour terminer la configuration. REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour terminer la configuration. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes de connexion à Internet, reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet » à la page 86. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet alors que vous l'avez déjà fait auparavant, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet subisse une interruption de services. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP inclut un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de déplacer des données d'un ordinateur à un autre. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que : • Messages e-mail • Paramètres de la barre d'outils • Tailles de fenêtre • Signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur en utilisant une connexion réseau, ou les stocker sur un support amovible, comme un CD inscriptible ou une disquette. REMARQUE : Pour des instructions sur la configuration d'une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances de Microsoft Article nº 305621, intitulé How to Set Up a Direct Cable Connection Between Two Computers in Windows XP (Comment configurer une connexion à câble directe entre deux ordinateurs sous Windows XP). Ces informations peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, utilisez le CD Operating System en option ou créez un disque Assistant à l'aide de l'utilitaire Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System REMARQUE : Le CD Operating system est requis. Toutefois, ce CD est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs.Configuration de votre ordinateur 27 Pour ouvrir l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD Operating System de Windows XP. 2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating system en option, vous devez créer un disque Assistant qui va permettre la création d'un fichier d'image de sauvegarde pour supports amovibles. Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de Windows XP et suivez les étapes suivantes : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.28 Configuration de votre ordinateur 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur Je souhaite créer un disque Assistant dans le lecteur suivant : , puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'une disquette ou un CD, puis cliquez sur OK. 6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant. 7 Allez à votre ancien ordinateur. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Insérez le disque Assistant sur l'ancien ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Exécuter. 3 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz (pour le support amovible approprié) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, rendez-vous sur le site Web dell.support.com pour accéder au document nº PA1089586 (How Do I Transfer Files From My Old Computer to My New Dell Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System CD? [Comment transférer des fichiers à partir de mon ancien ordinateur vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du CD Operating System Microsoft® Windows®XP]). REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base de connaissances Dell. Configuration d'une imprimante AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, notamment : • Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour. • Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur. • Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre.Configuration de votre ordinateur 29 Consultez le Manuel du propriétaire de l'imprimante pour obtenir une assistance technique ou contactez le fabricant de l'imprimante. Câble de l'imprimante L'imprimante se connecte à l'ordinateur avec un câble USB ou un câble parallèle. Il est possible que l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous qu'il est compatible avec votre imprimante et votre ordinateur. Si vous avez acheté un câble d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous soit livré avec ce dernier. Connexion d'une imprimante USB REMARQUE : Vous pouvez connecter des périphériques USB pendant que l'ordinateur est sous tension. 1 Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation, si vous ne l'avez pas déjà fait. 2 Raccordez le câble USB de l'imprimante aux connecteurs USB de l'ordinateur et de l'imprimante. Les connecteurs USB ne s'insèrent que dans un seul sens. 3 Allumez l'imprimante, puis l'ordinateur. Si la fenêtre Assistant Ajout de matériel apparaît, cliquez sur Annuler. 4 Le cas échéant, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante. 1 connecteur USB de l'ordinateur 2 câble USB de l'imprimante 3 connecteur sur l'imprimante 2 1 330 Configuration de votre ordinateur Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la tension et les pannes d'alimentation : • Parasurtenseurs • Filtres de ligne • Onduleurs Parasurtenseurs Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection contre la surtension réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage électrique ou suite à une coupure de courant. Certains fabricants offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez attentivement la garantie du parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre une meilleure protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs. AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de courant. De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour assurer la protection du modem. Consultez la documentation du parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem. AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau. Déconnectez le câble de réseau de la prise réseau murale pendant les orages. Filtres de ligne AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de courant. Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement constant. Onduleurs AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque dur peut provoquer une perte de données ou la corruption du fichier. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez uniquement votre ordinateur à un onduleur. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente équipée d'un parasurtenseur. Les onduleurs protègent contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Ils incluent une batterie qui alimente temporairement les périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de la batterie et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Utilisation de l'écran 31 Utilisation de l'écran Réglage de la luminosité Lorsque l'ordinateur Dell™ fonctionne avec une batterie, vous pouvez économiser de l'énergie en réglant le paramètre de luminosité au minimum acceptable à l'aide de et la flèche haut ou bas du clavier. REMARQUE : Les combinaisons de touches pour la luminosité n'ont des répercussions que sur l'affichage de l'ordinateur portable ; elles n'ont aucune répercussion sur les moniteurs ou les projecteurs que vous connectez au portable ou à la station d'accueil. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe et que vous essayez de modifier le niveau de luminosité, il se peut que l'indicateur de luminosité s'affiche, mais le niveau de luminosité du périphérique externe ne change pas dans tous les cas. Appuyez sur les touches suivantes pour régler la luminosité de l'écran : • Appuyez sur et sur la flèche haut pour augmenter la luminosité de l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). • Appuyez sur et sur la flèche bas pour réduire la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). Basculement de l'image vidéo Lorsque vous démarrez un ordinateur auquel un périphérique externe (tel qu'un moniteur externe ou un projecteur) est connecté et que ce périphérique est sous tension, l'image peut s'afficher sur l'écran intégré ou sur le périphérique externe. Appuyez sur pour basculer entre les options d'affichage suivantes pour l'image vidéo : écran seul, périphérique externe seul ou écran et périphérique externe simultanément. Réglage de la résolution d'affichage et du taux de rafraîchissement Pour qu'un programme s'affiche à une résolution spécifique, le contrôleur vidéo et l'écran doivent prendre tous deux en charge le programme sélectionné et les pilotes vidéo requis doivent être installés. Avant de modifier un paramètre d'affichage par défaut, prenez note du paramètre d'origine et gardez-le pour référence ultérieure.32 Utilisation de l'écran Si vous sélectionnez une résolution ou une palette de couleurs plus élevée que celle prise en charge par l'écran, les paramètres se règlent automatiquement sur la configuration prise en charge la plus proche. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous Choisissez une tâche…, cliquez sur la zone à modifier, ou sous ou une icône du Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. REMARQUE : Lorsque vous augmentez la résolution de l'écran, les icônes et le texte apparaissent plus petits.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 33 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Pavé numérique Le pavé numérique fonctionne comme celui d'un clavier externe. Chaque touche du pavé numérique a plusieurs fonctions. Les chiffres et les symboles du pavé numérique figurent en bleu à droite de ces touches. Pour taper un chiffre ou un symbole, appuyez sur et sur la touche désirée après activation du pavé. • Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur . Le voyant indique que le pavé numérique est activé. • Pour désactiver le pavé numérique, appuyez de nouveau sur . 1 pavé numérique 1 934 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Combinaisons de touches Fonctions système Batterie Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD Fonctions d'affichage Radios (notamment le réseau sans fil et une carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®) Ouvre la fenêtre Gestionnaire des tâches. Affiche la jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet. Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas prise en charge par Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 38. Éjecte le plateau du lecteur (si Dell QuickSet est installé). Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas prise en charge par Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. Bascule l'image vidéo vers l'option d'affichage suivante. Les options comprennent l'écran intégré, un moniteur externe et les deux écrans simultanément. et la touche flèche haut Augmente la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (non pas sur un moniteur externe). et la touche flèche bas Diminue la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (non pas sur un moniteur externe). Active et désactive les radios, notamment le réseau sans fil et la carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 35 Gestion de l'alimentation Fonctions des haut-parleurs Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® Pour régler les options du clavier, telles que la vitesse de répétition des caractères, ouvrez le panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Clavier. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14. Active un mode d'économie d'énergie. Vous pouvez reprogrammer ce raccourci clavier pour activer un autre mode d'économie d'énergie sous l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation. Reportezvous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. Augmente le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Diminue le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Active et désactive les haut-parleurs intégrés et les hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Touche du logo Windows et Réduit toutes les fenêtres ouvertes. Touche du logo Windows et Agrandit toutes les fenêtres. Touche du logo Windows et Exécute l'Explorateur Windows. Cela ouvre la même fenêtre que lorsque vous double-cliquez sur Poste de travail sur le bureau. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Exécuter. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results (Résultats de la recherche). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results-Computer (Résultats de la recherche - Ordinateur) (si l'ordinateur est connecté à un réseau). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue System Properties (Propriétés système).36 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Tablette tactile La tablette tactile détecte la pression et le mouvement de vos doigts pour vous permettre de déplacer le curseur à l'écran. Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons de la même façon que vous utilisez la souris. • Posez et déplacez votre doigt sur la surface de la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur. • Pour sélectionner un objet, appuyez délicatement une fois sur la surface de la tablette tactile ou appuyez avec le pouce sur le bouton gauche de la tablette tactile. • Pour sélectionner et déplacer (ou faire glisser) un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et tapez deux fois sur la tablette. Laissez votre doigt sur la tablette tactile la deuxième fois et déplacez l'objet sélectionné en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la surface. • Pour double-cliquer sur un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et appuyez doucement deux fois sur la tablette tactile ou appuyez deux fois sur le bouton gauche à l'aide de votre pouce. Personnalisation de la tablette tactile Vous pouvez désactiver la tablette tactile ou régler ses paramètres à l'aide de la fenêtre de propriétés Mouse Properties (Souris). 1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis cliquez sur Souris. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14. 2 Dans la fenêtre de propriétés Mouse Properties (Souris), cliquez sur l'onglet Tablette tactile pour régler les paramètres de la tablette tactile. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre. 1 tablette tactile 1Utilisation d'une batterie 37 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des informations sur la garantie Dell de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide d'information sur le produit ou au document de garantie livré avec votre ordinateur. Pour un fonctionnement optimal et afin de préserver les paramètres du BIOS, laissez la batterie principale installée en permanence dans votre ordinateur portable Dell™. Votre ordinateur est livré avec une batterie, installée dans la baie. REMARQUE : Lors de la première utilisation de votre ordinateur, la batterie n'étant pas obligatoirement complètement chargée, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour raccorder votre nouvel ordinateur à une prise secteur. Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur tant que la batterie n'est pas complètement chargée. Pour afficher le niveau de charge de la batterie, accédez au Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Options d'alimentation, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Jauge d'alimentation. REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie reste chargée) diminue avec le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, il est possible que vous deviez en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur. L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction des conditions de fonctionnement. Cette durée est considérablement réduite par l'exécution de certaines opérations, notamment, sans que cela soit limitatif : • Utilisation des lecteurs optiques • Utilisation de périphériques de communications sans fil, de cartes ExpressCard, de cartes mémoire multimédia ou de périphériques USB • Utilisation de paramètres élevés d'affichage et de luminosité, d'économiseurs d'écran en 3D ou d'autres programmes gourmands en ressources, tels que des jeux en 3D • Fonctionnement de l'ordinateur en mode de performances optimales (reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41). REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de connecter l'ordinateur à une prise électrique lorsque vous gravez un CD ou DVD. Vous pouvez vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie (reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de la charge de la batterie » à la page 38) avant d'insérer la batterie dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin que l'ordinateur vous alerte lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Pour des informations sur l'accès à Quickset ou à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41.38 Utilisation d'une batterie PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell. N'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures ménagères. Lorsque votre batterie ne tient plus sa charge, contactez votre service municipal de traitement des déchets pour savoir comment vous en débarrasser. Reportez-vous à la section « Mise au rebut de la batterie » du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation inadéquate de la batterie peut augmenter le risque d'incendie ou de brûlure chimique. Prenez soin de ne pas la percer, l'incinérer, la démonter ou l'exposer à une température supérieure à 65 °C (149 °F). Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec d'extrêmes précautions. Les batteries endommagées peuvent fuir et causer des dommages personnels ou matériels. Vérification de la charge de la batterie La jauge de batterie Dell QuickSet, la fenêtre de jauge de Microsoft® Windows®, l'icône , la jauge de charge et la jauge d'état de la batterie, ainsi que l'alerte de batterie faible fournissent des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet Si Dell QuickSet est installé, appuyez sur pour afficher la jauge de batterie QuickSet. La fenêtre Jauge de batterie affiche l'état, le niveau de charge et la durée nécessaire pour le chargement complet de la batterie de votre ordinateur. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Microsoft® Windows® Jauge La jauge de Windows indique la charge de batterie restante. Pour consulter la jauge, double-cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur la jauge d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41. Si l'ordinateur est relié à une prise secteur, l'icône apparaît. Indicateur de charge En appuyant une fois sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie ou en appuyant et en maintenant enfoncé ce bouton, vous pouvez vérifier les éléments suivants : • Le niveau de charge de la batterie (appuyez et relâchez le bouton d'état) • L'état de fonctionnement de la batterie (appuyez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton d'état) L'autonomie de la batterie est déterminée en grande partie par le nombre de charges qu'elle reçoit. Après des centaines de cycles de charge et de décharge, la capacité de charge des batteries diminue et l'état des batteries se dégrade. C'est pourquoi, une batterie peut afficher l'état « chargé » tout en maintenant un niveau de charge réduit (état). Utilisation d'une batterie 39 Vérification du niveau de charge de la batterie Pour vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie, appuyez sur le bouton d'état, situé sur l'indicateur de charge de la batterie, et relâchez-le pour allumer les voyants de niveau de charge. Chaque voyant représente environ 20 pour cent de la charge totale de la batterie. S'il reste, par exemple, 80 pour cent de la charge de la batterie, quatre des voyants sont allumés. Si aucun voyant n'est allumé, la batterie est complètement déchargée. Vérification de l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie de l'une des deux manières suivantes : en utilisant l'indicateur de charge de la batterie comme décrit ci-dessous ou en utilisant la jauge de batterie de Dell QuickSet. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Pour vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie à l'aide de l'indicateur de charge, appuyez sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 3 secondes. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, la batterie est en bon état et elle dispose encore de plus de 80 pour cent de sa capacité de charge d'origine. Chaque voyant représente une dégradation incrémentielle. Si cinq voyants s'allument, la batterie dispose de moins de 60 pour cent de sa capacité de charge et vous devez envisager son remplacement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'autonomie de la batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157. Alerte de batterie faible AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre ou de corrompre des données, enregistrez votre travail juste après l'apparition de l'alerte de batterie faible, puis branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise murale. Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, l'ordinateur passe automatiquement en mode Mise en veille prolongée. Par défaut, une fenêtre contextuelle vous avertit lorsque la batterie est déchargée à environ 90 pour cent. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des alertes relatives à la batterie. Pour des informations sur l'accès à Quickset ou à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41. Préservation de l'alimentation par batterie Procédez comme suit pour économiser l'alimentation de la batterie : • Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur aussi souvent que possible car la durée de vie de la batterie est largement déterminée par le nombre d'utilisations et de recharges. • Mettez l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée lorsque vous le laissez allumé sans l'utiliser pendant de longs laps de temps. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée, reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. • Vous pouvez sélectionner des options à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation afin d'optimiser l'utilisation de l'énergie de votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer ces options pour changer lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, fermez l'écran ou appuyez sur <Échap>. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41 pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « Performances de la batterie » à la page 37 pour plus d'informations sur la préservation de l'alimentation par batterie.40 Utilisation d'une batterie Modes d'économie d'énergie Mode Veille Le mode Veille permet d'économiser l'énergie en désactivant l'affichage et le disque dur au terme d'une période d'inactivité prédéterminée (délai d'attente). Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Veille, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Si l'alimentation secteur ou sur batterie est coupée alors que l'ordinateur est en mode Veille, vous risquez de perdre des données. Pour passer en mode Veille : • Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, puis sur Veille. ou • Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées sous l'onglet Avancé (reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41) de la fenêtre Propriétés des Options d'alimentation, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : – Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. – Fermez l'écran. – Appuyez sur <Échap>. En fonction de la configuration des options de l'onglet Avancé, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation électrique ou ouvrez l'écran pour quitter le mode Veille. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Veille au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Mode Mise en veille prolongée Le mode Mise en veille prolongée économise l'énergie en copiant les données système dans une zone réservée du disque dur avant d'éteindre complètement l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Mise en veille prolongée, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez ni retirer des périphériques ni déconnecter votre ordinateur de la station d'accueil lorsqu'il est en mode Mise en veille prolongée. Votre ordinateur passe en mode Mise en veille prolongée quand le niveau de charge de la batterie devient insuffisant. Pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée manuellement : • Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, appuyez sur et maintenez la touche enfoncée, puis cliquez sur Mise en veille prolongée. ou • Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées dans l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée : – Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. – Fermez l'écran. – Appuyez sur .Utilisation d'une batterie 41 REMARQUE : Certaines cartes ExpressCard peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement lorsque l'ordinateur sort du mode Mise en veille prolongée. Retirez et réinsérez la carte (reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67) ou redémarrez tout simplement l'ordinateur. Pour quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur peut mettre quelques instants à quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Mise en veille prolongée, consultez la documentation livrée avec votre système d'exploitation. Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation Vous pouvez utiliser l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation de QuickSet ou les propriétés des options d'alimentation de Windows pour configurer les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation sur votre ordinateur. • Pour accéder à l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, double-cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez sur le bouton Aide dans l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. • Pour accéder à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Performances et maintenance→ Options d'alimentation. Pour des informations sur les champs de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur l'icône Point d'interrogation dans la barre de titre, puis sur la zone sur laquelle vous souhaitez obtenir des informations. Chargement de la batterie REMARQUE : Avec Dell™ ExpressCharge™, l'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée en 1 heure si l'ordinateur est éteint. La durée de chargement est plus longue lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension. Vous pouvez laisser la batterie dans l'ordinateur aussi longtemps que vous le souhaitez. Les circuits internes de la batterie préviennent toute surcharge. Lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur ou que vous installez une batterie pendant que l'ordinateur est branché sur une prise secteur, l'ordinateur vérifie le niveau de charge et la température de la batterie. Au besoin, l'adaptateur secteur charge alors la batterie et maintient le niveau de charge. Si la batterie est chaude parce qu'elle se trouvait dans l'ordinateur ou en raison de la température extérieure, il est probable qu'elle ne se charge pas lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur. Si le voyant clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée. Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur et laissez refroidir l'ordinateur et la batterie jusqu'à ce qu'ils atteignent la température ambiante. Branchez alors l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur et continuez à charger la batterie. Pour plus d'informations sur la résolution des problèmes liés à la batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes d'alimentation » à la page 97. Remplacement de la batterie PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'exécuter ces procédures, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez l'adaptateur secteur de la prise secteur et de l'ordinateur, débranchez le modem de la prise murale et de l'ordinateur et retirez les autres câbles externes de l'ordinateur.42 Utilisation d'une batterie AVIS : Vous devez retirer tous les câbles externes de l'ordinateur pour éviter d'endommager les connecteurs. PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell™, n'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur. AVIS : Si vous décidez de remplacer la batterie alors que l'ordinateur est en veille, vous disposez d'une minute pour effectuer cette opération. Passé ce délai, l'ordinateur s'éteint et toutes les données non enregistrées sont définitivement perdues. Pour retirer la batterie : 1 Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la station d'accueil. 2 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode de gestion de l'alimentation. 3 Faites glisser en le maintenant le loquet de fermeture de la baie de la batterie, situé sous l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie. Pour remettre en place la batterie, suivez la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. Stockage de la batterie Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur lorsque vous rangez ce dernier pendant une période prolongée. Sinon, la batterie finira par se décharger. Après une longue période de stockage, rechargez complètement la batterie avant de l'utiliser (reportez-vous à la section « Chargement de la batterie » à la page 41). 1 batterie 2 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 2 1Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 43 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Lecture CD ou DVD AVIS : N'exercez pas de pression vers le bas sur le plateau du lecteur de CD ou de DVD lorsque vous l'ouvrez ou le fermez. Laissez le plateau fermé lorsque vous n'utilisez pas le lecteur. AVIS : Ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lors de la lecture de CD ou de DVD. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection qui se trouve sur le devant du lecteur. 2 Tirez sur le plateau. 3 Placez le disque, étiquette vers le haut, au centre du plateau et enclenchez-le sur l'axe. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un module expédié avec un autre ordinateur, installez les pilotes et les logiciels nécessaires à la lecture de DVD ou à l'écriture de données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au CD Drivers and Utilities (le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement disponible pour votre ordinateur ou dans certains pays). 4 Poussez le plateau du lecteur pour le refermer.44 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Pour formater les CD afin de stocker des données, créer des CD de musique ou copier des CD, reportezvous au logiciel du CD livré avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous d'être en règle avec les lois relatives aux droits d'auteur lorsque vous créez des CD. Les lecteurs de CD sont dotés des boutons essentiels suivants : Les lecteurs de DVD sont dotés des boutons essentiels suivants : Pour plus d'informations sur la lecture de CD ou DVD, cliquez sur Aide sur le lecteur de CD ou DVD (si disponible). Lecture. Marche arrière dans la plage en cours. Pause. Marche avant dans la plage en cours. Arrêt. Revenir à la plage précédente. Éjecter. Passer à la plage suivante. Arrêt. Redémarrer le chapitre en cours. Lecture. Avance rapide. Pause. Retour rapide. Avancer d'une trame en mode Pause. Passer au titre ou au chapitre suivant. Lecture continue du titre ou du chapitre en cours. Revenir au titre ou au chapitre précédent. Éjecter.Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 45 Réglage du volume REMARQUE : Lorsque les haut-parleurs sont mis en sourdine, vous ne pouvez pas entendre le son du CD ou du DVD. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes (ou Programmes)→ Accessoires→ Divertissement (ou Multimédia), puis cliquez sur Contrôle du volume. 2 Dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume, cliquez et faites glisser la barre située dans la colonne Contrôle du volume, puis déplacez-la vers le haut ou le bas pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume. Pour plus d'informations sur les options de contrôle du volume, cliquez sur Aide dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume. L'indicateur de volume affiche le niveau du volume actuel, même lorsque le son est mis en sourdine, sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches et sélectionner ou désélectionner Disable On Screen Volume Meter (Désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran) ou appuyer sur les boutons de contrôle du volume pour activer ou désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran. Lorsque l'indicateur est activé, réglez le volume à l'aide des boutons de contrôle du volume ou en appuyant sur les touches suivantes : • Appuyez sur pour augmenter le volume. • Appuyez sur pour réduire le volume. • Appuyez sur pour mettre le volume en sourdine. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Réglage de l'image Si un message d'erreur vous informe que la résolution et la profondeur de couleur en cours utilisent trop de mémoire et empêchent la lecture du DVD, réglez les propriétés d'affichage. 1 icône du volume 2 indicateur de volume 3 icône de mise en sourdine 1 3 246 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous Choisir une tâche..., cliquez sur Change the screen resolution (Modifier la résolution de l'écran). 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés de l'affichage, cliquez sur la barre de Résolution de l'écran et faites-la glisser pour définir la résolution à 1024 sur 768 pixels. 5 Cliquez sur le menu déroulant sous Qualité couleur, puis cliquez sur Moyenne 16 bits. 6 Cliquer sur OK. Utilisation de Dell Media Experience™ et de Dell MediaDirect™ REMARQUE : Dell MediaDirect™ est en option et peut ne pas être fourni avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Dell QuickSet est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de Dell MediaDirect. La modification ou la désactivation des paramètres par défaut de QuickSet peuvent limiter les fonctionnalités de Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. Appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect, situé à l'avant de l'ordinateur, pour lancer Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect. Si l'ordinateur est allumé ou en mode Veille Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect tandis que l'ordinateur est sous tension ou en mode Veille, Windows XP Media Center Manager ou Dell Media Experience s'exécute, en fonction de la configuration de votre système. Si l'ordinateur est éteint ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée Lorsque votre ordinateur est hors tension ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée, vous pouvez appuyer sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect pour le démarrer et lancer automatiquement l'application Dell MediaDirect. 1 bouton Dell MediaDirect 1Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 47 REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonction Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect si vous reformatez involontairement le disque dur. Le logiciel d'installation est requis pour réinstaller ces applications multimédia. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience L'application multimédia de Dell sur votre ordinateur contient des informations d'aide. Lorsque vous lancez l'application multimédia, cliquez sur l'icône du bureau pour obtenir une aide supplémentaire. Utilisation du CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) de Dell MediaDirect™ ou du CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) de Dell MediaDirect CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) REMARQUE : L'utilitaire de réparation peut être enregistré sur le CD Drivers and Utilities plutôt que sur le CD Repair Utility, ou bien il peut être téléchargé. Utilisez le CD Repair Utility pour réparer Dell MediaDirect lorsque : • Votre ordinateur est encore équipé de son disque dur d'origine, mais que : – Dell MediaDirect ne fonctionne par correctement. – Dell MediaDirect ne s'exécute pas lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect. – Vous devez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. • Vous recevez ce kit avec un nouvel ordinateur et vous souhaitez modifier la façon dont votre disque dur est partitionné. AVIS : Ne modifiez la façon dont votre disque dur est partitionné que si vous êtes sûr de ce que vous faites. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de réparation, reportez-vous à la section « Réparation de Dell MediaDirect ». 1 bouton Dell MediaDirect 148 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) Utilisez le CD Reinstallation pour réinstaller Dell MediaDirect lorsque vous souhaitez remplacer votre disque dur existant par un nouveau lecteur à l'aide de ce kit. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect ». Réparation de Dell MediaDirect REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Repair Utility (Utilitaire de réparation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt réparer Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réinstaller. Si vous utilisez le CD Repair Utility alors que vous devriez réinstaller Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement. REMARQUE : L'utilitaire de réparation peut être enregistré sur le CD Drivers and Utilities plutôt que sur le CD Repair Utility, ou bien il peut être téléchargé. Pour réparer Dell MediaDirect sur votre disque dur : 1 Insérez le CD Repair Utility (ou le CD Drivers and Utilities, le cas échéant) dans le lecteur optique et redémarrez votre ordinateur. 2 Appuyez sur la touche dès l'apparition du logo Dell pour entrer dans le menu d'amorçage. 3 Appuyez sur la flèche vers le bas pour mettre en surbrillance le premier CD de la liste. 4 Appuyez sur pour démarrer à partir du CD. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities, tapez après avoir démarré à partir du CD. 5 À l'invite, tapez la commande cd \MD2 et appuyez sur . 6 Saisissez Repair (réparer) et appuyez sur . L'utilitaire de réparation de Dell MediaDirect s'ouvre. Pour lancer l'utilitaire pour réparer Dell MediaDirect : 1 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner OK et appuyez sur . 2 Lorsque le message Terminé apparaît, retirez le CD du lecteur et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez maintenant utiliser le bouton Dell MediaDirect de votre ordinateur pour lancer Dell MediaDirect. Réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt réinstaller Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réparer. Si vous utilisez le CD Reinstallation alors que vous devriez réparer Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement. Pour pouvoir réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect, vous devez préparer votre disque dur. Après avoir remplacé le disque, suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect » lorsque vous installez le système d'exploitation Windows XP. Une fois votre disque dur prêt, vous pouvez réinstaller les pilotes matériels et les logiciels (consultez les Guides de réinstallation de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com). Ensuite, suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect ».Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 49 Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect Lorsque vous installez le système d'exploitation Windows XP, vous devez partitionner le disque dur et réserver 1308 Mo d'espace non partitionné pour Dell MediaDirect. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez créer trois partitions maximum, en plus de l'espace non partitionné réservé à Dell MediaDirect. Pour créer une partition sur votre disque dur : 1 Appuyez sur la touche pour accepter le contrat de licence lors de l'installation de Windows XP. 2 Sur la fenêtre de configuration des partitions, utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'espace non partitionné. 3 Tapez C pour créer une nouvelle partition à l'aide de l'espace non partitionné. REMARQUE : Pour créer suffisamment d'espace sur votre disque dur pour la partition de Dell MediaDirect, vous devez calculer la taille de la partition en méga-octets (Mo), en soustrayant 1308 à la quantité d'espace disponible en Mo sur le disque dur. 4 Entrez la taille désirée en Mo pour la nouvelle partition et appuyez sur . 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner la partition créée et appuyez sur . 6 Sélectionnez Formater la partition en utilisant le système de fichiers NTFS (Rapide) et appuyez sur . 7 Consultez le guide d'installation de Windows XP pour terminer l'installation de Windows XP. Lorsque toutes les étapes de l'installation de Windows XP sont passées et que le bureau apparaît, vous pouvez réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect. Réinstallation du logiciel Dell MediaDirect REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section « CD Reinstallation (Réinstallation) » pour savoir si vous devez plutôt réinstaller Dell MediaDirect au lieu de le réparer.Si vous utilisez le CD Reinstallation alors que vous devriez réparer Dell MediaDirect, il se peut que le processus ne se termine pas correctement. REMARQUE : Suivez les instructions décrites à la section « Préparation du disque dur pour la réinstallation de Dell MediaDirect » avant de réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect. Si vous ne le faites pas, vous recevrez un message d'erreur lors de la réinstallation du logiciel. Si vous recevez un message d'erreur, réinstallez Windows XP ou procurez-vous un utilitaire qui vous permettra de partitionner un disque dur à partition unique avec un système d'exploitation déjà installé dessus. Pour réinstaller le logiciel Dell MediaDirect : 1 Insérez le CD Reinstallation dans le lecteur optique. La fenêtre Dell MediaDirect™ s'ouvre. 2 Appuyez sur pour réinstaller Dell MediaDirect. Un message indiquant la fin du processus de réinstallation apparaît. 3 Retirez le CD Reinstallation du lecteur optique et appuyez sur pour fermer la fenêtre de réinstallation. 4 Arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer. 5 Utilisez le bouton Dell MediaDirect de votre ordinateur pour lancer Dell MediaDirect et terminer le processus de réinstallation.50 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Connexion de votre ordinateur à un périphérique téléviseur ou audio REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur n'est pas livré avec tous les câbles audio et vidéo nécessaires pour le relier à un téléviseur ou à un autre périphérique audio. Il est possible d'acheter des câbles et des câbles d'adaptateur TV/audio numérique auprès de Dell. Votre ordinateur est doté d'un connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo qui vous permet de raccorder l'ordinateur à un téléviseur par un câble S-vidéo standard, un câble d'adaptateur vidéo composite ou un câble d'adaptateur vidéo composante (disponible auprès de Dell). 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 connecteur S-vidéo 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 3 connecteur audio numérique S/PDIF 4 connecteur de sortie vidéo composite 5 connecteur S-vidéo 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composante 3 connecteur audio numérique S/PDIF 4 connecteur de sortie vidéo composante Pr (rouge) 5 connecteur de sortie vidéo composante Pb (bleu) 6 connecteur de sortie vidéo composante Y (vert) 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 6Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 51 Votre téléviseur est doté d'un connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo, d'un connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite ou d'un connecteur d'entrée vidéo composante. En fonction du type de connecteur disponible sur votre téléviseur, vous pouvez utiliser un câble S-vidéo, vidéo composite ou vidéo composante disponible dans le commerce pour relier l'ordinateur au téléviseur. Il est recommandé de connecter les câbles vidéo et audio à l'ordinateur selon l'une des combinaisons suivantes. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous aux schémas situés au début de chaque sous-section pour déterminer la méthode de connexion la plus appropriée. • S-vidéo et audio standard • Vidéo composante et audio standard • Audio standard et sortie vidéo composante Lorsque vous avez terminé de connecter les câbles vidéo et audio entre l'ordinateur et le téléviseur, vous devez activer votre ordinateur pour qu'il fonctionne avec le téléviseur. Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. En outre, si vous utilisez l'audio numérique S/PDIF, reportez-vous à la section « Activation de l'audio numérique S/PDIF » à la page 62. S-vidéo et audio standard 1 connecteur audio 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 1 252 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez brancher un câble S-vidéo directement sur le connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur (sans passer par le câble d'adaptateur audio numérique/TV) si votre téléviseur ou périphérique audio prend en charge la technologie S-vidéo mais pas l'audio numérique S/PDIF. 2 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie S-vidéo de l'ordinateur. 3 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo. 4 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 5 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou sur un autre périphérique audio. 6 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 7 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 câble S-vidéo standard 2 câble audio standard 1 2Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 53 S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble S-vidéo 3 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 2 354 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie S-vidéo de l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo situé sur le téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio numérique sur le câble d'adaptateur vidéo composite. 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF sur le connecteur d'entrée audio situé sur le téléviseur ou le périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble S-vidéo 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 2Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 55 Vidéo composite et audio standard 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble vidéo composite sur le connecteur de sortie vidéo composite situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 connecteur d'entrée audio 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 3 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 3 câble audio standard 2 1 3 1 2 356 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 6 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou sur un autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 1 1 2Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 57 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble vidéo composite dans le connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio S/PDIF sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 3 câble audio standard 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 3 2 1 1 258 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique sur le connecteur d'entrée S/PDIF situé sur le téléviseur ou l'autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. Vidéo composante et audio standard 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble vidéo composante 3 câble audio standard 1 2 1 2 3Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 59 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composante au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez les trois extrémités du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante situés sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux ports d'adaptateur appropriés. 4 Branchez les trois connecteurs de l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs d'entrée vidéo composante situés sur le téléviseur. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 6 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou le périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble vidéo composante 1 260 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble vidéo composante 3 câble audio standard 1 2 1 2 3Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 61 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composante au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez les trois extrémités du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante situés sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux ports d'adaptateur appropriés. 4 Branchez les trois connecteurs de l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs d'entrée vidéo composante situés sur le téléviseur. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio S/PDIF situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique sur le connecteur d'entrée S/PDIF situé sur le téléviseur ou l'autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur » à la page 63 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec celui-ci. 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante 3 câble vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composante 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 3 2 2 162 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias Activation de l'audio numérique S/PDIF REMARQUE : Votre logiciel de DVD peut se présenter différemment. Reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec votre logiciel de DVD. Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un lecteur de DVD, vous pouvez activer le son numérique pour la lecture des DVD. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tousles programmes, puis sélectionnez l'application de DVD. 2 Insérez un DVD dans le lecteur de DVD. Si la lecture du DVD démarre, cliquez sur le bouton d'arrêt. 3 Cliquez sur l'option Paramètres. 4 Cliquez sur l'option DVD. 5 Cliquez sur l'icône DVD Audio Setting (Paramétrage audio du DVD). 6 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Configuration des haut-parleurs pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option SPDIF. 7 Cliquez une première fois sur le bouton Précédent, puis une seconde fois pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Activation de S/PDIF dans le pilote audio Windows 1 Double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur dans la zone de notification de Windows. 2 Cliquez sur le menu Options, puis sur Contrôles avancés. 3 Cliquez sur Avancé. 4 Cliquez sur Interface S/PDIF. 5 Cliquez sur Fermer. 6 Cliquer sur OK. Configuration de la lecture de DVD via le casque Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un lecteur de DVD, vous pouvez activer le son numérique pour la lecture des DVD. REMARQUE : Votre logiciel de DVD peut se présenter différemment. Reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec votre logiciel de DVD. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, puis sélectionnez le programme de DVD. 2 Insérez un DVD dans le lecteur de DVD. Si la lecture du DVD démarre, cliquez sur le bouton d'arrêt. 3 Cliquez sur l'option Paramètres. 4 Cliquez sur l'option DVD. 5 Cliquez sur l'icône DVD Audio Setting (Paramétrage audio du DVD). 6 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Configuration des haut-parleurs pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option Casque.Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédias 63 7 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Audio listening mode (Mode d'écoute audio) pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option CL Headphone (Casque CL). 8 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard de l'option Dynamic range compression (Compression de la plage dynamique) pour sélectionner l'option la plus adaptée. 9 Cliquez une première fois sur le bouton Précédent, puis une seconde fois pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Activation des paramètres d'écran d'un téléviseur Contrôleur vidéo REMARQUE : Pour vous assurer que les options d'affichage apparaissent correctement, connectez le téléviseur à votre ordinateur avant d'activer les paramètres d'affichage. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Affichage, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. 3 Cliquez sur Avancé. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet de votre carte vidéo. REMARQUE : Pour déterminer le type de carte vidéo installée sur votre ordinateur, consultez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, cliquez sur Démarrer→Aide et support. Sous Choisissez une tâche, cliquez sur Utiliser les outils pour afficher des informations sur votre ordinateur et diagnostiquer les problèmes. Sous Informations sur le poste de travail, sélectionnez Matériel. 5 Dans la section des périphériques d'affichage, sélectionnez l'option appropriée en fonction de l'utilisation d'un affichage simple ou multiple tout en vous assurant que les paramètres d'affichage sont corrects pour votre sélection.64 Utilisation de CD, de DVD et d'autres supports multimédiasUtilisation de cartes ExpressCard 65 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard Types de carte ExpressCard Pour plus d'informations sur les cartes ExpressCard prises en charge, reportez-vous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157. REMARQUE : Une carte ExpressCard n'est pas un périphérique amorçable. Caches pour carte ExpressCard Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique dans le logement de carte ExpressCard. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsqu'il n'y a pas de carte installée dans le logement. Les caches provenant d'autres ordinateurs ne sont pas adaptés à votre ordinateur. Pour retirer le cache, reportezvous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67. Installation d'une carte ExpressCard Vous pouvez installer une carte ExpressCard pendant que l'ordinateur fonctionne. Celui-ci détecte automatiquement la carte. Les cartes ExpressCard sont généralement marquées d'un symbole (un triangle ou une flèche, par exemple) ou portent une étiquette pour indiquer l'extrémité à insérer dans le logement. Les cartes sont conçues pour éviter une mauvaise insertion. Si l'orientation de la carte n'est pas claire, consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. Reportez-vous à l'illustration ci-dessous pour déterminer quelles sont les cartes prises en charge.66 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Pour installer une ExpressCard : 1 Tenez la carte face vers le haut. Le loquet devra peut-être être en position ouverte avant l'insertion de la carte. 2 Faites glisser la carte dans le logement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée dans le connecteur. Si vous sentez une trop grande résistance, ne forcez pas. Vérifiez l'orientation de la carte, puis faites une nouvelle tentative. 1 types de carte pris en charge (cartes Express) 2 type de carte non pris en charge (PCMCIA) 1 2Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard 67 L'ordinateur reconnaît la plupart des cartes ExpressCard et charge automatiquement le pilote de périphérique approprié. Si le programme de configuration vous demande de charger les pilotes du fabricant, utilisez la disquette ou le CD accompagnant la carte ExpressCard. Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache AVIS : Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration de carte ExpressCard (cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches) pour sélectionner et désactiver une carte avant de la retirer de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne désactivez pas la carte à l'aide de l'utilitaire de configuration, vous risquez de perdre des données. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Appuyez sur le loquet et retirez la carte ou le cache. Vous devrez appuyer à deux reprises sur certains loquets : une fois pour faire ressortir le loquet et une deuxième fois pour faire sortir la carte. Conservez le cache afin de l'utiliser à chaque fois qu'un logement d'ExpressCard est vide. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. 1 carte ExpressCard 168 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard Types de carte mémoire multimédia Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 constitue un moyen pratique et rapide de visualiser et de partager des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire. REMARQUE : Une carte mémoire multimédia n'est pas un périphérique amorçable. Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia suivantes : • Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Carte xD-Picture Caches de carte mémoire multimédia Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique installé dans le logement de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsqu'il n'y a pas de carte installée dans le logement. Les caches provenant d'autres ordinateurs ne sont pas adaptés à votre ordinateur. Pour retirer le cache, reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67. 1 bouton d'éjection 2 carte ExpressCard 1 2Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard 69 Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia Vous pouvez installer une carte mémoire multimédia dans l'ordinateur alors qu'il fonctionne. Celui-ci détecte automatiquement la carte. Les cartes mémoire multimédia sont généralement marquées d'un symbole (un triangle ou une flèche, par exemple) ou d'une étiquette pour indiquer l'extrémité à insérer dans le logement. Les cartes sont conçues pour éviter une mauvaise insertion. Si l'orientation de la carte n'est pas claire, consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Pour installer une carte mémoire multimédia : 1 Tenez la carte face vers le haut. 2 Faites glisser la carte dans le logement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée dans le connecteur. Si vous sentez une trop grande résistance, ne forcez pas. Vérifiez l'orientation de la carte, puis faites une nouvelle tentative. L'ordinateur reconnaît la carte mémoire multimédia et charge automatiquement le pilote de périphérique adapté. Si le programme de configuration vous indique de charger les pilotes du fabricant, utilisez le CD accompagnant la carte mémoire multimédia, le cas échéant. 1 logement de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 2 carte mémoire multimédia 1 270 Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia ou d'un cache AVIS : Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration de carte mémoire multimédia (cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches) pour sélectionner et désactiver une carte avant de la retirer de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne désactivez pas la carte à l'aide de l'utilitaire de configuration, vous risquez de perdre des données. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Appuyez sur la carte pour libérer et retirer la carte ou le cache. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsque aucune carte mémoire multimédia n'est installée dans le logement. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Configuration d'un réseau 71 Configuration d'un réseau Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un réseau sans fil, une carte réseau doit être installée et un câble de réseau connecté à l'ordinateur. Pour connecter un câble de réseau : 1 Branchez le câble de réseau au connecteur de la carte réseau, situé sur le côté droit de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Insérez le connecteur du câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez doucement sur le câble pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble de réseau à un périphérique de connexion réseau ou à une prise murale de réseau. REMARQUE : Ne connectez pas de câble de réseau à une prise téléphonique murale. Assistant Configuration réseau L'Assistant Configuration réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre ordinateurs présents au sein d'un réseau domestique ou d'une petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Configuration réseau. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant.72 Configuration d'un réseau 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. REMARQUE : Sélectionner la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à l'Internet active le pare-feu intégré fourni avec le Service Pack 2 (SP2) de Windows XP. 4 Exécutez la liste de vérification. 5 Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) Un WLAN est une série d'ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par ondes aériennes plutôt que par le biais d'un câble réseau relié à chaque ordinateur. Dans un WLAN, un périphérique de radiocommunications appelé point d'accès ou routeur sans fil connecte des ordinateurs réseau et offre un accès réseau. Le point d'accès ou le routeur sans fil et la carte réseau sans fil située dans l'ordinateur communiquent en diffusant des données par ondes hertziennes depuis leurs antennes. Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN Pour configurer un WLAN, vous avez besoin des éléments suivants : • L'accès Internet haut débit (large bande) (comme un câble ou une connexion DSL) • Un modem large bande qui est connecté et en état de marche • Un routeur sans fil ou un point d'accès • Une carte réseau sans fil par ordinateur à connecter au WLAN • Un câble de réseau avec le connecteur (RJ-45) réseau Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil En fonction de votre sélection lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur, celui-ci a diverses configurations. Pour confirmer que votre ordinateur est équipé d'une carte réseau sans fil et pour connaître le type de cette carte, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Bouton Démarrer et option Connexions • La confirmation de votre commande Bouton Démarrer et option Connexions 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer. 2 Pointez sur Connexions, puis cliquez sur Afficher toutes les connexions. Si Connexion réseau sans fil n'apparaît pas sous Réseau local ou Internet à haute vitesse, il est possible que vous n'ayez pas de carte réseau sans fil.Configuration d'un réseau 73 Si Connexion réseau sans fil apparaît, vous disposez d'une carte réseau sans fil. Pour afficher des informations détaillées sur la carte réseau sans fil : 1 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Connexion réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Propriétés de la connexion réseau sans fil apparaît. Le nom et le numéro de modèle de la carte réseau sans fil sont répertoriés dans l'onglet Général. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur est configuré sur l'option de menu Démarrer classique, vous pouvez afficher les connexions réseau en cliquant sur le bouton Démarrer, en pointant sur Paramètres et en sélectionnant Connexions réseau. Si Connexion réseau sans fil n'apparaît pas, il est possible que vous n'ayez pas de carte réseau sans fil. Confirmation de commande La confirmation de commande que vous avez reçue à la commande de votre ordinateur énumère le matériel et les logiciels fournis avec celui-ci. Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN Connexion d'un routeur sans fil et d'un modem large bande 1 Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) pour obtenir des informations précises sur les exigences relatives à la connexion de votre modem large bande. 2 Assurez-vous d'avoir un accès Internet câblé par le biais de votre modem large bande avant d'essayer de configurer une connexion Internet sans fil. Reportez-vous à la section « Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande » à la page 71. 3 Installez les logiciels requis pour votre routeur sans fil. Un CD d'installation peut vous avoir été fourni avec votre routeur sans fil. Ce type de CD contient généralement des informations sur l'installation et le dépannage. Installez le logiciel requis conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 4 Arrêtez votre ordinateur et tout autre ordinateur fonctionnant sans fil à proximité par le biais du menu Démarrer. 5 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de votre modem large bande de la prise secteur. 6 Débranchez le câble réseau de l'ordinateur et du modem. REMARQUE : Patientez au moins 5 minutes, une fois votre modem large bande déconnecté avant de continuer de configurer le réseau. 7 Débranchez le câble d'adaptateur CA de votre routeur sans fil, afin d'avoir l'assurance que le routeur n'est plus alimenté. 8 Branchez un câble réseau sur le connecteur réseau (RJ-45) du modem large bande non alimenté. 9 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble sur le connecteur réseau (RJ-45) Internet du routeur sans fil non alimenté. 10 Veillez à ce qu'aucun autre câble réseau ou USB (hormis le câble réseau reliant le modem et le routeur sans fil) n'est relié au modem large bande. REMARQUE : Redémarrez les périphériques sans fil dans l'ordre décrit ci-dessous pour empêcher toute défaillance de connexion potentielle.74 Configuration d'un réseau 11 Mettez uniquement le modem large bande sous tension et attendez au moins 2 minutes qu'il se stabilise. Au bout de 2 minutes, passez à l'étape 12. 12 Mettez le routeur sans fil sous tension et attendez au moins 2 minutes qu'il se stabilise. Au bout de 2 minutes, passez à l'étape 13. 13 Démarrez l'ordinateur et attendez que la procédure d'amorçage soit terminée. 14 Consultez la documentation accompagnant le routeur sans fil pour exécuter les actions suivantes et configurer le routeur sans fil : • Établissez la communication entre votre ordinateur et votre routeur sans fil. • Configurez votre routeur sans fil pour communiquer avec votre routeur large bande. • Recherchez le nom de diffusion du routeur sans fil. Il est également fait référence à ce nom sous les termes techniques Identifiant d'ensemble de service (SSID) ou nom du réseau. 15 Au besoin, configurez votre carte réseau sans fil pour la connecter au réseau sans fil. Reportez-vous à la section « Connexion à un réseau local sans fil » à la page 74. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil REMARQUE : Avant de vous connecter à un WLAN, vérifiez que vous avez observé les instructions figurant dans la section « Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) » à la page 72. REMARQUE : Les instructions de mise en réseau suivantes ne s'appliquent pas aux cartes internes dotées de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® ni aux réseaux large bande mobile. Cette section présente des procédures générales concernant la connexion via une technologie sans fil. Les noms spécifiques du réseau et les détails de configuration sont variables. Reportez-vous à la section « Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) » à la page 72 pour plus d'informations sur la manière de préparer la connexion d'un ordinateur à un réseau WLAN. Votre carte réseau sans fil nécessite un logiciel et des pilotes spécifiques pour la connexion à un réseau. Le logiciel est déjà installé. REMARQUE : S'il a été supprimé ou endommagé, suivez les instructions fournies dans la documentation utilisateur de votre carte réseau sans fil. Vérifiez le type de carte réseau sans fil installée sur votre ordinateur, puis recherchez son nom sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse suivante : support.dell.com. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de carte réseau sans fil installée sur votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section « Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil » à la page 72. Détermination du Gestionnaire de périphérique réseau sans fil En fonction du logiciel installé sur votre ordinateur, différents utilitaires de configuration sans fil peuvent gérer vos périphériques réseau : • L'utilitaire de configuration de votre carte réseau sans fil • Le système d'exploitation de Windows XPConfiguration d'un réseau 75 Pour déterminer l'utilitaire de configuration sans fil qui gère votre carte réseau sans fil : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Connexions réseau. 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Connexion réseau sans fil, puis cliquez sur Afficher les réseaux sans fil disponibles. Si la fenêtre Choisir un réseau sans fil indique Windows ne peut pas configurer cette connexion, l'utilisation de configuration de la carte réseau sans fil gère la carte réseau sans fil. Si la fenêtre Choisir un réseau sans fil indique Cliquer sur un élément de la liste ci-dessous pour se connecter à un réseau sans fil dans la zone ou obtenir plus d'informations, le système d'exploitation Windows XP gère la carte réseau sans fil. Pour des informations spécifiques sur l'utilitaire de configuration sans fil installé sur votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à votre document de réseau sans fil dans le Centre d'aide et de support Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Sous Choisir une rubrique d'aide, cliquez sur Guides d'utilisation du système de Dell. 3 Sous Guides des périphériques, sélectionnez la documentation de votre carte réseau sans fil. Fin de la connexion au réseau WLAN Lorsque vous mettez votre ordinateur sous tension et qu'un réseau est détecté dans la zone pour laquelle votre ordinateur n'est pas configuré, un message contextuel apparaît à côté de l'icône communications sans fil de la barre d'état système (située dans le coin inférieur droit du bureau Windows). Suivez les instructions données dans toute invite d'utilitaire apparaissant à l'écran. Lorsque l'ordinateur est configuré pour le réseau sans fil que vous avez sélectionné, un autre message contextuel indique que l'ordinateur est connecté au réseau. Lorsque vous vous connectez ultérieurement à votre ordinateur dans la zone du réseau sans fil que vous avez sélectionné, le même message contextuel vous indique qu'une connexion au réseau sans fil est établie. REMARQUE : Si vous sélectionnez un réseau sécurisé, vous devez saisir une clé WEP ou WPA à l'invite. Les paramètres de sécurité du réseau sont uniques à votre réseau. Dell ne peut pas vous fournir ces informations. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre 1 minute. Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil REMARQUE : Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à un réseau sans fil, vérifiez que vous disposez de tous les éléments pour créer un réseau WLAN (reportez-vous à la section « Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN » à la page 72), puis vérifiez que votre carte réseau sans fil est bien activée en appuyant sur . Vous pouvez activer/désactiver la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil de votre ordinateur en appuyant sur la combinaison de touches . Si la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil est activée, appuyez sur pour la désactiver. Si la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil est désactivée, appuyez sur pour l'activer.76 Configuration d'un réseau Surveillance de l'état des connexions réseau sans fil via Dell™ QuickSet Le voyant d'activité sans fil permet de facilement surveiller l'état des périphériques sans fil de votre ordinateur. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Dell QuickSet de la barre des tâches pour sélectionner ou désélectionner Indicateur d'activité sans fil pour activer ou désactiver cet indicateur. Le voyant d'activité sans fil indique si les périphériques sans fil de votre ordinateur sont activés ou désactivés. Lorsque vous activez ou désactivez la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil, l'indicateur d'activité sans fil change pour afficher l'état en cours. Pour plus d'informations sur l'indicateur d'activité sans fil, consultez le fichier d'aide sur Dell QuickSet. Pour obtenir des informations sur QuickSet et savoir comment accéder au fichier d'aide sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section « Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet » à la page 133. Réseau étendu large bande mobile ou sans fil (WWAN) De même qu'un WLAN, un réseau large bande mobile (ou WWAN) regroupe des ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par le biais d'une technologie sans fil. Cependant, un réseau large bande mobile utilise la technologie cellulaire. Par conséquent, l'accès Internet est disponible dans les mêmes régions que le service cellulaire. Votre ordinateur peut conserver une connexion réseau large bande mobile indépendamment de sa localisation physique tant que l'ordinateur reste dans une zone couverte par votre prestataire de service cellulaire. Éléments requis pour établir une connexion avec un réseau large bande mobile REMARQUE : Selon votre ordinateur, vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau large bande mobile au moyen d'une carte ExpressCard ou Mini large bande mobile mais pas les deux. Pour configurer une connexion réseau large bande mobile, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • Une carte ExpressCard ou Mini large bande mobile (selon la configuration de votre ordinateur) Pour des instructions sur l'utilisation des cartes ExpressCard, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65. • L'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility (préinstallé sur votre ordinateur si vous achetez la carte en même temps que l'ordinateur ou disponible sur le CD accompagnant la carte achetée séparément). Si l'utilitaire est corrompu ou supprimé de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility pour obtenir des instructions. Le guide d'utilisation est accessible via le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows (ou le CD accompagnant la carte achetée séparément). Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14.Configuration d'un réseau 77 Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile REMARQUE : Ces instructions ne s'appliquent qu'aux cartes ExpressCard ou Mini large bande mobile. Elles ne s'appliquent pas aux cartes internes dotées de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® ni aux cartes Mini WLAN. REMARQUE : Avant de vous connecter à Internet, vous devez activer le service large bande mobile auprès de votre fournisseur de services cellulaires. Pour des instructions et d'autres informations sur l'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, reportez-vous au guide de l'utilisateur disponible dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. Le guide d'utilisation est également disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et sur le CD fourni avec votre carte large bande mobile si vous avez acheté la carte séparément de l'ordinateur. À l'aide de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, créez et gérez une connexion réseau large bande mobile à Internet : 1 Cliquez sur l'icône de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, , dans la barre des tâches de Windows pour exécuter l'utilitaire. 2 Cliquez sur Connecter. REMARQUE : Le bouton Connecter se transforme en bouton Déconnecter. 3 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour gérer la connexion réseau à l'aide de cet utilitaire. Réseau Bluetooth Configuration de votre connexion Bluetooth Les systèmes, équipés de la technologie Bluetooth, afficheront l'icône Bluetooth dans la barre d'état système. Si vous disposez de la technologie Bluetooth, double-cliquez sur l'icône Bluetooth. Selon le logiciel Bluetooth installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer plusieurs opérations pour terminer la configuration. Le logiciel Bluetooth vous guidera dans la procédure. Cette procédure prendra environ 5 minutes. Une fois la procédure effectuée, votre système peut établir et utiliser des connexions Bluetooth. Si, après avoir double-cliqué sur l'icône Bluetooth, le logiciel Bluetooth ne vous invite pas à effectuer une série d'opérations, votre système Bluetooth est déjà complètement configuré et prêt à être utilisé. Connexion à un réseau Bluetooth Les systèmes, équipés d'une carte interne Bluetooth, peuvent se connecter à d'autres périphériques Bluetooth, tels que des claviers et des souris, des casques stéréo, des appareils photos, des assistants numériques personnels (PDA) et des imprimantes. Il suffit d'effectuer quelques opérations, qui restent simples, pour établir une connexion au périphérique. Ces opérations varient selon le logiciel Bluetooth installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour des informations détaillées sur l'établissement de connexions Bluetooth, ouvrez votre logiciel Bluetooth en double-cliquant sur l'icône Bluetooth dans la barre d'état système. Sélectionnez Aide dans le menu principal pour une description détaillée de l'utilisation de votre carte de mise en réseau interne.78 Configuration d'un réseauSécurisation de votre ordinateur 79 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur Verrou du câble de sécurité REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur n'est pas livré avec un verrou de câble de sécurité. Un verrou de câble de sécurité est un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour utiliser le verrou, fixez-le à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur Dell™. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le dispositif. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, vérifiez qu'il est compatible avec l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. Mots de passe Les mots de passe évitent tout accès non autorisé à votre ordinateur. Dès que vous démarrez votre ordinateur, vous devez affecter un mot de passe principal à l'invite. Si aucun mot de passe n'est entré dans les deux minutes qui suivent, l'ordinateur revient à l'état de fonctionnement précédent. En cas d'utilisation de mots de passe, respectez les consignes suivantes : • Choisissez un mot de passe dont vous vous souviendrez mais qui ne soit pas facile à deviner. Par exemple, n'utilisez pas les noms des membres de votre famille ni les noms de vos animaux familiers dans vos mots de passe. • Évitez de noter votre mot de passe sur un papier. Si vous notez vos mots de passe sur un papier, assurez-vous qu'il sont stockés dans un lieu sûr.80 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur • Ne partagez pas votre mot de passe avec quelqu'un. • Assurez-vous que personne ne vous regarde lorsque vous saisissez votre mot de passe. AVIS : Les mots de passe affectent un haut niveau de sécurité aux données de votre ordinateur ou de votre disque dur. Cependant, votre système n'est pas à l'abri de personnes mal intentionnées. Si vous souhaitez un plus haut niveau de sécurité, utilisez d'autres formes de protection, comme les cartes à puce, les programmes de cryptage de données ou les cartes PC (ou Mini) dotées de fonctions de cryptage. Pour ajouter ou modifier des mots de passe, allez dans Panneau de configuration, puis Comptes d'utilisateurs. Si vous avez oublié l'un de vos mots de passe, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137). Pour votre protection, l'équipe du support technique de Dell vous demandera de prouver votre identité pour que seules les personnes autorisées puissent utiliser votre ordinateur. Logiciel de suivi informatique Un logiciel de suivi informatique peut vous permettre de localiser votre ordinateur s'il est perdu ou volé. Le logiciel est disponible en option et peut être acquis lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur Dell™. Vous pouvez également contacter votre commercial Dell pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction de sécurité. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le logiciel de suivi ne soit pas disponible dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Si vous disposez de ce logiciel, vous devez contacter l'entreprise en charge du service de suivi pour signaler la disparition de votre ordinateur en cas de perte ou de vol de ce dernier. En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur • Appelez les autorités compétentes pour signaler la perte ou le vol. Incluez le numéro de service dans votre description de l'ordinateur. Demandez à ce qu'un numéro soit affecté à cette affaire et relevez ce numéro avec le nom, l'adresse et le numéro de téléphone du bureau de police. Si possible, obtenez le nom de l'agent chargé de l'affaire. REMARQUE : Si vous savez où a eu lieu le vol ou la perte de l'ordinateur, contactez les autorités compétentes de la région. Si vous ne connaissez pas cet endroit, appelez un bureau de police de votre lieu de résidence. • Si l'ordinateur appartient à une société, avertissez le bureau de sécurité de la société. • Contactez le service clientèle de Dell pour signaler la perte de l'ordinateur. Fournissez le numéro de service de l'ordinateur, le numéro de dossier et le nom, l'adresse et le numéro de téléphone du bureau de police auquel vous avez signalé le vol. Si possible, donnez le nom de l'agent chargé de l'affaire. Le représentant du service clientèle de Dell enregistrera votre rapport sous le numéro de service de l'ordinateur et enregistrera l'ordinateur comme manquant ou volé. Si quelqu'un appelle Dell pour obtenir de l'assistance technique et donne votre numéro de service, l'ordinateur sera automatiquement identifié comme le vôtre. Le représentant essaiera d'obtenir le numéro de téléphone et l'adresse de son correspondant. Dell contactera ensuite les autorités compétentes auxquelles vous avez signalé la perte de votre ordinateur.Dépannage 81 Dépannage Service Dell Technical Update Le service Dell Technical Update fournit une notification proactive par courrier électronique des mises à jour matérielles et logicielles pour votre ordinateur. Ce service est gratuit. En outre, vous pouvez personnaliser son contenu, son format et la fréquence à laquelle vous recevez des notifications. Pour vous abonner au service Dell Technical Update, visitez le site Web suivant : support.dell.com/technicalupdate. Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si des problèmes surviennent lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur, effectuez les vérifications indiquées dans la section « Blocages et problèmes logiciels » à la page 94 et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne qu'avec les ordinateurs Dell. REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur. Démarrez Dell Diagnostics à partir de votre disque dur ou du CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé ResourceCD). Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur.82 Dépannage 3 Il existe deux manières de lancer Diagnostics : a Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Sélectionnez Diagnostics à partir du menu de démarrage et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. b Appuyez sur la touche et maintenez-la enfoncée lors de la mise sous tension du système. REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostic n'a été trouvée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système de préamorçage avec une série de diagnostics intégrés qui effectue un test préalable de la carte système, du clavier, du disque dur et de l'écran. • Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. • Si une défaillance de composant est détectée, l'ordinateur s'arrête et émet un signal sonore. Pour arrêter l'évaluation et redémarrer l'ordinateur, appuyez sur ; pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur ; pour retester le composant défectueux, appuyez sur . • Si des défaillances sont détectées lors de l'évaluation de préamorçage du système, notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. Si l'évaluation de préamorçage du système se déroule sans problème, vous recevez le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Amorçage de la partition de l'utilitaire Dell Diagnostics. Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 4 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de diagnostics du disque dur. Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities 1 Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities. 2 Arrêtez, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l'option Boot from CD-ROM (Amorcer à partir du CD-ROM) dans le menu qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur . 5 Tapez 1 pour démarrer le menu du CD ResourceCD, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. 6 Sélectionnez Run Dell 32-bit Diagnostics (Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits) dans la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée à votre ordinateur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à effectuer.Dépannage 83 Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et lorsque l'écran du menu principal s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton de l'option que vous souhaitez. 2 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell. REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est situé en haut de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le support technique de Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. 3 Si vous exécutez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus d'informations. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de votre part. Effectuez tout d'abord un Test rapide pour trouver le problème plus rapidement. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend une heure ou plus et nécessite que vous répondiez régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du problème. Onglet Fonction Results (Résultats) Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Errors (Erreurs) Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Help (Aide) Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration (Configuration) Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient les informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Parameters (Paramètres) Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.84 Dépannage 4 Une fois les tests effectués, si vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, retirez le CD. 5 Une fois les tests terminés, fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran de menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran de menu principal. Utilitaire de support de Dell L'utilitaire de support de Dell est installé sur votre ordinateur et accessible en cliquant sur l'icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du bouton Démarrer. Cet utilitaire vous permet d'exécuter les actions suivantes : obtenir des informations de support automatique, effectuer des mises à jour et des balayages de votre environnement informatique pour en vérifier l'état. Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell Accédez à l'utilitaire de support de Dell à partir de l'icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du menu Démarrer. Si l'icône de support de Dell n'apparaît pas dans la barre des tâches, procédez comme suit : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis pointez sur Tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur Support de Dell, puis pointez sur Paramètres du support de Dell. 3 Assurez-vous que l'option Afficher l'icône dans la barre des tâches est sélectionnée. REMARQUE : Si l'utilitaire de support de Dell n'est pas disponible depuis le menu Démarrer, accédez au site support.dell.com et téléchargez le logiciel. L'utilitaire de support de Dell est personnalisé pour votre environnement informatique. L'icône de support de Dell figurant dans la barre des tâches offre un fonctionnement différent lorsque vous cliquez, double-cliquez ou cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit. Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell Cliquez ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône pour exécuter les tâches suivantes : • Vérifier votre environnement informatique • Afficher les paramètres de l'utilitaire de support de Dell • Accéder au fichier d'aide de l'utilitaire de support de Dell • Afficher les questions les plus fréquemment posées • En savoir plus sur l'utilitaire de support de Dell • Désactiver l'utilitaire de support de Dell Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell Double-cliquez sur l'icône pour contrôler manuellement votre environnement informatique, afficher les questions fréquemment posées, accéder aux fichiers d'aide de l'utilitaire de support de Dell et afficher les paramètres de support de Dell. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de support de Dell, cliquez sur le point d'interrogation (?)situé en haut de l'écran Dell Support (Support de Dell).Dépannage 85 Problèmes de lecteur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ QUE MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECONNAÎT L E LECTEUR — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur de disquette, de CD ou de DVD ne figure pas dans la liste, effectuez un balayage complet avec votre logiciel antivirus à la recherche de virus pour les supprimer. Les virus empêchent parfois Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. TESTEZ L E LECTEUR — • Insérez une autre disquette, un autre CD ou un autre DVD pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier support soit défectueux. • Insérez une disquette d'amorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur. NETTOYEZ L E LECTEUR O U L E DISQUE — Reportez-vous à la section « Nettoyage de votre ordinateur » à la page 167. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CD EST CORRECTEMENT POSITIONNÉ SUR L'AXE VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES VÉRIFIEZ LES INCOMPATIBILITÉS MATÉRIELLES — Reportez-vous à la section « Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles » à la page 104. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD REMARQUE : Il peut arriver que le lecteur de CD ou de DVD haute vitesse vibre et produise du bruit. Cela ne signifie en aucun cas que le lecteur ou le CD/DVD est défectueux. REMARQUE : En raison des différentes régions du monde entier et des différents formats de disque, certains titres DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans certains lecteurs DVD. Problèmes d'écriture sur un lecteur de CD/DVD-RW FERMEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES — Le lecteur de CD/DVD-RW doit recevoir un flux régulier de données lors de l'écriture. Si ce flux est interrompu, une erreur se produit. Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer l'écriture sur le CD/DVD-RW. DÉSACTIVEZ L E MODE VEILLE DANS WINDOWS AVANT D E LANCER L'ÉCRITURE SUR UN CD/DVD-RW — Reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40 pour des informations supplémentaires sur le mode Veille. RÉDUISEZ LA VITESSE D E GRAVURE — Consultez les fichiers d'aide de votre logiciel de création de CD ou de DVD. Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur est éteint. 2 Redressez un trombone et insérez l'une de ses extrémités dans le trou d'éjection situé à l'avant du lecteur ; poussez ensuite fermement jusqu'à ce que le plateau soit partiellement éjecté. 3 Retirez le plateau avec précaution jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête.86 Dépannage Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel • Assurez-vous que ce son n'est pas émis par un programme en cours d'exécution. • Assurez-vous que le disque est correctement inséré. Problèmes liés au disque dur LAISSEZ L'ORDINATEUR REFROIDIR AVANT D E L'ALLUMER — Un disque dur trop chaud peut empêcher le fonctionnement du système d'exploitation. Laissez l'ordinateur s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. LANCEZ LA COMMANDE CHECK DISK (VÉRIFIER DISQUE) — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2 Avec le bouton droit, cliquez sur Disque local C:. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 5 Sous Détection d'erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 6 Cliquez sur Rechercher et tenter une récupération des secteurs défectueux. 7 Cliquez sur Démarrer. Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Connectez le modem uniquement à une prise téléphonique analogique. Le modem ne fonctionne pas s'il est connecté à un réseau téléphonique numérique. VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E SÉCURITÉ D E MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS — Si vous n'arrivez pas à ouvrir les pièces jointes à vos messages électroniques : 1 Dans Outlook Express, cliquez sur Outils, sur Options, puis sur Sécurité. 2 Cliquez sur Interdire les pièces jointes pour supprimer la coche. VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION D E L A LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE VÉRIFIEZ L A PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE CONNECTEZ L E MODEM DIRECTEMENT À LA PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE MURALE UTILISEZ UNE LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE DIFFÉRENTE • Assurez-vous que la ligne téléphonique est connectée à la prise jack du modem. (La prise jack comporte une étiquette verte ou bien une icône en forme de connecteur apparaît à côté de cette prise.) • Insérez le connecteur de ligne téléphonique dans le modem jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. • Déconnectez la ligne téléphonique du modem et connectez-la à un téléphone. Attendez la tonalité. • Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, par exemple un répondeur téléphonique, un télécopieur, un parasurtenseur ou un séparateur de ligne, contournez-les et connectez le modem directement à la prise jack téléphonique murale. Si vous utilisez une ligne qui mesure au moins 3 m (10 pieds), essayez une ligne plus courte.Dépannage 87 EXÉCUTEZ LES DIAGNOSTICS ASSISTANT D U MODEM — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, puis cliquez sur Assistant du modem. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour identifier et résoudre les problèmes de modem. (L'Assistant du modem n'est pas disponible sur certains ordinateurs.) VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E MODEM COMMUNIQUE AVEC WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 3 Cliquez sur Options de modem et de téléphonie. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 5 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem. 6 Cliquez sur Propriétés, sur l'onglet Diagnostics, puis sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. VÉRIFIEZ QUE VOUS ÊTES CONNECTÉ À INTERNET — Assurez-vous que vous êtes bien abonné auprès d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet. Une fois le programme de messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si la case Travailler hors connexion est cochée, décochez-la, puis connectez-vous à Internet. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. ANALYSEZ L'ORDINATEUR À L A RECHERCHE D E LOGICIELS ESPIONS — Si vous observez un ralentissement des performances de votre ordinateur, si des fenêtres publicitaires s'affichent fréquemment sur votre écran ou si vous avez des problèmes pour vous connecter sur Internet, votre ordinateur est peut-être infecté par un logiciel espion. Utilisez un programme antivirus qui inclut une protection contre les logiciels espions (une mise à niveau de votre programme sera peut-être nécessaire) afin d'analyser votre ordinateur et de supprimer les logiciels espions. Pour plus d'informations, allez sur le site support.dell.com et lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé spyware (espion). Messages d'erreur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si le message n'est pas répertorié, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme qui s'exécutait lorsque le message s'est affiché. AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D'UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE AUXILIAIRE) — La tablette tactile, la manette ou la souris externe présente peut-être une défaillance. Dans le cas d'une souris externe, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Activez l'option Dispositif de pointage dans le programme de configuration du système. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME (COMMANDE O U NOM D E FICHIER INCORRECT) — Vérifiez que vous avez bien orthographié la commande, mis des espaces à bon escient et utilisé le chemin d'accès correct. CACHE DISABLED DUE T O FAILURE (CACHE DÉSACTIVÉ EN RAISON D'UNE PANNE) — Le cache interne principal du microprocesseur présente un dysfonctionnement. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D U LECTEUR D E CD) — Le lecteur de CD ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes de lecteur » à la page 85.88 Dépannage DATA ERROR (ERREUR D E DONNÉES) — Le disque dur ne peut pas lire les données. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes de lecteur » à la page 85. DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY (MÉMOIRE DISPONIBLE RÉDUITE) — Un ou plusieurs modules de mémoire peuvent être défaillants ou mal fixés. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION (ÉCHEC D E L'INITIALISATION D U DISQUE C:) — L'initialisation du disque dur a échoué. Exécutez le groupe de tests des unités de disque dur dans Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. DRIVE NOT READY (LE LECTEUR N'EST PAS PRÊT) — Le fonctionnement requiert la présence d'un disque dur dans la baie pour pouvoir continuer. Installez une unité de disque dur dans la baie d'unité de disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113. ERROR READING PCMCIA CARD (ERREUR LORS D E LA LECTURE D E LA CARTE PCMCIA) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas identifier la carte ExpressCard. Remettez la carte en place ou essayez une autre carte. Reportezvous à la section « Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65. EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED (LA TAILLE D E LA MÉMOIRE ÉTENDUE A CHANGÉ) — La quantité de mémoire enregistrée dans la mémoire vive rémanente (NVRAM) ne correspond pas à la mémoire installée sur l'ordinateur. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'erreur apparaît de nouveau, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE (LE FICHIER EN COURS D E COPIE EST TROP VOLUMINEUX POUR L E LECTEUR D E DESTINATION) — Le fichier que vous essayez de copier est trop volumineux pour le disque ou le disque est plein. Essayez de copier le fichier sur un autre disque ou utilisez un disque de capacité plus élevée. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: (UN NOM D E FICHIER N E PEUT CONTENIR AUCUN DES CARACTÈRES SUIVANTS :) \ / : * ? " < > | — N'utilisez pas ces caractères lorsque vous nommez un fichier. GATE A20 FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L A PORTE A20) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. GENERAL FAILURE (ERREUR GÉNÉRALE) — Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la commande. Ce message est généralement suivi d'informations spécifiques—par exemple, Printer out of paper (L'imprimante manque de papier). Effectuez l'action corrective appropriée. HARD-DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATION ERROR (ERREUR D E CONFIGURATION D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas identifier le type d'unité. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportezvous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0 (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D E DISQUE DUR 0) — L'unité de disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportezvous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81).Dépannage 89 HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'unité de disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'unité de disque dur est peut-être défectueuse. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113) et amorcez l'ordinateur à partir d'un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA (INTRODUISEZ UN SUPPORT AMORÇABLE) — Le système d'exploitation tente de s'amorcer sur un CD non amorçable. Introduisez un CD amorçable. INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (INFORMATIONS D E CONFIGURATION NON VALIDES, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — Les informations de configuration du système ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle. C'est après l'installation d'un module de mémoire que ce message est le plus susceptible d'apparaître. Corrigez les options appropriées dans le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système » à la page 165). KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E L'HORLOGE CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller(Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou la souris durant la procédure d'amorçage. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E DONNÉES D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE (TOUCHE D U CLAVIER BLOQUÉE) — Pour les pavés numériques et les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou les touches durant la procédure d'amorçage. Exécutez le test Stuck Key (Touche du clavier bloquée) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). LICENSED CONTENT I S NOT ACCESSIBLE IN MEDIADIRECT (LE CONTENU SOUS LICENCE N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE DANS MEDIADIRECT) — Dell MediaDirect ne peut pas vérifier les restrictions Digital Rights Management (DRM - Gestion des droits numériques) sur le fichier, le fichier ne peut par conséquent pas être lu. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes Dell MediaDirect » à la page 95. MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D'ADRESSE MÉMOIRE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116).90 Dépannage MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR (ERREUR D'ALLOCATION D E MÉMOIRE) — Le logiciel que vous voulez utiliser est en conflit avec le système d'exploitation ou un autre programme ou utilitaire. Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez 30 secondes, puis redémarrez-le. Essayez d’utiliser le programme de nouveau. Si le message d'erreur réapparaît, consultez la documentation du logiciel. MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LIGNE D E DONNÉES À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LOGIQUE DOUBLE MOT À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LOGIQUE PAIR/IMPAIR À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE/ÉCRITURE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D'AMORÇAGE N'EST DISPONIBLE) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas trouver le disque dur. Si l'unité de disque dur est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous qu'elle est installée, bien en place et partitionnée comme périphérique d'amorçage. NO BOOT SECTOR ON HARD DRIVE (AUCUN SECTEUR D'AMORÇAGE SUR L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — Le système d'exploitation est peut-être endommagé. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D'HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81). NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN (MÉMOIRE O U RESSOURCES INSUFFISANTES. FERMEZ DES PROGRAMMES E T RÉESSAYEZ) — Trop d'applications sont ouvertes. Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme de votre choix. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND (SYSTÈME D'EXPLOITATION INTROUVABLE) — Réinstallez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113). Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM (MAUVAIS TOTAL D E CONTRÔLE D E LA ROM FACULTATIVE) — La mémoire ROM optionnelle présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND (UN FICHIER .DLL REQUIS EST INTROUVABLE) — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir. Supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer.Dépannage 91 4 Cliquez sur Supprimer ou Modifier/Supprimer et suivez les invites. 5 Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation. SECTOR NOT FOUND (SECTEUR INTROUVABLE) — Le système d'exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver un secteur sur le disque dur. Votre disque dur contient probablement un secteur défectueux ou une table d'allocation de fichiers (FAT) endommagée. Exécutez l'utilitaire de vérification des erreurs Windows pour vérifier la structure des fichiers du disque dur. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. Si un grand nombre de secteurs sont défectueux, sauvegardez les données (si vous le pouvez), puis reformatez le disque dur. SEEK ERROR (ERREUR D E RECHERCHE) — Le système d'exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver une piste particulière sur le disque dur. SHUTDOWN FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'ARRÊT) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez les tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics (reportezvous à la page 81). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER (PERTE D'ALIMENTATION D E L'HORLOGE MACHINE) — Les paramètres de configuration du système sont corrompus. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, essayez de restaurer les données en accédant au programme de configuration du système. Puis quittez immédiatement le programme. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système » à la page 165. Si le message réapparaît, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK STOPPED (ARRÊT D E L'HORLOGE MACHINE) — La batterie de réserve qui alimente les paramètres de configuration du système nécessite peut-être d'être rechargée. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (L'HEURE N'EST PAS CONFIGURÉE, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — L'heure ou la date du programme de configuration du système ne correspond pas à l'horloge du système. Corrigez les paramètres des options Date et Heure. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système » à la page 165. TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED (ÉCHEC D U COMPTEUR 2 D E LA PUCE D'HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez le groupe de tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE (INTERRUPTION INATTENDUE EN MODE PROTÉGÉ) — Le contrôleur du clavier présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement ou un module de mémoire est mal fixé. Exécutez les tests System Memory (Mémoire système) et Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur de clavier) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY (X:\ N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE. LE PÉRIPHÉRIQUE N'EST PAS PRÊT) — Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW (AVERTISSEMENT : LE NIVEAU D E CHARGE D E LA BATTERIE EST CRITIQUE) — La batterie est pratiquement déchargée. Remplacez la batterie ou branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur. Sinon, activez le mode Mise en veille prolongée ou éteignez l'ordinateur.92 Dépannage Problèmes liés à la carte ExpressCard PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend pas en charge les cartes PC. VÉRIFIEZ L A CARTE EXPRESSCARD — Assurez-vous que la carte ExpressCard est correctement insérée dans le connecteur. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L A CARTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône Safely Remove Hardware (Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité) dans la barre des tâches Windows. Assurez-vous que la carte est répertoriée. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE EXPRESSCARD FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE EXPRESSCARD NON FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez le fabricant de la carte ExpressCard. Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST RECONNU PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. Si votre périphérique IEEE 1394 est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez Dell ou le fabricant du périphérique IEEE 1394. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 NON FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez Dell ou le fabricant du périphérique IEEE 1394. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST CORRECTEMENT INSÉRÉ DANS L E CONNECTEUR. Problèmes liés au clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Utilisez le clavier intégré lorsque vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics ou le programme de configuration du système. Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel.Dépannage 93 Problèmes liés au clavier externe REMARQUE : Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D U CLAVIER — Éteignez l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble du clavier, assurez-vous qu'il n'est pas endommagé et reconnectez-le fermement. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour clavier, déconnectez-le et branchez le clavier directement à l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez une minute, puis rallumez-le. 2 Vérifiez que les voyants des touches Verr num, Verr maj et Arrêt défil du clavier clignotent pendant le processus d'amorçage. 3 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 4 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier externe et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si vous ne parvenez pas à effectuer ces vérifications, votre clavier externe est probablement défectueux. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT BIEN D U CLAVIER EXTERNE, VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER INTÉGRÉ — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez le clavier externe. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 5 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier interne et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si les caractères s'affichent maintenant tandis qu'ils ne s'affichaient pas avec le clavier externe, ce dernier est probablement défectueux. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. EXÉCUTEZ LES TESTS D E DIAGNOSTIC D U CLAVIER — Exécutez les tests PC-AT Compatible Keyboards (Claviers compatibles PC-AT) dans Dell Diagnostics.Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Si les tests indiquent que le clavier externe est défectueux, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. Caractères imprévus DÉSACTIVEZ L E PAVÉ NUMÉRIQUE — Appuyez sur pour désactiver le pavé numérique s'il affiche des chiffres au lieu de lettres. Assurez-vous que le voyant de verrouillage numérique n'est pas allumé.94 Dépannage Blocages et problèmes logiciels PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. L'ordinateur ne démarre pas ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR EST SOLIDEMENT BRANCHÉ SUR L'ORDINATEUR E T SUR L A PRISE SECTEUR L'ordinateur ne répond plus AVIS : Vous pouvez perdre des données si vous n'arrivez pas à arrêter correctement le système d'exploitation. ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement FIN D U PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Applications, puis sélectionnez le programme qui ne répond plus. 3 Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. REMARQUE : Le programme chkdsk peut s'exécuter lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL — Si nécessaire, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. La documentation, la disquette ou le CD qui accompagne tout logiciel inclut généralement des instructions d'installation. Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® antérieur EXÉCUTEZ L'ASSISTANT COMPATIBILITÉ DES PROGRAMMES — L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement proche des environnements des systèmes d'exploitation non Windows XP. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Assistant Compatibilité des programmes. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Un écran bleu uni apparaît ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Dépannage 95 Problèmes Dell MediaDirect POUR PLUS D'INFORMATIONS, REPORTEZ-VOUS A U FICHIER D'AIDE DELL MEDIADIRECT — Cliquez sur l'icône en forme de point d'interrogation en bas de l'écran Dell MediaDirect pour accéder à l'aide. POUR LIRE DES FILMS AVEC DELL MEDIADIRECT, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN LECTEUR D E DVD E T L E LOGICIEL DELL DVD PLAYER — Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur équipé d'un lecteur de DVD, ce logiciel doit déjà être installé. PROBLÈMES LIÉS À LA QUALITÉ VIDÉO — Désactivez l'option Use Hardware Acceleration (Utiliser l'accélération matérielle). Cette fonctionnalité utilise le traitement spécial dans certains graphiques pour réduire les exigences du processeur lors de la lecture de DVD et de certains types de fichiers vidéo. IMPOSSIBILITÉ D E LIRE CERTAINS FICHIERS MÉDIA — Étant donné que Dell MediaDirect offre un accès aux fichiers média hors de l'environnement du système d'exploitation Windows XP, l'accès au contenu sous licence est restreint. Le contenu sous licence est du contenu numérique auquel s'applique Digital Rights Management (DRM). L'environnement Dell MediaDirect ne peut pas vérifier les restrictions DRM, les fichiers sous licence ne peuvent par conséquent pas être lus. Les fichiers musicaux et vidéo sous licence sont indiqués par une icône verrou. Vous pouvez accéder aux fichiers sous licence dans l'environnement du système d'exploitation Windows XP. RÉGLAGE DES PARAMÈTRES D E COULEUR POUR LES FILMS CONTENANT DES SCÈNES TROP SOMBRES O U TROP CLAIRES — Cliquez sur EagleVision pour utiliser une technologie d'amélioration vidéo qui détecte le contenu vidéo et règle la luminosité/le contraste/la saturation de manière dynamique. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonctionnalité Dell MediaDirect si vous reformatez volontairement le disque dur. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. Autres problèmes logiciels CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL O U CONTACTEZ L E FABRICANT POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS D E DÉPANNAGE — • Assurez-vous que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur. • Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est conforme aux exigences matérielles requises pour que le logiciel fonctionne. Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour de plus amples informations. • Assurez-vous que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. • Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. • Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. SAUVEGARDEZ IMMÉDIATEMENT VOS FICHIERS UTILISEZ UN PROGRAMME D E RECHERCHE DES VIRUS POUR VÉRIFIER L E DISQUE DUR, LES DISQUETTES O U LES CD ENREGISTREZ E T QUITTEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES E T LES FICHIERS OUVERTS, PUIS ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR VIA L E MENU Démarrer96 Dépannage ANALYSEZ L'ORDINATEUR À L A RECHERCHE D E LOGICIELS ESPIONS — Si vous observez un ralentissement des performances de votre ordinateur, si des fenêtres publicitaires s'affichent fréquemment sur votre écran ou si vous avez des problèmes pour vous connecter sur Internet, votre ordinateur est peut-être infecté par un logiciel espion. Utilisez un programme antivirus qui inclut une protection contre les logiciels espions (une mise à niveau de votre programme sera peut-être nécessaire) afin d'analyser votre ordinateur et de supprimer les logiciels espions. Pour plus d'informations, allez sur le site support.dell.com et lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé spyware (espion). EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Si tous les tests s'exécutent correctement, la condition d'erreur est liée à un problème logiciel. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Problèmes liés à la mémoire PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. SI L E MESSAGE D E MÉMOIRE INSUFFISANTE S'AFFICHE — • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution que vous n'utilisez pas pour voir si cela permet de résoudre le problème. • Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour prendre connaissance des besoins en mémoire minimaux. Le cas échéant, ajoutez de la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. • Réinsérez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ D'AUTRES PROBLÈMES D E MÉMOIRE — • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116). • Veillez à bien suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. Problèmes liés au réseau PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ L E CONNECTEUR D U CÂBLE RÉSEAU — Vérifiez que le câble de réseau est bien inséré dans le connecteur de réseau situé sur le côté de l'ordinateur et le port ou périphérique réseau. VÉRIFIEZ LES VOYANTS D U RÉSEAU SUR L E CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU — Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, cela signifie qu'il n'y a pas de communication avec le réseau. Remplacez le câble de réseau. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RECONNECTEZ-VOUS A U RÉSEAU VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D U RÉSEAU — Contactez l'administrateur de réseau pour qu'il vérifie vos paramètres et le fonctionnement du réseau.Dépannage 97 Problèmes d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION — Lorsque le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou lorsqu'il clignote, l'ordinateur est sous tension. Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille—appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour quitter le mode Veille. Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Veille, reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. CHARGEZ LA BATTERIE — Il se peut que la batterie soit déchargée. 1 Réinstallez la batterie. 2 Utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour connecter votre ordinateur à une prise secteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie reste chargée) diminue avec le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, vous devrez peut-être en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ÉTAT D E LA BATTERIE — Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote en orange ou est orange et fixe, la batterie est peu chargée ou complètement déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote alternativement en vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour lancer le processus de recharge. Éteignez l'ordinateur, déconnectez-le de la prise secteur, ainsi que la batterie, pour qu'ils reviennent à la température ambiante. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est vert et clignote rapidement, il se peut que la batterie soit défectueuse. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137. VÉRIFIEZ L A TEMPÉRATURE D E LA BATTERIE — Si la température de la batterie est inférieure à 0 °C (32 °F), l'ordinateur ne démarrera pas. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE SECTEUR — Contournez les parasurtenseurs, les rampes d'alimentation et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Reportez-vous à la section « Modes d'économie d'énergie » à la page 40. REMETTEZ EN PLACE LES MODULES D E MÉMOIRE — Si le voyant d'alimentation de l'ordinateur est allumé mais que l'écran reste vide, réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116).98 Dépannage Problèmes d'imprimante PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre imprimante, contactez le fabricant. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST ALLUMÉE VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES D E L'IMPRIMANTE — • Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles de l'imprimante sont solidement connectés à l'imprimante et à l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les télécopieurs installés. Si l'imprimante apparaît dans la liste, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône la représentant. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. Pour une imprimante parallèle, assurez-vous que le port d'impression est défini sur LPT1 (Port de l'imprimante). Pour une imprimante USB, assurez-vous que le port d'impression est défini sur USB. RÉINSTALLATION D U PILOTE D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes liés au scanner PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre scanner, contactez le fabricant du scanner. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U SCANNER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. DÉVERROUILLEZ L E SCANNER — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RÉESSAYEZ VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES — • Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles du scanner sont solidement connectés au scanner et à l'ordinateur.Dépannage 99 VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E SCANNER EST RECONNU PAR MICROSOFT WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Scanners et appareils-photo. Si votre scanner est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D U SCANNER — Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône en forme de haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume, les aigus ou les basses pour supprimer toute distorsion. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME À L'AIDE DES RACCOURCIS CLAVIER — Pour désactiver (mettre en sourdine) les hautparleurs intégrés, appuyez sur . RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CAISSON D E BASSE E T LES HAUT-PARLEURS SONT SOUS TENSION — Reportez-vous au schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vos haut-parleurs sont dotés de commandes du volume, réglez le volume, les basses ou les aigus pour éliminer les distorsions. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. DÉCONNECTEZ L E CASQUE D U CONNECTEUR D E CASQUE — Le son des haut-parleurs est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le casque est connecté au connecteur de casque du panneau avant de l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent des interférences. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 81. REMARQUE : Le réglage du volume de certains lecteurs MP3 annule l'effet du paramètre de volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des chansons au format MP3, assurez-vous que vous n'avez pas baissé ou augmenté le volume.100 Dépannage Aucun son émis par le casque VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES D U CASQUE — Assurez-vous que le câble du casque est solidement connecté au connecteur de casque (reportez-vous à la section « connecteurs audio » à la page 20). RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E LA TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3 Réglez les paramètres. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D E LA SOURIS — Éteignez l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble de la souris, vérifiez s'il n'est pas endommagé et reconnectez-le fermement. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour la souris, déconnectez-le et branchez la souris directement à l'ordinateur. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT D E LA SOURIS, TESTEZ L A TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez la souris. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le bureauWindows apparaît, utilisez la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur, sélectionner une icône et l'ouvrir. Si la tablette tactile fonctionne correctement, la souris est probablement défectueuse. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Problèmes vidéo et d'affichage PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si l'écran est vide REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un programme qui exige une résolution supérieure à celle dont vous disposez, Dell vous conseille de brancher un écran externe à votre ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L A BATTERIE — Si vous utilisez une batterie pour alimenter l'ordinateur, la batterie peut être déchargée. Branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur à l'aide de l'adaptateur secteur, puis allumez l'ordinateur.Dépannage 101 TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE SECTEUR — Contournez les parasurtenseurs, les rampes d'alimentation et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. BASCULEZ L'IMAGE VIDÉO — Si votre ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe, appuyez sur pour basculer l'affichage de l'image vidéo vers l'écran. Si l'écran est difficile à lire RÉGLEZ L A LUMINOSITÉ — Appuyez sur et sur la touche fléchée vers le haut ou vers le bas. ÉLOIGNEZ L E CAISSON D E BASSE EXTERNE D E L'ORDINATEUR O U D E L'ÉCRAN — Si vos haut-parleurs externes comportent un caisson de basse, vérifiez que ce dernier se trouve à au moins 60 cm (2 pieds) de l'ordinateur ou du moniteur externe. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. ORIENTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DANS UNE DIRECTION DIFFÉRENTE — Éliminez les reflets du soleil pouvant altérer la qualité de l'image. RÉGLEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D'AFFICHAGE D E WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Cliquez sur la zone que vous souhaitez modifier ou cliquez sur l'icône Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. VOIR «MESSAGES D'ERREUR » — Si un message d'erreur apparaît, reportez-vous à la section « Messages d'erreur » à la page 87. Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible CONNECTEZ UN MONITEUR EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur et connectez un moniteur externe à ce dernier. 2 Allumez l'ordinateur et le moniteur, puis réglez la luminosité et le contraste. Si le moniteur externe fonctionne correctement, le moniteur ou le contrôleur vidéo de l'ordinateur peut être défectueux. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 137.102 Dépannage Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier par exemple. Tous les périphériques nécessitent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et tout autre programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique dispose de son propre jeu de commandes spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. Lorsque Dell livre l'ordinateur, les pilotes requis sont déjà installés—aucune installation ou configuration supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. AVIS : Le CD Drivers and Utilities peut contenir des pilotes pour des systèmes d'exploitation qui ne sont pas installés sur votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que vous installez les logiciels appropriés à votre système d'exploitation. De nombreux pilotes, tels que le pilote du clavier, sont fournis avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Vous devez installer des pilotes si vous : • Mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation ; • Réinstallez votre système d'exploitation ; • Connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un périphérique, identifiez le pilote à l'origine du problème et mettez-le à niveau si nécessaire. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Faites défiler la liste pour rechercher des périphériques comportant un point d'exclamation (un cercle jaune et un [!]) sur l'icône du périphérique. Lorsqu'un point d'exclamation se trouve à côté du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau. Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires AVIS : Le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et le CD Drivers and Utilities fournissent les pilotes appropriés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d'autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur.Dépannage 103 Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP Si un problème apparaît sur votre ordinateur après avoir installé ou mis à jour le pilote, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP pour remplacer le pilote par la version précédemment installée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8 Cliquez sur Restauration des pilotes. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système pour retourner à un état de fonctionnement de votre système d'exploitation antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Utilisation du CD Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec votre ordinateur. Si l'utilisation de la fonctionRestauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP » à la page 103) ou de Restauration du système ne résout pas le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities. Dans la plupart des cas, le CD démarre automatiquement. Dans le cas contraire, lancez l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur le répertoire du lecteur de CD pour afficher le contenu du CD, puis doublecliquez sur le fichier autorcd.exe. La première fois que vous exécutez le CD, il se peut qu'il vous invite à installer des fichiers de configuration. Cliquez sur OK et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour continuer. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Langue de la barre d'outils, sélectionnez une langue pour le pilote ou l'utilitaire (si disponible). Un écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. Le CD analyse automatiquement votre matériel et détecte les pilotes et les utilitaires employés par votre ordinateur. 5 Une fois l'analyse du matériel terminée, vous pouvez détecter d'autres pilotes et utilitaires. Sous Critères de recherche, sélectionnez les catégories appropriées dans les menus déroulants Modèle de système, Système d'exploitation et Rubrique. Un ou plusieurs liens apparaissent pour le pilote et l'utilitaire particuliers utilisés par votre ordinateur.104 Dépannage 6 Cliquez sur le lien d'un pilote ou d'un utilitaire spécifique afin d'afficher les informations correspondantes. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Installer (s'il est disponible) pour lancer l'installation du pilote ou de l'utilitaire. À l'écran d'accueil, suivez les invites pour terminer l'installation. Si vous ne trouvez pas de bouton Installer, l'installation automatique n'est pas possible. Pour obtenir des instructions d'installation, reportez-vous aux instructions appropriées dans les sous-sections suivantes ou cliquez sur le bouton Extraire, suivez les instructions d'extraction et lisez le fichier Lisezmoi. S'il vous est demandé de trouver les fichiers de pilote, cliquez sur le répertoire du CD dans la fenêtre d'information sur le pilote pour afficher les fichiers associés à ce pilote. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes 1 Une fois les fichiers de pilote extraits vers votre disque dur, tel que décrit dans la section précédente, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Double-cliquez sur le type de périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote (par exemple, Modems ou périphériques infrarouges). 5 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote, puis sur Mettre à jour le pilote. 7 Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (utilisateurs expérimentés), puis sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Parcourir et placez-vous à l'endroit où vous avez précédemment copié les fichiers de pilote. 9 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, utilisez le Dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Pour démarrer le Dépanneur des conflits matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et Support. 2 Entrez dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Dépanneur de conflits matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur de conflits matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant.Dépannage 105 Restauration du système d'exploitation Plusieurs méthodes de restauration du système d'exploitation sont disponibles : • La fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP ramène votre ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur, sans affecter les fichiers de données. Commencez par utiliser la fonction Restauration du système pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation et préserver vos fichiers de données. • L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore de Symantec restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Dell PC Restore supprime de façon permanente toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et supprime toutes les applications installées après réception de l'ordinateur. N'utilisez PC Restore que si la restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. • Si un CD Operating system vous a été livré avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l'utiliser pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Toutefois, l'utilisation de ce CD entraîne la suppression de toutes les données présentes sur le disque dur. N'utilisez ce CD que si la restauration du système n'a pas permis de résoudre le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de MicrosoftWindows XP Le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows XP comporte la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Consultez le Centre d'aide et de support Windows pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section « Centre d'aide et de support de Windows » à la page 14. AVIS : Sauvegardez régulièrement vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne contrôle pas vos fichiers de données et ne permet pas de les récupérer. REMARQUE : Les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l'affichage par défaut de Windows. Par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell™ est réglé sur le mode d'affichage classique de Windows. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur la tâche Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur Si des problèmes surviennent après l'installation d'un pilote de périphérique, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP » à la page 103) pour résoudre le problème. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée.106 Dépannage 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Assurez-vous que l'option Restaurer mon ordinateur à un état antérieur est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur une date du calendrier à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer votre ordinateur. L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration affiche un calendrier vous permettant de sélectionner des points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration terminée s'affiche une fois que la collecte des données par la fonction Restauration du système est terminée. L'ordinateur redémarre. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes en utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : Avant d'annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Cliquez sur Undo my last restoration (Annuler ma dernière restauration), puis sur Suivant. Activation de la fonctionnalité Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système est bien désactivée.Dépannage 107 Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec AVIS : Dell PC Restore supprime définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et supprime toutes les applications et tous les pilotes installés après que vous avez reçu l'ordinateur. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer PC Restore. N'utilisez PC Restore que si la restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell PC Restore de Symantec n'est pas obligatoirement disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. N'utilisez Dell PC Restore de Symantec qu'en dernier ressort pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les documents, feuilles de calcul, messages électroniques, photos numériques et fichiers de musique constituent les fichiers de données. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer PC Restore. Pour utiliser PC Restore : 1 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au cours du processus d'amorçage, une barre bleue portant la mention www.dell.com apparaît dans la partie supérieure de l'écran. 2 Dès que cette barre bleue s'affiche, appuyez sur . Si vous n'appuyez pas sur à temps, laissez l'ordinateur finir de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le de nouveau. AVIS : Si vous ne voulez pas poursuivre l'utilisation de PC Restore, cliquez sur Redémarrer à l'étape suivante. 3 Dans l'écran qui apparaît ensuite, cliquez sur Restaurer. 4 Dans l'écran suivant, cliquez sur Confirmer. La restauration prend de 6 à 10 minutes environ. 5 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : N'éteignez pas manuellement l'ordinateur. Cliquez sur Terminer et laissez l'ordinateur terminer le redémarrage. 6 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Oui. L'ordinateur redémarre. Étant donné que l'ordinateur est restauré à son état de fonctionnement d'origine, les écrans qui apparaissent, tels que le Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final sont identiques à ceux qui s'étaient affichés au premier démarrage de l'ordinateur. 7 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre. 8 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK.108 Dépannage Suppression de Dell PC Restore AVIS : La suppression de Dell PC Restore du disque dur supprime de manière permanente l'utilitaire PC Restore de votre ordinateur. Une fois Dell PC Restore supprimé, vous ne pourrez plus l'utiliser pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Dell PC Restore de Symantec n'est pas obligatoirement disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Nous vous recommandons de ne pas supprimer PC Restore de votre ordinateur, même s'il se révèle nécessaire de libérer de l'espace sur le disque dur. Une fois PC Restore supprimé du disque dur, il est impossible de le rappeler et vous ne pourrez jamais utiliser PC Restore pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur à son état de fonctionnement d'origine. Pour supprimer PC Restore : 1 Connectez-vous à l'ordinateur en tant qu'administrateur local. 2 Dans l'Explorateur Windows, rendez-vous à l'adresse c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Double-cliquez sur le nom de fichier DSRIRRemv2.exe. REMARQUE : Si vous ne vous êtes pas connecté en tant qu'administrateur local, le message qui s'affiche vous invite à le faire. Cliquez sur Quitter et connectez-vous en tant qu'administrateur local. REMARQUE : Si la partition de PC Restore n'existe pas sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, un message indiquant qu'elle n'a pas été trouvée apparaît. Cliquez sur Quitter; il n'existe aucune partition à supprimer. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour supprimer la partition PC Restore sur le disque dur. 5 Lorsqu'un message de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur Oui. La partition PC Restore est supprimée et l'espace disque ainsi libéré est ajouté à l'espace disque disponible sur le disque dur. 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local (C) dans l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur Propriétés, puis vérifiez que l'espace disque supplémentaire est disponible tel qu'indiqué par la valeur plus élevée sous Espace libre. 7 Cliquez sur Terminer pour fermer la fenêtre PC Restore Removal (Retrait de PC Restore). 8 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Utilisation du CD Operating system Avant de commencer Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour corriger un problème avec un nouveau pilote, utilisez tout d'abord la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP » à la page 103). Si la Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez Restauration du système pour ramener l'ordinateur à l'état de fonctionnement précédant l'installation du pilote. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows XP » à la page 105.Dépannage 109 Pour réinstaller Windows XP, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • CD Système d'exploitation • Dell™ CD Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities contient les pilotes installés à l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities pour charger les pilotes requis. Selon la région dans laquelle vous avez commandé votre ordinateur et selon que vous avez demandé ou non les CD, le CD Drivers and Utilities et le CD Operating System ne sont pas forcément livrés avec l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de Windows XP Pour réinstaller Windows XP, suivez toutes les étapes des sections ci-après, dans l'ordre indiqué. Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre de 1 à 2 heures. Après avoir réinstallé le système d'exploitation, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de périphériques, le programme antivirus et d'autres logiciels. AVIS : Le CD Operating System fournit des options de réinstallation du système Windows XP. Ces options peuvent remplacer des fichiers installés et avoir des répercussions sur les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas votre Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : Pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller le système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le logiciel. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation. 2 Insérez le CD Operating system. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Installer Windows XP apparaît. 3 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du logo DELL™. Si le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à l'affichage du bureau Windows, éteignez de nouveau l'ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'option CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur une touche lorsque le message Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer depuis le CD-ROM apparaît à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'écran Configuration de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur . 8 Respectez les instructions pour terminer la réinstallation. 9 Une fois la réinstallation terminée, réinstallez les pilotes et les applications, le cas échéant. Reportezvous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102.110 DépannageAjout et remplacement de pièces 111 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Ce chapitre fournit les instructions de retrait et d'installation des composants de votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes doivent exister préalablement à chaque procédure : • Vous avez effectué les étapes des sections « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » (reportez-vous à cette page) et « Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur » (reportez-vous à la page 112). • Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™. • Pour remplacer un composant ou pour l'installer, s'il a été acheté séparément, effectuez la procédure de retrait en ordre inverse. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document nécessitent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à lame plate • un tournevis cruciforme • une petite pointe en plastique • la mise à jour Flash BIOS (visitez le site Web d'assistance technique de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com) Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, enregistrez tous les fichiers ouverts, fermez-les et quittez toutes les applications avant de procéder à l'arrêt du système. 1 Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : a Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, quittez tous les programmes, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur. b Dans la fenêtre Arrêter l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Arrêter/Éteindre. L'ordinateur s'éteint une fois le système d'exploitation arrêté. 2 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés sont éteints. Si votre ordinateur et les périphériques qui y sont connectés ne se sont pas éteints automatiquement lorsque vous avez éteint votre ordinateur, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 4 secondes.112 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur contre les dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité personnelle. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les pièces ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la languette de montage métallique. Tenez les pièces, telles qu'un processeur, par les bords et non par les broches. AVIS : Seul un technicien d'entretien qualifié doit effectuer les réparations sur votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non autorisée par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis d'un connecteur à languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez ce type de câble, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage vers l'intérieur avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de connecteur. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. AVIS : Avant de commencer à travailler sur l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes suivantes pour éviter de l'endommager. 1 Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 Éteignez l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 111. AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble de réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise réseau murale. 3 Débranchez également de l'ordinateur tous les câbles de téléphone ou de réseau. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, veillez à retirer la batterie principale avant de réparer l'ordinateur. 4 Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont reliés de leur prise secteur. 5 Retirez la batterie. Faites glisser et maintenez le loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie, situé en dessous de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 113 6 Retirez le lecteur optique, le cas échéant, de la baie de lecteur optique. Reportez-vous à la section « Lecteurs optiques » à la page 116. 7 Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre à la terre la carte système. 8 Retirez les cartes ExpressCard du logement correspondant. Reportez-vous à la section « Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache » à la page 67. 9 Retirez les cartes mémoire multimédia du lecteur 5 en 1 correspondant. Reportez-vous à la section « Caches de carte mémoire multimédia » à la page 68. 10 Fermez l'écran, retournez l'ordinateur et placez-le sur une surface plane. Disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Si vous enlevez le disque dur lorsqu'il est chaud, ne touchez pas l'habitacle en métal du disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter toute perte de données, éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 111) avant de retirer le disque dur. Ne retirez jamais l'unité de disque dur lorsque l'ordinateur est allumé, en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée. AVIS : Les disques durs sont très fragiles ; même un léger choc peut les endommager. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit ni la compatibilité ni la prise en charge des unités de disque dur provenant de sources autres que Dell. REMARQUE : Si vous installez un disque dur provenant d'une source autre que Dell, vous devez installer un système d'exploitation, des pilotes et des utilitaires sur le nouveau disque dur. 1 batterie 2 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 2 1114 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pour remettre l'unité de disque dur dans la baie d'unité : 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les deux vis imperdables du cache du disque dur. AVIS : Lorsque le disque dur n'est pas dans l'ordinateur, placez-le dans son emballage protecteur antistatique. Reportez-vous à la section « Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques » du Guide d'information sur le produit. 3 Soulevez le capot et mettez-le de côté. 4 Utilisez votre doigt pour faire glisser le disque dur vers les trous de vis, puis la languette de retrait pour soulever le disque dur vers le haut et le retirer de l'ordinateur. 1 vis (2) 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 115 5 Enlevez le nouveau disque de son emballage. Conservez cet emballage d'origine pour l'utiliser à nouveau lors du stockage ou de l'expédition du disque dur. AVIS : Faites glisser le disque dans son logement en exerçant une pression ferme et uniforme. Si vous exercez une pression trop forte sur le disque pour le mettre en place, vous risquez d'endommager le connecteur. 6 Installez le nouveau disque dur dans la baie, puis faites-le glisser dans le connecteur dans la direction opposée à celle des trous de vis jusqu'à ce qu'il soit bien en place. 7 Remettez le cache et les vis en place. 8 Installez le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Restauration du système d'exploitation » à la page 105. 9 Installez les pilotes et utilitaires de votre ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires » à la page 102. Retour de votre disque dur à Dell Pour retourner votre ancien disque dur à Dell, placez-le dans son emballage d'origine ou dans un emballage similaire. Faute de quoi il risque d'être endommagé en transit. 1 languette de retrait 2 unité de disque dur 2 1116 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Lecteurs optiques À propos de la vis de fixation de périphérique REMARQUE : Vous n'avez pas besoin d'installer la vis de fixation de périphérique à moins que vous vouliez sécuriser le module afin qu'on ne puisse pas facilement le retirer. Votre ordinateur Dell™ est livré avec un lecteur optique, installé dans la baie modulaire, et avec une vis de fixation de périphérique. Celle-ci n'est pas nécessairement installée sur le lecteur optique, elle peut être dans un sachet séparé. Lorsque vous installez le module dans la baie, vous pouvez aussi installer la vis de fixation de périphérique afin qu'on ne puisse pas facilement le retirer. Retrait et installation des lecteurs optiques AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les lecteurs, rangez-les dans un endroit sec et sûr lorsqu'ils ne sont pas installés dans l'ordinateur. Évitez d'exercer une pression quelconque ou de placer des objets lourds sur ces derniers. 1 L'ordinateur étant sous tension, double-cliquez sur l'icône Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité sur la barre des tâches, cliquez sur le périphérique que vous souhaitez éjecter, puis sur Stop (Arrêter). 2 Fermez votre écran et retournez l'ordinateur. 3 Utilisez un tournevis cruciforme pour retirer la vis de fixation de périphérique qui se trouve sous l'ordinateur. 4 Insérez un tournevis cruciforme dans le trou de vis afin de pousser le lecteur hors de la baie modulaire. 1 emballage en polystyrène 2 unité de disque dur 2 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 117 5 Sortez le lecteur de la baie modulaire. 6 Poussez le nouveau lecteur dans la baie modulaire jusqu'au déclic. 7 Remettez en place la vis de fixation de périphérique. 8 Retournez l'ordinateur à l'endroit et ouvrez l'écran. 9 Le système d'exploitation reconnaît automatiquement le lecteur. Le cas échéant, entrez votre mot de passe pour déverrouiller votre ordinateur. Mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte système. Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire prise en charge par votre ordinateur, reportezvous à la section « Caractéristiques » à la page 157. Installez uniquement des modules conçus spécifiquement pour votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Cet ordinateur prend en charge les modules de mémoire 533 MHz et 667 MHz. En cas d'installation d'un autre module de mémoire, vous devez vous assurer que les deux DIMM sont cadencés à 667 MHz. Si l'un est cadencé à 533 MHz et l'autre à 667 MHz, l'ordinateur fonctionnera uniquement à la vitesse de 533 MHz et pas à la vitesse mémoire maximale de 667 MHz. REMARQUE : Les modules de mémoire achetés chez Dell sont couverts par la garantie de votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit.118 Ajout et remplacement de pièces L'ordinateur possède deux connecteurs de module de mémoire, « DIMM A » et « DIMM B ». DIMM A (situé sous le clavier) renferme le module de mémoire principal configuré par l'usine. Si vous n'avez pas commandé de mémoire supplémentaire, le connecteur DIMM B (situé en dessous de l'ordinateur sous le cache du module de mémoire) est vide. Généralement, si vous ajoutez de la mémoire, vous devez installer un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B. Si vous voulez mettre la mémoire à niveau, vous devrez peut-être installer la mémoire dans les deux connecteurs DIMM A et B, en fonction de l'étendue de la mise à niveau. Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM B 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous quittez les lieux, remettez-vous à la terre au moment où vous revenez vers l'ordinateur. 3 Retournez l'ordinateur, desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du compartiment des modules de mémoire, puis retirez le cache. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur du module de mémoire, n'utilisez pas d'outil pour écarter les clips de fixation du module de mémoire. 4 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module existant : a Du bout des doigts, écartez avec précaution les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que le module sorte. b Retirez le module du connecteur. 1 vis (2) 2 cache du module de mémoire 1 2Ajout et remplacement de pièces 119 AVIS : Si vous devez installer des modules de mémoire dans deux connecteurs, installez un module de mémoire dans le connecteur « DIMM A » avant d'en installer un dans le connecteur « DIMM B ». Insérez les modules de mémoire suivant un angle de 45 degrés pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur. REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur ne vous avertit de cet échec. 5 Raccordez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire : a Alignez l'encoche du bord du module sur la languette située dans l'emplacement du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le module dans l'emplacement en suivant un angle de 45 degrés, puis faites-le pivoter vers le bas jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. 1 module de mémoire 2 clips de fixation (2 par connecteur) 1 2120 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 6 Replacez le cache du module de mémoire et serrez les vis. AVIS : Si vous rencontrez des difficultés pour fermer le cache, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. Ne forcez pas la fermeture du cache, car vous risqueriez d'endommager l'ordinateur. 7 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur et à une prise secteur. 8 Réinstallez le disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113. 9 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Aide et support, puis sur Informations sur l'ordinateur. Installation d'un module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM A Le connecteur de module de mémoire étiqueté « DIMM A » est situé sous le clavier. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous quittez les lieux, remettez-vous à la terre au moment où vous revenez vers l'ordinateur. 1 languette dans le logement du connecteur 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 121 3 Retirez le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section « Cache de la charnière » à la page 127. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de retirer les deux vis de la baie de batterie lors du retrait des charnières. 4 Retirez le clavier. Reportez-vous à la section « Clavier » à la page 129. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur du module de mémoire, n'utilisez pas d'outil pour écarter les clips de fixation du module de mémoire. 5 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module existant : a Du bout des doigts, écartez avec précaution les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que le module sorte. b Retirez le module du connecteur. AVIS : Si vous devez installer des modules de mémoire dans deux connecteurs, installez un module de mémoire dans le connecteur « DIMM A » avant d'en installer un dans le connecteur « DIMM B ». Insérez les modules de mémoire suivant un angle de 45 degrés pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur. REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur ne vous avertit de cet échec. 6 Raccordez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire : a Alignez l'encoche du bord du module sur la languette située dans l'emplacement du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le module dans l'emplacement en suivant un angle de 45 degrés, puis faites-le pivoter vers le bas jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. 1 module de mémoire 2 clips de fixation (2 par connecteur) 1 2122 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 7 Remettez le clavier en place. Reportez-vous à la section « Clavier » à la page 129. 8 Remettez en place le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section « Cache de la charnière » à la page 127. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de remettre les deux vis dans la baie de batterie lors de la réinstallation des charnières. 9 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur et à une prise secteur. 10 Réinstallez le disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section « Disque dur » à la page 113. 11 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Aide et support, puis sur Informations sur l'ordinateur. 1 languette dans le logement du connecteur 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 123 Modem (en option) Si vous avez commandé le modem en option en même temps que votre ordinateur, le modem est déjà installé. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil, puis retirez le cache. 3 Retirez le modem installé : a Retirez la vis permettant de fixer le modem sur la carte système et mettez-la de côté. b Soulevez la languette de retrait afin de retirer le modem du connecteur, sur la carte système, puis déconnectez le câble du modem. 1 cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil 1124 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 4 Installez le modem de remplacement : a Connectez le câble du modem au modem. AVIS : Les connecteurs sont prévus pour une insertion correcte. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. b Alignez le modem sur les trous des vis et appuyez sur le modem pour l'insérer dans le connecteur de la carte système. c Remettez en place la vis qui fixe le modem à la carte système. 5 Remettez en place le cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil. 1 vis 2 câble du modem 3 modem 4 languette de retrait 5 connecteur de carte système 4 5 1 2 3Ajout et remplacement de pièces 125 Carte Mini Si vous avez commandé une carte Mini avec votre ordinateur, la carte est déjà installée. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Si aucune carte Mini n'est installée, passez à l'étape 3. Si vous remplacez une carte Mini, retirez la carte existante : a Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte Mini. b Retirez la carte Mini en poussant les clips de fixation métalliques vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce que la carte soit doucement éjectée. c Retirez la carte Mini de son connecteur. 1 câbles d'antenne (2) 1126 Ajout et remplacement de pièces AVIS : Les connecteurs disposent de codes de couleur pour garantir leur bonne insertion. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. 3 Installez la carte Mini de remplacement : AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini, vérifiez que les câbles d'antenne ne sont pas sous la carte lorsque vous la mettez en place. a Alignez la carte Mini sur le connecteur suivant un angle de 45 degrés et enfoncez-la dans le connecteur jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini, ne placez jamais de câbles au-dessous de la carte. b Raccordez les câbles d'antenne aux connecteurs d'antenne de la carte Mini en faisant correspondre la couleur du câble avec la couleur du triangle au-dessus du connecteur. Raccordez le câble d'antenne principal (blanc) au connecteur d'antenne avec le triangle blanc. Raccordez le câble d'antenne auxiliaire (noir) au connecteur d'antenne avec le triangle noir. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un câble gris, raccordez celui-ci au connecteur avec le triangle gris, si ce connecteur est disponible sur votre carte. 1 languettes de fixation en métal (2) 2 carte Mini 2 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 127 Cache de la charnière Retrait du cache de la charnière PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Le cache de la charnière est fragile et peut être endommagé s'il est forcé. Faites plus particulièrement attention au cours du retrait du cache de la charnière. 1 Suivez les procédures de la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retirez la batterie (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41). 3 Retirez les deux vis de la baie de batterie. 1 câbles d'antenne (2) 1128 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 4 Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit et ouvrez entièrement l'écran (180 degrés) afin qu'il repose sur votre surface de travail. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le cache de la charnière, ne soulevez pas le cache des deux côtés simultanément. 5 Insérez une pointe en plastique dans l'encoche pour soulever le cache de la charnière du côté droit. 6 Faites glisser le cache de la charnière de droite à gauche, vers le haut et retirez-le. 1 vis (2) 1 cache de la charnière 2 encoche 1 1 2Ajout et remplacement de pièces 129 Remise en place du cache de la charnière 1 Mettez le coin gauche du cache en place. 2 Appuyez de gauche à droite sur le cache jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 3 Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur. 4 Remettez en place les deux vis dans la baie de batterie. 5 Remettez la batterie en place (reportez-vous à la section « Remplacement de la batterie » à la page 41). Clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. Retrait du clavier 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retirez le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section « Cache de la charnière » à la page 127. AVIS : Les touches du clavier sont fragiles, se déboîtent facilement et sont difficiles à remettre en place. Faites plus particulièrement attention au cours du retrait et de la manipulation du clavier. 3 Soulevez le clavier et maintenez-le soulevé et légèrement vers l'avant pour pouvoir accéder au connecteur du clavier. 4 Tirez sur le levier du connecteur de la carte système pour déconnecter le câble du clavier de la carte système.130 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Remise en place du clavier AVIS : Pour éviter de rayer le repose-mains lors de la remise en place du clavier, attachez les six languettes situées à l'avant du clavier dans le repose-mains, puis fixez le clavier. 1 Connectez le câble du clavier à la carte système. 2 Sécurisez le câble du clavier et le levier sur le connecteur de la carte système. 3 Placez les six languettes situées à l'avant du clavier dans le repose-mains. Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 clavier 2 câble du clavier 3 levier du connecteur de la carte système 4 languettes (6) 4 1 3 2Ajout et remplacement de pièces 131 La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth est déjà installée sur votre système si vous l'avez commandée avec votre ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Desserrez les vis captives du cache du modem/de la carte Mini/du sans fil, puis retirez le cache. 3 Retirez la vis de fixation du porte-carte. 4 Tirez le porte-carte hors du compartiment afin de pouvoir déconnecter la carte de son câble et la retirer de l'ordinateur. 5 Pour remettre la carte en place, connectez la carte au câble. 6 Puis, insérez-la avec précaution dans le porte-carte et introduisez ce dernier dans le compartiment. 7 Remettez la vis de fixation du porte-carte en place. 1 vis 2 porte-carte 3 carte 4 connecteur de carte 1 4 3 2132 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pile bouton Retrait de la pile bouton PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer les procédures suivantes, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple, le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Avant de commencer » à la page 111. 2 Retirez le cache de la charnière (reportez-vous à la page 127). 3 Retirez le clavier (reportez-vous à la page 129). 4 À l'aide d'une pointe en plastique, soulevez la pile afin de l'extraire de la carte système. Remise en place de la pile bouton Lorsque vous remettez la pile bouton en place, insérez-la dans le support circulaire avec le côté positif vers le haut, et enfoncez-la doucement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit bien en place. 1 pile bouton 1Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet 133 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet REMARQUE : Cette fonction peut ne pas être disponible sur votre ordinateur. Dell™ QuickSet vous permet de configurer et d'afficher facilement les paramètres suivants : • Connectivité réseau • Gestion de l'alimentation • Écran • Informations système En fonction de ce que vous souhaitez faire dans Dell™ QuickSet, vous pouvez lancer cette application en cliquant, en double-cliquant ou en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet, , dans la barre des tâches de Microsoft® Windows®. La barre des tâches se trouve dans le coin inférieur droit de votre écran. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet et sélectionnez Aide.134 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSetVoyager avec votre ordinateur 135 Voyager avec votre ordinateur Identification de l'ordinateur • Attachez une étiquette avec votre nom ou votre carte de visite à votre ordinateur. • Notez votre numéro de service et gardez-le en lieu sûr, dans un endroit autre que près de l'ordinateur ou de la sacoche de transport. • Utilisez votre numéro de service si vous devez reporter la perte ou le vol de votre ordinateur à la police et à Dell. • Créez un fichier sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows® et nommez-le si_trouvé. Placez dans ce fichier des informations, telles que vos nom, adresse et numéro de téléphone. • Contactez votre compagnie de carte de crédit et demandez-lui si elle offre des étiquettes avec identification codée. Emballage de l'ordinateur • Retirez tous les périphériques externes connectés à l'ordinateur et stockez-les en lieu sûr. Débranchez tous les câbles reliés aux cartes PC installées et retirez les cartes PC étendues (« Utilisation de cartes ExpressCard » à la page 65). • Pour alléger l'ordinateur autant que possible, remplacez les périphériques installés dans la baie modulaire par le module de voyage Dell TravelLite™. • Chargez complètement la batterie principale et toutes les batteries de secours que vous pensez emporter. • Éteignez l'ordinateur. • Débranchez l'adaptateur secteur. AVIS : Lorsque vous fermez l'écran, les objets laissés sur le clavier ou le repose-mains risquent d'endommager l'écran. • Retirez tous objets du clavier et du repose-mains, comme les trombones, les stylos et les papiers, puis fermez l'écran. • Utilisez la sacoche de transport Dell™ (en option) pour emballer l'ordinateur et ses accessoires en toute sécurité. • Évitez d'emballer l'ordinateur avec des articles tels que crème à raser, eau de Cologne, parfum ou nourriture.136 Voyager avec votre ordinateur AVIS : Si l'ordinateur a été exposé à des températures extrêmes, laissez-le s'acclimater pendant une heure à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. • Protégez l'ordinateur, les batteries et le disque dur contre des risques tels que les températures extrêmes, la surexposition à la lumière, la saleté, la poussière ou les liquides. • Calez bien l'ordinateur afin d'éviter qu'il ne se déplace dans le coffre de votre voiture ou dans un compartiment à bagages situé en hauteur. Conseils de voyage AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lorsque vous utilisez le lecteur optique. AVIS : N'enregistrez pas votre ordinateur avec vos bagages. • Pensez à désactiver l'activité réseau sans fil sur votre ordinateur afin d'optimiser l'autonomie de la batterie. Pour désactiver l'activité sans fil, appuyez sur . • Pensez à modifier vos options de gestion de l'alimentation (reportez-vous à la section « Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation » à la page 41) afin d'optimiser l'autonomie de la batterie. • Si vous voyagez à l'étranger, emmenez une preuve de propriété ou de votre droit à utiliser l'ordinateur s'il appartient à votre société pour accélérer le passage de la douane. Cherchez des informations auprès des autorités douanières des pays que vous pensez visiter et envisagez d'acquérir un carnet international (appelé également passeport de marchandises) auprès de votre gouvernement. • Renseignez-vous sur le type de prises secteur utilisées dans les pays où vous vous rendez et munissezvous des adaptateurs appropriés. • Les détenteurs de cartes de crédit doivent se renseigner auprès de leur compagnie de crédit au sujet de l'assistance en cas d'urgence à l'étranger proposée aux utilisateurs d'ordinateurs portables. Transport aérien AVIS : Ne faites jamais passer votre ordinateur dans un détecteur de métal. Vous pouvez faire passer l'ordinateur dans un détecteur à rayons X ou le faire inspecter manuellement. • Assurez-vous d'avoir une batterie chargée sous la main au cas où l'on vous demanderait d'allumer l'ordinateur. • Avant de pénétrer dans l'avion, assurez-vous que l'utilisation d'un ordinateur est permise. Certaines compagnies aériennes interdisent l'usage d'appareils électroniques pendant le vol. Toutes les compagnies aériennes interdisent l'usage de tels dispositifs pendant les phases de décollage et d'atterrissage.Contacter Dell 137 Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell par voie électronique, par l'intermédiaire des sites Web suivants : • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (support) Pour les adresses Internet de votre pays, recherchez la section appropriée du pays dans le tableau cidessous. REMARQUE : Les numéros verts sont valables dans le pays pour lequel ils sont renseignés. REMARQUE : Dans certains pays, le support spécifique aux ordinateurs Dell XPS™ est disponible via un numéro de téléphone différent, répertorié pour les pays participants. Si vous ne trouvez pas de numéro de téléphone répertorié spécifique aux ordinateurs XPS, contactez le service de support de Dell, au numéro indiqué, et l'on fera suivre votre appel de manière appropriée. Si vous devez contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les indicatifs fournis dans le tableau ci-dessous. Si vous avez besoin d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un opérateur local ou international. REMARQUE : Les coordonnées fournies étaient correctes au jour d'impression de ce document et sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_za_support@dell.com File d'attente Gold 011 709 7713 Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clientèle 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700138 Contacter Dell Allemagne (Francfort) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif de la ville : 69 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique pour XPS 069 9792 7222 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 069 9792-7200 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0180-5-224400 Service clientèle segment International 069 9792-7320 Service clientèle comptes privilégiés 069 9792-7320 Service clientèle grands comptes 069 9792-7320 Service clientèle comptes publics 069 9792-7320 Standard 069 9792-7000 Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4093 Service clientèle (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Fax (Support technique et Service clientèle) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Fax pour les ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728-3772 Anguilla Site Web : www.dell.com.ai E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua-et-Barbuda Site Web : www.dell.com.ag E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-805-5924 Antilles Néerlandaises E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 001-800-882-1519 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 139 Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com E-mail pour ordinateurs de bureau et portables : la-techsupport@dell.com E-mail pour serveurs et produits de stockage EMC® : la_enterprise@dell.com Service clientèle numéro vert : 0-800-444-0730 Support technique numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Services de support technique numéro vert : 0-800-444-0724 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Aruba Site Web : www.dell.com.aw E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 800-1578 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international : 0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : support.ap.dell.com/contactus Support technique général 13DELL-133355 Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international : 900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux grand public et PME 0820 240 530 00 Fax pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 49 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support technique de XPS 0820 240 530 81 Support aux grand public et PME pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 0820 240 530 17 Support Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 17 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Site Web : www.dell.com.bs E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts140 Contacter Dell Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 02 481 92 96 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 02 481 92 88 Télécopieur pour support technique 02 481 92 95 Service clientèle 02 713 15 65 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Site Web : www.dell.com/bm E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-890-0751 Bolivie Site Web : www.dell.com/bo E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif de la ville : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support clients, support technique 0800 90 3355 Fax du support technique 51 3481 5470 Fax du Service clientèle 51 3481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4888 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 141 Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international : 011 État des commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (Support matériel et garantie automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clientèle (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Service clientèle (imprimantes, projecteurs, téléviseurs, ordinateurs de poche, jukebox numériques et ordinateurs sans fil) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support garantie de matériel (ventes au grand public/PME) numéro vert : 1-800-906-3355 Support garantie de matériel (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Support garantie de matériel (imprimantes, projecteurs, téléviseurs, ordinateurs de poche, jukebox numériques et ordinateurs sans fil) 1-877-335-5767 Ventes aux grand public et PME numéro vert : 1-800-387-5752 Ventes (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Vente de pièces et Vente de service étendu 1866 440 3355 Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : www.dell.com/cl E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Ventes et support clients numéro vert : 1230-020-4823 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts142 Contacter Dell Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Indicatif de la ville : 592 Site Web du Support technique : support.dell.com.cn E-mail (Support technique) : cn_support@dell.com E-mail du Service clientèle : customer_cn@dell.com Fax du support technique 592 818 1350 Support technique (Dell™ Dimension™ et Inspiron) numéro vert : 800 858 2968 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) numéro vert : 800 858 0950 Support technique (serveurs et stockage) numéro vert : 800 858 0960 Support technique (projecteurs, PDA, commutateurs, routeurs, etc.) numéro vert : 800 858 2920 Support technique (imprimantes) numéro vert : 800 858 2311 Service clientèle numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Fax du Service clientèle 592 818 1308 Grand public et PME numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2557 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grandes entreprises - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et éducation - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et éducation - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Équipe File d'attente des comptes grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2572 Comptes grandes entreprises - Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises - Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises Pièces détachées numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Site Web : www.dell.com/cl E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 01-800-915-4755 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 143 Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif de la ville : 2 E-mail : krsupport@dell.com Support technique numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Support (Dimension, PDA, Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 080-200-3801 Ventes numéro vert : 080-200-3600 Fax 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Costa Rica Site Web : www.dell.com/cr E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 0800-012-0231 Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 7010 0074 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 7023 0182 Service clientèle (relations) 7023 0184 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard Fax (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (grand public et PME) 3287 5000 Fax (grand public et PME) 3287 5001 Dominique Site Web : www.dell.com/dm E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 Équateur Site Web : www.dell.com/ec E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général (appel de Quito) numéro vert : 999-119-877-655-3355 Support technique général (appel de Guayaquil) numéro vert : 1800-999-119-877-655-3355 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts144 Contacter Dell Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif de la ville : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 115 236 Standard 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 145 États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Support matériel et garantie (téléviseurs, imprimantes et projecteurs Dell) pour la clientèle relationnelle numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Support des produits SPS destinés aux clients américains numéro vert : 1-800-232-8544 Support consommateur (Activités à domicile et activités professionnelles à domicile) pour tous les autres produits Dell numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Secteur privé Support et Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support pour imprimantes, projecteurs, PDA et lecteurs MP3 numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (gouvernement, enseignement et services de la santé) Support et Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355 ou numéro vert : 1-800-879-3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de pièces au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Fax numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes d'élocution numéro vert : 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts146 Contacter Dell Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international : 990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif de la ville : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : fi_support@dell.com Support technique 0207 533 555 Service clientèle 0207 533 538 Standard 0207 533 533 Ventes (moins de 500 employés) 0207 533 540 Fax 0207 533 530 Ventes (plus de 500 employés) 0207 533 533 Fax 0207 533 530 France (Paris) (Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs de la ville : (1) (4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique pour XPS 0825 387 129 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 0825 387 270 Service clientèle 0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventes 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clientèle 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 00800-44 14 95 18 Support technique Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83 Standard 2108129810 Standard Gold Service 2108129811 Ventes 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Grenade E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 147 Guatemala E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-999-0136 Guyane E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Hong Kong Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail (Support technique) : HK_support@Dell.com Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) 2969 3188 Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) 2969 3191 Support technique (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ et PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Service clientèle 3416 0910 Comptes grandes entreprises 3416 0907 Programmes clients internationaux 3416 0908 Division des moyennes entreprises 3416 0912 Division du grand public et des PME 2969 3105 Îles Caïmans E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-262-5415 Îles Turks et Caicos Site Web : www.dell.com/tc E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4735 Îles Vierges Britanniques Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Îles Vierges (États-Unis) E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-702-4288 Inde E-mail : india_support_desktop@dell.com india_support_notebook@dell.com india_support_Server@dell.com Support technique 1600338045 et 1600448046 Ventes (Comptes grandes entreprises) 1600 33 8044 Ventes (Grand public et PME) 1600 33 8046 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts148 Contacter Dell Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Ventes Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Dell Outlet 1850 200 778 Support de commande en ligne 1850 200 778 Service clientèle Service clientèle pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 1850 200 982 Support technique Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs XPS 1850 200 722 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 1850 543 543 Généralités Fax des relations ventes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Service clientèle pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au RoyaumeUni uniquement) 0870 907 4000 Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif de la ville : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 149 Jamaïque E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-440-9205 Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif de la ville : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension et Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 0120-198-433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Support technique (PDA, projecteurs, imprimantes, routeurs) numéro vert : 0120-981-690 Support technique en dehors du Japon (PDA, projecteurs, imprimantes, routeurs) 81-44-556-3468 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 heures sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clientèle 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux entreprises (jusqu'à 400 employés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux Comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 employés) 044-556-3433 Ventes secteur public (agences gouvernementales, établissements d'enseignement et institutions médicales) 044-556-5963 Segment International - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 La Barbade Site Web : www.dell.com/bb E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-534-3142 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts150 Contacter Dell Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 342 08 08 075 Ventes aux grand public et PME +32 (0)2 713 15 96 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 26 25 77 81 Service clientèle +32 (0)2 481 91 19 Fax 26 25 77 82 Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 105 Service clientèle (Xiamen, Chine) 34 160 910 Ventes aux particuliers (Xiamen, Chine) 29 693 115 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif de la ville : 4 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 1 800 880 193 Support technique (Dimension, Inspiron et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 1 800 881 306 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 881 386 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1800 881 306 (option 6) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 52 E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clientèle 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Groupe principal 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 001-800-220-1377 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 151 Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 815 35 043 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 671 16882 Suivi clientèle 671 17575 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard Fax 671 16865 Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : support.ap.dell.com/contactus Support technique général 0800 441 567 Panama E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 011-800-507-1264 Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif de la ville : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 020 674 45 94 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 020 674 45 00 Fax du support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 020 674 42 00 Suivi clientèle 020 674 4325 Ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Fax des ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 47 75 Fax des relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Fax du standard 020 674 47 50 Pays du Pacifique et du Sud-est Asiatique Support technique, service clientèle et ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Pérou E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 0800-50-669 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts152 Contacter Dell Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : pl_support_tech@dell.com Service clientèle (téléphone) 57 95 700 Service clientèle 57 95 999 Ventes 57 95 999 Service clientèle (Fax) 57 95 806 Réception (Fax) 57 95 998 Standard 57 95 999 Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 707200149 Service clientèle 800 300 413 Ventes 800 300 410 ou 800 300 411 ou 800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 Porto Rico E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-877-537-3355 République Dominicaine Site Web : www.dell.com/do E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-156-1588 République Tchèque (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 22537 2727 Service clientèle 22537 2707 Fax 22537 2714 Télécopieur pour support technique 22537 2728 Standard 22537 2711 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 153 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif de la ville : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Site Web du Service clientèle : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/form/home.asp Ventes Ventes aux grand public et PME 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux grandes entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Service clientèle Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clientèle pour les comptes privilégiés (500–5000 employés) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle Comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clientèle Gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clientèle Administration locale et Enseignement 01344 373 199 Service clientèle (Santé) 01344 373 194 Support technique Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs XPS 0870 366 4180 Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de 1000 employés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique pour tous les autres produits 0870 353 0800 Généralités Fax pour le grand public et les PME 0870 907 4006 Salvador Site Web : www.dell.com/ec E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 800-6132 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts154 Contacter Dell Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international : 005 Indicatif national : 65 REMARQUE : Les numéros de téléphone mentionnés ici doivent être utilisés depuis Singapour ou la Malaisie uniquement. Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (Dimension, Inspiron et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 1 800 394 7430 Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) numéro vert : 1 800 394 7488 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1 800 394 7478 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1 800 394 7430 (option 6) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 394 7412 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 394 7419 Slovaquie (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 421 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02 5441 5727 Service clientèle 420 22537 2707 Fax 02 5441 8328 Fax du Support technique 02 5441 8328 Standard (Ventes) 02 5441 7585 St- Kitts-et-Nevis Site Web : www.dell.com/kn E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 St- Lucie Site Web : www.dell.com/lc E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-882-1521 St- Vincent-et-les Grenadines Site Web : www.dell.com/vc E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4740 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 155 Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif de la ville : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique pour XPS 0771 340 340 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 08 590 05 199 Suivi clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 020 140 14 44 Fax du support technique 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Support technique pour XPS 0848 33 88 57 Support technique (grand public et PME) pour tous les autres produits Dell 0844 811 411 Support technique (entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) 0848 802 202 Service clientèle (entreprises) 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01 Taïwan Indicatif international : 002 Indicatif national : 886 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron, Dimension et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 00801 60 1256 Service clientèle numéro vert : 00801 60 1250 (option 5) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 00801 65 1228 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 00801 651 227 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts156 Contacter Dell Thaïlande Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 66 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) numéro vert : 1800 0060 07 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 0600 09 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1800 006 007 (option 7) Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1800 006 009 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1800 006 006 Trinité/Tobago Site Web : www.dell.com/tt E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Site Web : www.dell.com/uy E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général numéro vert : 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Site Web : www.dell.com/ve E-mail : la-techsupport@dell.com Support technique général 0800-100-4752 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsCaractéristiques 157 Caractéristiques Processeur Type de processeur Processeur Intel® Core™ Solo ou processeur Intel® Core™ Duo Mémoire cache L1 I-cache de 32 Ko x2 D-cache de 32 Ko x2 Mémoire cache L2 2 Mo Fréquence du bus externe (bus frontal) 533 MHz et 667 MHz Informations sur le système Jeu de puces du système Mobile Intel 945 GM Express Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM Bus bicanal (2) 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresses du processeur 32 bits Flash EPROM 1 Mo Bus graphique Interne Bus PCI 32 bits Carte ExpressCard REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard est conçu uniquement pour les cartes ExpressCard. Il ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. Contrôleur de la carte ExpressCard Intel ICH7M Connecteur de la carte ExpressCard Un logement ExpressCard (54 mm) Cartes prises en charge Carte ExpressCard/34 (34 mm) et carte ExpressCard/54 (54 mm) 1,5 et 3,3 V Taille du connecteur de la carte ExpressCard 28 broches158 Caractéristiques Lecteur de carte multimédia 5 en 1 Contrôleur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Ricoh R5C832 Connecteur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Connecteur de la carte combinée 5 en 1 Cartes prises en charge MS MS Pro SD/SDIO MMC xD CF type I/II et IBM® Microdrive via une carte ExpressCard Taille du connecteur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 36,8 x 29,3 x 4,75 mm Mémoire Connecteur du module de mémoire Deux connecteurs SODIMM Capacités du module de mémoire 256 Mo, 512 Mo, 1 Go et 2 Go Type de mémoire DDR2 SODIMM 1,8 V Mémoire minimale 256 Mo Mémoire maximale 2 Go Ports et connecteurs Audio Connecteur de microphone, connecteur de casque/haut-parleurs stéréo IEEE 1394a Connecteur série à 4 broches Carte Mini Un emplacement de carte Mini type IIIA Modem Port RJ-11 Carte réseau Port RJ-45 Connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo Connecteur mini-DIN à 7 broches (adaptateur S-vidéo/composite) USB Quatre connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme USB 2.0 Vidéo Connecteur à 15 trousCaractéristiques 159 Communications Modem : Type v.92 56K MDC Contrôleur Softmodem Interface Bus HDA interne Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100 sur la carte système Sans fil Prise en charge des cartes Mini internes Wi-Fi et de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® Vidéo Type de vidéo : Carte intégrée Contrôleur vidéo Intel® GMA950 Mémoire vidéo Jusqu'à 224 Mo partagés si la mémoire totale de l'ordinateur est de 512 Mo minimum, jusqu'à 128 Mo partagés si la mémoire totale de l'ordinateur est de 256 Mo Interface LCD LVDS Prise en charge TV NTSC/PAL Audio Type d'audio Bus HDA (High Definition Audio) Contrôleur audio Sigmatel STAC9200 Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interfaces : Interne Bus HDA Externe Connecteur de microphone (entrée), connecteur de casque/de haut-parleurs stéréo Haut-parleur Deux haut-parleurs 4 ohms Amplificateur de haut-parleur interne Canal de 1 W en 4 ohms Contrôle du volume Raccourcis clavier, menus de programme, boutons de commande multimédia160 Caractéristiques Écran Type (matrice active TFT) 14,1 pouces WXGA et 14,1 pouces WXGA+ Dimensions : Hauteur 206 mm (8,11 pouces) Largeur 320 mm (12,59 pouces) Diagonale 357,74 mm (14,1 pouces) Résolutions maximales : WXGA WXGA+ 1280 sur 800 avec 262 144 couleurs 1440 sur 900 avec 262 144 couleurs Taux de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angle de fonctionnement 0° (fermé) à 180 ° Angles de visualisation : Horizontal ±40 ° (WXGA) en général Vertical +15°/–30 ° (WXGA) Taille du pixel : WXGA WXGA+ 0,237 mm 0,211 mm Boutons de réglage Possibilité de réglage de la luminosité à l'aide de raccourcis clavier Clavier Nombre de touches 87 (États-Unis et Canada) ; 88 (Europe) ; 91 (Japon) Disposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tablette tactile Résolution X/Y (mode Tablette graphique) 240 cpi Taille : Largeur Zone sensible de 73 mm (2,9 pouces) Hauteur Rectangle de 42,9 mm (1,7 pouce)Caractéristiques 161 Batterie Type lithium ion « intelligente » 6 cellules lithium ion « intelligente » 9 cellules Dimensions : Profondeur 49 mm (1,93 pouce) (6 cellules) 60,1 mm (2,37 pouces) (9 cellules) Hauteur 24 mm (0,94 pouce) Largeur 206,8 mm (8,14 pouces) Poids 0,32 kg (0,7 livres) (6 cellules) 0,48 kg (1,06 livres) (9 cellules) Tension 11,1 VCC Durée approximative de la charge : Ordinateur éteint 2 heures (6 cellules) 3 heures (9 cellules) Durée de fonctionnement L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l'utilisation et peut être considérablement réduite en cas d'utilisation intensive. Reportez-vous à la section « Problèmes d'alimentation » à la page 97. Pour plus d'informations sur la durée de vie de la batterie, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37. Durée de service approximative 500 cycles de décharge/charge Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 ° à 35 °C (32 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Pile bouton CR-2032162 Caractéristiques Adaptateur secteur Tension d'entrée 90 à 264 VCA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,5 A Fréquence d'entrée 47 à 63 Hz Courant de sortie 4,34 A (maximum à impulsion 4 secondes) ; 3,34 A (continu) Alimentation de sortie 65 W Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 +/–1,0 VCC Dimensions : Hauteur 28,2 mm (1,11 pouce) Largeur 57,9 mm (2,28 pouces) Profondeur 137,2 mm (5,4 pouces) Poids (avec les câbles) 0,4 kg (0,9 livre) Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 ° à 35 °C (32 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 38,6 mm (1,52 pouce) Largeur 330 mm (12,99 pouces) Profondeur 243 mm (9,56 pouces) Poids (avec batterie 6 cellules, lecteur combiné CD-RW/DVD et disque dur de 40 Go) : Configurable jusqu'à moins de 2,5 kg (5,5 livres)Caractéristiques 163 Environnement de fonctionnement Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 ° à 35 °C (32 ° à 95 °F) Stockage –40 ° à 65 °C (–40 ° à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) : Fonctionnement 10 à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration maximale (avec un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement utilisateur) : Fonctionnement 0,66 GRMS Stockage 1,3 GRMS Chocs maximaux (mesurés avec le disque dur en état de marche et une demi-impulsion sinusoïdale de 2 ms en fonctionnement. Également mesurés avec le disque dur en position de repos et une demi-impulsion de 2 ms en stockage) : Fonctionnement 142 G Stockage 163 G Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds)164 CaractéristiquesAnnexe 165 Annexe Utilisation du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Il se peut que votre système d'exploitation configure automatiquement la plupart des options disponibles dans le programme de configuration ; les options que vous avez configurées à l'aide de ce programme sont alors ignorées. Seule exception, l'option External Hot Key (Touche rapide externe), que vous pouvez désactiver ou activer via le programme de configuration du système uniquement. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des fonctions de votre système d'exploitation, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la page 14. Les écrans de configuration du système affichent les informations sur la configuration courante et les paramètres de votre ordinateur, par exemple : • Configuration du système • Paramètres de configuration de base des périphériques • Paramètres de sécurité du système et mot de passe de disque dur • Paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation • Paramètres de configuration d'amorçage (démarrage) et d'affichage • Paramètres de la station d'accueil • Paramètres de contrôle sans fil AVIS : Ne modifiez les paramètres du programme de configuration du système que si vous êtes un utilisateur expérimenté en informatique ou si vous êtes assisté par un représentant du support technique de Dell. Certaines modifications risquent de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Affichage de l'écran de configuration du système 1 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. Programme de configuration du système L'écran de configuration du système se compose de trois fenêtres d'information. La fenêtre de gauche contient une hiérarchie développable des catégories de contrôle. Si vous sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) une catégorie (comme Système, Périphériques intégrés ou Vidéo) et que vous appuyez sur , vous pouvez afficher ou masquer les sous-catégories connexes. La fenêtre de droite contient des informations sur la catégorie ou sous-catégorie sélectionnée dans la fenêtre de gauche. 166 Annexe La fenêtre du bas vous indique comment contrôler les fonctions des touches du programme de configuration du système. Utilisez ces touches pour sélectionner une catégorie, modifier les paramètres, ou quitter le programme de configuration du système. Options fréquemment utilisées Certaines options nécessitent le redémarrage de l'ordinateur pour que les nouveaux paramètres entrent en vigueur. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage La séquence d'amorçage, ou ordre de démarrage, indique à l'ordinateur où chercher pour trouver le logiciel requis pour démarrer le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez contrôler la séquence d'amorçage et activer/désactiver les périphériques à l'aide de la page Ordre d'amorçage du programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour modifier la séquence d'amorçage sur une base ponctuelle, reportez-vous à la section « Exécution d'un amorçage ponctuel » à la page 167. Cette page affiche la liste générale des périphériques amorçables pouvant être installés sur l'ordinateur, notamment les suivants : • Lecteur de disquette • Unité de disque dur interne • Périphérique de stockage USB • Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW • Disque dur de la baie modulaire REMARQUE : Seuls sont amorçables les périphériques précédés d'un numéro. Pendant la procédure d'amorçage, l'ordinateur commence par le début de la liste, puis analyse chacun des périphériques activés à la recherche des fichiers de démarrage du système d'exploitation. Lorsque les fichiers ont été trouvés, l'ordinateur arrête la recherche et fait démarrer le système d'exploitation. Pour définir les périphériques d'amorçage, sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) un périphérique en appuyant sur les touches fléchées haut ou bas, puis activez ou désactivez le périphérique ou modifiez son ordre dans la liste. • Pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur la barre d'espacement. Les éléments activés sont précédés d'un numéro ; ceux qui ne le sont pas ne sont pas précédés d'un numéro. • Pour modifier l'ordre d'un périphérique dans la liste, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur (h) ou (b) pour déplacer le périphérique vers le haut ou le bas. Les modifications que vous apportez à la séquence d'amorçage sont prises en compte dès que vous les enregistrez et que vous quittez le programme de configuration du système.Annexe 167 Exécution d'un amorçage ponctuel Vous pouvez définir une séquence d'amorçage ponctuelle sans devoir passer par le programme de configuration du système. (Vous pouvez également utiliser cette procédure pour initialiser Dell Diagnostics sur la partition de l'utilitaire de diagnostics de votre disque dur.) 1 Arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer. 2 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 4 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage apparaît, sélectionnez celui que vous voulez utiliser pour l'amorçage, puis appuyez sur . L'ordinateur démarre à partir du périphérique sélectionné. Au prochain redémarrage de l'ordinateur, l'ordre d'amorçage précédent sera restauré. Nettoyage de votre ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Ordinateur, clavier et écran PRÉCAUTION : Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Retirez toute batterie installée. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un chiffon doux humecté d'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. • Utilisez une bouteille d'air comprimé pour retirer la poussière entre les touches du clavier, ainsi que les dépôts de poussière sur l'écran. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur ou l'écran, ne vaporisez pas de liquide de nettoyage directement sur l'écran. Utilisez uniquement les produits conçus particulièrement pour le nettoyage d'écrans et suivez les instructions fournies avec le produit. • Utilisez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, humecté d'eau ou un nettoyant d'écran. N'utilisez pas d'alcool ni de nettoyant à base d'ammoniac. Essuyez l'écran doucement du centre vers les bords jusqu'à ce qu'il soit propre et exempt de traces de doigt. Veillez à ne pas trop appuyer sur l'écran. • Humectez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, d'eau et essuyez l'ordinateur et le clavier. Veillez à ne pas laisser l'eau du chiffon s'infiltrer entre la tablette tactile et le repose-mains qui l'entoure. Tablette tactile 1 Arrêtez l'ordinateur et mettez-le hors tension. Reportez-vous à la section « Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur » à la page 111. 2 Débranchez les périphériques de l'ordinateur et des prises secteur.168 Annexe 3 Retirez toute batterie installée. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'une batterie » à la page 37. 4 Humectez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, d'eau et passez-le doucement sur la surface de la tablette tactile. Veillez à ne pas laisser l'eau du chiffon s'infiltrer entre la tablette tactile et le repose-mains qui l'entoure. Lecteur de disquette AVIS : N'essayez pas de nettoyer les têtes de lecture avec une tige de nettoyage. Vous risqueriez de déranger accidentellement l'alignement des têtes et d'empêcher le fonctionnement du lecteur. Nettoyez le lecteur de disquette à l'aide d'une trousse de nettoyage que vous trouverez dans le commerce. Ces trousses comportent des disquettes prétraitées qui permettent d'enlever les dépôts accumulés au cours d'une utilisation normale. CD et DVD AVIS : Utilisez toujours de l'air comprimé pour nettoyer la lentille du lecteur et suivez les instructions fournies avec l'air comprimé. Ne touchez jamais la lentille qui se trouve à l'intérieur du lecteur. Si vous avez des problèmes pendant la lecture de vos CD ou DVD (des sauts pendant la lecture par exemple), nettoyez les disques. 1 Tenez le disque par son bord extérieur. Vous pouvez également toucher le bord intérieur de l'orifice central. AVIS : Pour éviter d'abîmer la surface, n'essuyez pas le disque par mouvement circulaire. 2 Avec un chiffon doux et non pelucheux, nettoyez doucement la partie inférieure du disque (côté sans étiquette) en suivant une ligne droite depuis le centre jusqu'au bord extérieur. Si la poussière ne part pas, utilisez de l'eau ou une solution diluée d'eau et de savon doux. Certains produits vendus dans le commerce nettoient les disques et les protègent contre la poussière, les empreintes et les rayures. Les produits de nettoyage pour CD peuvent également être utilisés sur les DVD sans aucun risque. Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) Le support technique fourni par les techniciens nécessite la coopération et la participation du client dans le processus de dépannage et permet de restaurer le système d'exploitation, les logiciels et les pilotes matériels à leur configuration par défaut telle que livrée par Dell ; il permet en outre de vérifier le fonctionnement approprié de l'ordinateur et de tout le matériel installé par Dell. En plus du support technique par nos techniciens, vous disposez d'une aide en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com. Des options payantes de support technique complémentaire sont également disponibles.Annexe 169 Dell offre un support technique limité pour l'ordinateur et tous les logiciels et périphériques1 installés par Dell. Le support technique pour les logiciels et les périphériques tiers est assuré par le fabricant luimême, y compris le support pour tout logiciel ou périphérique acheté et/ou installé par le biais de Dell Software & Peripherals, Readyware et Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Les services de réparation sont fournis selon les termes et les conditions stipulés par votre garantie limitée et par tout contrat de service de support optionnel acheté avec l'ordinateur. 2 Tous les composants Dell standard inclus dans un projet d'intégration personnalisée en usine (Custom Factory Integration - CFI) sont couverts par la garantie limitée standard de Dell applicable à votre ordinateur. Toutefois, Dell propose un programme de remplacement des pièces pour couvrir tous les composants non standard ou de sociétés tierces intégrés via CFI pendant la durée du contrat de service de l’ordinateur. Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell Les logiciels installés par Dell englobent le système d'exploitation et certains logiciels installés sur l'ordinateur pendant le processus de fabrication (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus et ainsi de suite). L'expression « périphériques installés par Dell » recouvre toute carte d'extension interne, ou baie modulaire de marque Dell ou encore tous les accessoires ExpressCard. Sont inclus également les produits de marque Dell suivants : moniteurs, claviers, souris, haut-parleurs, microphones pour modems à fonction téléphonique, stations d'accueil et réplicateurs de port, produits réseau et le câblage associé. Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers Les logiciels et périphériques tiers incluent tout périphérique, accessoire ou logiciel vendu par Dell mais qui ne porte pas la marque Dell (imprimantes, scanners et appareils photo, jeux et ainsi de suite). Le support technique pour tout logiciel ou périphérique tiers est fourni par le fabricant du produit en question. Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Classe B de la FCC Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie de fréquence radio et peut, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions du guide du fabricant, être la cause de perturbations des réceptions radio et télévision. Cet équipement a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites des appareils numériques de classe B définies à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Ce périphérique est conforme à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : • Cet appareil ne doit pas émettre d'interférences nuisibles. • Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences qu'il reçoit, y compris celles qui peuvent perturber son fonctionnement. AVIS : Les réglementations de la FCC prévoient que les changements ou modifications non explicitement approuvés par Dell Inc. peuvent annuler vos droits à utiliser cet équipement. 170 Annexe Ces limites ont été conçues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans un milieu résidentiel. Cependant, la possibilité d'interférence d'une installation particulière n'est pas entièrement exclue. Si cet équipement crée effectivement des interférences nuisibles avec la réception radio et télévision, ce qui peut être déterminé en allumant et en éteignant l'équipement, vous êtes encouragé à essayer de corriger les interférences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Repositionner le système en fonction du récepteur. • Éloigner le système du récepteur. • Brancher le système sur une autre prise, pour faire en sorte que le système et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation. Si nécessaire, consultez un représentant de Dell Inc. ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur le ou les appareil(s) couvert(s) dans ce document conformément aux réglementations de la FCC : Caractéristiques Macrovision Ce produit intègre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protégée par des brevets américains et d'autres droits de propriété intellectuelle. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur est soumise à l'autorisation de Macrovision ; elle est destinée exclusivement à une utilisation domestique et à des opérations limitées de visualisation, sauf autorisation particulière de Macrovision. L'ingénierie inverse et le désassemblage sont interdits. Nom du produit : Dell™ Inspiron™ 640M/ E1405 Numéro de modèle : PP19L Nom de la société : Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400Glossaire 171 Glossaire Les termes répertoriés dans ce glossaire ne sont fournis qu'à titre informatif et ne décrivent pas obligatoirement les fonctions incluses avec votre ordinateur particulier. A ACPI — Advanced Configuration and Power Interface — Spécification de gestion de l'alimentation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® de placer l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée afin de conserver l'énergie électrique attribuée à chaque périphérique connecté à l'ordinateur. adressage de mémoire — Processus permettant à l'ordinateur d'attribuer des adresses mémoire à des emplacements physiques au démarrage. Les périphériques et les logiciels peuvent ensuite déterminer les informations auxquelles le microprocesseur peut accéder. adresse E/S — Adresse RAM associée à un périphérique spécifique (un connecteur série, un connecteur parallèle ou une baie d'extension) et qui permet au microprocesseur de communiquer avec ce périphérique. adresse mémoire — Emplacement spécifique où les données sont stockées temporairement dans la mémoire RAM. AGP — Accelerated Graphics Port — Port graphique dédié allouant de la mémoire système à utiliser pour les tâches liées à la vidéo. Le port AGP permet d'obtenir une image vidéo de haute qualité avec des couleurs fidèles grâce à une interface très rapide entre le circuit vidéo et la mémoire de l'ordinateur. ALS — Capteur d'éclairage ambiant. APR — Advanced Port Replicator — Station d'accueil qui permet d'utiliser aisément un moniteur externe, un clavier, une souris ou d'autres périphériques avec l'ordinateur portable. arrêt — Processus consistant à fermer les fenêtres et les programmes, à quitter le système d'exploitation et à éteindre l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez perdre des données si vous éteignez l'ordinateur sans effectuer la procédure d'arrêt. ASF — Alert Standards Format — Standard permettant de définir un mécanisme pour signaler les alertes matérielles et logicielles à une console de gestion. La norme ASF est conçue pour être indépendante des platesformes et des systèmes d'exploitation. autonomie de la batterie — Nombre de minutes ou d'heures durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut alimenter l'ordinateur. B baie modulaire — Logement qui prend en charge des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur optique, une seconde batterie ou un module TravelLite™ de Dell. barre d'état système — La barre d'état système du bureau Windows contient des icônes permettant d'accéder rapidement aux programmes et aux fonctions de l'ordinateur, notamment à l'horloge, au contrôle du volume et à l'état de l'imprimante. Appelée également Zone de notification. batterie — Source d'énergie interne rechargeable qui permet d'alimenter des ordinateurs portables lorsqu'ils ne sont pas raccordés à un adaptateur secteur et une prise secteur. BIOS — Basic Input/Output System — Programme (ou utilitaire) qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun d'eux sur l'ordinateur. Appelé également programme de configuration du système. bit — L'unité de donnée la plus petite pouvant être interprétée par l'ordinateur.172 Glossaire bps — Bits per second (bits par seconde) — Unité standard de mesure de la vitesse de transmission de données. BTU — British Thermal Unit (unité thermique britannique) — Mesure de sortie de chaleur. bus — Passerelle pour les communications entre les composants de votre ordinateur. bus local — Bus de données permettant une transmission rapide des données entre les périphériques et le microprocesseur. C C — Celsius — Système de mesure des températures où 0 ° est le point de congélation et 100 ° le point d'ébullition de l'eau. CA— Courant alternatif — Forme d'électricité qui alimente votre ordinateur lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur secteur sur une prise électrique. capteur infrarouge — Port permettant de transférer des données entre l'ordinateur et des périphériques compatibles infrarouge sans utiliser de connexion câblée. carnet — Document international des douanes qui facilite les importations temporaires dans les pays étrangers. Appelé également passeport de marchandises. carte à puce — Carte qui incorpore un microprocesseur et une puce mémoire. Les cartes à puce permettent d'identifier un utilisateur sur des ordinateurs équipés de telles cartes. carte d'extension — Carte installée dans un logement d'extension sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs et qui permet d'augmenter les capacités de l'ordinateur. Il peut s'agir d'une carte vidéo, modem ou son. carte ExpressCard — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des cartes ExpressCard courantes. Les cartes ExpressCard prennent en charge les standards PCI Express et USB 2.0. carte PC — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des cartes PC courantes. carte PC étendue — Carte PC qui dépasse du logement de carte PC lorsqu'elle est installée. carte réseau — Puce qui offre des fonctions réseau. Un ordinateur peut comprendre une carte réseau sur sa carte système ou il peut contenir une carte PC sur laquelle se trouve un adaptateur intégré. Une carte réseau est aussi appelée NIC (Network Interface Controller [contrôleur d'interface réseau]). carte système — Carte à circuit imprimé principale de votre ordinateur. Appelée également carte mère. CD — Compact Disc — Support de stockage optique, souvent utilisé pour les logiciels et les programmes audio. CD amorçable — CD pouvant être utilisé pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. Le CD Drivers and Utilities ou ResourceCD est un CD amorçable. CD-R — CD Recordable — Version enregistrable d'un CD. Des données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un CD enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. CD-RW — CD ReWritable — Version réinscriptible d'un CD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un CD-RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. COA — Certificate of Authenticity (certificat d'authenticité) — Code alphanumérique Windows inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur. Appelé également Product Key (Clé de produit) ou Product ID (Identification produit). code de service express — Code numérique inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur Dell™. Utilisez le code de service express lorsque vous contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Le code de service express n'est pas nécessairement disponible dans tous les pays. combinaison de touches — Commande nécessitant une pression simultanée sur plusieurs touches. connecteur DIN — Connecteur rond à 6 broches conforme aux normes DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm), généralement utilisé pour connecter des connecteurs de câbles de souris ou de clavier PS/2.Glossaire 173 connecteur parallèle — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter une imprimante parallèle à l'ordinateur. Appelé également port LPT. connecteur série — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter des périphériques comme des organiseurs ou des appareils photo numériques sur votre ordinateur. contrôleur — Puce qui contrôle le transfert de données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques. contrôleur vidéo — Circuits de la carte vidéo ou de la carte système (sur les ordinateurs dotés d'un contrôleur vidéo intégré) qui fournissent, en association avec l'écran ou un moniteur externe, les fonctions vidéo, de votre ordinateur. CRIMM — Continuity Rambus In-line Memory Module — Module ne disposant pas de puces de mémoire, utilisé pour remplir les emplacements RIMM inutilisés. curseur — Marqueur sur l'écran qui indique l'emplacement de la prochaine action du clavier, de la tablette tactile ou de la souris. Il s'agit généralement d'une ligne clignotante, d'un caractère de soulignement ou d'une petite flèche. D disquette — Type de support de stockage électromagnétique. Également appelé disquette floppy ou disque floppy. disquette amorçable — Disquette pouvant être utilisée pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. dissipateur de chaleur — Plaque en métal sur certains microprocesseurs qui permet de dissiper la chaleur. DMA — Direct Memory Access (accès direct à la mémoire) — Canal permettant à certains types de transferts de données entre la mémoire RAM et un périphérique d'éviter de passer par le microprocesseur. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — Consortium de compagnies représentant des fournisseurs de matériel et de logiciel développant des normes de gestion pour les environnements réseau, Internet, de bureau et d'entreprise distribués. domaine — Groupe d'ordinateurs, de programmes et de périphériques sur un réseau administrés en tant qu'unité avec des règles et des procédures communes afin d'être utilisés par un groupe d'utilisateurs donné. Les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au domaine pour avoir accès aux ressources. dossier — Terme utilisé pour décrire l'espace sur une disquette ou un disque dur sur lequel des fichiers sont organisés et regroupés. Les fichiers d'un dossier peuvent être affichés et classés de différentes façons, par exemple par ordre alphabétique, par date ou par taille. DRAM — Dynamic Random Access Memory (mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire) — Mémoire qui stocke des informations dans les circuits intégrés contenant des condensateurs. DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — Technologie offrant une connexion Internet constante et à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique analogique. durée de vie d'une batterie — Nombre d'années durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut être rechargée. DVD — digital versatile disc (disque polyvalent numérique) — Disque à grande capacité généralement utilisé pour stocker des films. Les lecteurs de DVD lisent également la plupart des CD. DVD-R — DVD recordable (DVD enregistrable) — Version enregistrable d'un DVD. Des données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un DVD enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. DVD+RW — DVD réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un DVD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un DVD+RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. (La technologie DVD+RW diffère de la technologie DVD-RW.) DVI — digital video interface (interface vidéo numérique) — Norme de transmission numérique entre un ordinateur et un écran vidéo numérique.174 Glossaire E ECC — Error Checking and Correction (code de vérification et de correction d'erreur) — Type de mémoire qui inclut des circuits spéciaux pour tester l'exactitude des données lorsqu'elles passent par la mémoire. ECP — Extended Capabilities Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. Similaire à EPP, le port ECP utilise l'accès direct à la mémoire pour transférer des données et améliore généralement les performances. éditeur de texte — Programme utilisé pour créer et modifier les fichiers contenant uniquement du texte ; par exemple, le Bloc-notes de Windows utilise un éditeur de texte. En général, les éditeurs de texte n'offrent pas les fonctions de renvoi à la ligne automatique ou de mise en forme (option permettant de souligner, de changer les polices, etc.). EIDE — Enhanced Integrated Device Electronics (électronique de périphérique intégré améliorée) — Version améliorée de l'interface IDE pour les disques durs et les lecteurs de CD. EMI — Electromagnetic Interference (interférence électromagnétique) — Interférences électriques causées par radiation électromagnétique. emplacement d'extension — Connecteur de la carte système (sur certains ordinateurs) dans lequel vous insérez une carte d'extension pour la connecter au bus système. ENERGY STAR® — Exigences de l'agence EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) permettant de diminuer la consommation globale d'électricité. EPP — Enhanced Parallel Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. E/S — Entrée/Sortie — Opération ou périphérique entrant et extrayant des données de votre ordinateur. Les claviers et les imprimantes sont des périphériques d'E/S. ESD — ElectroStatic Discharge (décharge électrostatique) — Brève décharge d'électricité statique. Ce type de décharge peut endommager les circuits intégrés du matériel informatique et de communication. F Fahrenheit — Système de mesure des températures où 32 ° correspond au point de congélation et 212 ° au point d'ébullition de l'eau. FCC — Federal Communications Commission (Commission fédérale des communications, aux ÉtatsUnis) — Bureau américain responsable de l'application de réglementations relatives aux communications qui évalue la quantité de radiations pouvant être émise par les ordinateurs et autres équipements électroniques. fichier d'aide — Fichier qui contient des descriptions ou des instructions relatives à un produit. Certains fichiers d'aide sont associés à un programme particulier, par exemple Aide de Microsoft Word. D'autres fichiers d'aide fonctionnent comme sources de référence autonomes. Les fichiers d'aide portent généralement l'extension .hlp ou .chm. fichier « Lisez-moi » — Fichier texte livré avec un logiciel ou du matériel. En général, les fichiers « Lisez-moi » fournissent des informations sur l'installation et décrivent les améliorations ou corrections apportées au produit qui n'ont pas encore été documentées. formatage — Processus qui prépare un disque pour le stockage des fichiers. Lorsqu'un lecteur ou disque est formaté, les informations existantes sur ce lecteur ou disque sont perdues. FSB — Front Side Bus (bus frontal) — Canal de données et interface physique entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire RAM. FTP — File Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de fichiers) — Protocole Internet standard utilisé pour échanger des fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet. G G — Gravité — Mesure de poids et de force. GHz — Gigahertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à un milliard de Hz ou à mille MHz. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces des ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en GHz.Glossaire 175 Go — Giga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1024 Mo (1 073 741 824 octets). Ce terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'il fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur. GUI — Graphical User Interface (interface graphique utilisateur) — Logiciel interagissant avec l'utilisateur à l'aide de menus, de fenêtres et d'icônes. La plupart des programmes fonctionnant avec les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows ont des interfaces graphiques utilisateur. H unité de disque dur — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire des données sur un disque dur. Les termes lecteur de disque dur et disque dur sont souvent utilisés indifféremment. mode Mise en veille prolongée — Mode de gestion de l'alimentation électrique qui enregistre le contenu de la mémoire dans un espace réservé du disque dur, puis arrête l'ordinateur. Quand vous redémarrez l'ordinateur, les informations de la mémoire qui ont été enregistrées sur le disque dur sont automatiquement restaurées. HTML — Hypertext Markup Language — Ensemble de codes insérés dans une page Web afin de s'afficher dans un navigateur Internet. HTTP — Hypertext Transfer Protocol — Protocole d'échange de fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet. Hz — Hertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1 cycle par seconde. La vitesse de fonctionnement des ordinateurs et des périphériques électroniques est souvent mesurée en kilohertz (kHz), mégahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz) ou térahertz (THz). I IC — circuit intégré — Semi-conducteur ou puce sur lesquels sont fabriqués des milliers ou des millions de minuscules composants électroniques destinés aux équipements informatiques, audio et vidéo. IDE — Integrated Drive Electronics (électronique d'unité intégrée) — Interface pour les périphériques de stockage en masse dans laquelle le contrôleur est intégré à l'unité de disque dur ou au lecteur de CD. IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — Bus série à hautes performances utilisé pour connecter des périphériques compatibles IEEE 1394 tels que les appareils numériques et les lecteurs DVD à l'ordinateur. intégré — Fait généralement référence aux composants physiquement situés sur la carte système de l'ordinateur. Synonyme d'incorporé. IrDA — Infrared Data Association — Organisme en charge de la création de normes internationales pour les communications infrarouge. IRQ — Interrupt Request (requête d'interruption) — Passerelle électronique associée à un périphérique spécifique et qui permet à ce dernier de communiquer avec le microprocesseur. Une IRQ doit être attribuée à chaque périphérique. Bien que deux périphériques puissent partager la même affectation d'IRQ, ils ne peuvent pas fonctionner simultanément. ISP — Internet service provider (fournisseur d'accès Internet) — Société qui vous permet d'accéder à son serveur hôte afin de vous connecter directement à Internet, d'envoyer et de recevoir des messages électroniques et d'accéder à des sites Web. Le fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) vous attribue un progiciel, un nom d'utilisateur et des numéros de téléphone d'accès contre un paiement. K Kb — Kilobit — Unité de données égale à 1024 bits. Mesure de la capacité des circuits intégrés de mémoire. kHz — Kilohertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1000 Hz. Ko — Kilo-octet — Unité de données égale à 1024 octets mais souvent considérée comme étant égale à 1000 octets. L LAN — Local Area Network (réseau local) — Réseau informatique couvrant une petite zone. Un réseau local est généralement limité à un seul bâtiment ou à plusieurs bâtiments avoisinants. Un LAN peut être connecté à un autre réseau local sur n'importe quelle distance par des lignes téléphoniques et des ondes radioélectriques pour constituer un réseau étendu (WAN, Wide Area Network).176 Glossaire LCD — Liquid Crystal Display (affichage à cristaux liquides) — Technologie utilisée pour les écrans plats et ceux des ordinateurs portables. lecteur de CD — Lecteur utilisant la technologie optique pour lire des données sur des CD. lecteur de CD (CD player) — Logiciel utilisé pour lire les CD musicaux. Le lecteur de CD affiche une fenêtre comprenant des boutons qui permettent de lire un CD. lecteur de CD-RW — Lecteur qui peut lire les CD et écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de CD-RW/DVD — Lecteur, parfois appelé lecteur combiné, permettant de lire des CD et des DVD, ainsi que d'écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de disquette — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire sur des disquettes. lecteur de DVD — Lecteur utilisant la technologie optique pour lire des données sur les DVD et CD. lecteur de DVD (DVD player) — Logiciel permettant de visionner des films DVD. Le lecteur de DVD affiche une fenêtre comprenant des boutons qui permettent de visionner un film. lecteur de DVD+RW — Lecteur permettant de lire les DVD et la plupart des supports CD et d'écrire sur des disques DVD+RW (DVD réinscriptibles). lecteur optique — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire ou écrire des données sur des CD, des DVD ou des DVD+RW. Les lecteurs de CD, de DVD, de CD-RW et les lecteurs combinés de CD-RW/DVD sont des exemples de lecteurs optiques. lecteur Zip — Lecteur de disquette à grande capacité développé par Iomega Corporation qui utilise des disquettes amovibles de 3,5 pouces appelées disquettes Zip. Les disquettes Zip sont légèrement plus grandes que les disquettes normales, à peu près deux fois plus épaisses et peuvent contenir jusqu'à 100 Mo de données. lecture seule — Données et/ou fichiers que vous pouvez afficher, mais pas modifier ou supprimer. Un fichier peut être en lecture seule si : • Il se trouve sur une disquette physiquement protégée en écriture, un CD ou un DVD. • Il est situé sur un réseau dans un répertoire sur lequel l'administrateur système n'a affecté des droits qu'à certains individus. LED — Light-Emitting Diode (diode électroluminescente) — Composant électronique émettant de la lumière pour indiquer l'état de l'ordinateur. logiciel — Tout élément pouvant être stocké sous forme électronique, comme des programmes ou des fichiers informatiques. logiciel antivirus — Programme spécialement conçu pour identifier, isoler et/ou supprimer des virus de votre ordinateur. LPT — Line Print Terminal — Désignation d'une connexion parallèle à une imprimante ou à un autre périphérique parallèle. M Mb — Mégabit — Mesure de la capacité de la puce de mémoire égale à 1024 Ko. Mb/s — Mégabits par seconde — 1 million de bits par seconde. Cette mesure est en règle générale utilisée pour les vitesses de transmission des réseaux et des modems. mémoire — Zone de stockage de données temporaire dans l'ordinateur. Dans la mesure où les données en mémoire ne sont pas permanentes, il vous est recommandé d'enregistrer fréquemment vos fichiers lorsque vous travaillez ainsi qu'avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. Un ordinateur peut avoir plusieurs formes de mémoire : la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM et la mémoire vidéo. Le terme mémoire est souvent synonyme de mémoire RAM. mémoire cache — Mécanisme de stockage à grande vitesse spécifique. Il peut s'agir d'une section réservée de la mémoire principale ou d'un périphérique de stockage rapide indépendant. La mémoire cache permet d'améliorer l'efficacité de nombreuses opérations du microprocesseur. mémoire cache L1 — Mémoire cache principale se Glossaire 177 trouvant dans le microprocesseur. mémoire cache L2 — Mémoire cache secondaire pouvant être externe au microprocesseur ou intégrée à l'architecture de celui-ci. mémoire vidéo — Mémoire composée de puces mémoire dédiées aux fonctions vidéo. La mémoire vidéo est en général plus rapide que la mémoire système. La quantité de mémoire vidéo installée a principalement des effets sur le nombre de couleurs qu'un programme peut afficher. MHz — Mégahertz — Mesure de fréquence égale à 1 million de cycles par seconde. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces d'ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en MHz. microprocesseur — Puce d'ordinateur qui interprète et exécute les instructions des programmes. Le microprocesseur est parfois appelé processeur ou unité centrale (UC). Mo — Méga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1 048 576 octets. 1 Mo est égal à 1024 Ko. Lorsque l'on fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur, le terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 octets. mode de bureau étendu — Paramètre d'affichage permettant d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode Double affichage. mode Double affichage — Paramètre d'affichage qui permet d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode de bureau étendu. mode graphique — Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les modes graphiques peuvent afficher un nombre illimité de formes et de polices. mode Veille — Mode d'économie d'énergie qui arrête toutes les opérations inutiles de l'ordinateur pour économiser de l'énergie. mode vidéo — Mode qui décrit la façon dont le texte et les graphiques sont affichés sur un moniteur. Les logiciels à affichage graphique, tels que les systèmes d'exploitation Windows, s'affichent en modes vidéo définis par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les logiciels à base de caractères, comme les éditeurs de texte, s'affichent en modes vidéo qui se définissent par le nombre de colonnes x et par le nombre de rangées y. module de mémoire — Petite carte à circuits imprimés, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte système. module de voyage — Périphérique en plastique conçu pour être inséré dans la baie modulaire de l'ordinateur portable pour réduire le poids de ce dernier. modem — Dispositif permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs par l'intermédiaire de lignes téléphoniques analogiques. Il existe trois types de modems : externe, carte PC et interne. Généralement, vous utilisez un modem pour vous connecter à Internet et échanger des messages électroniques. moniteur — Périphérique haute résolution ayant l'apparence d'un téléviseur et affichant les données et les images créées par l'ordinateur. Mo/s — Méga-octets par seconde — 1 million d'octets par seconde. Cette mesure est souvent utilisée pour les taux de transfert de données. ms — milliseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un millième de seconde. Le temps d'accès des périphériques de stockage est souvent mesuré en ms. N NIC — Voir carte réseau. ns — nanoseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un milliardième de seconde. numéro de service — Étiquette de code-barres apposée sur l'ordinateur permettant d'identifier ce dernier lorsque vous accédez au support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service clientèle ou le support technique de Dell. NVRAM — Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (mémoire rémanente à accès direct) — Type de mémoire qui conserve des données lors de la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur ou en cas de coupure d'alimentation électrique. La mémoire NVRAM permet de conserver les informations de configuration, comme la date, l'heure et d'autres options de configuration du système que vous pouvez définir.178 Glossaire O octet — Unité de stockage de données de base utilisée par votre ordinateur. Un octet équivaut généralement à 8 bits. onduleur — UPS, Uninterruptible Power Supply — Source d'alimentation de secours utilisée lorsque l'alimentation électrique est coupée ou descend à un niveau de tension inacceptable. Un onduleur permet à l'ordinateur de fonctionner pendant un temps limité en cas de panne d'électricité. Les onduleurs sont en général équipés d'un parasurtenseur et peuvent également offrir des régulations de tension. Les petits systèmes UPS proposent une alimentation par batterie de quelques minutes pour vous permettre d'éteindre l'ordinateur correctement. P Panneau de configuration — Utilitaire Windows permettant de modifier les paramètres du système d'exploitation et du matériel : les paramètres d'affichage, par exemple. papier peint — Motif ou image d'arrière-plan du bureau Windows. Vous pouvez changer de papier peint en utilisant le panneau de configuration Windows. Vous pouvez également numériser votre photo préférée et en faire un papier peint. parasurtenseur — Dispositif qui empêche les sautes de tension, pouvant survenir au cours d'orages, par exemple, de pénétrer dans l'ordinateur par l'intermédiaire de la prise secteur. Les parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas de la foudre ou des baisses de tension qui se produisent lorsque la tension descend à plus de 20 pour cent au-dessous du niveau normal de tension de ligne à courant alternatif. Les connexions réseau ne peuvent pas être protégées par les parasurtenseurs. Vous devez toujours déconnecter le câble de réseau du connecteur réseau pendant les orages. partition — Zone de stockage physique sur un disque dur affectée à une ou plusieurs zones de stockage logique appelées unités logiques. Chaque partition peut contenir plusieurs lecteurs logiques. PCI — Peripheral Component Interconnect — Bus local prenant en charge les chemins de données de 32 et 64 octets et fournissant un chemin de données haute vitesse entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques (vidéo, lecteur, réseau). PCI Express — Type d'interface PCI qui accélère le taux de transfert des données entre le processeur et ses périphériques. Avec PCI Express, le taux de transfert des données se situe entre 250 Mo/s et 4 Go/s. Si le jeu de puces PCI Express et le périphérique tournent à des vitesses différentes, ils fonctionnent à la vitesse la plus basse. PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association — Organisme chargé d'établir des normes pour les cartes PC. périphérique — Matériel, tel qu'un lecteur de disque, une imprimante ou un clavier, installé sur votre ordinateur ou connecté à celui-ci. pilote — Logiciel permettant au système d'exploitation de contrôler un périphérique comme une imprimante. La plupart des périphériques ne fonctionnent pas correctement si le pilote approprié n'est pas installé sur l'ordinateur. pilote de périphérique — Voir pilote. PIN — Personal Identification Number — Séquence de nombres et/ou de lettres utilisée pour restreindre les accès non autorisés aux réseaux informatiques ainsi qu'à d'autres systèmes sécurisés. PIO — Programmed Input/Output (Entrée/Sortie programmée) — Méthode de transfert des données entre deux périphériques utilisant le microprocesseur comme partie du chemin de données. pixel — Point unique sur un écran. Les pixels sont disposés en rangs et en colonnes pour créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 800 sur 600, s'exprime en nombre de pixels en largeur sur le nombre de pixels en hauteur. Plug-and-Play — Possibilité pour l'ordinateur de configurer automatiquement les périphériques. La norme Plug-and-Play permet d'installer et de configurer automatiquement un périphérique et assure la compatibilité avec le matériel existant si le BIOS, le système d'exploitation et tous les périphériques sont compatibles Plug-and-Play. POST — Power-On Self-Test (autotest de démarrage) — Programmes de diagnostic, chargés automatiquement par le BIOS, qui effectuent des tests de base sur la plupart des composants de l'ordinateur, comme la mémoire, les unités de disque dur, etc. Si aucun problème n'est détecté au cours de l'autotest de démarrage, l'ordinateur continue son démarrage.Glossaire 179 programme — Logiciel permettant de traiter des données, comme un tableur, un traitement de texte, une base de données ou un jeu. Vous devez disposer d'un système d'exploitation pour exécuter des programmes. programme de configuration — Programme utilisé pour installer et configurer le matériel et le logiciel. Le programme setup.exe ou install.exe est généralement livré avec la plupart des progiciels Windows. Il ne faut pas confondre programme de configuration et programme de configuration du système. programme de configuration du système — Utilitaire qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Le programme de configuration du système vous permet de configurer les options sélectionnables par l'utilisateur dans le BIOS, comme la date et l'heure ou le mot de passe système. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun des paramètres sur l'ordinateur. protection en écriture — Fichiers ou supports ne pouvant pas être modifiés. Utilisez la protection en écriture lorsque vous voulez empêcher la modification ou la destruction des données. Pour protéger contre l'écriture une disquette de 3,5 pouces, faites glisser la languette de protection en écriture en position ouverte. PS/2 — Personal System/2 — Type de connecteur permettant de relier un clavier, une souris ou un pavé numérique compatible PS/2. PXE — Pre-boot execution Environment — Norme WfM (Wired for Management) permettant à des ordinateurs en réseau sans système d'exploitation d'être configurés et démarrés à distance. R raccourci —Icône permettant d'accéder rapidement à un programme, fichier, dossier ou lecteur fréquemment utilisé. En double-cliquant sur un raccourci placé sur votre bureau Windows, vous pouvez ouvrir le dossier ou le fichier correspondant sans avoir à le rechercher au préalable. Les raccourcis ne modifient pas l'emplacement des fichiers. Si vous supprimez un raccourci, le fichier original n'est pas affecté. Vous pouvez également renommer un raccourci. RAID — Ensemble redondant de disques indépendants — Méthode assurant la redondance des données. Parmi les implémentations courantes de RAID : RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 et RAID 50. RAM — Random-Access Memory — Zone principale de stockage temporaire pour les instructions et les données des programmes. Toute information stockée dans la RAM est définitivement perdue lorsque vous éteignez l'ordinateur. résolution — Netteté et clarté d'une image produite par une imprimante ou affichée sur un moniteur. Plus la résolution est élevée, plus l'image est nette. résolution vidéo — Voir résolution. RFI — Radio Frequency Interference (interférence de fréquence radio) — Interférence générée à des fréquences radio caractéristiques, entre 10 kHz et 100 000 MHz. Les fréquences radio se trouvent à l'extrémité inférieure du spectre de fréquences électromagnétiques et sont plus susceptibles de présenter des perturbations que les radiations de plus haute fréquence, telles que les infrarouges et la lumière. ROM — Read-Only Memory (mémoire morte) — Mémoire qui stocke des données et programmes que l'ordinateur ne peut pas supprimer ou dans laquelle il ne peut pas écrire. À la différence de la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM conserve son contenu même après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. Certains programmes essentiels au fonctionnement de l'ordinateur se trouvent dans la mémoire morte. RPM — Revolutions Per Minute (tours par minute) — Mesure le nombre de rotations effectuées par minute. La vitesse des disques durs est souvent mesurée en RPM. RTC — Real Time Clock (horloge temps réel) — Horloge alimentée par pile, située sur la carte système, qui conserve la date et l'heure après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. RTCRST — Real Time Clock Reset — Cavalier sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs pouvant souvent être utilisé pour résoudre les problèmes. S sauvegarde — Copie d'un programme ou d'un fichier de données sur une disquette, un CD ou un disque dur. Il est prudent de sauvegarder régulièrement les fichiers de données de votre disque dur.180 Glossaire ScanDisk — Utilitaire Microsoft qui recherche les erreurs présentes dans les fichiers et les dossiers, ainsi que sur la surface du disque dur. ScanDisk s'exécute souvent lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après un blocage. SDRAM — Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory — Type de mémoire vive dynamique (DRAM) synchronisée avec la vitesse d'horloge optimale du microprocesseur. SDRAM DDR — SDRAM à double débit de données — Type de SDRAM doublant les cycles de données en rafale et améliorant les performances du système. SDRAM DDR2 — SDRAM à double débit de données 2 — Type de SDRAM DDR qui utilise une pré- extraction de 4 bits et d'autres modifications architecturales pour passer la vitesse de la mémoire à plus de 400 MHz. segmentation des données — Technique de répartition des données sur plusieurs lecteurs de disque. La segmentation des données peut accélérer les opérations de récupération des données sur les disques. Les ordinateurs utilisant la segmentation des données permettent généralement à l'utilisateur de sélectionner la taille des unités de données ou la taille des segments. séquence d'amorçage — Précise l'ordre des périphériques à partir desquels l'ordinateur tente de s'amorcer. station d'accueil — Voir APR. SIM — Module d'identité d'abonné. Une carte SIM contient une micropuce qui crypte les transmissions vocales et de données. Les cartes SIM peuvent être utilisées avec des téléphones ou des ordinateurs portables. sortie TV S-vidéo — Connecteur permettant de relier des périphériques audio numériques ou un téléviseur à l'ordinateur. souris — Dispositif de pointage qui contrôle le mouvement du curseur à l'écran. Il suffit de faire glisser la souris sur une surface plane et rigide pour déplacer le pointeur ou le curseur à l'écran. S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — Format de fichier de transfert audio permettant de transférer des données audio entre deux fichiers sans conversion préalable au format analogique, ce qui pourrait dégrader la qualité du fichier. Strike Zone™ — Zone renforcée de la base de la plateforme qui offre une protection au disque dur en servant d'amortisseur en cas de choc résonnant ou de chute de l'ordinateur (allumé ou éteint). SVGA — Super-Video Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo. Les résolutions SVGA types sont de 800 sur 600 et 1024 sur 768. Le nombre de couleurs et la résolution affichés par un programme dépendent des capacités du moniteur, du contrôleur vidéo et de ses pilotes, ainsi que de la quantité de mémoire vidéo installée dans l'ordinateur. SXGA — Super-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur 1024. SXGA+ — Super-extended Graphics Array plus — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1400 sur 1050. T TAPI — Telephony Application Programming Interface — Permet aux programmes Microsoft Windows de fonctionner avec de nombreux périphériques de téléphonie (voix, données, télécopie et vidéo). taux de rafraîchissement — Fréquence, mesurée en Hz, à laquelle les lignes horizontales de l'écran sont rechargées (on parle parfois aussi de fréquence verticale). Plus le taux de rafraîchissement est élevé, moins le scintillement vidéo est perceptible à l'œil nu. Technologie sans fil Bluetooth® — Norme technologique sans fil pour les périphériques de mise en réseau de courte portée (9 m [29 pieds]) permettant aux périphériques activés de se reconnaître automatiquement. U UMA — allocation de mémoire unifiée — Mémoire système allouée de manière dynamique à la mémoire vidéo.Glossaire 181 USB — Universal Serial Bus — Interface matérielle pour les périphériques lents comme un clavier, une souris, une manette de jeu, un scanner, un jeu de haut-parleurs, une imprimante, des périphériques large bande (DSL et modems par câble), des périphériques d'imagerie ou de stockage compatibles USB. Les périphériques sont branchés directement à un support à 4 broches de votre ordinateur, ou à un concentrateur à plusieurs ports qui se raccorde à votre ordinateur. Les périphériques USB peuvent être connectés et déconnectés lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et peuvent également être connectés en guirlande. UTP — Unshielded Twisted Pair (paire torsadée non blindée) — Type de câble utilisé dans la plupart des réseaux téléphoniques et dans certains réseaux informatiques. Les paires de câbles non blindés sont torsadées afin de les protéger contre les interférences électromagnétiques et sont utilisées à la place des câbles comportant une gaine métallique autour de chaque paire de fils. UXGA — Ultra-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1600 sur 1200. V V — Volt — Unité de mesure de la puissance électrique ou de la force électromotrice. Un V est mesuré sur une résistance de 1 ohm lorsqu'elle est traversée par un courant de 1 ampère. virus — Programme conçu pour nuire ou détruire les données stockées sur votre ordinateur. Un virus se déplace d'un ordinateur à un autre par l'intermédiaire d'une disquette infectée, d'un logiciel téléchargé à partir d'Internet ou de pièces jointes à des messages électroniques. Lorsque vous démarrez un programme infecté, le virus intégré démarre lui aussi. Un type courant de virus est le virus d'amorçage, qui est stocké dans les secteurs d'amorçage d'une disquette. Si vous laissez la disquette dans le lecteur lorsque vous éteignez puis rallumez l'ordinateur, celui-ci est infecté lors de la lecture des secteurs d'amorçage de la disquette, à la recherche du système d'exploitation. Si l'ordinateur est infecté, le virus d'amorçage peut se reproduire sur toutes les disquettes lues ou écrites sur cet ordinateur jusqu'à son éradication. vitesse de bus — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle un bus peut transférer des informations. vitesse d'horloge — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle les composants de l'ordinateur connectés au bus système fonctionnent. W W — Watt — Mesure du courant électrique. Un watt est 1 ampère de courant dont le débit est de 1 volt. Wh — Wattheure — Unité de mesure utilisée couramment pour indiquer la capacité approximative d'une batterie. Par exemple, une batterie de 66 Wh peut fournir 66 W de courant pendant 1 heure ou 33 W pendant 2 heures. WLAN — réseau local sans fil. Ensemble d'ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par les ondes aériennes et qui utilisent des points d'accès ou des routeurs pour fournir un accès Internet. WWAN — réseau étendu sans fil. Réseau de données haut débit sans fil utilisant la technologie cellulaire et couvrant une zone géographique plus grande que celle couverte par le WLAN. WXGA — wide-aspect extended graphics array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur 800. X XGA — Extended Graphics Array —Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1024 sur 768.182 Glossaire Z ZIF — Zero Insertion Force — Type de connecteur ou de support permettant l'installation ou le retrait d'une puce sans forcer sur la puce ou le support. Zip — Format courant de compression des données. Les fichiers compressés au format Zip sont appelés fichiers Zip et portent en général l'extension .zip. Un type spécial de fichier zippé/compressé est un fichier à extraction automatique, dont l'extension est .exe. Pour décompresser un fichier à extraction automatique, double-cliquez dessus. zone de notification — Voir barre d'état système.Index 183 Index A Aide QuickSet, 14 alimentation filtres de ligne, 30 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 40 mode Veille, 40 modes de gestion de l'alimentation, 38 parasurtenseurs, 30 périphériques de protection, 30 problèmes, 97 UPS, 30 alimentation sans interruption. Voir UPS Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 26 assistants Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 94 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 26 audio numérique S/PDIF activation, 62 audio. Voir son B baie modulaire permutation des périphériques, 116 vis de fixation de périphérique, 116 barre des tâches icône QuickSet, 133 barres d'outils réglage de la taille, 133 batterie chargement, 41 description, 23 indicateur de charge, 38 jauge, 38 performances, 37 préservation de l'alimentation, 39 retrait, 41 stockage, 42 vérification de la charge, 38 bouton d'éjection du plateau du lecteur optique description, 21 boutons de commande multimédia bouton Dell MediaDirect, 46 description, 17 lecture/pause/Dell MediaDirect, 17 C cache de la charnière retrait, 127 cache du modem description, 24 cache du module de mémoire, 23 caches ExpressCard, 65 retrait, 67, 70 caractéristiques, 157 carnet, 136 carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth installation, 130 voyant d'état de l'appareil, 18 cartes ExpressCard caches, 67 installation, 65 retrait, 67 cartes mémoire multimédia caches, 70 installation, 69 logements, 68 retrait, 70 technologie CardBus, 68 types, 68 casque Dolby, configuration, 62184 Index 184 Index CD lecture, 43 système d'exploitation, 14 CD Drivers and Utilities, 103 CD Operating System, 14 CD ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 Centre d'aide et de support, 14 clavier description, 17 pavé numérique, 33 problèmes, 92 raccourcis, 34 retrait, 129 conflits incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles, 104 conflits de requête d'interruption, 104 connecteur de sortie TV Svidéo description, 20 connecteur IEEE 1394 description, 20 problèmes, 92 connecteur modem description, 21 connecteur réseau description, 22 connecteur vidéo description, 22 connecteurs audio, 20 connecteurs USB description, 21-22 connexion périphérique audio, 50 réseau large bande mobile, 76 téléviseur, 50 WLAN, 72 connexion Internet à propos de, 25 configuration, 25 options, 25 consignes de sécurité, 11 contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 11 D Dell contacter, 137, 170 politique de support, 169 site de support, 13 Dell Diagnostics à propos de, 81, 84 démarrage à partir du disque dur, 81 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, 82 Dell MediaDirect, 17 à propos de, 46 problèmes, 95 dépannage Centre d'aide et de support, 14 conflits, 104 Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 104 problèmes de clavier externe, 92 restauration de l'état de fonctionnement précédent de l'ordinateur, 105 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 104 diagnostics Dell, 81, 84 disque dur description, 24 problèmes, 86 remplacement, 113 retour à Dell, 115 documentation contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 11 en ligne, 13 ergonomie, 11 garantie, 11 guide d'information sur le produit, 11 réglementaire, 11 sécurité, 11 DVD lecture, 43 E écran basculement de l'image vidéo, 31 description, 16 réglage de la luminosité, 31 réglage de la taille des barres d'outils, 133Index 185 réglage de la taille des icônes, 133 résolution, 31 écran. Reportez-vous à moniteur emplacement pour câble de sécurité description, 19 étiquette Microsoft Windows, 12 étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 12 numéro de service, 12 ExpressCard caches, 65 étendue, 65 logements, 65 technologie CardBus, 65 types, 65 F fichier d'aide Centre d'aide et de support de Windows, 14 fixation vis de fixation de périphérique, 116 G gestion de l'alimentation préservation de l'alimentation par batterie, 39 QuickSet, 133 réglage des paramètres, 133 guide d'information sur le produit, 11 H haut-parleur problèmes, 99 volume, 99 haut-parleurs description, 17 I icônes réglage de la taille, 133 imprimante câble, 29 configuration, 28 connexion, 28 problèmes, 98 USB, 29 informations réglementaires, 11 informations relatives à l'ergonomie, 11 informations sur la garantie, 11 L large bande mobile (WWAN) connexions réseau, 76 lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1, 68 lecteur de CD problèmes, 85 lecteur de CD-RW problèmes, 85 lecteur de disquette branchement sur un connecteur USB, 21-22 lecteur de DVD problèmes, 85 lecteur optique description, 21 lecteurs problèmes, 85 Voir disque dur lecture de CD, 43 lecture de DVD, 43 log, 104 logement de carte ExpressCard description, 20 logiciel problèmes, 95 logiciel de suivi protection de votre ordinateur, 80 logiciel espion, 87, 96 logiciels problèmes, 94 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie, 23 loquet de l'écran, 18 luminosité réglage, 31186 Index 186 Index M matériel conflits, 104 Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 mémoire ajout, 118, 120 installation, 117 retrait, 118, 121 messages erreur, 87 messages d'erreur, 87 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 40 mode Veille à propos de, 40 modem installation, 123 moniteur basculement de l'image vidéo, 31 problèmes, 100 mots de passe à propos de, 79 oubli, 80 N nettoyage tablette tactile, 167 numéro de service, 12 O ordinateur blocage, 94 blocages, 94 caractéristiques, 157 faibles performances, 87, 96 ne répond plus, 94 protection, 80 restauration de l'état de fonctionnement précédent, 105 ordinateur perdu, 80 ordinateur volé, 80 P pavé numérique, 33 PC Restore, 107 périphérique audio activation, 62 connexion, 50 pilotes à propos de, 102 identification, 102 réinstallation, 102 problème scanner, 98 problèmes alimentation, 97 blocage de l'ordinateur, 94 blocages, 94 blocages de l'ordinateur, 94 blocages répétés de l'ordinateur, 94 clavier, 92 compatibilité des programmes et de Windows, 94 conditions du voyant d'alimentation, 97 connecteur IEEE 1394, 92 Dell Diagnostics, 81, 84 Dell MediaDirect, 95 disque dur, 86 écran bleu, 94 faibles performances de l'ordinateur, 87, 96 haut-parleurs, 99 imprimante, 98 l'ordinateur ne répond plus, 94 lecteur de CD, 85 lecteur de CD-RW, 85 lecteur de DVD, 85 lecteurs, 85 logiciel, 94-95 logiciel espion, 87, 96 logiciels, 94 messages d'erreur, 87 non démarrage de l'ordinateur, 94 réseau, 96 restauration de l'état précédent du système d'exploitation, 105 support technique, 169 vidéo et moniteur, 100 programme de configuration du système affichage, 165 écrans, 165 options fréquemment utilisées, 166 protection de votre ordinateur, 79Index 187 Q QuickSet, 34, 46, 133 R RAM. Voir mémoire réinstallation Windows XP, 105 réseau problèmes, 96 QuickSet, 133 résolution réglage, 31 Restauration du système, 105 restauration du système, 105 S sans fil marche/arrêt, 133 scanner problèmes, 98 séquence d'amorçage, 166 site Web de support, 13 Site Web Premier Support de Dell, 11 son problèmes, 99 volume, 99 support contacter Dell, 137, 170 politique, 169 support technique politique, 169 système d'exploitation CD, 14 réinstallation, 14 réinstallation de Windows XP, 105 T tablette tactile description, 17 nettoyage, 167 personnalisation, 36 technologie CardBus cartes mémoire multimédia, 68 ExpressCard, 65 téléviseur connexion, 50 transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, 26 U UPS, 30 V ventilateur description, 19, 24 Vérifier disque, 86 vidéo problèmes, 100 vis de fixation de périphérique à propos de, 116 volume réglage, 99 voyager avec l'ordinateur avion, 136 conseils, 136 emballage, 135 étiquette d'identification, 135 voyant d'alimentation conditions, 97 voyants d'état de l'appareil, 16 voyants d'état du clavier description, 18 W Windows XP Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 94 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 26 Centre d'aide et de support, 14 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 104 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 40 mode Veille, 40 réinstallation, 14, 105 Restauration des pilotes de périphériques, 103 Restauration du système, 105 restauration du système, 105 WLAN, 71188 Index 188 Index Dellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W Getting Started With Your System Démarrage avec votre système Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System Начало работы c вашей системой Inicio de su sistema 系统使用 入门指南 系統使用 入門指南 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comDellt Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W Getting Started With Your System Démarrage avec votre système Erste Schritte Mit Ihrem System Начало работы c вашей системой Inicio de su sistema 系统使用 入门指南 系統使用 入門指南 사용자의 시스템 시작하기 はじめに システムについて H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comNotes and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your software. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage incidents. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or injury. DANGER: A DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. DANGER: Observe the following instruction to help prevent an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury: S This UPS contains LETHAL VOLTAGES. All repairs and service should be performed by AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY. There are NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS inside the UPS. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. E 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Phillipsis a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. July 2009System Features | 1 System Features Providing outstanding performance and reliability, the UPS's unique benefits include: S Buck and Boost voltage regulation that ensures regulated voltage to your load by correcting voltage fluctuations. S Start-on-battery capability for powering up the UPS even if utility power is not available. S Extended runtime with an optional External Battery Module (EBM) for 1000–1920W UPS models. S Two standard communication ports (USB and DB-9 serial port). S Optional Dell Network Management Card with enhanced communication capabilities for increased power protection and control. S Network transient protector that guards your network communications equipment from surges. S Advanced power management with the Dell UPS Management Software for graceful shutdowns and power monitoring. S Sequential shutdown and load management through separate receptacle groups called load segments. S Firmware that is easily upgradable without a service call. S Backed by worldwide agency approvals.2 | Finding Information Finding Information CAUTION: The Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document provides important safety and regulatory information. What are You Looking For? Find It Here S The user's guide for my UPS S The user's guide for the Dell Network Management Card S Dell UPS Management Software NOTE:Documentation and software updates can be found at support.dell.com. Dell UPS Disc S Specifications S How to configure UPS settings S How to troubleshoot and solve problems Dell UPS User's Guide The user's guide is available on the Dell UPS disc and on support.dell.com. S Safety instructions S Regulatory information S Recycling information Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information S Warranty information S Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) S End User License Agreement Dell Warranty and Support Information S Support information Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view the appropriate support site.Installation and Startup | 3 Installation and Startup CAUTION: Before performing the procedures in this document, read and follow the safety instructions and important regulatory information in your Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information document. CAUTION: The cabinet is heavy [500W: 11.6 kg (25.6 lb); 1000W: 18.3 kg (40.3 lb); 1920/1500W: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)]. Use caution to unpack and move the cabinet. This section describes the steps to set up your system for the first time. Unpacking the System 1 Unpack your system and identify each item. 2 Discard or recycle the packaging in a responsible manner, or store it for future use.4 | Installation and Startup Identifying the UPS This section shows a front and rear panel of the Dell Tower UPS. Refer to the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide for all rear panel details. Cover Latch Cover Latch LCD Panel Scroll Button (Up or Back) Select Button Scroll Button (Down or Forward) Figure 1. The Dell Tower UPS Communication Port Six 5-15 Receptacles (Load Segment 1) Network Transient Protector USB Port UPS Communication Bay On/Off Button IEC-C14 Input Connector Two 5-15 Receptacles (Load Segment 2) EBM Connector Figure 2. UPS Rear Panel (1000W, 120V Rear Panel)Installation and Startup | 5 Removing the UPS Front Cover 3 Remove the UPS front cover. Push the two cover latches to release the front cover and pull up. Removing the Battery Cover 4 Unscrew the thumbscrew on the the metal battery cover and lift up to remove the cover.6 | Installation and Startup Connecting the Internal Battery Connector 5 Connect the internal battery connector. 6 Replace the metal battery cover. Torque the screw to 0.7 Nm (6.2 lb in). 7 Replace the UPS front cover.Installation and Startup | 7 Connecting the Equipment 9 Connect equipment to UPS Connect communication cable from computer to UPS (optional) 8 8 If you plan to use Dell UPS Management Software, connect your computer to the USB port or RS-232 port using the supplied cable. 9 Plug the equipment to be protected into the UPS output receptacles, but do not turn on the protected equipment. NOTE: Verify that the total equipment ratings do not exceed the UPS capacity to prevent an overload alarm.8 | Installation and Startup Connecting the Power Cord 10 Verify that the power input to the UPS has adequate upstream overcurrent protection: Table 1. Minimum Upstream Circuit Breaker Rating UPS Output Power 120V 208V 230V 500W 15A — 15A 1000W 15A — 15A 1500W (at 100V) 1920W 20A — 15A 11 Plug the UPS power cord into a power outlet. NOTE: For 1920/1500W models. There are two power cords in the box, one with BSMI and PSE certified markings that can be used in Taiwan and Japan, another cord is for regions other than Taiwan and Japan.Installation and Startup | 9 Starting the UPS 12 Press the button on the UPS rear panel. Completing the Startup 13 Verify that the Normal icon appears on the UPS status summary screen, indicating that the UPS is operating normally and any loads are powered. 14 On the UPS status summary screen, press the button to check for active alarms or notices. Resolve any active alarms before continuing. See “Troubleshooting” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide. If there are no active alarms, a “No Active Alarms” message appears. 15 To change other factory-set defaults, see “Operation” in the Dell Line-Interactive Tower UPS 500W, 1000W, and 1920/1500W User's Guide.10 | Installation and StartupOnduleur Tour Dellt 500 W, 1000 W et 1920/1500 W Démarrage avec votre système H900N, J715N, K788N, H914N, J716N, K789N www.dell.com | support.dell.comRemarques et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre logiciel. DANGER : Un DANGER indique une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, provoquera la mort ou une blessure grave. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, pourrait provoquer la mort ou une blessure. ATTENTION : Une ATTENTION indique une situation dangereuse potentielle qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer une blessure mineure ou légère ou des dommages matériels. DANGER : Respectez les instructions suivantes pour aider à empêcher une situation dangereuse imminente qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut provoquer la mort ou des blessures graves : S Cet onduleur contient desTENSIONS MORTELLES. Toutes les réparations et tous les entretiens devront être effectués UNIQUEMENT PAR UN PERSONNEL D’ENTRETIEN AGRÉÉ. Aucune pièce à l’intérieur de cet onduleur NE PEUT ÊTRE ENTRETENUE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. Les informations dans ce document sont soumises à modifications sans préavis. E 2009 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de quelque manière que ce soit sans autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce texte : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques commerciales de Dell Inc. ; Phillips est une marque déposée de Phillips Screw Company. D’autres marques commerciales et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour se référer à des entités revendiquant les marques et les noms ou leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques commerciales et les noms commerciaux ne lui appartenant pas. Julliet 2009Caractéristiques du système | 13 Caractéristiques du système Offrant une fiabilité et des performances remarquables, les avantages uniques de l'onduleur comprennent : S La régulation de tension Buck and Boost qui assure une tension régulée à votre charge en corrigeant les fluctuations de tension. S La capacité de démarrage-sur-batterie pour alimenter l'onduleur même si le courant du secteur n'est pas disponible. S Temps d'exécution prolongé avec un Module de batterie externe (EBM) en option pour les modèles d'onduleur 1000–1920 W. S Deux ports de communication standards (port série DB-9 et USB). S Carte de gestion de réseau Dell optionnelle avec capacités de communication améliorées pour une protection et un contrôle accrus de l'alimentation électrique. S Protecteur de réseau contre les phénomènes transitoires qui protège votre équipement de communication réseau contre les surtensions. S Gestion avancée de l'alimentation électrique avec le Logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell pour des coupures progressives et une surveillance de l'alimentation. S Arrêt séquentiel et gestion de charge par des groupes de prises séparés appelés « segments de charge ». S Micrologiciel qui peut être facilement mis à niveau sans appeler le service technique. S Soutenu par des approbations d'organismes dans le monde entier.14 | Trouver des informations Trouver des informations ATTENTION! Le document Informations sur la sécurité, l'environnement et la réglementation fournit des informations importantes sur la sécurité et la réglementation.

Adresses complètes sur CD ROM,  téléphone, Fax, emails, nom du dirigeant, etc. Exports illimités ! CLIQUEZ ICI